LV 1t 2006 en PDF

Technical Information LV 1 T • 2006
low-voltage
CONTROLS AND DISTRIBUTION
SIRIUS
SENTRON
SIVACON
Related catalogs Contents
Low-Voltage Controls and ·

Systems Controls: Contactors and contactor assem-
Distribution ·
blies, solid-state switching devices Protection equip-
SIRIUS · SENTRON · SIVACON ·
ment Load feeders, motor starters and soft starters ·
Order No. ·
Monitoring and control devices Detecting devices ·
Commanding and signaling devices Transformers · ·
Catalog ·
Power supplies ALPHA FIX terminal blocks Planning ·
E86060-K1002-A101-A5-7600 LV 1 ·
and configuration with SIRIUS SIVACON busway and
Technical Information ·
cubicle systems SENTRON switching and protection
E86060-T1002-A101-A5-7600 LV 1 T devices for power distribution: Air circuit-breakers,
molded case circuit-breakers, switch disconnectors ·
Planning, design and management with SIMARIS ·
BETA modular installation devices
Industrial Communication IK PI Industrial Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 PROFINET · ·

Industrial Communication Industrial Mobile Communicaton PROFIBUS to ·
for Automation and Drives ·
IEC 61158/EN 50170 SIMATIC ET 200 distributed I/Os ·
Order No.: AS-Interface to EN 50295/IEC 61158 Remote operation ·
E86060-K6710-A101-B4-7600 · ·
with SINAUT ST7 Routers ECOFAST system
SIDAC LV 60 ·
Commutating reactors for converters Mains reactors for
Reactors and Filters ·
frequency converters Iron-core output reactors ·
Order No.: ·
Ferrite output reactors Iron-core smoothing reactors ·
E86060-K2803-A101-A3-7600 ·
Smoothing air-core reactors Filter reactors Applica- ·
·
tion-specific reactors Radio interference suppression
· ·
filters dv/dt filters Sinewave filters
SIVACON 8PS LV 70 ·
Busway systems, Overview CD system (25 A to 40 A) ·
Busway systems ·
BD01 system (40 A to 160 A) BD2 system (160 A to
CD, BD01, BD2 to 1250 A 1250 A)
Order No.:
E86060-K1870-A101-A2-7600
Automation & Drives CA 01 All Automation and Drives products,

The A&D Offline Mall including those in the catalogs listed above.
Order No.:
E86060-D4001-A110-C4-7600
A&D Mall All Automation and Drives products,

Internet: including those in the catalogs listed above.
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/mall
Registered trademarks Technical Assistance
All product designations may be registered trademarks Tel.: +49 (0)9 11 8 95 - 59 00

or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying Fax.: +49 (0)9 11 8 95 - 59 07
companies. Third parties using these trademarks or
product names for their own purposes may infringe
upon the rights of the trademark owners. E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
Further information about low-voltage controls is
available on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
1 Introduction
11 Supply
Power supplies
Low-Voltage Controls
and Distribution
SIRIUS · SENTRON ·
SIVACON 2 Systems
12 Connecting with
ALPHA
ALPHA FIX terminal blocks
Technical Information
LV 1 T · 2006
Invalid:
Catalog LV 10 · 2004 3 Controls
Contactors and
13 Engineering
Software
Catalog LV 10 News · 2004, 2005 contactor assemblies Planning and configuration
Catalog LV 30 · 2004 with SIRIUS
The products contained in this

catalog are also included in the
n
Offline Mall CA 01
Order No.:
4 Solid-state switching devices
14 Distributing with
e
E86060-D4001-A110-C4 (CD-ROM) SIVACON
E86060-D4001-A510-C4 (DVD) SIVACON power
n
distribution boards, busway
Contact your local Siemens and cubicle systems
representative for further information
o
© Siemens AG 2006
i
5 Protecting
15 Switching and
t
Protection equipment Protecting with
k
SENTRON
Air circuit-breakers
6 Starting n
u
16
F Molded case circuit-breakers
Load feeders, motor
starters and soft starters
The products and sys-

tems listed in this cata-
log are distributed/
7 Monitoring
and Control 17 Switch disconnectors
manufactured using a Monitoring and

certified quality man- control devices
agement system which
complies with EN ISO
9001 (Certificate Regis-
ter Nos. can be found in
the appendix).
The certificates are
8 Detection
Detecting devices
18 Engineering
Software
recognized in all IQ Net Planning, design and
management
countries.
9 Commanding and
Signaling 19 Protecting with
BETA
Commanding and BETA modular
signaling devices installation devices
s 10 Supply
Transformers
20 Appendix
Siemens LV 1 · 2006 1/1

1 Introduction
Welcome to Automation and Drives
11 Power Supplies
4AV non-stabilized power supplies
TIA - Innovations for more productivity
Supply
TIP - Energy distribution and management from one source
Low-voltage controls and distribution - The basis for progressive
solutions
SIRIUS industrial controls
Low-voltage power distribution
2 Systems
12 ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks
Connecting with ALPHA

AS-Interface
ECOFAST system
Systems
SIRIUS Safety Integrated

PROFIBUS
SIRIUS Modular System
3 Controls -
13 Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
Engineering Software
Contactors and contactor assemblies
3RT, 3TB, 3TF contactors for switching motors
3RA13, 3RA14, 3TD, 3TE contactor assemblies
3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK contactors for special applications
3RH, 3TH contactor relays · 3RT coupling relays
3TX7, 3RS18 coupling relays
LZX plug-in relays · 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors
Switching
4 Controls -
14 SIVACON Power Distribution Boards,
Distributing with SIVACON

Solid-State Switching Devices Busway and Cubicle Systems
3RF20 solid-state relays SIVACON power distribution boards and motor control centers
3RF21 solid-state relays 8PS busbar trunking systems · SICUBE 8MC, 8MF system
3RF23 solid-state contactors cubicles and cubicle air-conditioning · SIKUS series of
3RF29 function modules switchgear cubicles · ALPHA 630-DIN floor-mounted
distribution boards · 8HP molded-plastic distribution systems
Components for 8US, 8UC, 4NC distribution systems
5 Protection Equipment
3RV motor starter protectors
15 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices
for Power Distribution
SIRIUS Industrial Controls
3RB2 solid-state overload relays

Protecting
3WL air circuit-breakers

3RU1 thermal overload relays
Low-Voltage Power Distribution
Switching and Protecting with SENTRON
6 Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters

3RW soft starters
for Power Distribution
3RA fuseless load feeders 3VL, 3VF2 molded case circuit-breakers
Starting
3RA71 load feeders with safety integrated

AS-Interface motor starters and soft starters
3RE encapsulated starters
7 Monitoring and Control Devices

Monitoring and Control
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices for Power Distribution
LOGO! Logic Modules · 3RP, 7PV timing relays 3KA, 3KE, 3LD switch disconnectors
3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements 3KL, 3KM, 3NJ6 switch disconnectors with fuses
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays 3NP, 3NJ4, 3NJ5 fuse switch disconnectors
3RN1 thermistor motor protection
3TK28 safety relays
3RS17 interface converters
8 Detecting Devices
18 Planning, Design and Management
Engineering Software
3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3 position switches Switch ES Power

3SE2 hinge switches SIMATIC power control
Detection
3SE6 magnetically operated switches

Commanding and Signaling
9 Commanding and Signaling Devices

19 BETA Modular Installation Devices
Protecting with BETA
3SB2, 3SB3 pushbuttons and indicator lights

3SB4, 3SF4 LED indicators
3SB3 two-hand operation consoles
3SE7, 3SF2 cable-operated switches
3SE2, 3SE3 foot switches
8WD4 signaling columns
8WD5 integrated signal lamps
10 Transformers
Single-phase transformers
20 Appendix
Glossary · Training · Further documentation ·
Three-phase transformers Standards and approvals · Quality management ·
Supply
Siemens contacts · Online services · Customer support

Software licenses · Subject index · Terms and conditions of
sale and delivery · Export regulations
Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik
Explanations
Useful information on Catalog LV1 · 2006 and Technical information LV1 T · 2006
The Catalog LV 1 · 2006 contains the data needed If required, you will also find the topics "Design", Function", "Integration",
for the selection and ordering of the correct "Configuration", "Programming", "Technical Specifications", "Characteristic
product. These are categorized under the topics Curves", "Schematics" and "Dimensional drawings" in the Technical
"Overview", "Benefits", "Application", "Selection and Information LV 1 T · 2006
Ordering data", "Accessories", "Options" and "More
information".
Dimensions
All dimensions in mm.
4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
1
1
Introduction
1/2 Welcome to
Automation and Drives
1/4 Totally Integrated Automation –

innovations for more produc-
tivity
1/6 Totally Integrated Power –

energy distribution and
management from one source
1/8 Low-Voltage Controls and

Distribution.
The basis for progressive
solutions.
1/10 SIRIUS Industrial Controls
1/14 Low-Voltage Power Distribu-

tion
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
1
1
Welcome to
We would like to welcome you to Automation and Drives
and our comprehensive range of products, systems,
solutions and services for production and
process automation and building technology
worldwide.
With Totally Integrated Automation and Totally
Integrated Power, we deliver solution platforms based
on standards that offer you a considerable savings
potential.
Discover the world of our technology now. If you need
more detailed information, please contact one of your
regional Siemens partners.
They will be glad to assist you.
1/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/3

1
1
Welcome to
We would like to welcome you to Automation and Drives
and our comprehensive range of products, systems,
solutions and services for production and
process automation and building technology
worldwide.
With Totally Integrated Automation and Totally
Integrated Power, we deliver solution platforms based
on standards that offer you a considerable savings
potential.
Discover the world of our technology now. If you need
more detailed information, please contact one of your
regional Siemens partners.
They will be glad to assist you.

Totally Integrated Automation –
1
1
innovations for more productivity
With the launch of Totally Integrated Automation, we were the and production areas to shipping. Thanks to the system-
first ones on the market to consistently implement the trend oriented engineering environment, integrated, open commu-
from equipment to an integrated automation solution, and nications as well as intelligent diagnostics options, your plant
have continuously improved the system ever since. now benefits in every phase of the life cycle.
Whether your industry is process- and production-oriented or In fact, to this day we are the only company worldwide that can
a hybrid, Totally Integrated Automation is a unique "common offer a control system based on an integrated platform for both
solution" platform that covers all the sectors. the production and process industry.
Totally Integrated Automation is an integrated platform for the
entire production line - from receiving to technical processing
ERP
Enterprise
Resource
Planning Ethernet
Production Material Plant Product Specification

MES Order Management Information Management System
Management Management
Manufacturing SIMATIC IT Framework
Execution Ethernet Production Modeler
Systems Production
Operations
Equipment
Management
Detailed
Production
Laboratory Information
Management System
Recording Scheduling
SIMATIC NET SINAUT Telecontrol SIMATIC

Control Industrial System Software
Communication
SIMATIC SIMATIC SINUMERIK SIMOTION

Machine Vision Controller/ Numeric Motion Control SIMATIC HMI
Automation Control System Human Machine
Ethernet
Industrial
System Interface
Industrial SIMATIC SIMATIC PCS 7

Ethernet Industrial Wireless SENTRON
Communication/ Circuit- Distributed Process Control
Safety Integrated
MOBIC Breakers I/O System
PROCESS FIELD
PROFIBUS Process
Instrumen-
PC-based Automation tation and
Analytics
AS-Interface HART
Building Sensor
Technology Technology
IQ-Sense
SIWAREX
Weighing
Micro-Automation SIMOCODE pro Technology
and PROFIBUS PA
GAMMA instabus ECOFAST IP65 Motor Manage-
Actuator-Sensor Distributed ment System Drive Systems/
Interface Level Automation System SIMODRIVE SINAMICS SINAMICS

Totally Integrated Automation –
1
1
innovations for more productivity
With the launch of Totally Integrated Automation, we were the and production areas to shipping. Thanks to the system-
first ones on the market to consistently implement the trend oriented engineering environment, integrated, open commu-
from equipment to an integrated automation solution, and nications as well as intelligent diagnostics options, your plant
have continuously improved the system ever since. now benefits in every phase of the life cycle.
Whether your industry is process- and production-oriented or In fact, to this day we are the only company worldwide that can
a hybrid, Totally Integrated Automation is a unique "common offer a control system based on an integrated platform for both
solution" platform that covers all the sectors. the production and process industry.
Totally Integrated Automation is an integrated platform for the
entire production line - from receiving to technical processing
ERP
Enterprise
Resource
Planning Ethernet
Production Material Plant Product Specification

MES Order Management Information Management System
Management Management
Manufacturing SIMATIC IT Framework
Execution Ethernet Production Modeler
Systems Production
Operations
Equipment
Management
Detailed
Production
Laboratory Information
Management System
Recording Scheduling
SIMATIC NET SINAUT Telecontrol SIMATIC

Control Industrial System Software
Communication
SIMATIC SIMATIC SINUMERIK SIMOTION

Machine Vision Controller/ Numeric Motion Control SIMATIC HMI
Automation Control System Human Machine
Ethernet
Industrial
System Interface
Industrial SIMATIC SIMATIC PCS 7

Ethernet Industrial Wireless SENTRON
Communication/ Circuit- Distributed Process Control
Safety Integrated
MOBIC Breakers I/O System
PROCESS FIELD
PROFIBUS Process
Instrumen-
PC-based Automation tation and
Analytics
AS-Interface HART
Building Sensor
Technology Technology
IQ-Sense
SIWAREX
Weighing
Micro-Automation SIMOCODE pro Technology
and PROFIBUS PA
GAMMA instabus ECOFAST IP65 Motor Manage-
Actuator-Sensor Distributed ment System Drive Systems/
Interface Level Automation System SIMODRIVE SINAMICS SINAMICS

Totally Integrated Power –
1
1
energy distribution and management
from one source
Totally Integrated Power by Siemens offers integrated

solutions for energy distribution in functional and industrial
buildings covering everything from medium-high voltage to
power outlets.
Totally Integrated Power is based on integration in
planning and configuration as well as coordinated products
and systems. In addition, it features communications and
software modules for connecting power distribution systems
to industrial automation and building automation, thereby
offering a substantial savings potential.
Communication HMI Load Graphs Prognoses Main- Message/ Selective Protocols Power Cost center
manage- tenance error protection DATE: quality
ment Substation
manage- EMPLOYEE
COST CENTER
PAY PERIOD BEGINNING
Building
ment
PAY PERIOD ENDING
Distribution
automation
DATE
SUN MON TUE WED THUR FRI SAT SUN TOTAL
IN
OUT
Maintenance
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
task DATE
SUN MON TUE WED THUR FRI
TOTAL HOURS
SAT SUN TOTAL

IN
Process/production
OUT
U IN
I OUT
cos o Hall 1 Air conditioning system OVERTIME
P TOTAL HOURS
W checkup central ON
automation
DATE
OFF
Distribution 3 Replacing circuit IN
OUT
breaker contacts local ON IN
OFF OUT
Infeed II Replacing meters

OVERTIME
tripped TOTAL HOURS
CODES
REGULAR HOLIDAY OTHER
V=VACATION
H=HOLIDAY
S=SICK OVER THE HOURS
SICK VACATION
TIME & ONE-HALF
PROCESS FIELD BUS
instabus EIB
Products and systems
£ 110 kV
Planning and configuration

Totally Integrated Power –
1
1
energy distribution and management
from one source
Totally Integrated Power by Siemens offers integrated

solutions for energy distribution in functional and industrial
buildings covering everything from medium-high voltage to
power outlets.
Totally Integrated Power is based on integration in
planning and configuration as well as coordinated products
and systems. In addition, it features communications and
software modules for connecting power distribution systems
to industrial automation and building automation, thereby
offering a substantial savings potential.
Communication HMI Load Graphs Prognoses Main- Message/ Selective Protocols Power Cost center
manage- tenance error protection DATE: quality
ment Substation
manage- EMPLOYEE
COST CENTER
PAY PERIOD BEGINNING
Building
ment
PAY PERIOD ENDING
Distribution
automation
DATE
IN
OUT
Maintenance
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
task DATE
SUN MON TUE WED THUR FRI
TOTAL HOURS
SAT SUN TOTAL

IN
Process/production
OUT
U IN
I OUT
cos o Hall 1 Air conditioning system OVERTIME
P TOTAL HOURS
W checkup central ON
automation
DATE
OFF
Distribution 3 Replacing circuit IN
OUT
breaker contacts local ON IN
OFF OUT
Infeed II Replacing meters

OVERTIME
tripped TOTAL HOURS
CODES
REGULAR HOLIDAY OTHER
V=VACATION
H=HOLIDAY
S=SICK OVER THE HOURS
SICK VACATION
TIME & ONE-HALF
PROCESS FIELD BUS
instabus EIB
Products and systems
£ 110 kV
Planning and configuration

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution.
1
The basis for progressive solutions.
Extremely high demands are made on modern
low-voltage controls and distribution: users want cost-
effective solutions that are easy to integrate in control
cabinets, distribution boards and distributed systems
and can communicate perfectly with each other.
Siemens has the answer: SIRIUS industrial controls and
low-voltage power distribution with
SIVACON, SENTRON and SIMARIS.
SIRIUS industrial controls
The SIRIUS range has everything you need for swit-

ching, protecting and starting loads. Products for
monitoring, control, detection, commanding,
signaling and power supply round off the spectrum
of industrial controls. Combined with Totally
Integrated Automation, Safety Integrated and
ECOFAST, our product portfolio can be bundled to
create optimized systems. All in all, Siemens
provides innovative controls with modern features,
such as integrated communication and safety
technology that work to your advantage:
The basis for ground-breaking integrated solutions.
SIRIUS modular system

product range
1/8 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

1
Low-voltage power distribution with
SIVACON, SENTRON and SIMARIS
Non-residental buildings and industrial plants have one thing in

common: without electricity, everything comes to a halt. The avai-
lability, safety and cost effectiveness of the power distribution sys-
tem is of utmost importance – from the medium voltage supply
point through to the socket outlet. And only integrated solutions
can ensure maximum efficiency for planning, configuration and
SIVACON distribution boards operation.
The concept is called Totally Integrated Power from Siemens.

Total integration in planning and configuration creates synergies
and saves costs. Perfectly interacting products and systems pro-
vide efficient engineering and reliable operation. In the field of low-
voltage power distribution, the following product ranges are
available:
SIVACON: From flexible busbar trunking systems through to safe

power distribution boards and motor control centers.
SENTRON: From well-proven switch disconnectors through to

intelligent circuit-breakers.
SIMARIS: The software range for the planning, design and

SENTRON switching devices
management of power distribution.
SIMARIS software range
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/9

SIRIUS Industrial Controls.
1
From tried and tested and reliable contactors, over ON or OFF – you decide – 24/7.
easy-to-use relays, through to our innovative solid-
Simple switching with SIRIUS.
state switching devices for the harshest of environ-
ments - SIRIUS ensures safe and reliable
switching.
SIRIUS protection equipment stands for high sys- Everything's in safe hands.
tem availability and effective motor and installation Simple protection with SIRIUS.
protection. SIRIUS overload relays ensure
consistent motor protection, suitable for all
requirements and all budgets. SIRIUS circuit-
breakers offer reliable protection against short-cir-
cuits and overload. Protect all running equipment.
Finally a truly comprehensive and perfectly Everything's up and running.

matched range of switching and protection de-
Simple starting with SIRIUS.
vices from the SIRIUS modular system: from fully
mounted combination and reversing starters
through to soft starters. And for distributed solu-
tions with AS-Interface or PROFIBUS, please refer
to the communication-capable SIRIUS motor
starters.
Whether you’re using our comprehensive Everything's in sight.

SIRIUS monitoring relays, our intelligent and com- Simple monitoring and control
munication-capable motor management system with SIRIUS.
SIMOCODE pro, or our wide range of safety relays

- our easy-to-use devices enable extremely reli-
able monitoring and control of your motors and
installations.
1/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Keeping things simple: with SIRIUS.
1
Whatever your needs, whether position switch- Always on the ball.
es for standard or safety applications, position Motion detection with SIRIUS.
switches with short-stroke switch blocks, posi-
tion switches with separate actuators or tum-
blers, hinge or magnet switches – our
mechanical sensors ensure precise and reliable
detection of all motion in practically any appli-
cation.
In order to have constant control of the dialog Always in the know.

between man and machine, we offer a compre- Commanding and signaling
hensive range of commanding and signaling with SIRIUS.
devices that are easy to install and provide ex-
tremely flexible application: from pushbuttons
and indicator lights, over signal columns,
through to integrated signal lamps.
With a modest footprint and extremely reliable, Always on top of your system’s needs.
SIRIUS transformers and power supplies al- Supplying power with SIRIUS.
ways ensure you have the correct voltage -
even in the case of special demands.
Ultra-fast start-up times, flexible reconfiguration Hassle-free solutions.

during runtime, vivid visualization and clear Engineering with SIRIUS.
menu structures - effective software for SIRIUS
soft starters, for High Feature motor starters
from the ET 200S und ECOFAST ranges and for
the SIMOCODE pro modular motor manage-
ment system, means that parameterization,
startup, diagnostics and preventative mainte-
nance is now easier than ever before.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/11

Systematically simple. SIRIUS and more.
1
The ultimate in modularity for your control The fact that we are continually expanding and
cabinet: the SIRIUS modular system improving our SIRIUS modular systems means
Modular standard components, which are opti- that they are able to provide individual and
mally coordinated, can be combined with ease cost-effective solutions for those everyday
and use the same accessories and maximize problems faced in the field. Key features of all
synergies. All this is provided by our tried and single components are their small footprint and
tested SIRIUS modular system for the simple high flexibility. Configuring, installing, wiring
design and setup of load feeders. Our system and servicing are extremely easy and time-
provides everything you need for the switching, saving to perform. Regardless of whether you
protection and starting of motors and want to design load feeders with motor starter
installations. Available in just seven sizes, for a protectors or overload relays, contactors or soft
performance range up to 250 kW/400 V. starters, the SIRIUS modular system range has
the right product for every application.
The SIRIUS modular system

has everything you need for
the switching, protection and
starting of motors
1/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

1
As part of our uniform safety systems - Safety

Integrated, SIRIUS Safety Integrated covers safety-
oriented controls and distribution in the field of
industrial automation. For performing safety tasks at
cell level - be they failsafe detection, commanding
and signaling, monitoring and evaluating or the
startup and reliable shutdown of installations.
Combined with standard fieldbus systems, such as
AS-Interface and PROFIBUS, SIRIUS Safety
Integrated can even solve networked safety tasks of
SIRIUS Safety Integrated is safety-oriented control considerable complexity.
and distribution - consistent and innovative
ECOFAST
Modern field and power bus technologies open up a

whole new world of options and hitherto unknown
saving potential. ECOFAST (Energy and Communi-
cation Field Installation System) is the distributed
system solution with a standardized connection
method for all components on the basis of distributed
installation, and is equipped throughout for
PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface.
Communication-capable ECOFAST motor starters in IP65/76
AS-Interface
Wherever you need to control distributed actuators and sensors

at field level - from temperature sensors through to motor starters
- AS-Interface has proven to be a truly cost-effective and robust
system. We offer a complete system with all products for
complete solutions. AS-Interface: simple, safe and fast in the
field.
System overview - AS-Interface
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/13

Low-Voltage Power Distribution.
1
Totally Integrated Power stands for superior individual products integrated in a
consistent complete system.
Whatever their function – whether power distribution boards or motor control
centers – SIVACON distribution boards ensure the reliable supply of low-voltage
to electrical loads. Actual distribution is taken care of by the SIVACON busway
systems, which meet all standard demands with regard to performance, load
capacity and resistance. SENTRON switching devices specialize in fuseless and
fused power distribution. Compact and flexible, they can be used in a wide range
of different systems and cover all fields of application and performance ranges -
whether in small subdistribution boards or complex low-voltage systems.
SIVACON distribution boards SENTRON switching devices SIMARIS software range
1/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Everything’s tiptop.
With low-voltage power distribution from Siemens.
1
From flexible SIVACON 8PS busway sys- Quite simply - safe.
tems through to the SIVACON 8PV and 8PT Distributing with SIVACON.
power distribution boards and motor control
centers – SIVACON systems provide the
basis for optimum power distribution and
cover the entire spectrum from 25 A to
6300 A or 7400 A.
Offering a huge range of switch disconnectors and Quite simply - flexible.

using tried and tested technology, a versatile Switching and protecting
range of accessories and the intelligent 3VL and with SENTRON.
3WL circuit-breakers, SENTRON covers the entire
current range from 16 A to 6300 A.
The SIMARIS software range of Totally Quite simply - consistent.

Integrated Power lets you plan your power Planning, design and management
distribution more simply and easily, optimize with SIMARIS software.
operating costs and implement startup more
flexibly.
SIMARIS design is a tool for the fast and
reliable overall planning of power distribution
systems.
The software Switch ES Power supports the
parameter assignment, operation and
diagnostics of SENTRON circuit-breakers over
PROFIBUS DP.
The SIMARIS Manager tool increases the
transparency of power flows, from infeed to
load.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/15

1
Whether in distribution boards or control Ultra-quick assembly.

cabinets – the reliability of our ALPHA FIX Fast connection with
terminal blocks for standard mounting rails ALPHA FIX terminal blocks.
has really been put to the test. They are de-
signed for ultra-fast and safe installation
and have a uniform labeling system.
You can totally rely on the BETA modular in- Geared up for any situation.
stallation device range. It offers a uniquely Protecting with BETA modular
consistent product range of control, switch- installation devices.
ing and circuit-protection devices. Whether
for fuse systems, miniature circuit-breakers,
residual current operated circuit-breakers or
overvoltage protection – everything is com-
plete, compatible and clearly arranged. And
now we have expanded this range even fur-
ther – to include new components with ex-
panded functionality and an even greater
selection of types.
This provides an absolute maximum of flexi-
bility, convenience and safety for building
management and industrial applications.
1/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Systems
2
2
2/2 Introduction PROFIBUS
System Overview
AS-Interface
2/88 Process or field communication
Introduction
2/91 Communication overview
2/7 Transmission technology
2/93 Configuration examples
2/8 Configuration examples
2/94 Technical specifications
2/9 Technical specifications
ASIsafe SIRIUS Modular System
2/10 Introduction 2/95 System overview
2/12 AS-Interface safety monitors
2/14 AS-Interface safety modules
Masters
2/20 CP 243-2
2/21 CP 343-2 P
Routers
2/22 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E
Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
2/23 - Introduction
2/25 - Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/35 - Digital I/O modules, IP68 /
IP69K – K60R
2/39 - Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K45
2/45 - Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
I/O modules for operation in the
control cabinet, IP20
2/48 - Introduction
2/50 - SlimLine
2/60 - F90 modules
2/65 - Flat modules
Special integrated solutions
2/66 - AS-Interface communication
modules
Modules with special functions
2/70 - Counter modules
2/71 - Ground fault detection modules
2/73 - Overvoltage protection modules
2/75 AS-Interface connections for
LOGO!
Power Supply Units
2/76 AS-Interface power supplies,
IP65
2/78 AS-Interface power supplies,
IP20
Transmission Media
2/82 AS-Interface shaped cables
System Components
and Accessories
2/83 Extension plug
2/86 Addressing units
2/87 AS-Interface analyzers
Systems
Introduction
■ Overview
Order No. Page
2
AS-Interface / ASIsafe
ASIsafe enables the integration of safety-oriented components in an AS-Interface
network, for example:
• EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons
• Protective door switches
• Safety light arrays
The simple wiring of AS-Interface, which is a major advantage, is maintained.
AS-Interface safety monitors 3RK1, 3RK2 2/12
• Key element of ASIsafe
• Monitors safe participants and links safe inputs
• Ensures safe disconnection
• Modular construction in according to individual requirements
• Available with one or two release circuits with 2-channel configuration
• New version of "Expanded safety monitor" with expanded RAM and integrated closing
and opening delay and pulse functions
Your advantage: Easy to configure safety functions up to Category 4
AS-Interface safety modules 3RK1 2/14
• Complete portfolio of ASIsafe modules
• Degree of protection IP65/IP67 or IP20
• Two inputs in Category 2 or one input in Category 4
• Two standard outputs are available on the module in addition
K45F
Your advantage: Easy integration of safe signals, be it in the cabinet or in the field
K60F
S22.5F (SlimLine)
Masters
The AS-Interface master creates the connection to higher-level control systems. It
automatically organizes the data traffic on the AS-Interface cable and sees not only to
querying the signals but also to performing the parameter setting, monitoring and
diagnostics functions.
Masters for SIMATIC 6GK7 2/20
• Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves
• Integrated analog value transfer
• Configuring and uploading of AS-Interface configuration in STEP 7 with S7-300
Master
• No configuration required
• Easy operation in the input/output address range
• Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped cable
CP 343-2 P for Your advantage: Easy connection to SIMATIC S7-300, to SIMATIC S7-200 or to
SIMATIC S7-300 SIMATIC ET 200X
CP 243-2 for
SIMATIC S7-200

Systems
Introduction
Order No. Page

AS-Interface / Routers
As an alternative to the CPs, which are plugged directly in the controller it is also
2
possible to use a gateway/link as AS-Interface master – at any position beneath the
PROFIBUS DP.
Routers 6GK1 2/22
• Degree of protection IP20
• PROFIBUS slave and AS-Interface master
• Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves
• No configuration of the CP for AS-Interface required
• Integrated analog value transfer with Link 20E
• Configuring and uploading of AS-Interface configuration in STEP 7 with Link 20E
possible
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E • User-friendly selection of AS-Interface slaves when using DP/AS-Interface Link 20E
Your advantage: Optimum transition to PROFIBUS, integrated in STEP 7
AS-Interface / Slaves
Slaves contain the AS-Interface electronics and connection options for sensors and
actuators in the field and in the cabinet. A total of up to 62 slaves can be connected to
one bus. The slaves then exchange their data in cyclic mode with a control module
(master).
Field modules / Digital I/O modules IP67 – K45 and K60 3RK1, 3RK2 2/25, 2/39
• Degree of protection IP65/IP67
• Modules available with up to IP68/69K protection
• ATEX-certified modules available for EX Zone 22
• Connection sockets in M8/M12
K45 digital module • Up to eight inputs and four outputs
• A/B technology available
• Contacting protected against polarity reversal
• Standard rail mounting and wall mounting possible
• Mounting of the module on the base plate using just one screw
• Diagnostics LEDs
Your advantage: Reduction of mounting and start-up times by up to 40 %
K60 digital module

Field modules / Analog I/O modules IP67 – K60 3RK1 2/45
• Degree of protection IP65/IP67
• Detects or transmits analog signals locally
• 2/4-channel
• Input modules for up to four sensors with current signal,
sensors with voltage signal or sensors with thermal resistor
• Output modules for current or voltage
Your advantage: Easy integration of analog values
K60 analog module

Systems
Introduction
Order No. Page

Cabinet modules 3RG9, 3RK1 2/48
2
• No M12 connectors required for connection

• Up to 16 inputs
• Slim type of construction of the SlimLine modules with width from 22.5 mm
• Removable, finger-safe terminal blocks that cannot be mixed up (SlimLine)
• Flat type of construction of the flat modules for small control boxes and confined
conditions
SlimLine • Connection with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals
• Standard rail mounting and wall mounting possible
• Diagnostics LEDs
Your advantage: Modules enable use in cabinets and small local control boxes
F90 modules
Flat module
Modules with special functions / Counter modules 3RK1 2/70
• For evaluation of pulses
• Connection with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals
Your advantage: Evaluation of pulses which exceed even the clock frequency of
AS-Interface
Modules with special functions / Ground fault detection modules 3RK1 2/71
• Display using LEDs
• Two signal outputs
Your advantage: Automatic diagnostics of ground faults on AS-Interface
Modules with special functions / Overvoltage protection modules 3RK1 2/73

• Discharge through ground cable with oil-proof outer sheath
• Protection at transition of lightning protection zones
Your advantage: The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects downstream
AS-Interface devices or individual sections in AS-Interface networks from conducted
overvoltages
AS-Interface connections for LOGO! 3RK1 2/75

• AS-Interface slave for the connection of LOGO!
• Distributed controller functionality
• Four inputs / four outputs (virtual)
Your advantage: Intelligence can be used locally

Systems
Introduction
Order No. Page

AS-Interface / Power Supply Units
AS-Interface power supply units generate a controlled direct voltage of 30 V DC with
2
high stability and low residual ripple, working according to the principle of a primary
switchgear. They are an integral component of the AS-Interface network and enable
the simultaneous transmission of data and power on one cable.
Power supply units 3RX9 2/76
Power supply units with degree of protection IP20 or IP65:
• With wide performance spectrum from 2.4 to 8 A
• Less space required thanks to compact dimensions
• Easy and quick installation
• Certified for global use
Power supply units with degree of protection IP20:
• Integrated ground-fault and overload detection saves the need for additional
IP20, 3 A components and makes applications reliable
• Diagnostics memory, remote indication and remote reset allow fast detection of faults
in the system
• Removable terminal blocks reduce downtimes
• The ultra-wide input range enables single- and two-phase applications
(8 A version)
Your advantage: Optimum performance for each application.
IP20, 8 A
AS-Interface / Transmission Media
AS-Interface shaped cable for connection of network stations.
AS-Interface Shaped Cables 3RX9 2/82
• No polarity reversal thanks to trapezoidal shape
• Cables made of optimized material for different working conditions
• Special version according to UL Class 2 available
Your advantage: Fast replacement and connection to AS-Interface by piercing method
AS-Interface / System Components and Accessories

Accessories as mounting, installation and operating aids as well as individual
components.
Extension plug 3RK1, 6GK1 2/83
• Extension of an AS-i segments to max. 200 m with an extension plug (without an
additional power supply unit)
• Maximum size increases (when combined) to more than 600 m
Your advantage: Lower infrastructure costs, more possibilities of use and greater
freedom for plant planning
Addressing units 3RK1 2/86

• Addressing all stations of the AS-Interface network (standard and A/B slaves)
• Reading out the I/O and ID codes of the slaves
• Parameterization of the slaves (ID1 or analog parameters)
• Measurement of AS-Interface voltage
• Enables direct setting of outputs and reading in of a slave's inputs
• Storage of complete plant configurations
Your advantage: Easiest way to address and parameterize the slaves

Systems
Introduction
Order No. Page

AS-Interface analyzers 3RK1 2/87
• Diagnostic units for completely checking the quality and function of an
2
AS-Interface installation
• Transmission of collected data through an RS 232 interface to a PC, evaluation
by software
• Easy and user-friendly operation
• Automatically generated test logs
• Advanced trigger functions enable exact analysis
• Process data can be monitored online
• In addition to digital I/O data it is also possible to view analog values and safety slaves
in data mode
Your advantage: Preventative testing of an AS-Interface network is possible,
recorded logs facilitate remote diagnostics
PROFIBUS
• PROFIBUS is an efficient, open and robust bus system which guarantees smooth 2/88
communication
• The system is fully standardized, thus enabling standardized components from differ-
ent manufacturers to be connected without problem
• Configuring, commissioning and troubleshooting can be performed from any position;
this means that the freely selectable communication relationships are very flexible,
easy to implement and simple to change
• Fast local assembly and commissioning using the FastConnect cabling system
• Constant monitoring of the network components by means of a simple and effective
signaling concept
• High protection for your investment because existing systems can be expanded
without repercussions
• High availability thanks to ring redundance with OLM
• Optimum connection of the actuator-sensor level by router to AS-Interface
(DP/AS-Interface Link 20E)
• Load feeders up to 250 kW / 400 V are easy to implement from standard devices 2/95
• Modular design: Everything fits together and can be combined
• Economical and flexible thanks to seven compact sizes
• Optimum variety with uniform accessories
• Space-saving design with small unit width and butt-mounting type of construction
up to 60 °C
• Fast commissioning, short setting-up times and simple wiring
• Connection to AS-Interface and PROFIBUS DP possible
• Extremely long life, low maintenance and reliable
• Global approvals and certifications such as IEC, UL, CSA, CCC, shipbuilding
• Permanently secure mounting, screw- or snap-connection
• Spring-loaded terminals: Quick and secure connection, vibration-proof and
maintenance-free
• Short delivery periods thanks to world-wide logistics network
• Environment-friendly production and materials, recycling capability, low power loss
• Clear-cut, ergonomic design (winner of the iF Product Design Award)

AS-Interface
Introduction
Transmission technology
■ Overview
Transmission method
2
A key feature of AS-Interface technology is the use of a shared transmission method is used for this purpose. The AS-Interface
two-conductor cable for data transmission and the distribution of cable provided for the wiring is mechanically coded and hence
auxiliary power to the sensors/actuators. An AS-Interface power protected against polarity reversal and can be easily contacted
supply unit that meets the requirements of the AS-Interface with piercing terminals.
Ethernet
Industrial
Industrial Ethernet
PROFIBUS PA PROFIBUS
00 00
00 7
00 00
s PROFIBUS
Addr.
6GK1415-0AA00
instabus EIB
Power DP/EIB-Link
DP/BF
EIB/BF
24V EIB
Phys. Adr.
G_IK10_XX_20002
AS-Interface
■ Function
Operating modes
Generally, master interfaces have the following operating Command interface
modes: In addition to I/O data exchange with binary and analog
AS-Interface slaves the AS-Interface masters provide a number
I/O data exchange of other functions through the command interface. Hence it is
In this operating mode the inputs and outputs of the binary possible, for example, for slave addresses to be issued,
AS-Interface slaves are read and written. parameter values transferred or diagnostics information read out
Analog value transfer from user programs.
AS-Interface masters according to the Complete AS-Interface
Specification V2.1 support integrated analog value processing.
This means that data exchange with analog AS-Interface slaves
(according to Analog Profile 7.3 or 7.4) is just as easy as with
digital slaves.

AS-Interface
Introduction
Configuration examples
■ Design
Process or field communication In practice this means: Installation is straightforward because
2
data and power are conveyed together over one cable. No

AS-Interface is used where individual actuators and sensors are special know-how for installation and commissioning is required.
spaced apart over a machine (e.g. a bottle filling line, production And thanks to the simple laying of the cable, its clear-cut struc-
line, etc.). ture and special design there is not only far less risk of errors but
It replaces complicated cable harnesses and connects binary also less effort during maintenance and servicing.
and analog actuators and sensors such as proximity switches,
valves and indicator lights to a controller, e.g. a SIMATIC or PC.
Connection via AS-Interface cable
AS-Interface
power section
AS-Interface cable
AS-Interface
power section max 100 m
AS-Interface distributor Repeater

(without AS-Interface chip)
LOGO!
AS-Interface distributor
(without AS-Interface chip)
Operator panel
Branch M12 SONAR BERO

with int. AS-Interface
K60
K45
(with AS-Interface chip)
for connection of
standard sensors
Compact starter IP 65
Standard sensor
e.g. inductive BERO
G_IK10_XX_20027
Standard encoders
e.g. position switches
Example of a system configuration

AS-Interface
Introduction
Technical specifications
■ Technical specifications ■ More information

Standard EN 50295 / IEC 61158 For the SIMATIC NET products referred to above (order numbers
6GK..., 6XV1...) please also note the conditions of application,
2
Topology Line, star or tree structure (same as
electrical wiring) which can be consulted on the Internet site quoted below.
Transmission medium Unshielded two-conductor cable You can find more information on the Internet at:
(2 x 1.5 mm2) for data and auxiliary power
Connection technique Contacting of the AS-Interface cable by http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info
insulation displacement method
Maximum cable length 100 m without repeater/extender;
200 m with extension plug;
300 m with repeater or extender
600 m with repeater/extender and
extension plug (parallel connection of
repeaters)
Maximum cycle time 5 ms with full expansion,
10 ms when using A/B technology
Maximum number of stations 31 slaves according to Complete
AS-Interface Spec. V2.0;
62 slaves according to Complete
AS-Interface Spec. V2.1 (A/B technology),
integrated analog value transmission
Number of binary sensors and Max. 124 I/124 O according to
actuators Spec. V2.0;
max. 248 I/186 O according to
Spec. V2.1
Access control Cyclic polling master slave method,
cyclic data transfer by host (PLC, PC)
Error safeguard Identification and repetition of faulty
message frames

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Introduction
■ Overview
2
Safety monitor
Standard PLC
Standard-Master Power supply unit
AS-i POWER
Standard-
Slave
Safe slave with

EMERGENCY STOP
Signal evaluation of slave/safety monitor
NSA0_00005b
Master information (via standard I/O transfer)
Safety is included Tested safety

The ASIsafe concept supports the direct integration of safety- The system was tested and approved by TÜV (Germany), NRTL
related components, such as EMERGENCY-STOP switches, pro- (USA) and INRS (France). The transmission method for safety-
tective door switches or safety light arrays, in the AS-Interface oriented signals is designed so that applications up to
network. These are fully compatible with the familiar AS-Interface Category 4 according to EN 954-1 and SIL 3 according to
components (masters, slaves, power supplies, repeaters, etc.) IEC 61508 can be realized.
in according to IEC 62061/EN 50295 and are operated in con-
junction with them on the yellow AS-Interface cable. Software
The signals of the safety sensors are evaluated by a safety The safety-oriented applications can be compiled and trans-
monitor which not only monitors the switching signals of the ferred into the monitor using the configuration software. The
safety sensors but also continuously checks that the data trans- software also enables online diagnostics.
mission works correctly. The safety monitor has one or two en-
abling circuits which are configured with two channels and are
used to switch the machine or plant to the safe state. Sensors
and monitors can be connected to any points of the AS-Interface
network. Also, several monitors can be used on one network.
A failsafe controller or a special master is not required. The
master regards safety slaves like all other slaves and receives
the safety data solely for information purposes. Hence it is also
possible to expand all existing AS-Interface networks.
ASIsafe ensures a maximum response time of 40 ms. This is the
time between the signal being applied to the input of the safe
slave and the output on the safety monitor being switched off.
2/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Introduction
■ Design ■ Integration
The design of the safety systems is identical to the wiring of The existing infrastructure such as the master and the power
AS-Interface as it is known today. supply unit can be used as before for integrating the safety
2
systems in AS-Interface. For the safety systems the safety
The family of safe AS-Interface products comprises the safety monitor is integrated as monitoring element and the safe stations
monitor which monitors the safe stations. The range of safe as interface between the safe sensors and the system. The safe
stations comprises the safe modules and the safety-related sensors can be used as before.
sensors with integrated interface.
■ Function
Like the standard stations, the safe stations send their informa-
tion to the master after master calls. The safety monitor monitors
this transmission from the safe stations to the master and
switches
• Into the EMERGENCY-STOP scenario (when there are faults
on the safe stations) or
• Into the safe state (when there is a broken cable)
The safety monitor is configured with software. The configuration
comprises the input signals of the safe stations and the internal
functions of the safety monitor. The safety monitor provides
OR logic, AND logic, timer functions, buffer storage, etc.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/11

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors
■ Overview ■ Function
Basic Safety Monitor versus Expanded Safety Monitor
2
Basic safety Expanded safety

monitor monitor
Number of monitoring modules 32 48
Number of OR gates (inputs) 2 6
Number of AND gates (inputs) -- 6
Wildcards for monitoring 3 3
modules
Deactivating of monitoring 3 3
modules
Fault release 3 3
Diagnostics hold 3 3
A/B slaves for acknowledgment 3 3
Safe time functions -- 3
"Button" function -- 3
Debouncing of contacts -- 3
Number of monitoring modules
The safety monitor is the centerpiece of ASIsafe. A safe applica-
tion is configured using a PC and the safety monitor. Various The number of devices which the safety monitor can process is
application-specific operating modes can be selected for this. increased with the expanded safety monitor from 32 to 48. Ap-
They include, for example, an EMERGENCY-STOP function, plications of greater complexity and size can thus be simulated
tumbler and selection of stop Category 0 or Category 1. in the safety monitor.
To be able to make full use of the AS-Interface diagnostics Logic OR operation

options, the monitor can also be operated with an AS-Interface At the logic operation level two elements can be linked by
address if required. With the help of the diagnostics block for OR operations in the basic version and up to six in the expanded
STEP7, which is included on the ASIsafe CD, the full diagnostics version.
spectrum can be processed further in the higher-level PLC.
Logic AND operation
The monitor comes in two expansion levels:
In addition to the standard AND operation in the main path of an
• Basic safety monitor with starter set of blocks and basic enabling circuit, an AND operation can also be inserted in an
functionality OR operation on the expanded safety monitor. More than two
• Expanded safety monitor with expanded features and elements can be linked in this AND.
functionality
Functions of the basic safety monitor
Both expansion levels are available with one or two enabling
circuits with two-channel configuration. • Wildcards and deactivating of monitoring modules
Wildcards are available for the configuration. These wildcards
The safety monitor is used in an AS-Interface bus system to are integrated in the configuration and diagnostics and can be
monitor protective devices, e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP switches. activated very easily if required. User-friendly and easy
It is classified in Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1. configuring is thus possible even when system configurations
change.
According to IEC 61508 the safety monitor can be used in loops
up to SIL3. The user must calculate the PFD value of the total • Fault release
loop. If a module detects a fault, the AS-Interface safety monitor
goes into fault status. A differentiated fault release (reset) is
ON period in months Total operating time in PFD now possible for this scenario. The fault release can be acti-
years vated by an AS-Interface standard slave, e.g. a pushbutton,
3 10 4 10-5 and is effective only on module level. The great advantage of
6 10 6 10-5 this is that the entire safety monitor is no longer reset but only
9 10 9 10-5 the module which is locked in the fault.
• Buffer storage and "Diagnostics hold"
Note: Depending on the choice of safety components used, the Momentary disconnections are saved in a buffer storage for
complete safety system may also be classified in a lower safety diagnostics. Disconnections can also be "frozen" until an
category. acknowledgment comes through a standard slave (function
"Diagnostics hold").
2/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors
Additional functions of the expanded safety monitor
■ Schematics
The following additional features are provided by only the
expanded safety monitor: The protective conductor must be connected to the FE connec-
tion if the terminal M is not connected to ground in the direct
2
• Safe time functions vicinity of the unit.
Timers with the following functions are available:
- ON-delay
L/+
- OFF-delay
L
- pulse K1
• "Button" function Start 1
Additional acknowledgment option for restarting the system K2
NSA0_00356b
using an additional button. In addition to the Service button on 1.13 1.23 1.Y1
the safety monitor its function (restarting the system) can be

AS-i+AS-i- 1.Y2
placed on any button of a commanding and signaling device
through configuration in the asimon software.
• Debouncing of contacts
For debouncing the contacts it is possible to set a bounce
AS-i
time after which a system restart takes place. L/+
1
2
Compatibility 3 K1
Already created configurations can be adopted in the "new"
safety monitor without change. K2
1.Y1
M
All functions are designed for Category 4 according to
EN 954-1. Safety monitor, monitoring and evaluation unit and L+ M 1.32
slaves were certified by TÜV according to IEC 61508,
NRTL (USA) and INRS (France). 1.14 1.24 FE
■ Technical specifications K1 K2
L+
Safety monitor M/N
M
3RK1 105
Rated operational current
Safety monitor, with one enabling circuit
• Ie/AC-12 up to 250 V, 3 A
• Ie/AC-15 115 V, 3 A
230 V, 3 A
L/+
• Ie/DC-12 up to 24 V, 3 A
L
• Ie/DC-13 24 V, 1 A Start 1 Start 2
K1 K3
115 V, 0.1 A
230 V, 0.05 A K2 K4
Response time in ms 40
NSA0_00357b
1.13 1.23 1.Y1
Ambient temperature in °C 0 ... +60

AS-i+ AS-i- 1.Y2 L/+
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85
■ Dimensional drawings K1
AS-i K2
1.Y1
M
1
2
3 L/+
K3
5 K4
102
L+ M 1.32 2.32 2.Y1

M
1.14 1.24 FE 2.14 2.24
K1 K2 K3 K4
L+
M/N
NSA00073b
45 120 Safety monitor, with two enabling circuits
Safety monitor
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/13

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety modules
■ Overview
2
Safety modules for AS-Interface (ASIsafe modules) are available

in the following versions:
• K45F compact safety modules for operation in the field
The K45F compact safety module is initially equipped as stan-
dard with two "safe" inputs. For applications up to Category 2
according to EN 954-1 the two inputs can be assigned sepa-
rately. If Category 4 is required, a two-channel input is avail-
able on the module. A new addition to the range is the K45F
module, which has two standard outputs in addition to the two
safety inputs.
• K60F compact safety modules for operation in the field
The K60F compact safety module similarly has two standard
outputs in addition to two safe inputs (see K45F for catego-
ries); power is supplied from either the yellow AS-Interface
cable or as auxiliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable
• S22.5F SlimLine safety modules for operation in controlgear
cabinets.
The S22.5F SlimLine safety module has two safety inputs. The
safe linking of signals to ASIsafe networks in the cabinet is
also possible therefore. For operation up to Category 2, both
inputs can be assigned separately; if Category 4 is required,
a two-channel input is available on the module. New in the
range are two S22.5F module versions which have two stan-
dard outputs in addition to the two safe inputs; power is sup-
plied either from only the yellow AS-Interface cable or as aux-
iliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable.
2/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
■ Technical specifications
K45F safe compact module K60F safe compact module
2
2 inputs, safe 2 inputs, safe
-- 2 outputs, standard with 2 outputs, standard 2 outputs, standard with
Uaux Uaux
2 F-DI 2 F-DI / 2 DO 2 F-DI / 2 DO 2 F-DI / 2 DO with Uaux
3RK1 205-0BQ00-0AA3 3RK1 405-1BQ20-0AA3 3RK1 405-0BQ00-0AA3 3RK1 405-1BQ00-0AA3
AS-Interface chip SAP 5 SAP 5 SAP 5 SAP 5
I/O configuration 0 7 7 7
ID/ID2 code B/F B/F B/F B/F
PFD value Makes no notable contribution Makes no notable contribution Makes no notable contribution Makes no notable contribution
to the PFD of the overall to the PFD of the overall to the PFD of the overall to the PFD of the overall
system, comprised of the system, comprised of the system, comprised of the system, comprised of the
AS-Interface bus and safety AS-Interface bus and safety AS-Interface bus and safety AS-Interface bus and safety
monitor monitor monitor monitor
Operational voltage 26.5 ... 31.5 26.5 ... 31.5 26.5 ... 31.5 26.5 ... 31.5
according to AS-Interface
specification in V
Total current input in mA 45 45 270 45
Inputs
• Sensors Mechanical switching contact Mechanical switching contact Mechanical switching contact Mechanical switching contact
• Input current Low in mA -- -- -- --
• Input current High in mA Ipeak 5 Ipeak 5 Ipeak 5 Ipeak 5
Assignment of inputs • Pin1 and Pin2 = connec- • Pin1 and Pin2 = connec- • Pin1 and Pin2 = connec- • Pin1 and Pin2 = connec-
tion/switching contact tion/switching contact tion/switching contact tion/switching contact
• Pin3 and Pin4 = connec- • Pin3 and Pin4 = connec- • Pin3 and Pin4 = connec- • Pin3 and Pin4 = connec-
tion/switching contact tion/switching contact tion/switching contact tion/switching contact
• Pin5 = not assigned • Pin5 = not assigned • Pin5 = not assigned • Pin5 = not assigned
Outputs
• Type of output -- Solid-state Solid-state Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity -- 1 0.18 2
in A per output DC 12 /13
typical
• Maximum aggregate current -- Max. 2 Max. 0.18 Max. 4
per module in A
• Socket assignment of -- • 3 = "-" • 3 = "-" • 3 = "-"
outputs • 4 = output • 4 = output • 4 = output
• 5 = ground terminal • 5 = ground terminal • 5 = ground terminal
• Short-circuit protection -- Built-in Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection -- Built-in Built-in Built-in
• External power supply -- Using black AS-Interface flat -- Using black AS-Interface flat
24 V DC cable cable
• Watchdog -- Built-in Built-in Built-in
Assignment of outputs
• OUT 1 (D0) -- Socket 3 – Pin 4 Socket 5 – Pin4 Socket 5 – Pin4
• OUT 2 (D1) -- Socket 4 – Pin 4 Socket 6 – Pin4 Socket 6 – Pin4
AS-Interface certificate Yes Requested Yes Yes
Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA
Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67
Ground terminal -- PIN5 of each M12 socket is PIN5 of each M12 socket is PIN5 of each M12 socket is
connected to the grounding connected to the grounding connected to the grounding
wrist strap in the mounting wrist strap in the mounting wrist strap in the mounting
plate using a pin (applies to plate using a pin (applies to plate using a pin (applies to
outputs, i.e. socket 3 and 4) outputs, i.e. socket 5 and 6) outputs, i.e. socket 5 and 6)
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85 -25 ... +85 -25 ... +85 -25 ... +85
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Number of I/O sockets 2 4 4 4
Status displays
• Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
• Uaux -- Green LED -- Green LED
• Display of AS-Interface/ Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED
diagnostics
Connection Using mounting plate for K45 Using mounting plate for K45 Using mounting plate for K60 Using mounting plate for K60
compact module compact module compact module compact module
Addressing procedure Front addressing socket Front addressing socket Front addressing socket Front addressing socket
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/15

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SlimLine safety module S22.5F, with screw-type or spring-loaded terminal

2 inputs, safe
-- 2 outputs, standard 2 outputs, standard with Uaux
2
2 F-DI 2 F-DI / 2 DO 2 F-DI / 2 DO with Uaux

3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1 405-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1 405-1BE00-0AA2
3RK1 205-0BG00-0AA2 3RK1 405-0BG00-0AA2 3RK1 405-1BG00-0AA2
AS-Interface chip SAP 5 SAP 5 SAP 5
I/O configuration 0 7 7
ID/ID2 code B/F B/F B/F
PFD value Makes no notable contribution to the PFD Makes no notable contribution to the PFD Makes no notable contribution to the PFD
of the overall system, comprised of the of the overall system, comprised of the of the overall system, comprised of the
AS-Interface bus and safety monitor AS-Interface bus and safety monitor AS-Interface bus and safety monitor
Operational voltage 26.5 ... 31.5 26.5 ... 31.5 26.5 ... 31.5
according to AS-Interface
specification in V
Total current input in mA 45 250 60
Inputs
• Sensors Mechanical switching contact Mechanical switching contact Mechanical switching contact
• Input current Low in mA Contact open Contact open Contact open
• Input current High in mA Contact closed Contact closed Contact closed
Ipeak 5 Ipeak 5 Ipeak 5
Assignment of inputs • F-IN1.1 and F-IN1.2 = connection of • F-IN1.1 and F-IN1.2 = connection of • F-IN1.1 and F-IN1.2 = connection of
switching contact switching contact switching contact
• F-IN2.1 and F-IN2.2 = connection of • F-IN2.1 and F-IN2.2 = connection of • F-IN2.1 and F-IN2.2 = connection of
switching contact switching contact switching contact
Outputs
• Type of output -- Solid-state Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity -- 0.15 0.7
in A per output DC 12 /13
typical
• Maximum aggregate current -- Max. 0.15 Max. 1.4
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection -- Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection -- Built-in Built-in
• External power supply -- -- Using black AS-Interface flat cable
24 V DC
• Watchdog -- Built-in Built-in
• Wiring of outputs -- See section Schematics / Wiring – See section Schematics / Wiring –
SlimLine Safety Module S22.5F SlimLine Safety Module S22.5F
• Assignment of outputs
- OUT 1 -- DO DO
- OUT 2 -- D1 D1
AS-Interface certificate Yes Requested Requested
Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA
Mechanical specifications
• Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
• Shock load (IEC 60068-2-6) 15 g/11 ms 15 g/11 ms 15 g/11 ms
• Vibratory load 5 ... 500 Hz 5 ... 500 Hz 5 ... 500 Hz
(IEC 60068-2-27) 5 ... 26 Hz: 0.75 mm amplitude 5 ... 26 Hz: 0.75 mm amplitude 5 ... 26 Hz: 0.75 mm amplitude
26 ... 500 Hz: 2 g 26 ... 500 Hz: 2 g 26 ... 500 Hz: 2 g
Ground terminal -- -- --
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Number of I/O sockets -- -- --
Status displays
• Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
• Uaux -- -- Green LED
• Display of AS-Interface/ Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED
diagnostics
Connection Using screw-type terminals or Using screw-type terminals or Using screw-type terminals or
spring-loaded terminals spring-loaded terminals spring-loaded terminals
Addressing procedure Front addressing socket Front addressing socket Front addressing socket
2/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
■ Dimensional drawings
31
2
60 29 5
8 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 2 4
4.5
7 3 ,5
152
1 1 0
8 0
9 0
7 1
8 1
5
NSA0_00026
Side view with

mounting plate
3RK1 901-0CA00 1 5
2 2 ,5
K60F compact safety module
3RK1 405-0BQ00-0AA3 S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2 F-DI, spring-loaded terminal
3RK1 405-1BQ00-0AA3 3RK1 205-0BG00-0AA2
8 6
5 7 ,2 7 ,2 5
6 0 8 6
2 ,5
3 2
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 2 5
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 2 2
1 0 3 ,4
7 5 ,1
9 4 ,1
7 3 ,5
8 4 ,4
9 3 ,9
1 1 0
7 3 ,5
1 1 0
8 0
9 0
6 2
7 2
2 8 ,8
1 5 1 5
2 2 ,5 2 2 ,5
S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2 F-DI, screw-type terminal S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2F-DI / 2 DO, spring-loaded terminal
3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1 405-0BG00-0AA2 (without Uaux)
3RK1 405-1BG00-0AA2 (with Uaux)
8 6
5
6 5
7 ,2
3 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 2 3
1 0 1 ,6
8 2 ,6
6 8 ,2
8 7 ,2
7 3 ,5
1 1 0
9 2 ,2
2 8 ,8
6
1 5
2 2 ,5
S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2F-DI / 2 DO, screw-type terminal

3RK1 405-0BE00-0AA2 (without Uaux)
3RK1 405-1BE00-0AA2 (with Uaux)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/17

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
■ Schematics
Logical assignments – K45F compact safety module Wiring – S22.5F SlimLine safety module
2
NSA0_00426
AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2 AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2
1
2
1 2 3 S2 S1 1 2 3
2 S1
AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1 AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1
3 1 3
4 5 6 4 5 6
4 AS-i AS-i
4
ADDR. ADDR.
ADDR
F-IN1 F-IN1
NSA_00355
F-IN2 F-IN2
Socket Assignment / data sheets / function

1 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D0 and D1 = Channel 1
Pin 3 and Pin 4: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2
Pin 5 not assigned
Pin 5 not assigned 7 8 9 7 8 9
3 Not assigned
4 Not assigned
If only a single-channel switch is to be connected to the module,

it must be connected to Channel 1. The second channel must be Wiring for S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2F-DI,
bridged. This is done with the M12 connector 3RK1 901-1AA00 Category 3 (left) and Category 4 (right)
3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2 (screw-type terminal)
at socket 2. 3RK1 205-0BG00-0AA2 (spring-loaded terminal)
Pin 3 of socket 1 is connected to Pin 1 of socket 2, and Pin 4 of
socket 1 is connected to Pin 2 of socket 2. If both pairs of
NSA0_00427
AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2 AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2

sockets are assigned, the inputs are linked.
1 2 3 1 2 3
Logical assignments – K60F compact safety module AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1
S2 S1
AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1
S1
4 5 6 4 5 6
AS-i AS-i
1 2
ADDR. ADDR.
3 4
F-IN1 F-IN1
F-IN2 F-IN2
5 6
7 8
OUT1 OUT1
OUT2 OUT2
4 1
7 8 9 7 8 9
3 2 N S A _ 0 0 3 5 8
+ +
OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 OUT2
10 11 12 10 11 12
Socket Assignment / data sheets / function
M M M M
Pin 3 and Pin 4: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2
Pin 5: Not assigned
Wiring for S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2F-DI / 2 DO without Uaux,
2 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2 Category 3 (left) and Category 4 (right)
Pin 5: Not assigned 3RK1 405-0BE00-0AA2 (screw-type terminal)
3 / 4 / 7 and 8 Not assigned, closed in the factory 3RK1 405-0BG00-0AA2 (spring-loaded terminal)
5 Pin 4: Output 1
Pin 3: --
Pin 5: Ground
Pin 1 and Pin 2: Not assigned
6 Pin 4: Output 2
Pin 3: --
Pin 5: Ground
Pin 1 and Pin 2: Not assigned
Pin 3 of socket 1 is connected to Pin 1 of socket 2, and Pin 4 of

socket 1 is connected to Pin 2 of socket 2. If both pairs of
sockets are assigned, the inputs are linked.
2/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2

NSA0_00428
AS-i– F-IN1.2 F-IN2.2
1 2 3 1 2 3
S2 S1 S1
2
AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1 AS-i+ F-IN1.1 F-IN2.1
4 5 6 4 5 6
AS-i AS-i
ADDR. ADDR.
F-IN1 F-IN1
F-IN2 F-IN2
OUT1 OUT1
OUT2 OUT2
7 8 9 7 8 9
+ + + +
L+ OUT1 OUT2 L+ OUT1 OUT2
10 11 12 10 11 12
_ _
M M M M M M
Wiring for S22.5F SlimLine safety module, 2F-DI / 2 DO with Uaux,

Category 3 (left) and Category 4 (right)
3RK1 405-1BE00-0AA2 (screw-type terminal)
3RK1 405-1BG00-0AA2 (spring-loaded terminal)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/19

AS-Interface
Masters
CP 243-2
The CP 243-2 supports all specified functions of the extended
AS-Interface Specification V2.1. This means that up to 62 digital
2
or 31 analog slaves can be operated on the AS-Interface

through double address assignment.
Thanks to the integrated analog value processing it is just as
easy to access the analog values as the digital values.
In the process image of the S7-200 the CP 243-2 occupies one
digital input byte (status byte), one digital output byte (control
byte), and 8 analog input and 8 analog output words. The
CP 243-2 thus occupies two slots. The operating mode of the
CP 243-2 can be set with the status byte and the control byte
using the application program.
Depending on the operating mode the CP 243-2 saves either the
I/O data of the AS-Interface slaves or diagnostics values in the
analog address space of the S7-200, or it enables master calls
(e.g. re-addressing of the slaves).
The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master for the innovative
SIMATIC S7-200 generation. This communications processor Configuration
performs the following functions: All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of
• Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and integrated a button. No further configuration of the CPs is required.
analog value transmission (according to the extended
AS-Interface Specification V2.1) ■ Technical specifications
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to the
extended AS-Interface Specification V2.1 AS-Interface specification V 2.1
• Status displays of operating states and indication of the Interfaces
functional readiness of connected slaves by means of LEDs in • Assignment of address space According to 2 I/O modules
the front panel in the PLC (8 DI/8 DO and 8 AI/ 8 AO)
• Fault indications (e.g. AS-Interface voltage fault, configuration • AS-Interface connection Terminal connection
fault) by means of LEDs in the front panel Current consumption
• Compact enclosure in the design of the innovative • Using AS-Interface Max. 100 mA
SIMATIC S7-200 generation • Using backplane bus Typical 220 mA at 5 V DC
Power loss Approx. 2 W
■ Design Permissible ambient conditions
• Operating temperature
The CP 243-2 is connected like an expansion module to the - Horizontal installation 0 °C to +55 °C
S7-200. It has: - Vertical installation 0 °C to +45 °C
• Two terminal connections for direct connection of the • Transport/storage temperature - 40 °C to +70 °C
AS-Interface cable • Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25 °C
• LEDs in the front panel for indicating the operating state and Structural design
functional readiness of all connected and activated slaves • Module format S7-22x expansion module
• Two pushbuttons for indicating the status information of the • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 71.2 x 80 x 62 (H+16 mm with holes for
slaves, for switching over the operating state and for adopting wall fixing)
the existing ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED configura- • Weight Approx. 250 g
tion. • Space required 1 mounting space
2/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Masters
CP 343-2 P
The CP 343-2 P supports all specified functions of the extended
AS-Interface Specification V2.1. This means that up to 62 digital
2
or 31 analog slaves can be operated on the AS-Interface
through double address assignment. The integrated analog
value processing permits easy access to the analog values.
Configuration
All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of
a button. No further configuration of the CPs is required.
The CP 343-2 P also supports configuring of the
AS-Interface network with STEP 7 V5.2 and higher.
AS-Interface specification V 2.1
Bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves
The CP 343-2 P is the AS-Interface master for the 10 ms with 62 Slaves
SIMATIC S7-300 programmable controller and the Interfaces
ET 200M distributed I/O station. The communications processor • Assignment of analog address 16 bytes I/O and P-Bus S7-300
performs the following functions: space in the PLC
• Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and integrated • AS-Interface connection S7-300 front connector with terminal
connection
analog value transmission (according to the extended
AS-Interface Specification V2.1) Supply voltage +5 V DC using backplane bus
Current consumption
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to the
extended AS-Interface Specification V2.1 • Using backplane bus, typical 200 mA at 5 V DC
• Using AS-Interface from the 100 mA
• Fault indications (e.g. AS-Interface voltage fault, configuration AS-Interface shaped cables,
fault) by means of LEDs in the front panel max.
• Compact enclosure in the design of the SIMATIC S7-300 Power loss 2W
• Supports the configuration of the AS-Interface-network with Permissible ambient conditions
STEP 7 V5.2 and higher • Operating temperature 0 °C to +60 °C
• Transport/storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
■ Design • Relative humidity, max. 95% at +25 °C
Structural design
The CP 343-2 P is connected like an expansion module to the
S7-300. It has: • Module format S7-300 design
• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 40 x 125 x 120
• Two terminal connections for direct connection of the
AS-Interface cable • Weight Approx. 190 g
• Space required 1 mounting space
• LEDs in the front panel for indicating the operating state and
the functional readiness of all connected and activated slaves Configuration software Optional:
STEP 7 V5.2 and higher
• Pushbuttons for indicating the status information of the slaves,
for switching over the operating state and for adopting the
existing ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED configuration.
■ Mode of operation
In I/O operation the CP 343-2 P occupies 16 bytes in the analog
address space of the SIMATIC S7-300. The I/O data of the stan-
dard slaves and A slaves are saved in this area. The I/O data of
the B slaves can be accessed with the function "Read/write data
record".
A and B slaves are slaves according to the expanded
AS-Interface Specification V2.1. For invoking the AS-Interface
master (e.g. to write parameters and read diagnostics values) a
function call (FC) is available on a diskette which is supplied with
the manual.
All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of
a button. No further configuration of the CPs is required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/21

AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E enables a DP master to access all the
slaves of an AS-Interface segment. According to the extended
2
specification (V2.1) up to 62 slaves with 4 inputs and 3 outputs

each can now be connected.
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E occupies as standard 32 bytes of
input data and 32 bytes of output data in the DP master in which
the I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves are stored.
The size of the input/output buffer can be compressed so that
only the required memory space of the DP master is occupied.
PROFIBUS DP masters are able in addition to initiate
AS-Interface master calls (e.g. to write parameters, change
addresses, read diagnostics values) through the acyclic
PROFIBUS services.
Configuration
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can be configured on PROFIBUS
using STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS.
The manual comes with the type and GSD files so that configu-
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E connects PROFIBUS DP to ration is also possible on versions in which DP/AS-Interface
AS-Interface. It performs the following functions: Link 20E is not yet included as standard.
• PROFIBUS DP slave and AS-Interface master The configuration of the AS-Interface segment can be defined
• Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and integrated either by means of STEP 7 or simply by adopting the ACTUAL
analog value transmission (according to the Extended configuration. Commissioning is also possible without
AS-Interface Specification V2.1) PROFIBUS.
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to the With STEP 7 configuring the AS-Interface configuration can be
Extended AS-Interface Specification V2.1, i.e. master class uploaded in STEP 7 V5.2 and higher.
M3
• Supply from AS-Interface cable; hence no additional power
supply required
• Supports the uploading of the AS-Interface configuration in
STEP 7 V5.2 and higher
■ Design ■ Technical specifications

• Compact enclosure in degree of protection IP20 for standard
AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves
rail mounting 10 ms with 62 slaves
• LEDs in the front panel for indicating the operating state and PROFIBUS transmission rate Max. 12 Mbits
the functional readiness of all connected and activated slaves Supported AS-Interface master M3 (according to Complete
• Setting option for PROFIBUS DP address by pressing a button profiles AS-Interface Specification V2.1)
• LED indication of the PROFIBUS DP slave address, DP bus Configuring the AS-Interface Using pushbuttons on the front panel or
with STEP 7 V5.1 SP2
faults and diagnostics
Interfaces
• Two pushbuttons for switching over the operating state and for
• AS-Interface connection Clamping contacts
adopting the existing ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED
configuration • Connection to PROFIBUS 9-pole Sub D socket
Supply voltage
• Power is supplied over the AS-Interface shaped cable
• From AS-Interface cable According to AS-Interface specification
EN 50295
Current consumption
• From AS-Interface cable Max. 200 mA
Load capacity
5 V DC at PROFIBUS connection Max. 90 mA
Power loss 3.7 W
Installation Standard mounting rail or direct
mounting
Degree of protection IP20
Permissible ambient conditions
• Operating temperature
- Horizontal mounting 0 °C to +60 °C
- Vertical mounting 0 °C to +45 °C
• Transport and storage -40 °C to +70 °C
temperature
• Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25 °C
Structural design
• Module format S7-200 design
• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 80 x 60
• Weight Approx. 200 g
2/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Introduction
■ Overview
The AS-Interface compact modules belong to a new generation
of AS-Interface modules with a high degree of protection. There
2
are digital and analog compact modules.
They are comprised of a top part, the actual module, and a
bottom part which is referred to as the mounting plate. The top
part contains the entire electronics, connection options for
sensors/actuators, an addressing socket and status/diagnostics
LEDs.
The mounting plate is used to receive the AS-Interface flat
cables and enables mounting on a wall or standard mounting
rail.
Compact modules come in two series:
• Series K60
• Series K45
K60
K45
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/23

AS-Interface
Slaves
Introduction
■ Function
The AS-Interface compact modules have a large diagnostics Compact modules of the K60 series have three LEDs for
display. This enables diagnostics at a glance. diagnostics indication.
2
The status of a module is indicated by either two LEDs or one Compact modules of the K45 series have one single LED and
dual LED using steady or flashing light. one dual LED (two-color LED) for status and diagnostics indica-
tion.
LED States Status description

AUX PWR On Off Off
AS-Interface On On Off On Flashing On

FAULT Off Off Off On On Flashing
Sensor overload with RESET of slaves

Slave has address = 0
No communication:
Master in STOP mode
Slave not entered in the LPS
Slave has wrong IO&D code
NSA0_00312b
Module completely without voltage

UAux failure
Normal operation and UAux applied
LED diagnostics indications of the K60 compact modules

AUX PWR On Off Off
AS-i / FAULT On On Off On Flashing Flashing
Flashing

No communication:
Master in STOP mode
NSA0_00313c

UAux failure
LED diagnostics indications of the K45 compact modules
2/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60
■ Overview ■ Design
The K60 digital AS-Interface compact modules are character- K60 compact module
ized by optimized handling characteristics and greater user-
2
friendliness compared to the user modules. They permit the
assembly times and start-up times of AS-Interface to be reduced
by up to 40%.
AS-Interface modules from the K60 compact series are
comprised of two parts:
• A mounting plate
• The compact module
The mounting plate receives the AS-Interface shaped cables
and the compact module. Two versions are offered for:
• Wall mounting
• Standard rail mounting
AS-Interface modules from the compact series have a
connection option for PE conductors. Addressing can also be
performed in the installed state using an addressing socket
integrated in the compact module.
K60 compact modules with a maximum of four digital inputs
and outputs The compact modules are mounted on mounting plates in just
two moves:
These compact modules contain the communication electronics
• Insert the AS-Interface flat cables in the mounting plate
and the M12 standard connections for inputs and outputs. Using
M12 standard connectors, a maximum of four sensors and four • Hook in the module and fix it with a screw
actuators can be simply and reliably connected to the compact Contacting with the AS-Interface cable is performed by the insu-
module. lation displacement terminals integrated in the top section when
The mounting plate and the compact module are joined together screwed on.
by means of a screw, with simultaneous contacting of the Addressing is performed using an integrated addressing
AS-Interface cable by the service-proven insulation piercing socket. The M12 sockets which are not required must be closed
method. with 3RK1 901-1KA00 caps in order to guarantee the quoted de-
K60 compact modules with a maximum of eight digital gree of protection. The compact module with eight digital inputs
inputs requires two AS-Interface addresses. Addressing is performed
using a double addressing socket integrated in the module.
These modules have eight digital inputs for connection through
M12 connectors. K60 mounting plates
The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing The K60 mounting plate serves as a fixture for digital and analog
all eight inputs. As with every compact module, the addressing K60 compact modules. It has cable fixtures for the yellow and
can be performed through a double addressing socket. black AS-Interface flat cable.
K60 compact modules for use in hazardous areas (ATEX) If both the yellow and black AS-Interface cables are to be routed
completely through the module, no additional seals are required.
Two versions of the K60 modules are available for use in Zone 22
hazardous areas according to Classification II 3D (dusty atmo- Additional seals are required only if one or both cables are to be
sphere, non-conductive dust). The version with four inputs and terminated in the module. In this case additional seals (straight
four outputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D T75°C IP65X and the and shaped) have to be inserted in the mounting plate. These
version with four inputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D T60°C seals are not included in the scope of supply and must be
IP65X. ordered separately (3RK1 902-0AR00).
Special conditions have to be observed for the safe operation of
these devices. In particular the module must be protected by
suitable measures from mechanical damage. Other conditions
for safe operation see section Technical Specifications.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/25

AS-Interface
Slaves
Technical specifications common to all digital I/O modules IP67 – K60
2
Operational voltage according to 26.5 ... 31.6

AS-Interface specification in V
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
• Sensor supply using AS-Interface Short-circuit and overload resistant
• Sensors 2- and 3-conductor
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 30
• Switching level High in V 10
• Input current Low/High in mA 1.5 / 6
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state
• Short-circuit protection Built-in
• Induction protection Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC Using black AS-Interface flat cable
• Watchdog Built-in
AS-Interface certificate Yes (or requested for in case of new units)
Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding (or requested for in case of new units)
Ground terminal PIN5 of each M12 socket is connected to the grounding wrist strap in the mounting plate using a pin
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85
Status displays
• Display of I/Os Yellow LED
• Display of Uaux Green LED
• Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED
Connection Using mounting plate for K60 compact module
Note 1 All K60 compact modules are delivered with high-grade steel screws/sockets
Note 2 An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the output circuits.
The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III.
2/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
8 inputs/ 2 outputs 8 inputs 8 inputs

2 ampere -- --
A/B slave Standard slave A/B slave
2
Special assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment
3RK2 400-1HQ00-0AA3 3RK1 200-0DQ00-0AA3 3RK2 200-0DQ00-0AA3
Current carrying capacity for all inputs 200 200 200
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 1 = sensor supply L+
PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input II
PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input I PIN 4 = data input I PIN 4 = data input I
PIN 5 = ground connection PIN 5 = ground connection PIN 5 = ground connection
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output 2 -- --
DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per module 4 -- --
in A
• Socket assignment of outputs 3 = "-" -- --
4 = output
5 = ground connection
Slave type A/B slave Standard slave A/B slave
I/O configuration 0 (addr. 1) / 7 (addr. 2) 0 0
ID/ID2 code I/O (addr. 1 and 2) 1/F I/O
Assignment of data bits
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) (addr. 1) PIN4 = IN1(D0) (addr. 1) PIN4 = IN1(D0) (addr. 1)
PIN2 = IN2(D1) (addr. 1) PIN2 = IN2(D1) (addr. 1) PIN2 = IN2(D1) (addr. 1)
• Socket 7 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) (addr. 2) PIN4 = IN3(D2) (addr. 2) PIN4 = IN3(D2) (addr. 2)
• Socket 8 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) (addr. 2) PIN4 = IN4(D3) (addr. 2) PIN4 = IN4(D3) (addr. 2)
PIN2 = IN4(D3) (addr. 2)
Number of I/O sockets 8 8 8
Note Module requires two addresses Module requires two addresses Module requires two addresses
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/27

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
2 ampere 2 ampere 1 ampere
Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave
2
Y-II assignment Standard assignment Y-II assignment

3RK1 400-1DQ00-0AA3 3RK1 400-1CQ00-0AA3 3RK1 400-1DQ01-0AA3
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input I PIN 2 = data input II
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output 2 2 1
DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per module 4 4 4
in A
• Socket assignment of outputs 3 = "-" 3 = "-" 3 = "-"
2/4 = output 4 = output 2/4 = output
5 = ground connection 5 = ground connection 5 = ground connection
Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave
ID/ID2 code F/F 0/F F/F
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN2/4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)
PIN2 = IN2(D1) PIN2 = IN2(D1)
• Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)
PIN2 = OUT2(D1) PIN2 = OUT2(D1)
2/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs/ 4 outputs 4 inputs/ 3 outputs 4 inputs/ 2 outputs

1 ampere 2 ampere 2 ampere
Standard slave A/B slave Standard slave
2
Standard assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment
3RK1 400-1DQ03-0AA3 3RK2 400-1FQ03-0AA3 3RK1 400-1MQ00-0AA3
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
PIN 2 = data input I PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input II
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output 1 2 2
DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per module 4 4 4
in A
• Socket assignment of outputs 3 = "-" 3 = "-" 3 = "-"
4 = output 2/4 = output 2/4 = output
5 = ground connection 5 = ground connection 5 = ground connection
Slave type Standard slave A/B slave Standard slave
ID/ID2 code 0/F A/2 F/F
• Socket 1 PIN2/4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)
• Socket 7 PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2) Not assigned (closed)
• Socket 8 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) Not assigned (closed) Not assigned (closed)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/29

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs 2 x 2 inputs / 4 outputs

2 x 2 outputs
-- 1 ampere 2 ampere
2

Y-II assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment
3RK1 200-0CQ00-0AA3 3RK1 400-1DQ02-0AA3 3RK1 100-1CQ00-0AA3
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ --
PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input II
PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input I PIN 4 = data input I
PIN 5 = ground connection PIN 5 = ground connection
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output -- 1 2
DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per module in A -- 4 4
• Socket assignment of outputs -- 3 = "-" 3 = "-"
2/4 = output 2/4 = output
5 = ground connection 5 = ground connection
ID/ID2 code 1/F F/F 1/F
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0) --
• Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2(D1) Not assigned (closed) --
• Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2) --
• Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4(D3) Not assigned (closed) --
• Socket 5 Not assigned (closed) PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)
• Socket 6 Not assigned (closed) Not assigned (closed) PIN4 = OUT2(D1)
• Socket 7 Not assigned (closed) PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2)
• Socket 8 Not assigned (closed) Not assigned (closed) PIN4 = OUT4(D3)
2/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs/ 4 outputs 4 inputs

Version ATEX (Ex) II 3D X Version ATEX (Ex) II 3D X
2 ampere --
2
Standard slave Standard slave
Y-II assignment Y-II assignment
3RK1 400-1DQ05-0AA3 3RK1 200-0CQ05-0AA3
Total current input in mA 270 270
Current carrying capacity for all inputs 200 200
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 1 = sensor supply L+
PIN 2 = data input II PIN 2 = data input II
PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input I PIN 4 = data input I
PIN 5 = ground connection PIN 5 = ground connection
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output 2 --
DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per module 4 --
in A
• Socket assignment of outputs 3 = "-" --
2/4 = output
Slave type Standard slave Standard slave
I/O configuration 7 0
ID/ID2 code F/F 1/F
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)
• Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) Not assigned (closed)
PIN2 = OUT2(D1)
PIN2 = OUT4(D3)
Number of I/O sockets 8 4
Prescribed use Use in Zone 22 hazardous areas according to Classification II 3D (dusty atmosphere, non-conductive dust),
resistance to shock: 1 joule
Conformance with Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) is verified through compliance with the standards EN 50281-1-1 and
EN 60947-5-2
Identifying markings (Ex) II 3D T75°C IP65X (Ex) II 3D T60°C IP65X
Limiting conditions for safe operation • Suitable measures must be taken to protect the module from mechanical damage.
• All M12 connectors must be secured by a lock-clip against unauthorized opening such that the connector cannot
be disconnected by hand but only by destroying the lock-clip. A suitable lock-clip is available from
Binder GmbH + Co., Elektrische Bauelemente KG, Postfach 1152, 74148 Neckarsulm, Germany,
Tel. +49 (0)7132/325-0, Fax +49 (0)7132/325-150, info@binder-connector.de, Article No. 16-0977-000
• All the M12 sockets which are not assigned must be closed with 3RK1 901-1KA01 caps (tamper-proof version)
such that they cannot be released by hand.
• Addressing the module using the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit is only permitted outside the EX-Zone 22.
• When the addressing operation is finished, the addressing socket must be closed with a 3RK1 901-1KA01
sealing cap (tamper-proof version) such that it cannot be released by hand.
• If an additional supply (AUX POWER) is required, it must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III.
Installation and commissioning • The devices are approved for an ambient temperature of -25 to +85 °C.
• The devices must be configured, connected and commissioned by qualified, responsible personnel only.
An incorrect response may cause serious injury to persons and damage to property.
• It is assumed that personnel are familiar with the assignment of classes to the permitted hazardous zones.
• The plug connectors and AS-Interface cables must not be connected or disconnected when live.
• The units require no maintenance.
• No modifications or repairs are allowed to be carried out on the units.
• All the above points must be observed in the event of replacement.
• See also Regulations for Installation EN 60079-14 / EN 50281-1-2.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/31

AS-Interface
Slaves
K60 mounting plates Distribution board

For wall mounting For standard rail mounting --
3RK1 901-0CA00 3RK1 901-0CB01 3RK1 901-1NN00
2
Ambient temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Degree of protection IP67 with screw-mounted K60 compact IP67 with screw-mounted K60 compact IP65 with screw-mounted top
module module
Connection technique For shaped AS-Interface cable, con- For shaped AS-Interface cable, con- For shaped AS-Interface cable, yellow
tacting using insulation displacement tacting using insulation displacement or black, contacting using insulation
terminals integrated in the compact terminals integrated in the compact displacement terminals integrated in
module module the top
Installation • Wall mounting • Standard rail mounting • Standard rail mounting/wall mounting
• On profile system (corresponding • On profile system (corresponding
sliding blocks required) sliding blocks required)
• Hole spacing compatible with K45 • Hole spacing also compatible with
mounting plate for wall mounting FK/FK-E coupling module (user
module)
Note Additional seals are required only when Additional seals are required only when A distribution board can perform the
the flat cables end in the module the flat cables end in the module following functions:
(3RK1 902-0AR00) (3RK1 902-0AR00) • Configuration of network structures
For the previous version of the (branch function)
3RK1 901-0CB00 standard rail mount- • Splitting of cable segments
ing it is also possible to order the stan- (splitting function)
dard rail adapter separately as a spare
part: 3RX1 660-0B. This adapter is not • Sealing of cable ends in the module
required for the new 3RK1 901-0CB01 (sealing function)
version. To terminate one or both cables in the
distribution board, seals (straight and
shaped ) for inserting in the bottom of
the distribution board are required.
These seals are not included in the
scope of supply and must be ordered
separately (3RK1 902-0AR00). If both
cables are to be routed completely
through the module, no additional seals
are required.
2/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
31
2
60 29
60
4.5
152
34
5
NSA0_00026
152
Side view with
mounting plate
3RK1 901-0CA00
73
I/O module
6 0
33 15
4,5
39
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 2 7 a
G_NSA0_XX_00032
3 4
1 5 2
3RK1 901-0CB01 mounting plate for mounting on a standard mounting

7 3
rail
3 3 1 0
3 9
4 ,5
3RK1 901-0CA00 mounting plate for mounting on a wall
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/33

AS-Interface
Slaves
■ Schematics
Terminal assignment for input, pnp (M12 socket) Terminal assignment for output, pnp (M12 socket) 24 V DC
2
1 2 P in 1 : n o t a s s ig n e d
1 2 P in 1 : S u p p ly L + P in 2 : n o t a s s ig n e d
P in 2 : In p u t s ig n a l ( b r id g e d w ith P in 4 ) 5 P in 3 : S u p p ly L
5 P in 3 : S u p p ly L P in 4 : O u tp u t s ig n a l
P in 4 : In p u t s ig n a l ( b r id g e d w ith P in 2 ) 4 3 P in 5 : E a r th c o n n e c tio n
4 3 P in 5 : E a rth c o n n e c tio n N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 0 7 a
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 0 6 a
Standard assignment
Standard assignment
1 2 P in 1 :
P in 2 : O u tp u t s ig n a l 2
Y cable/single cable
5 P in 3 : S u p p ly L
1 2 Pin 1: Supply L+ P in 4 : O u tp u t s ig n a l 1
Pin 2: Input signal 2 4 3 P in 5 : E a rth c o n n e c tio n
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 0 9 a
5 Pin 3: Supply L–
Pin 4: Input signal 1
4 3 Pin 5: Earth connection
NSA0_00008b
Y assignment
Single cable
Y assignment 1 2 1 2
5 5
Y cable/Single cable Single cable
1 2 1 2 4 3 4 3
NSA0_00011a
5 5
4 3 4 3
NSA0_00010 b
Left column (plan view) Right column (plan view)
Pin 1: Pin 1:
Pin 2: Output signal 2 Pin 2:
IN1 IN2 IN2
Pin 3: Supply L– Pin 3: Supply L–
Left column (plan view) Right column (plan view) Pin 4: Output signal 1 Pin 4: Output signal 2
Pin 5: Earth connection Pin 5: Earth connection
Pin 1: Supply L+ Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 2: Input signal 2 Pin 2:
Pin 3: Supply L– Pin 3: Supply L– Y-II assignment
Pin 4: Input signal 1 Pin 4: Input signal 2
Pin 5: Earth connection Pin 5: Earth conncection
Y-II assignment
2/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules, IP68 / IP69K - K60R
■ Overview
Connection
2
Distribution board
K60R
IP67
3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0 (5 m)
3RX8 000-0CE42-1AF0 (5 m)
Modules with degree of protection IP67 cannot be used in areas 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.5 m)
exposed to permanently high levels of humidity, in applications 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0m)
with drilling emulsions and cutting oils or when cleaning with 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
high-pressure cleaners. The answer for these applications is 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0 (5 m) *
provided by the expansion of the K60 compact modules with the 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0 (5 m) *
K60R module with IP68/IP69K protection.
The K60R modules are connected instead of the AS-Interface
flat cable using a round cable with M12 cable box.
The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power K60R K60R max. 5 m
supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable.
3RK1 901-1TR00
IP68 protection permits many new applications, which were max. 1.5 m
impossible with the former field modules with degree of protec-
tion IP67. In applications such as filling plants or machine-tools 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.5 m) *) plus connector
NSA0_00339b
the K60R with degree of protection IP68 enables the module to 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0m) 3RX8 000-0CD45
be used directly in zones exposed to permanent loading by 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) or 3RX8 000-0CE45
humidity. It is thus possible to make even more rigorous savings
in wiring with AS-Interface. IP68 test conditions see section IP68
Design /Tests IP68/IP69K.
Cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, such as is regularly per- K60R connection options
formed in the food drinks industry for instance, is possible In the IP67 environment the service-proven standard compo-
without difficulty (IP69K). nents are connected using flat cables. Spur lines are laid into the
In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the IP68 environment by means of a round cable distribution board
AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K60R module (3RK1 901-1NR00). The module is connected with a round cable
there is a round cable connection for direct connection to a to an M12 cable box. For this purpose the module has an M12
round cable. No adapter is required. bus connection instead of the former addressing socket. The
AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply
Mounting are routed together in a 4-pole round cable. There must be no
The same mounting plates are used as for the K60 modules. ground conductor in this round cable. Connection to ground is
Instead of using flat cables the K60R is connected using a made through the mounting plate.
4-pole round cable with an M12 connection. With the K60R the In the IP68 environment only cables with extruded M12 connec-
mounting plate thus serves only as a fixture and ground terminal. tors may be used. These cables are available preassembled as
an M12 cable plug/cable box version:
Addressing
• 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6: 0.5 m long
Addressing is performed using the same socket as for the bus
connection. Connecting the module to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0: 1.0 m long
addressing unit is performed using a standard M12 cable • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5: 1.5 m long
(e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5). If the older version of the To connect the distribution board and the K60R module over
3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is used, a special addressing long distances it is also possible to use freely configurable
cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required. When the mounting is fin- cables with an M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are
ished, the module is connected with the addressing cable to the fitted with an M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45,
addressing unit and addressed. The addressing cable is then 3RX8 000-0CE45 angle plug) and connected to the distribution
removed and the module connected to the bus line. board. This cable is available in two versions:
• 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box
• 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box
To connect more than one K60R module to one spur line, the
spur line can be split again using a T distributor
(3RK1 901-1TR00) with IP68 protection.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/35

AS-Interface
Slaves
Please note the following boundary conditions: The configura- Tests IP68/IP69K
tion guidelines for AS-Interface generally apply. For all M12
connecting cables the maximum permissible current is limited to K60R modules were tested with the following tests:
4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to just 0.34 mm². • Stricter test than IP67: 90 min 1.8 m depth of water
2
For connection of the K60R modules the previously mentioned (IP67: 30 min at 1 m depth of water)
M12 connecting cables with a maximum length of 5 m can be • Salt water test: Five months in salt water, 20 cm deep, at room
used for the spur lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic temperature
resistance (approx. 0.11 W/m) must be taken into account. The
maximum load of the 3RK1 901-1NR00 round cable distribution • Test with particularly creepable oil: Five months completely
board amounts to 4 A in total for all four connections. under oil at room temperature
• Test with drilling emulsion: Five months at room temperature
In applications with exclusively round cable wiring the (components of the drilling emulsion: Anionic and non-ionic
AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage can be emulsifiers, paraffinic low-aromatic mineral oil, boric acid al-
routed together for up to 20 m when using a round cable of kanolamines, corrosion inhibitors, oil content 40 %)
4 x 1.5 mm². For greater cable lengths two separate cables with
2 x 1.5 mm² each are used. For these applications no round • Test in oil bath (Excelence 416 oil) with alternating oil bath
cable distribution board (3RK1 901-1NR00) is required. Distribu- temperature: 130 cycles of 15 to 55 °C, two months
tion to the K60R modules is then performed with a terminal box • Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner according to IP69K:
and the previously mentioned M12 connecting cables. 80 to 100 bar, 10 to 15 cm distance, time per side > 30 sec,
water temperature 80 °C
To simulate requirements as realistically as possible the modules
were artificially aged prior to the tests by 15 temperature cycles
of -25/+85 °C. During the test the modules were connected to
3RX1 connecting cables. Unassigned connections were closed
with 3RK1 901-1KA00 sealing caps.
Note: Sealing caps and M12 connections must be tightened with
the correct torque.
4 inputs / 4 outputs IP68/IP69K
Standard assignment
3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3
Operational voltage according to AS-Interface 26.5 ... 31.6
specification in V
Total current input in mA 270
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
• Current carrying capacity for all inputs 200
(Tu 40 °C) in mA
• Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+
PIN 2 = data input I
PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input I
PIN 5 = ground connection
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per output DC 12 /13 typical 2
• Maximum aggregate current per module in A 4
• Socket assignment of outputs 3 = "-"
4 = output
• External power supply 24 V DC Shared round cable connection with AS-Interface connection through M12 female connector
Slave type Standard slave
I/O configuration 7
ID/ID2 code 0/F
2/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs / 4 outputs IP68/IP69K

Standard assignment
3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3
2
• Socket 1 PIN2/4 = IN1(D0)
• Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0)
AS-Interface certificate Yes
Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding
Degree of protection IP68/IP69K with 3RK1 901-0CA00 mounting plate
IP68 test conditions see section Design / Tests IP68/IP69K.
The degree of protection is achieved only when all M12 connections are tightened with the
correct torque. The I/O sockets which are not required must be closed with 3RK1 901-1KA00
caps.
Ground terminal PIN5 of each M12 socket is connected to the grounding wrist strap in the mounting plate
using a pin
Number of I/O sockets 8
Status displays
• Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED
Note 2 An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the
output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III.
Round cable distribution boards IP67

AS-i /Uaux flat cable on 4 x M12, passive without LED
3RK1 901-1NR00
Function Connection of the K60R modules to AS-Interface flat cable in an IP67 environment
Operational voltage in V 26.5 ... 31.6 DC (AS-Interface)
Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC
Current carrying capacity for all M12 sockets, total in A 4
Socket assignment 1 = AS-i "+"
2 = Uaux "-"
3 = AS-i "–"
4 = Uaux "+"
Connection 4 M12 socket (for connection of K60R modules)
Number of M12 sockets 4
Connection Using contact pins on FKE coupling module (included in delivery)
M12-T distribution boards

3RK1 901-1TR00
Function For connection of several K60R units to one M12 spur line
Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC
Current carrying capacity total in A 4 at T = 40 °C
Connection M12
Number of M12 sockets 1 x M12 connector / 2 x M12 box
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/37

AS-Interface
Slaves
2
1 5 2 60
9
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 4 2
34
152
6 0 2 9
4 0
73
I/O module
6 0
33 15
4,5
39
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 2 7 a
G_NSA0_XX_00032
3 4
1 5 2
3RK1 901-0CB01 mounting plate for mounting on a standard mounting

7 3
rail
56 17
3 3 1 0
3 9
4 ,5
NSA0_00340
45
M12x1
Fem. Male
M12x1
3RK1 901-0CA00 mounting plate for mounting on a wall
cable cable
plug plug
Cover ring
M12x1
Wiring diagram
4-pole
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
1234
M12-T distribution board
2/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
The K45 compact modules are the ideal supplement to the K60 Installation
large compact modules, which have proven their worth in indus-
2
try. They are the logical consequence for rounding off the bottom
end of the existing product spectrum.
The acclaimed advantages of the existing K60 compact
modules are fully emulated by the far smaller K45 modules. Their
footprint is is the same as that of the user modules. However,
they have a mounting depth which is only two-thirds of the user
module and hence an exact match for the compact module
family.
Yet in spite of these small dimensions all the modules have large
labels and an integrated addressing socket.
Two mounting plates are offered for the K45 compact modules:
• The first mounting plate has a hole pattern that is identical to • Place the AS-Interface flat cables (yellow or yellow and black)
that of the K60 compact modules. This means that K60 com- in the corresponding wiring duct of the mounting plate. Any
pact modules can be mounted together with K45 modules in direction is possible.
an aligned arrangement. The flat cables can be inserted in the • Hook the module top in the mounting plate.
recesses of the mounting plates where they cause no • Fasten the top to the mounting plate using just one screw.
hindrance.
• The second mounting plate comes with the hole pattern and Mounting options
the standard rail mounting of the user modules integrated.
Mounting the flat cables is now easier than ever. The yellow and
black AS-Interface flat cable can be inserted into the mounting
plates from the left or right regardless of the position of the
coding lug. The correct polarity of the applied voltages is always
guaranteed.
Sensors/actuators are connected using M12 sockets. The
4E module can be ordered optionally with M8 connection
sockets.
• Standard rail mounting using 3RK1 901-2DA00 mounting

plate.
• Wall mounting using 3RK1 901-2EA00 mounting plate.
• Mounting (horizontal and vertical fixing are both possible) on
generally available profile systems using screw-on sliding
blocks (max. M5, not included in delivery) on
3RK1 901-2EA00 or 3RK1 901-2DA00 mounting plate.
Addressing
Addressing is performed using the integrated addressing
socket.
The M12 sockets which are not required must be closed with
3RK1 901-1KA00 caps in order to guarantee the quoted degree
of protection.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/39

AS-Interface
Slaves
Technical specifications common to all digital I/O modules IP67 – K45
2
Operational voltage according to AS-Interface specification 26.5 ... 31.6

in V
Reverse polarity protection U AS-Interface Built-in
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 301)
Outputs
• External power supply 24 V DC Using black AS-Interface flat cable
Degree of protection IP67 (IP65 with M8 snap-fitting connection)
Ground terminal Using PIN5 of the M12 sockets and outgoing feeder using 2.8-mm flat connector
(no ground terminal with M8 sockets)
Status displays
• Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red dual LED
Note 2 An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of
the output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection
class III.
1) For 3RK2 400-1BQ20-0AA3 Umin = 16.5 V
2/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs
Standard slave
Standard assignment
2
M12 M8 screw-type terminal M8 snap-action terminal
3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3 3RK1 200-0CT20-0AA3 3RK1 200-0CU20-0AA3
Current carrying capacity for all 200 200 200
inputs (Tu 40 °C) in mA
Socket assignment of inputs PIN1 = sensor supply L+ PIN1 = sensor supply L+ PIN1 = sensor supply L+
PIN3 = sensor supply L- PIN3 = sensor supply L- PIN3 = sensor supply L-
PIN4 + 2 = data input PIN4 = data input PIN4 = data input
PIN5 = ground terminal
ID/ID2 code 0/F 0/F 0/F
4 inputs
A/B slave
Standard assignment
M12 M8 screw-type terminal M8 screw-type terminal
3RK2 200-0CQ20-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CT20-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CU20-0AA3
PIN3 = sensor supply L- PIN3 = sensor supply L- PIN3 = sensor supply L-
PIN4 + 2 = data input PIN4 = data input PIN4 = data input
Slave type A/B slave A/B slave A/B slave
ID/ID2 code A/0 A/0 A/0
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/41

AS-Interface
Slaves
2x2 inputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs 2 x (1 input/1 output)

-- Current carrying capacity of Current carrying capacity of
outputs: 2 A1) outputs: 0.2 A
2
A/B slave Standard slave Standard slave

Y assignment Standard assignment Y assignment
M12 M12 M12
3RK2 200-0CQ22-0AA3 3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3 3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3
Current carrying capacity for all 200 200 2002)
Reverse polarity protection Uaux Does not apply By coding Uaux not required
PIN3 = sensor supply L- PIN2 = data input PIN2 = output
PIN4 + 2 = data input PIN3 = sensor supply L PIN3 = sensor supply L-
PIN5 = ground terminal PIN4 = data input PIN4 = data input
PIN5 = ground terminal PIN5 = ground terminal
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A -- 21) 0.22)
per output DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current -- 3 0.22)
per module in A
Slave type A/B slave Standard slave Standard slave
ID/ID2 code A/0 0/F F/F
PIN2 = IN2(D1) PIN2 = OUT3(D2)
• Socket 2 -- PIN4/2 = IN2(D1) --
• Socket 3 -- PIN4 = OUT3(D2) --
• Socket 4 PIN4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = IN2(D1)
PIN2 = IN4(D3) PIN2 = OUT4(D3)
1) The typical current carrying capacity per output increases with 2) Aggregate current for all inputs and outputs max. 200 mA.
version "E12 " from 1.5 to 2 A (available since approx. 07/2003).
4 outputs 3 outputs 2 outputs / 2 inputs

Current carrying capacity of Current carrying capacity of Current carrying capacity of
outputs: 1 A outputs: 1 A outputs: 2 A
Standard slave A/B slave A/B slave
Standard assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment
M12 M12 M12
3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3 3RK2 100-1EQ20-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BQ20-0AA3
Reverse polarity protection Uaux By coding By coding By coding
Socket assignment of inputs -- -- PIN1 = sensor supply L+
PIN2 = data input
PIN3 = sensor supply L
PIN4 = data input
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A per 1 1 2
output DC 12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current per 3 3 3
module in A
Slave type Standard slave A/B slave A/B slave
I/O configuration 8 8 B
ID/ID2 code 0/F A/0 A/0
• Socket 1 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4/2 = IN3(D2)
• Socket 2 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4/2 = IN4(D3)
• Socket 4 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) n/a PIN4 = OUT2(D1)
2/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
K45 mounting plates Distribution board Cable terminating pieces

For wall mounting For standard rail mounting -- --
3RK1 901-2EA00 3RK1 901-2DA00 3RK1 901-1NN00 3RK1 901-1MN00
2
Ambient temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 40 ... +85
Degree of protection IP67 with screw-mounted K45 IP67 with screw-mounted K45 IP65 with screw-mounted top IP67 with inserted shaped
compact module compact module AS-Interface cable
Connection technique For shaped AS-Interface For shaped AS-Interface For shaped AS-Interface PG gland with integrated seal
cable, contacting using cable, contacting using cable, yellow or black, (seal shaped with
insulation displacement insulation displacement contacting using insulation AS-Interface cable profile)
terminals integrated in the terminals integrated in the displacement terminals
compact module compact module integrated in the top
Installation • Wall mounting • Standard rail mounting/ • Standard rail mounting/ • Cable terminating piece
• On profile system wall mounting wall mounting can be fastened, e.g. to a
(corresponding sliding • On profile system • On profile system machine, using the inte-
blocks required) (corresponding sliding (corresponding sliding grated eyelet
• Hole spacing compatible blocks required) blocks required)
with K60 mounting plate • Hole spacing compatible • Hole spacing compatible
with FK/FK-E coupling with FK/FK-E coupling
module (user module) module (user module)
Note Insertion of AS-Interface Insertion of AS-Interface A distribution board can per- --
cable, yellow and black, cable, yellow and black, form the following functions:
possible from any direction possible from any direction • Configuration of network
structures (branch function)
• Splitting of cable segments
(splitting function)
• Sealing of cable ends in the
module (sealing function)
To terminate one or both
cables in the distribution
board, seals (straight and
shaped ) for inserting in the
bottom of the distribution
board are required. These
seals are not included in the
scope of supply and must be
ordered separately
(3RK1 902-0AR00). If both
cables are to be routed
completely through the
module, no additional seals
are required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/43

AS-Interface
Slaves
■ Dimensional drawings ■ Schematics

33 10
Terminal assignment for input, pnp (M8 socket)
2
4
Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 4: Supply L–
Pin 4: Input signal
73
3 1
80
45
NSA0_00196
NSA00028
Standard assignment
3 33
4,5
45 Terminal assignment for input, pnp (M12 socket)
3RK1 901-2EA00 mounting plate for wall mounting

1 2 P in 1 : S u p p ly L +
Hole pattern and fixing options identical to that of K60 compact modules
P in 2 : In p u t s ig n a l ( b r id g e d w ith P in 4 )
5 P in 3 : S u p p ly L
P in 4 : In p u t s ig n a l ( b r id g e d w ith P in 2 )
14 4 3 P in 5 : E a rth c o n n e c tio n
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 0 6 a
Standard assignment
66
80
Terminal assignment for input, pnp (M12 socket)

NSA0_00029b
Y cable/single cable
7
1 2 Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 2: Input signal 2
31
5 Pin 3: Supply L–
45 Pin 4: Input signal 1
4 3 Pin 5: Earth connection
NSA0_00008b
3RK1 901-2DA00 mounting plate for standard rail mounting

Hole pattern and fixing options identical to that of user modules
Y assignment
ø5,2 21
Terminal assignment for output, pnp (M12 socket) 24 V DC
33
ø5,1 1 2 P in 1 : n o t a s s ig n e d
P in 2 : n o t a s s ig n e d
66
5
80
P in 3 : S u p p ly L
P in 4 : O u tp u t s ig n a l
4 3 P in 5 : E a r th c o n n e c tio n
NSA00308
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 0 7 a
7
ø5,2 Standard assignment

31
45
3RK1 901-1NN00 distribution board

NSA0_00309
3RK1 901-1NN00 distribution board
2/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60
■ Overview
The analog modules are divided into five groups:
2
• Input module for sensors with current signal
• Input module for sensors with voltage signal
• Input module for sensors with thermal resistor
• Output module for current actuators
• Output module for voltage actuators
The input modules are available with two or four input channels.
It is in addition possible to convert the two-channel module to
using only one input channel, thus enabling very short transmis-
sion times. The conversion is effected by means of a jumper plug
at socket 3.
The output modules are configured as two-channel modules as
standard.
The input and output channels are electrically isolated from the
AS-Interface network. If sensors with a higher power require-
ment are to be connected, more power can be supplied through
AS-Interface analog modules from the K60 compact series the auxiliary voltage as an alternative to the internal supply.
detect or issue analog signals locally. These modules are linked In the manual the modules are presented in great detail along
to the higher level controller through an AS-Interface master with their technical specifications and in-depth notes on
according to Specification 2.1. operation. Sample function blocks round off the manual.
■ Function
One User program

cycle with
system
function call Conversion
Seven
AS-Interface AS-Interface
CPU Analog module Analog value
Master cycles
(max. 5 ms each)
G_NSA0_XX_00181
Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59
integrated standard function blocks
Data transfer according to analog profile 7.3/7.4
With analog profile 7.3/7.4 at least seven AS-Interface cycles

must be passed through before transmission is completed.
This requires the use of a master according to Extended
Specification V2.1.
With input modules the complete analog value is then available
in the AS-Interface master. Preprocessing is thus performed in
the master.
With the next system function call the user program brings the
analog value as one value into the user program. Hence the
analog value is very quickly updated.
The analog value transmission allies in reverse order for the
output modules as well.
In total this results in the following conversion and transmission
time1):
1 channel 2 channels 4 channels
Conversion and max. 95 ms max. 235 ms max. 435 ms
transmission time
1) With presetting: smoothing function deactivated; line filter 50 Hz
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/45

AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2
Slave type Analog slave

Profile 7.3
Number format S7
Operational voltage according to AS-Interface specification in V 26.5 ... 31.6
Total current input of the module including connection of 150
sensors / actuators in mA
Current transfer with connection of two sensors in mA Max. 46
(without Uaux infeed)
Additional supply of sensors through Uaux in V 24 ... 30
Current transfer from Uaux with connection of two sensors in mA Max. 500
Current transfer with connection of two current / voltage Max 30 / max. 24
actuators in mA
I/O configuration 7
ID code 3
AS-Interface certificate Available soon
Certification UL, CSA, shipbuilding
Degree of protection IP67 (with inserted cables)
Display of AUX PWR (Uaux) Green LED
Display of AS-i Green LED
Display of FAULT Red LED
2/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
■ Schematics
Pin assignment for input module Pin assignment for output module
2
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V)
Pin 2: IN+
1 2 Pin 3: Supply M (ground) 1 2 Pin 5: Cable shield
Pin 4: IN-
5 Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without
5
/ FG (functional ground) external sensor supply.
4 3 4 3 NSA0_00016a
NSA0_00013b All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
Current input for 4-conductor sensor Current output
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V)

1 2 Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: Supply M (ground) Pin 5: Cable shield
1 2
5 Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield / All pin assignments are shown without
NSA0_00014c
FG (functional ground) 5 external sensor supply.
4 3
Bridge from n– to M(3)
can be set intenally via All pin assignments are shown without 4 3 NSA0_00020a
parameterisation external sensor supply.
Current input for 2-conductor sensor Voltage output

Connection of the 2-channel input modules for
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V) single-channel use
Pin 2: IN+
1 2 Pin 3: Supply M (ground) The 3RK1 901-1AA00 input bridge can also be used for this
Pin 4: IN- purpose.
5 Pin 5: Cable shield /
FG (functional ground)
4 3
NSA0_00017b All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
1 2
Voltage input for 4-conductor sensor 5
NSA0_00409
Pin 1: const+
Pin 2: IN+
1 2 Pin 3: const–
Pin 4: IN-
5 Pt 100 Pin 5: Cable shield
4 3 All pin assignments are shown without

NSA0_00018b external sensor supply.
Thermal resistor for 4-conductor sensor
Pin 1: const+
1 2 Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: const–
Pt 100 Pin 4: IN-
5
Pin 5: Cable shield
4 3
All pin assignments are shown without
NSA0_00015c external sensor supply.
Pin 1: const+
1 2 Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: const–
5 Pt 100 Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield
4 3
All pin assignments are shown without
NSA0_00019c external sensor supply.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/47

AS-Interface
Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet,
IP20, Introduction
■ Overview
2
SlimLine S22.5/S45 Flat module

For AS-Interface applications inside cabinets there are various
module series for the most diverse requirements:
• SlimLine S22.5
• SlimLine S45
• F90 modules
• Flat module
All modules of these series can be snap-mounted directly on a
standard mounting rail or be fastened using screws.
AS-Interface modules in IP20 have direct terminals for the
AS-Interface cables and therefore do not require a lower part.
F90 module
Series Spectrum Mounting on 35 mm Wall mounting using push-in Other possibilities

standard mounting rail lugs (Order No.: 3RP1 903)
according to EN 50022
SlimLine S22.5 • 4I (standard and A/B modules) á á --
• 4O
• 2I/2O (steady-state/relay outputs)
• Counters1)
• Ground fault detection module1)
SlimLine S45 • 4I/4O (steady-state/relay outputs) á á --
• 4I/4O with floating I/Os
• 4I/3O (A/B modules)
F90 modules • 4I/4O (screw-type terminal connection) á -- --
• 4I/4O (connection using Combicon
connector)
• 16I
Flat module • 4I/4O (screw-type terminal connection) -- -- Integrated lugs for screw fixing
1) More information about these modules:
See Catalog LV 1 / chapter Systems / section AS-Interface / Slaves /
Modules with Special Functions
See A&D Mall / section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial Controls /
Systems / AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with Special Functions
2/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet,
IP20, Introduction
■ Function
Addressing LED diagnostics indications
2
All modules of the Slimline S22.5, S45 and F90 series and the flat SlimLine series
module can be addressed through an integrated addressing AS-Interface modules of the SlimLine series have not only status
socket in the mounted state as well. An addressing unit displays for inputs and outputs but also two additional LEDs for
(3RK1 904-2AB01 AS-Interface addressing and diagnostics indicating the status of the module.
unit) is required for this.
AUX PWR ) 1 On Off Off
AS-Interface On On Off On Flashing On
FAULT Off Off Off On On Flashing

No communication:
Master in STOP mode
NSA0_00318a

UAux failure Normal operation and
UAux applied
1) LED not available on 3RK1 400-0BE00-0AA2, 3RK1 402-0BE00-0AA2 and

3RK1 100-0CE00-0AA2.
F90 module (16I)

All modules of this series have not only status displays for inputs
and outputs but also an LED for the AS-Interface voltage.
AS-Interface On Off
AS-Interface voltage not applied

AS-Interface voltage applied
NSA0_00319
Flat module and F90 module (4I/4O)

The flat module and the F90 modules with four inputs and four
outputs have a dual LED for a diagnostics function.

AUX PWR On Off Off
AS-i / FAULT On On Off On Flashing Flashing
Flashing

No communication:
Master in STOP mode
NSA0_00313c

UAux failure
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/49

AS-Interface
Slaves
I/O Modules for operation in the control cabinet,
IP20, SlimLine
■ Overview Features
SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series

2
The AS-Interface series of modules for the "SlimLine" cabinet Removeable

terminal blocks
with IP20 protection creates space in the cabinet and in distrib-
uted local boxes.
For these modules the priority was placed on a narrow type of
construction. They have a width of only 22.5 mm or 45 mm.
Standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface cable can be
connected using screw-type or spring-loaded terminals. Contact
Integrated adapters enable mounting on a standard mounting

rail. Disassembly from the standard mounting rail is quick and
NSA0_00363
easy and requires no tools.
With an additional accessory the modules can also be screwed
on.
• Service-proven terminal technology
All modules are fitted at the front with LEDs which indicate the The new type of construction of the removable terminal means
module’s status. that the conductors remain easy to connect. The old conduc-
tor cross-sections can still be used.
An addressing socket integrated at the front enables the module
to be addressed also when it is installed. • Variable connection methods
All modules are available with screw-type and spring-loaded
In addition to the digital input/output modules there are modules connections.
of construction type S22.5 with special functions. These include:
• Coding
• Counter module The coding ensures that the terminal blocks cannot be mixed
up (EN 50178).
• Ground fault detection module
• Withdrawal and vibration safety
More information about these modules, see The terminal blocks are latched to the enclosure. The terminal
• Catalog LV 1 / chapter Systems / section AS-Interface / blocks can be detached with the help of a VDE0100T410
Slaves / Modules with Special Functions (IEC-4-41) screwdriver. The terminal blocks cannot be
detached unintentionally.
• A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
Controls / Systems / AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with • Finger-safe
Special Functions The contacts are finger-safe according to DIN 61140
(IEC 60529) even if the unit is removed.
■ Design • Labeling
All terminal connections are printed onto the terminal block
Removable terminals which allows the unit to be factory-fitted.
The removable terminal is the innovative connection method by Unlocking the removable terminal
Siemens for AS-Interface SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45
series. This allows the complete terminal block to be quickly and
easily assembled and disassembled. The connections do not
have to be detached for this purpose.
Note
Before the terminal blocks are removed, the unit must be
de-energized.
NSA0_00364
Step 1: release latch with screwdriver
2/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
Locking the removable terminal
2
CLICK
NSA0_00365
NSA0_00367a
Step 2: pull terminal to the front
Push terminal to the back until it latches
Customer benefits
• Quick replacement of the basic unit minimizes maintenance
costs and reduces downtimes
• The coding of the terminals prevents mistakes during
NSA0_00366a
replacement
• Configuration without unit possible
• Finger-safe during replacement
• Easy screw-type and spring-loaded connection
Step 3: lift terminal
Technical specifications common to all SlimLine modules
Operational voltage according to AS-Interface specification in V 26.5 ... 31.6
Input circuit PNP
Status displays
• Display of AS-i Green LED
• Display of FAULT Red LED
Note An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of
the output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection
class III.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/51

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
SlimLine S22.5
4 inputs
Screw-type connection
2
Standard slave Standard slave A/B slave

2-conductors 2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors
3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2 3RK1 200-0CE02-0AA2 3RK2 200-0CE02-0AA2
Inputs
• Sensor supply using Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant
AS-Interface
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 20 ... 30 20 ... 30
• Current carrying capacity for -- 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
• Switching level High in V 10 10 10
• Input current Low/High in mA 1.5 / 5 1.5 / 5 1.5 / 5
ID/ID2 code 0/F 0/F A/0
• Data bit D0 IN1 IN1 IN1
Connection Using screw-type terminals Using screw-type terminals Using screw-type terminals
4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs

Spring-loaded connection Spring-loaded connection Spring-loaded connection
Standard slave Standard slave A/B slave
2-conductors 2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors
3RK1 200-0CG00-0AA2 3RK1 200-0CG02-0AA2 3RK2 200-0CG02-0AA2
Inputs
AS-Interface
• Current carrying capacity for -- 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
ID/ID2 code 0/F 0/F A/0
Connection Spring-loaded terminal connection Spring-loaded terminal connection Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5) • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5) • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve: • Finely stranded with end sleeve: • Finely stranded with end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1) 2 (0.25–1) 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve: • Finely stranded without end sleeve: • Finely stranded without end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1.5) 2 (0.25–1.5) 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded: • AWG conductors, solid or stranded: • AWG conductors, solid or stranded:
AWG 2 (24–16) AWG 2 (24–16) AWG 2 (24–16)
Note Detachment tool for spring-loaded Detachment tool for spring-loaded Detachment tool for spring-loaded
terminal connection: see section terminal connection: see section terminal connection: see section
Accessories Accessories Accessories
2/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
2 inputs/ 2 outputs
Screw-type connection Screw-type connection Spring-loaded connection
2
2-conductors 2-conductors 2-conductors
PNP transistor (2 A) Relays PNP transistor (2 A)
3RK1 400-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1 402-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1 400-0BG00-0AA2
Inputs
AS-Interface
• Current carrying capacity for -- -- --
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2-conductor technology 2-conductor technology 2-conductor technology
Outputs
• Type of output Transistor (PNP) Relay Transistor (PNP)
• Current carrying capacity in A 2 -- 2
• Maximum aggregate current 4 -- 4
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection Built-in External back-up fuse Built-in
• Induction protection Built-in Does not apply Built-in
• Reverse polarity protection Not installed Does not apply Not installed
• External power supply 24 V DC Using terminals: Does not apply Using terminals:
• Terminal 7 = "+" • Terminal 7 = "+"
• Terminal 10 = "-" • Terminal 10 = "-"
• Ith -- 6 --
• AC-15 -- 3 --
• DC-13, 24 V -- 1 --
• DC-13, 110 V -- 0.2 --
• DC-13, 230 V -- 0.1 --
• Watchdog Built-in Built-in Built-in
• Data bit D2 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1
Connection Screw-type terminals Screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections -- -- • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded:
AWG 2 (24–16)
Note -- -- Detachment tool for spring-loaded
terminal connection: see section
Accessories
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/53

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
2 inputs/ 2 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs

Spring-loaded connection Screw-type connection Spring-loaded connection
2
2-conductors -- --
Relay PNP transistor (1 A) PNP transistor (1 A)
3RK1 402-0BG00-0AA2 3RK1 100-1CE00-0AA2 3RK1 100-1CG00-0AA2
Inputs
• Sensor supply using Short-circuit and overload resistant -- --
AS-Interface
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 -- --
• Current carrying capacity for -- -- --
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2-conductor technology -- --
• Switching level High in V 10 -- --
• Input current Low/High in mA 1.5 / 5 -- --
Outputs
• Type of output Relay Solid state (PNP) Solid state (PNP)
Changeover contact, floating
• Current carrying capacity in A -- 1 1
• Maximum aggregate current -- 2 2
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection External back-up fuse required Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection Does not apply Built-in Built-in
• Reverse polarity protection Does not apply Built-in Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC Does not apply Using screw-type terminals: Using screw-type terminals:
• Terminal 7 = "+" • Terminal 7 = "+"
• Terminal 10 = M • Terminal 10 = M
• Ith 6 -- --
• AC-15 3 -- --
• DC-13, 24 V 1 -- --
• DC-13, 110 V 0.2 -- --
• DC-13, 230 V 0.1 -- --
• Data bit D0 IN1 OUT1 OUT1
• Data bit D1 IN2 OUT2 OUT2
Connection Spring-loaded terminal connection Screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5) -- • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve: • Finely stranded with end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1) 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve: • Finely stranded without end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1.5) 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded: • AWG conductors, solid or stranded:
AWG 2 (24–16) AWG 2 (24–16)
Note Detachment tool for spring-loaded -- Detachment tool for spring-loaded
terminal connection: see section terminal connection: see section
Accessories Accessories
2/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
SlimLine S45
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
2
Standard slave
2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors (floating)
PNP transistor (1 A) PNP transistor (2 A) PNP transistor (1 A) floating
3RK1 400-1CE00-0AA2 3RK1 400-1CE01-0AA2 3RK1 402-3CE01-0AA2
Inputs
AS-Interface
• Current carrying capacity for 200 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state Solid-state Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity in A 1 2 1
• Maximum aggregate current 4 4 4
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection Built-in Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection Built-in Built-in Built-in
• Reverse polarity protection Built-in Built-in Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC • Terminal 13 = L24+ • Terminal 13 = L24+ • Sensor supply:
• Terminal 19 = M24 • Terminal 19 = M24 - Terminal 13 = U_s+
- Terminal 19 = U_s–
• Actuator supply:
- Terminal 14 = L+
- Terminal 20 to 24 = M
• Ith -- -- --
• AC-15 -- -- --
• DC-13, 24 V -- -- --
• DC-13, 110 V -- -- --
• DC-13, 230 V -- -- --
• Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1
Connection Using screw-type terminals Using screw-type terminals Using screw-type terminals
Note -- -- The module has four floating inputs and
four floating switching outputs. An
external additional supply of 20 to 30 V
DC according to VDE 0106 (PELV)
protection class III is required for the
supply of the input and output circuits.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/55

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
Screw-type connection Spring-loaded connection Spring-loaded connection
2
2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors

Relay PNP transistor (1 A) PNP transistor (2 A)
3RK1 402-3CE00-0AA2 3RK1 400-1CG00-0AA2 3RK1 400-1CG01-0AA2
Inputs
AS-Interface
• Current carrying capacity for 200 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
Outputs
• Type of output Relays Solid-state Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity in A -- 1 2
• Maximum aggregate current -- 4 4
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection External back-up fuse 6 A gL/gG Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection Does not apply Built-in Built-in
• Reverse polarity protection -- Built-in Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC Does not apply • Terminal 13 = L24+ • Terminal 13 = L24+
• Terminal 19 = M24 • Terminal 19 = M24
• Ith 5 -- --
• AC-15 3 -- --
• DC-13, 24 V 1 -- --
• DC-13, 110 V 0.2 -- --
• DC-13, 230 V 0.1 -- --
• I/O configuration 7 7 7
Connection Using screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminal connection Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections -- • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5) • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve: • Finely stranded with end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1) 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve: • Finely stranded without end sleeve:
2 (0.25–1.5) 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded: • AWG conductors, solid or stranded:
AWG 2 (24–16) AWG 2 (24–16)
Note -- Detachment tool for spring-loaded Detachment tool for spring-loaded
terminal connection: see section terminal connection: see section
Accessories Accessories
2/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
Spring-loaded connection
Standard slave
2
2- and 3-conductors
PNP transistor (1 A) Relays
3RK1 402-3CG01-0AA2 3RK1 402-3CG00-0AA2
Inputs
• Sensor supply using Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant
AS-Interface
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 20 ... 30
• Current carrying capacity for 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
• Switching level High in V 10 10
• Input current Low/High in mA 1.5 / 5 1.5 / 5
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state Relays
• Current carrying capacity in A 1 --
per output DC-12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current 4 --
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection Built-in External back-up fuse 6 A gL/gG
• Induction protection Built-in Does not apply
• Reverse polarity protection Built-in Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC Sensor supply: Does not apply
• Terminal 13 = U_s+
• Terminal 19 = U_s–
• Actuator supply:
• Terminal 14 = L+
• Terminal 20 to 24 = M
• Ith -- 5
• AC-15 -- 3
• DC-13, 24 V -- 1
• DC-13, 110 V -- 0.2
• DC-13, 230 V -- 0.1
• Watchdog Built-in Built-in
ID/ID2 code 0/F 0/F
• Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1
Connection Spring-loaded terminal connection Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5) • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1) • Finely stranded with end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1.5) • Finely stranded without end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded: AWG 2 (24–16) • AWG conductors, solid or stranded: AWG 2 (24–16)
Note 1 Detachment tool for spring-loaded terminal connection: Detachment tool for spring-loaded terminal connection:
see section Accessories see section Accessories
Note 2 The module has four floating inputs and four floating --
switching outputs. An external additional supply of 20 to
30 V according to VDE 0106 (PELV) protection class III is
required for the supply of the input and output circuits.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/57

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
4 inputs/ 3 outputs
Screw-type connection Spring-loaded connection
A/B slave A/B slave
2
2- and 3-conductors 2- and 3-conductors

PNP transistor (2 A) PNP transistor (2 A)
3RK2 400-1FE00-0AA2 3RK2 400-1FG00-0AA2
Inputs
• Sensor supply using Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant
AS-Interface
• Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 20 ... 30
• Current carrying capacity for 200 200
sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2- and 3-conductor technology 2- and 3-conductor technology
• Switching level High in V 10 10
• Input current Low/High in mA 1.5 / 5 1.5 / 5
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity in A 2 2
per output DC-12 /13 typical
• Maximum aggregate current 4 4
per module in A
• Short-circuit protection Built-in Built-in
• Induction protection Built-in Built-in
• Reverse polarity protection Built-in Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC • Terminal 13 = L24+ • Terminal 13 = L24+
• Terminal 19 = M24 • Terminal 19 = M24
• Ith -- --
• AC-15 -- --
• DC-13, 24 V -- --
• DC-13, 110 V -- --
• DC-13, 230 V -- --
• Watchdog Built-in Built-in
ID/ID2 code A/0 A/0
• Data bit D3 IN4 IN4
Connection Using screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections -- • Solid: 2 (0.25–1.5)
in mm2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve: 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded: AWG 2 (24–16)
Note -- Detachment tool for spring-loaded terminal connection:
see section Accessories
2/58 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, SlimLine
■ Dimensional drawings ■ Schematics

Switching example for SlimLine S22.5
86
2
45 65
4 7 5 36
A S - i- + + 2 - w ir e
A S - i- s e n s o r
1 2 3 +
A S - i+ N 1 N 2 O U T
A S - i+
4 5 6
A d d r e s s in g
A S -i s o c k e t
L E D 's f o r c o m m u n ic a t io n
A D D R
102
68
92
A
B
N 1
N 2
L E D 's f o r in p u t s 1 - 4
N 3
NSA0_00406 N 4
A B 7 8 9
N 3 N 4
S ta n d a r d te r m in a l
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 2 7
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 ,3 1 0 7 ,6 1 0 1 1
+ 1 2
+
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 1 1 0 4
R e m o v e a b le te r m in a l
3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 1 0 8
A S - i- - +
SlimLine S45
1 2 3
A S - i+ N 1 N 2
22,5 5 86 4 5 6
4 7 36 A S -i
A D D R
N 1
N 2
N 3
110x15
120
74
68
N 4
B
A
3 - w ir e
7 8 9
- IN 3 IN 4 s e n s o r
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 2 8
+
O U T
1 0 1 1 1 2
-
- + +
NSA0_00407
3RK1 200-0CE02-0AA2
A B
Switching example for SlimLine S45
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 1 ,6 1 0 1 ,6
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 0 1 0 0 M e c h a n ic a l +
O U T
s w itc h e s
R e m o v e a b le te r m in a l A S - i- -
-
S e n s o r 3 -L (P N P )
+ + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 1 0 3 A S - i-
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 3 1 0 2 +
O U T
A S - i+ IN 1 IN 2 - IN 3 IN 4
-
A S - i+ S e n s o r 2 -L (P N P )
SlimLine S22.5 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
A d d r e s s in g s o c k e t
A S -i
A U X P O W E R L E D A U X P O W E R
L E D 's f o r c o m m u n ic a t io n
a v a ila b le
IN 1 IN 3
L E D 's f o r in p u t 1 - 2 L E D 's f o r in p u t 3 - 4
IN 2 IN 4
O U T 1 O U T 3
L E D 's f o r o u t p u t s 1 - 2 A D D R L E D 's f o r o u t p u t s 3 - 4
O U T 2 O U T 4
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
A U X P O W E R 2 4 V D C
+
+ L 2 4 + O U T 1 O U T 2 O U T 3 O U T 4 C o n s u m e r
-
- 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4
M 2 4 - - - -
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 2 9
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/59

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, F90 modules
■ Function Note 1
The following function blocks (FB) are available for the sequence
Mode of operation of the 16I module (3RG9 002-0DE00 and control:
• FB 21 (E16-2433) for the AS-Interface master CP2433
2
3RG9 004-0DE00)
(AG S5-95 U)
The 16 inputs are organized in four groups of four inputs each.
• FB 22 (E16-2430) for the AS-Interface master CP2430
Only one group is allowed to be activated at a time. The PLC (AG S5-115 U)
activates each group one after the other and reads the four items
• FC 22 for S7
of input information from each group into the process image of
the inputs (PAE). The user program assigns the items of input The time between two calls of the FB for a module must amount
information to the respective groups, i.e. the output image (PAA) to at least 30 ms in order for the switching states of the inputs to
of the PLC must match the set output of the module or items of be read in reliably.
input information would otherwise be read by a wrong group.
Note 2
With disrupted AS-Interface transmission it can take three
Programming examples are available from
AS-Interface cycles (15 ms) for the output image (AA) of the
Technical Assistance, Tel. +49 (0) 911 895-5900 or the Internet:
slave to match the output image of the master and hence that of
the PLC. Similarly it can take three AS-Interface cycles to trans- You can find more information on the Internet at:
mit the input image of the slave. If message frames on the par-
ticular slave are disrupted for more than three successive http://www.siemens.com/as-interface
AS-Interface cycles, a "Config Error" results on the master. The
input image in the master is set to "Zero" and the error bit is set
in the PLC.
Example: Behavior of the AA and EA in the master and in the
slave when the AS-Interface transmission is disrupted
AS- PLC Master Module Note

NSA0_00321
Inter-
face-
cycle PIQ PII QI QI II
1000 xxxx
1 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx fault in MC or SR
2 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx fault in MC or SR
3 1000 xxxx 0111 EEEE 1000 EEEE I invalid because of
switchover time in module
4 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx 1000 EEEE fault in MC or SR
5 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx 1000 EEEE fault in MC or SR
6 1000 xxxx 0111 EEEE 1000 EEEE no fault in MC or SR
1000 EEEE 0111
Legend:
QI Output image
II Input image
MC Master call
PIQ Process image of the outputs
PII Process image of the inputs
SR Slave response
PLC Programmable logic controller
The example shows that the AA and EA in the master and in the
slave do not match each other until after six AS-Interface cycles.
The PLC cycle is asynchronous in relation to the AS-Interface
cycle. Hence the time it takes the AA and EA from the master
and the PLC to match each other is increased by one
AS-Interface cycle and one PLC cycle.
Equation for the cycle time:

4 x ((6 x 5 ms) + 5 ms + 10 ms) =180 ms
2/60 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, F90 modules
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
2
1A 2A 1A 2A
Screw-type terminals Screw-type terminals Combicon connection Combicon connection
3RG9 002-0DB00 3RG9 002-0DA00 3RG9 004-0DB00 3RG9 004-0DA00
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
• Current carrying capacity 200
for sensor supply in mA
• Connection of sensors 2- and 3-conductor technology
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A 1 2 1 2
DC 12 / DC 13 typical
• Total current of all outputs in A 4 6 4 6
• External power supply 24 V DC Installed using screw-type terminals Installed using Combicon plug connector
I/O configuration 7
ID/ID2 code 0/F
• Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1
Displays
• Inputs/outputs Yellow LEDs
• AS-i voltage Green LED
Connection Using screw-type terminals Using Combicon plug connector
Addressing procedure Possible using integrated addressing socket
Note An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the output circuits.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/61

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, F90 modules
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
2 A, floating
Screw-type terminals Combicon connection
2
3RG9 002-0DC00 3RG9 004-0DC00

Input circuit PNP
Inputs
for all inputs in mA
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in A 2
DC 12 / DC 13 typical
• Total current of all outputs in A 6
• External power supply 24 V DC Using screw-type terminals Using Combicon plug connector
I/O configuration 7
ID/ID2 code 0/F
Displays
• Inputs/outputs Yellow LED
Note 1 The module has four floating inputs and four floating switching outputs. An external additional supply of 20 to 30 V
DC according to VDE 0106 (PELV) protection class III is required for the supply of the input and output circuits.
2/62 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, F90 modules
16 inputs
Screw-type terminals Combicon connection
PNP transistor PNP transistor
2
3RG9 002-0DE00 3RG9 004-0DE00
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
• Connection of sensors Mechanical contacts
• Signal 1 Uin 20 ... 30 V 3 mA
Group signal
• Current carrying capacity Iout 25 mA
• Output voltage Uout 20 ... 30 V
Watchdog Built-in
I/O configuration 7
ID/ID2 code F/F
• Data bit D0 Group signal G1 (D0)inputs I 1.1 to I 1.4 (D0 to D3)
Displays of inputs/outputs Yellow LED
Note 1 The module has four input groups. Each input group has four inputs and a group signal for the voltage supply of
the inputs. The input groups are activated individually by setting of the respective group signal by the control
system. The switching states of the assigned inputs are then read in.
Note 2 Function block required
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/63

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, F90 modules
N S A 0 0 0 7 4
2
S IE M E N S
7 5
9 0 3 7
■ Schematics
Terminal assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
+ _ _
L + L + L - L - E 0 A + E 0 A G 1 I1 .1 I1 .2 I1 .3 I1 .4 G 2 I2 .1 I2 .2 I2 .3 I2 .4
U H I IN 1 O U T 1 IN 2 O U T 2
N S A 0 0 0 7 5 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
A S -i O U T 3 IN 3 O U T 4 IN 4 _ _ + + G 3 I3 .1 I3 .2 I3 .3 I3 .4 G 4 I4 .1 I4 .2 I4 .3 I4 .4
_ _ + + A 0 _ E + A 0 _ E + A S -i
1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 7 6
3RG9 002-0D.00 3RG9 002-0DE00

3RG9 004-0D.00 3RG9 004-0DE00
2/64 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
IP20, Flat modules
Flat module
2
4 inputs/ 4 outputs
200 mA for all I/Os
Screw-type terminals
3RK1 400-0CE00-0AA3
Input circuit PNP
Inputs
for all inputs in mA
Outputs
• Current carrying capacity in mA 200
(DC 12 / DC 13)
• External power supply 24 V DC Not required (supply of all inputs and outputs using AS-Interface cable)
Watchdog Built-in
I/O configuration 7
ID/ID2 code F/F
Displays of inputs/outputs
• FAULT Red LED
Connection Using screw-type terminals
Addressing procedure Using integrated addressing socket
4 7 ,5
1 6 ,5 N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 7 7 a
n .c . n .c . + +
O U T 3 O U T 4 IN 3 IN 4
- - - -
O U T 1 O U T 2 + +
- - IN 1 IN 2
A S i+ A S i- - -
7 9 ,8
In te g ra te d
a d d re s s
s o c k e t
7 ,5
8 1 ,5
4 7 2 ,5
1 8 ,5
1 3 ,5
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/65

AS-Interface
Slaves
AS-Interface communications modules
■ Overview
3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3 AS-Interface communications 3RG9 005-0SA00 AS-Interface communications module for
2
module for printed-circuit board installation printed-circuit board installation
+
U aux
N C NC
+
+
IN 1
IN1
O U T 1
OUT1
0
0
IN 2
O U T 2 IN2
0 OUT2
IN 3 0
O U T 3 IN3
0 OUT3
IN 4 0
O U T 4 IN4
0 OUT4
+ 0
P R O G +
A S I
A S I+ ASI-
ASI+
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 7 8 a
NSA0_00080a
With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is
possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or
indicator lights to be operated, the necessary power being indicator lights to be operated, the power for inputs and outputs
provided by the AS-Interface system (yellow AS-Interface being provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is
cable). connected to Uaux + and (NC) to Uaux -, the outputs are not short-
circuit and overload resistant; if Uaux – is connected to (0), the
Note: If the switching outputs are overloaded, the module outputs are overload and short-circuit resistant (maximum sum-
does not respond to invoking by a master. mation current 200 mA). In this case the module does not
3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3 AS-Interface communications respond even to invoking by a master when the switching
module for printed-circuit board installation outputs are overloaded.
+
aux
NC
+
IN1
OUT1
0
IN2
OUT2
0
IN3
OUT3
0
IN4
OUT4
0
+
ASI–
ASI+
NSA0_00079a
With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is

possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or
indicator lights to be operated, the necessary power for the
inputs and outputs being provided from the auxiliary voltage
(24 V PELV). If (+) is connected to Uaux + and (NC) to Uaux -, the
outputs are not short-circuit and overload resistant; if Uaux – is
connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit
resistant (maximum summation current 200 mA). In this case the
module does not respond even to invoking by a master when the
switching outputs are overloaded.
2/66 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2 AS-Interface communications 3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2 AS-Interface communications
module for printed-circuit board installation module for printed-circuit board installation
Connection Connection pad1) Connection Connection pad1)
2
ASi+ 27, 29 ASi+ 27, 29
ASi- 28, 30 ASi- 28, 30
Sensor+ 17, 18, 23, 24 Sensor+ 17, 18, 23, 24
Sensor- 13, 14, 19, 20 Sensor- 13, 14, 19, 20
IN1 21 IN1 21
IN2 22 IN2 22
IN3 15 IN3 15
IN4 16 IN4 16
Uaux + (L24+) 2, 4 Not assigned 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 25, 26
Uaux – (M24) 1, 3 1) Note: pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings
OUT1 9
With the 4I module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possi-
OUT2 10 ble for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-conductor sensors to
OUT3 5 be connected, the power for inputs being provided from
OUT4 6 AS-Interface cable.
OUT- 7, 8 Installation is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board-
Not assigned 11, 12, 25, 26 Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and
1) Note: pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is • 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP):
possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-conductor sen- Order No. 530843-2
sors according to IEC 947-5-2 to be connected or indicator • 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
lights to be operated, the power for the short-circuit resistant Order No. 650118-1
solid-state switching outputs being provided from an auxiliary
voltage If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
(24 V PELV). not respond to invoking by a master.
Installation is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board-

Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and
horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
• 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP):
Order No. 530843-2
• 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
Order No. 650118-1
If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
not respond to invoking by a master.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/67

AS-Interface
Slaves
4 inputs / 4 inputs / 4 inputs / 4 inputs / 4 inputs
2
4 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs

Supply of I/Os using Supply of I/Os using Supply of I/Os using Supply of outputs --
AS-Interface cable external auxiliary external auxiliary using external auxiliary
(max. 200 mA) voltage (24 V PELV) voltage (24 V PELV) voltage (24 V PELV)
Printed-circuit board Printed-circuit board Printed-circuit board Printed-circuit board Printed-circuit board with gold-
with solder pins, pro- with solder pins, pro- with solder pins for with gold-plated direct plated direct connector for
tected by enclosure tected by enclosure horizontal mounting connector for 30-pole 30-pole male connector socket
male connector socket for simple installation with
for simple installation direct connector
with direct connector
3RK1 400-0CD00- 3RK1 400-0CD01- 3RG9 005-0SA00 3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2 3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2
0AA3 0AA3
Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave
Operational voltage 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6
according to
AS-Interface
specification in V
Total current input in mA 270 25 25 270 270
Input circuit PNP PNP PNP PNP PNP
Inputs
• Sensor supply Using AS-Interface Using Uaux Using Uaux Using AS-Interface Using AS-Interface cable
cable
• Switching voltage in V 20 ... 30 20 ... 30 20 ... 30 20 ... 30 20 ... 30
• Switching current in mA 3 3 3 -- --
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state Solid-state Solid-state Solid-state --
• Load voltage in V 20 ... 30 19 ... 30 19 ... 30 Uaux -0.8 V --
• Short-circuit protection Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in --
• Induction protection -- -- -- Installed --
(freewheel diode)
• External power supply Using solder pins Using solder pins Using solder pins Using printed-circuit --
24 V DC board contacts
Summation current for 200 200 200 200 200
all inputs and outputs
in mA
I/O configuration 7 7 7 7 0
ID/ID2 code 0/F 0/F 0/F 0/F 0/F
• Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1
Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding UL, CSA, shipbuilding UL, CSA, shipbuilding -- --
Degree of protection IP20 enclosure IP20 enclosure IP00 IP00 IP00
connecting pins IP00 connecting pins IP00
Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70
in °C
Storage temperature -40 ... +80 -40 ... +80 -40 ... +80 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
in °C
Displays None None None AS-i: Green AS-i: Green
Fault: Red Fault: Red
I/O: Yellow Inputs: Yellow
L24+: Green
Display LED status -- -- -- AS-i Fault Status
On Off OK
On On No data traffic
Flashes On Zero address
On Flashes Overload (sensor)
2/68 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
2
N S A 0 0 0 8 1 75
71 Light
60 emitted
(Grid 10 x 6 mm) on top
7 5
2 ,5 4
25.5
Fault
AS-i
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT1
UOT2
OUT3
OUT4
AUX-PWR
54
9
6 3 8 1 2 ,1 Height
4 0 2 0 9 mm
6
NSA0_00343
40
3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3 Connector (gold-plated) for
3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3 edge-socket connector
e.g. from AMP 1-0100317-5
(30-pole)
N S A 0 0 0 8 3
3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2
3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2
2 ,5 4
Pad numbering on front: 29, 27, 25, ... , 5, 3, 1

7 3
2 0 ,6
Pad numbering on rear: 30, 28, 26, ... , 6, 4, 2
2 ,3
3 ,9 6
3 7 ,8 9 ,3
3RG9 005-0SA00
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/69

AS-Interface
Slaves
Counter modules
■ Overview ■ Technical specifications

This module is used to send hexadecimally coded count values Counter modules
(LSB=D0, MSB=D3) to a higher level controller. The count value
2
With screw-type With spring-loaded

is increased by one for each valid count pulse at terminal 8. terminal connection terminal connection
Beginning at 0, the module counts up to 15 and then begins 3RK1 200-0CE03- 3RK1 200-0CG03-
again at 0. The controller adopts the current value and deter- 0AA2 0AA2
mines the number of pulses between two host invocations Slave type Standard slave
through subtraction from the previous value. The total number of
Operational voltage 26.5 ... 31.6
count pulses is determined by adding these differences. according to AS-Interface
For the values sent to be unambiguous, no more than 15 count specification in V
values are allowed between two host invocations or AS-Interface Total current input in mA 170
master invocations at terminal 8. The maximum permissible Input
transmission frequency is calculated from these times: • Sensor supply using Short-circuit and overload resistant
AS-Interface
fÜmax = 15 / Tmax
• Assignment Terminal 7 = +
Tmax : maximum possible transmission time from the slave to the Terminal 9 = -
host Terminal 8 = IN1
Another condition for the maximum frequency is the pulse
• Current-carrying capacity in 90
shaped required. For the counter to accept a pulse as valid, a mA
Low must have been applied at the input for at least 300 µs and
• Switching level Low/High in V 5 / 10
a High for at least 1 ms. This results in a controller-independent
maximum frequency of • Input current Low/High in mA 2 / 10
I/O configuration 0
fZmax = 1 / 1.3 ms = 769 Hz for the counter module
ID code F
(see graph NSA00084).
U IN 1
N S A 0 0 0 8 4
Displays
• AS-i Green LED on + Red LED off = Status OK
Green LED off + Red LED on = No data
t
traffic
³ 1 m s ³ 3 0 0 s Green LED flashes + Red LED on =
Zero address
Green LED off + Red LED flashes =
If the time criterion stipulated in the graph NSA00084 is violated, Overload (sensor)
the count value is rejected.
Connection Screw-type terminals Spring-loaded
The counter is active only for the reset parameter P2 (default). terminals
The counter is deleted when P2 is set, and the incoming count Conductor cross-sections
pulses are not registered until after P2 is reset again. in mm2
• Solid -- 2 (0.25–1.5)
Note: A customized function block is necessary or must be
programmed. • Finely stranded -- 2 (0.25–1)
with end sleeve
• Finely stranded -- 2 (0.25–1.5)
without end sleeve
ASi+ ASi-
• AWG conductors, -- AWG 2 (24–16)
solid or stranded
Terminal 4: Bus connection ASi+
ASi Terminal 5: Bus connection ASi-
Terminal 6: unused
ADDR
IN1
Terminal 7: Sensor supply+

Terminal 8: Counter input
Terminal 9: Sensor supply-
NSA0_00085
+ IN1 -
Connection options
2/70 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Ground fault detection modules
■ Overview
"... Ground faults in control circuits must not result in a machine’s The following ground faults are detected:
unintentional starting or hazardous movements, nor must they
2
• Ground fault from AS-i "+"
prevent it from stopping (EN 60204, Part 1 or DIN VDE 0113)."
• Ground fault from AS-i "-"
The AS-Interface ground detection module is used to meet these • Ground fault from sensors and actuators which are supplied
requirements. Using this module from the SlimLine series, from the AS-Interface voltage.
ground faults in AS-Interface systems can be reliably detected
and reported. One module per AS-Interface network is required.
■ Function
A ground fault is detected by the module, is indicated by an LED button can also be used for function checking. External auxiliary
and is signaled by two signal outputs (1st: OK, 2nd: Fault). The voltages are not monitored for ground faults with this module.
ground fault signal is stored in the module. The ground fault must
first be eliminated in order to able to reset the module by switch- Note: The ground fault detection module is a passive module
ing off the the AS-Interface voltage, by using a reset button or by without IC and as such does not need its own address on the
applying a High level to the floating remote reset input. The reset AS-Interface network.
A S - i- T
A S - i+ R - R E S -
1 /A S -i - 1 / A S -i -
A S -i 4 /A S - i+ 4 / A S -i +
T E S T / A lte r n a tiv e ly A u to m a tic te s t
2 /
R E S E T
3 /T P E 5 k 6 5 k 6
+ + O u tp u t
R -R E S O u tp u t O u tp u t A S - i fa u lt -
3 /R R E S
R R E S R R E S
O u tp u t
6 /- - -
P L C P L C A S - i fa u lt +
7 /L 2 4 +
O .K . P E
F A U L T In p u t In p u t
8 /O K O .K . O .K .
In p u t In p u t
9 /F A U L T F A U L T F A U L T
1 2 /M 2 4 +
L 2 4 + O .K . F A U L T
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 9 0 a
2 4 V
1 1 /M 2 4
-
M 2 4 M 2 4 M 2 4 1 0 /M 2 4 P L C P L C
T e r m in a l D e s ig n a tio n
1 A S -i c o n n e c tio n
2 C o n n e c tio n fo r s y s te m e a rth
3 C o n n e c tio n fo r s y s te m e a r th ( fo r te s t fu n c tio n )
4 A s -i + c o n n e c tio n
5 R e m o te r e s e t in p u t ( R - R E S )
6 R e m o te re s e t g ro u n d ( )
7 E x te rn a l v o lta g e s u p p ly fo r s ig n a lin g o u tp u ts L 2 4 +
8 S ig n a lin g o u tp u t O .K .
9 S ig n a lin g o u tp u t F A U L T ( e a r th fa u lt s ig n a lin g )
1 0 E x te rn a l v o lta g e s u p p ly fo r s ig n a lin g o u tp u ts M 2 4
1 1 N e g a tiv e c o n n e c tio n fo r s ig n a lin g o u tp u t M 2 4
1 2 N e g a tiv e c o n n e c tio n fo r s ig n a lin g o u tp u t M 2 4
Connection options
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/71

AS-Interface
Slaves
Ground fault detection modules
Ground fault detection module
2
With screw-type terminal connection With spring-loaded terminal connection

3RK1 408-8KE00-0AA2 3RK1 408-8KG00-0AA2
Reverse polarity protection Built-in
Ground fault 10% UAS-i UGND 90% UAS-i
Low signal range
• IIN in mA 1.5
High signal range
• UIN in V 10
• IIN in mA 6
Current-carrying capacity1)
• DC 12 in A 1 (max. 2 per module)
• DC 13 in A 500 (24 V)2)
• DC 13 in mA 200 (48 V)2)
Operating cycles DC 12 2 106
Rated operational voltage range in V 24 ... 48 DC
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 102 22.5 92
Rated temperature in °C 25
Addressing procedure The module does not need its own AS-Interface address
Connection Screw-type terminal connection Spring-loaded terminal connection
Conductor cross-sections in mm2
• Solid -- 2 (0.25–1.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve -- 2 (0.25–1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve -- 2 (0.25–1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded -- AWG 2 (24–16)
Note If repeaters are used, a ground fault detection module must be used for each AS-Interface segment
(number of AS-Interface power supply units = number of ground fault detection modules)
1) Uaux should be protected by a 2 A slow fuse. 2) The endurance of the relay can be increased if inductive loads are
connected using freewheel diodes.
22,5 5 86
4 7 36
110x15
120
74
68
B
A
NSA0_00407
A B
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 1 ,6 1 0 1 ,6
R e m o v e a b le te r m in a l
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 1 0 3
2/72 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
Overvoltage protection modules
■ Overview
The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects module and must be connected with low resistance to the
downstream AS-Interface devices or individual sections in system’s ground.
2
AS-Interface networks from conducted overvoltages which can
be caused by switching operations and remote lightning strikes. Rated discharge current Isn
The location of the overvoltage protection module forms within The rated discharge current is the peak value of a surge current
the lightning protection zone concept the transition from zone 1 with waveform 8/20 microseconds, for which the overvoltage
to 2/3. Direct lightning strikes must be coped with using addi- protection module is rated in accordance with a specific test
tional protective measures at the transitions from lightning program.
protection zone 0A to 1. With waveform 8/20, 100% of the value is achieved after 8 micro-
With the AS-Interface overvoltage protection module it is now seconds and 50% after 20 microseconds.
also possible to integrate AS-Interface in the overall lightning Protection level Up
protection concept of a plant or machine.
The protection level of an overvoltage protection module is the
The module has the same type of construction, connection and highest momentary value of the voltage at the terminals,
degree of protection (IP67) as the AS-Interface user modules. It established in individual tests.
is a passive module without AS-i IC and as such does not need
its own address on the AS-Interface network. The protection level characterizes the capability of an overvolt-
age protection module to limit overvoltages to a residual level.
Connection to an AS-Interface system is effected through the
FK-E or PG-E coupling module. Through use of the EEMS inter- Accessories
face, the AS-Interface cable and the auxiliary voltage cable can
be protected from overvoltage. An FK-E or PG-E coupling module is required for connection of
the AS-Interface cable and the auxliary power supply cable.
Overvoltages are discharged through a ground cable with a
green/yellow oil-proof outer sheath. This cable is fixed in the
Configuration guidelines
AS- AS- NSA0_00093
OVP Inter- Inter-

face face
Device without earth connection

Application Application ® Earthing of the mounting plate
Device with Mounting plate
earth connection
OVP = Overvoltage protection
The grounding of protection modules and the units to be pro- (equipotential bonding). If insulated devices are protected, their
tected must be effected through a shared grounding point mounts must be included in the grounding points.
Sample application
Z o n e 1 Z o n e 2 Z o n e 1
A S - A S - A S - A S -
O V P In te r- In te r- In te r- In te r- O V P
fa c e fa c e fa c e fa c e
A B
p ro te c te d ra n g e
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 9 2
E q u ip o te n tia l b o n d in g
(s y s te m e a rth )
P r o te c tio n a p p r o x . 0 .5 m to th e le ft
P r o te c tio n a p p r o x . 5 m to th e r ig h t O V P = O v e r v o lta g e p r o te c tio n
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/73

AS-Interface
Slaves
Overvoltage protection modules
Overvoltage protection module
2
3RK1 901-1GA00
Overvoltage protection For AS-Interface For AUX Power
• Rated discharge current Isn of wave form 8/20
- Core-PE in kA 10 10
- Core-core in kA 0.5 0.5
• Protection level Up at Isn
- Core-PE in kV 1.8 1.8
- Core-core in V 100 70
• Protection level Up at 1 kV / µs
- Core-PE in V 700 600
- Core-core in V 50 40
Mechanical specifications
• Degree of protection (with coupling module) IP67
• Dimensions (H x W x D) in mm 80 45 25
Temperature range
• Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85
• Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85
80
NSA0_00087a
45 25
2/74 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Slaves
AS-Interface connections for LOGO!
■ Overview
Every LOGO! can now be connected to the AS-Interface Using the AS-Interface connection for LOGO!, an intelligent
2
system slave can be integrated in the AS-Interface system. With the
modular interface it becomes possible to integrate the different
basic devices in the system according to their functionality.
Similarly, functionalities can be quickly and easily adapted to
new requirements by exchanging the basic device.
The interface module provides four inputs and four outputs on
the system. These I/Os do not actually exist in hardware terms,
however, but are only virtually present through the interface on
the bus.
Supply voltage in V 24 V DC
Inputs/outputs 4/4
(virtual inputs / outputs)
Bus connection AS-Interface according to specification
Ambient temperature in °C 0 ... +55
Installation Onto standard mounting rail
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 36 x 90 x 58
Indications of the LEDs LED Status
Green OK
Red No data traffic
Flashes red/yellow Zero address
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/75

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units
AS-Interface power supplies, IP65
■ Overview
AS-Interface power supplies are an essential and functionally
important part of an AS-Interface network. They supply the elec-
2
tronics of the network (AS-Interface modules and AS-Interface

masters) and the connected sensor technology. Furthermore,
the integrated data decoupling of AS-Interface power supplies
ensures the separation of data and energy, thus enabling
AS-Interface to transmit data and power on a single line.
AS-Interface enables the direct connection of sensors and actu-
ators in the field to the higher-level control system. This is made
possible by the various I/O modules with a high degree of pro-
tection. To uphold this approach as far as possible there are
AS-Interface masters and of course power supplies in IP65.
The spectrum of AS-Interface power supplies includes units with
24 V DC as well as 230 V AC input voltage.
Rated input voltage 230 V AC Rated input voltage 24 V DC
3RX9 311-0AA00 6EP1 632-1AL01
Output current in A 2.4 2.4
Rated input voltage in V 230 AC 24 DC
Input
• Input voltage rated value Ue Rated in V 230 AC 24 DC
• Range changeover Changeover switch (internal) --
• Input voltage range in V 195 ... 253 20.4 ... 28.8 DC
• Overvoltage strength EN 61000-4-1 35 V DC, for max. 500 ms
• Mains buffering at Ie Rated in ms > 20 > 10
• Line frequency rated value I-range in Hz 50/60/47 ... 63 --
• Input current rated value Ie Rated in A < 0.5 3.6
• Installed input fuse in A T 2 (not accessible) T 6.3 (not accessible)
Output
• Controlled floating direct voltage in accordance Yes Yes
with AS-Interface specification
• Output voltage rated value Ua Rated in V 30 DC (AS-Interface) 30 DC (AS-Interface)
• Total tolerance 29.5 ... 31.6 V DC 29.5 ... 31.6 V DC
• Residual ripple in mVss < 300 < 300
• Switching peaks in mVss < 50 < 50
• Status display Green LED Green LED
• Output current rated value Ia Rated in A 2.4 (powerboost 2.8) 2.4
Efficiency/power loss
• Efficiency at Ua Rated, Ia Rated in % Approx. 85 > 81
• Power loss at Ua Rated, Ia Rated in W Approx. 10 < 17
Protective and monitoring functions
• Output overvoltage protection No --
• Current limitation in A > 2.8 Approx. 2.9 and higher
• Short-circuit protection Yes Constant current approx. 2.9 A
Safety
• Electrical isolation primary/secondary Yes (SELV according to EN 60950) Yes (SELV according to EN 60950)
• Safety class Class I according to IEC 536 Class I according to IEC 536
• Degree of protection IP65 IP65
• Approvals CE, UL, CSA (available soon) CE, UL, shipbuilding
EMC
• Emitted interference EN 50081-1 EN 50081-1, EN 55022 Cl. B
• Interference immunity EN 50082-2 EN 50082-2
2/76 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units

Rated input voltage 230 V AC Rated input voltage 24 V DC
3RX9 311-0AA00 6EP1 632-1AL01
2
Operating data
• Ambient temperature range in °C -45 ... +55 -25 ... +55
• Transport and storage temperature range in °C -45 ... +60 -25 ... +85
• Humidity class Max. 80 % rel. humidity Climate class 3K3 according to EN 60721,
without condensation
Mechanical construction
• Input connections Amphenol connector power socket Circular connector 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 1)
• Output connections AS-i + AS-i+/AS-i: Using yellow AS-Interface cable 500 mm three-conductor cable AWG 14
• Output connections AS-i - Cable adapter FK 500 mm three-conductor cable AWG 14
• Output connections ground -- 500 mm three-conductor cable AWG 14
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 105 155 117 224 80 57
Installation Fixing on standard mounting rail Wall mounting, any mounting position
EN 50022-35 x 7.5
Accessories -- 6-pole connector for input voltage (6ES5 760-2CA11)
and AS-Interface PG coupling module
(3RG9 220-0AA00) must be ordered separately
1) Mating piece is not included in the scope of supply (see Accessories).
NSA0_00118 1
AS-Interface
SIEMENS power RUN
M a in s c o n n e c tio n A S i
1 PE P30 P30 RD
80
52
2 P24 M30 M30 BU
3 M24 shield
S u ita b le fo r ~ INPUT OUTPUT
shield BK
24 V/4,2 A 30 V/2,8 A
m o u n tin g o n to
1 4 5 + 1
14
E N 5 0 0 2 2 -3 5 x ... 6EP1632-1AL01 1 2 3 4 5 6
A S i+ A S i-
s ta n d a rd P o w e r o n
1
m o u n tin g r a il A S -In te rfa c e
163 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 1 7
5 4 ,6
A S -In te rfa c e 175

c o n n e c tio n A B C D E F G H 224 500
1 1 0 + 1 7 1 0 5 + 1 1 Fastening screws:
1 4 8 + 2 Cylindrical screws with hexagon socket
M4x16, 8.8 according to DIN 912
3RX9 311-0AA00 6EP1 632-1AL01
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/77

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units
■ Overview
AS-Interface power supplies are an integral part of an
AS-Interface network. They supply the electronics of the network
2
(AS-Interface modules and AS-Interface masters) and the

connected sensor technology. Furthermore, the integrated data
decoupling of AS-Interface power supplies ensures the separa-
tion of data and energy, thus enabling AS-Interface to transmit
data and power on a single line.
■ Design
Reset
button Signaling
Ground-fault detection contacts
Remote
Only with 3RX95.. types
reset
AS-i
Ground-Fault LEDs
Overload
NSA0_00411
AS-I +
Voltage transformation
L connected
Solid-state switch
Data decoupling
Input rectifying
Inrush current
AS-i +
with overload
EMC filter
limitation
N
detection
AS-i -
PE
GND
Basic design of the AS-Interface power supplies
AS-Interface power supplies are primary-controlled direct depending on the power requirements of the respective
voltage supply units. The primary-switched mode regulators AS-Interface network.
generate a controlled direct voltage of 30 V DC with high stability
and low residual ripple. As shown in the graphics, the new generation of AS-Interface
power supplies (3RX95...) is available in IP20 with integrated
Data and power are always transmitted simultaneously over the ground-fault and overload detection.
AS-Interface 2-conductor cable. AS-Interface power supplies
must therefore not only ensure the power supply of the AS-Inter-
face network, but also that of the data link.
Standard power supplies are not suitable for this purpose. For
this reason, standard power supply units must not be used to
supply an AS-Interface network. AS-Interface power supplies
supply the electronics of the network (AS-Interface masters,
AS-Interface modules) and all connected sensors. Graded
power supply units with 2.4 to 8 A output current are available,
2/78 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units
■ Function
Features of the new power supply generation 3RX9 5..: • Diagnostics memory
Any ground faults or overloads on the output side are stored
2
• Compact dimensions
With just 50/70/120 mm widths, the new devices are the most in a diagnostics memory until the device is reset. These events
compact AS-Interface power supplies yet with an extremely are indicated by the flashing of the respective LED. This facil-
high power density. The small footprint of these devices can itates fault diagnostics on an AS-Interface network as a ser-
be fully utilized as a further device can be mounted on the DIN vice technician can immediately see where any faults in the
rail directly next to the power supply unit. There is therefore no system are coming from (even after the fault has occurred).
need for gaps between devices (as is often the case with other • Remote reset and remote indication
compact power supply units). The recognized ground fault can be reported to a central
• Higher rating control system over established contacts and evaluated. The
The new devices have an output current of 3/5/8 A. stored diagnostics can be reset locally over a reset button. It
can also be reset by a control system over a reset input.
• Integrated ground-fault detection
Ground-fault detection to EN 60204-1 comes as standard with • Diagnostic LEDs
AS-Interface. The new generation of AS-Interface power sup- Three different colored LEDs indicate the status of the
plies are all equipped with integrated ground-fault detection, AS-Interface power supply locally at the supply unit.
which reliably detects and reports any ground faults. • Ultra-wide input range for 8 A version
Furthermore, by setting up additional contacts, users can The ultra-wide input range of 120 to 500 V of the 8-A version
specify whether the AS-Interface voltage should be switched means that the supply units can be used in virtually any net-
off immediately in the event of a ground fault, thus preventing work worldwide. In addition, this version dispenses with the
unintentional startup of a machine. This prevents damage to need for a neutral conductor as the device can be connected
the system in the event of a fault. directly between 2 phases of a network.
• Integrated overload detection • Removable terminal blocks with spring-loaded
An output overload is detected and reported over a diagnostic connections
LED. Each power supply unit has three terminal blocks; one block
each for the input side, the output side and the information ter-
minal respectively. These can be removed and enable fast re-
placement of the supply unit in the event of a fault. The spring-
load terminals also enable fast and permanently stable mount-
ing of cable conductors.
AS-Interface Power Supply
Single output IP20
Output current 3 A Output current 5 A Output current 8 A
3RX9 501-0BA00 3RX9 502-0BA00 3RX9 503-0BA00
Input data
• Primary voltage Ui in V 120 / 230 AC 120 / 230 AC 120 / 230 ... 500 AC
• Operational voltage range in V 85 ... 132 / 176 ... 253 85 ... 132 / 176 ... 253 85 ... 132 / 176 ... 550
• Mains frequency range in Hz 47 ... 63 47 ... 63 47 ... 63
• Mains buffering at Ia Rated in ms > 20 > 20 > 20
• Rated primary current in A 1.6 / 0.9 2.7 / 1.5 4.4 / 2.4
• Back-up protection in the main supply line 6 6 10
recommended (IEC 898) in A Charateristic C Charateristic C Charateristic C
Output data
• Rated output voltage Ua Rated in V 30 DC 30 DC 30 DC
• Residual ripple / spikes < 50 mVpp < 50 mVpp < 50 mVpp
(10 ... 500 kHz) (10 ... 500 kHz) (10 ... 500 kHz)
< 300 mVpp < 300 mVpp < 300 mVpp
(0 ... 10 kHz) (0 ... 10 kHz) (0 ... 10 kHz)
• Rated output current Ia Rated in A 3 5 8
• Making-current limitation in A Typ. 3.5 Typ. 5.5 Typ. 8.5
• Efficiency at full load in % Typ. 84 Typ. 87 Typ. 87
Ambient conditions
• Storage/transport temperature in °C -25 ... +80 -25 ... +80 -25 ... +80
• Ambient operating temperature in °C -10 ... +70 -10 ... +70 -10 ... +70
• Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
• Degree of pollution 2 2 2
• Humidity class Climate class DIN 50010, relative air humidity max. 100 %,
without condensation
• EMC emitted interference class B IEC 61000-6-3 IEC 61000-6-3 IEC 61000-6-3
• EMC interference immunity EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/79

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units
2
125
125
NSA0_00412a
NSA0_00414
50 120
Front view 3RX9 501-0BA00 Front view 3RX9 503-0BA00
125
121
125
NSA0_00415a
NSA0_00413
8,6
70
Front view 3RX9 502-0BA00 Side view 3RX9 501-0BA00 / 3RX9 502-0BA00 / 3RX9 503-0BA00
2/80 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Power Supply Units
■ More information
Conversion table
2
Previous type New type
Order No. Version Number Order No. Version
3RX9 307-0AA00 Single output 1 3RX9 501-0BA00 Single output
IP20 IP20 with ground-fault detection
2.4 A 3A
IP20 with ground-fault detection IP20 with ground-fault detection
2.4 A 3A
4A 5A
6EP1 354-1AL01 Single output 1 3RX9 503-0BA00 Single output
7A 8A
3RX9 305-1AA00 Dual output 2 3RX9 502-0BA00 Single output
4A/4A 5A
3RX9 306-1AA00 Combi output 1 3RX9 502-0BA00 Single output
4 A (AS-i) / 5 A (24 V) 5A
1 6EP1 333-2AA01 SITOP 24 V
IP20
5A
Note: The following versions will presumably be available

until 12/2005: 3RX9 305-1AA00, 3RX9 306-1AA00,
3RX9 307-0AA00, 3RX9 307-1AA00, 3RX9 310-0AA00 and
4FD5 213-0AA10-1A.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/81

AS-Interface
Transmission Media
AS-Interface shaped cables
■ Overview
and installation. A new connection technique was developed
specially for AS-Interface.
2
The stations are connected using the AS-Interface cable. This

two-conductor cable has a trapezoidal shape, thus ruling out po-
larity reversal.
Connection is effected by the insulation piercing method. In
other words, contact pins pierce the shaped AS-Interface cable
and make reliable contact with the two conductors. Cutting to
length and stripping are superfluous. Consequently, AS-Inter-
face stations (e.g. I/O modules, intelligent devices) can be con-
nected in the shortest possible time and exchanging devices is
quick.
To enable use in the most varied ambient conditions (e.g. in an
oily environment), the AS-Interface cable is available in different
materials (rubber, TPE, PUR).
For special applications it is also possible to use a standard
round cable. With AS-Interface, data and power for the sensors
(e.g. proximity switches BERO) and actuators (e.g. indicator
The actuator-sensor interface – the networking system used for lights) are transmitted over the yellow AS-Interface cable.
the lowest field area – is characterized by very easy mounting The black cable must be used for actuators with a 24 V DC
supply (e.g. solenoid valves) and a high power requirement.
AS-Interface Shaped Cables
EPDM TPE TPE special version accord- PUR
(rubber) (special PVC compound) ing to UL Class 2 (polyurethane)
Application temperature
range
• Stationary in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +105 -30 ... +90 -50 ... +90
• Moved in °C -25 ... +85 -30 ... +105 -20 ... +90 -50 ... +90
Core colors Brown, blue Brown, blue Brown, blue Brown, blue
Flexibility Very good Good Good Good
Fire behavior Flammable Flame-retardant according to Flame-retardant according to Flame-retardant according to
IEC 60332-1 IEC 60332-1 IEC 60332-1
VDE 0482 T. 265-2-1 VDE 0482 T. 265-2-1 VDE 0482 T. 265-2-1
UL 1581 sec. 1061 UL 1581 sec. 1061
cable flame cable flame
UL 1581 sec. 1060 CSA FT1 UL 1685 CSA FT4
Without halogens (PVC-free) Yes No No Yes
Without silicone Yes Yes Yes Yes
precipitation
Ozone and weather resistant Conditionally resistant Resistant Resistant Resistant
Oil resistance Conditionally resistant Resistant Resistant Resistant
Smallest permissible bend-
ing radii according to
DIN VDE 0298, Part 300,
in mm
• Fixed 12 12 12 12
• Freely movable 24 24 24 24
Bending behavior according No break after 30000 reverse No break after 30000 reverse No break after 30000 reverse No break after 30000 reverse
to DIN VDE 0472, Part 603 bending cycles bending cycles bending cycles bending cycles
UL approval No UL 758 AWM UL 758 AWM No
UL 13 Class 2
UL 444 CMG
CSA approval No C22.2 No.210.2 AWM C22.2 No. 214-02 No
Monitored expertise (VDE) No No No VDE Reg. No.9971
300 V/500 V
Stationary: -40 ... +70 °C
Transport: -25 ... +70 °C
Moved: -15 ... +70 °C
Approved for marine and off-
shore use up to 300 V/500 V:
Germanischer Lloyd
Lloyds Register of Shipping
ABS Europe LTD
Bureau Veritas
Det Norske Veritas
2/82 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Transmission Media
AS-Interface shaped cables
10
2
NSA0_00125a
4
6.5
AS-i AS-i
blue brown
System Components and Accessories

Extension plug
To construct an AS-Interface segment with a cable length of
more than 100 m and up to a maximum of 200 m, the extension
plug / extension plug plus is installed at that point of network
which is furthest from the AS-Interface power supply unit. This
point does not have to be localized exactly; it suffices to connect
the extension plug / extension plug plus in its vicinity
(approx. 10 m).
As with all AS-Interface networks, any network structure (line,
tree, star) is possible when using the extension plug / extension
plug plus. Only one extension plug / extension plug plus is re-
quired per 200-m segment even with a tree or star structure. As
a passive network component the extension plug does not need
an AS-Interface address. The extension plug plus has an inte-
gral AS-Interface A/B slave for the diagnostics message and
thus requires an AS-Interface address. For addressing pur-
poses, the extension plug Plus is simply plugged on the
3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit.
With the extension plug / extension plug plus it is possible to

double the cable length possible in an AS-Interface segment
from 100 to 200 m.
The extension plug / extension plug plus is a passive component
which is connected to that point of the AS-Interface network that
is furthest away from the power supply. It has an M12 connector
for quick connection to the AS-Interface M12 feeder with degree
of protection IP67.
Only one power supply unit is needed to supply power to the
slaves on the up to 200 m long segment.
The extension plug / extension plug plus has integrated under-
voltage detection for monitoring the AS-Interface voltage in
order to be sure that the necessary voltage still exists at the end
of the bus cable. Undervoltage is signaled on the extension plug
by means of a diagnostics LED. The extension plug plus is
equipped with an AS-Interface slave and communicates this
diagnostics information directly to the AS-Interface master.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/83

AS-Interface
Extension plug
2
Topology of an AS-Interface network with a size of 200 m

The extension plug / extension plug plus is connected using an voltage dips of the type which occur, for example, when actua-
M12 plug-in connector and most easily realized with the help of tors are switched. The extension plug plus is equipped with an
the AS-Interface M12 branch 3RX9 801-0AA00 to IP67 degree of AS-Interface slave. Instead of the diagnostics LED, the exten-
protection. sion plug plus communicates the diagnostics information
directly to the AS-Interface master. Two different voltage values
Depending on the size of an AS-Interface segment and the can be set as threshold value. Using two diagnostics bits it is
power consumption (the power consumption varies with the possible to distinguish between brief and lengthy voltage drops.
number of stations connected), it is important to make sure that
the voltage drop along the AS-Interface cable does not become For particularly large AS-Interface networks the maximum possi-
excessive. To guarantee that even the remotest slave is still ble cable length can be increased further by using repeaters.
supplied with the necessary minimum voltage, the extension Please note that when a repeater and an extension plug / exten-
plug has a voltage monitor. With the extension plug, any under- sion plug plus are used together, the series connection of re-
shooting of the minimum voltage in accordance with the peaters is not possible. Hence the maximum possible distance
AS-Interface specification is clearly indicated by flashing of a from the master to a slave is 400 m and the absolute maximum
green LED; a correct AS-Interface voltage is signaled by steady cable length is 600 m. The parallel connection of repeaters for a
illumination of the green LED. The undervoltage detection has a star-shaped configuration with segments up to 200 m long
delay for the LED indication in order to recognize also short-time respectively is possible.
Master
Power Power Power
Supply Supply Supply
Extension Extension Extension
Plug Plug Plug
Slave Slave Repeater Slave Slave Repeater Slave Slave
200 m 200 m 200 m

G_NSA0_XX_00371
600 m
Maximum network size with repeaters and extension plug

(master at center of network)
2/84 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
Extension plug
■ Function
U A S -i
2
U 1 )
x
> 5 m s
< 5 m s < 5 0 m s
_> 5 0 m s = 0 = 1
0 V t
5 m s 5 m s
D 3 IN
c a . 1 0 0 m s c a . 1 0 0 m s 1 ) U x = 2 6 ,5 V (P L C D 1 O U T = 0 )
D 2 IN U x = 2 3 V (P L C D 1 O U T = 1 )
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 5
5 0 m s
Transmission of the diagnostic message with the extension plug plus
Extension plug Extension plug plus
3RK1 901-1MX00 3RK1 901-1MX01
Operational voltage according to 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6
Polarity reversal protection U AS-Interface Yes Yes
AS-Interface certificate Requested Requested
Degree of protection IP67 IP67
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85 -25 ... +85
Status indicator U AS-Interface
• LED On: U AS-Interface in V 26.5 ... 31.6 None
• LED flashes: U AS-Interface in V 10 … 26.5 None
Power supply From AS-Interface From AS-Interface
Slave type No slave integrated A/B slave
I/O configuration -- B
ID/ID2 code -- I/O
• OUT1 (D0) -- Not required
• OUT2 (D1) -- D1 = 0: Switching threshold 26.5 V
D1 = 1: Switching threshold 23 V
• IN3 (D2) -- D2 = 0: Undervoltage > 50 ms
D2 = 1: No undervoltage
• IN4 (D3) -- D3 = 0: Undervoltage > 5 ms
D3 = 1: No undervoltage
Connection to AS-Interface Using M12 plug Using M12 plug
Pin assignment
• PIN1 U AS-Interface + U AS-Interface +
• PIN3 U AS-Interface - U AS-Interface -
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/85

AS-Interface
Addressing units
■ Overview
To be able to participate in data exchange with the master, all
stations have to be addressed before the AS-Interface network
2
is configured. This can be done

• Offline by means of an addressing unit or
• Online using the master of the AS-Interface system.
The addresses themselves are the values 1 to 31 (or 1A to 31A
and 1B to 31B for the extended AS-Interface Specification 2.1).
A new slave that has not yet been addressed has the address 0.
It is recognized accordingly by the master as a new slave that
has not yet been addressed and as such is not yet included in
the normal communication.
The address can be assigned at random, i.e. it makes not
difference whatsoever if the slave with address 21 begins or if
the first slave is actually issued with address 1.
■ Function
• Reading out the slave address 0 to 31, A/B • AS-Interface test: Measurement of voltage (measuring range
• Reading out the I/O and ID codes of the slaves 0 to 35 V) and current consumption (measuring range 0 to
100 mA) of the AS-Interface bus
• Standard and extended ID Code1 and ID Code2
• Storage: Complete system configurations can be stored
• Standard and extended addressing mode according to (profiles of all slaves, also with extension according to
AS-Interface Version 2.1 AS-Interface Specification 2.1)
• Programming of the ID Code 1 • Detection of complete system complements
• Function testing of slaves: reading inputs and writing outputs
from digital or analog slaves
AS-Interface addressing and diagnostics unit
3RK1 904-2AB01
Power supply The standard power supply is provided by 4 batteries according to IEC LR6 (NEDA 15), which guarantee
that the unit can perform at least 2500 device addressings
For a longer battery life the unit is switched off automatically approx. 1 minute after the last operation
Ambient conditions
• Working temperature range in °C 0 ... +55
• Storage temperature range in °C -20 ... +55 (without batteries)
• Relative humidity in % Max. 75, condensation not permitted
• Altitude above sea-level in m Up to 2000
• Location Only in indoor rooms
Mechanical design
• Dimensions in mm 84 x 195 x 35
• Connection Using M12 socket:
• Pin1: ASI+
• Pin3: ASi-/ GND
• Pin2/4/5: IR addressing
2/86 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface
AS-Interface analyzers
■ Overview
For advanced AS-Interface users there are trigger functions for
detailed diagnostics.
2
Connection
Master Branch M12
Slave Slave Slave Slave
NSA0_00359a
AS-Interface Analyser PC
The AS-Interface analyzer is used to test AS-Interface networks.
It enables systematic troubleshooting and permanent monitor- The AS-Interface analyzer follows the communication on the
ing. AS-Interface network as a passive station. The unit is supplied
Installation errors, e.g. loose contacts or EMC interference under simultaneously from the AS-Interface cable.
extreme loads, can be revealed by this device. The analyzer interprets the physical signals on the AS-Interface
Thanks to the easy-to-use software the user can assess the network and records the communication.
quality of complete networks even if he lacks detailed specialist The data thus obtained are transferred through an RS 232 inter-
knowledge of AS-Interface. In addition it is an easy matter with face to a PC such as a notebook, for evaluation with the supplied
the AS-Interface analyzer to create test logs from the records diagnostics software.
produced, thus providing documentation for start-ups and
service assignments.
AS-Interface analyzers
3RK1 904-3AB01
Interfaces • AS-Interface
• RS 232 for connection to a PC
• Trigger input (24 V)
• Trigger output (TTL)
Displays / LEDs • Supply voltage OK (power)
• RS 232 interface in operation
• Test mode
Statistics mode Online view or long-term measurement up to 14 days (without PC) or one year (with PC)
Trace mode Message frame memory for 256000 AS-Interface message frames
Rated operational current in mA Approx. 70 from AS-Interface
Rated insulation voltage in V > 500
EMC According to EN 50081-2, EN 61000-6-2
Ambient temperature in °C 0 … +55
Storage temperature in °C -25 … +70
Requirements IBM compatible PC 80486 and higher
Operating system Windows 95/98, Windows ME, Windows NT4, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/87

PROFIBUS
System Overview
Process or field communication
■ Overview
Communication functions
2
The process or field communication (PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS is standardized according to IEC 61158/EN 50170. It
PROFIBUS PA) is used to link field device to an automation, HMI is an efficient, open and robust fieldbus system with short
or I&C system. response times and the following protocols:
The link can be established through integrated interfaces on the • PROFIBUS DP
CPU or using interface modules (IMs) and communications pro- (Distributed Peripherals) is used to connect distributed pe-
cessors (CPs). ripherals, e.g. SIMATIC ET 200 with very fast response times
according to the IEC 61158/EN 50170 standard.
With today’s powerful automation systems it is often more effec-
tive to link several PROFIBUS DP lines to one automation system • PROFIBUS PA
not only in order to increase the number of connectable I/O (Process Automation) expands PROFIBUS DP with inherently
stations but also to be able to handle individual production areas safe transmission according to the international standard
independently of others (segmentation). IEC 61158-2.
SIMATIC
Integral interface Communications processor
S7-300 / S7-400 C7-635/636 CP 342-5/CP 342-5 FO,

SIMATIC C7 CP 343-5
CPU 315F/317F, CP 342-5/CP 342-5 FO,

CPU 414H/417H CP 343-5,
CPU 416F, CP 443-5 Basic,
CPU 41x -2/3 CP 443-5 Extended
FM 458-1 DP (isochronous) IM 467/467 FO
CPUs with DP interface
ET 200S / ET 200M /
IM 151-1, IM 151-1 HF,
ET 200pro / IM 151-7 CPU,
ET 200eco IM 151-7 F-CPU
IM 153-1, IM 153-2
IM 154-1 DP, IM 154-2 DP HF
SIMATIC TDC CP 50M0
SIMATIC PC/PG
Power PG Box PC
Box PC 620/627/840 CP 5512
Rack PC 840/IL40 S CP 5611 A2
Panel PC IL77/670/677/870/877 CP 5613 A2/CP 5613 FO
Panel PC Field PG CP 5614 A2/CP 5614 FO
Power PGO
Field PG
Rack PC
PC-based Automation
WinAC
WinAC Slot 412/416
(with integral interface),
WinAC MP
(with integral interface)
WinAC RTX CP 5613 A2

WinAC Basis CP 5611 A2, CP 5613 A2,
Integral interface PC/PG
G_IK10_XX_50002
PROFIBUS DP masters
2/88 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

PROFIBUS
System Overview
PROFIBUS DP/PA is used to connect field devices such as master/slave principle and send the input data to the controller
distributed I/O stations or drives to automation systems such as or the PC.
SIMATIC S7 or PCs.
Powerful tools such as STEP 7 and COM PROFIBUS are avail-
2
PROFIBUS DP/PA is selected when I/O stations on a machine or able to configure and parameterize the I/O stations. With these
in a plant (e.g. the field level) are widely distributed and can be tools, tests and start-ups are possible from every connection
spatially grouped (>16 inputs/outputs) to form a station using PROFIBUS DP.
(e.g. ET 200).
In this case the actuators/sensors are connected to field
devices, which are supplied with output data according to the
DP master e.g. SPS or PC
S7-300 (Slave) with CPU 31x-2 DP or

C7-635, C7-636 CP 342-5, CP 342-5 FO
Vision Sensor
VS 120
VS 130
S7-200 (Slave) PC with

CP 5611 A2
CP 5614 A2
ET 200S CP 5614 FO
Customized solution
ET 200L with Siemens ASICs
ET 200M
DP/PA coupler/link
ET 200iSP
ET 200eco Field device for hazardous area
ET 200pro
S5-115U with IM 308C
Drive (e.g. SIMODRIVE)

PROFIBUS PA
DP/AS-Interface
Link 20E SITRANS F US
Mobile Panel
Master Drive
SITRANS P
DP/EIB Link
Customized solution
G_IK10_XX_50108
with Siemens ASICs
PROFIBUS DP slaves
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/89

PROFIBUS
System Overview
DP device types
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between two different classes of measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of the process
master and various DP functionalities: automation, intelligent operating and monitoring devices).
2
• DP master class 1 Slaves of this type must be supplied with comprehensive

The DP master class 1 is the central component of parameter data during start-up and while running. The acycli-
PROFIBUS DP. In a fixed, continuously recurring message cally transmitted data (e.g. parameterizing data) are changed
cycle the central controller or PC exchanges information with only rarely compared to the cyclic measured values and are
distributed stations (DP slaves). transmitted with low priority in parallel with the fast cyclic
transfer of useful data. Alarm acknowledgment on the master
• DP master class 2 provides for the assured transmission of alarms from
Devices of this type (programming, configuring or operating DP slaves.
devices) are used during start-up, for configuring the DP sys-
tem or for operating the plant while it is running (diagnostics). • DP-V2
A DP master class 2 is able, for example, to read the input The DP master functions (DP-V2) are: cycle synchronization
data, output data, diagnostics data and configuration data of and cross data traffic between DP slaves.
slaves. • Cycle synchronization
• DP slave Cycle synchronization is realized through the use of an equi-
A DP slave is an I/O station which reads in input information distant cycle signal on the bus system. This cyclic, equidistant
and sends out output information to the other peripherals. The cycle is sent as a global control message frame from the mas-
amount of input and output information varies from device to ter to all stations. Master and slaves can thus synchronize their
device but is limited to a maximum 244 bytes per device. The applications on this signal. For typical drive applications it is
functional scope of DP masters class 1 and 2 and of DP slaves necessary for the jitter of the cycle signal to be smaller than
can vary. A communications processor can be accordingly ef- 1 µs.
ficient and versatile. • Cross data traffic between DP slaves
• DP-V0 The publisher/subscriber model is used to implement the
The DP master functions (DP-V0) are: Configuring, parameter- cross traffic between slaves. Slaves which are declared to be
izing, cyclic reading of input data and writing of outputs, and publishers make available their input data (equivalent to a
reading of diagnostics data. reply message frame to their own master) to other slaves, the
subscribers, for them to read as well. The cross traffic commu-
• DP-V1 nication takes place cyclically.
The additional DP function expansions (DP-V 1) enable
acyclic read and write functions and alarm acknowledgment
in parallel with the cyclic data traffic. These expanded DP
functions also include acyclic access to the parameters and
■ Integration
DP Master Class 1 DP Master Class 2

Control tasks and diagnostics Engineering and diagnostics
e.g. PLC/PC Master diagnostics

e.g. PC
Read bus parameters
Download/upload, etc.
Configuration Slave Read input data

Parameterization Read output data
DP-V0
DP-V0
Read input data e.g. ET 200 Slave diagnostics

Write output data Read configuration
Read diagnostics data Address modification
Read/write data recordn

DP-V1
Alarm acknowledge
DP-V1
(acyclic)
Read/write data record
(acyclic)
G_IK10_XX_50004
DP-V2
Equidistance
Internode communication
DP master classes
2/90 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

PG/ 1)
Hardware PROFIBUS-DP S7 Communication PROFIBUS-FMS Time of day
■ Function
OP S5-K
Master Master DP slave

Class 1 Class 2
in the in the Put/Get Put/Get BSEND USEND H comm- Read Write Info. / Sender Relay receiver
standard H system client server BRECV URECV unication Report
system
CP 5431
Communication overview for SIMATIC

2)
SIMATIC S5 FMS/DP
IM 308-C
SIMATIC 505 505 FIM

505 RBC
CP 5434
3) 3)
SIMATIC S7-300 CP 342-5
SIMATIC C7
CP 343-5
CP 443-5
SIMATIC Basic
S7-400
CP 443-5 4) 4)
Extended
IM 467
IM 467 FO
1) S5-compatible communication; refers to SDA (PLC/PLC connection) and SDN services of PROFIBUS Layer 2
2) Additionally SRD services of PROFIBUS Layer 2
3) DP master, DP slave cannot be operated simultaneously
4) Fault-tolerant DP master and S7 Communication can be operated optionally
PROFIBUS
2/91
G_IK10_XX_50100
Communication overview
System Overview
2
PROFIBUS
System Overview
Communication overview
2
http://www.siemens.com/automation/net/ik-info
Communication overview for PG/PC
2/92 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

PROFIBUS
System Overview
Configuration examples
■ Integration
Configuration example for process or field communication
2
PROFIBUS DP PC with CP 5613
and DP-Base
S7-400 with CP 443-5 Extended (DP master) (DP master)
S7-300 with CP 342-5 (DP master)
PROFIBUS DP
S5 with
IM 308-C
0 1
G_IK10_XX_50007
Third-party device
PG with STEP 7 and STEP 5
ET 200S
ET 200X
PROFIBUS DP configuration for SIMATIC S5/S7 and PG/PC

Configuration example for data communication
PROFIBUS FMS PC/WinCC with

S7-400 with CP 443-5 Basic CP 5613 and
S7-300 with CP 343-5 FMS-5613
PROFIBUS FMS
S5-115 - 155U with

CP 5431 FMS/DP
G_IK10_XX_50008
Third-party device
PG with STEP 7 and STEP 5
PROFIBUS FMS configuration for SIMATIC S5/S7 and PG/PC

Configuration example for PG/OP communication
PG with
PG/OP communication S7-400 with CP 443-1 CP 1613
and STEP 7 V5
Industrial Ethernet
S7-400 with CP 443-1 S7-400 with

CP 443-1
PROFIBUS DP CP 443-5 Extended CP 443-5 Basic PROFIBUS FMS
0 1
G_IK10_XX_50009
S7-300 with CP 342-5 S7-300 with CP 343-5

ET 200S ET 200X
S7-400 with CP 443-5 Basic
PG/OP communication with S7 routing
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/93

PROFIBUS
System Overview
Technical specifications
Standard PROFIBUS according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 Volume 2
2
Topology
• Electrical network Bus, tree
• Optical network Bus, tree, ring
• Wireless coupling Point-to-point, point-to-multipoint
Transmission medium
• Electrical network Shielded two-conductor cable
• Optical network Optical conductor (glass, PCF and plastic)
• Wireless coupling Infrared
Network size
• Electrical network Max. 9.6 km
• Optical network Max. 90 km
• Wireless coupling Max. 15 m
Transfer rate 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s (adjustable) including 31.25 kbit/s for PROFIBUS PA
Number of stations Max. 127
Access control Token passing with lower-level master-slave
Protocols PROFIBUS DP
PG/OP communication
S7 communication
S5 compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE)
PROFIBUS FMS
For the SIMATIC NET products referred to above (order numbers
6GK..., 6XV1...) please also note the conditions of application,
which can be consulted on the Internet site quoted below.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info
More information about PROFIBUS can be found in
Catalog IK PI, in the chapter PROFIBUS
according to IEC 61158 / EN 50170.
2/94 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

System overview
■ Overview
system, where you will find everything that you need for
switching, protecting and starting motors and industrial
2
systems.
This modular selection of standard components covers the
range up to 250 kW / 400 V in just seven sizes which are
optimally coordinated, can be combined with ease and use the
same accessories. Control technology can be that simple.
Continuous further development and regular innovations ensure
that our customers are optimally equipped with SIRIUS and
benefit from efficient solutions – today and tomorrow.
All components of the SIRIUS modular system are characterized
by a space-saving design and high flexibility. Configuring,
installing, wiring and servicing are extremely easy and time-
saving to perform.
Regardless of whether you want to build up load feeders with
circuit-breakers or overload relays, contactors or soft starters,
SIRIUS has the right product for every application.
A perfect team: The SIRIUS modular system for the SIRIUS stands for innovation
controlgear cabinet
To be able to meet our customers' requirements tomorrow as
Building switchgear cabinets should be quick, easy, flexible and well as today we are dedicated to the ongoing development of
space-saving. But how can all these requirements be met our product portfolio.
simultaneously? The answer lies in the unique SIRIUS modular
The new 3RB2 solid-state overload relays
With the newly developed SIRIUS 3RB2 solid-state overload The SIRIUS 3RB2 solid-state overload relays are coordinated
relays for both standard and high-feature requirements it is now with the other components of the SIRIUS modular system with
possible to provide motor and plant protection over the full range regards to their electric rating, mechanics and dimensions.
from 0.1 to 630 A. Thanks to the large setting range it is possible,
furthermore, to cover this current range with a minimum number The SIRIUS 3RB2 solid-state overload relays reduce stock and
of variants, which compared to the "classic" bimetal relays has product variance, simplify configuring, mounting and start-up,
been reduced by up to 90 %. And this variance can be mini- increase plant availability and enable customized solutions.
mized further by the modular design of the devices for high-
feature requirements. With these devices for full motor protection
it is possible to transmit warning signals, current values and the
like, e.g. for further processing in the PLC.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/95

System overview
The new SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters – for soft starting up to high ratings
2
Two new types of soft starter in compact SIRIUS design provide

the answer for the starting of three-phase asynchronous motors
with reduced strain on the load and the network. The new
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter is used in demanding standard
applications. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is the right choice
for high functionality and for difficult starting operations.
For simple to demanding standard applications in which a wye-
delta starter has been used up to now, the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft
starter provides the best solution for starting applications with
zero torque surge. With a power range from 75 to 250 kW (at
400 V) the new SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters supplement the
existing, service-proven product segment of the 3RW30 soft
starters with 2-phase control. The use of 2-phase controlled soft
starters up to this high power range is unique and was made
possible by a new control method which was specially
developed by Siemens.
For motor starts with more exacting requirements, which up to
now had to be implemented with a frequency converter for
example, the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter provides the greatest
functionality and diagnostics with user-friendly operation.
For integration in the process landscape the new 3RW44 high
feature soft starter can be retrofitted with an optional
PROFIBUS DP module. Thanks to its new torque control the
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is a master of difficult starting and
ramp-down operations for drives covering a performance range
up to 710 kW at 400 V with an inline circuit (up to 1200 kW at
400 V with an inside-delta circuit).
2/96 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

System overview
■ Design
2
S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10 S12
SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors SENTRON
SIRIUS 3RT contactors
SIRIUS 3RU/3RB overload relays

NSA0_00419a
SIRIUS 3RW soft starters
The seven compact sizes of the modular system
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 2/97

System overview
Product For further information see
2
Robust and reliable: SIRIUS 3RT contactors • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
Thanks to the extreme robustness and best contact reliability of Controls / Controls / Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
our contactors, their switching is extremely precise and reliable. • Catalog: LV 1 chapter Controls – Contactors and Contactor
At the same time they enable you to build compact control Assemblies
cabinets with a high packing density because the auxiliary
switch blocks and coil circuits are inside the contactor’s
contours. This facilitates expansions and saves a great deal of
space in the control cabinet.
Much more than ON/OFF: • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
The SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors Controls / Protection Equipment / Motor Starter Protectors up to
The SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors are compact, current 100 A
limiting motor starter protectors. They ensure reliable shutdown in • Catalog: LV 1 chapter Protection Equipment
the short-circuit case and protect loads and the system from
overloads. In addition they are suitable for normal switching duty
with loads that have a small number of switching operations as
well as for reliable isolation of the equipment from the supply
system for maintenance work or modifications.
Triggering when things get serious: • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
SIRIUS 3RU and 3RB overload relays Controls / Protection Equipment / Overload Relays
The overload relays of the SIRIUS family are available in a • Catalog: LV 1 chapter Protection Equipment
thermal version as well as in a solid-state version for high-feature
applications. They are responsible in the main circuit for the
current-dependent overload protection of loads and the other
switching and protective devices in the respective load feeder.
Soft starting and ramp-down: • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
SIRIUS 3RW soft starters Controls / Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters /
The 3RW soft starters offer a complete range covering all stan- 3RW Soft Starters
dard and high-feature motor starting applications. As the result, • Catalog: LV 1 chapter Load Feeders, Motor Starters and
the advantages of soft starting and ramp-down can be used Soft Starters
today in a wide range of applications for realizing optimum
machine concepts with greater ease and lower cost.
Everything ready for immediate use: • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
With factory-wired SIRIUS load feeders Controls / Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters
Load feeders start loads by means of a combination of protective • Catalog: LV 1 section Load Feeders, Motor Starters and
and switching functions. This requires a wide selection of differ- Soft Starters
ent components in order to be able to realize all starter types.
To keep downtimes as short as possible, Siemens offers factory-
wired starter solutions.
SIRIUS infeed system • A&D Mall: Section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial
When you want to supply current to several circuit-breakers in a Controls / Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters /
group or to complete load feeders, all arguments are in favor of 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders
using the user-friendly SIRIUS infeed system. Thanks to a termi- • Catalog: LV 1 section Load Feeders, Motor Starters and
nal block it is also possible to integrate single-pole, two-pole or Soft Starters
three-pole components.
2/98 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Controls –
Contactors and
Contactor Assemblies
3
3TC Contactors for Switching DC
3
3/2 Introduction Voltage
3RT, 3TB, 3TF Contactors 3/124 1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
for Switching Motors 3RH, 3TH Contactor Relays
3/4 General data 3/128 3RH1 contactor relays,
3/8 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW 4- and 8-pole
3/52 3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole,
110 ... 250 kW 3/134 3RH14 latched contactor relays,
3/61 3TF6 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 4-pole
335 ... 450 kW 3/135 3TH4 contactor relays,
3/68 3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid 8- and 10-pole
system, 3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW 3/139 3TH2 contactor relays,
3/73 3TF2 contactors, 3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW 4- and 8-pole
3/143 3RH11 coupling relays for
3RA13, 3RA14 Contactor
switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
Assemblies
3RA13 Reversing Contactor 3RT Coupling Relays
Assemblies 3/144 3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
3/82 3RA13 complete units, 3 ... 45 kW 3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
3RA14 Contactor Assemblies for
Wye-Delta Starting 3TX7, 3RS18 Coupling Relays
3/84 3RA14 complete units, 3 ...75 kW 3TX7 Coupling Relays,
Narrow Design
3TD, 3TE Contactor Assemblies
3/146 Relay couplers
3/88 3TD6 reversing contactor assem-
blies, 335 kW 3/150 Relay couplers with plug-in design
3/89 3TE6 contactor assemblies for 3/151 Semiconductor couplers
wye-delta starting, 630 kW 3RS18 Coupling Relays with
3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK Industrial Housing
Contactors for Special 3/155 Relay couplers
Applications
LZX Plug-in Relays
3RT14 Contactors for Switching
Resistive Loads (AC-1) 3/157 Relay couplers
3/91 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A 3TG10 Power Relays/
3RT13 Contactors for Switching Miniature Contactors
Resistive Loads (AC-1)
3/160 4-pole, 4 kW
3/100 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
3TK1 Contactors for Switching Accessories and Spare Parts
Resistive Loads (AC-1)
3/104 4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A For 3RT, 3RH Contactors and
3TK20 Contactors Contactor Relays
3/107 4-pole, 4 kW 3/163 Accessories for 3RT, 3RH
3RT15 Contactors contactors and contactor relays
3/114 4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW For 3T Contactors and Contactor
3RT16 Capacitor Contactors Relays
3/116 12.5 ... 50 kvar 3/170 Accessories for 3TB, 3TC, 3TF,
Contactors with Extended 3TG, 3TK contactors
Tolerance 0.7 ... 1.25 × Us,
for Railway Applications 3/171 Accessories for 3TH contactor
3/118 3RH11 contactor relays relays
3/119 3TH4 contactor relays 3/172 Project Planning Aids
3/120 3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
3/122 3TB5 motor contactors, 55 ... 200 kW
3/123 3TC contactors for switching
DC voltage, 2-pole
Controls — Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
Introduction
■ Overview
3
Size S00 S0 S2
Type 3RT10 1 3RT10 2 3RT10 3
3RT10 contactors 3RT12 and 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors
Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
AC, DC operation
Type -- -- --
A-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V A 7 9 12 9 12 17 25 32 40 50
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
230 V kW 2.2 3 3 3 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 7.5 10 11 18.5 22 30
690 V 3RT10/12 kW 4 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 22 22
1 000 V 3RT10/12 kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
400 V kW 3 4 4 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 15 18.5 22
400 V 3RT10/12 kW 1.15 2 2 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 8.2 9.5 12.6
(200 000 operating cycles)
AC-1 (40 °C, 690 V)
Ie 3RT10/12 A 18 22 22 40 40 40 40 50 60 60
3RT14 AC-1 contactors

Type -- -- --
Ie/AC-1/40 °C/ 690 V A -- -- --
Accessories for contactors

Auxiliary switch blocks front 3RH19 11 3RH19 21
lateral -- 3RH19 21
Terminal covers -- -- 3RT19 36-4EA2
Box terminal blocks -- -- --
Surge suppressors 3RT19 16 3RT19 26 3RT19 26/36
3RU11 and 3RB20/21 overload relays (protection equipment: overload relays)

3RU11, thermal, CLASS 10 3RU11 16 0.1 ... 12 A 3RU11 26 1.8 ... 25 A 3RU11 36 5.5 ... 50 A
3RB20/21, solid-state, 3RB20 16 0.1 ... 12 A 3RB20 26 3 ... 25 A 3RB20 36 6 ... 50 A
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 3RB21 16 3RB21 26 3RB21 36
3RB22/23, solid-state, 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 06 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 06
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 0.3 ... 25 A 10 ... 100 A
3RV10 motor starter protectors (protection equipment: circuit-breakers)
Type 3RV10 11 0.18 ... 12 A 3RV10 21 9 ... 25 A 3RV10 31 22 ... 50 A
Link modules 3RA19 11 3RA19 21 3RA19 31
3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Complete units Type 3RA13 15 3RA13 16 3RA13 17 3RA13 24 3RA13 25 3RA13 26 3RA13 34 3RA13 35 3RA13 36
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Installation kits/wiring connectors 3RA19 13-2A 3RA19 23-2A 3RA19 33-2A
Mechanical interlocks 3RA19 12-2H 3RA19 24-1A/-2B
3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting

Complete units Type 3RA14 15 3RA14 16 3RA14 23 3RA14 25 3RA14 34 3RA14 35 3RA14 36
400 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 15/18.5 22/30 37 45
Installation kits/wiring connectors 3RA19 13-2B 3RA19 23-2B 3RA19 33-2B/-2C

Introduction
3
S3 S6 S10 S12 14
3RT1. 4 3RT1. 5 3RT1. 6 3RT1. 7 3TF6
3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 --
-- -- 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76 3TF68 3TF69
65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 300 400 500 630 820
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 450
18.5 22 22 37 45 55 55 75 90 132 160 200 260
37 45 55 75 90 110 160 160 200 250 355 434 600
45 55 55 110 132 160 200 250 250 400 400/500 600 800
30 37 37 75 90 90 90/315 132/355 132/400 250/560 250/710 600 800
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 355 400

15.1 17.9 22 29 38 45 54/78 66/93 71/112 84/140 98/161 168 191
100 120 120 160 185 215 275/330 330 330 430/610 610 700 910
3RT14 46 3RT14 56 3RT14 66 3RT14 76 --

140 275 400 690 --
--
3TY7 561
3RT19 46-4EA1/2 3RT19 56-4EA1/2/3 3RT19 66-4EA1/2/3 3TX7 686/696
-- 3RT19 55/56-4G 3RT19 66-4G --
3RT19 56-1C (RC element) 3TX7 572
3RU11 46 18 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RB20 46 12.5 ... 100 A 3RB20 56 50 ... 200 A 3RB20 66 55 ... 630 A 3RB20 66 160 ... 630 A 3RB20 66 160 ... 630 A
3RB21 46 3RB21 56 3RB21 66 3RB21 66 3RB21 66
3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 56 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 66
20 ... 200 A 63 ... 630 A
3RV10 41 45 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RA19 41 -- -- -- --
3RA13 44 3RA13 45 3RA13 46 -- -- -- 3TD68 04

30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335
3RA19 43-2A 3RA19 53-2A 3RA19 63-2A 3RA19 73-2A 3TX7 680-1A
3RA19 54-2A 3TX7 686-1A
3RA14 44 3RA14 45 -- -- -- 3TE68 04

55 75 -- -- -- 630
3RA19 43-2B/-2C 3RA19 53-2B 3RA19 63-2B 3RA19 73-2B 3TX7 680-1B

3RT, 3TB, 3TF Contactors for Switching Motors
General data
■ Overview
3RT1 contactors and coupling relays
Size S00 with mountable accessories
The SIRIUS generation of

controls is a complete, 3 17
modular system family, 18
logically designed right 4
down to the last detail,
from the basic units to the
accessories.
3
5
12
1
6 19 13
20
7
2
8
10
11
14
15
16
NSB00448
1 Contactor 14 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
2 Coupling relay 15 Surge suppressor with LED
3 Solid-state time-delay block with ON-delay 16 Surge suppressor without LED
4 Solid-state time-delay block with OFF-delay 17 3-phase feed-in terminal
5 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay 18 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without connection terminal
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) 19 Links for paralleling, 3-pole, with connection terminal
6 Single-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above 20 Links for paralleling, 4-pole, with connection terminal
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above
8 Single-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block For contactors
(terminal designation according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) For contactors and coupling relays (interface)
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard version or solid-state compatible
design (terminal designations according to EN 50005)
12 Solder pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13 Solder pin adapter for contactors and coupling relays
For contactor assemblies see pages 3/82 to 3/83.

For assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
(mech. interlocking, wiring modules) see Catalog LV 1.
For mountable overload relays see Protection Equipment:
Overload Relays
For fuseless load feeders, see Load Feeders, Motor Starters and
Soft Starters -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders

General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S0 to S3 with mountable accessories
5
17 21
11
18
10 22
3
16 2
25
12
1
14
1
6
9
15
7
19
8
16
21
13
22
23 3
24
20
NSB0_00449a
1 Contactor, size S0
For sizes S0 to S3: 18 Coupling link for mounting directly to contactor coil
4 Solid-state time-delay block with ON-delay 19 LED module for indicating contactor operation
5 Solid-state time-delay block with OFF-delay
6 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay Only for size S0:
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function)
25 Pneumatic delay block
8 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below Only for sizes S0 and S2:
9 4-pole auxiliary switch block 20 Mechanical latching
(terminal designation according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) Only for sizes S2 and S3:
10 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without connection terminal
21 Repeat coil terminal for making contactor assemblies
11 Links for paralleling, 3-pole, with connection terminal
22 Terminal cover for box terminal
12 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
(terminal designation according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) Only for size S3:
13 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on) 23 Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection
14 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable 24 Auxiliary terminals, 3-pole
15 Mechanical interlock, mountable on the front
16 Wiring connectors on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
17 Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly), can be Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S3
mounted on the top or bottom (different for S0 and S2/S3) Accessories differ according to size

General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with accessories
12
11
3
13
10
14
3
1
4
15
5
11
7
NSB01157b
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactors, sizes S6, S10 and S12
3 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay 11 Wiring connectors on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) 12 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through hole, different for
4 4-pole auxiliary switch block sizes S6 and S10/S12
(terminal designation according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) 13 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection, different for sizes S6
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above and S10/S12
6 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below 14 Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
7 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on) 15 Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
8 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
(terminal designation according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S12
9 Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top of withdrawable coil Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
10 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable Accessories differ according to size

Overload Relays

General data
3
4
5
NSB0_01410
1 Air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12

2 Vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
3 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1. ..-.A.. contactors with conventional operating mechanism
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors
and 3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
4 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1. ..-.N.. contactors with solid-state operating mechanism.
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors
and 3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
5 Withdrawable coils and laterally mountable module (plug-on) for 3RT1. ..-.P.. and 3RT1. ..-.Q..
air-break contactors with solid-state operating mechanism and remaining lifetime indicator.
6 Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on withdrawable coils
3RT1. ..-.A.. with conventional operating mechanism.
3RT1. ..-.N.. with solid-state operating mechanism.
Identical for sizes S6 to S12

Different according to size

Overload Relays

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW
■ Overview
3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S00 to S3, up to 45 kW The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is
specified by coding.
AC and DC operation Exceptions:
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 3RT19 26-1T.00 and
3RT19 36-1T.00; in this case the plug-in direction is marked with
The 3RT1 contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe "+" and "-".
according to EN 50274.
Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage damp-
The 3RT1 contactors are available with screw terminals or with ing or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according
Cage Clamp terminals. to the version.
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the
3
Note:
basic unit. The basic units of sizes S0 to S3 contain only the main The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
circuits. of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
All basic units can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. For against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
size S0 and higher, complete units with 2 NO + 2 NC are avail- diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
able (connection designation according to EN 50012). The aux- 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S6 to S12, > 45 to 250 kW
iliary switch block can be removed (for more information
see Integration). • 3RT10, contactors for switching motors,
In addition, complete units with permanently mounted auxiliary • 3RT12, vacuum contactors for switching motors,
switch block (2 NO + 2 NC according to EN 50012) are offered • 3RT14, contactors for AC-1 applications.
for sizes S00 and S0. These versions are built according to spe- Operating mechanism types
cial Swiss regulations "SUVA" and are distinguished externally
by a red identification plate. Two types of solenoid operation are available:
The size S3 contactors have removable box terminals for the • Conventional operating mechanism
main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring • Solid-state operating mechanism (with 3 performance levels)
terminal lugs or busbars.
UC operation
Contact reliability
The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as
If voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA are to be switched, with DC.
the auxiliary contacts of the 3RT1 contactor or 3RH11 contactor
relay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact Withdrawable coils
reliability. For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced,
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits with the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any
other coil of the same size.
Short circuit protection of the contactors
Auxiliary contact complement
For more information about short circuit protection of contactors
without overload relay, see Technical Specifications. For more The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 auxiliary contacts
information about short circuit protection of the contactors with (identical auxiliary switch blocks from S0 to S12). Of these, no
overload relay, see "Overload Relays". When installing fuseless more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts.
motor feeders, the combinations of circuit-breakers and contac- • 3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors:
tors described under "Fuseless Load Feeders" must be used. Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally and on front
Motor protection • 3RT12 vacuum contactors:
Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally
3RU11 thermal overload relays or 3RB20 solid-state overload
relays can be fitted to the 3RT1 contactors for protection against Contactors with conventional operating mechanism
overload. The overload relays must be ordered separately. Version 3RT1. ..-.A:
Overvoltage damping The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control
3RT1 contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors, supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
for short break times) for supressing opening surges in the coil. Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 around the world, are covered by just one coil,
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on for example 110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC.
auxiliary switch block. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of
For size S0 to S3 contactors, varistors and RC elements can be 0.8 times the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max)
snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil connec- rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
tions. Diode assemblies are available in 2 different versions on reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.
account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can
be connected either only at the bottom (assembly with circuit-
breaker) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay).


Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism Advantages:
The magnetic coil is supplied selectively with the power required • Signaling through relay contact or AS-i when remaining
for reliable switching and holding by series-connected control lifetime is 20 %, i.e. contact material wear is 80 %
electronics. • Additional visual indication of various levels of erosion by
• Wide voltage range for the control supply voltage Us: means of LEDs on the laterally mounted solid-state module
Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the when remaining lifetime is 60 % (green), 40 % (orange) and
solid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader 20 % (red)
range of control supply voltages used worldwide within one L E D - n e w 6 0 % 4 0 % 2 0 %
coil variant. For example, the coil for 200 to 277 V UC D is p la y s
(Us min to Us max) covers the voltages g re e n R L T R L T R L T R L T
200-208-220-230-240-254-277 V used worldwide.
g re e n 6 0 % 6 0 % 6 0 % 6 0 %
3
• Extended tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 x Us:
The wide range for the rated control supply voltage and the o ra n g e 4 0 % 4 0 % 4 0 % 4 0 %
additionally allowed coil tolerance of 0.8 x Us min to
re d 2 0 % 2 0 % 2 0 % 2 0 %
1.1 x Us max results in an extended coil tolerance of at least 0.7
to 1.25 x Us, within which the contactors will operate reliably, R e s e t R e s e t R e s e t R e s e t
for the most common control supply voltages of 24, 110 and N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 5 0 a
230 V.
• Early warning to replace contacts
• Bridging temporary voltage dips:
• Optimum utilization of contact material
Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are bridged
for up to approx. 25 ms to avoid unintentional tripping. • Visual inspection of the condition of contacts no longer
necessary
• Defined ON and OFF thresholds:
For voltages of 0.8 x Us min and higher the electronics will • Reduction of ongoing operating costs
reliably switch the contactor ON, and as of 0.5 x Us min it is • Optimum planning of maintenance measures
reliably switched off. The differential travel in the switching
• Avoidance of unforeseen plant downtimes
thresholds prevents the main contacts from chattering as well
as increased wear or welding when operated in weak, unsta-
3RT1...-.N version: for 24 V DC PLC output
ble networks. This also prevents thermal overloading of the
contactor coil if the voltage applied is too low (contactor does 2 control options:
not close properly and is continuously operated with overexci- • Control without an interface directly through a
tation). 24 V DC/ 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2). Connection by
• Low control power consumption when closing and in the means of 2-pole plug-in connection. The screwless spring-
closed state. operated connector is part of the scope of supply. The control
supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
mechanism must be connected to A1/A2.
The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply
Note:
with the requirements for operation in industrial installations.
Set the slide switch for PLC operation to "PLC ON" before com-
• Interference immunity missioning (factory setting: "PLC OFF").
- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kV L 1 /L + $ Slide switch must be in
- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kV N /L - "PLC ON" position
- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kV
- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m % Plug-in connection, 2-pole
• Emitted interference A 1 A 2
2
- Limit value class A according to EN 55011
D C 2 4 V
Note: 1 P L C
In connection with converters, the control cables should be in-
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 3 b
O F F O N
stalled separately from the load cables to the converter.
Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT) "Remaining lifetime"
Main contactor contacts are working parts which must be • Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at
replaced in good time when the end of their service life has been A1/A2 through a switching contact.
reached. The degree of contact erosion and thus the electrical Note:
endurance (= number of operating cycles) depends on the load- Slide switch must be in "PLC OFF" position
ing, utilization category, duty type, etc. Routine checks/visual (= factory setting).
inspections by the service personnel are needed in order to
monitor the state of the main contacts. The remaining lifetime L 1 /L + $ Slide switch must be in
indication function takes over this task. It does not count the N /L - "PLC OFF" position
number of operating cycles – which does not provide informa-
tion about contact erosion – but instead electronically identifies,
evaluates and stores the actual progress of erosion of each one A 1 A 2
of the three main contacts, and outputs a warning when speci-
D C 2 4 V
fied limits are reached. The stored data are not lost even if the 1
P L C
control supply voltage for A1/A2 fails. After replacement of the
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 4 b
O F F O N
main contacts, measurement the remaining lifetime must be
reset using the "RESET" button (hold down RESET button for
about 2 seconds using a pen or similar tool).


3RT1...-.P version: for 24 V DC PLC output or • Contactor control through relay outputs, e.g. by
PLC relay output, with indication of remaining lifetime (RLT). - PLC
- SIMOCODE
-.P P 3 .
2 0 0 -2 7 7 V by way of terminals H1/H2. Contact loading: Us/approx. 5 mA.
5 0 -6 0 H z
D C
When operated through SIMOCODE, a communication link to
A 1 A 2 PROFIBUS DP is also provided.
L1/L+ $ Solid-state module of
O N C o n ta c to r O N N/L- 3RT1. ..-.P contactor
D is p la y s fo r R L T : PROFIBUS DP
R L T L E D g re e n A1 A2 S1
e.g. % Plug-in connection, 7-pole
SIMOCODE
6 0 % L E D g re e n H1 PLC
H2
S2 other S1 Selector switch for switching
4 0 % L E D o ra n g e
from automatic
3
2 0 % L E D re d R1 Indication
R e s e t R L T R e s e t R2 of remaining
control, for example, through
H 1 IN lifetime 20% SIMOCODE or PLC
3 0 0 V
H 2 A C /D C
IN relay output to local
P lu g - in control
R 1 c o n n e c tio n
R L T NSB0_01147b
R 2 7 - p o le 1 2 S2 Local control option
IN 2 4 V
IN D C
3RT1. ..-.Q version: Communication-capable with integrated

N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 5 a
AS-Interface and indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)

3 R T 1 0 5 /3 R T 1 4 5
-.Q P 3 .
2 0 0 -2 7 7 V
To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with B u s s ta tu s
5 0 -6 0 H z
power, the control supply voltage Us must be connected to ter- D C A d r e s s ja c k
A 1 A 2
minals A1/A2 of the laterally mounted solid-state module. The C o n ta c to r O N
control inputs of the contactor are connected to a 7-pole plug-in A u to m a tic
A S -i O N c o n tro l
connection; the screwless spring-operated connector is part of A U T O D is p la y s fo r R L T :
the scope of supply. A D D R .
R L T L E D g re e n
• The "Remaining lifetime (RLT)" status signal is available at 6 0 % L E D g re e n
terminals R1/R2 through a floating relay contact (hard gold- 4 0 % L E D o ra n g e
plated, enclosed) and can be input to SIMOCODE, PLC or 2 0 % L E D r e d
other devices for processing, for example. R e s e t R L T R e s e t
Permissible current-carrying capacity of the R1/R2 relay H 1 3 0 0 V
H 2 A C /D C
output: H 3
- Ie/AC-15/24 to 230 V: 3 A P lu g - in
c o n n e c tio n
- Ie/DC-13/24 V: 1 A S F 1
6 - p o le
S F 2
• LED indicators 1
P lu g - in
The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the A S -i
2 c o n n e c tio n
3 4 - p o le
laterally mounted solid-state module:
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 8 b
4
- Contactor ON (energized state): Green LED ("ON")
- Indication of remaining lifetime 3 R T 1 0 5 /3 R T 1 4 5
2 control options: To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with
• Contactor control without an interface directly through a power, the control supply voltage Us must be connected to
24 V DC/ 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2) by way of terminals A1/A2 of the laterally mounted solid-state module.
terminals IN+/IN-. The contactor itself is controlled by way of the integrated
AS-Interface interface. The inputs and outputs are connected to
L 1 /L + $ Solid-state module of a 10-pole plug-in connection; the screwless spring-operated
N /L - 3RT1. ..-.P contactor connectors (6-pole for external connection and 4-pole for
AS-Interface connection) are part of the scope of supply.
A 1 A 2 % Plug-in connection, 7-pole
S 2 • LED indications
H 1
H 2
S 1 S1 Selector switch for switching The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the
In d ic a tio n from automatic control laterally mounted solid-state module:
R 1 o f re m a in in g
R 2 life t im e 2 0 % through PLC semiconductor - Contactor ON (energized state): Green LED ("ON")
S 1
IN P L C o u tp u t output to local control - Automatic/Local control: Green LED ("AUTO")
IN D C 2 4 V /3 0 m A
S2 Local control option - Bus status: Green/red dual LED ("AS-i")
- Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 6 c
1 2 • AS-Interface addressing socket "ADDR":
The contactor address can be assigned after installation.
Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by
way of terminals H1/H2, i.e. automatic control through PLC or
SIMOCODE/PROFIBUS DP can be deactivated e.g. at startup or
in the event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled
manually.
3/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Control circuit: L1/L+ $ Solid-state module of
• Contactor control through AS-Interface by way of terminals
N/L- 3RT1. ..-.Q contactor
AS-i +/AS-i –. Each of these terminals is jumpered and A1 A2 2 % Plug-in connection, 6-pole
connected twice to a 4-pole connector which is separate from H1
S2
the other control inputs. H2 & Plug-in connection, 4-pole
H3
Advantages: S1
e.g. S1 Selector switch for switching
- The AS-Interface cable is not interrupted if the connector is SF1
Overload relay
SF2
3RB20
from automatic control, for
pulled out AS-i example, through
AS-i
- The contactor remains functional through the local control AS-i
AS-i
AS-Interface to local control
inputs and its own 6-pole connector AS-i
S1 open: Automatic mode
• Control signals through AS-i: NSB0_01149b
- Contactor ON/OFF S2 Local control option
3
1 3
• Status signals through AS-i:
- Contactor ON/OFF
- Automatic/Local control: Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by
- Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT) means of terminals H1/H2/H3, i.e. automatic control through
- Signal through free input, e.g. overload relay tripped. AS-Interface can be deactivated e.g. during startup or in the
event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled manually.
I/O configuration (hex) 7

ID code (hex) F
Power supply V 26,5 ... 31.6 (acc. to AS-Interface specification)
AS-Interface current input mA max. 20
Contact loading at SF1/2 mA 3 ... 6
Watchdog function (disconnects outputs in the event of AS-Interface fault) Built-in
Indication behavior LED States Description of state

During operation, the LEDs on AS-Interface On On Flash- Flash-
the contactor indicate the ing ing
states shown on the right.
Station address 0
No AS-Interface communication
AS-Interface communication OK
Contactor diagnostics using the application program

• Inputs • Outputs
Input signals Device status Output signals Device status
DI0 "Ready" 0 Device not ready/manual operation DO0 "Running" 0 Contactor off
1 Device ready/automatic operation 1 Contactor on
DI1 "Running" 0 Contactor off DO1 0 --
1 Contactor on 1 --
DI2 "Remaining lifetime" 0 Remaining lifetime RLT > 20 % DO2 0 --
1 Remaining lifetime RLT 20 % 1 --
DI3 "Free input“ 0 No input signal at SF1/2 DO3 0 --
1 Input signal at SF1/2 1 --
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/11

■ Integration
Auxiliary switch blocks The electronically-optimized auxiliary switch blocks
3RH19 11-1NF.. for contactors of size S00 include 2 enclosed
Various auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the 3RT1 basic contacts. They are suitable in particular for switching small volt-
units depending on the application: ages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation
Size S00 in dusty atmospheres. The NC auxiliary contacts are not mirror
contacts.
3RT10 1. contactors,
terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005. All the previously mentioned auxiliary switch variants can be
snap-fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary switch
Contactors, EN 50 012, block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.
1 aux. contact
3
Sizes S0 to S3
3RT10 2. 3RT10 4. contactors, single-pole auxiliary switch blocks,
terminal designation according to EN 50005 or EN 50012.
contactors
Ident. No. 10E Ident. No. 01 3RT10 2.
3RT10 3.
3RT10 4.
Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks, without
DIN EN 50 012, DIN EN 50 005, aux. contact
4, 3 or 1 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Aux. switch blocks,

with 1 contact
Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,

23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02 1 NO 1 NC
Contactors, Conatctors,
EN 50 012 EN 50 005, Possible complements of
5, 4 or 2 5 or 3 contactors with 1-pole
aux. contacts aux. contacts aux. switch blocks,
terminal signations
acc. to EN 50 005 or
EN 50 012
Ident. No.
01, 10
11
NSB0_00450b
Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31, 21, 12

31, 22, 13
23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
02, 20
NSB0_00451b
03, 30
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the 04, 40
basic unit.
Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or
Cage Clamp terminal, identification number 10E, can be ex-
panded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5 auxiliary contacts
according to EN 50012 using auxiliary switch blocks. The iden-
tification numbers 11E, 22E, 23E and 32E on the auxiliary switch
blocks apply to the complete contactors. These auxiliary switch
blocks cannot be combined with contactors which have a NC
contact in the basic unit (identification number 01) as they are
coded.
All contactors of size S00 with one auxiliary contact (identifica-
tion numbers 10E or 01) and the contactors with 4 main contacts
can be expanded into contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts
using auxiliary switch blocks with the identification numbers
40 to 02 (in the case of contactors with 4 main contacts: 2 or
4 auxiliary contacts) according to EN 50005.
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks apply
only to the attached auxiliary switches.
Single- or 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks with connection options
from above or below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring
especially for the installation of network access junctions. These
auxiliary switch blocks are offered only with screw terminals.
3/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


3RT10 2. to 3RT10 4. contactors, Two enclosed and 2 standard contacts are available with the
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks, 3RH19 21-.FE22 electronically optimized auxiliary switch block,
terminal designation according to EN 50005 or EN 50012. which can be attached to the front. The 3RH19 21-2DE11
laterally mountable auxiliary switch block contains 2 enclosed
3RT10 2. contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The enclosed contacts are suitable in
3RT10 3. particular for switching small voltages and currents (hard
3RT10 4. gold-plated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres.
contactors
without
The NC auxiliary contacts are mirror contacts.
aux. contact Sizes S0 and S2
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary
switch blocks used can be of any type. For reasons of symmetry,
Aux. switch blocks Aux. switch blocks when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks are
3
with 4 contacts, 3RH19 21-. FA.. with 4 contacts, 3RH19 21-. HA.. used, one block must be attached on the right and one on the
acc. to EN 50 005 acc. to EN 50 012 left.
More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size S2 under
certain conditions (please inquire).
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 04, 22U Ident- No. 31, 22, 13
For 4-pole contactors see 3RT13 and 3RT15.
Size S3 to S12
Possible complements of Possible complements of A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note
contactors with 4-pole contactors with 4-pole the following:
aux. switch blocks, aux. switch blocks, • Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC
terminal designations terminal designations
acc. to EN 50 005 acc. to EN 50 012
contacts
• Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary switch
blocks
For 4-pole contactors see 3RT13 and 3RT15.
NSB0_00452b
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 02 Ident. No. 31, 22, 13
A diverse range of auxiliary switch blocks is available for various

applications. The contactors themselves have no integrated
control circuit.
The auxiliary switch variants are uniform for the contactors
of size S0 to S12.
One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary switch blocks
(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. When the
contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened first
and then the NO contacts are closed.
The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary switch
locks are comprised of sequence numbers (location identifiers)
on the basic unit and of function numbers on the auxiliary switch
blocks.
Also available are 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw
terminals) for cable entry from above or below in the type of
construction of a quad block (feeder auxiliary switch).
If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary switch
blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be attached later-
ally for use on the left or on the right.
The auxiliary switch blocks attached to the front can be disas-
sembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; the
laterally attached auxiliary switch blocks are easy to remove by
pressing on the checkered surfaces.
The terminal designation of the individual auxiliary switch blocks
corresponds to EN 50005 or EN 50012, that of the complete
contactor with auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC corresponds
to EN 50012.
The laterally attachable auxiliary switch blocks according
to EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on the
contactor must be noted.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/13

SIRIUS controls are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for Use, Weather-Protected"), the manufacturer must be consulted
use worldwide. about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and endur-
ance of the device and possible protective measures.
If the devices are used in environmental conditions which deviate
from common industrial conditions (EN 60721-3-3 "Stationary
Contactor Type 3RT1
Size S00 to S12
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
3
auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S121)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
For 3RH19 21-. laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks V Max. 500
Continuous thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V2) A 1
690 V2) A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0,3
600 V2) A 0,15
For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0,9
220 V A 0,3
440 V A 0,14
600 V2) A 0,1
• Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating
acc. to EN 60947-5-4 cycles
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts
It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, 3 0
N S B 0 0 4 7 2
i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. B a s ic u n it
The characteristic curves apply to 1 0
M illio n o p e r a tin g c y c le s ( 1 0 6 )
• Integrated auxiliary contacts for 3RT10 5 B a s ic u n it

• 3RH19 11, 3RH19 21 auxiliary switch blocks 4 w ith a u x .
3 b lo c k
for contactor sizes S00 to S12. s n a p p e d o n
2
D C -1 3 D C -1 3
1 2 2 0 V 1 1 0 V
A C -1 5 /A C -1 4
0 ,5
D C -1 3
2 4 V
0 ,1
0 ,0 5
1 )
0 ,0 1
0 ,0 1 0 ,0 3 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 0 ,3 0 ,5 1 2 3 5 6 7 1 0 I a (A )
I e -D C -1 3 I e -D C -1 3 I e -A C -1 5 I e -D C -1 3
2 2 0 V 1 1 0 V < 2 3 0 V 2 4 V
Legend:
Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
1) Attachable auxiliary switch blocks for size S00 and laterally mountable
auxiliary switch blocks for S0 to S12: 6 A.
2) Up to 500 V switching capacity for laterally moutable auxiliary switch
blocks.
3/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Endurance of the main contacts

The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the Size S00
contactors when switching resistive and inductive AC loads
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
(AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated oper-
ational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 0 1 5 3 R T 1 0 1 6 , 3 R T 1 0 1 7
switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of (3 k W ) (4 k W , 5 .5 k W )
the supply system. 1 0 7
7 8 1 0 6 8 N S B 0 0 4 7 3 a
8 6 6
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category 4
6 4
AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and is 4
4 2
intended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000 operating
2 2
cycles. 1 0 6
3
2
1 0 6 8 1 0 6
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current 1 0 6 8 6 8
Ie/AC-4 can be increased. 8 6
4 6
6 4
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. if normal 4
4 2
switching (breaking the rated operational current according to 2 2
utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent inching 2 1 0 5
(breaking s everal times the rated operational current according 1 0 5 8 1 0 5
to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance can be 1 0 5 8 6 8
calculated approximately from the following equation: 8 6 6
4
6 4
A 4
X = -------------------------------------------------------- 4 2
1 + ---------- Ë ---- – 1Û
C A 2 2
100 Í B Ý 2 1 0 4
1 0 4 8 1 0 4
Characters in the equation: 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 0 2 0 I a (A ) 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0
7 9 1 2 I e (A )
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in operating 3 4 5 ,5 P N (k W )
cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie) in Size S0
operating cycles
Operating cycles at
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
operations Contactor type 3RT1023 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026

(4 kW) (5.5 kW) (7.5 kW) (11 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB0_00474a
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 6
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 5
10 5 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
10 4 8 10 4
Diagram legend: 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 I a (A)
PN= Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V 9 12 17 25 I e (A)
Ia= Breaking current 4 5.5 7.5 11 PN(kW)
Ie= Rated operational current
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/15


Size S2 Size S3
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 0 3 4 3 R T 1 0 3 5 3 R T 1 0 3 6 3 R T 1 0 4 4 3 R T 1 0 4 5 3 R T 1 0 4 6
(1 5 k W ) (1 8 .5 k W ) (2 2 k W ) C o n ta c to r ty p e
(3 0 k W ) (3 7 k W ) (4 5 k W )
7 1 0 7 7
1 0 8 6 1 0
8
8 N S B 0 0 4 7 5 a 1 0 7 8 6 8 N S B 0 0 4 7 6 a
6 4 6
6 8 6 4 6
4 4 6
4 4 4
2 4
2 2
6 2 2
2 1 0 6 2
6 6 2 1 0
1 0 8 1 0 6 6
6 1 0 8
3
1 0 8 6 8 6 1 0
8 6 1 0 8 6 8
4 6 8 6
6 4 4 6
4 6 4
4 2 4
4 2
2 2
2 5 2 2
1 0 2 5
1 0
5
8 5 5 1 0
5 1 0 1 0 8 5
1 0 8 6 8 5 1 0
8 1 0 8 6 8
6 4 6
6 8 6 4 6
4 4 6
4 4 4
2 4
2 2
2 2 2
2 1 0
4
2 4
1 0 4 8 1 0 4
1 0
1 0 4 8 1 0 4
1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 a (A ) 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 a (A ) 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0
3 2 4 0 5 0 1 e (A )
6 5 8 0 9 5 1 e (A )
1 5 1 8 ,5 2 2 P (k W )
N
3 0 3 7 4 5 P N
(k W )
Sizes S6 to S12
Operating cycles at
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
Contactor 3RT1054 3RT1055 3RT1056 3RT1064 3RT1065 3RT1066 3RT1075 3RT1076

type (55 kW) (75 kW) (90 kW) (110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW) (250 kW)
7 10 7
10 8 6 8 NSB01141
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 6
6 10
6
10 8 10 6
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 5
5 10
5
10 8 10 5
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 4
10
10 4 8 10 4
10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 8001000 I a(A) 2000 3000
55 90 132 200 PN (kW)

75 110 160 250
3RT12 vacuum contactors
Sizes S10 and S12
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 2 6 4 3 R T 1 2 6 5 3 R T 1 2 6 6 3 R T 1 2 7 5 3 R T 1 2 7 6
(1 1 0 k W ) (1 3 2 k W ) (1 6 0 k W ) (2 0 0 k W ) (2 5 0 k W )
1 0 7
1 0 7 8 6 8 N S B 0 1 1 4 2
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 6
6 1 0
1 0 8 6
6 1 0
1 0 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 5
5 1 0
1 0 8 5
5 1 0
1 0 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 1 0
4 Diagram legend:
1 0 4 8 1 0 4 PN= Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 1 0 0 0 Ia (A ) 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0
Ia= Breaking current
1 1 0 1 6 0 2 5 0 P N (k W ) Ie= Rated operational current
1 3 2 2 0 0
3/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RT10 1.

Size S00
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation 360° 22,5° 22,5°
The contactors are designed for
NSB00478
operation on a vertical mounting
surface.
Upright mounting position: AC operation
NSB00477
Special design required.
3
DC operation Standard version
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Oper- 30 million
ating
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 million
switch block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary 5 million
switch block
Electrical endurance 1)

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
Safe isolation V 400
Between the coil and the contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Miror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC 3RT10 1., 3RT13 1. Yes. This applies to both the basic unit as well as to between the basic
contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary switch block) unit and the mounted auxiliary switch block acc. to EN 60947-4-1,
simultaneously with a NO main Appendix F.
contact.
3RT10 1., 3RT13 1.
(permanent auxiliary switch block) Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F, SUVA
• No mirror contacts for the
solid-state compatible
auxiliary switch blocks 3RH19 11-.NF..
Ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60
During storage °C -55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
2)
Conductor cross-sections
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders.
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20
Weld-free3) A 10
• Miniature circuit-breakers (up to 230 V) with C-characteristic A 10
Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG A 10
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection Ik 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit-breakers up to 230 V with C characteristis A 6
Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A
1) See Endurance of the Main Contacts.
2) For conductor cross-sections see page 3/15.
3) For test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1 see page 3/20.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/17


Size S00
Control
Coil operating range
• AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
Standard version • Closing VA 27/24.3
3
• p.f. 0.8/0.75
• Closed VA 4.4/3.4
• p.f. 0.27/0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 26.4

• p.f. for closing 0.81
• Closed VA 4.7
• p.f. for closed 0.26
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 31.7

• p.f. for closing 0.77
• Closed VA 5.1
• p.f. for closed 0.27
DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us), the 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is
recommended for higher residual currents
• DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us), the 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is
recommended for a higher residual current
Operating times1)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35
for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 4 ... 30
• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100
for 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 7 ... 10
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Operating times for 1.0 x Us1)
Opening delay ms 5 ... 30
1) The opening delay of the NO contact and the closing delay of the NC
contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage
peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to
6 times, varistor +2 ms to 5 ms).
Contactor Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17

Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1
Switching resistive loads
Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20
Rated output power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13
500 V kW 13.8 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22
Minimum conductor cross-section for 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
for loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 7 9 12
440 V A 7 9 11
500 V A 5 6.5 9
690 V A 4 5.2 6.3
Rated output power for slipring or at 230 V kW 2.2 3 3
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 400 V kW 3 4 5.5
60 Hz 500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5
Thermal load capacities 10 s current2) A 56 72 96
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into conditions see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays.
account).
3/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)1)
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5
Rated output power for squirrel-cage up to 400 V kW 3 4 4
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to an endurance of about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1
3
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3
- Rated output power for at 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 1.15 2 2
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-5a
Switching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
Per main current path at 230 V
• Uncorrected,
rated output power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/0.37 A units 30 43 43
L 36 W/0.43 A units 26 37 37
L 58 W/0.67 A units 16 23 23
• Lead-lag circuit,
L 18 W/0.11 A units 100 144 144
L 36 W/0.21 A units 54 76 76
L 58 W/0.32 A units 35 50 50
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction
• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,
rated output power per lamp/capacitance/
rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 mF/0.11 A units 16 22 22
L 36 W/4.5 mF/0.21 A units 16 22 22
L 58 W/7.0 mF/0.32 A units 10 14 14
• With solid-state ballast (single lamp)
L 18 W/6.8 mF/0.10 A units 44 63 63
L 36 W/6.8 mF/0.18 A units 25 35 35
L 58 W/10 mF/0.27 A units 16 23 23
• With solid-state ballast (two lamps)
L 18 W/10 mF/0.18 A units 25 35 35
L 36 W/10 mF/0.35 A units 13 18 18
L 58 W/22 mF/0.52 A units 8 12 12
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.2 1.6 1.6
Per main conducting path at 230/220 V
Switching AC transformers
Rated operational current Ie
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2
Rated output power P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9
400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5
500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2
690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6
• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2
400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5
500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6
690 V kVA 2.9 4 6
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn30 · 30/x
1) The data only apply to 3RT15 16 and 3RT15 17 (2 NO + 2 NC) up to a
rated operational voltage of 400 V.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/19


Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1
Switching resistive loads (L/R 1ms)
Rated operational current Ie (for 60 °C)
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 1.5 2.1
220 V A 0.6 0.8
440 V A 0.42 0.6
3
600 V A 0.42 0.6

• 2 current paths in series up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 8.4 12
220 V A 1.2 1.6
440 V A 1.6 0.8
600 V A 0.5 0.7
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 15 20
440 V A 0.9 1.3
600 V A 0.7 1
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
60 V A 0.35 0.5
110 V A 0.1 0.15
220 V A -- --
440 V A -- --
600 V A -- --
60 V A 3.5 5
110 V A 0.25 0.35
220 V A -- --
440 V A -- --
600 V A -- --
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 1.2 1.5
440 V A 0.14 0.2
600 V A 0.14 0.2
Operating frequency
Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload relay No-load operating frequency AC h-1 10000
No-load operating frequency DC h-1 10000
Dependence of the operating Rated operation
frequency z’ on the operational AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15
• Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947;
For standard screwdriver size 2 and max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
Pozidriv 2 2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Solid or stranded, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
AWG conductors
• Terminal screw M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
• Cage Clamp terminals Main and auxiliary conductors;
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) coil connections:
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
For tools for opening Cage Clamp terminals see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 3, Acces-
sories and Spare Parts.
Maximum outer diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
With conductor cross-sections 1 mm² an "insulation stop" must be used,
see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 3, Accessories and Spare Parts.
3/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
General data
NSB00478
surface.
NSB00477
3
Standard version
DC operation Special version required, also applies to 3RT10 2.-.K.40. coupling relays
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Oper- 10 million
ating
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on 10 million
auxiliary switch block
Solid-state compatible 5 million

Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC 3RT10 2., 3RT13 2. Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary switch block)
simultaneously with a NO main
contact.
• Mirror contacts with solid-state 3RT10 2., 3RT13 2. Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F, SUVA
compatible auxiliary switch blocks (permanent auxiliary switch block)
acc. to SUVA requirements on
request.
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10
DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10
Conductor cross-sections 2)

Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
• Fuse links gL/gG see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3 RA Fuseless Load Feeders.
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 63 100
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 25 35
Weld-free3) A 10 16
• Miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic A 25 32
(short-circuit current 3kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
(weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
1) See endurance of the main contacts on page 3/15.
2) See conductor cross-sections on page 3/25.
3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/21


Size S0
Control
Coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Input power of coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 61
standard version • p.f. 0.82
• Closed VA 7.8
• p.f. 0.24
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 64/63
standard version • p.f. 0.72/0.74
3
• p.f. 0.24/0.28
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 61
• p.f. 0.82
• Closed VA 7.8
• p.f. 0.24
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 69
• p.f. 0.76
• Closed VA 7.5
• p.f. 0.28
• AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5
• Arcing time ms 10
Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5
peaks (varistor +2 ms up to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 40
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 35
Rated output power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 13.3
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 23
500 V kW 29
690 V kW 40
Minimum conductor cross-section for for 40 °C mm2 10
loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 10
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25
440 V A 9 12 17 22
500 V A 6.5 12 17 18
690 V A 5.2 9 13 13
Rated output power for slipring or at 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
60 Hz 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
660 V / 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into
account).
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
For rated values for various start-up conditions
see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays.
3/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5
Rated output power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9
3
Rated output power for squirrel-cage at 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7
Per main current path at 230 V1)
Rated output power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A units 95
L 36 W/0.43 A units 81
L 58 W/0.67 A units 52
Lead-lag circuit L 18 W/0.11 A units 318
L 36 W/0.21 A units 166
L 58 W/0.32 A units 109
Rated output power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
• Shunt compensation with inductive L 18 W/4.5 mF/0.11 A units 37 61
ballast L 36 W/4.5 mF/0.21 A units 37 61
L 58 W/7.0 mF/0.32 A units 23 39
• With solid-state ballast (single lamp) L 18 W/6.8 mF/0.10 A units 105 175
L 36 W/6.8 mF/0.18 A units 58 97
L 58 W/10 mF/0.27 A units 38 64
• With solid-state ballast (two lamps) L 18 W/10 mF/0.18 A units 58 97
L 36 W/10 mF/0.35 A units 30 50
L 58 W/22 mF/0.52 A units 20 33
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 3 4
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5
Rating P
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 4.5 8
400 V kVA 7.9 13.9
500 V kVA 9.9 15.5
690 V kVA 13.6 15.5
• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 3 5.4
400 V kVA 5.2 9.3
500 V kVA 6.6 11.7
690 V kVA 9.1 15.5
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn30 ¼ 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8
Rated output power for single capacitors for 230 V kvar 2.5 4
or banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 4 7.5
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 4 7.5
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5
1) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor
cross-section 10 mm2.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/23


Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1,
switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 20
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
3
600 V A 0.25
• 2 current paths in series up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 35
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
60 V A 5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.09
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 35
110 V A 15
220 V A 3
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 10
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload No-load operating frequency AC h-1 5000
relays No-load operating frequency DC h-1 1500
AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
Dependence of the operating AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
frequency z’ on the operational AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h
3/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S0 S0 S0
Screw terminals Main conductors
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• AWG conductors, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)
• AWG conductors, stranded AWG 1x8
• Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)
3
Auxiliary conductors
Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
• Terminal screws M3
Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded

Size S2 S2 S2
General data
NSB00478
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5° inclination towards the front,

operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
NSB00477

DC operation --
Mechanical endurance Basic units Oper- 10 million
ating
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on 10 million
Solid-state compatible 5 million
1)
Electrical endurance
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC 3RT10 3., 3RT13 3. Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed simul- (removable auxiliary switch block)
taneously with a NO main contact.
3RT10 3., 3RT13 3. Acc. to SUVA requirements on request.
(permanent auxiliary switch block)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal enclosure IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
2)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/25


Size S2 S2 S2
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80
Weld-free1) A 16 16 50
3
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik 400 A)
Control
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version • Closing VA 104 145
• p.f. 0.78 0.79
• Closed VA 9.7 12.5
• p.f. 0.42 0.36
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard • Closing VA 127/113 170/155
version • p.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72
• Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8
• p.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 108 150
• p.f. 0.76 0.77
• Closed VA 9.6 12.5
• p.f. 0.42 0.35
• p.f. 0.7 0.71
• Closed VA 10.1 12.6
• p.f. 0.42 0.37
DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3
• AC operation mA < 12 mA x (230 V/Us) < 18 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 38 mA x (24 V/Us) < 38 mA x (24 V/Us)
(Total break time = Opening time + Arcing time)
AC operation • Closing delay ms 11 ... 30 10 ... 24
• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
DC operation • Closing delay ms 50 ... 95 60 ... 100
• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
Arcing time ms 10 10
AC operation • Closing delay ms 13 ... 22 12 ... 20
• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
DC operation • Closing delay ms 60 ... 75 70 ... 85
• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25

3/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S2 S2 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 60
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 55
Rated output power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 18 22 22
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 31 38 38
500 V kW 39 46 46
690 V kW 54 66 66
3
Minimum conductor cross-section for for 40 °C mm2 16 16 16
loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 10 16 16
Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 32 40 50
690 V A 20 24 24
Rated output power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30
690 V kW 18.5 22 22
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 320 400 400
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5
Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
• The following applies to an endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24
690 V A 15.6 18.5 24
Rated output power for squirrel-cage 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8
690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8
• Uncorrected,
L 18 W/0.37 A units 122 149 135
L 36 W/0.43 A units 105 128 116
L 58 W/0.67 A units 67 82 75
L 18 W/0.11 A units 409 500 454
L 36 W/0.21 A units 214 262 238
L 58 W/0.32 A units 141 172 156
L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A units 78 98 123
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A units 78 98 123
L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A units 50 63 79
L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A units 224 280 350
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A units 124 155 194
L 58 W/10 µF/0.27 A units 83 104 129
L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A units 124 155 194
L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A units 64 80 100
L 58 W/22 µF/0.52 A units 43 54 67
account).
For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment:
Overload Relays.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/27


Size S2 S2 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5b kW 5.8 7.3 9.1
Switching incandescent lamps
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2
3

For inrush current n = 20 for 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2
400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9
500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5
400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20
500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows
Px = Pn30 ¼ 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated output power for single capaci- for 230 V kvar 12 15 15
tors or banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 20 25 25
inductance of 20 µH between capaci- 525 V kvar 25 33 33
tors connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 690 V kvar 20 25 25
60 Hz and
Load rating with DC
Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1ms)
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 20 23 23
110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4
600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25
• 2 current paths in series up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 1 1 1
600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 45 45 45
440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9
600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
60 V A 6 6 6
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 25 25 25
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35
3/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S2 S2 S2
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load operating frequency DC h-1 1500 1500 1500
Dependence of the operating AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1200 1200 1000
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 600 400
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 800
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 300 300
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15
3
Contactor Type 3RT10 3 .
Size S2
Screw terminals Main conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) With box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x circumference)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 18 ... 2
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
NSB00480

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
NSB00481

• Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2)

- Tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors:

(1 or 2 conductors connectable)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
For tools for opening Cage Clamp terminals see Catalog LV 1,
Chapter 3, Accessories and Spare Parts.
Max. outer diameter of conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/29

Contactors Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46

Size S3 S3 S3
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649
The contactors are designed 90° 90°
for operation on a vertical
mounting surface.
For DC operation and 22.5° inclination towards the front,

NSB00477
3

DC operation --
ating
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 million
switch block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary 5 million
switch block
1)
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC 3RT10 4., 3RT13 4., 3RT14 4. Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed simulta- (removable auxiliary switch block)
neously with a NO main contact.
3RT10 4., 3RT13 4., 3RT14 4. Acc. to SUVA requirements on request.
(permanent auxiliary switch block)
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10

• Fuse links gL/gG see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 250 250
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 125 160
Weld-free3) A 63 100
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic A 10
3/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S3 S3 S3
Control
AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 218 270
standard version • p.f. 0.61 0.68
• Closed VA 21 22
• p.f. 0.26 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 247/211 298/274
standard version • p.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62
• Closed VA 25/18 27/20
3
• p.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31
• p.f. 0.61 0.68
• Closed VA 21 22
• p.f. 0.26 0.27
• p.f. 0.55 0.52
• Closed VA 20 21
• p.f. 0.28 0.29
DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15
• AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation < 43 mA x (24 V/Us)
• AC operation Closing delay ms 16 ... 57 17 ... 90
Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25
• DC operation Closing delay ms 90 ... 230 90 ... 230
Opening delay ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
• AC operation Closing delay ms 18 ... 34 18 ... 30
Opening delay ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23
• DC operation Closing delay ms 100 ... 120 100 ... 120
Opening delay ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/31


Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
1000 V A 50 60 70
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
Rated output of AC loads1) for 230 V kW 34 38 38
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 59 66 66
3
500 V kW 74 82 82
690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
Rated output power for slipring for 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 30 37 45
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 45 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8
Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 400 V kW 30 37 45
- Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 28 34 42
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
- Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V A 22 30 30
• Uncorrected,
L18 W/0.37 A units 243 270
L36 W/0.43 A units 209 232
L58 W/0.67 A units 134 149
L18 W/0.11 A units 818 909
L36 W/0.21 A units 428 476
L58 W/0.32 A units 281 312
L18 W/4.5 mF/0.11 A units 160 197 234
L36 W/4.5 mF/0.21 A units 160 197 234
L58 W/7 mF/0.32 A units 103 127 150
L18 W/6.8 mF/0.10 A units 455 560 665
L36 W/6.8 mF/0.18 A units 253 311 369
L58 W/10 mF/0.27 A units 168 207 246
L18 W/10 mF/0.18 A units 253 311 369
L36 W/10 mF/0.35 A units 130 160 190
L58 W/22 mF/0.52 A units 88 108 128
Per main conducting path at 230/220 V kW 9 14.6 17.3
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment:
account). Overload Relays.
3/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie (60 °C)
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4
up to 690 V A 47 58 58
up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3
3
• For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 25.3 31.9 33.6
400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58
500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1
690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3
• For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 16.8 22.4 22.4
400 V kVA 29.3 39 39
500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7
690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows
Px = Pn30 ¼ 30/x
Rated operational current Ie (60 °C) up to 400 V A 57 72
Rated output power for single capacitors for 230 V kvar 24 29
or banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 40 50
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 525 V kvar 50 65
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 40 50
Load rating with DC
Switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms)
60 V A 23 60 60
110 V A 4.5 9 9
220 V A 1 2 2
440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 5 10 10
440 V A 1 1.8 1.8
600 V A 0.8 1 1
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 70 80 80
440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5
600 V A 1.4 1 2.6
60 V A 6 6.5 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 7 7 7
440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 35 35 35
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/33


Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load operating frequency DC h-1 1000 1000 1000
Dependence of the operating AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 900 900
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 400 400 350
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 850
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 300 250
3
Contactor Type 3RT10 4 .

Size S3
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 4 ... 70
NSB00479

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00480

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (4 ... 35)
• Solid mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (4 ... 50)
NSB00481

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
• Terminal screw M6 (hexagon socket, A/F 4)

- Tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)
Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with cable lugs2) • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal
cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
2) When connecting rails which are larger than 25 mm2,
the 3RT19 46-4EA1 cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234.
Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
3/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S6 S6 S6
General data
Permissible mounting position 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 90° 90°
Mechanical endurance Oper- 10 million

ating
cycles
3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 1 000
Mirror contacts Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact
that cannot be closed simultaneously
with a NO main contact.
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10
3)
Short-circuit protection
Fuse links gL/gG see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 355 355
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 315 315
• Weld-free4) A 80 160
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic (Ik < 400 A)
3) See electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on page 3/9.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/35


Size S6
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Power consumption of the solenoid
(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)
• Conventional operating mechanism
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250 /0.9
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300 /0.9
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8 /0.8
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8 /0.8
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300
3
Closing at Us max W 360

Closed at Us min W 4.3
Closed at Us max W 5.2
• Solid-state operating mechanism
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break-time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- with 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95
- with Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50
• Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via PLC input
• Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via A1/A2
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
3/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S6 S6 S6
Main circuit
AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100
Rated output power for AC loads1) for 230 V kW 53 60 70
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121
500 V kW 115 131 152
3
690 V kW 159 181 210
1000 V kW 131 148 165
690 V A 115 150 170
1000 V A 53 65 65
Rated output power for slipring for 230 V kW 37 50 61
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 400 V kW 64 84 104
60 Hz 500 V kW 81 105 132
690 V kW 113 146 167
1000 V kW 75 90 90
Power loss per main conducting path for Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13
690 V A 48 57 65
1000 V A 34 38 42
- Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 230 V kW 16 20 25
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45
500 V kW 37 47 57
690 V kW 48 55 65
1000 V kW 49 55 60
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 115 148 148
• For inrush current n = 20 for 230 V kVA 45 58 58
400 V kVA 79 102 102
500 V kVA 99 128 128
690 V kVA 137 176 176
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
400 V kVA 62 68 68
500 V kVA 77 85 85
690 V kVA 107 118 118
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated
as follows: Px = Pn 30 ¼ 30/x
Rated output power for single capaci- for 230 V kvar 42 50 58
tors or banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 72 86 100
inductance of 6 mH between capacitors 500 V kvar 90 108 125
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken
into account).
Overload Relays.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/37


Size S6 S6 S6
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 160
110 V A 18
220 V A 3.4
440 V A 0.8
3
600 V A 0.5
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 20
440 V A 3.2
600 V A 1.6
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 11.5
600 V A 4
60 V A 7.5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.17
600 V A 0.12
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000 2000
Dependence of the operating AC-1 h-1 800 800
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 400 300
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 1000 750
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 60 60
3/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S6
Conductor cross-sections of main conductors with box terminal
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal (55 kW)
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 16 ... 70
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
NSB00480
NSB00479

3
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
• Stranded mm² Max. 2 x 70
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
NSB00481
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG Max. 2 x 1/0

(1 or 2 conductors connectable) With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
NSB00480
NSB00479

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
NSB00481

Without box terminal/rail connection
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm2 16 ... 95
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm2 25 ... 120
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235 use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/39


Size S10 S10 S10
General data
NSB00649
The contactors are designed for 90° 90°
surface.

ating
cycles
3

3)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 500
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 400
• Weld-free4) A 250
Auxiliary circuit
or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic
3/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S10 S10 S10
Control
3
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4 /0.5
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5 /0.4
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption,
(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 35 ... 50
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/41


Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150
Rated power output for AC loads1) for 230 V kW 94 113
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197
500 V kW 205 246
3
690 V kW 283 340

1000 V kW 164 246
Minimum conductor cross-section for for 40 °C mm2 150 185
loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 120 185
690 V A 225 265 280
1000 V A 68 95 95
Rated output power for slipring for 230 V kW 73 85 97
60 Hz 500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 280
1000 V kW 90 132 132
Power loss per main conducting path for Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22
690 V A 85 105 115
1000 V A 42 57 57
- Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 230 V kW 30 37 40
500 V kW 67 82 87
690 V kW 82 102 112
1000 V kW 59 80 80
400 V kVA 157 183 189
500 V kVA 196 229 236
690 V kVA 271 317 326
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
400 V kVA 105 126 126
500 V kVA 130 158 158
690 V kVA 180 217 217
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 183 220
Rated output power for single capacitors for 230 V kvar 73 88
or banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 127 152
tance of 6 µH between capacitors 500 V kvar 159 191
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 127 152
account).
Overload Relays.
3/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 18 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9
3
600 V A 0.5 0.6
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 20 300
440 V A 3.2 4
600 V A 1.6 2
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 11.5 11
600 V A 4 5.2
60 V A 7.5 11
110 V A 2.5 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000 2000 2000
Dependence of the operating AC-1 h-1 750 800 750
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 250 300 250
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 700 500
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 130
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/43


Size S10
With 3RT19 66-4G box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 70 ... 240
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

3
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm² Min. 2 x 70, max. 2 x 240
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG Min. 2 x 2/0, max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
NSB00481

• Terminal screws M12 (hexagon socket, A/F 5)

• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ... 240
• Terminal screws M10 x 30 (A/F 17)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Terminal screws M3 (PZ 2)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ...2.5)
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to
keep the phase clearance.
3/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76

Size S12 S12
General data
NSB00649

ating
cycles
3
2)
3)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
• Weld-free4) A 250 315
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection for Ik 1 kA)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/45


Size S12 S12
Control
3

Closed at Us max W 10
Closed at Us min W 4
Operating times
(Total break-time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
3/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S12 S12
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 430 610
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200
Rated output power for AC loads1) for 230 V kW 151 208
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362
500 V kW 329 452
3
690 V kW 454 624
1000 V kW 329 329
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads for 40 °C mm2 2 x 150 2 x 185
with Ie for 60 °C mm2 240 2 x 185
690 V A 400 450
1000 V A 180 180
Rated output power for slipring for 230 V kW 132 164
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 453
1000 V kW 250 250
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per main conducting path for Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 350 430
Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 400 V kW 200 250
- Rated operational current Ie up to 500 V A 150 175
690 V A 135 150
1000 V A 80 80
- Rated output power for squirrel-cage for 230 V kW 48 56
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98
500 V kW 105 123
690 V kW 133 148
1000 V kW 113 113
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 377 404
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 251 270
• For inrush current n = 20 for 230 V kVA 150 161
400 V kVA 261 280
500 V kVA 326 350
690 V kVA 450 483
1000 V kVA 311 311
• For inrush current n = 30 for 230 V kVA 100 107
400 V kVA 173 187
500 V kVA 217 234
690 V kVA 300 323
1000 V kVA 311 311
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as
follows: Px = Pn 30 ¼ 30/x
Rated output power for single capacitors or for 230 V kvar 114 162
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 199 282
of 6 mH between capacitors connected in 500 V kvar 248 352
parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 199 282
(increased power consumption on heating up taken into account).
Overload Relays.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/47


Size S12 S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 330
110 V A 33
220 V A 3.8
440 V A 0.9
3
600 V A 0.6
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 4
600 V A 2
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 11
600 V A 5.2
60 V A 11
110 V A 3
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.18
600 V A 0.125
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000 2000
Dependence of the operating AC-1 h-1 700 500
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 200 170
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 420
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 60 60
3/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S12
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

3
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480
• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
NSB00481

Cage Clamp terminal Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded mm2 2 x (24 ... 14)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/49

Contactor Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26

Size S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S0
CSA and UL rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 20 35
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA and UL approved values)
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20
Short-circuit protection kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100

Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 18 -- 27
Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
460 V hp -- 5 -- 10
575 V hp -- 5 -- 10
Overload Relays Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 2
Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25
Contactor Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46

Size S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30
460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75
575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection kA 5 5 5 10 10 10
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350
Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 125 150 200 250 300 400
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 45 -- 90
Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90
Rated output power at 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25
for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30
460 V hp -- 25 -- 50
575 V hp -- 25 -- 50
Overload relays Type 3RU11 3 3RU11 4
Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100
Contactor Size S00 S0 to S12

Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw terminal
and Cage Clamp and Cage Clamp and Cage Clamp
terminal terminal terminal
Integrated or 1 and 4-pole Laterally
snap-on snap-on mountable
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
Uninterrupted current
at 240 V AC A 10 10 10
3/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66

Size S6 S6 S6 S10 S10 S10
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125
460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250
575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300
Short-circuit protection kA 10 10 10 10 18 18
3
CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800
Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 350 450 500 500 700 800
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300
Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270
Rated output power at 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75
for induction motors 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100
with 60 Hz 460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
Overload relays Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 66

Size S12 S12
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 125 150
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200
460 V hp 300 400
575 V hp 400 500
Short-circuit protection kA 18 30
CLASS L fuse A 1 000 1 200
Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 900 900
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 600
Enclosed A -- 540
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp -- 150
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200
460 V hp -- 400
575 V hp -- 400
Overload relays Type 3RB20 66
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/51

3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
■ Overview Contactors with conventional operating mechanism

Version 3RT1...-.A:
• 3RT12, vacuum contactors for switching motors
The solenoid is switched directly on and off with the control
Operating mechanism types supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
Two types of solenoid operation are available: Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
• Conventional operating mechanism, version 3RT12 ..-.A A single coil covers several control supply voltages of similar
ranges which are used worldwide, e.g. 110-115-120-127 V UC
• Solid-state operating mechanism, version 3RT12 ..-.N or 220-230-240 V UC.
UC operation In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of
The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as 0.8 times the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max)
with DC. rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
3
reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.

Withdrawable coils
Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism
For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced,
the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release The solenoid is supplied selectively with the power required for
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any reliable switching and holding by upstream control electronics.
other coil of the same size. • Extended voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
Auxiliary contact complement Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the
solid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader
The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 lateral auxiliary contacts range of control supply voltages used worldwide within one
(identical auxiliary switch blocks from S0 to S12). Of these, no coil variant. For example, the coil for 200 to 277 V UC
more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts. (Us min to Us max) covers the voltages
200-208-220-230-240-254-277 V used worldwide.
■ Function • Extended tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 Us:
The wide range of the rated control supply voltage and the
3RT12 vacuum contactors addiitonal coil tolerance of 0.8 Us min to 1.1 Us max results
In contrast with the 3RT10 contactors – the main contacts oper- in an extended coil tolerance of at least 0.7 to 1.25 Us for the
ate in air under atmospheric conditions – the contact gaps of the most common control supply voltages 24, 110 and 230 V for
3RT12 vacuum contactors are contained in hermetically which the contactors operate reliably.
enclosed vacuum contact tubes. Neither arcs nor arcing gases • Bridging temporary voltage dips:
are produced. The particular benefit of 3RT12 vacuum contac- Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are bridged
tors, however, is that their electrical endurance is at least twice for up to approx. 25 ms to avoid unintentional tripping.
as long as that of 3RT10 contactors. They are therefore particu- • Defined ON and OFF operating points:
larly well suited to frequent switching in jogging/mixed opera- For voltages of 0.8 Us min and higher, the electronics will
tion, for example in crane control systems. reliably switch the contactors on and off 0.5 Us min. The
Advantages: differential travel in the switching thresholds prevents the main
contacts from chattering as well as increased wear or welding
• Very long electrical endurance when operated in weak, unstable networks. This also prevents
• High short-time current-carrying capacity for heavy starting thermal overloading of the contactor coil if the voltage applied
• No reduction of rated operational currents up to 1000 V is too low (contactor does not close properly and is continu-
ously operated with overexcitation).
• No open arcs, no arcing gases, i.e. no minimum clearances
from grounded parts required either • Low control power consumption when closing and in the
closed state.
• Longer maintenance intervals
• Increased plant availability Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Notes on operation: The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism conform to

the requirements for operation in industrial plants.
• Switching motors with operational voltages Ue > 500 V:
To attenuate overvoltages and protect the motor coil insulation • Interference immunity
against reignition when switching off induction motors, it is - Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kV
recommended to connect the 3RT19 66-1PV surge suppres- - Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kV
sion module – RC varistor – to the outgoing side (2/T1, 4/T2, - Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kV
6/T3) of the contactors (accessory). This additional equipment - Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m
is not required for use in circuits with converters. It could be • Emitted interference
destroyed by the voltage peaks and harmonics which are - Limit value class A according to EN 55011
generated.
Note:
• Switching DC voltage: In connection with converters, the control cables must be routed
Vacuum contactors are basically unsuitable for switching separately from the load cables to the converter.
DC voltage.
3/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


3RT1...-.N version: for 24 V DC PLC output • Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at
A1/A2 through a switching contact.
2 control options:
• Control without an interface directly through a Note:
24 V DC / 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2). Connection by The slide switch must be in the "PLC OFF" position
means of 2-pole plug-in connection. The screwless spring- (= setting ex works).
operated connector is part of the scope of supply. The control L 1 /L + $ Slide switch must be in
supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating N /L - "PLC OFF" position
mechanism must be connected to A1/A2.
Note:
Before start-up, the sliding-dolly switch for PLC operation must A 1 A 2
be moved to the "PLC ON" position (setting ex works: D C 2 4 V
3
"PLC OFF"). 1
P L C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 4 b
O F F O N
L 1 /L + $ Slide switch must be in
N /L - "PLC ON" position
% Plug-in connection, 2-pole
2 A 1 A 2
D C 2 4 V
1 P L C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 4 3 b
O F F O N
Size S10 S10 S10
General data
Permissible mounting position 22,5° 22,5° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB01350

surface.

ating
cycles
1)
2)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
- Acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1 • Type 1 coordination A 500
EN 60947-4-1 • Type 2 coordination A 500
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic
(short-circuit current Ik 400 A)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/53


Size S10 S10 S10
Control
3

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range DC 17 ... 30 V)
3/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 1000 V A 330
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 300
Rated output power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 113
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 197
500 V kW 246
690 V kW 340
3
1000 V kW 492
Minimum conductor cross-section for for 40 °C mm2 185
loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 185
Rated output power for slipring at 230 V kW 73 85 97
60 Hz 500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 288
1000 V kW 320 378 428
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 9 12 14
Rated output power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 110 132 160
1000 V A 68 81 98
Rated output power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 30 37 45
500 V kW 68 81 98
690 V kW 94 112 138
1000 V kW 95 114 140
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 278
• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 111
400 V kVA 193
500 V kVA 241
690 V kVA 332
1000 V kVA 482
400 V kVA 128
500 V kVA 160
690 V kVA 221
1000 V kVA 320
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as
follows: Px = Pn 30 ¼ 30/x
Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 220
Rated output power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 88
or banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 152
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 191
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 152
Operating frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000 23000
Dependence of the operating frequency AC-1 h-1 800 750
z' on the operational current I’ and AC-2 h-1 300 250
operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 750 750
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 h-1 250 250
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 60 60
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
increased power consumption on heating up taken into account). For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment:
Overload Relays.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/55


Size S10
Main conductor cross-sections
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 70 ...240
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 70 ...240
• Stranded mm² 95 ...300
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 3/0 ...600 kcmil
NSB00479

3
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 120 ...185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 120 ...185
• Stranded mm² 120 ...240
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 250 ...500 kcmil
NSB00480

NSB00481

Main conductors:
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ...240
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ...240
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ...500 kcmil
Screw terminals Auxiliary conductors:
3/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S12 S12
General data
NSB01350
surface.
Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million

cycles
1)
3
2)
3)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 800
EN 60947-4 • Type of coordination "2" A 800
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/57


Size S12 S12
Control
Coil operating range AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
3

Closed at Us min W 4
Operating times
Main circuit
AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 550
Rated output power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 208
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 362
500 V kW 452
690 V kW 624
1000 V kW 905
Minimum conductor cross-section for for 40 °C mm2 2 x 185
loads with Ie for 60 °C mm2 2 x 185
Rated output power for slipring or at 230 V kW 132 164
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 400 V kW 231 291
60 Hz 500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 507
1000 V kW 578 728
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 21 32
increased power consumption on heating up taken into account).
Overload Relays.
3/58 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size S12 S12
Rated output power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 200 250
Rated operational currents Ie 690 V A 175 215
1000 V A 123 151
500 V kW 124 153
3
690 V kW 172 212
1000 V kW 183 217
400 V kVA 290
500 V kVA 363
690 V kVA 501
1000 V kVA 726

400 V kVA 193
500 V kVA 241
690 V kVA 332
1000 V kVA 482
Rated output power for single capaci- at 230 V kvar 162
tors or banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 282
inductance of 6 mH between capaci- 500 V kvar 352
tors connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 690 V kvar 282
60 Hz and
Operating frequencies
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000
Dependence of the operating AC-1 h-1 700
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 250
current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 750
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-4 h-1 250
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 60
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/59


Size S12
connected • Finely stranded without end mm² 70 ... 240
sleeve
NSB00479

(number x width x
circumference)
3
connected • Finely stranded without end mm² 120 ... 185
sleeve
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480

(number x width x
circumference)
connected • Finely stranded without end mm² Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
sleeve
NSB00481

Main conductors:
Without box terminal/rail
connection
• Terminal screws M10 x 30 (hexagon socket, A/F 17)
Screw terminals Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947;
Max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
Contactor Type 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76

Size S10 S10 S10 S12 S12
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 60 75 100 125 150
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 75 100 125 150 200
460 V hp 150 200 250 300 400
575 V hp 200 250 300 400 500
Short-circuit protection kA 10 18 18 18 30
CLASS L fuse A 700 800 800 1200 1200
Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 500 700 900 1000 1200
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- -- 5 -- 6
Uninterrupted current Open A -- -- 300 -- 600
Enclosed A -- -- 270 -- 540
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp -- -- 75 -- 150
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- -- 100 -- 200
460 V hp -- -- 200 -- 400
575 V hp -- -- 200 -- 400
Overload relays Type 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
3/60 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TF6 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
■ Overview
Causes for such interference can be, for example:
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
• Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause
The 3TF68/69 contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors.
according to EN 50274. Depending on the arrangement in rela- • High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmo-
tion to other devices, the connecting bars may have to be fitted spheric discharges can cause interference on the control
with terminal covers (see Accessories and Spare Parts). wires.
■ Function To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency convert-

ers, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. input filters,
Main contacts output filters, grounding or screening in the installation.
3
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damp-
ing:
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked
• Feeding the contactors using control-power transformer
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the
according to EN 60204 – rather than directly from the mains
contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double
slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, • Use of overvoltage arresters, if required
the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum For operating conditions where there are high interference volt-
reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum inter- ages and no measures that reduce interference voltage cou-
rupters. pling to the control voltage level have been taken, use of contac-
Auxiliary contacts tors 3TF68..-.Q and 3TF69..-.Q is highly recommended.
Contact reliability Version
The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits The magnetic systems of the 3TF68..-.Q and 3TF69..-.Q
contactors for AC operation are equipped with rectifiers for DC
• With currents 1 mA
economy connection.
• And voltages from 17 V.
A 3TC44 reversing contactor with a mounted series resistor is
Overvoltage damping used to switch to the holding excitation.
Control circuit The reversing contactor can be fitted separately. The reversing
contactors is connected to the 3TF6 main conductor by means
Protection of coils against overvoltages:
of a one-meter connection lead with plug-in connectors.
AC operation
Connection
• Fitted with varistors as standard
Control circuit
DC operation
The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection
Retrofitting options: against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords suffi-
• With varistors cient protection for the coils.
If 3TF68/3TF69 is to be used for DC operation, an additional re- Main circuit
versing contactor is required; this is automatically included in the
As standard 3TF6 contactors with integrated RC varistors.
delivery in the same packaging as the contactor.
Protection of the main conducting paths
Electromagnetic compatibility
An integrated RC varistor circuit for the main conducting paths
3TF68/69..-.C contactors for AC operation are fitted with an elec-
of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage rises to
tronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a high
safe values. This prevents multiple restriking.
immunity against interference.
Contactor Rated control Over- Degree of Over- The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the
type supply voltage voltage severity voltage motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages
Us type (IEC 60801) strength with steep voltage rises.
(IEC 60801)
Important note: The overvoltage damping circuit is not required
3TF68 44-.C.., 110 V ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV if 3TF68/69 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers,
3TF69 44-.C.. Surge 4 6 kV
frequency converters or speed-variable drives, for example. It
200 V ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kV could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmonics which
Surge 4 5 kV are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in
380 V ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV the contactors.
Surge 4 6 kV
Solution: Order special contactor version without overvoltage
Note: damping. The Order No. must include "-Z" and the order code
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference "A02". Without additional charge.
limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output contactors Important note:
in converters, 3TF68/69..-.Q contactors without a main conduc- The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if
tor path circuit are recommended (see description below). 3TF68/69 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers,
Application frequency converters or speed-variable drives, for example. It
could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmonics which
The standard 3TF68..-.C and 3TF69..-.C contactors are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in
with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high the contactors.
resistance to electromagnetic interference.
The 3TF68..-.Q and 3TF69..-.Q contactors have been designed
for use in installations in which the AC control supply voltage is
subject to very high levels of interference.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/61

Contactor Type 3TF68 and 3TF69
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
(pollution degree 3)
Continuous thermal current A 10
Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
For rated operational voltage Ue
24 V A 10
3
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A 2.3
DC load
24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 3.2
125 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.33
600 V A 0.22
24 V A 10
60 V A 5
110 V A 1.14
125 V A 0.98
220 V A 0.48
440 V A 0.13
600 V A 0.07
Rated voltage AC V, 600
max.
Switching capacity A 600, P 600
3/62 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors at 230 V AC
4 NSB00651b
AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on the breaking current. It is as-
3
sumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,
2
i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply
system. 107
Operating cycles
8
6
4
3
2
3
6
10
8
6
4
3
2
5
10
10 -2 2 3 4 6 8 10-1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0 2 3 4 6 8 10 1 2
Ia ( A )
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum

contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum inter-
contactor base. rupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is
recommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.

C o n ta c to r T y p e
3 T F 6 8 3 T F 6 9
1 0 7
1 0 7 8 6 8 n s b 0 0 6 5 4 a
8 6
4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t 4 0 0 V
6
2
2 6 1 0
1 0 8 6
1 0
1 0 6 8 6 8
8 6
4 6
6 4
4
4
2
2 2
2 5
5 1 0
1 0 8 5
5 8 1 0
1 0 6 8
8 6
4 6
6 4
4
4 2
2
2
2 4
4 1 0
1 0 8 4
8 1 0
1 0 4 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
2 1 0
3
1 0 3 3
1 0
1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 I1 a ( A ) 6 0 0 0
6 3 5
8 2 0 1 e (A )
3 3 5 P N (k W )
4 5 0
3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors

Legend for the diagrams:
PN = Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/63

Contactor Type 3TF68 3TF69

Size 14 14
General data
Permissible mounting position1)2) AC operation and DC operation 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649
surface.

ating
cycles
Electrical endurance Oper- 3)
ating
3
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) kV 1
Safe isolation kV 1
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
One NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left
auxiliary switch block respectively.
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10
DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10
• Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Conductor cross-sections See Conductor Cross-Sections
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) See Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
• Weld-free4) A 400 500
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection at Ik 1kA)
• Or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary contacts it is
recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the
contactors.
2) If mounted at a 90° angle (current paths are horizontally above each
other), the operating frequency is reduced by 80% compared with the
normal values.
3) See endurance of the auxiliary contacts.
3/64 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size 14 14
Control
Coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1 850 /1 950 /0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 49 /0.15 30.6 /0.31
• AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1 200 /1 600 /0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5 /0.47 12.9 /0.43
• DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1.010 960
- Closed W 28 20.6
3
For contactors of type 3TF68/69..- Q :
• AC operation, Us min2) - Closing VA/p.f. 1000/0.99 1150/0.99
- Closed VA/p.f. 11/1 11/1
Operating times at 0,8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil)
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)3) 80 ... 120
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
For contactors of type 3TF68/69..- Q :
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 35 ... 90 45 ... 160
- Opening delay ms 65 ... 90 30 ... 80
Operating times at 1.0 x Us
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)3) 85 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120
For closing Reduced make time ms 90 --
Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300
1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to 10 % are possible.
2) Including reversing contactor.
3) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/65


Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie for 40 °C up to 690 V A 700 910
for 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850
for 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800
Rated output power for AC loads with 230 V kW 240 323
p.f. = 0.95 for 55 °C 400 V kW 415 558
500 V kW 545 735
3
690 V kW 720 970

1000 V kW 780 1 385
Minimum conductor cross-sections for 40°C mm2 2 x 240 Ie 800 A: 2 x 260 x 5
for loads with Ie for 55°C mm2 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240
1000 V A 435 580
Rated output power for slipring or at 230 V kW 200 260
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 400 V kW 347 450
60 Hz 500 V kW 434 600
690 V kW 600 800
1000 V kW 600 800
1000 V A 210 250
500 V1) kW 210 250
690 V1) kW 278 335
1000 V1) A 290 350
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V
• For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675
• For inrush current n = 30 A 342 450
For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256
400 V kVA 338 445
500 V kVA 444 584
690 V kVA 586 771
1000 V kVA 752 1003
For inrush current n = 302) 230 V kVA 130 171
400 V kVA 226 297
500 V kVA 296 389
690 V kVA 390 514
1000 V kVA 592 778
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors
Rated output power for single at 230 V kvar 175
capacitors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300
500 V kvar 400
690 V kvar 300
Rated output power for banks of at 230 V kvar 145
capacitors (minimum inductance is 400 V kvar 250
6 µH between capacitors connected 500 V kvar 333
in parallel) at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 690 V kvar 250
1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V,
for reduced contact endurance and reduced operating frequency.
2) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated
as follows: Px = Pn30 ¼ 30/x.
3/66 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
Short-time current carrying capacity (5 ... 30 s)
• CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820
• CLASS 15 A 630 662
• CLASS 20 A 536 572
• CLASS 25 A 479 531
• CLASS 30 A 441 500
Thermal current-carrying capacity 10 s current1) A 5040 7000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 /690 V W 45 70
3
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000
No-load operating frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000
AC-1 1/h 700 700
AC-2 1/h 200 200
AC-3 1/h 500 500
AC-4 1/h 150 150
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15
• Screw terminals Main conductors:
• Busbar connections
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 70 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM
- Connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
• Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40
- Tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)
• With box terminal2)
- Connectable copper bars
- Width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38
- Max. circumference mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18
- Terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
- Tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1) / 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1) / 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Pin terminal to DIN 46231 mm2 2 x (1 ... 1.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in)
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 630 820
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 231 290
460 V hp 530 700
575 V hp 664 860
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE hp 6 7
Uninterrupted current Open A 600 820
Enclosed A 540 810
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 150 --
460 V hp 400 600
575 V hp 400 600
Overload relays Type 3RB12 .
Setting range A 200 ... 820
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
2) See Accessories and Spare Parts.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/67

3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid system,
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
■ Overview
3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid system, The contactors are climate-proof and finger-safe according
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW to EN 50274.
DIN VDE 0660
Contactor Type 3TB50 3TB52 to 3TB56
3
Continuous thermal current A 10

Ith =Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
24 V A 10
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A --
DC load
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 10 10
110 V A 3.2 8
125 V A 2.5 6
220 V A 0.9 2
440 V A 0.33 0.6
600 V A 0.22 0.4
Rated operational current Ie/DC-131)
24 V A 10 (10) 10 (10)
60 V A 5 (7) 5 (4)
110 V A 1.14 (3.2) 2.4 (1.8)
125 V A 0.98 (2.5) 2.1 (1.6)
220 V A 0.48 (0.9) 1.1 (0.9)
440 V A 0.13 (0.33) 0.32 (0.27)
600 V A 0.075 (0.22) 0.21 (0.18)
Contactor Type 3TB50 3 to 3TB56

max.
1) Values in brackets apply to auxiliary contacts with delayed NC contact.
3/68 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. if normal
contactors when switching resistive and inductive AC loads switching (breaking the rated operational current according to
(AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent inch-
operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mecha- ing (breaking several times the rated operational current
nisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the according to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance
phase angle of the supply system. can be calculated approximately from the following equation:
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization cate- A
X = ----------------------------------------------------------
1 + ---------- Ë ---- – 1Û
gory AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and C A
is intended for a contact endurance of approx. 200 000 operat- 100 Í B Ý
ing cycles. Characters in the equation:
3
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
current Ie/AC-4 can be increased. B Contact endurance for inching
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations
C o n ta c to r T y p e 3 T B 5 0 3 T B 5 4
7 3 T B 5 2 3 T B 5 6
1 0
8 N S B 0 0 6 5 2 a
6
4
2
6
1 0
8
6
4
1 0 5
8
6
4
2
4
1 0
8
6
4
2
3
1 0
1 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 I a (A ) 4 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 7 0 2 5 0 4 0 0 Ie (A )
5 5 9 0 1 3 2 2 0 0 P N (k W )
3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors

PN = Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/69

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Contactor Type 3TB50 3TB52 3TB54 3TB56

Size 6 8 10 12
General data
Permissible mounting position, assembly note1) 22,5° 22,5° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00650a
operation on a vertical mounting surface.

ating
cycles
2)
3

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00 (open), coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance (rectangular pulse) g/ms 5/10 5.9/10 5.9/10 5.9/10
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG Type of coordination "1" A 250 315 400 630
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB Type of coordination "2" A 224 250 315 500
Auxiliary circuit short-circuit current Ik 1 kA
• Fuse links gL/gG, A 16
Control
Coil operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the coil (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
Closing = Closed W 25 30 60 86
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us (the values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• Closing delay ms 105 ... 360 115 ... 400 105 ... 400 110 ... 400
• Opening delay3) ms 18 ... 30 22 ... 35 24 ... 55 40 ... 110
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
• Closing delay ms 120 ... 230 130 ... 250 115 ... 250 120 ... 250
• Opening delay3) ms 20 ... 26 24 ... 32 35 ... 50 60 ... 95
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
Rated operational current Ie for 40 °C up to 690 V A 170 230 325 425
for 55 °C up to 690 V A 160 200 300 400
Rated output power for AC loads4) 230 V kW 61 76 114 152
p.f. = 0.95 (for 55 °C) 400 V kW 105 132 195 262
500 V kW 138 173 260 345
690 V kW 183 228 340 455
Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads with Ie mm² 70 95 185 240
5)
Rated operational current Ie A 52 72 103 120
Rated output power for squirrel-cage 230 V kW 15.6 21 31 37.5
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 27 37 55 65
500 V kW 35 48 72 85.5
690 V kW 45 64 92 106
Max. rated operational current for 400 V A 110 170 250 400
Ie /AC-4
1) For reversing duty, deviations from the vertical axis are not permitted.
2) See endurance of the main contacts.
3) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks.
account).
5) See selection table in Catalog LV 1.
3/70 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

Size 6 8 10 12
Main circuit
AC capacity
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors1)
Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 87 144 217 289
Rated output power for single 230 V kvar 35 58 87 115
capacitors at 50 Hz 400 V kvar 60 100 150 200
500 V kvar 80 130 190 265
690 V kvar 60 100 150 200
Rated output power for banks of 230 V kvar 30 40 66 85
3
capacitors (minimum inductance is 400 V kvar 50 70 115 150
6 µH between capacitors connected 500 V kvar 66 90 145 195
in parallel) at 50 Hz 690 V kvar 50 70 115 150
Load rating with DC
Switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
• 1 current path 24 V A 160 200 300 400
60 V A 80 80 300 330
110 V A 18 18 33 33
220 V A 3.4 3.4 3.8 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
• 2 current paths in series 24 V A 160 200 300 400
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 20 20 300 400
440 V A 3.2 3.2 4 4
600 V A 1.6 1.6 2 2
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 160 200 300 400
440 V A 11.5 11.5 11 11
600 V A 4 4 5.2 5.2
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
• 1 current path 24 V A 16 16 35 35
60 V A 7.5 7.5 11 11
110 V A 2.5 2.5 3 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.17 0.18 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.12 0.125 0.125
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 160 200 300 400
440 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays AC-1 h-1 1 000
AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 500
AC-4 h-1 250
1) Contact endurance 0.1 million operating cycles.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/71

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

Size 6 8 10 12
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 70 35 ... 95 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 70 50 ... 120 70 ... 240 70 ... 240
• Busbars mm 15 x 3 20 x 3 25 x 5 2 x (25 x 3)
• Terminal screw M6 M8 M10 M10
• Solid mm2 1 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75 ... 1.5
• Pin-end connector (DIN 46231) mm2 2 x 1 ... 2.5
3
Protective conductor: mm2 -- 25 ... 70 35 ... 70 50 ... 120

Stranded with cable lug
CSA rated data
Uninterrupted current Open A 150 170 240 300
Enclosed A 135 153 215 270
Rated output power for induction 115 V hp 25 30 40 50
motors at 60 Hz (enclosed) 230 V hp 50 60 75 100
460 V hp 100 120 150 200
575 V hp 125 160 200 250
Overload relays Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 56 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
Setting range A 50 ... 200 50 ... 200 50 ... 250 200 ... 540
NEMA/EEMAC size Contactors 4 4 4 5
Starters (= contactors + 3 4 4 5
overload relay, enclosed)
UL rated data
Uninterrupted current Open A 150 150 240 390
Enclosed A 135 135 215 350
Rated output power for induction 115 V hp 25 25 30 --
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 50 75 125
460 V hp 100 100 150 250
575 V hp 125 125 200 3001)
Overload relays Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 56 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
Setting range A 50 ... 200 50 ... 200 50 ... 250 200 ... 540
NEMA/EEMAC size Contactors 4 4 4 5
Starters (= contactors + 3 4 4 5
overload relay, enclosed)
Short-circuit protection devices
• CLASS RK5 fuses A 400 400 450 600
• Circuit-breakers acc. to UL 489 A 175 175 250 600
1) At AC 575/AC 600 V max.
rated motor current 325 A and
motor starting current 3250 A.
3/72 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TF2 contactors, 3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
■ Overview 3TF20 0 motor contactors according to EN 50012 or EN 50005

Contactors, EN 50 012,
AC and DC operation 1 aux. contact
IEC 60947 (VDE 0660).
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. The contac-
tors with screw terminal are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals,
6.3 mm plug connectors and solder pin connectors for soldering Ident. No. 10E Ident. No. 01
in printed circuit boards.
■ Design Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
3
DIN EN 50 012, DIN EN 50 005,
Auxiliary contacts 4, 3 or 1 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Contact reliability
To switch voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA the 3TF2 con-
tactor relays should be used as they guarantee a high level of
contact reliability.
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits with Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and higher. 23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
Short-circuit protection of the contactors

Contactors, Conatctors,
Short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, EN 50 012 EN 50 005,
see Technical Specifications. 5, 4 or 2 5 or 3
aux. contacts aux. contacts
Version
The 3TF2 contactors are available with SIGUT screw
terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and solder pin con-
nectors.
The contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors can be
NSB0_00450b
used in the plug-in socket with solder pin connectors for printed Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
circuit boards. The contactors are coded and the plug-in socket 23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
is codable in order to ensure non-interchangeability.
Auxiliary switch blocks Overvoltage damping
The contactors with 1 auxiliary contact with screw terminals re- RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combina-
lays can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of tion of a diode and a Zener diode for short break times) can be
mountable auxiliary switch blocks. plugged onto all 3TF2 contactors and auxiliary switch blocks
The contactors according to EN 50012 with identification with screw terminals from the front in order to damp opening
number 10E can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and surges in the coil. The device identification plate must be
5 auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary removed for this purpose. It can be snapped onto the attached
switch blocks. surge suppressor.
The identification numbers 11E, 22E, 23E and 32E on the auxil- Note
iary switch blocks apply to the complete contactors (see the The opening times of the NO contacts and the closing times of
illustration on the right). These auxiliary switch blocks cannot be the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are protected
combined with contactors with identification number 01E. against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 ... 10 times,
All contactors with screw terminals and 1 auxiliary contact ac- diode assemblies 2 ... 6 times, varistor +2 ... 5 ms).
cording to EN 50012, identification number 10E and 01E, can be
Reversing mode
extended with auxiliary switch blocks 40, 31, 22, 20, 11 and 02
to obtain contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts according To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing or
to EN 50005. The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch Dahlander mode an additional dead interval of 50 ms is required
blocks apply only to the attached auxiliary switches. along with an NC contact interlock.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/73

Contactors Type 3TF2
The contact endurance for utilization
category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends
mainly on the breaking current. It is as- 30 NSB00659
Interfaces
sumed that the operating mechanisms are
Million operating cycles (106)

switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized 10
Contactor relays+Interfaces
with the phase angle of the supply system. 5
Legend: 3
2 DC-13 DC-13
3
220 V 110 V
1
Ie = Rated operational current DC-13 AC-15/AC-14
0,5 24 V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 I a (A)
I e- DC-13 I e - DC-13 I e - DC-13 I e - AC-15/AC-14
220 V 110 V 24 V 230 V
v
3TF2
The characteristic curves show the con- Contactor type
tact endurance of the contactors when 3TF28 3TF20
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3) de- 107
107 8 6
pending on the breaking current and rated 6
8 NSB00653a
8 4 6
operational voltage. It is assumed that the 6 4 4
Operating cycles at 500 V
operating mechanisms are switched 4 2

randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the 2
2
phase angle of the supply system. 2 106
The rated operational current Ie complies 106 8 106
106 8 6 8
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking 8 6
4 6
six times the rated operational current) 6 4
4
and is intended for a contact endurance of 4 2
at least 200 000 operating cycles. If a 2 2
shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated 2 105
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be 105 8 105
increased. 105 8 6 8
8 6
If the contacts are used for mixed opera- 6
4 6
4
tion, i.e. if normal switching (breaking the 4
4 2
rated operational current according to uti- 2
lization category AC-3) in combination 2
2 104
with intermittent inching (breaking several 104 8 104
times the rated operational current ac- 104 8 6 8
cording to utilization category AC-4), the 8 6 6
4
contact endurance can be calculated ap- 6 4 4
proximately from the following equation: 4 2
A 2
2
X = ---------------------------------------------------------- 2 103
C ËA
1 + --------- - ---- – 1ÛÝ 103 103
100 Í B 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80
I a (A)
Characters in the equation: 5 9 I e (A)
X = Contact endurance for mixed
operation in operating cycles 2,2 4 PN (kW)
A = Contact endurance for normal
operation (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B = Contact endurance for inching Diagram legend:
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles PN= Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
C = Inching operations as a percentage of Ia= Breaking current
total switching operations Ie= Rated operational current
3/74 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactors
Type 3TF20/3TF28 3TF22/3TF29
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation any
Mechanical endurance AC operation Operat- 10 million
DC operation ing 30 million
Auxiliary contact block cycles 10 million
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3)
• Screw terminal V 690 6901)
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500 --
• Solder pin connection V 500 --
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
3
• Screw terminal kV 8 82)
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6 --
• Solder pin connection kV 6 --
Safe isolation between coil and main contacts V up to 300
(acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 02/89])
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed Yes. This applies to both the basic Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1
simultaneously with a NO main contact. unit as well as to between the basic Appendix F SUVA
unit and the mounted auxiliary switch
block acc. to EN 60947-4-1,
Appendix F
Permissible ambient temperature3) During operation °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP00 open
IP20 for screw terminal
IP40 coil assembly
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe for screw terminal
Resistance to shock
Without 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.3/5 and 5.2/10 --
DC operation g/ms 11.3/5 and 9.2/10 --
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 13/5 and 8/10 --
DC operation g/ms 17.4/5 and 12.9/10 --
With 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 5/5 and 3.6/10 5/5 and 3.6/10
DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 6.9/10 9/5 and 7.3/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 7.8/5 and 5.6/10 7.8/5 and 5.6/10
DC operation g/ms 13.9/5 and 10.1/10 14/5 and 11/10
4)
Main circuit5)
• Fuse-links gL/gG
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4/ Type of coordination "1": A 25
DIN VDE 0660, Part 2 Type of coordination "2"6) A 10
Weld-free A 10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit current Ik 1 kA
• Fuse-links gL/gG A 6
1) Auxiliary contacts 500 V. 5) According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102
2) Auxiliary contacts 6 kV. Type of coordination "1":
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The
3) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil: contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the Type of coordination "2":
max. ambient temperature is +40 °C. The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
4) See conductor cross-sections. contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
6) A short-circuit current of Iq 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/75

Contactors
Type 3TF2
Control
Coil operating range1) 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
Standard version
AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA 15
• p.f. 0.41
• Closed VA 6.8
• p.f. 0.42
AC operation, 60 Hz • Closing VA 14.4
• p.f. 0.36
3
• Closed VA 6.1
• p.f. 0.46
AC operation, 50/60 Hz1) • Closing VA 16.5/13.2
• p.f. 0.43/0.38
• p.f. 0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada
• p.f. 0.38
• Closed VA 6.5
• p.f. 0.40
• p.f. 0.30
•Closed VA 6.0
• p.f. 0.44
DC operation Closing = Closed W 3
Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit2) (for 0 signal)
AC operation mA 3 x (230 V/Us)
DC operation mA 1 x (230 V/Us)
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us3)
Values apply with coil in cold state and at operating temperature for
operating range
Dead interval To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
Operating times at 1.0 x Us3)
Dead interval To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
1) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil:
At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100% ON period the
max. ambient temperature is +40 °C.
2) The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module is recommended for higher
residual currents (see Accessories and Spare Parts).
6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
3/76 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactors Type 3TF28 3TF20 ..-0..., 3TF20 ..-3...,

3TF29 3TF22 ..-0... 3TF20 ..-6...,
3TF20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie (for 40 °C) up to 400/380 V A 18 18 18
690/660 V A 18 18 --
Rated operational current Ie (for 55 °C) 400/380 V A 16 16 16
690/660 V A 16 16 --
3
Rated output power of AC loads at 230/220 V kW 6.0 6.0 6.0
p.f. = 1 400/380 V kW 10 10 10
500 V kW 13 13 13
690/660 V kW 17 17 --
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
230 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
380 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
400 V A 5.1 8.4 8.4
500 V A 4.8 6.5 6.5
660 V A 4.8 5.2 --
690 V A 4.8 5.2 --
Rated output power for motors with slip-ring at 110 V kW 0.7 1.2 1.2
or squirrel-cage rotors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 115 V kW 0.7 1.2 1.2
and
120 V kW 0.7 1.3 1.3
127 V kW 0.8 1.4 1.4
200 V kW 1.2 2.2 2.2
220 V kW 1.3 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 1.4 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 1.5 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
415 V kW 2.5 4.0 4.0
440 V kW 2.5 4.0 4.0
460 V kW 2.7 4.0 4.0
500 V kW 2.9 4.0 4.0
575 V kW 3.2 4.0 --
660 V kW 3.8 4.0 --
690 V kW 4.0 4.0 --
(contact endurance approx. 200 000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
690 V A 1.4 1.8 --
Rated output power for motors with squirrel-cage rotor at 110 V kW 0.23 0.32 0.32
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 115 V kW 0.24 0.33 0.33
120 V kW 0.26 0.35 0.35
Max. permissible rated operational current 127 V kW 0.27 0.37 0.37
Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact 200 V kW 0.42 0.58 0.58
endurance and reduced operating frequency 220 V kW 0.47 0.64 0.64
230 V kW 0.49 0.67 0.67
240 V kW 0.51 0.70 0.70
380 V kW 0.81 1.10 1.10
400 V kW 0.85 1.15 1.15
415 V kW 0.93 1.20 1.20
440 V kW 1.0 1.27 1.27
460 V kW 1.0 1.33 1.33
500 V kW 1.1 1.45 1.45
575 V kW 1.0 1.30 --
660 V kW 0.86 1.10 --
690 V kW 0.89 1.15 --
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/77


3TF29 3TF22 ..-0... 3TF20 ..-6...,
3TF20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Switching gas discharge lamps
Per main conducting path at
230/220 V
Rated output power Rated operational current
Per lamp Per lamp (A)
3
Uncorrected
L 18 W 0.37 units 43
L 36 W 0.43 units 37
L 58 W 0.67 units 23
Lead-lag circuit
L 18 W 011 units 144
L 36 W 0.21 units 76
L 58 W 0.32 units 50
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction, solid-state ballast
Rated output power Capacitance Rated operational current
per lamp (mF) per lamp (A)
Parallel correction
L 18 W 4.5 0.11 units 22
L 36 W 4.5 0.21 units 22
L 58 W 7 0.31 units 14
With solid-state ballast (single lamp)
L 18 W 6.8 0.10 units 63
L 36 W 6.8 0.18 units 35
L 58 W 10 0.27 units 23
With solid-state ballast (two lamps)
L 18 W 10 0.18 units 35
L 36 W 10 0.35 units 18
L 58 W 22 0.52 units 12
Utilization category AC-5b kW 1.6 --
• For inrush current n = 20 at 400 V A 2.9 5.1 5.1
• For inrush current n = 30 at 400 V A 1.9 3.3 3.3
Rated power P
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 230/220 V kVA 1.14 2.0 2.0
400/380 V kVA 2 3.5 3.5
500 V kVA 4.1 4.6 4.6
690/660 V kVA 5.4 6.0 --
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 230/220 V kVA 0.74 1.3 1.3
400/380 V kVA 1.3 2.3 2.3
500 V kVA 2.8 3.1 3.1
690/660 V kVA 3.6 4.0 --
as follows: Px= Pn30 x (30/x)
Utilization category AC-6b No switching capacity
Switching low inductive loads in household appliances
Rated operational current Ie (for 55 °C) at 400/380 V A 16 16 16
690/660 V A 16 16 --
Rated output power at 50 and 60 Hz at 230/220 V kW 6 6 6
400/380 V kW 10 10 10
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
Switching motor loads in household appliances
230 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
380 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
400 V A 5.1 8.4 8.4
Rated output power of motors at 110 V kW 0.68 1.2 1.2
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 220 V kW 1.3 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 1.4 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 1.5 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 2.4 4.0 4.0
3/78 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


3TF29 3TF22 ..-0... 3TF20 ..-6...,
3TF20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
(contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles; L/R 1 ms)
60 V A 4 6 6
3
110 V A 1.5 2 2
220/240 V A 0.6 1 1
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 4 6 6
220/240 V A 1.5 2 2
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 10 16 16
220/240 V A 4 6 6
60 V A 1.8 3 3
110 V A 0.3 0.5 0.5
220/240 V A -- 0.1 0.1
60 V A 3 5 5
110 V A 1.5 2 2
220/240 V A 0.3 0.5 0.5
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 10 16 16
220/240 V A 1.5 2 2
Thermal load capacity 10 s current A 70
Power loss per conducting path for Ie/AC-3 W 0.3
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 10000
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on AC-1 h-1 1000
the operational current I’ and AC-2 h-1 500
operational voltage U’:
z’ = z x (Ie/I’ ) x (400 V/U’ ) 1.5 1/h AC-3 h-1 1000
Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors
Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),
1 x 2.5
Pin-end connector (DIN 46231) mm2 1 x 1 ... 2.5
Terminal screw M3
Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.3
(7 ... 11 lb.in)
Flat connector
When using a quick-connect terminal 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
Finely stranded 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
Solder pin connection Only for printed circuit boards
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/79

3TF2 contactors, 3 pole, 2.2 ... 4kW
Contactors Type 3TF20 ..-0... 3TF20 ..-3...,

3TF20 ..-6...,
3TF20 ..-7...
Size 00
s and u rated data of the 3TF20 contactors
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 600 300
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 16 16 (10 for solder pin connection)
(s and u approved values)
Rated output power for induction motors with 60 Hz
1-phase at 115 V hp 0.5 --
3
200 V hp 1 1
230 V hp 1.5 1
460/575 V hp -- --
3-phase at 115 V hp -- --
200 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TF20 ..-6)
230 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TF20 ..-6)
460/575 V hp 5 --
Overload relays Type/ Setting range 3UA7/EB 8 ... 10 A
Contactors Type 3TF2

Size 00
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
AC load
110 V A 4
125 V A 4
220 V A 4
230 V A 4
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
48 V A 2.2
110 V A 1.1
125 V A 1.1
220 V A 0.5
440 V A --
600 V A --
For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 2.1
48 V A 1.1
110 V A 0.52
125 V A 0.52
220 V A 0.27
440 V A --
600 V A --
s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max. V AC 300
Switching capacity A 600, Q 300
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
3/80 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Notes
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/81

3RA13, 3RA14 Contactor Assemblies
3RA13 Reversing Contactor Assemblies
3RA13 complete units, 3 ... 45 kW
■ Overview
The 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as Complete units
follows:
The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for
Sizes S00 to S3 use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
• Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical inter- The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same
lock (for voltages > 500 V, a dead interval of 50 ms on revers- power, with one NC contact in the basic unit. The contactors are
ing must be taken into account) mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock).
Sizes S00 to S12 For motor protection, either 3RU11 overload relays for direct
• As components for customer assembly. mounting or individual mounting or thermistor motor protection
tripping units must be ordered separately.
3
There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks,

surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. Components for customer assembly
For overload relays for motor protection, see "Protection Installation kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly
Equipment: Overload Relays". of reversing contactor assemblies.
The 3RA13 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are Contactors, overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of
suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mount- size S0) and – for momentary-contact operation – auxiliary
ing rails. switch blocks for latching must be ordered separately.
Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 for Size Order No.

AC 50 Hz 400 V
Rating Operational Contactor Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Installation kit Fully wired and tested
current Ie interlock1) interlock2) interlock3) contactor assemblies
kW A
3 7 S00 3RT10 15 --4) -- -- 3RA19 13-2A5) 3RA13 15-8XB30-1 . .
4 9 3RT10 16 3RA13 16-8XB30-1 . .
5.5 12 3RT10 17 3RA13 17-8XB30-1 . .
5.5 12 S0 3RT10 24 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 23-2A6) 3RA13 24-8XB30-1 . .
7.5 17 3RT10 25 3RA13 25-8XB30-1 . .
11 25 3RT10 26 3RA13 26-8XB30-1 . .
15 32 S2 3RT10 34 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 33-2A7) 3RA13 34-8XB30-1 . .
18.5 40 3RT10 35 3RA13 35-8XB30-1 . .
22 50 3RT10 36 3RA13 36-8XB30-1 . .
30 65 S3 3RT10 44 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 43-2A7) 3RA13 44-8XB30-1 . .
37 80 3RT10 45 3RA13 45-8XB30-1 . .
45 95 3RT10 46 3RA13 46-8XB30-1 . .
55 115 S6 3RT10 54 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 53-2A8) --
75 150 3RT10 55
90 185 3RT10 56
110 225 S10 3RT10 64 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 63-2A8) --
132 265 3RT10 65
160 300 3RT10 66
200 400 S12 3RT10 75 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 73-2A8) --
250 500 3RT10 76 -- --
1) Can be mounted onto the front. 6) Installation kit contains: Wiring connectors on the top and bottom.
2) Laterally mountable with one auxiliary contact. 7) Installation kit contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring
3) Laterally mountable without auxiliary contact. connectors on the top and bottom.
4) Interlock can only be ordered with installation kit. 8) Installation kit contains: Wiring module on the top and bottom.
5) Installation kit contains: Mechanical interlock; connecting clips for
2 contactors; wiring connectors on the top and bottom.
3/82 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RA13 Reversing Contactor Assemblies
■ Function Sizes S6 to S12

To insert the mechanical interlock, the prestamped location
The operating times of the individual 3RT10 contactors are rated holes positioned opposite on the contactor must be knocked
in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the out. The internal auxiliary contacts (up to 1 NO + 1 NC per con-
arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, pro- tactor) can be used for the electrical interlock and latching. The
viding they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches mechanical interlock itself does not contain any auxiliary con-
(NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. An addi- tacts. Additional auxiliary contacts can be used on the outside
tional dead interval on reversing of 50 ms is necessary at and front (on the front in the case of 3RT10) of the reversing
voltages > 500 V. contactor assembly.
The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected Overvoltage damping
by the mechanical interlock.
Sizes S00 to S3
3
The following points should be noted:
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varis-
Size S00 tors for damping opening surges in the coil.
• For maintained-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can
electrical interlock. either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or fitted
onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (S0 to S3).
• For momentary-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the Sizes S6 to S12
electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary switch block with The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor.
Sizes S0 to S3 ■ Technical specifications
• For maintained-contact operation:
The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; The technical specifications are identical to those of the
NC contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integrated 3RT10 .. contactors listed on Page 3/14 onwards.
in the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of The CSA and UL approvals only apply to the complete contactor
each contactor (one contact each for the left and right-hand assemblies and not to the components for customer assembly.
contactors).
• For momentary-contact operation:
Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the
purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO contact is
additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be
snapped onto the top of the contactors. Alternatively, auxiliary
switch blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be
fitted onto the outside of each contactor.
If the front-mounted mechanical interlock is used for size S0 to
S3 contactors, two location holes for single-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are provided on the front of each S0 or S2 contactor,
while three additional, single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
snapped onto S3 contactors. The maximum auxiliary switch
complements per contactor must not be exceeded.
When size S2 and S3 contactors are combined with a
front-mounted mechanical interlock, the installation sets for
3RA19 33–2B and 3RA19 43–2B contactor assemblies cannot
be used.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/83

3RA14 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting
■ Overview
The 3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks,
ordered as follows: surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
Sizes S00 to S3: For overload relays for motor protection, see "Protection Equip-
• Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval ment: Overload Relays -> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays".
of up to 10 s on reversing (size S00 with electrical and me- The 3RA14 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are
chanical interlocks) suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mount-
Sizes S00 to S12: ing rails.
• As components for customer assembly. Fully wired and tested 3RA14 contactor assemblies have one
unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the
3
A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the K3 delta contactor.

time relay function.
A solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is snapped onto
the front of the complete contactor assemblies, size S00 up to
7.5 kW, while a timing relay is mounted onto the side of sizes S0
to S3, 11 kW to 75 kW.
Rated data Size Accessories for
at AC 50 Hz 400 V customer assembly
Rating Operational Motor current Line/delta Wye contactor Order No. Timing relay Installation kit A,
current Ie contactor complete for double infeed
kW A A
5.5 12 1.9 ... 2.8 S00-S00-S00 3RT10 15 3RT10 15 3RA14 15-8XB31-1... 3RT19 16-2G.51 --
2.4 ... 3.4
3.1 ... 4.3
3.8 ... 5.5
4.8 ... 6.9
6 ... 8.6
7.5 17 7.8 ... 10.9 3RT10 17
9.5 ... 13.8
12.1 ... 17 3RA141 6-8XB31-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30
11 25 3.1 ... 4.3 S0-S0-S0 3RT10 24 3RT10 24 3RA14 23-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
3.8 ... 5.5
4.8 ... 6.9
6 ... 8.6
7.8 ... 10.9
9.5 ... 13.8
12.1 ... 17.2
15.5 ... 21.5
19 ... 25
15 32 24.1 ... 34 3RT10 26 3RA14 25-8XC21-1...
29.3 ... 37.9
18.5 40 34.5 ... 40
22 50 9.5 ... 13.8 S2-S2-S0 3RT10 34 3RT10 26 3RA14 34-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 33-2C3)
12.1 ... 17.2
15.5 ... 21.5
19 ... 27.6
24.1 ... 34
31 ... 43
37.9 ... 55.2
48.3 ... 65 3RT10 35 --
37 80 62.1 ... 77.8 S2-S2-S2 3RT10 34 3RA14 35-8XC21-1... 3RA19 33-2B3)
45 86 69 ... 86 3RT10 36 3RA14 36-8XC21-1...
55 115 31 ... 43.1 S3-S3-S2 3RT10 44 3RT10 35 3RA14 44-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 43-2C3)
37.9 ... 55.2
48.3 ... 69
62.1 ... 77.6
77.6 ... 108.6
75 150 98.3 ... 129.3 3RT10 45 3RT10 36 3RA14 45-8XC21-1...
120.7 ... 150
90 160 86 ... 160 S6-S6-S3 3RT10 54 3RT10 44 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
110 195 86 ... 195
132 230 86 ... 230 3RT10 55 3RT10 45
160 280 86 ... 280 3RT10 56 3RT10 46
200 350 95 ... 350 S10-S10-S6 3RT10 64 3RT10 54 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
250 430 95 ... 430 3RT10 65 3RT10 55
315 540 277 ... 540 S12-S12-S10 3RT10 75 3RT10 64 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
355 610 277 ... 610
400 690 277 ... 690 3RT10 65
500 850 277 ... 850 3RT10 76 3RT10 66
1) Installation kit contains mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring 3) Installation kit contains wiring connector on the bottom (connection
connectors on the top (connection between mains and delta contactor) between delta and wye contactor) and star jumper.
and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye contactor); 4) Wiring connector on top from reversing contactor assembly
star jumper. (note conductor cross-sections).
2) The installation kit contains 5 connecting clips; wiring connectors on the 5) Only use wiring connector on top of reversing contactor assembly (note
top (connection between mains and delta contactor) and on the bottom conductor cross-sections); star jumpers must be ordered separately.
(connection between delta and wye contactor); star jumper.
3/84 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Components for customer assembly In the case of sizes S2 to S12 only the bottom main conducting
path connection between the delta and wye contactors is in-
Installation kits with wiring connectors and, if necessary, me- cluded in the wiring connector, owing to the larger conductor
chanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for cross-section at the infeed.
wye-delta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timing
relays, auxiliary switches for electrical interlock – if required also Motor protection
supply terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case
of the kit for size S00 contactor assemblies the mechanical inter- Overload relays or thermistor motor protection trip units can be
lock between the delta contactor and the wye contactor is in- used for overload protection.
cluded in the kit) and base plates – must be ordered separately. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor
The wiring installation kits for sizes S00 and S0 contain the top or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor
and bottom main conducting path connections between the line current.
and delta contactors (top) and between the delta and wye con-
3
Note:
tactors (bottom).
The selection of contactor types refers to fused configurations
(see table on page 3/86).
Overload relay, thermal Overload relay, solid-state

(CLASS 10 trip class) (CLASS 10 trip class)
Installation kit B, Star jumper Base plates Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No.
for single infeed
A A
3RA19 13-2B1) 3RT19 16-4BA31 -- 1.1 ... 1.6 3RU11 16-1AB0 0.32 ... 1.25 3RB20 16-1NB0
1.4 ... 2 3RU11 16-1BB0 1 ... 4 3RB20 16-1PB0
1.8 ... 2.5 3RU11 16-1CB0
2.2 ... 3.2 3RU11 16-1DB0
2.8 ... 4 3RU11 16-1EB0
3.5 ... 5 3RU11 16-1FB0 3 ... 12 3RB20 16-1SB0
4.5 ... 6.3 3RU11 16-1GB0
5.5 ... 8 3RU11 16-1HB0
7 ... 10 3RU11 16-1JB0
3RA19 23-2B2) 3RT19 26-4BA31 -- 1.8 ... 2.5 3RU11 26-1CB0 1 ... 4 3RB20 16-1PB06)
2.2 ... 3.2 3RU11 26-1DB0
2.8 ... 4 3RU11 26-1EB0
3.5 ... 5 3RU11 26-1FB0
4.5 ... 6.3 3RU11 26-1GB0 3 ... 12 3RB20 26-1SB0
5.5 ... 8 3RU11 26-1HB0
7 ... 10 3RU11 26-1JB0
9 ... 12.5 3RU11 26-1KB0 6 ... 25 3RB20 26-1QB0
11 ... 16 3RU11 26-4AB0
14 ... 20 3RU11 26-4BB0
17 ... 22 3RU11 26-4CB0
20 ... 25 3RU11 26-4DB0
3RA19 33-3D4) 3RT19 26-4BA31 3RA19 32-2E 5.5 ... 8 3RU11 36-1HB0 3 ... 12 3RB20 26-1SB07)
7 ... 10 3RU11 36-1JB0 6 ... 25 3RB20 36-1QB0
9 ... 12.5 3RU11 36-1KB0
11 ... 16 3RU11 36-4AB0
14 ... 20 3RU11 36-4BB0
18 ... 25 3RU11 36-4DB0
22 ... 32 3RU11 36-4EB0 12.5 ... 50 3RB20 36-1UB0
28 ... 40 3RU11 36-4FB0
3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 32-2F 36 ... 45 3RU11 36-4GB0
40 ... 50 3RU11 36-4HB0
3RA19 43-3D4) 3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 42-2E 18 ... 25 3RU11 46-4DB0 12.5 ... 50 3RB20 46-1UB0
22 ... 32 3RU11 46-4EB0
28 ... 40 3RU11 46-4FB0
36 ... 45 3RU11 46-4HB0
45 ... 63 3RU11 46-4JB0 25 ... 100 3RB20 46-1EB0
57 ... 75 3RU11 46-4KB0
70 ... 90 3RU11 46-4LB0
3RA19 53-3D4) 3RT19 46-4BA31 3RA19 52-2E -- -- 50 ... 200 3RB20 56-1FC2
3RA19 63-3D4) 3RT19 56-4BA31 3RA19 62-2E -- -- 55 ... 250 3RB20 66-1GC2
3RA19 73-2A5) 3RT19 66-4BA31 3RA19 72-2E -- -- 160 ... 630 3RB20 66-1MC2
6) Only stand-alone installations possible in combination with the

3RB29 13-0AA1 terminal bracket for stand-alone installation.
7) Only stand-alone installation possible in combination with the
3RB29 23-0AA1 terminal bracket for stand-alone installation.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/85

■ Function
Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally wye-delta time relay with a dead interval on reversing of
operates in a D connection or starts softly or if the load torque approximately 50 ms.
during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y
step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class KL 16) or Overvoltage damping
30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The starting torque is Sizes S00 to S3:
approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line starting. The start-
ing current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor cur- All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varis-
rent. tors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the coil.
The changeover from Y to D must not be effected until the motor As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can
has run up to rated speed. Drives which require this changeover either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or fitted
3
to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wye-delta starting. onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (S0 to S3).
The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with Sizes S6 to S12:
a starting current ratio IA 8.4 x IN and using either a The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
3RT19 16-2G or 3RT19 26-2G solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switch block with a wye-delta function or a 3RP15 74.
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
For overload relays see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays -> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays.
Rating Sizes Rated motor Overload relay Setting range Permissible short-circuit fuses for starters, comprising
of contactors current contactor assemblies and overload relays
K1-K3-K2
(the overload relays Single or double infeed1)

must be set to 0.58 Fuse links
times the rated LV HRC Type 3NA NH TYPE 3ND u British
motor current) DIAZED Type 5SB Operational class listed Standard
NEOZED Type 5SE aM fuses Fuses
gL/gG operational class CLASS BS88
Type of coordination Type of RK5/L Type of
coordination coordination
"1" "2" "2" "1" "2"
kW A Type A A A A A A A
5.5 S00-S00-S00 12 3RU11 16-1HB0 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 20
7.5 S00-S00-S00 17 3RU11 16-1JB0 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 20
11 S0-S0-S0 25 3RU11 26-4AB0 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 25
15 S0-S0-S0 32 3RU11 26-4BB0 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 35
18.5 S0-S0-S0 40 3RU11 26-4DB0 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 35
22 S2-S2-S0 50 3RU11 36-4EB0 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63
30 S2-S2-S0 65 3RU11 36-4FB0 28 ... 40 125 63 50 150 125 63
37 S2-S2-S2 80 3RU11 36-4GB0 36 ... 45 125 63 50 175 125 63
45 S2-S2-S2 86 3RU11 36-4HB0 40 ... 50 160 80 50 200 160 80
55 S3-S3-S2 115 3RU11 46-4KB0 57 ... 75 250 125 63 300 250 125
75 S3-S3-S2 150 3RU11 46-4LB0 70 ... 90 250 160 80 350 250 160
90 S6-S6-S3 160 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 450 355 250
110 S6-S6-S3 195 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 450 355 250
132 S6-S6-S3 230 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 500 355 315
160 S6-S6-S3 280 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 200 500 355 315
200 S10-S10-S6 350 3RB20 66-1GC2 55 ... 250 500 400 250 700 500 400
250 S10-S10-S6 430 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 500 400 315 800 500 400
315 S12-S12-S10 540 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 500 400 1000 630 450
355 S12-S12-S10 610 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 500 400 1000 630 450
400 S12-S12-S10 690 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 500 400 1000 630 450
500 S12-S12-S10 850 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 500 500 1200 630 500
1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
3/86 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Starters Sizes S..-S..-S.. 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 0-0-0 2-2-0 2-2-2 2-2-2 3-3-2 3-3-2
Type 3RA.. .. 14 15 14 16 14 23 14 25 14 34 14 35 14 36 14 44 14 45
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual 3RT contactors and 3RU
overload relays
Mechanical endurance Operat- 3 million
ing
cycles
1)
Short-circuit protection without overload relay
Maximum rated current of the fuse
Main circuit
3
Fuse links gL/gG
Single or double infeed
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35 35 63 100 125 125 160 250 250
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20 20 25 35 63 63 80 125 160
Control circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG A 10
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected
(short-circuit current Ik 1 kA) in the contactor coil circuit
Miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic A 10
A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
Size of contactors K1 Line contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
K3 delta contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
K2 wye contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 15 10 24 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 34 10 35 10 36
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the contactors 3)
Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s

Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 12 17 25 40 65 80 86 115 150
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31.2 55.4 69.3 86 112.6 138.6
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 53.7 69.3 69.3 98.7 138.6
Rated output power for induction at 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 12 20.4 25.5 27.8 37 49
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 21 35 44 48 65 85
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.5 38 48 60 80 98
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 51 66 67 97 136
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Operating frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31 44 57 67 97 106
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 44 57 67 97 106
Rated output power for induction at 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 9.4 13.8 18.2 21.6 32 35
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 16.3 24 31.6 38 55 60
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.4 30 40 47 69 75
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 42 55 65 95 104
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 28 39 51 57 85 92
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 39 51 57 85 92
Rated output power for induction at 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 8.5 12.2 16.3 18.4 28 30
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 14.7 21.3 28 32 48 52
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 18.4 26.7 35 40 60 65
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 37 49 55 83 90
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
1) Short-circuit protection with overload relays, see Protection Equipment:
Overload Relays -> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays.
2) Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; 260 V.
3) See circuit diagrams of the control circuit on page 3/228.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/87

3TD6 reversing contactor assemblies, 335 kW
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate and The operating times of the individual contactors are rated in
the contactors are mechanically interlocked. They are finger- such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the
safe according to EN 50274. arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing,
providing they are interlocked via their auxiliary switches and the
Complete units and components for customer assembly are operating mechanisms.
available. For motor protection, either overload relays for individ-
ual installation or thermistor motor protection trip units must be The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected
ordered separately. by the mechanical interlock.
Complete units
3TD68 contactor assemblies each consist of two mechanically
3
interlocked 3TF68 contactors. Electrical interlocking is wired.

The main and control circuits are wired according to the circuit
diagrams.
An internal circuit diagram, a type designation and an
identification plate are provided on a common cover.
Auxiliary contacts
The contactor assemblies each have 2 NO + 2 NC contacts per
contactor. NO + 1 NC contacts with momentary-contact
operation and 2 NO + 1 NC contacts with continuous
operation are unassigned.
Contactor Type 3TD68
General data
Permissible mounting position, assembly note1) 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649

Uninterrupted current enclosed A 550
Rated output power for induction at 200 V hp 200
motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 229
460 V hp 464
575 V hp 582
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE hp 6
Uninterrupted current Open A 600
Enclosed A 540
Rated output power for at 200 V hp 150
induction motors at 60 Hz 230 V hp 200
460 V hp 400
575 V hp 400
Overload relay Type 3RB20 66
Setting range A 160 ... 630
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection For the unassigned auxiliary contacts of the contactors,
Equipment: Overload Relays -> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload see "Circuit Diagrams of the Control Circuits".
Relays. 1) If the contactors are mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths horizon-
The technical specifications are identical to those of the 3TF68 tally one above the other), the following reductions apply: Operating
contactors. frequency: to 80 % of the standard values.
The mechanical endurance is 5 million operating cycles for
3TD68.
3/88 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TE6 contactor assemblies for
wye-delta starting, 630 kW
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. operates in a D connection or starts softly or if the load torque
during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the
3TE contactor assemblies are available as complete units and Y step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class KL 16) or
components for customer assembly. 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The starting torque is
The complete unit combinations are optionally supplied without approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line starting. The start-
a main conducting path connection between the line contactor ing current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor cur-
and the delta contactor. rent.
Motor protection The changeover from Y to D must not be effected until the motor
has run up to rated speed. Drives which require this changeover
3
3TE68 contactor assemblies are supplied without overload pro- to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wye-delta starting.
tection. Overload relays or thermistor motor protection trip units
must be ordered separately. The ratings given in the selection and ordering data are only ap-
plicable to motors with a starting current ratio of IA 8.4 x IN and
The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor using a 3RP15 74 wye-delta time relay with a dead interval of
or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor approximately 50 ms on reversing.
current.
Starters Type 3TE68
General data
Permissible mounting position, assembly note1) 22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649

ating
cycles
Type of individual contactors K1 Line contactor Type 3TF68
K3 delta contactor Type 3TF68
K2 wye contactor Type 3RT10 75
2)
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the contactors
Rated output power for induction at 230 V kW 355
motors with 50 Hz 400 V kW 612
500 V kW 800
690 V kW 1 046
Operating frequency with overload relay h-1 3
Rated operational current Ie up to 500 V A 923
690 V A 883
500 V kW 677
690 V kW 885
690 V A 765
500 V kW 590
690 V kW 770
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
- Acc. to Type of coordination "1" A 1000
IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 5003)
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links gL/gG A 10
(Ik < 400 A)
1) If the contactors are mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths horizon- 2) See circuit diagrams of the control circuits.
tally one above the other), the following reductions apply: Operating 3) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
frequency: to 80 % of the standard values.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/89

3TE6 contactor assemblies for
wye-delta starting, 630 kW
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
Contactor assembly Rated motor Overload Setting Permissible short-circuit fuses for starters, comprising contactor assemblies and overload
current relay range (the relays. Single or double infeed1)
overload Fuse links
relays must LV HRC Type 3NA, LV HRC 3ND, Siemens UL-listed British Standard Fuses
be set to DIAZED Type 5SB, aM operational Canada, fuses BS88
0.58 times NEOZED Type 5SE class HRC fuses, CLASS L
the rated Type of coordination Type II Type of coordination
motor cur- Type of
rent) "1" "2" "1" "2"
coordination
"2"
Type A Type A A A A A A A A
3TE68 277 ... 1090 3RB20 66 160 ... 630 1000 500 630 1000 1200 1000 500
3
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection

Equipment: Overload Relays -> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload
Relays.
Use double infeed for higher rated motor currents (see circuit
diagram).
1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
3/90 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK Contactors for Special Applications
3RT14 Contactors for Switching Resistive Loads (AC-1)
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
■ Overview
AC and DC operation (size S3) 3RT14 contactors are used for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
or as contactors, for example, for variable-speed drives that
UC operation (AC/DC) (sizes S6 to S12) normally only have to carry the current.
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) The accessories for the 3RT10 contactors can also be used
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are here.
finger-safe according to EN 50274. For more detailed descriptions about the sizes S6 to S12,
see 3RT10 Contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW.
3
Contactor Type 3RT14 46
Size S3
General data
NSB00478
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 °C inclination towards the front,

NSB00477

DC operation --
Mechanical endurance Operat- 10 million
ing
cycles
Electrical endurance in operating cycles Operat- 0.5 million
Utilization category AC-1 at Ie ing
cycles
Mirror contacts Removable auxiliary switch block Yes. Acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC Permanently fitted auxiliary switch Acc. to Swiss regulations (SUVA) on request
contact that cannot be closed simul- block
taneously with a NO main contact.
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
1)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG operational class, Type of coordination "1“ A 250
LV HRC, 3NA
Fuse links, gR operational class, Type of coordination "2" A 250
SITOR 3NE
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links gL/gG (weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA) A 10
or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/91

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
Control
Standard version, • Closing VA 270
AC operation, 50 Hz • p.f. 0.68
• Closed VA 22
• p.f. 0.27
Standard version, • Closing VA 298/274
AC operation, 50/60 Hz • p.f. 0.7/0.62
3
• Closed VA 27/20
• p.f. 0.29/0.31
For USA and Canada, • Closing VA 270
• Closed VA 22
• p.f. 0.27
For USA and Canada, • Closing VA 300
• Closed VA 21
• p.f. 0.29
3/92 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 130
at 1000 V A 60
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 50
AC loads 400 V kW 86
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 107
690 V kW 148
3
1000 V kW 98
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 50
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 50
With an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
Rated output power of slipring at 230 V kW 12.7
or squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 22
50 Hz and 60 Hz (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 29.9
690 V kW 38.2
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-1 W 12.5
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
60 V A 80
110 V A 12
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.48
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 13
440 V A 2.4
600 V A 1.3
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 130
440 V A 6
600 V A 3.4
60 V A 3
110 V A 1.25
220 V A 0.35
440 V A 0.15
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 1.75
440 V A 0.42
600 V A 0.27
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 4
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.45
Operating frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency AC 1/h 5000
No-load operating frequency DC 1/h 1000
Rated operation acc. to AC-1 (AC/DC) 1/h 650
acc. to AC-3 (AC/DC) 1/h 1000
Dependence of the operating frequency z'
on the operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’:z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/93

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00479

3
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00480

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
• Solid mm² Max. 2 x 16
NSB00481

Connection for drilled Max. width1) mm 10
copper bars
Main conductor:
Without box terminal
with cable lugs2)
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
• Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16); 2 x (18 ... 14); 1 x 12
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1
terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
2) When connecting rails which are larger than 25 mm²,
the 3RT19 46-4EA1 cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
3/94 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Size S6 S10 S12
General data
NSB00649
operation on a vertical mounting surface.

ating
cycles
3
Electrical endurance Oper- 0.5 million
Utilization category AC-1 at Ie ating
cycles
Safe isolation between the coil and the auxiliary contacts and contacts V 690
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
1)
2)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG Type of coordination "1" A 355 500 800
NH 3NA
Fuse links gR, Type of coordination "2" A 350 500 710
SITOR 3NE
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links gL/gG A 10
1) See conductor cross-sections on pages 3/98, 3/99.
2) See Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) on page 3/9.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/95

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6 S10 S12
Control
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9 490/0.9 700/0.9
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9 590/0.9 830/0.9
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8 5.6/0.9 7.6/0.9
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8 6.7/0.9 9.2/0.9
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300 540 770
3
Closing at Us max W 360 650 920

Closed at Us min W 4.3 6.1 8.5
Closed at Us max W 5.2 7.4 10
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 190/0.8 400/0.8 560/0.8
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 28 /0.8 530/0.8 750/0.8
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 3.5/0.5 4/0.5 5.4/0.8
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 4/0.4 5/0.4 7/0.8
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 250 440 600
Closing at Us max W 320 580 800
Closed at Us min W 2.3 3.2 4
Closed at Us max W 2.8 3.8 5
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range
DC 17 ... 30 V)
Operating times
- with 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95 30 ... 95 45 ... 100
Opening delay ms 40 ... 60 40 ... 80 60 ... 100
- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50 35 ... 50 50 ... 70
Opening delay ms 40 ... 60 50 ... 80 70 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 200 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 380 6501)
at 1000 V A 100 150 250
Rated output power for AC loads2) at 230 V kW 95 145 245
p.f.= 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 165 250 430
500 V kW 205 315 535
690 V kW 285 430 740
1000 V kW 165 247 410
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 2 x 70 240 2 x 240
loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 120 240 2 x 240
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-1 W 20 27 55
for an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
Rated output power of slipring or at 230 V kW 30 37 55
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 400 V kW 55 75 90
60 Hz (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 55 90 110
690 V kW 90 132 160
1) 600 A for 3RT14 76-N contactor.
(increased power consumption on heating up taken into account).
3/96 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6 S10 S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 18 33 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.6 0.6
3
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 20 380 500
440 V A 3.2 4 4
600 V A 1.6 2 2
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 250 380 500
440 V A 11.5 11 11
600 V A 4 5.2 5.2
60 V A 7.5 11 11
110 V A 2.5 3 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125 0.125
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37 0.37
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 250 380 500
440 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75 0.75
Operating frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 2000
AC-1 h-1 600
AC-3 h-1 1000
Dependence of the operating fre-
quency z' on the operational current I’
and operational voltage U’:
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I’) ¼(400 V/U’)1.5 ¼1/h
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/97

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6
Front or rear • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70
clamping point connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70
NSB00479
NSB00480
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 3 x 9 x 0.8 ... 6 x 15.5 x 0.8

3
Both clamping points

connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeves, max. mm2 1 x 50, 1 x 70
• Finely stranded without end connector mm2 1 x 50, 1 x 70
sleeve
NSB00481
• Stranded (max.) mm2 2 x 70

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
(number x width x circumference), max.
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded, max. AWG 2 x 1/0
Front or rear Main conductors:
clamping point connected With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
NSB00479
NSB00480

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 3 x 9 x 0.8 ... 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
Both clamping points
connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeves, max. mm2 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Finely stranded without end connector mm2 1 x 95, 1 x 120
sleeve
NSB00481
• Stranded (max.) mm2 2 x 120

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
(number x width x circumference), max.
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded, max. AWG 2 x 3/0
Without box terminal/rail connection1)
• Finely stranded with cable lug 16 ... 95
• Stranded with cable lug 25 ... 120
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded 4 ... 250 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) 17
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
• Conductor cross-section
- Solid 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
- Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) 2 x (18 ... 14)
• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
1) When connection cable lugs to DIN 46235, use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2 to ensure phase
spacing.
3/98 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S10 S12
(1 or 2 conductors With 3RT19 66-4G box terminal
connectable)
NSB00479

3
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480

NSB00481

Without box terminal/rail connection1)
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm² 70 ... 240
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/99

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
■ Overview Contactor assembly with mechanical interlock

The 4-pole 3RT13 contactors with 4 NO contacts as the main
AC and DC operation contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102) mechanical interlock, e.g. for system transfers.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are Size S00
finger-safe according to EN 50274. Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two 3RT13 1.
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and
used for the 4-pole versions. two connecting clips (Order No.: 3RA19 12-2H, package with
10 interlock elements and 20 clips for 10 assemblies).
■ Function Size S0
3
• Switching resistive loads When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from

two 3RT13 2. contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor
• Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral
must always be moved to the left side. The contactor assembly
conductors
can then be made easily with the aid of the 3RA19 24-1A
• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are mechanical interlock fitted onto the front and the 3RA19 22-2C
used mechanical connectors. The laterally mountable 3RA19 24-2B
• As contactors, e.g. for variable-speed drives which only have mechanical interlock can be used if the contactor assembly is
to carry current and not switch mounted on a base plate.
Sizes S2 and S3
■ Integration Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two 3RT13 3. or
Mountable auxiliary contacts two 3RT13 4. contactors in conjunction with the laterally mount-
able 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock and the 3RA19 .2-2G
Size S00 mechanical connectors. The mechanical interlock for fitting onto
4 auxiliary contacts (according to EN 50005) the front cannot be used for size S2 and S3 contactors.
Size S0
Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or
snapped onto the top).
Size S2 to S3
Max. 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped
onto the top)
3/100 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactor Type 3RT13 16 3RT13 17 3RT13 25 3RT13 26 3RT13 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S3
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical endurance Oper- 30 million 10 million
ating
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Oper- Approx. 0.5 million
ating
cycles
3
Degree of protection Device IP20 IP20
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Connection range IP00
Appendix C
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, Type of coordination "1"1) A 35 63 160 250 250
gL/gG operational class Type of coordination "2"1) A 20 25 /35 63 125 160
NH, 3NA, DIAZED, 5SB, NEOZED,
5SE
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100
EN 60947-4-1
Control
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x Us
DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50/Hz • Closing VA 61 145 270
• p.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68
• Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22
• p.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz • Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274
• p.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62
• Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20
• p.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31
DC operation • Closing = Closed W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15
• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20
• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50
Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120
Rated output power for AC loads at 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53
with p.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92
Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
for loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
Rated operational currents Ie at 60 °C, for 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- --
Rated output power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- --
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- --
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.
2) With size S00, DC operation: switching times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/101

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A

Size S00 S0
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 18 22 20
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4
3

60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 12 12 35
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5
220 V A -- -- 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09
60 V A 5 5 35
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15
220 V A -- -- 3
440 V A -- -- 0.27
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 10
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 35
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
For more technical specifications, see 3RT10 Contactors from page 3/17 onwards
3/102 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A

Size S2 S3 S3
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 23 23 60
110 V A 4.5 4.5 9
220 V A 1 1 2
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6
3
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 5 5 10
440 V A 1 1 1.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 6 6 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 25 70 80
220 V A 5 7 7
440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 25 35 35
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
For more technical specifications, see 3RT10 Contactors from page 3/25 onwards
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/103

3TK1 Contactors for Switching Resistive Loads (AC-1)
4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) • Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral
conductors
The contactors also comply with the requirements of
NFC 63–110 and NFC 20–040. • Switching resistive loads
• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are used
finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to
be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configura-
tion with other devices.
Solenoids for 3TK10 to 3TK13 contactors: as withdrawable coils.
3
Surge suppression
Control circuit
Solenoids for 3TK1 contactors: can be retrofitted with
RC elements.
Contactor Type 3TK1
AC load
24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 4
400 V A 4
500 V A 1
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
24 V A --
60 V A --
110 V A --
125 V A --
220 V A --
440 V A --
600 V A --
24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 1.8
125 V A --
220 V A 0.6
440 V A --
600 V A --
max.
3/104 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Contactor Type 3TK10 3TK11 3TK12 3TK13 3TK14 3TK15 3TK17

General data
NSB00649
Vertical mounting position also permitted. 90° 90°
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles mill. 10 5

Electrical endurance Operating cycles mill. 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.65 0.5 0.4
For Ie/AC-1 at 55 °C
3
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00
Shock resistance Sine pulse g/ms 10/15
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG, NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1": A 250 355 800 1000
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2": A 250 315 630 850
Auxiliary circuit A 10
(short-circuit current Ik 1kA) fuse links, gL/gG,
Control
50 Hz Closing VA 820 1100 3500
p.f. 0.4 0.35 0.26
Closed VA 44 52 125
p.f. 0.34 0.35 0.4
60 Hz Closing VA 990 1200 4000
p.f. 0.35 0.31 0.22
Closed VA 52 65 140
p.f. 0.35 0.34 0.43
Closing delay ms 20 ... 40 30 ... 60
Opening delay ms 7 ... 15 10 ... 20
Arcing time ms 10 10
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 200 250 300 350 550 800 1000
at 50 °C up to 690 V A 180 230 270 310 470 650 850
Rated output power for AC loads with at 230 V kW 76 95 114 132 208 303 378
p.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 132 165 197 230 362 527 658
500 V kW 165 206 247 288 452 658 828
690 V kW 227 284 341 397 624 908 1135
Minimum conductor cross-sections for at 40 °C mm² 95 150 185 240 185 240 300
loads with Ie
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 120 145 210 210 400 550 700
Rated output power of squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 30 45 75 75 110 160 220
or slipring motors at 400 V kW 55 75 110 110 200 280 370
50 Hz and 60 Hz
Short-time current at 40 °C in cold state up to 10 s A 900 1200 1600 1600 5300 5300 6400
Operating frequency1)
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency 1/h 3 600
AC-1 1/h 300
AC-3 1/h 300
1) Dependence of the operating frequency z ’ on the operational current I ’
and operational voltage U ’ : z ’ = z ¼ (Ie/I ’) ¼ (400 V/U ’)1.5 ¼ 1/h.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/105

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Contactor Type 3TK10 3TK11 3TK12 3TK13 3TK14 3TK15 3TK17

Main conductors:
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x 70 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 300
• Solid or stranded AWG MCM 2 x 00 2 x 250 2 x 250 2 x 600
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 30 30 33 55
- Tightening torque Nm 5 16 16 16
lb.in 42 135 135 135
mm2
3
• Solid 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

• Solid or stranded AWG MCM 20 ... 14
- Tightening torque Nm 1.2 (10 lb.in)
3/106 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
■ Overview These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits

with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and higher.
AC and DC operation Short circuit protection of the contactors
IEC 60947 (VDE 0660). Short circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay,
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. The contac- see Technical Specifications
tors with screw terminal are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Version
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals, The 3TK2 contactors with 4 main contacts are available with
6.3 mm plug connectors and solder pin connectors for soldering screw terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and
in printed circuit boards. solder pin connectors.
■ Design The contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors are coded
3
can be used in the plug-in socket with solder pin connectors for
Auxiliary contacts printed circuit boards.
Contact reliability
To switch voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA the 3TH2
contactor relays should be used as they guarantee a high level
of contact reliability.
3TK20
The characteristic curves show the con- Contactor type
tact endurance of the contactors when 3TK20
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3) de- 107
pending on the breaking current and rated 107 8 6 NSB0_01629
8
8 6 6
operational voltage. It is assumed that the 6
4
4 4
operating mechanisms are switched ran-
4 2
domly, i.e. not synchronized with the 2
2
phase angle of the supply system. 2 106
The rated operational current Ie complies 106 8 106
106 8 6 8
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking 8 6
4 6
six times the rated operational current) 6 4
4
and is intended for a contact endurance of 4 2
at least 200 000 operating cycles. If a 2 2
shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated 2 105
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be 105 8 105
increased. 105 8 6 8
8 6
If the contacts are used for mixed opera- 6
4 6
4
tion, i.e. if normal switching (breaking the 4
4 2
rated operational current according to uti- 2
lization category AC-3) in combination 2
2 104
with intermittent inching (breaking several 104 8
times the rated operational current ac- 104
104 8 6 8
cording to utilization category AC-4), the 8 6 6
4
contact endurance can be calculated ap- 6 4 4
proximately from the following equation: 4 2
A 2
X = ---------------------------------------------------------- 2
2 103
1 + ---------- Ë ---- – 1Û
C A 103 103
100 Í B Ý
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80
a (A)
Characters in the equation:
9 (A)
X = Contact endurance for mixed opera- e
tion in operating cycles 4 PN (kW)

A = Contact endurance for normal opera-
tion (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B = Contact endurance for inching Diagram legend:
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles PN= Rated output power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
C = Inching operations as a percentage of Ia= Breaking current
total switching operations
Ie= Rated operational current
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/107

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors
Type 3TK20
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation any
Auxiliary contact block cycles 10 million
Rated insulation voltage Ui
• Screw terminal V 690
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500
• Solder pin connection V 500
3

• Screw terminal kV 8
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6
• Solder pin connection kV 6
Safe isolation between coil and main contacts V Up to 300
IP40 coil assembly
Resistance to shock
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.3/5 and 5.2/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 13/5 and 8/10
2)
Main circuit3)
• Fuse-links gL/gG
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4/ Type of coordination "1" A 25
DIN VDE 0660, Part 2 Type of coordination "2"4) A 10
Weld-free A 10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit current Ik 1 kA
• Fuse-links gL/gG A 6
2) See page 3/112.
3) According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102
Type of coordination "1":
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The
contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
Type of coordination "2":
The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
4) A short-circuit current of Iq 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
3/108 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors
Type 3TK20
Control
Standard version
• p.f. 0.41
• Closed VA 6.8
• p.f. 0.42
3
• p.f. 0.36
• Closed VA 6.1
• p.f. 0.46
• Pp.f. 0.43/0.38
• p.f. 0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada
• p.f. 0.38
• Closed VA 6.5
• p.f. 0.40
• p.f. 0.30
• Closed VA 6.0
• p.f. 0.44
Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit2)
(for 0 signal)
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us3)
operating range
Dead interval To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
Dead interval To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
2) The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module is recommended for higher
residual currents (see Catalog LV 1).
3) The opening times of the NO contacts and the closing times of the
NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are protected against voltage
peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times, diode assemblies 2 to
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/109

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors Type 3TK20 ..-0... 3TK20 ..-3...,

3TK20 ..-6...,
3TK20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie (for 40 °C) up to 400/380 V A 18 18
690/660 V A 18 --
Rated operational current Ie (for 55 °C) 400/380 V A 16 16
690/660 V A 16 --
Rated output power of AC loads at 230/220 V kW 6.0 6.0
3
p.f. = 1 400/380 V kW 10 10
500 V kW 13 13
690/660 V kW 17 --
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5
Rated operational current Ie up to 220 V A 9.0 9.0
230 V A 9.0 9.0
380 V A 9.0 9.0
400 V A 8.4 8.4
500 V A 6.5 6.5
660 V A 5.2 --
690 V A 5.2 --
Rated output power for motors with slip ring at 110 V kW 1.2 1.2
or squirrel-cage rotors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 115 V kW 1.2 1.2
and
120 V kW 1.3 1.3
127 V kW 1.4 1.4
200 V kW 2.2 2.2
220 V kW 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 4.0 4.0
415 V kW 4.0 4.0
440 V kW 4.0 4.0
460 V kW 4.0 4.0
500 V kW 4.0 4.0
575 V kW 4.0 --
660 V kW 4.0 --
690 V kW 4.0 --
(contact endurance approx. 200 000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
690 V A 1.8 --
Rated output power for motors with squirrel-cage rotor at 110 V kW 0.32 0.32
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 115 V kW 0.33 0.33
120 V kW 0.35 0.35
Max. permissible rated operational current 127 V kW 0.37 0.37
Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact 200 V kW 0.58 0.58
endurance and reduced operating frequency 220 V kW 0.64 0.64
230 V kW 0.67 0.67
240 V kW 0.70 0.70
380 V kW 1.10 1.10
400 V kW 1.15 1.15
415 V kW 1.20 1.20
440 V kW 1.27 1.27
460 V kW 1.33 1.33
500 V kW 1.45 1.45
575 V kW 1.30 --
660 V kW 1.10 --
690 V kW 1.15 --
3/110 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 ..-6...,
3TK20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5a, switching gas discharge lamps
Rated output power Rated operational current
per lamp per lamp (A)
Uncorrected
L 18 W 0.37 units 43
3
L 36 W 0.43 units 37
L 58 W 0.67 units 23
Lead-lag circuit
L 18 W 011 units 144
L 36 W 0.21 units 76
L 58 W 0.32 units 50
Rated output power Capacitance Rated operational current
per lamp (mF) per lamp (A)
Parallel correction
L 18 W 4.5 0.11 units 22
L 36 W 4.5 0.21 units 22
L 58 W 7 0.31 units 14
With solid-state ballast
(single lamp)
L 18 W 6.8 0.10 units 63
L 36 W 6.8 0.18 units 35
L 58 W 10 0.27 units 23
With solid-state ballast
(two lamps)
L 18 W 10 0.18 units 35
L 36 W 10 0.35 units 18
L 58 W 22 0.52 units 12
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.6 --
Utilization category AC-6a, switching AC transformers
• For inrush current n = 20 at 400 V A 5.1 5.1
• For inrush current n = 30 at 400 V A 3.3 3.3
Rated power P
• For inrush current n = 20 up to 230/220 V kVA 2.0 2.0
400/380 V kVA 3.5 3.5
500 V kVA 4.6 4.6
690/660 V kVA 6.0 --
• For inrush current n = 30 up to 230/220 V kVA 1.3 1.3
400/380 V kVA 2.3 2.3
500 V kVA 3.1 3.1
690/660 V kVA 4.0 --
as follows: Px= Pn30 x (30/x)
Utilization category AC-6b, switching low-inductance No switching capacity
(low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Utilization category AC-7a, switching low inductive loads in household
appliances
Rated operational current Ie (for 55 °C) at 400/380 V A 16 16
690/660 V A 16 --
Rated output power at 50 and 60 Hz at 230/220 V kW 6 6
400/380 V kW 10 10
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-7b, switching motor loads in household appliances
230 V A 9.0 9.0
380 V A 9.0 9.0
400 V A 8.4 8.4
Rated output power of motors at 110 V kW 1.2 1.2
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 220 V kW 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 4.0 4.0
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/111

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 ..-6...,
3TK20 ..-7...
Size 00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
(contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles; L/R 1 ms)
60 V A 6 6
3
110 V A 2 2
220/240 V A 1 1
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 6 6
220/240 V A 2 2
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 16 16
220/240 V A 6 6
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt-wound and
series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
60 V A 3 3
110 V A 0.5 0.5
220/240 V A 0.1 0.1
60 V A 5 5
110 V A 2 2
220/240 V A 0.5 0.5
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 16 16
220/240 V A 2 2
Thermal load capacity 10 s current A 70
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.3
Operating frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load operating frequency h-1 10000
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on AC-1 h-1 1000
the operational current I’ and AC-2 h-1 500
operational voltage U’:
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I ’) ¼(400 V/U ’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-3 h-1 1000
Screw terminal Main and auxiliary
conductors
Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
Finely stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),
with end sleeve 1 x 2.5
Pin-end connector mm2 1 x 1 ... 2.5
(DIN 46231)
Terminal screw M3
Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.3
lb.in 7 ... 11
Flat connector
When using a quick-connect terminal 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
Finely stranded 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
3/112 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 ..-6...,
3TK20 ..-7...
Size 00
s and u rated data of the 3TK20 contactors
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 600 300
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 16 16 (10 for solder pin connection)
(s and u approved values)
1-phase at 115 V hp 0.5 --
200 V hp 1 1
3
230 V hp 1.5 1
460/575 V hp -- --
3-phase at 115 V hp -- --
200 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TK20 ..-6)
230 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TK20 ..-6)
460/575 V hp 5 --
Overload relay Type/ Setting range 3UA7/EB 8 ... 10 A
Contactors Type 3TK20

Size 00
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
AC load
110 V A 4
125 V A 4
220 V A 4
230 V A 4
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
48 V A 2.2
110 V A 1.1
125 V A 1.1
220 V A 0.5
440 V A --
600 V A --
For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 2.1
48 V A 1.1
110 V A 0.52
125 V A 0.52
220 V A 0.27
440 V A --
600 V A --
s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max. V AC 300
Switching capacity A 600, Q 300
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/113

3RT15 Contactors
4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW
■ Overview ■ Integration
AC and DC operation Mountable auxiliary contacts
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102) Size S00
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are 4 auxiliary contacts (auxiliary switch blocks according
finger-safe according to EN 50274. to EN 50005)
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be Size S0
used for the 4-pole versions.
snapped onto the top auxiliary switch blocks according to
■ Function EN 50012 and EN 50005).
3
• Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors Size S2

• Switching two separate loads
Note snapped onto the top auxiliary switch blocks to EN 50012
and EN 50005).
3RT15 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between
two current sources.
Size S00 S00 S0 S2
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
ating
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Oper- Approx. 0.5 million
ating
cycles
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 IP20 (IP00 terminal enclosure)
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG Type of coordination "1" A 35 63 160
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE Type of coordination "2" A 20 35 80
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Weld-free A 10 16 50
EN 60947-4-1
Control
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz •Closing VA 61 145
•p.f. VA 0.82 0.79
•Closed VA 7.8 12.5
•p.f. VA 0.24 0.36
AC operation, 50/60 Hz •Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155
•p.f. VA 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72
• Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8
•p.f. VA 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38
DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3 5.6 13.3
AC/DC operation
• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30
• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35
Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30
1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors. 2) With size S00, DC operation: switching times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
3/114 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT15 Contactors
4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW

Size S00 S00 S0 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 40 60
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 35 55
Rated output power for AC loads at 230 V kW 6.5 7.5 15 20
p.f. = 0.95 (for 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 26 36
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 16
loads with Ie
3
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 9 12 25 1) 40
(at 60 °C)
Rated output power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 5.5 9.5
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 400 V kW 4 5.5 11 18.5
60 Hz
Load rating with DC
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 16 20 20 23
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4
• 2 current paths in series up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 16 20 35 45
110 V A 12 12 35 45
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
Utilization category DC-3/DC-52),
shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5 6
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5 2.5
220 V A 0.75 0.75 1 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09 0.1
• 2 current paths in series up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 5 5 35 45
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15 25
220 V A -- -- 3 5
440 V A -- -- 0.27 0.27
1) For AC operation: 25 A,
DC operation: 20 A.
2) For Us > 24 V the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact
conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting
paths.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/115

3RT16 Capacitor Contactors
12.5 ... 50 kvar
■ Overview
AC operation The auxiliary switch block which is snapped onto the capacitor
contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) case of S00 one standard NC contact and in the case of S0 and
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are S3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size S00 also
finger-safe according to EN 50274. contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit.
The 3RT16 capacitor switching contactors are special variants In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be mounted lat-
of the size S00 to S3 SIRIUS contactors. The capacitors are pre- erally on the 3RT16 47 capacitor contactors (2 NO, 2 NC or
charged by means of the mounted leading NO contacts and 1 NO + 1 NC versions); Type 3RH19 21-1EA ... . The fitting of
resistors; only then do the main contacts close. auxiliary switches for 3RT16 17 and 3RT16 27 is not expand-
able.
3
This prevents disturbances in the power system and welding of

the contactors. For the capacitor making and switching capacity of the basic
3RT10 contactor variant, see Technical Specifications.
Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on
with capacitor contactors.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the 3RT10 17 contactors for size S00, to those
of the 3RT10 26 contactors for size S0 and to those of the 3RT10 45 contactors for size S3.
Contactor Type 3RT16 17-.A..3 3RT16 27-.A..1 3RT16 47-.A..1
Size S00 S0 S3
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30
rated output power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO
Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes S00 and S0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or
1 NO + 1 NC
Operating range of the coils 0.8 … 1.1 x Us
Max. operating frequency h-1 180 100
Electrical endurance Oper- > 250000 > 150000 > 100000
ating
cycles
Ambient temperature °C 60
Regulations IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x Ie
3/116 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT16 Capacitor Contactors
12.5 ... 50 kvar
Contactor Type 3RT16 17-.A..3 3RT16 27-.A..1 3RT16 47-.A..1

Size S00 S0 S3
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
acc. to IEC 60947; acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (1 ... 4) max. 1 x 101)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1)
• AWG cables
- Solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12)
3
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10)
- Stranded AWG 1 x 12 1x8
• Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22
Main conductors:
With box terminal
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00479

• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00480

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35
• Solid mm² Max. 2 x 16
NSB00481

• Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- Tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6
lb.in 36 ... 53
Connection for drilled copper bars2) Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with cable lugs3) • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 504)
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 704)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947;
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16);
2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
1) 3RV19 25-5AB infeed terminal for 16 mm2.
2) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal
cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
3) When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the
3RT19 46-4EA1 cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/117

Contactors with Extended Tolerance 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us , for Railway Applications
3RH11 contactor relays
DC operation Control and auxiliary circuits
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102), for The coils of the contactor relays have an extended tolerance
requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with varistors to
provide protection against voltage surges. The opening delay is
The contactor relays are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
size S00 contactor relays have Cage Clamp terminals for all
terminals. 3RH11..-0LA0
Ambient temperature The DC solenoid systems of the contactor relays are modified
(to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor.
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the
3
contactor relays (across the full coil operating range) is The size S00 contactor relays are supplied prewired with a
-40 °C to +70 °C. plug-on module containing the series resistor. The varistor is
integrated. A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +55 °C reduces the EN 50005) can be fitted additionally.
mechanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the
conducting paths and the operating frequency. Installation
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, the size S00 contactor
■ Application relays are allowed to be mounted side by side.
For operation in installations which are subject both to consider- 3RH11 22-2K.40
able variations in the control voltage and to high ambient tem-
These contactor relays have an extended tolerance from 0.7 to
peratures, e.g. railway applications under extreme climatic con-
1.25 x Us; the coils are fitted with varistors as standard.
ditions, rolling mills, etc.
An additional series resistor is not required. Please note:
• Size S00: It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.
At ambient temperatures > 60 °C 70 °C, a clearance of 10 mm
is required when they are mounted side by side.
Contactor Type 3RH11 ..
Power input of the solenoids for cold coil and 1.0 x Us
Contactors with series resistor Closing W 11
Closed W 4
Contactors without series resistor Closing W 2.3
Closed W 2.3
Upright mounting position 3RH11 22-2K.40: please ask
3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 standard version
All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned here are identical to those of the standard contactors.
3/118 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TH4 contactor relays
3TH4 contactor relays Control and auxiliary circuits
EN 60947-4-1. The coils of the contactors have an extended coil operating
range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with varis-
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. tors to provide protection against voltage surges. The opening
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard
Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, contactors.
depending on the configuration with other devices. All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard contactor
■ Application relays 3TH4.
3
For operation in plants which are subject both to considerable Ambient temperature
variations in the control voltage and to high ambient tempera-
tures, e.g. in railway applications. The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
tactors (across the full coil operating range) is -50 to +70 °C.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and > +55 °C re-
duces the mechanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity
of the conducting paths and the operating frequency.
Installation
At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
specifications.
Contactor Type 3TH42
Coil voltage operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil)
0.7 x Us W 2.6
1.0 x Us W 5.2
1.25 x Us W 8.2
(for cold coil: Closing = Closed)
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -50 ... +701)
DC operation 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
• Closing
- 0.7 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 70 ... 200
OFF-delay (NC) ms 28 ... 33
- 1 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 45 ... 80
- 1.25 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 40 ... 60
• Off-switching
- 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us OFF-delay (NO) ms 20 ... 30
ON-delay (NC) ms 22 ... 32
• Arcing time ms 10
1) Series-mounting with 10 mm distance.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/119

3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
■ Overview Please note:

• Size S00: It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.
DC operation • Size S0: up to two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102), for require- mounted.
ments according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. At ambient temperatures > 60 °C 70 °C, a clearance of 10 mm
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274 (excep- is required when they are mounted side by side.
tion: series resistors S0 to S3). The contactors are available with 3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit, extended
both Cage Clamp and screw terminals. The size S00 contactors tolerance
have Cage Clamp terminals for all connections. The auxiliary
conductor and coil terminals of sizes S0 to S3 are all Control and auxiliary circuits
Cage Clamp terminals.
The coils of the contactors have an extended tolerance from 0.7
3
Ambient temperature to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with varistors to provide
protection against voltage surges. The opening delay is conse-
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con- quently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
tactors (across the full coil operating range) is -40 °C to +70 °C.
3RT10 ..-.X.40-0LA2
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +55 °C reduces the me-
chanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the con- The contactors are energized via upstream control electronics
ducting paths and the operating frequency. which ensure the coil operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us at an
ambient temperature of 70 °C. They are supplied as complete
Dimensions self-contained units with a built-on contactor control unit. A varis-
Attaching resistors increases the width of contactor sizes S0 to tor is integrated for damping opening surges in the coil.
S3 (see Dimensional Drawings). The possibility of mounting auxiliary switches is the same as that
for equivalent standard contactors.
■ Application Installation
For operation in installations which are subject both to consider- At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, sizes S0 to S3 of these
able variations in the control voltage and to high ambient tem- contactor versions are allowed to be mounted side by side.
peratures, e.g. railway applications under extreme climatic con-
ditions, rolling mills, etc. Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
■ Function tactors (across the full coil operating range) is -40 °C to +70 °C.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +55 °C reduces the me-
Control and auxiliary circuits chanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the con-
The coils of the contactors have an extended tolerance from 0.7 ducting paths and the operating frequency.
to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with varistors to provide Dimensions
protection against voltage surges. The opening delay is conse-
quently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors. Because of the built-on contactor control unit, the height of the
size S0 to S3 contactors increases by up to 34 mm
3RT10 ..-0LA0 (see Dimensional Drawings).
The DC solenoid systems of the contactors are modified
(to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor.
The size S00 contactors are supplied prewired with a plug-on
module containing the series resistor. The varistor is integrated.
A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to EN 50005) can be
fitted additionally.
The size S0 to S3 contactors are equipped on the front with an
auxiliary switch block with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts. The separate
series resistor, which is attached laterally next to the contactor
on the 35 mm standard mounting rail, is fitted with connecting
leads for mounting the contactors. A circuit diagram showing the
terminals is stuck onto each contactor. One NC of the auxiliary
contacts is required for the series resistor function. The selection
and ordering data shows the number of additional, unassigned
auxiliary contacts. It is only possible to extend the number of
auxiliary contacts with size S00.
Installation
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, the size S00 contactors
and contactor relays are allowed to be mounted side by side.
The resistor module of the size S0 to S3 contactors must be
mounted to the left of the contactor owing to the prefabricated
connecting leads.
3RT10 17-2K.4.,
3RT10 2.-3K.40
These contactors have an extended tolerance from
0.7 to 1.25 x Us; the coils are fitted with varistors as standard.
An additional series resistor is not required.
3/120 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
Contactor Type 3RT10 17 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4.
Power input of the solenoids For cold coil and 1.0 x Us
Contactors with series resistor Closing W 11 23 46 78
Closed W 4 7 14 23
Contactors without series resistor Closing W 2.3 4.2 -- --
Closed W 2.3 4.2 -- --
Upright mounting position Standard version 3RT10 2.-3K.40: -- --
Special version
required
3
3RT10 2.-
3K.44-0LA0:
Special version
required
Order No. Type 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4.

3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit
Power consumption for cold coil and 1.0 x Us W 6 15 19
Closing = Closed
Upright mounting position Special version required --
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/121

3TB5 motor contactors, 55 ... 200 kW
■ Overview With types 3TB52/54/56, the series resistor must be attached

separately next to the contactors. One NC of the auxiliary con-
EN 60947-4-1. tacts is required for the series resistor function. The selection
and ordering data show the number of additional, unassigned
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. auxiliary contacts. It is not possible to extend the number of
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal auxiliary contacts.
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depend- With the 3TB52 and larger contactors, the series resistor must be
ing on the configuration with other devices. connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
(3RT13 17-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in the
■ Application delivery in the same packaging as the contactor.
For operation in plants which are subject both to considerable All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard 3TB contactors.
3

tures, e.g. in railway applications. Ambient temperature
■ Function The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-

Control and auxiliary circuits Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and > +55 °C re-
The coils of the contactors have an extended coil operating of the conducting paths and the operating frequency.
tors to provide protection against voltage surges. The opening Installation
delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
contactors. observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TB contactors must be modi- mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
fied (to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor. specifications.
This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the con- Dimensions
tactors. With types 3TB50, the series resistor must be attached Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the
onto the right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means contactors (see Dimensional drawings).
of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided.
Closing W 38 40 190 295
Closed W 20 21 43 59
3/122 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TC contactors for switching DC voltage, 2-pole
■ Overview the contactor poles. With types 3TC52/56, the series resistor
must be attached separately next to the contactors. One NC of
EN 60947-4-1. the auxiliary contacts is required for the series resistor function.
The selection and ordering data show the number of additional,
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. unassigned auxiliary contacts. It is not possible to extend the
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal number of auxiliary contacts.
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depend- With the 3TC52 and larger contactors, the series resistor must
ing on the configuration with other devices. be connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
(3RT13 17-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in the
■ Application delivery in the same packaging as the contactor.
For operation in plants which are subject both to considerable All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard 3TC contactors.
3
tures, e.g. in railway applications. Ambient temperature
■ Function The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-

Control and auxiliary circuits Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and > +55 °C re-
The coils of the contactors have an extended coil operating of the conducting paths and the operating frequency.
tors to provide protection against voltage surges. The opening Installation
delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
contactors. observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TC contactors must be mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
modified (to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor. specifications.
This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the con- Dimensions
tactors. With types 3TC48, the series resistor must be attached Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the con-
onto the right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means tactors (see Dimensional drawings).
of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided, while
in the case of the 3TC44 it must be mounted and wired between
Contactor Type 3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56
Closing W 48 26 40 295
Closed W 13 14 21 59
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/123

3TC Contactors for Switching DC Voltage
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
■ Overview 3TC7
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102).
3TC4 and 3TC5
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are suit-
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102). able for switching and controlling DC motors as well as all other
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. DC loads. The electromagnetic excitation is designed for a par-
ticularly wide coil operating range.
Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars,
depending on the configuration with other devices. It is between 0.7 or 0.8 to 1.2 Us.
The DC motor ratings given in the tables are applicable to the 3TC74 contactors can be used at up to 750 V/400 A and 50 Hz
DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories with two-pole switching of in AC-1 operation.
the load or with the two conducting paths of the contactor con-
■ Application
3
nected in series.
One contactor conducting path can switch full power up to The contactors are suitable for switching and controlling
220 V. The ratings for higher voltages are available on request. DC motors as well as all other DC circuits.
A version with an especially large operating range is available
for operation in electrically driven vehicles and in switchgear
with significant fluctuations in the actuating voltage (see
page 3/123).
Contactor Type 3TC4 and 3TC7 3TC5
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Continuous thermal current Ith = 10 10
AC load
24 V A 10 10
110 V A 10 10
125 V A 10 10
220 V A 6 6
230 V A 5.6 5.6
380 V A 4 4
400 V A 3.6 3.6
500 V A 2.5 2.5
660 V A 2.5 2.5
690 V A -- --
DC load
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 10 10
110 V A 3.2 8
125 V A 2.5 6
220 V A 0.9 2
440 V A 0.33 0.6
600 V A 0.22 0.4
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 5 5
110 V A 1.14 2.4
125 V A 0.98 2.1
220 V A 0.48 1.1
440 V A 0.13 0.32
600 V A 0.07 0.21
Contactor Type 3TC44 ... 3TC56

max.
3/124 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Contactor Type 3TC44 ... 3TC78

1 0 7 2 0 A N S B 0 0 6 5 6
8 A N S B 0 0 6 5 5
6
4 1 8
3 T C 4 4 3 T C 4 8 3 T C 5 2 3 T C 5 6
2 1 6
6
1 0
8 1 4
6
4
1 2
2
3
5
1 0 1 0
8
6
4 8
2
6
4
1 0
8 4
6
4
2
2
0 ,5
3
1 0 5 0 1 0 0 1 5 0 2 0 0 2 5 0 3 0 0 Ia (A ) 4 0 0
1 0 2 0 4 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 Ia (A ) 4 0 0 0
3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors 3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors


Size 2 4 8 12
General data
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.
NSB00650a
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million

1)
Electrical endurance Operating cycles
Safe isolation V Up to 300 Up to 660
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, for AC operation, coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 7.5/5 and 3.4/10 10/5 and 5/10 12/5 and 5.5/10 12/5 and 5.6/10
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG Type of coordination "1" A 35 63 80 250
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE Type of coordination "2" A 50 160 250 400
Auxiliary circuit
(short-circuit current Ik 1kA)
• Fuse links, gL/gG A 16
For the rated data of the auxiliary contacts see page 3/124.
1) See the endurance diagram above.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/125

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A

Size 2 4 8 12
Control
Power input of the solenoids
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
DC operation • Closing = Closed W 10 19 30 86
AC operation, 50 Hz coil • Closing VA/p.f. 68/0.86 300/0.5 640/0.48 1780/0.3
• Closed VA/p.f. 10/0.29 26/0.24 46/0.23 121/0.22
AC operation, 60 Hz coil • Closing VA/p.f. 95/0.79 365/0.45 730/0.38 2140/0.3
• Closed VA/p.f. 12/0.3 35/0.26 56/0.24 140/0.29
3
AC operation, 50/60 Hz coil • Closing at 50 Hz/60 Hz VA/p.f. 79/73/0.83/0.78 -- -- --

• Holding power at 50 Hz/60 Hz VA/p.f. 11/9/0.28/0.27 -- -- --
Operating times (at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us) (the values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• DC operation Closing delay ms 35 ... 190 90 ... 380 120 ... 400 110 ... 400
Opening delay1) ms 10 ... 25 17 ... 28 22 ... 35 40 ... 110
• AC operation Closing delay ms 10 ... 40 20 ... 50 20 ... 50 20 ... 50
Opening delay1) ms 5 ... 25 5 ... 30 10 ... 30 10 ... 30
• Arcing time DC-1 ms 20
DC-3/DC-5 ms 30
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie up to Ue 750 V A 32 75 220 400
(at 55 °C)
Minimum conductor cross-section mm2 6 25 95 240
Power rating at Ue at 220 V kW 7 16.5 48 88
440 V kW 14 33 97 176
600 V kW 19.2 45 132 240
750 V kW 24 56 165 300
Rated operational current Ie up to 220 V A 32 75 220 400
(at 55 °C) 440 V A 29 75 220 400
600 V A 21 75 220 400
750 V A 7.5 75 170 400
Power rating at Ue at 110 V kW 2.5 6.5 20 35
220 V kW 5 13 41 70
440 V kW 9 27 82 140
600 V kW 9 38 110 200
750 V kW 4 45 110 250
Operating frequency
AC/DC operation With resistive load DC-1 h-1 1500 1000
For inductive load DC-3/DC-5 h-1 750 600
Screw terminal
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) Main conductor:
• Solid mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 10) -- -- --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 4) -- -- --
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 35 2 x 120 2 x 150
• Pin terminal to DIN 46231 mm2 2 x (1 ... 6) -- -- --
• Busbars mm -- 15 x 2.5 25 x 4 2 x (25 x 3)
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
For the rated data of the auxiliary contacts see page 3/124.
1) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks. Only 3TC44 contactors are allowed to be fitted
with diodes.
3/126 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Contactor Type 3TC74 3TC78

1-pole contactors 2-pole contactors
General data
NSB00650a
surface.
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 million

Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1)
3
Permissible ambient temperature °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP00/open
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG Type of coordination "1" A 630
NH 3NA Type of coordination "2" A 500
Auxiliary circuit short-circuit current Ik 1 kA
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class A 16
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
Control
DC operation 24 V 0.8 ...1.2 x Us
> 24 V 0.7 ...1.2 x Us
AC operation 24 V 0.7 ...1.15 x Us
> 24 V 0.7 ...1.2 x Us
DC operation Closing = Closed W 46 92
AC operation, 50 Hz Closing, Closed VA 80/0.95 160/0.95
Operating times (the values apply up to and including 15 % undervoltage,
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• AC and DC operation Closing delay ms 60 ... 100
• Arcing time at 0.06 ... 4 x Ie ms 40 ... 70
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 (at 55 °C) A 500 500
Minimum conductor cross-section mm2 2 x 150 2 x 150
Rating at 220 V kW 110 110
440 V kW 220 220
600 V kW 300 300
750 V kW 375 375
1200 V kW -- 600
1500 V kW -- 750
Critical currents, 440 V A 7 --
without arc extinction 600 V A 13 --
750 V A 15 --
800 V A -- 7
1200 V A -- 13
1500 V A -- 15
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5, switching DC motors 2)
Permissible rated current for regenerative braking A 400

at 110 ... 600 V
Operating frequency
AC/DC operation With resistive load DC-1 h-1 750 1000
For inductive load DC-3/DC-5 h-1 500 500
Screw terminal Main conductor:
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x ... 150
• Busbars mm 2 x (30 x 4)
• Solid mm2 1 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75 ... 1.5
For the rated data of the auxiliary contacts see page 3/124. 2) See selection table in Catalog LV 1.
1) See page 3/125.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/127

3RH, 3TH Contactor Relays
3RH1 contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole
■ Overview
The SIRIUS generation of controls is a complete, modular sys-
tem family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from
the basic units to the accessories.
Contactor relays and coupling relays
Size S00 with accessories
4
3
12
5
7 13
8 2
14
10
11
15
16
1 Contactor relay
2 Coupling relay for auxiliary circuits
3 Solid-state time-delay block with ON-delay
4 Solid-state time-delay block with OFF-delay
5 Auxiliary switch block, solid-state time-delay
(versions: ON or OFF-delay)
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal designation according to EN 50011 or EN 50005)
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard version or solid-state compatible
version terminal designations according to EN 50005)
12 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays and coupling relays
14 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
15 Surge suppressor with LED

16 Surge suppressor without LED
3/128 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


AC and DC operation
Contactor relay, EN 50 011,
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 4 contacts
The 3RH1 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The 3RH1 contactor relays have screw or Cage Clamp termi-
nals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit.
■ Function Ident. No. 40E Ident. No. 31E, 22E
Contact reliability
Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
3
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for DIN EN 50 011, DIN EN 50 005,
solid-state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Overvoltage damping
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combina-
tion of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all con-
tactor relays from the front for damping opening surges in the Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding device. 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped Contactor relay, Contactor relay,
Hilfsschütze
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; EN 50 011 EN
DIN50EN50
005, 005,
8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
■ Integration
Auxiliary switch blocks NSB0_00067b
The 3RH1 contactor relays can be expanded by up to

four contacts by the addition of mountable auxiliary switch Ident. No. 80E,
blocks. 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E
The auxiliary switch block can easily be snapped onto the front
of the contactors. The auxiliary switch block has a centrally
positioned release lever for disassembly.
The contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011,
with the identification number 40E, can be extended with 80E
to 44E auxiliary switch blocks to obtain contactor relays with
8 contacts according to EN 50011. The identification
numbers 80E to 44E on the auxiliary switch blocks apply to the
complete contactors. These auxiliary switch blocks
(3RH19 11–1GA ..) cannot be combined with contactor relays
with identification numbers 31E and 22E; they are coded.
All contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011,
identification numbers 40E to 22E, can be extended with
auxiliary switch blocks 40 to 02 to obtain contactor relays with 6
or 8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005. The identification
numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks apply only to the
attached auxiliary switch blocks.
In addition, fully mounted 3RH12 8-pole contactor relays are
available; the mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block is not
removable.
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011. These
versions are built in accordance with special Swiss regulations
(SUVA) and are distinguished externally by a red identification
plate.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/129

Contactor Type 3RH1
Size S00
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for operation AC and DC operation 360° 22,5° 22,5°
on a vertical mounting surface.
NSB00070
Upright mounting position AC operation
NSB00071
(only for 3RH11/3RH12/3RH14)
3
Special version required

DC operation Standard version (for coupling relays and contactor relays with extended
tolerance 3RH11 22-2K.40, please ask)
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
3RH1: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-
3RH12: working industry.
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (fixed) acc. to: EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
• ZH 1/457 Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
• SUVA
SUVA
Note Accident prevention regulations of the Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt
3RH19 11-.NF solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no (Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
positively-driven contacts.
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults < 10-8, i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating
cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is 3 0
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not N S B 0 0 0 7 2
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. B a s ic u n it

If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves 1 0
M illio n o p e r a tin g c y c le s ( 1 0 6 )
are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits B a s ic u n it
5
are necessary. 4 w ith a u x .
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective features. 3 b lo c k
The characteristic curves apply to: 2 s n a p p e d o n
• 3RH11, 3RH12 contactor relays D C -1 3 D C -1 3
1 2 2 0 V 1 1 0 V
• 3RH14 latched contactor relays A C -1 5 /A C -1 4
• 3RH19 11 auxiliary switch blocks. 0 ,5
D C -1 3
2 4 V
0 ,1
0 ,0 5
1 )
0 ,0 1
0 ,0 1 0 ,0 3 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 0 ,3 0 ,5 1 2 3 5 6 7 1 0 I a (A )
I e -D C -1 3 I e -D C -1 3 I e -A C -1 5 I e -D C -1 3
2 2 0 V 1 1 0 V < 2 3 0 V 2 4 V
Diagram legend:
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: Ie/DC-13 max. 6 A.
3/130 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RH11, 3RH12 3RH14

Size S00 S00
Basic units and auxiliary switch blocks
• Rated control supply voltage V AC Max. 600
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
• Uninterrupted current at AC 240 V A 10
General data
Mechanical endurance Basic units Operat- 30 million 5 million
3
ing
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary Operat- 10 million
switch block ing
cycles
Solid-state compatible auxiliary Operat- 5 million
switch block ing
cycles
Between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
Screw terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil
terminals
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16); 2 x (18 ... 14); 1 x 12
Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil
terminals
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class
- DIAZED, Type 5SB A 10
- NEOZED Type 5SE A 10
• or miniature circuit-breakers with C-characteristic A 6
For corresponding 8WA2 803/8WA2 804 opening tool,

see Catalog LV 1.
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections
1 mm2, see Catalog LV 1.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/131

Contactor Type 3RH1.

Size S00
Control
AC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC operation at +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 27 /0.8
• Closed VA/p.f. 4.6 /0.27
3
AC operation, 60 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 24 /0.75

• Closed VA/p.f. 3.5 /0.27
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal)
For AC operation1) < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)
For DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times2)
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
Closing and at operating temperature for
operating range
• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 8 ... 35
1.0 x Us ms 10 ... 25
3RH14 minimum operating time ms 35
• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 6 ... 20
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
Opening
• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 4 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 5 ... 30
• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 5 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
DC operation
Closing
• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 25 ... 100
1.0 x Us ms 30 ... 50
• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 20 ... 90
1.0 x Us ms 25 ... 45
Opening
• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 7 ... 10
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 9
• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 13 ... 16
1.0 x Us ms 13 ... 15
Dependence of the operating frequency z' on the operational current I’
and operational voltage U’
z’ = z ¼ Ie/I’ ¼ (Ue/U’)1.5 ¼ 1/h
1) The 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is recommended for higher
residual currents, see Catalog LV 1.
3/132 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Contactor Type 3RH1.

Size S00
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 up to 230 V A 6
For rated operational voltage Us 400 V A 3
500 V A 2
690 V A 1
DC-12
For rated operational voltage Us
• 1 current path 24 V A 10
3
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13
For rated operational voltage Us
• 1 current path 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Operating frequency z
• In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1000
for utilization category DC-13 h-1 1000
• No-load operating frequency h-1 10000
Dependence of the operating frequency z' on the operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’
z’ = z ¼ Ie/I’ ¼ (Ue/U’)1.5 ¼ 1/h
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: 6 A.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/133

3RH14 latched contactor relays, 4-pole
■ Overview
AC and DC operation RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted
to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) coil.
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011. The contactor relay can also be switched on and released
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both manually. (For minimum actuating times, see page 3/132)
designed for continuous duty.
The number of auxiliary contacts can be extended by means of
auxiliary switch blocks (up to 4 poles).
3
3/134 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TH4 contactor relays, 8- and 10-pole
AC and DC operation Contact reliability
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660) High contact stability at low voltages and currents thanks to the
use of moving double-break contacts, suitable for solid-state
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays are suitable for use in any circuits with currents 1 mA for voltages at 17 V.
climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Make-before-break contacting
Terminal designations according to EN 50011
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays are available in versions with
In terms of their terminal designations, identification numbers make-before-break contacting (make-before-break
and identification letters, the 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays between 1 NO and 1 NC).
conform to the standard EN 50011 for "Specific contactor re-
3
lays". The make-before-break time is approximately 1 ms. This is not
sufficient to cause another contactor to close. If the make-be-
fore-break current paths are connected in series, a fleeting con-
tact element is created; the wiping time is approximately 1 ms.
Overvoltage damping
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactors can be equipped with RC ele-
ments, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a
diode and a Zener diode) for damping opening surges. The
surge suppressors can be mounted directly on the coil
(see accessories).
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assembly 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Contactor Type 3TH42/3TH43
Permissible mounting positions
The contactors are designed for AC operation
operation on a vertical mounting 22,5° 22,5°
surface.
NSB00073 NSB00074
DC operation 22,5° 22,5°

90° 90°
NSB00075 NSB00074
Upright mounting position AC and DC operation

NSB00071
Special version required

Positively-driven operation in contactor relays with 8 and 10 contacts
3TH42/3TH43: Explanations:
Yes, the contactor relays comply with the conditions for positively-driven There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
operation acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
• SUVA Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-
working industry.
EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the “Schweizer Unfallverhütungs-
anstalt“ (Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/135


Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. t is
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not 3 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 9 1 a
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves
6
1 0
M illio n o p e r a tin g c y c le s ( 1 0
are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits
are necessary. D C -1 3 A C -1 5 /A C -1 4
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective 5
1 1 0 V
features. 4
3
2 D C -1 3 D C -1 3
2 2 0 V 2 4 V
3
0 ,5
0 ,1
0 ,0 1 0 ,0 3 0 ,0 5 0 ,1 0 ,3 0 ,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 0 a (A )
e D C -1 3 e D C -1 3 e D C -1 3
2 2 0 V 1 1 0 V 2 4 V
e A C -1 5 /A C -1 4
2 3 0 V
v
Legend:
Basic units
Rated control supply voltage Us Max. 600 V AC, 230 V DC (to UL 240 V DC)
Rated voltage 600 V AC, 600 V DC
General data
ating
cycles
Safe isolation V Up to 500
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7.7/5 and 4.4/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12/5 and 6.8/10
Screw terminal M3.5
Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 1 x 4
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class NH Type 3NA A 16
DIAZED Type 5SB A 16
NEOZED Type 5SE, quick A 20
• Miniature circuit-breakers Characteristic C A 16
Characteristic B A 16
3/136 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Control
AC operation 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
DC operation (except 24 V) 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• At 24 V DC 0.8 ... 1.2 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version
• Closing VA/p.f. 68 /0.82
• Closed VA/p.f. 10 /0.29
3
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version
• Closing, 50 Hz VA/p.f. 77 /0.81
• Closed, 50 Hz VA/p.f. 11 /0.28
• Closing, 60 Hz VA/p.f. 71 /0.75
• Closed, 60 Hz VA/p.f. 9 /0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada
• Closed VA/p.f. 10 /0.29
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada
• Closed VA/p.f. 9.4 /0.29 ... 0.3
AC operation, 50 Hz, Japan
• Closed VA/p.f. 10.7 /0.29
AC operation, 60 Hz, Japan
• Closing VA/p.f. 75 ... 90 /0.73
• Closed VA/p.f. 8.5 ... 10.7 /0.29 ... 0.3
DC operation up to 250 V Closing = Closed W 6.2
For AC operation 8 mA x (220 V/Us)
For DC operation 1.25 mA x (220 V/Us)
Operating times2)
Total break time = Opening time + Arcing time (the values apply up to
and including 20 % undervoltage, 10 % overvoltage, and with the coil in
the cold state and at operating temperature)
AC operation
Closing
• ON-delay NO contact ms 8 ... 35
• Opening time NC ms 6 ... 20
Opening
• OFF-delay NO contact ms 4 ... 18
• ON-delay NC ms 5 ... 30
Arcing time ms 10
DC operation
Closing
• OFF-delay NC ms 18 ... 110
Opening
• ON-delay NC ms 15 ... 30
Arcing time ms 10
Operating times2) at 1.0 x Us
AC operation
Closing
Opening
• Closing time NC ms 7 ... 20
DC operation
Closing
Opening
• Closing time NC ms 15 ... 25
1) Coils for USA, Canada and Japan: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us at 60 Hz.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/137


Load side
AC-12 A 16
AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V A 10
400 V A 6
500 V A 4
690 V A 2
DC-12, for rated operational voltage Ue
3
110 V A 2.1
220 V A 0.8
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
• 2 current paths in series
up to 48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 1.6
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.7
up to 48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 10
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 1
DC-13, for rated operational voltage Ue
• 1 current path
24 V A 10
48 V A 5
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.45
440 V A 0.25
600 V A 0.2
24 V A 10
48 V A 10
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.75
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.4
24 V A 10
48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 2
440 V A 0.9
600 V A 0.8
Rated output power of induction motors
Acc. to utilization category AC-2 and AC-3, 50 Hz
230/220 V kW 2.4
400/380 V kW 4
500 V kW 4
690/660 V kW 4
Operating frequency z1)
Operating cycles per hour
during normal duty AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
for utilization category AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 1000
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 3600
DC-13 h-1 3600
No-load operating frequency h-1 10000
1) Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the operational current I’
and operational voltage U': z’ = z ¼ Ie/I’ ¼ (Ue/U’)1.5 ¼ 1/h.
3/138 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Overview 3TH20..-0 contactor relays

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 and EN 50005
AC and DC operation Contactor relay, EN 50 011,
4 contacts
IEC 60947 (VDE 0660).
The 3TH2 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
The contactor relays with screw terminal are finger-safe accord-
ing to EN 50274.
Ident. No. 40E Ident. No. 31E, 22E
3TH27 latched contactor relays
3
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011. Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
designed for continuous duty.
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted
to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
coil.
Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
The contactor relay can also be switched on and released 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
manually.
■ Design Contactor relay, Contactor relay,

Hilfsschütze
EN 50 011 EN
DIN50EN50
005, 005,
3TH2 contactor relays 8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
Version
The 3TH20 contactors with 4 auxiliary contacts are available with
SIGUT screw terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and
solder pin connectors.
NSB0_00067a
The contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors can be Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
used in the plug-in socket with solder pin connectors for printed 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
circuit boards. The contactor relays are coded and the plug-in
socket is codable in order to ensure non-interchangeability.
The 3TH22 contactor relays with 8 integrated contacts are avail- Overvoltage damping
able with screw terminals. The terminal designations are accord- RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combina-
ing to EN 50011. tion of a diode and a Zener diode for short break times) can be
Contact reliability plugged onto all contactors and auxiliary switch blocks with
screw terminals from the front in order to damp opening surges
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for in the coil. The device identification plate must be removed for
solid-state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and this purpose.
higher.
It can be snapped onto the attached surge suppressor.
Auxiliary switch blocks
Residual current
The contactor relays with 4 contacts with screw terminals relays
can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module (see Accessories) can
mountable auxiliary switch blocks. be used by programmable logic controllers to increase the
permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of
A cover (with device identification plate) must be removed from semiconductor outputs.
the front of the contactor for this purpose. The auxiliary switch
block is then easy to mount. The auxiliary switch blocks can be This module ensures the safe opening of 3TH2/3TF2 contactors
removed again by unlocking them with a laterally arranged slide. with direct control through 230 V AC semiconductor outputs. It is
accommodated in the same enclosure as the 3TX4 490-3. surge
The contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts ac- suppressors and can be plugged into the contactor.
cording to EN 50011, with the identification number 40E, can be
extended with 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or 44E auxiliary switch blocks
to obtain contactor relays with 8 contacts according
to EN 50011. The identification numbers 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or
44E on the coded auxiliary switch blocks apply to the complete
contactors (see illustration on the right). These auxiliary switch
blocks cannot be combined with contactor relays with identifica-
tion number 31E and 33E.
All contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts
according to EN 50011, identification number 40E, 31E or 22E,
can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks with identification
number 40, 31, 22, 20, 11 or 02 to obtain contactor relays with
6 or 8 contacts according to EN 50005. The identification num-
bers on the auxiliary switch blocks apply only to the attached
auxiliary switch blocks (see the illustration on the right).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/139

Contactor relays Type 3TH2
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization
categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking 30 NSB00659
current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are Interfaces
switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle
Million operating cycles (106)

10
of the supply system. Contactor relays+Interfaces
5
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or 3
solenoid valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective 2 DC-13 DC-13
220 V 110 V
measures for the load circuits are necessary. RC elements and 1
3
DC-13 AC-15/AC-14
freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective features. 0,5 24 V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 I a (A)
I e- DC-13 I e - DC-13 I e - DC-13 I e - AC-15/AC-14
220 V 110 V 24 V 230 V
v
Contactor relays Auxiliary contact block
Type 3TH20 ..-.... 3TH22 ..-.... 3TX4 ...-..
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation Any
cycles
• Screw terminal V 690 500 500
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500 -- --
• Solder pin connection V 500 -- --
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (pollution degree 3)
• Screw terminal kV 8 6 6
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6 -- --
• Solder pin connection kV 6 -- --
Safe isolation between coil and contacts V Up to 300
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
3TH20: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO con-
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (removable) tacts cannot be closed at the same time.
acc. to:
• ZH 1/457 ZH1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-working
industry.
3TH22:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (fixed) acc. to: Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
• ZH 1/457 Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
• SUVA SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt
(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
IP40 coil assembly
Resistance to shock
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4/10

Operating range at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100% ON period
the max. ambient temperature is +40 °C.
2) See page 3/142.
3/140 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Fuse-links gL/gG
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 6
Weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA
Control
3
• p.f. 0.41
• Closed VA 6.8
• p.f. 0.42
• p.f. 0.36
• Closed VA 6.1
• p.f. 0.46
• p.f. 0.43/0.38
• p.f. 0.48/0.42
2)
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
operating range
• AC operation ON-delay ms 5 ... 20
OFF-delay ms 4 ... 12
ON-delay ms 3 ... 24
• DC operation ON-delay ms 16 ... 140
ON-delay ms 3 ... 6
Arcing time ms 10
• AC operation ON-delay ms 6 ... 17
ON-delay ms 3 ... 24
• DC operation ON-delay ms 18 ... 42
ON-delay ms 3 ... 5
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-12 A 10
for rated operational voltage Ue
230/220 V A 4
400/380 V A 3
500 V A 2
690/660 V A 1
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100% ON period the
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/141


Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-12 A 10
• 1 current path1) up to 24 V A 4
60 V A 2
110 V A 1.1
240/220 V A 0.5
60 V A 10
3
110 V A 4
240/220 V A 2
60 V A 10
110 V A 6
240/220 V A 2.5
• 1 current path up to 24 V A 2.1
60 V A 0.9
110 V A 0.52
240/220 V A 0.27
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
240/220 V A 0.9
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
240/220 V A 1.2
Operating frequency
Rated operation for utilization category
Dependence of the operating AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
frequency z’ on the operational
current I’ and operational
voltage U’
z’ = z ¼(Ie/I ’) ¼(400 V/U ’)1.5 ¼1/h AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 1000
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1200
DC-13 h-1 1200
No-load operating frequency h-1 10000
Screw terminal Main and auxiliary conductors
Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Flat connector
Finely stranded
When using a quick-connect • 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
terminal • 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
Rated output power of induction motors
acc. to utilization category 110 V kW 0.2
AC-2 and AC-3 230/220 V kW 0.55
400/380 V kW 1.1
500 V kW 1.5
690/660 V kW 1.5
1) Contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles.
3/142 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RH11 coupling relays for switching
auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
■ Application ■ Function
DC operation No auxiliary switch blocks can be snapped onto
3RH11 coupling relays.
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Coupling relays have a low power consumption, an extended
The 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits are coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for
tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic damping opening surges (exceptions: 3RH11 ..-.HB40 and
controls. 3RH11 ..-.MB4.-0KT0).
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the 3RH11 contactor relays. (See page 3/130)
3
The size S00 coupling relays (3RH11) cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Contactor type 3RH11 ..-.HB40 3RH11 ..-.JB40 3RH11 ..-.KB40
Size S00 S00 S00
Power consumption of the
magnetic coil (for cold coil)
Closing = closed
At Us = 17 V W 1.2
At Us = 24 V W 2.3
At Us = 30 V W 3.6
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the No surge suppression With diode With varistor
magnetic coil
U
Operating times
• Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70
• At 24 V
• At 30 V
• Opening at 17... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO contact ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60 7 ... 17
- Closing time NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70 22 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required
Contactor type 3RH11 ..-.MB40-0KT0 3RH11 ..-.VB40 3RH11 ..-.WB40

Size S00 S00 S00
Power consumption of the W 1.4
Closing = Closed at Us = 24 V
Permissible residual current < 8 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the Diode, varistor or RC element, Built-in diode Built-in varistor
magnetic coil attachable
U
Switching times of the coupling
relays
• Closing at 20.5 V
- ON-delay ms 30 ... 120
- OFF delay ms 20 ... 110
• At 24 V
• At 44 V
- ON-delay ms 15 ... 60
- OFF delay ms 10 ... 50
• Opening at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/143

3RT Coupling Relays
3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
■ Application ■ Function
DC operation Coupling relays have a low power consumption, an extended
coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) damping opening surges (exceptions: 3RT10 1.–1HB4. and
The 3RT10 coupling relays for switching motors are tailored to 3RT10 1.–.MB4.-0KT0).
the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to
those of the 3RT10 contactors for switching motors. (See page 3/17)
3
The 3RT10 1 coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be fitted to the 3RT10 2 coupling relays (see Accessories).
Contactor Type 3RT10 1.-.HB4. 3RT10 1.-.JB4. 3RT10 1.-.KB4. 3RT10 2.-.KB4.
Size S00 S00 S00 S0
ating
cycles
Coil voltage operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the at Us 17 V W 1,2 2,1
magnetic coil (for cold coil) 24 V W 2,3 4,2
Closing = Closed 30 V W 3,6 6,6
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) < 10 mA x (24 V/Us) < 6 mA x (24 V/Us)
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No surge suppres- With diode With varistor With varistor
sion
U U
Switching times of the coupling relays

• Closing
- at 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250
- at 24 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 60 64 ... 87
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40 55 ... 78
- at 30 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 50 53 ... 64
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 45 ... 56
• Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60 7 ... 17 18 ... 19
ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70 22 ... 30 24 ... 25
Between the coil and the contacts
3/144 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT Coupling Relays
3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to
those of the 3RT10 contactors for switching motors. (See page 3/17)
The 3RT10 1 coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Power consumption of the coils 1.4 W at 24 V.
Contactor Type 3RT10 1.-1MB4.-0KT0 3RT10 1.-1VB4. 3RT10 1.-1WB4.
Size S00 S00 S00
ating
cycles
Power consumption of the at Us 24 V W 1,4
3
Closing = Closed
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No surge suppression With diode With varistor
U
Operating times of the coupling relays
• Closing
- at 20.5 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130
OFF-delay NC ms 40 ... 125
- at 24 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 100
- at 44 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 30
• Opening OFF-delay NO ms 9 ... 12 45 ... 65 10 ... 15
ON-delay NC ms 12 ... 16 52 ... 72 15 ... 20
Permissible residual current On request
Upright mounting position
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/145

3TX7, 3RS18 Coupling Relays
3TX7 Coupling Relays, Narrow Design
Relay couplers
■ Design ■ Function
Note on mounting Overvoltage damping
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical rails. The coupling links have been tested with 1 x 105 operating
In the case of vertical rails and closely mounted units, the maxi- cycles at AC-15 operation with the values specified in the
mum permissible ambient temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service Technical specifications.
position is possible.
If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the endurance of the
If the coupling links are operated continuously 24 hours per day relay couplers can be increased.
(100% ON time) at the maximum permissible rated control sup-
ply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient temperature, Note: If capacitive loads without series resistors are switched,
it is recommended that no similar equipment or other units that which limit temporary peak currents, microscopic welding of the
relay contacts may result.
3
generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coupling links

because this can reduce the endurance of the couplers.
A distance > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling link re-
duces the risk of a premature failure under these conditions of
application.
Peripheral
devices Electronic control Actuators
AC 110 V AC 110 V
AC 230 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 230 V
Output
Input
M
Pushbuttons Interface Interface Motor
Position switches NSB00186
contactor
Connecting a lead to the spring-loaded terminals
Type 3TX7 002/3TX7 003
General data
Safe isolation for relay couplers1) V Up to AC 300
Degree of protection Connections for relay couplers IP20
Enclosures IP30
Short-circuit protection acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 A 4
Fuse inserts, gL/gG operational class
• Screw terminals
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Terminal screw M3
• Spring-loaded terminals (for 3TX7 003):
- Solid or finely stranded mm2 1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) For 3TX7 00.-1FB02, no safe isolation
according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101.
3/146 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 002-/3TX7 003- 1AB02 1AB00 1BB00 1FB02 1CB00 2AB00 2AE00 1BF00 2AF00 2AF05
2BF02
Control side
Operating range 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption at Us W 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.2 1.2 0.75 0.75 1.2 1.2 1.2
Release voltage % 10 25
Max. permissible conductor length AC m 300 300 300 300 300 300 15 7 7 350
(min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2) DC m 2.000
• Permissible residual current mA 2 2 2 2 4 2 0.4 0.35 0.35 4
of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Operating times at Us ON-delay ms <8
3
OFF-delay ms < 10
Function display Yellow LED
Type 3TX7 002/3TX7 003

Load side
Rated current1)
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 6
• Rated operational currents Ie
Acc. to utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660)

(3TX7 002-1CB00: AC-15, Ie = 2 A)
AC-15 - at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
DC-13 - at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
Switching current
With resistive load to DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard)
and DIN VDE 0660
AC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 6
- at 230 V A 6
DC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.2
Switching voltage AC/DC V 24 ... 250
• Min. contact load for 3TX7 00.-...02 mA 1 V AC/DC, 0.1
Mechanical endurance Operat- 20 x 106
ing
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operat- 1 x 105
ing
cycles
Operating frequency Operat- 5000
ing
cycles
1/h
Contact material for 3TX7 00.-...02 Ag/Ni 0.15 hard gold-plated
Power limit hard gold plating for 3TX7 00.-...02
• Voltage V 30
• Current mA 20
Note: If inductive loads are connected, the endurance of the relay couplers can be increased.
1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/147

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

General data
Safe isolation for relay couplers V Up to 300 AC
Degree of protection Connections IP20
Enclosures IP30
3
• Screw terminals (for 3TX7 004):
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Terminal screws M3
Control side
Operating range at Us = 24 V AC/DC 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
at Us = 110 V and 230 V AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption at Us 0.5 W; 3TX7 00.-...05: 1 W at 230 V DC/6 VA at 230 V AC
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal)
- Width 6.2 mm
- Us = 24 V mA 2
- Us > 24 V mA 0.5
- From 12.5 mm width mA 2.5
Exceptions: 3TX7 00 .-1BF05 mA 5 (Us = 230 V AC)
mA 0.5 (Us = 230 V DC)
Operating times at Us
ON-delay ms <8
OFF-delay ms < 15
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 -1.F00 -1.B.. -1BF05

-2ME02 -2MB02
-2MF02
Max. permissible conductor length (min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
AC m 40 400 350
DC m 2000 2000 2000
3/148 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 00.-1A/-1B/-1C/-1G/-1H 3TX7 00.-.M

Load side
Rated operational current Ie1)
acc. to utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660)
AC-15 - at 24 V A 3 2
- at 110 V A 3 2
- at 230 V A 3 2
DC-13 - at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
3
Switching current
With resistive load to DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard) and DIN VDE 0660
AC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 6
- at 230 V A 6
DC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 0.3
- at 230 V A 0.2
Power limit for hard gold plating Voltage V 30
Current mA 20
Endurance Mechanical Operating 20 x 106
cycles
Electrical (at Ie) Operating 1 x 106 0.5 x 106
cycles
Operating frequency Operating 5000
cycles 1/h
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/149

Relay couplers with plug-in design
■ Design
Coupling elements are used to connect signals to and from a For easy linking of the signals, each terminal can be jumpered
PLC. The plug-in relays enable the relay to be replaced at the using an external connecting comb.
end of its service life without detaching the wiring.
Type 3TX7 01.-1
General data
Safe isolation V Up to 300 AC
3

Degree of protection Enclosures IP20
Relays IP40
Conductor cross-sections screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• Terminal screw M2.5
Type 3TX7 01.-1.H 3TX7 01.-1.B 3TX7 01.-1.E 3TX7 01.-1.F

Control side
Operating range 0.9 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.25 Us 0.8 ... 1.1 Us 0.8 ... 1.1 Us
Power consumption at Us (24 V/115 V/230 V) W < 0.5/0.5/1
Release voltage % 10 of Us
Max. permissible conductor length (min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm)
AC m -- 100 70 40
DC m 2000 2000 800 800
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 1 2 0.3 0.3
Operating times at Us
ON-delay ms <6 <7 <8 <8
OFF-delay ms <6 <7 < 20 < 20
Protection circuit
DC Freewheel diode + Reverse polarity protection
AC Rectifier bridge
Type 3TX7 01.-1

Load side
Rated current1)
• Rated operational currents Ie
- AC-15 at 24 V A 3
at 110 V A 3
at 230 V A 3
- DC-13 at 24 V A 1
at 110 V A 0.2
at 230 V A 0.1
Min. contact load
• Standard contact 17 V DC/5 mA at 1 ppm fault2)
• Hard gold-plated contacts 5 V DC/1 mA at 1 ppm fault2)
Mechanical endurance Operating 20 106
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating 100000
Acc. to AC-15 cycles
Operating frequency Operating 5000
cycles 1/h
2) 1 ppm = one fault in the first one million operating cycles.
3/150 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Semiconductor couplers
AC and DC operation Overvoltage damping
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1, DIN VDE 0435, DIN VDE 0660 and In the case of optocouplers, the contact element is a semicon-
EN 50005 optocouplers: DIN VDE 0884, DIN VDE 0411 ductor. These are not subject to wear; so welding is not possible.
Part 500, IEC 61131-2 (programmable logic controllers).
Note: With semiconductors, the switching current is not depen-
In the coupling links in double-decker format, the connections dent on the inductance of the load, i.e. the switching current for
are arranged on two levels; the units are extremely a DC-13 load is the same as that for an inductive DC-12 load.
compact. Connection system: screw terminal or spring-loaded This means that coupling elements with a semiconductor output
terminals. For test purposes, versions are available with manual are particularly suitable for inductive loads such as solenoid
0 automatic switches. valves. It is not relevant to specify the number of operating
3
cycles because this does not affect the endurance of the semi-
The input and output coupling links differ with regard to the po- conductor provided it is not overheated.
sitioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identifi-
cation purposes, each coupling link has a blank legend plate.
In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
tems, the coupling elements have a lower power consumption.
■ Design
Note on mounting
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical rails.
In the case of vertical rails and closely mounted units, the maxi-
mum permissible ambient temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service
position is possible.
If the coupling elements are operated continuously 24 hours per
day (100% ON time) at the maximum permissible rated control
supply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient tempera-
ture, it is recommended that no similar equipment or other units
that generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coupling el-
ements because this can reduce the endurance of the couplers.
A distance > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling element Connecting a lead to the spring-loaded terminals
reduces the risk of a premature failure under these conditions of
application.
Optocouplers switch using semiconductors. These are not
subject to wear; welding is not possible.
The 6.2 mm wide optocouplers have an opening in the right-
hand side of the casing. They can, like relay couplers, be
mounted side-by-side without gaps.
Peripheral
devices Electronic control Actuators
AC 110 V AC 110 V
AC 230 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 230 V
Output
Input
M
Pushbuttons Interface Interface Motor
Position switches NSB00186
contactor
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/151

Type 3TX7 004-1.F.5
General data
Derating diagram for 3TX7 002-3AB01 load Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300
current depending on the ambient (pollution degree 3)
temperature Tu Optoelectronic coupling element for V Up to 300
I (A) safe isolation
Continuous Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
current per Conductor cross-sections
channel Separate Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
1,5
1.5
Finely stranded with or mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
3
between without end sleeve

2 modules Terminal screws M3
1 with 5 mm Permissible ambient temperature
clearance each and During operation °C -25 ... +60
1W power loss each During storage °C -40 ... +80
0,5
0.5
NSB00187
20 40 60 Tu (°C)
Type 3TX7 002- 3AB00 3AB01 4AB00 4AG00

Control side
Operating range V 17 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC 17 ... 30 AC/DC 88 ... 264 AC/DC
Control side power consumption
at 17 V DC mA < 18 <5 -- --
at 24 V DC mA < 20 <7 -- --
at 30 V DC mA < 22 < 8.5 -- --
at 17 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 10 --
at 24 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 14 --
at 30 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 18 --
at 88 V AC mA -- -- -- <9
at 230 V AC mA -- -- -- < 24
at 264 V AC mA -- -- -- < 28
Release voltage V >5 >8 >5 > 40
Operating times
• ON-delay at 17 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
at 24 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
at 30 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
at 17 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
at 24 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
at 30 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
at 88 V AC ms -- -- -- < 18
at 230 V AC ms -- -- -- < 20
at 264 V AC ms -- -- -- < 22
• OFF-delay at 17 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 18 --
at 24 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 25 --
at 30 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 30 --
at 17 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 18 --
at 24 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 25 --
at 30 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 30 --
at 88 V AC ms -- -- -- < 10
at 230 V AC ms -- -- -- < 20
at 264 V AC ms -- -- -- < 25
Function display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
Max. permissible conductor length AC m -- -- 1000 140
(min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2) DC m 2000 2000 2000 --
Load side
Switching current A 1.8 1.5 (see derat- 0.1 0.1
ing diagram)
Short-time loading capacity A 20 4 1 1
ms 20 200 20 20
Contacts 1 NO, 1 NO, 1 NO, 1 NO,
Triac transistor transistor transistor
Switching voltage1) Effective AC 50/60 Hz V 48 ... 264 -- -- --
(operating range) DC -- 60 30 30
Minimum load current mA 60 -- -- --
Voltage drop conducting V 1.5 1.1 1.7 0.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) mA <5 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.001
Operating frequency at Ie Hz 1 1 5 5
1) Observe minimum operational voltage for 3TX7 002-3AB00.
3/152 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

General data
Safe isolation acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N for optocouplers V Up to 300
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation °C -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -40 ... +80
• Screw terminals (for 3TX7 004):
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
3
Type 3TX7 004-/3TX7 005- 3AB04 3AC.4 3AC03 3PB54 4PG24

Control side
Operating range V 11 ... 30 DC 110 ... 230
AC/DC
Power consumption
- at 24 V DC W 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.2 --
- at 230 V AC W -- -- -- -- 1.5
Release voltage V 6 5 6 9 20
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 2.3 2.6 1.5 1.5 0.4
Operating times
- ON-delay ms 2.5 0.3 10 0.3 10
- OFF-delay ms 8 4 10 0.3 12
Max. permissible conductor length m 1700 2000 2000 2000 40
(min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
Load side
Switching voltage V 48 DC 30 DC 24 ... 250 AC 30 DC 30 DC
Switching current A 0.5 5 2 1.5 0.1
Short-time loading capacity
A 1.5 Short-circuit 100 Short-circuit 0.2
resistant1) resistant2)
ms 20 -- 20 -- 3
Contacts 1 NO, transistor 1 NO, Triac 1 NO, transistor
Minimum load current mA -- 5003) 50 -- --
Voltage drop conducting V 1 0.5 1.6 0.5 1.5
Leakage current of the electronics for 0 signal mA < 0.1 < 0.1 <6 < 0.1 < 0.1
Operating frequency for resistive load Hz 50 50 1 500 25
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the semiconductor output
switches off. In order to operate the device again, it must be temporarily
disconnected from the power supply.
2) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the
semiconductor output.
3) If the current falls below the minimum load current, the built-in semicon-
ductor detects an open-circuit in the load circuit. The control must be
temporarily switched off for resetting.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/153

Type 3TX7 004-/3TX7 005- 3PB74 3PG74

Control side
Operating range V 11 ... 30 DC 88 ... 253 AC/DC
Power consumption
- at 24 V DC W -- 0.2
- at 230 V AC W 1.5
Release voltage V 25
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 1.5 1.2
Operating times
- ON-delay ms 1.5 --
- OFF-delay ms 75 --
3

Max. permissible conductor length m 40
Load side
Switching voltage max. V 30 DC
Switching current A 3
Short-time loading capacity A Short-circuit resistant1)
ms --
Contacts 1 NO, transistor
Minimum load current mA --
Voltage drop conducting V 0.5
Leakage current of the electronics for 0 signal mA 0.1
Operating frequency for resistive load 1/s 10
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the
semiconductor output.
3/154 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Housing
Relay couplers
■ Overview ■ Application
The new 3RS18 coupling relays are couplers in the well-proven Typical applications are found wherever electronically optimized
standard 22.5 mm timing relay enclosure. The series comprises contacts are required and equipment with a wide voltage range
relays with 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts with screw and is implemented.
spring-loaded terminals for combined voltages and wide volt-
age ranges.
Type 3RS18 ..-....0 3RS18 ..-....1
General data
3
Safe isolation acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N V 300
Between the coil and the contacts and between the individual contacts.
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
- Enclosures IP20
- Cover IP40
- During operation °C -25 ... +60
- During storage °C -40 ... +80
Mounting position (permissible) Any
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60028-2-27
Vibration resistance g/ms 10 ... 55/0.35
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Tests acc. to basic specification
• Screw terminal
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded mm2 2 x (20 ... 14)
- Terminal screw M3.5
- Corresponding opening tool Standard screwdriver, size 2 or Pozidriv 2
• Spring-loaded terminal
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)
- Corresponding opening tool Screwdriver with 3 mm blade or 8WA2 807 opening tool
Control side
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Rated output power
- max. DC W 1
- max. AC VA 8
Bridging of supply failures
- depends on version ms 5 ... 100
Max. permissible conductor length 1 CO contact 2/3 CO contact
- 330 pF/m AC m 100 200
- Min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2 DC m 2000 1500
Permissible residual current mA 2
of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Temporarily flowing capacitor charging currents mA 450 for 500 ms1)
on energizing supply voltage
1) Note the short-circuit limitation for control with the semiconductor version!
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/155

3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Housing
Relay couplers
Type 3RS18 ..-....0 3RS18 ..-....1

Load side
Continuous thermal current Ith A 6
• AC-15
- at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
- at 400 V A 3
• DC-13
- at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
3
- at 230 V A 0.1
Operational current for resistive load
• AC-12
- at 24V A 5
- at 115 V A 5
- at 230V A 5
- at 400 V A 5
• DC-12
- at 24V A 5
- at 115 V A 0.2
- at 230V A 0.2
Switching voltage
- max. AC V 400
- max. DC V 250
Contact material AgSnO2 AgNi 0.15 hard gold-plated
Min. contact load
• Standard contact 17 V DC/5 mA at 1 ppm fault --
• Hard gold-plated contacts -- 5 V DC/1 mA at 1 ppm fault
Endurance
• Mechanical Operating cycles 20 x 106
• Electrical (at Ie) Operating cycles 1 x 106
Operating times
• Max. ON-delay at Us ms 8 (for 3RS18 00-..W0. < 30)
• Max. OFF-delay at Us ms 30 (for 3RS18 00-..W0. < 150)
Operating frequency Switching 5000
cycles/h
Short-circuit protection A 4
Weld-free protection with gL/gG operational class at Ik 1 kA
3/156 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

LZX Plug-in Relays
Relay couplers
Plug-in relay coupling elements can be ordered complete or as In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
single modules. tems, the coupling elements have a lower power consumption.
In the versions equipped with LEDs, these indicate the switching
Installation status. The LZX:PT/MT relay couplers have a test button. This
The relays are plugged into the socket and this is snapped onto can be used to force the relay coupler into the tripped state and
a 35 mm standard mounting rail according to EN 50022. to lock it. This is indicated by a raised orange-colored lever.
A fixing bracket can be ordered for the MT series that addition- Overvoltage damping
ally fixes the relay into a plug-in socket (under conditions of The 24 V DC relays LZX:RT and LZX:PT with LEDs can be
increased mechanical stress). For the RT and PT series, a com- supplied with, all others without integral surge suppression
bined fixing and ejection bracket is available which can be used
3
(freewheel diode connected in parallel with A1/A2). The positive
to remove the relay where access is difficult, for example, when supply voltage must be connected to coil terminal A1.
relays are mounted side-by-side.
They can be mounted as required. Logical disconnection
Note: For the LZX plug-in relay coupling elements, the spring The terminals for the contacts and the terminals for the coil are
element must be hung onto the standard mounting rail from arranged on separate levels, e.g. above for contacts and below
below and fixed in place. for coil. Logical isolation is not identical to safe isolation.
Safe isolation
2 For safe isolation, transfer of the voltage of one circuit to another
2 circuit is prevented to a suitable degree of safety (requirements
and tests are described in EN 60947-1 in Appendix N).
Control with solid-state output
In the case of solid-state outputs (e.g. BERO) with overload and
short-circuit protection, you must make allowance during config-
uration for the temporarily flowing capacitor charging currents!
NSB0_01427
This is possible, for example, by using a suitable LZX relay
1 coupler.
3 1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/157

LZX Plug-in Relays
Relay couplers
Relay type RT print relay, 8- and 11-pole, PT industrial relay, 8-, 11- and 14-pole,
(12.7 mm) 1 CO/2 CO (22.5 mm) 2 CO/3 CO/4 CO
AC and DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250
Pollution degree 3 3
Overvoltage category III III
Safe isolation Up to 250 V (with socket LZX:RT78626) No
Between the coil and the contacts No (for complete units with standard socket)
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
3
Degree of protection IP67/IP20 IP50/IP20

• During operation °C -40 ... +70 -40 ... +70 (+50 for base assembly)
• During storage °C -40 ... +80 -40 ... +80
• Solid mm2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Control side
Operating range
• At 20 °C V 16.8 ... 52 18 ... 52 86.3 ... 127 172 ... 264 18 ... 40.8 19.2 ... 39.6 92 ... 190 184 ... 380
Power consumption at Us 0.4 W 0.75 VA 0.75 VA 0.75 VA 0.75 W 1 VA 1 VA 1 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 7.2 34.5 69 3.6 7.2 34.5 69
Protection circuit Freewheel No Freewheel No
diode for diode in
complete LED
unit module
Max. permissible conductor length at Us2) m > 2000 30 (with LED), > 2000 500 200 50
(min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2) 20 (without LED)
Load side
Switching voltage
• AC/DC V 24 ... 250 24 ... 250
Rated current3)
Continuous thermal current Ith A 16/8 (1 CO/2 CO) 12/10/6 (2 CO/3 CO/4 CO)
Rated operational current Ie AC-15 acc. to A 6/6 5/5/5
utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660)
Rated operational current Ie DC-13 acc. to A 2 at 24 V 5 at 24 V
utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660) 0.27 at 230 V 0.5 at 230 V
Short-circuit protection A 10 6
Ik 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Fuse links gL/gZ operational class DIAZED
Shock resistance g/ms 10/11 9/11
Vibration resistance
Floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
30 ... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts g 5 Approx. 7
along the critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20 > 20
Min. contact load Standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated 17 V/0.1 mA Standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated 20 mV/1 mA
(reliability: 1 ppm)
Mechanical endurance Operat- 30 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
ing
cycles
Electrical endurance Operat- 1 x 105 1 x 105 1 x 105
(resistive load at 250 V AC) ing
cycles
Operating frequency (operating cycles)
Without load 1/min 1200 600
1/h 72000 36000
With load 1/min 6 6
1/h 360 360
Make-time ms 7 15
Break-time ms 3 10
Bounce time ms 2 5
Contact material AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must
be increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
2) The max. conductor length depends on the conductor capacity and the
cable installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
3/158 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

LZX Plug-in Relays
Relay couplers
Relay type MT industrial relay, 11-pole (35.5 mm) 3 CO

AC and DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Acc. to EN 60664
Safe isolation No
Between the coil and the contacts
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Degree of protection IP50/IP20
3
• During operation °C -45 ... +60 -45 ... +50 -45 ... +50 -45 ... +50
• During storage °C -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80
• Solid mm2 2 x 2.5
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 2 x 1.5
Control side
Operating range
• At 20 °C V 18 ... 38 19.2 ... 38 92 ... 137 184 ... 264
Power consumption at Us 1.2 W 2.3 VA 2.3 VA 2.3 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 9.6 46 92
Protection circuit No
Max. permissible conductor length at Us2) m > 2000 On request On request 80
Load side
Switching voltage
• AC/DC V 24 ... 250
Rated current 3)
Rated operational current Ie /DC-13 A 2 at 24 V
Acc. to utilization categories 0.27 at 230 V
(DIN VDE 0660)
Rated operational current Ie /AC-15 A 5 at 24 V and 230 V
Acc. to utilization categories
(DIN VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection A 10
Ik 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Fuse links gL/gZ operational class DIAZED
Floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
30 ... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts along g 2
the critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20
Min. contact load 12 V DC/10 mA
(reliability: 1 ppm)
Mechanical endurance Operat- 20 x 106
ing
cycles
Electrical endurance Operat- 4 x 105
(resistive load at 250 V AC) ing
cycles
Operating frequency (operating cycles)
Without load 1/min 100
1/h 6000
With load 1/min 20
1/h 1200
Make-time typically 12
/ms
Break-time typically 5
/ms
Bounce time typically 4
/ms
Contact material AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must
be increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
2) The max. conductor length depends on the conductor capacity and the
cable installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/159

3TG10 Power Relays/Miniature Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
■ Overview
Version
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors with 4 main
contacts are available with 6.3 mm ... 0.8 mm screw terminals or
flat connectors. The versions with screw terminals are climate-
proof and finger-safe according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors are small.
Their width is 36 mm.
3
3/160 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

4-pole, 4 kW
Type 3TG10
General data
Endurance
• Mechanical Operating cycles 3 million
• Electrical
- AC-1 at Ie Operating cycles 0.1 million
- AC-3 at Ie Operating cycles 0.4 million
3
Safe isolation
Between the coil and the contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N V Up to 300
Permissible ambient temperature During operation1) °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 (VDE 0470 Part 1) IP00, drive system IP20
Power consumption of the magnetic coils AC operation 45 ... 450 Hz VA 4.4
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) p.f. 0.9 (hum-free)
DC operation W 4
Operating times (Total Break-time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
• ON-delay
- Closing NO - DC operation ms 11 ... 50
- AC operation ms 10 ... 50
- Opening NC - DC operation ms 21 ... 39
• OFF-delay
- Closing NC - DC operation ms 5 ... 45
- Opening NO - DC operation ms 19 ... 35
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC operation and DC operation g/ms 5.1/5 and 3.5/10
• Sine pulse AC operation and DC operation g/ms 7.9/5 and 5.2/10
Operating frequency z Acc. to AC-1 1/h 1000
In operating cycles/hour rated operation Acc. to AC-2 1/h 500
Acc. to AC-3 1/h 1000
No-load operating frequency 1/h 10000
Fuse links
gL/gG operational class NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB,
NEOZED 5SE acc. to IEC 60947-4/
DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 • Type of coordination "1" A 25
• Type of coordination "2" A 10
• Miniature circuit-breakers Characteristic C A 10
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V at 55 °C1) A 20 for screw terminal, 16 for tab connector
Rated output power Ue for AC loads with p.f. = 1, 230/220 V
• For screw terminal kW 7.5 (13 at 400 V)
• For tab connector kW 6 (10 at 400 V)
Minimum conductor cross-section for load with Ie mm2 2.5
Operational current for AC-3 at 400 V rated value A 8.4
Rated output power for slipring or squirrel-cage motors W 4000
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz and at 400 V
Utilization category AC-5a (permissible nominal impedance: 0.5 W)
Switching gas discharge lamps
• Per main conducting path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Rated output power/rated operational current per lamp
• Uncorrected 18 W 0.37 A 43
36 W 0.43 A 37
58 W 0.67 A 24
• Lead-lag circuit 18 W 2 x 0.11 A 2 x 81
36 W 2 x 0.21 A 2 x 42
58 W 2 x 0.32 A 2 x 28
1) If the three main conducting paths carry a load of 20 A, the following

applies if I > 10 A for the fourth conducting path: permissible ambient
temperature 40 °C.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/161

4-pole, 4 kW
Type 3TG10
AC capacity
Per main current path 230 V, 50 Hz
Rated output power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
• Shunt compensation L18 W 4.5 µF 0.11 A units 15
L36 W 4.5 µF 0.21 A units 15
L58 W 7 µF 0.32 A units 10
• With solid-state ballast L18 W 6.8 µF 0.10 A units 39
(single lamp)
L36 W 6.8 µF 0.18 A units 39
L58 W 10 µF 0.27 A units 26
3
• With solid-state ballast L18 W 10 µF 0.18 A units 2 x 26

(two lamps)
L36 W 10 µF 0.35 A units 2 x 26
L58 W 22 µF 0.52 A units 2 x 12
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.6
Per main conducting path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Load rating with DC
60 V A 6
110 V A 2
220 V / 240 V A 0.8
60 V A 16
110 V A 6
220 V / 240 V A 1.6
60 V A 18
110 V A 16
220 V / 240 V A 6
60 V A 20
110 V A 20
220 V / 240 V A 20
60 V A 0.5
110 V A 0.15
220 V / 240 V A 0
60 V A 5
110 V A 0.35
220 V / 240 V A 0
60 V A 16
110 V A 10
220 V / 240 V A 1.75
60 V A 16
110 V A 10
220 V / 240 V A 2
With screw terminal M3
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228 Form A/D/C) mm2 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
With tab connector
• Finely stranded 6.3 mm push-on sleeve acc. to DIN 46245/46247
- 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
- 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
CSA and UL rated data (screw terminal)
Rated insulation voltage AC V 600
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 20
Maximum horsepower ratings 1-phase/ 3-phase
at 115 V hp 0.5/ --
200 V hp 1/ 3
230 V hp 1.5/ 3
460 V hp 0/ 5
575 V hp 0/ 5
600 V hp 0/ 5
For short-circuit protection with overload relays

3/162 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories and Spare Parts
For 3RT, 3RH Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for 3RT, 3RH contactors and
contactor relays
■ Overview
Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks Size S00
The auxiliary switch blocks and the maximum number of blocks The version for size S00 contactors is fitted onto the front of the
that can be mounted are described in the sections "Motor contactor (with the supply voltage switched off) and then slid
Contactors" and "Contactor relays". into its latched position; at the same time, the timing relay is con-
nected by means of plug-in contacts to coil terminals A1 and A2
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block of the contactor. Any contactor coil terminals which are not re-
The timer module, which is available in the "ON-DELAY" and quired are sealed off by means of covers on the enclosure of the
"OFF-DELAY" types, allows time-delayed functions up to 100 s time-delay block, to prevent them from being connected inad-
(3 distinct delay ranges). vertently.
3
It contains a relay with one NO contact and one NC contact; A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp
depending on the version, the relay is switched either after an opening surges in the contactor coil.
ON-delay or after an OFF-delay. The solid-state, time-delay block cannot be mounted on size S00
The timer module with "WYE-DELTA FUNCTION" is equipped coupling relays.
with one delayed and one instantaneous NO contact, with an Sizes S0 to S3
interval time of 50 ms between the two. The delay time of the
NO contact can be set between 1.5 s and 30 s. The time-delay block for size S0 to S3 contactors is plugged into
coil terminals A1 and A2 on top of each contactor; the timing
Wye-delta function: relay is connected both electrically and mechanically by means
A1/A2
of pins.
NSB00453a
Y 27/28 A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp

37/38
opening surges in the contactor coil.
t 50 ms
Note on configuration
The contactor on which the solid-state, time-delay auxiliary
switch block is mounted operates without a delay. a) L1 b) L1
S1 K3 S1
Size S00
A1 B1 A2 K3 A1 B1 A2 K3
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block is fitted onto the 1 1
front of the contactor. The timer module is supplied with power A1 A2 A1 A2
NSB00454
NSB00455
directly by plug-in contacts through the coil terminals of the con- 2 2
tactor, in parallel with A1/A2. The timing function is activated by N N
closing the contactor on which the auxiliary switch block is $ Timing relay block
mounted. The OFF-delay variant operates without an auxiliary % Contactor
power supply; minimum on-time: 200 ms.
A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permissi-
opening surges in the contactor coil. ble when using AC control voltage (see (a) in the circuit dia-
gram).
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block cannot be
mounted on size S00 coupling relays. The 3RT19 16-2D... / 3RT19 26-2D... OFF-delay time relay
blocks have a zero potential start input B1. This means that if
Sizes S0 to S12 there is a parallel load on terminal B1, activation can be simu-
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block is fitted onto the lated with AC voltage. In this case, the additional load
front of the contactor. (e.g. contactor K3) must be wired in accordance with (b).
The timer module is supplied with power through two terminals OFF-delay device for size S00 to S3 contactors
(A1/A2); the time delay of the auxiliary switch block can be AC and DC operation
activated either by a parallel link to any contactor coil or by any
power source. IEC 60947, EN 60947
The OFF-delay variant operates without an auxiliary power For screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mount-
supply; minimum on-time: 200 ms. ing rail. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals.
A single-pole auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out
front of the contactor in addition to the timer module. unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage
failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with
The timer module has no integrated components for damping the necessary power during a voltage dip, ensuring that the con-
opening surges. tactor does not trip. The 3RT19 16 OFF-delay devices are spe-
Solid-state time-delay block with semiconductor output cifically designed for operation with the 3RT contactors and 3RH
contactor relays of the SIRIUS series.
The timer module in the "ON-DELAY" and "OFF-DELAY" versions
allows time-delayed functions up to 100 s (3 distinct delay The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a
ranges). Contactors fitted with a time-delay block close or open capacitive basis, and can be energized with either AC or DC
after a delay according to the set time. (24 V version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is
only necessary with AC operation, is performed using a rectifier
The ON-delay variant of the timing relay is connected in series bridge.
with the contactor coil; terminal A1 of this coil must not be con-
nected. A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the
contactor coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in
With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay, the contactor coil parallel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are dis-
is contacted directly through the relay; terminals A1 and A2 of charged via the coil and thereby delay the opening of the con-
the contactor coil must not be connected. tactor.
The timing relays are suitable for both AC and DC operation.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/163

contactor relays
If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device
NSB0_00456b
in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening op- 4000 V
eration. If the opening operation is downstream of the OFF-delay
V
device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of failure of the
mains voltage.
Operation
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of
110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC
400 V
operation only.
500 ms t
A DC-operated contactor is connected to the output in accor-
3
dance with the input voltage that is applied.

Capacitive input to various analog and digital signals makes it
The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the necessary to suppress interference in the load circuit.
specified minimum time.
Reducing contact arcing
Surge suppressors
The connection between the main conducting path and the EMC
• Without LED (also for Cage Clamp terminals) interference suppression module enables contact arcing, which
size S00, S0, S2, S3, S6 to S12 is responsible for contact erosion and the majority of clicking
• With LED (also for Cage Clamp terminals) noises, to be reduced; this in turn is conducive to an electromag-
size S00 netically compatible design.
All 3RT1 contactors and 3RH1 contactor relays can be retrofitted Higher operational reliability
with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the
coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression Since the EMC interference suppression module achieves a sig-
diodes and Zener diodes for rapid switch-off) can be used. nificant reduction in radio-frequency components and the volt-
age level in three phases, the contact endurance is also im-
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 proved considerably. This makes an important contribution
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxil- towards enhancing the reliability and availability of the system as
iary switch block. a whole.
With all size S0 to S3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and Dispensing with fine graduations
diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil termi-
nals, either on the top or underneath. There is no need for fine graduations within each performance
class, as smaller motors inherently have a higher inductance, so
The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is de- that one solution for all fixed-speed drives up to 5.5 kW is ade-
termined by a coding device. quate.
Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage damp- Two electrical variants are available:
ing or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according • The advantages of the RC circuit lie mainly in the reduction in
to the version. the rate of rise and in its RF damping ability. The selected
Note: values ensure effective interference suppression over a wide
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times range.
of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
NSB0_00457b
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;

diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms). V
Electromagnetic interference suppression module, 3-phase

for size S00 contactors
930 V
400 V
500 ms t
• The varistor circuit can absorb a high energy level and can
also be used for frequencies ranging from 10 to 400 Hz
(closed-loop controlled drives). There is no limiting below the
knee-point voltage, however.
NSB0_00458b
A so-called counter-e.m.f. (electromotive force) is produced

when motors or various inductive loads are turned off. Voltage 950 V
peaks of up to 4000 V may occur as a result, with a frequency 400 V
spectrum from 1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation 500 ms t
from 0.1 to 20 V/ns.
3/164 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

contactor relays
Additional load module Solder pin adapters
• Size S00 for plugging onto the front of the contactors with and The solder pin adapters for the size S00 contactors are available
without auxiliary switch block in two versions:
Coupling devices • Solder pin adapter for contactors with one integrated auxiliary
for mounting on contactors of sizes S0 to S3 contact
DC operation • Solder pin adapter for contactors with mounted 4-pole auxil-
iary switch block
IEC 60947 and EN 60947
Screw adapters
The coupling link is suitable for use in any climate. It is finger-
safe according to EN 50274. The terminal designations comply Plug-on adapters improve the accessibility of the screw fixing for
with EN 50005. size S0 contactors. As a result it is possible to position the screw-
3
driver vertically even when using insulated screwdrivers or
System-compatible operation with 24 DC V, operating range power screwdrivers.
17 V to 30 V.
Optionally the adapters can be rotated through 90° before
Low power consumption in conformity with the technical specifi- mounting.
cations of the solid-state systems. A light-emitting diode
indicates the circuit state. Sealable covers for sizes S00 to S12
Surge suppression When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-
oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to
The 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge operate the contactors manually.
suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched.
For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for
Installation this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual
The 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling link is mounted directly on the operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a
contactor coil. bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
Technical specifications according to EN 61812-1
(VDE 0435 Part 2021)
Contactor Type 3RT19 26-3A
Mechanical latching block for the 3RT1. 2. and 3RT1. 3. contactors
Mechanical endurance with 3RT1. 2 3 million
(operating cycles) with 3RT1. 3 50000
Acc. to EN 60947-1/EN 60947-1, Appendix C
Operating range of the coil
At AC 50/60 Hz and DC 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the coils of the unlocking magnet
(for cold coil and 1.0 xUs)
AC and DC operation W Approx. 4
Command duration for de-energizing
• AC operation ms 18 ... 31
• DC operation ms 18 ... 26
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
lb.in 7 ... 9.5
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/165

contactor relays
Contactor Type 3RT19 .6-2C 3RT19 .6-2D 3RT19 .6-2L 3RT19 .6-2E 3RT19 .6-2F 3RT19 .6-2G
Solid-state time-delay blocks with semi- Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch
conductor output blocks
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V AC 250 300 250
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0110
Operating range of excitation 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated 0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
frequency
Rated output power W 1 2
Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
• AC-14, DC-13 A 0.3 for 3RT19 16 --
3
A 0.3 for 3RT19 26 --

• AC-15, 230 V, 50 Hz A -- 3
• DC-13, 24 V A -- 1
• DC-13, 110 V A -- 0.2
• DC-13, 230 V A -- 0.1
DIAZED protection gL/gG operational class A -- 4
Operating frequency for load
• With Ie 230 V AC h-1 2500
• With 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC h-1 2500 5000
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms 35 35 (OFF-delay 200 (with OFF-delay)
with auxiliary
voltage)
Residual current max. mA 5 --
Voltage drop max. VA 3.5 --
With conducting output
Short-time loading capacity up to 10 ms A 10 --
Setting accuracy max. % 15
With reference to upper limit
of scale
Repeat accuracy max. % 1
Mechanical endurance Oper- 100 x 106 10 x 106
ating
cycles
During operation °C -25 ... +60
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
• Cover IP40
• Terminals IP20
Connection of conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
Permissible mounting position Any
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55 /0.35
EMC tests basic specification IEC 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-2; IEC 61000-6-4
IEC 61000-6-4
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in timing relay --
3/166 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

contactor relays
Versions 3RT1 916-2BE01 3RT1 916-2BK01 3RT1 916-2BL01

OFF-delay devices
Connectable contactor sizes
Caution! Only contactors and contactor relays with DC operation
can be connected.
• DC supply S00 ... S3 S00/S0 S00/S0
• AC supply -- S00/S0 S00/S0
Type 3RT10 ..-1BB4., 3RT10 1.-1BF4, 3RT10 1.-1BM4./1BP4.,
3RH1. ..-1BB40 3RT10 2.-1BF4, 3RT10 2.-1BM4./1BP4.,
3RH1. ..-1BF40 3RH1. ..-1BM40/1BP40
Permissible mounting position 360° 360°
NSB01064
NSB01065
3
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 (DC) 110 (UC) 220/230 (UC)
Operating range 0.9 ... 1.1 Us
Rated frequency/ies Hz
with AC supply f 5 % -- 50 / 60 50 / 60
Ambient temperature permissible:
• During storage Tu °C -40 ... +80
• During operation
- Series-mounting without distance Tu °C -25 ... +50
- Series-mounting with 5 mm distance Tu °C -25 ... +60
OFF-delay1)
(minimum times at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 °C) Note:
In practice the mean value is 1.5 times the minimum time.
• S00 toff > ms 250 130 600
• S0 toff > ms 150 100 400
• S2 (only for DC supply) toff > ms 90 -- --
• S3 (only for DC supply) toff > ms 70 -- --
Installed capacity C
3RT19 16-2B.01 µF 2 000 68 68
Capacitor voltage V 35 180 350
ON delay Note:
(maximum at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 °C) The total ON-delay = Contactor make time + ton
• S00 ton < ms 10 60 200
• S0 ton < ms 10 80 250
Mechanical endurance In million operating cycles 30
Endurance, electrical approx. In million operating cycles >1
-1
Operating frequency z max. (at Tu = 60 °C) h 300
Power loss Pv max. approx. W 0.4 0.5 1
Overvoltage damping With varistor, integrated
2)
Usp = Coil voltage
Tsp = Coil temperature
1) Doubling the time delay can be achieved by doubling the capacitance.
Commercially available capacitors can be used, which can be connected
to terminals C+ and Z–.
2) See 3RT10 1 contactors, page 3/20.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/167

contactor relays
Contactor Type 3RT19 26-2P.

Pneumatic delay block1)
General data
Electrical endurance at Ie In million operating cycles 1
During operation °C -25 ... +60
Acc. to utilization categories EN 60947
3
• AC-12 A 10
• AC-15/AC-14 at Ue up to 230/220 V A 6
400/380 V A 4
500 V A 2.5
690/660 V A 1.5
• DC-13 at Ue 24 V A 4
48 V A 2
110 V A 0.7
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.15
• Solid, stranded mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 or 2 x 2.5 ... 4
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5
• AWG cables AWG 2 x 22 ... 12
• Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
Time delay
• Accuracy 10%
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
1) For size S0.
In addition to the pneumatic delay block, no other auxiliary contacts are
permitted.
3/168 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

contactor relays
Contactor Type 3RH19 24 3TX7 090

Coupling relays for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/EN 60947
General data
Safe isolation V AC Up to 300
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
• Connections IP20
• Enclosures IP40
3
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Fuse links, gL/gG operational class A 6
Control side
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30
Power consumption at Us W 0.5
Nominal current input mA 20
Release voltage V 4
Protection circuit Varistor
Load side
Electrical endurance at Ie In million operating cycles 0.1
Operating frequency Operating cycles h-1 5000
Make-time ms Approx. 7
Break-time ms Approx. 4
Bounce time ms Approx. 2
Contact material AgSnO
Switching voltage V AC/DC 24 ... 250
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 2.5
Rated operational current1)
Acc. to utilization categories EN 60947
• AC-15 - at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
• DC-13 - at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
Switching current
With resistive load to EN 60255 (relay standard) and EN 60947
• AC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 6
- at 230 V A 6
• DC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 0.3
- at 230 V A 0.21)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/169

For 3T Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for 3TB, 3TC, 3TF, 3TG, 3TK
contactors
For 3TF2 contactors Auxiliary contact block
Type 3TX4 4..-..
General data
cycles
3
Positively-driven operation
3TF2 basic unit or complete unit ZH1/457, SUVA
3TF20 basic unit with Upper level ZH1/457, SUVA
3TX4 4 auxiliary switch block Lower level ZH1/457, SUVA
Different levels SUVA
Degree of protection IP20 for screw terminal
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
Touch protection Finger-safe for screw terminal
Acc. to EN 50274
Resistance to shock
Fuse-links gL/gG
1) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100% ON period
the max. ambient temperature is +40 °C.
3/170 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

For 3T Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for 3TH contactor relays
For 3TH2 contactor relays Auxiliary switch block
Type 3TX4 4..-..
General data
cycles
3
Positively-driven operation
3TH2 basic unit or complete unit ZH1/457, SUVA
3TH20 basic unit with Upper level ZH1/457, SUVA
3TX4 4 auxiliary switch block Lower level ZH1/457, SUVA
Different levels SUVA
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 for screw terminal
Resistance to shock
Fuse-links gL/gG
1) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100% ON period the
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/171

Project planning aids
■ Overview
Dimensional drawings Schematics
3RA13 .................................................................. 3/194 ... 3/196 3RA13 ................................................................................ 3/227

3RA14 ..................................................................... 3/197, 3/198 3RA14 ................................................................................ 3/228
3RA19 ..................................................................... 3/193, 3/194 3RH11 .................................... 3/217, 3/222, 3/223, 3/225, 3/226
3RH11 ..................................................................... 3/182, 3/185 3RH14 ..................................................................... 3/223, 3/225
3RH14 ................................................................................ 3/185 3RH19 ......................................... 3/213 ... 3/215, 3/218 ... 3/221
3RH19 ..................................................................... 3/190, 3/191 3RS18 ................................................................................ 3/239
3RS18 ................................................................................ 3/210 3RT10 ............................................ 3/213, 3/217 ... 3/219, 3/222
3
3RT10 ......................................... 3/173 ... 3/178, 3/182 ... 3/184 3RT12 ..................................................................... 3/213, 3/219
3RT12 ................................................................................ 3/179 3RT13 ..................................................................... 3/213, 3/219
3RT13 ................................................................................ 3/180 3RT14 .......................................................... 3/213, 3/218, 3/219
3RT14 .......................................................... 3/175, 3/177, 3/178 3RT15 ..................................................................... 3/213, 3/219
3RT15 ................................................................................ 3/180 3RT16 ..................................................................... 3/217, 3/221
3RT16 ................................................................................ 3/181 3RT19 ............................................ 3/214 ... 3/217, 3/220, 3/221
3RT19 ............................................ 3/187 ... 3/190, 3/192, 3/198
3TB5 ....................................................................... 3/230, 3/234
3TB5 ....................................................................... 3/201, 3/206 3TC4 ....................................................................... 3/232, 3/234
3TC4 ....................................................................... 3/204, 3/206 3TC5 ....................................................................... 3/232, 3/234
3TC5 ....................................................................... 3/204, 3/206 3TC7 ....................................................................... 3/232, 3/234
3TC7 .................................................................................. 3/205 3TD68 ................................................................................ 3/230
3TD68 ................................................................................ 3/201 3TE68 ................................................................................ 3/231
3TE68 ................................................................................ 3/201 3TF2 ................................................................................... 3/235
3TF2 ................................................................................... 3/207 3TF6 ........................................................................ 3/229, 3/233
3TF6 ................................................................................... 3/199 3TG10 ..................................................................... 3/229, 3/233
3TG10 ................................................................................ 3/198 3TH2 .................................................................................. 3/236
3TH2 ....................................................................... 3/209, 3/210 3TH4 ....................................................................... 3/223, 3/224
3TH4 .................................................................................. 3/186 3TK1 ....................................................................... 3/231, 3/234
3TK1 ....................................................................... 3/202, 3/203 3TK2 .................................................................................. 3/235
3TK2 .................................................................................. 3/208 3TX4 ....................................................................... 3/235, 3/236
3TX2 .................................................................................. 3/205 3TX7 ......................................................... 3/229, 3/237 ... 3/240
3TX4 ......................................................... 3/186, 3/207 ... 3/209 3TY6 .................................................................................. 3/230
3TX7 ............................................................ 3/186, 3/200, 3/211 3TY7 .................................................................................. 3/229
LZX .................................................................................... 3/212 LZX .................................................................................... 3/240
3/172 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole
3RT10 1 contactors, size S00 Lateral distance to

Screw terminals grounded components = 6 mm
With surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block and mounted overload relay
106
99
45 95
5,3 8,6 5 67
5
5)
3
50
57,5
4)
51
118
3) 2) 35
2) Auxiliary switch block
(also 3RH19 11- . NF . .
solid-state compatible version )
3) Surge suppressor
(also 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module)
NSB00752b
4) Drilling pattern
15,5 67 5 5) Auxiliary switch block
1-pole
3RT10 1 contactors, size S00

Cage Clamp terminal with auxiliary switch block
5
25
44
47
37
60
50
4)
NSB01221 35
5 9 5 68
36 109
45
3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 coupling relays, size S0

Screw terminals
With surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks and mounted overload relay
10 135
1) 10 45 b) 86
5 3)
35
a
4)
85
80
60
2)
143
63
For size S0:

a = 3 mm at < 240 V
a = 7 mm at > 240 V
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
NSB00753c
1) Auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable

2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front,
15,5 86 5 1, 2 and 4-pole (also 3RH19 21- .FE22 solid-state
compatible version )
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/173

3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 coupling relays, size S0

Cage Clamp terminal
10 135
86
1) 10 45 b) 5 3)
35
a
5
3
4)
72
60
2) For size S0:
143
63
NSB01220b a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly

a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element
(1, 2 and 4-pole)
3) Surge suppressor
15,5 86 5 4) Drilling pattern

Screw terminal
15 159
55 10 110
a
b) 5 3)
45
1)
5
4)
112
80
95
2)
171
75
For size S2:

a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
NSB00754b

20,5 (1, 2 and 4-pole)
107 5
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
3/174 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors, 3-pole

Cage Clamp terminal
159
55 110
35 15 64
a
18 10 b) 5 14 3)
45
1)
5
3
4)
112
72
95
171
2)
75
Test NSB 01219a For size S2:

STOP RESET 0 1
H A
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
(1, 2 and 4-pole)
20 107 5
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors, size S3 Lateral distance to

Screw terminal grounded components = 6 mm
13 183
70 10 10 134
3)
a
b) 5
60
1)
5
4)
130
146
80
2)
221
5)
100
NSB00755b
6)
For size S3:

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the
front (1, 2 and 4-pole), same dimensions
for versions with screw or Cage Clamp
28 7 132 5
terminal
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) For mounting on 35 mm standard mount-
ing rail and 15 mm deep according to
EN 50022 or 75 mm standard mounting
rail according to EN 50023
6) Allen screw 4 mm
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/175


Cage Clamp terminal
b) 183
70 134
45 10 13 86
3)
a
23 10 5 40 60
1)
5
3
4)
130
146
72
2)
224
5)
100
6)
NSB 01218a 7 For size S3:

Test
STOP RESET 0 1 a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
H A
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
front (1, 2 and 4-pole), same dimensions
28 131 5 for versions with screw or Cage Clamp
terminal
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
ing rail and 15 mm deep according to
EN 50022 or 75 mm standard mounting
rail according to EN 50023
6) Allen screw 4 mm
3RT10 coupling relays, size S00

With surge suppressor
Deviating dimensions for coupling relays
3) with Cage Clamp terminal:
5
Height: 60 mm
57,5
50
4) 3) Surge suppressor
NSB00258a
4) Drilling pattern
5,3 8,6 5 67 35
45 99
3/176 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT10 5, 3RT14 5 contactors, size S6 Distance from grounded parts

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block Lateral: 10 mm
mounted overload relay and box terminals, Front: 20 mm
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
k
k
7) 3) 37 107 5) 6)
3
17 61
17
100
1)
2)
Æ7
Æ9
172
164
140
Drilling template
130
268
8)
For size S6:
k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the
withdrawable coil)
1) 2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front
4)
120 72 3) RC element
NSB01171a
140 170 4) 3RB20 overload relay, mounted

140 180 5) 3RT19 55-4G box terminal block
150 217
(Allen screw 4 mm)
6) 3RT19 56-4G box terminal block
(Allen screw 4 mm)
7) PLC connection 24 V DC and changeover switch
(for 3RT1...-.N)
8) Solid-state module with remaining lifetime indica-
tion (auxiliary switch block not mountable on right-
hand side)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/177

3RT10 6, 3RT14 6 contactors, size S10

With lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block
mounted overload relay and box terminals,
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
k
k
6) 3) 48 132
70 5)
17
25 120
3
1) 7) Æ9
11 2)
210
180
200
168
Drilling template
324
4)
145 138
NSB01158a
165 202
165 217
175 251
3RT10 7, 3RT14 7 contactors, size S12 For sizes S10 and S12:
With lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block Distance from grounded parts
mounted overload relay and box terminals, Lateral: 10 mm
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator Front: 20 mm
k
k
6) 3) 48 150
89 5)
25
17
130
1) 7)
9
11
2)
214
200
182
180
Drilling template
331
For sizes S10 and S12:

withdrawable coil)
4) 1) 2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
160 156 2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front
NSB01159b

180 236 4) 3RB20 overload relay, mounted
190 271
5) Box terminal block (allen screw 6 mm)
(for 3RT1...-.N)
7) Solid-state module with remaining lifetime indica-
tion (auxiliary switch block not mountable on
right-hand side)
3/178 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3RT12 6 vacuum contactors, size S10

With lateral auxiliary switch block,
mounted overload relay and box terminals
3) k k
25 48 6) 132
70 5)
17
120
3
1)
9
11
2)
210
Drilling template
180
168
200
324
Detail for 2)
Contact erosion indicator for vacuum tubes
NSB0_01160c
4)
145 138
NSB01162
165 206
217
3RT12 7 vacuum contactors, size S12

With lateral auxiliary switch block,
mounted overload relay and box terminals
k
3) k
48 6) 150
89 5)
17
25 130
1)
9
11
2)
214
200
182
180
Drilling template
331
For sizes S10 and S12:

withdrawable coil)
4) 1) 2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
NSB0_01161e
160 156 2) Position and contact erosion indicator

236 4) 3RB20 overload relay, mounted
5) Box terminal block (allen screw 6 mm)
(for 3RT1...-.N)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/179

3RT13 1 and 3RT15 1 contactors, size S00, Lateral distance to

Screw terminal grounded components = 6 mm
With surge suppressor and auxiliary switch block
106 For size S00:
45 99
8,6 95 Deviating dimensions for contactors
5,3 5 67 with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
5
5) Mounting depth with auxiliary switch block:
110 mm
50
57,5
4)
3

(also 3RH19 11-.N...
solid-state compatible version)
NSB00757b 3) 2) 3) Surge suppressor
35
(also 3RT19 16-1GA00
additional load module)
4) Drilling pattern
1-pole
3RT13 2 and 3RT15 2 contactors, size S0
b ) 3 ) For size S0:
1 ) 1 3 5
1 0 6 1 1 0 5 8 6 3 5 a = 3 mm at < 250 V and mounting of
a
surge suppressor
2 )
a = 7 mm at > 250 V and mounting of
surge suppressor
5 b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
4 ) (left)
6 0
8 0
8 5

front
3) Surge suppressor
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 5 8 f
4) Drilling pattern
3RT13 3 and 3RT15 3 contactors, size S2

b ) 3 ) For sizes S2 and S3:
1 6 0
1 0 7 3 1 5 5 1 1 0 4 5 a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V
a
1 ) a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V

2 ) 5 a = 17 mm with RC element and diode
assembly
b = S2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC
4 )
S IE M E N S S3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC
9 5
(right or left)
8 0
1 1 2

front, (1, 2 and 4-pole, also
3RH19 21-1FE22 solid-state compatible
version)
3) Surge suppressor
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 5 9 d 4) Drilling pattern
ing rail (15 mm deep) acc. to EN 50022 or,
in the case of size S3, 75 mm standard
mounting rail according to EN 50023
6) Allen screw 4 mm
b)
183
10 93 13 5 134
3)
a
60
1) 5
SIEMENS
4)
130
146
80
2)
5)
6)
NSB 00760b
3/180 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT16 capacitor contactors
3RT16 17 capacitor contactors, size S00

92
51
NSB0_01236c
5
57,5
83
36
16
50
Drilling
template
3
5 35
45 105

1 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 6 1 e
6 6
4 4
3 5
Drilling template
1 0 0
7 2
6 0
8 5
4 8
6 0
1 8
ø 5
5
4 5 1 3 0

170
116
22,5 22,5 90
51
60
150
167
130
104
124
130
18
38
Drilling template
NSB0_00763d
70 5
7
8
183
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/181

Contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
Size S00
45 5 118
5
Without series resistor:
3RH11 22-2KB40
-2KF40
3RT10 17-2KB41
50
60
28
-2KF41
-2KB42
NSB00764a
-2KF42
35 For dimensions see page 3/173 (size S00)
3
Size S01)
70 View from the left
45 5 148
Without series resistor:

35 x 60
86
47
3RT10 25-3KB40
-3KF40
3RT10 26-3KB40
-3KF40
NSB00765a For dimensions see page 3/174 (size S0)
Size S21)
55 5 162
45 x 95
110
47
NSB00766a
Size S31)
70 5 186
60 x 130
145
47
NSB00767a
1) Sizes S0 to S3: Contactor series-resistor must be connected by customer.

The series resistor is equipped with the necessary connecting leads.
3/182 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT10 2 -3X . 40-0LA2 contactors, size S0 3RT10 2 -1X . 40-0LA2 contactors, size S0
Cage Clamp terminal Screw terminal
61 6 1
45 7 4 4
4 5 7
77
63
7 7
3
119
6 3
1 1 6
NSB01384
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 5
3RT10 3. -3X . 40-0LA2 contactors, size S2

Cage Clamp terminal
64
45 10
87
74
142
NSB01386

Screw terminal
6 4
4 7
4 5 1 0
8 7
7 4
1 4 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 7
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/183


Cage Clamp terminal
69
45 104 15
3
91
176
NSB01388

Screw terminal
6 9
5 2
4 5 1 5
1 0 4
9 1
1 7 6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 9
3/184 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RH11 and 3RH14 contactor relays
3RH11 contactor relays, size S00

With screw terminals,
with surge suppressor and auxiliary switch block
106 Lateral distance to
45 99 grounded components = 6 mm
5,3 8,6 5 67 2)
5
2) Surge suppressor
3) Drilling pattern
57,5
50
3)
3
NSB00252a 1)
35
With Cage Clamp terminal,

with auxiliary switch block
5
25
44
47
37
60
4) 50
NSB01221 35
5 9 5 68
36 109
45
3RH14 latched contactor relays, size S00

2) 1)
SIEMENS SIEMENS
57,5
NSB00253
5,3 8,6 5 67
90 99
106
3RH11 coupling relays

3RH11 coupling relays, size S00
With screw terminals,
with surge suppressor
1) Surge suppressor
5
1) 2) Drilling pattern
SIEMENS
Deviating dimensions for coupling relays

57,5
50
2) with Cage Clamp terminals:

NSB00258
Height: 60 mm
5,3 8,6 5 67 35
45 99
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/185

3TH42/3TH43
AC operation DC operation
4,8 M3,5 4,8

M3,5 Contactor a 8 Contactor a
8
NSB0_00259a type type
3TH42 45 3TH42 45
78
60
3TH43 55 3TH43 55
78
60
NSB0_00260a
5 97 35 5 130
35
a
3
Accessories for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays

3TX7 402–3. varistors,
3TX7 402–3A noise suppression diode,
3TX7 402–3D diode assemblies 3TX7 402–3 RC elements
(for DC operation) for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays For 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays for mounting onto the coil terminal
For mounting onto the coil terminal
12 26
3,6
290
6 290
3,6
4
3,6
32
NSB00261
34
8
3,6
NSB00262
12 30
3TX4 180–0A ON-delay devices 3TX4 701 OFF-delay devices

For 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays For 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays
11 27 135
6,3
NSB00263
24
62,5
60
76
3,8
NSB00264
1)
M3,5 10,5 7 5,3

45 100 35
3TX4 090–0C interface 3TX4 090–0D interface

For mounting onto the contactor coil of 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays, For mounting onto the contactor coil of 3TH42/3TH43,
without surge suppression contactor relays with surge suppression
45 45
NSB00283
NSB00265
30,1
20
20
30,1
28
28
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail.
3/186 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories for 3RT1 contactors
3RT19 16-2E . . ., 3RT19 16-2F . . ., 3RT19 16-2G . . . 3RT19 16-2 . . . .

solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks solid-state time-delay blocks, ON-delay
for contactors, size S00 Size S00
For mounting onto the front of contactors
(the dimensions are also valid for time-delay blocks with an
OFF-delay)
38
38
3
NSB00256
NSB00254
5 9 127 45 92
45 143 105
3RT19 26-2E . . ., 3RT19 26-2F . . ., 3RT19 26-2G . . . 3RT19 26-2 . . . .

solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks solid-state time-delay blocks, ON-delay
for contactors, sizes S0 to S3 Sizes S0 to S3
For mounting onto the top of the contactors
(the dimensions are also valid for time-delay blocks with an
OFF-delay and for 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling links)
45 41
6 4 50
46
46
25
NSB00772
66
40
5 73
33
NSB00773
3RT19 16-2B.01 3RT19 26-2P..1

OFF-delay devices pneumatic delay block
for contactors, sizes S00 to S3 for contactors, size S0
For mounting onto the front of 3RT1.2 contactors
NSB01063
NSB0_01607
30
55 NC 67 NO
26
45
0,1
57,5
36
55
56 NC 68 NO
for 3RT1.2
ON DELAY
10 33 8
44 47
45 5 67,5
3RT19 16-4KA1 3RT19 26-4P

solder pin adapters screw adapters
Size S00 for contactor size S0
Mounted onto 3RT10 1. contactors with 1 auxiliary contact in the basic unit
55 45
NSB0_01405
NSB00770
A1
67,4
57,5
50
90
60
10x 2,0
A2
5
5
1,4 5,2 5,2

50 8,6 8,6
57,5 8,6 8,6 45
35 65
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/187

3RT19 16-4BB31 3RT19 16-4BB41

parallel connector parallel connector
Size S00 Size S00
3-pole, with terminal 4-pole, with terminal
NSB 01233
76
76
3
33
33
NSB01217 11 5 29 32
11
24 5 29 32 33
3RT19 26-4BB31 3RT19 36-4BB31

parallel connector parallel connector
Size S0 Size S2
3-pole, with terminal 3-pole, with terminal
96
140
18
NSB01216
14 23
60
32 67
44
45 84
25
NSB 01215
24 6 17
47 46 57
55
3RT19 46-4BB31 3RT19 26-3A.

parallel connector mechanical latching block
Size S3
3-pole, with through hole and cover for shock protection
NSB0_01431
48
120
50
234
22,5 84 7
329
56 3
NSB 01214
70 79 40
3/188 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT19 36-4EA2 3RT19 46-4EA2

terminal cover for box terminals terminal cover for box terminals
for size S2 for size S3
NSB01222a
123
85
3
160
124
NSB 01223a
55 66
94
106
70 69
108
124
3RT19 46-4EA1
terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection
for size S3
55
144
199
NSB 01224
70 75 59
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/189

3RT19 46-4F
auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
Size S3
Mounted on contactor
3
160
124
NSB01222
70 69
108
124
3RH19 11-1AA . ., 3RH19 11-1LA . . 3RH19 11-1BA . ., 3RH19 11-1MA . .

auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
Screw terminal Screw terminal
2-pole 2-pole
Cable entry from above Cable entry from below
5 9 25
38
NSB01202
38
NSB01203
36 38
36 38
3RH19 11-1F . ., 3RH19 11-1H . . 3RH19 11-. NF . .

auxiliary switch block according to EN 50012 and EN 50005 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005
Screw terminal Screw terminal1)
1- to 4-pole
5 9 25 5 9 25
16
16
38
38
NSB01204
NSB01205
36 38 36 38
3RH19 11-2F . . ., 3RH19 11-2H . . . 3RH19 11-1AA.., 3RH19 11-1BA..

auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 and EN 50012 auxiliary switch block, 1-pole
for size S00 Size S00
Cage Clamp terminal Cable entry from one side
1- to 4-pole
5 9 13,6
27,5
25
38
NSB00255
NSB01206
24 27
36 42
1) Deviating dimension for auxiliary switch block with Cage Clamp terminal:
Mounting depth 42 mm.
3/190 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RH19 21- . HA . ., 3RH19 21- . F . . . 3RH19 21- . C . . .

auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 and EN 50012 auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 and EN 50012
for sizes S0 to S12 for sizes S0 to S12
Screw and Cage Clamp terminals Screw and Cage Clamp terminal
4-pole 1-pole
5 11
38
18
38
18
NSB01207a
NSB01208
3
11 11 44
44 49
3RH19 21-1LA . . 3RH19 21-1MA . .

auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005
Screw terminal Screw terminal

2-pole 2-pole
5 11
38
38
NSB01209
NSB01210
44 49
44 49
3RH19 21-1D . . ., 3RH19 21-1J . . ., 3RH19 21-1E . . ., 3RH19 21-1K . . . 3RH19 21-2D . . ., 3RH19 21-2J . . ., 3RH19 21-2E . . ., 3RH19 21-2K . . .
auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable, auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable,
Screw terminal Cage Clamp terminal
2-pole 2-pole
72
80
NSB 01235
NSB 01234
10 70
10 71
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/191


3RT19 66-1PV3 3RT19 66-1PV4
main circuit damping module main circuit damping module
for 3RT12 vacuum contactors, sizes S10 and S12 for 3RT12 vacuum contactors, sizes S10 and S12
Connected to outgoing side of contactor (2-T1/4-T2/6-T3) Connected to outgoing side of contactor (2-T1/4-T2/6-T3)
using approx. 350 mm long, molded cable using approx. 350 mm long, molded cable
NSB01362a
76
76
NSB01360a
3
45 7 99 7
100 102,5
62,5
60
62,5
60
5,3
35 5
90
3RT19 .6-4EA1 3RT19 .6-4EA2

terminal cover for bar connection terminal cover for box terminals
Sizes S6 to S12 Sizes S6 to S12
For mounting onto the contactor enclosure For mounting onto box terminal
C
C
D
D
B
B
NSB01166a
A E F
NSB01165a
A E F
A B C D E F A B C D E F
S6 119 324 107 241 91 52 S6 119 215 27 190 91 52
S10 145 385 128 289 106 66 S10 145 265 30 235 106 66
S12 145 399 128 303 124 66 S12 145 279 30 249 124 66
3RT19 .6-4BA31
links for paralleling
Sizes S6 to S12
B
NSB01167a
A C 5
A B «C
S6 91 199 10.5
S10 121 244 12.5
S12 121 258 12.5
3/192 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories for 3RA1 contactor assemblies

3RA19 54-2A
mechanical interlock
Sizes S6 to S12
10
3
NSB01173
3RA19.2-2A base plates for reversing contactor assemblies

C
A E 18
D
B
NSB01172a
A B C D E
S6 190 205 250 229 9
S10 240 249 300 275 11
S12 280 249 330 275 11
3RA19.2-2E, 3RA19.2-2F base plates for wye-delta assemblies

C
A E 18
D
B
NSB01176a
A B C D E
S6-S6-S3 316 205 376 229 9
S6-S6-S6 343 205 403 229 9
S10-S10-S6 393 250 453 275 11
S10-S10-S10 423 250 483 275 11
S12-S12-S10 450 250 510 275 11
S12-S12-S12 465 250 525 275 11
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/193


Size S00
NSB00774
5
67
50
5 8,6 35 7,5
90 5 51
3
67
Size S0
With 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock With mechanical interlock 3RA19 24-1A
Laterally mountable On front
5
NSB00776
29
36
60
86
NSB00775
45 16
8 14 10 28 7,5
40 5 39 90 44
100 61
86
DC 95
Size S2
5
NSB00777
120
95
10
13
10 17,5 50 8
120 5 36
52
110
DC 125
Size S3
NSB00778
5
157
130
12
10
12 22 65 8
150 5 46
85
134
DC147
3/194 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Size S6
250 187
190 91 52
64
18
132
3
229
205
364
205
173
138
236
107
67
NSB 01230
Size S10
306 222
300 202
240 106 66
21 94
465
213
249
275
168
290
59
100
NSB 01231
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/195

Size S12
228
126 66
21 110
3
213
182
481
249
275
304
65
109
NSB 01232
280
330
3/196 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Sizes S00 – S00 – S00
K4
K3 K2 71
NSB00779
135 5 67
3
143
(AC+DC)
Sizes S0 – S0 – S0
88
K1 K3 K2
K4
158 5 130 (AC)

NSB00780
140 (DC)
140
125
K2
K1 K3 K4
7 10
150 169 (AC)
178 184 (DC)
NSB00781
125
140
K1 K3 K2 K4
7 10
150 169 (AC)
198 184 (DC)
NSB00782
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/197

3
165
180
K1 K3 K2 K4
7
10
150 194 (AC)
218 207 (DC)
NSB00783
3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 ..-0.. contactors 3TG10 ..-1.. contactors 3TG10 contactors
With screw terminals With tab connectors With 3UA7 overload relay
36 36 36
18 5 55 18 5 56
NSB00787
42,5
42,5
35 1)
35 1)
52
62
62
52
90
100
48
NSB00785 NSB00786
3,5x4,7 3,5x4,7 M3
45 62 6
3RT19 16-4BB41 parallel connections, 4-pole, with connection terminal for 3TG10 contactors
NSB00788
45
M4
The parallel connections can be reduced by one pole.

1) Can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail.
3/198 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3TF68 vacuum contactors Detail

A = Contact erosion indicator for vacuum interrupter contacts
230 237 A
70 100 NSB00795
M10 30 28
Ø12
210
232
276
245
300
3
M3,5
A
150 1)
NSB00794
178
3TF69 vacuum contactors Detail

A = Contact erosion indicator for vacuum interrupter contacts
230 237 A
70 100 NSB00793
M12 40 28
2,5
9,2 12
232
295
210
240
259
255
320
M3,5
A
NSB00792a
70 1)
150 220
1) With box terminals for laminated copper bars (accessories).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/199

Accessories for 3T contactors
3TX7 462-3. varistors 3TX7 462-3., 3TX7 522-3., 3TX7 090-0D coupling relay
3TX7 572-3. For laterally snapping onto
RC elements and varistors contactors
70 4,2 4,2
NSB00806
200
230
35
4,2
NSB00808
13 21
95
95
NSB00266
3
21 52
22 52
3TX7 box terminals for laminated copper bars

Box terminals with cover, mounted to contactor
NSB00812
For contactor Box terminal a b c

type
3TF68 3TX7 570-1. 182 178 300
3TF69 3TX7 690-1F 200 219 320
c
a b
3TX7 686-0A and 3TX7 696-0A extended terminal covers

For 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors, size 14,
mountable to free screw end of the two outer conducting paths
21
For contactor Terminal covers
type a b c
3TF68 3TX7 686-0A 245 M10 104
3TF69 3TX7 696-0A 255 M12 99
a
b
c
NSB00815
230 70
3TX7 680-0D parallel connection 3TX7 680-0E cover plate

For 3TF68 contactors For 3TX7 680-0D parallel connection for 3TF68 contactor
NSB00817a 200
5
19
30
64
11
170
NSB00819
3/200 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TB5 contactors
3TB50 and 3TB52 contactors 3TB54 and 3TB56 contactors

Sizes 6 and 8 Sizes 10 and 12
3 1)
1)
a1 c3 3 a c
1 3
a3 7 f4 a3 c2
d2 d1 c2
52
M3,5 g2
M3,5 M10
b3
b1
e3
180
200
e3
3
NSB00822
NSB00823
48 25 10,5 f
4
Type a1 a3 b1 b3 c2 c3 d1 d2 e3 f4 g2 Type a1 a3 c2 c3 e3 f4
3TB50 120 100 150 130 23 198 37 15 133 137.5 M6 3TB54 145 120 30.5 264 168 188
3TB52 135 110 180 160 28 217 42 20 154 147 M8 3TB56 160 130 39 282 178 200
3TX6 . . 6-3B terminal covers

l
NSB00824
b h
For contactor
Size Type b h l
6 3TB50 27 33 58
8 3TB52 34 44 75
10 up to 12 3TB54 to 3TB56 38 56 95
1) Minimum clearance from insulated components 3 mm.

Minimum clearance from grounded components 10 mm.
3TD68, 3TE68 contactor assemblies

3TD68 contactor assemblies
400
NSB00827a
280
310
470
13,5
257 25
520 278
3TE68 contactor assemblies

550
NSB00828a
295
325
470
13,5
231 196 25
665 278
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/201

3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors
3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors e M10 grounding screw for 3TK14 to 3TK17

The scope of supply includes screws and rubber buffers.
a
b p e
2
1
k
b 2 p 1 t1
c t
3
1
1
1
h
c
h
c
M 4
fo r c
A N S B 0 0 8 3 3
M 6 c 2
fo r M 6 f g d
k 1
Contactor a b1 b2 c c1 c21) c22) d3) e min. f g h h1 k1 k24) p p1 t t1

Type
3TK10 186 165 136 120 140 166 187 6.6 40 41 15 156 156 7.5 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
3TK11 186 165 136 120 140 168 187 11 40 42 20 156 172 10 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
3TK12 225 201 176 160 140 202 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
3TK13 225 201 176 160 140 202 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
3TK14 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 235) 6
3TK15 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 25 223 273 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 235) 6
3TK17 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 40 223 273 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 235) 6
1) Clearance when 2 contactors, each with one auxiliary switch block 3) Nuts, bolts, screws and washers are supplied.
opposite, are mounted. 4) Minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil.
2) Clearance when 2 contactors, each with two auxiliary switch blocks 5) Damping elements are supplied.
opposite, are mounted.
3/202 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories for 3TK1 contactors
3TK19 4. terminal cover
NSB00835
Contactor Terminal h2 p2 for k2 for b4
Type covers I II III I II III
3TK10, 3TK11 3TK19 40-0A 372 153 178 203 47 72 97 168
3TK12, 3TK13 3TK19 42-0A 399 158 183 208 47 72 97 202
3TK14, 3TK15 3TK19 44-0A 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
3TK17 3TK19 46-0A 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
3
h2
II
b4 k2
p2
3TK19 20 and 3TK19 22 locking devices

For mechanical locking of two identical 3TK10 to 3TK13 contactors,
mounted side by side on the mounting plate
NSB00836
Contactor Locking
Type device c2 c3 c4
3TK10, 3TK11 3TK19 20-0A 120 140 65
3TK12, 3TK13 3TK19 22-0A 160 140 63.5
c3
M6
c2 c4 c2
3TK19 24 locking device

For mechanical locking of two identical 3TK14, 3TK15 or 3TK17
contactors,
mounted side by side on the mounting plate
5 8 0 2 7 6
5 5 0 1 9 0
2 4 0 7 3
2 6 5
2 9 5
N S B 0 0 8 3 7
B a s e p la te
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/203

3TC4 and TC5 contactors
3TC44 contactors 3TC48 contactors

Size 2, AC and DC operation Size 4, AC and DC operation
70 b t 100 b t
50 Ø 4,8 a 60 a
56,5
130
110
75
85
160
NSB00839
M3,5
3
NSB00838
Ø 5,8 c
M5 M3,5 8 4
15 M6
7,5
50
80
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V),
20 mm (750 V)
from grounded components: 30 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 35 mm (600 V),
55 mm (750 V)
a b a b c
DC operation 109 141 DC operation 112 180 21.5
AC operation 68 100 AC operation 86 154 23.5

Size 8, AC and DC operation Size 12, AC and DC operation
135 b t 160 b t
110 a 130 a
79 27 96 1) 39 1)
1)
52
80
NSB00840
179,5
160
89
215
180
200
M3,5
256
Ø 6,8
M3,5
Ø10,5
25 M10
12,5
36,5 NSB00841
71
25 M10
12,5
41,5
85
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 20 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 25 mm (600 V and 750 V)
from grounded components: 70 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 80 mm (600 V),
100 mm (750 V)
a b a b
DC operation 147 232 DC operation 200 310
AC operation 115 200 AC operation 141 251
1) DC operation only.
3/204 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TC7 contactors

Size 12, DC and AC operation Size 12, DC and AC operation
83 80 288
NSB00842
14
14 52 M10 100 Ø 12 160

16,5 132
b
Ø9
16
b
28
M10
3
352
280
366
330
42
NSB00843
14
d
14
a 14 4 75 25
d
c 33 M3,5 78
272 a M10 50 M3,5 25
c 290 80
Dimensions Minimum clearance from Dimensions Minimum clearance from

insulated grounded insulated grounded
components components components components
a 20 50 a 20 50
b 10 25 b 10 25
c 180 (clearance for removing arc chute) c 180 (clearance for removing arc chute)
d Coil connection
3TC78 14-0E: 8 mm
3TC78 14-1C: 16 mm
3TX2 746-2. varistors

For 3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors
70
20
NSB00847
26 10
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/205

Contactors with extended tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
3TC44 17-0L contactors, size 2, DC operation

82
70 141 t Series
50 109 resistor
8
30
75
85
3
NSB00848 4
Ø 4,8 M5 M3,5
Varistor
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V and 750 V)
from grounded components:30 mm (600 V and 750 V)
Additional space requirements for mounting resistors and varistors

For 3TB50 to 3TB56, 3TC48 to 3TC56 contactors
a Contactor c For contactor Additional space requirements
for series resistor for varistor
c a b1 b2*)
3TB50 30 13 70 110
3TB52, 3TB54, 3TB56 -- 15 82 120
3TC48 30 13 70 110
3TC52, 3TC56 -- 15 82 120
*) terminal compartment
b1
b2
NSB00850
Mounted Space for

varistor mounting a resistor
Separately mounted series resistor

For contactor Number of
16
85 series resistors
5,5
NSB00851
3TB52, 3TC52 1
3TB54, 3TB56 2
3TC56 2
3/206 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TF2 contactors for switching motors, width 45 mm, size S00
3TF20, 3TF28 $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor 3TF20, 3TF22, 3TF28, 3TF29 $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor
With 1 auxiliary contact, % Additional module With 2 to 5 auxiliary contacts, % Additional module
with screw terminals, (on overload relay) with screw terminals, (on overload relay)
AC and DC operation, AC and DC operation, & Auxiliary switch block
without or with overload relay (3UA7) without or with overload relay
3 8 3 8
1 1
4 ,4
4 ,4
3 5 1 1 3 5 1 1 3
M 3 M 3
3 1
1 8
2 4
2 4
4 8
4 0
1 8
4 8
4 0
4 5
4 5
3
9 0
2 5 2 5
9 0
2 8
4 8
4 8
9 6
9 6
M 3 2 M 3 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 8 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 9
1 0
1 0
4 5 5 6 3 6 4 5 5 6 3 6
7
3TF20 3TF20
With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm,
for snap-on and screw fixing, for screw fixing (diagonal),
AC and DC operation AC and DC operation
5 ,7 x 4 ,5 3 ,5 3 ,5 A 6 ,3 x 0 ,8 D IN 4 6 2 4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 4
1 7 ,5
3 6
1 5
4 0
4 8
4 5 8
5 0 6 0 8 ,3 8 ,6 8 ,1
3 6 ,5 5 8 8 ,6 8 ,6
4 5 6 4 ,5
Grid size for

flat connectors
3TF20 3TX4 491-2A plug-in base
With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards
for screw fixing (diagonal),
AC and DC operation
Solder pin 49,8 Solder pin
3,5 0,8 x 1,2 21,7 0,32 x 1,0 Unassigned
NSB0_01541
13,5 connections
11,4 1)
18,5 1,4
22,6
36
15
1,8
NSB0_01542
12,4
42,8
36,8
39,8
17,5
45 59 4 1,3 1
50 8,3 8,6 8,1
1)
8,6 8,6
NSB0_01543
5,8
Hole pattern for 26,2 3,3

solder pin connections 2,4 3,2 8,6 8,6 4,8
for tapping for cheesehead 8,6 7,8
screw ST2.9 screw M3
Hole pattern for
plug-in base
3TX4 490 OFF-delay device
3 8
3 5 1 1
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 5
4 8
4 0
4 2
M 3
4 5 5 6 3
1) Holes required only for integrated surge suppression in the plug-in base.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/207

3TK20 contactors, width 45 mm, size S00
3TK20 3TK20
With screw terminals, With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm,
for snap-on and screw fixing, for snap-on and screw fixing,
M 3 5 ,7 x 4 ,5 5 ,7 x 4 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9
4 0
4 8
4 0
4 8
3
3 6 ,5 5 8
3 6 ,5 5 6 3
4 5 6 4 ,5
4 5
3TK20 3TK20
With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards,
for screw fixing (diagonal), for screw fixing (diagonal),
3 ,5 3 ,5 A 6 ,3 x 0 ,8 D IN 4 6 2 4 4 3,5 Solder pin 0.8 x 1.2
12,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 0 NSB0_01560
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 4
22,6
1 7 ,5
15
36
3 6
1 5
1,8
4 5 8 45 55,5 4
5 0 6 0 8 ,3 8 ,6 8 ,1 8,3 8,6 8,1
50
8 ,6 8 ,6 8,6 8,6
Grid size Hole pattern

for flat connectors for solder pin connections
3TX4 491-2A plug-in base

With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards,
49,8 Solder pin
21,7 0,32 x 1,0 Unassigned
13,5 connections
11,4 18,5 1)
1,4
NSB0_01542
42,8
36,8
39,8
17,5
1,3 1
1)
NSB0_01543
5,8
2,4 3,2 26,2 3,3

8,6 8,6 4,8
Hole pattern
for plug-in base
3/208 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TH2 contactor relays, width 45 mm, size S00
3TH20 with 4 contacts $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor 3TH20 with 6 and 8 contacts, $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor
With screw terminals, 3TH22 with 8 contacts % Auxiliary switch block
AC and DC operation With screw terminals,
AC and DC operation
3 7 ,5 3 7 ,5
3 5 1 1 1 3 5 1 1 2 1
4 ,4
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 4 N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 5
3 1
1 8
2 4
4 8
4 0
4 5
4 8
4 0
4 5
1 8
2 4
3
4 5 M 3 5 6 3 2 5 4 5 M 3 5 6 3 2 8 2 5
3TH20 with 4 contacts $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor 3TH20 with 6 and 8 contacts, $ 3TX4 490 surge suppressor
AC and DC operation 3TH22 with 8 contacts % Auxiliary switch block
AC and DC operation
3 7 ,5 3 7 ,5
3 5 1 1 2 1
4 ,4
3 5 1 1 1
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 7
4 5
4 8
4 0
2 4
3 3
1 8
1 8
4 8
4 0
4 5
2 4
4 5 5 6 3 2 5 4 5 5 6 3 2 8 2 5
3TH20 3TH20
With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards
for snap-on and screw fixing, for screw fixing (diagonal),
5 ,7 x 4 ,5 Solder pin
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9 3,5 0,8 x 1,2 NSB0_01541
22,6
4 0
4 8
36
15
1,8
12,4
3 6 ,5 5 8 45 59 4
50 8,3 8,6 8,1
4 5 6 4 ,5
8,6 8,6
Hole pattern
for solder pin connections
3TX4 491-2A plug-in base 3TX4 490 OFF-delay device

With solder pin connectors for printed circuit boards
49,8 Solder pin
21,7 0,32 x 1,0 Unassigned
13,5 connections 3 8
3 5 1 1
4 ,4
11,4 18,5 1)
1,4 N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 5
NSB0_01542
42,8
36,8
39,8
17,5
1,3 1
4 8
4 0
4 2
1)
M 3
NSB0_01543
5,8
2,4 3,2 26,2 3,3 4 5 5 6 3

8,6 8,6 4,8
Hole pattern for
plug-in base
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/209

3TH27 latched contactor relays, width 90 mm, size S00
3TH27 with 4 contacts $ Surge suppressor

With screw terminals, 3TX4 490
for screw and snap-on mounting,
AC and DC operation
8 1
5 ,8 1 1 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 6
4 8
4 0
4 5
1 8
2 4
4 ,5
3
M 3
9 0 5 6 3 2 5
Coupling Relays in Industrial Enclosure
3RS18
5 86
36
110
62
90
62
74
62
82
C
A
B
100
NSB0_01625
15 15 15
22,5 22,5 22,5
A B C
3RS18 00-.A 3RS18 00-.B 3RS18 00-.H
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded terminal 84 94 103
Screw terminal 83 92 102
3/210 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Coupling relays with narrow type of construction
3TX7 002, 3TX7 003 coupling links in modular terminal design
3TX7 00 .-1AB . ., 3TX7 002-3AB00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00, 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
3TX7 00 .-2A . . ., 3TX7 002-4A . . . 3TX7 00 .-1BF00, 3TX7 002-1FB02
3TX7 002-3AB01 3TX7 002-2BF02
NSB00270
NSB00284
NSB00268
NSB00269
60
M3 M3 M3 M3
11,5 12,5 17,5 22,5 62
3
3TX7 004, 3TX7 005 coupling links in two-tier design
3TX7 00 .-1MB00, 3TX7 00 .-1AB10, 3TX7 00 .-1HB00 3TX7 00 .-1GB00
3TX7 00 .-1MF00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00, relay coupling links relay coupling links
3TX7 00 .-1L . 0 ., 3TX7 00 .-1BB10,
3TX7 00 .-2M . . . 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
relay coupling links 3TX7 00 .-1BF05
relay coupling links
3TX7 00 .-3AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC04,

3TX7 00 .-4AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC14,
3TX7 00 .-3PB . ., 3TX7 00 .-3AC03
3TX7 00 .-3PG74, semiconductor coupling links
3TX7 00 .-3RB43
semiconductor coupling links
NSB00274c
79 1)
80 2)
NSB00271
NSB00273
NSB00272
6,2 12,5 17,5

22,5 84
3TX7 014, 3TX7 015 3TX7 014-7CE00

relay couplers with plug-in design galvanic isolation plate
3 0 °
8 9 ,2
8 9 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 2 8
1 8 6 ,6 8
9 4 ,1 8
6 ,2 9 2
3TX7 014-7AA00 3TX7 014-7B.0.

connecting comb, 16-pole individual relay module
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 1
1 2 ,5
1 4 ,5
3 ,2 3 ,0 3
9 6 ,2
6 ,2
2 7 ,8 5
1 0 0
1) Dimensions for 3TX7 004 coupling links (screw terminals).

2) Dimensions for 3TX7 005 coupling links (spring-loaded terminals).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/211


LZX plug-in relays
LZX:RT3/RT4 complete unit LZX:RT78625 plug-in base LZX:RT78626 plug-in base
For print relays With safe isolation for print relays
NSB00278
NSB0_00275b NSB00277
Hold clip
75,5
75,5
75,5
Print relay
LED module
3
15,5 4,5 22,2 15,5 4,5 22,2

60
43 61
LZX:RT3/RT4 print relay

NSB00276
15,7
2,6 12,7
3,8
29
LZX:PT270 industrial relay LZX:PT370 industrial relay LZX:PT570 industrial relay

NSB01012
NSB00279
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 2 4
29
29
2 9
6
6
6
28 2,2 2 8 2 ,2 28 2,2
22,5 2 2 ,5 22,5
LZX:PT78704 plug-in base

For industrial relays
(side view: LZX:PT complete unit)
Relay
Hold clip
75
LED
module
NSB00280
22,5 4,5 22,2

27 42,5
73,1
LZX:MT32 industrial relay LZX:MT78750 plug-in base

For industrial relays
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 8 2 b
35,5
NSB00281
35,5 57
7 0
69
3 2 ,5
3 0 2 6
3 8
3/212 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Schematics
Internal circuit diagrams for 3RT1 contactors and accessories (valid for screw and Cage Clamp terminals)
Size S00 Size S0 to S12

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 Terminal designations according to EN 50012
3RT10 1 contactors 3RT10 2 to 3RT10 7, 3RT12, 3RT14 contactors
1 NO 1 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 4 a
A 1 (+ )
3
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
3RT10 1 contactors (with 1 NO) 3RT10 2 to 3RT10 7, 3RT14 contactors

with 3RH19 11-.H... auxiliary switch blocks on the front . with front-mounted 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA22 auxiliary switch block
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 11E Ident. No.: 22E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 7 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 5 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3RT1. 5, 3RT1. 6, 3RT1. 7 contactors (sizes S6, S10, S12)

with lateral 2-pole 3RH19 21-1DA11 auxiliary switch blocks
2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
22E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 7 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 6 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA../- .XA.. auxiliary switch blocks,

for snapping onto the front1)
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 23E Ident. No.: 31 22 22 13
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 5 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 8 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 4 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2
First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . DA11,

3RH19 21-2DE11 auxiliary switch block (solid-state compatible)
3 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
32E left right
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 9 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 2 2 1 4 3 2 4 4
Size S0 to S3 Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . JA11,

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 3RH19 21-2JE11 auxiliary switch block (solid-state compatible)
(only for sizes S3 to S12)
3RT10 . . - . X . 40-0LA2 contactors 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Varistor built-in left right
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 6 1 5 3 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 6 a
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 6 2 5 4 7 2 8 4
Contactors with 4 main contacts, size S00 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S0 to S3
3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 7 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 9 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
NSB00500
NSB00500
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4 A2( ) 2 R2 R4 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4 A2( ) 2 R2 R4 4
(3RH19 11 auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 can be (3RH19 21 auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 can be
snapped on) snapped on)
Surge suppressors for sizes S00 to S3
(coded plug-in direction; Exception: for 3RT19 16-1T... diode assembly, designation with +/–)
Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC elements Diode with LED Varistor with LED
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
1) Not for 3RT12 vacuum contactors.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/213

Accessories for size S00 contactors and contactor relays

3RH19 11-. F... auxiliary switch blocks and 3RH19 11-.NF.. solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks,
for snapping onto the front
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11 U
53 63 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 57 65
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00510
NSB00507
54 64 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 58 66
3
With make-before-break
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22 U 11/11 U
53 63 73 83 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 57 67 75 85 5 3 6 1 7 5 8 7
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 5 a
NSB00514
NSB00511
54 64 74 84 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 58 68 76 86 5 4 6 2 7 6 8 8
With make-before-break 1 NO + 1 NC standard
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
3RH19 11-1AA.. and 3RH19 11-1BA.. auxiliary switch 3RH19 11-1LA.. and 3RH19 11-1MA.. auxiliary switch Internal wiring
blocks, for snapping onto the front, blocks, for snapping onto the front,
cable entry from above or below cable entry from above or below
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC
53 5 1 53 63 5 3 6 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 7 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
NSB00516
NSB00507
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 0 a
54 5 2 54 64 5 4 6 2
5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2
Example of 1 NO + 1 NC,
cable entry
from below

Terminal designations according to DIN 46199 Part 5
3RT19 16-2E.../2F.../2G... solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
ON-delay OFF-delay Wye-delta function
A1 27 35 A1 27 35 A1 27 37
NSB00521
NSB00522
NSB00523
A2 28 36 A2 28 36 A2 28 38
(Integrated varistors not shown)
Accessories for size S0 to S12 contactors

3RH19 21-.F... auxiliary switch blocks, 4-pole,
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 04 22 U
13 23 33 43 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 1 1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 17 27 35 45
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 7 a
NSB00528
NSB00524
14 24 34 44 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 2 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 18 28 36 46
3RH19 21-. CA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole, 3RH19 21-1CD.. auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole
for snapping onto the front1) with make-before-break, for snapping onto the front1)
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
.3 .1 .7 .5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 0 a
NSB00532
NSB00531
NSB00529
.4 .2 .8 .6
(terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012)
3/214 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


3RH19 21-1LA.. and 3RH19 21-1MA.. auxiliary switch block, 2-pole, Internal wiring
cable entry from above or below
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 6 a
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2
13 23 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 5 a
NSB00533
Example of 1 NO + 1 NC,
cable entry
3
14 24 1 4 2 2 1 2 2 2
from below
3RH19 21- . FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,

2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22
1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 7 a
1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2
3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
53 63 5 1 6 3 5 1 6 1 73 83 7 1 8 3 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00541
NSB00507
54 64 5 2 6 4 5 2 6 2 74 84 7 2 8 4 7 2 8 2
3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
(only for sizes S3 to S12) (only for sizes S3 to S12)
153 163 1 5 1 1 6 3 1 5 1 1 6 1 173 183 1 7 1 1 8 3 1 7 1 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 8 a
NSB00544
NSB00547
154 164 1 5 2 1 6 4 1 5 2 1 6 2 174 184 1 7 2 1 8 4 1 7 2 1 8 2

1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -7
NSB00550
NSB00551
NSB00552
A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -8
3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling relay with surge suppression

Terminal diagram Connection example
L1 B1+ B2- N L1 L+ L- N
1
1 L1 B1+ B2- N
U A1 A2
2
A1
2
A2 NSB00184
NSB00182
$ Interface $ Interface
% Contactor % Contactor
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/215

Schematics for accessories for sizes S00 to S3
3RT19 16-2BK01, 110 V UC OFF-delay devices 3RT19 16-2BE01, 24 V DC OFF-delay devices

3RT19 16-2BL01, 230 V UC
L1 AC
NSB01135a
NSB01134
A3 A4 A5 B1 Z+ Z+
~ A3 A4 A5 B1 Z+ ~ Z+
3
= K1 = K1
NSB01136a
A2- A1+ C+ Z- A2- A1+ C+ Z-
NSB01178
C C
A2- A1+ C+ Z- L- A2- A1+ C+ Z-
N/L- Internal circuit diagram L+ DC 24 V Internal circuit diagram

L+ DC Option t v >> Option t v >>
3RT19 16-2BK01, 110 V UC 3RT19 16-2BE01, 24 V DC

110 V UC A1 A3 A4 A5 B1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) > 24 V DC A1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) >
S00 DC L+ L– 130 S00 L+ L– 3RT1. 1.-.BB4. 250
● ● 3RH1. . .-.BB4.
50 Hz L1 N 3RT1. 1.-.BF4. 130 S0 L+ L– 3RT1. 2.-.BB4. 150
● ● 3RH1. . .-.BF4. L+ L–
S2 3RT1. 3.-.BB4. 90
60 Hz L1 N 130 S3 L+ L– 3RT1. 4.-.BB4. 70
S0 DC L+ L– 100
● ●
50 Hz L1 N 100
● ● ●
3RT1. 2.-.BF4.
60 Hz L1 N 100
● ●
3RT19 16-2BL01, 230 V UC

230 V UC A1 A3 A4 A5 B1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) >
S00 DC L+ L– 600
● ● 3RT1. 1.-.BM4.
N 3RT1. 1.-.BP4.
50 Hz L1 600
3RH1. . .-.BM4.
60 Hz L1 N 3RH1. . .-.BP4. 600
● ●
S0 DC L+ L– 400
● ●
L1 3RT1. 2.-.BM4.
50 Hz N 400
3RT1. 2.-.BP4.
60 Hz L1 N 400
● ●
Operationafter OFF-delay Operation before OFF-delay

(contactor only switches off with delay in case of voltage failure) (contactor always switches off with delay)
L 1 /L + L 1 /L + A C 5 0 H z 2 3 0 V L 1 /L + L 1 A C 5 0 H z 2 3 0 V
S 0 S 0
S 1 K S 1 K S 1
S 1 K K
S 0 S 0
A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 + A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 + A 4 A 1 + A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 +
A 3 A 5 B 1 Z +
3 R T 1 9 1 6 -2 B L 0 1 3 R T 1 .2 .-1 B P 4 . 3 R T 1 9 1 6 -2 B L 0 1 3 R T 1 .1 .
-1 B P 4 .
3 R T 1 9 1 6 -..... 3 R T 1 . ..-.B ... 3 R T 1 9 1 6 -..... 3 R T 1 . ..-.B ...
3 R T 1 .2 .-1 B M 4 . o ff-d e la y 3 R T 1 .1 . -1 B M 4 .
o ff-d e la y 3 R H 1 1 ..-.B ... o ff-d e la y o ff-d e la y 3 R H 1 1 ..-.B ...
K c o n ta c to r d e v ic e s 3 R H 1 1 .. -1 B P 4 0
d e v ic e K c o n ta c to r d e v ic e d e v ic e K c o n ta c to r 3 R H 1 1 .. -1 B M 4 0
K c o n ta c to r
A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 - A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 -
A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 -
A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 -
N /L -
N /L - N /L - N
N S B 0 1 1 3 7 b N S B 0 1 1 3 8 b N S B 0 1 1 4 0 d
N S B 0 1 1 3 9 c
Schematic circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram: Schematic circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram:
Contactor size S0, Contactor size S00,
DC operation, at AC 50 Hz 230 V DC operation, at AC 50 Hz 230 V
3/216 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Circuit diagrams for accessories for sizes S00 to S3
Accessories for size S00 to S3 contactors and contactor relays 3RT16 capacitor contactors
Solid-state time-delay blocks Size S00 Sizes S0 and S3
(note planning aids on Page 3/163!) L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3
3RT19 16-2C... 3RT19 16-2D...
ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage) F 0 F 0
Size S00 Size S00
L1/L+ L1/L+
NSB00555
NSB00554
S1 S1
1 3 5 1 4 3
1 /L 1
5 /L 3
3 /L 2
1 /L 1
3 /L 2
5 /L 3
3
A 1 A 1
A1
1 A1 B1 A 2 A 2
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
1 1 4 5 2 4 4
2 A2
N/L A2 N/L 2
3RT19 26-2C... 3RT19 26-2D...

ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage)
Sizes S0 to S3 Sizes S0 to S3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 2 c
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 5 8 b
L1/L+ L1/L+
C 1 C 1
NSB00556
NSB00557
A2 can be connected S1 A2 must only be con-

A1 A2 to N(L–) using either A1 B1 A2 nected to N(L–) from
1 the contactor or the the timing relay.
A1 A2 1
timing relay. x do not connect
2 A1 A2
- - - optionally
A1 A2 connect 2 $ Timing relay block
A1 A2 % Contactor
N/L N/L
Internal circuit diagrams for accessories for sizes S00 to S3
Contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 Us

Terminal designations Terminal designations Terminal designations
according to EN 50012 according to EN 50011 according to EN 50012
3RT10 17-2K.42-0LA0 contactors 3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 contactor relays 3RT10 2.-, 3RT10 3.-,
3RT10 4.-3K.44-0LA0 contactors
L + L+
L-
With front-mounted 4-pole 3RH19 21-1HA22
L -
S 1 S1 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22
(+ )
E1+ 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
E 1 +
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 1 b
A 1
R v RV K1
K 1 A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 13 23 31 Circuit diagram of the series resistor wiring

K 1 K1
(-)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 2 c A 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 5 9 b
A 2
NSB00560a
A 2 - A2-
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 14 24 32
R v
Series resistor RV 2 NO + 1 NC unassigned A 1
Plugged on, Series resistor RV 2 1 A 2
NC contact prewired. Plugged on, 2 2
(+ ) (-)
NC contact prewired.
The series resistor is supplied separately packed.
3RT10 17-2K.41/2K.42 contactor 3RH11 22-2K.40 contactor relay The 21/22 NC contact is necessary to wire the
Varistor integrated Varistor integrated series resistor.
Size S00 Size S00
3RT10 25-3K.40 contactor
1 NO 2 NO + 2 NC Varistor integrated
Ident. No.: 10E 22E Size S0
A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 8 b
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
1 NC (two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be

01E snapped on)
A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 5 a
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/217

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories (valid for screw and Cage Clamp terminals)

3RT10 1 contactors, 3RT10 1 coupling relays 3RT10 2, 3RT 10 3, 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3,
3RT10 17-2K.4. contactors with extended operating range 3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors, 3RT10 4 contactors
3RT10 2 coupling relays with front-mounted
3RT10 25-3K.40 contactors with 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA22
extended operating range auxiliary switch block
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01 Ident. No.: 22 E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 2 1 A 1 A1 A2 A1 A2
3
1 3 5 1 3 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 13 21 31 43
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
NSB00563
1. 2. 3. 4. 14 22 32 44
2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 2 2 A 2
NSB00568
NSB00565
2 4 6 2 4 6
A1 A2 A1 A2
3RT10 1 contactors (with 1 NO contact) 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3, 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3,

with front-mounted 3RH19 11-. H . . . 3RT10 4 contactors 3RT10 4 contactors
auxiliary switch blocks with front-mountable with front-mountable
4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA31 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA13
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 3 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 11E 22E Ident. No.: 31 E 13 E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2
1 3 5 1 3 5
21 21 31 43
13 21 33 43 13 21 31 41
22 22 32 44
NSB00566
NSB00567
14 22 32 44 14 22 32 42
2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 14 A2
NSB01349
NSB01348
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 2 NC A1 A2 A1 A2
Ident. No.: 23E 32E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 First laterally mountable Second laterally mountable

3RH19 21- . DA111) 3RH19 21- . JA111)
21 31 41 53 21 31 43 53 auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
can be mounted on the can be mounted on the left or
left or right right (only for sizes S3 to S12)
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
22 32 42 54 22 32 44 54 Left Right Left Right
NSB00570
NSB00569
2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 14 A2
32 72 62
21 61 71
22
31
Size S0 to S3
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 13
44
43
14
53
84
83
54
3RT10 . . - . X . 40-0LA2 contactors 43 83 53

14 54 84
13
with solid-state control unit 44
A1 A2
NSB00571
NSB00573
NSB00574
NSB00572
31 71 61
22 62 72
21
32
1 3 5
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
2 4 6
NSB01390
1) Note location identifier. Can only be used if no 4-pole auxiliary switch block
is snapped onto the front.
3/218 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Sizes S6 to S12
3RT1 .5, 3RT1 .6, 3RT1 .7 contactors
• With conventional operating • With solid-state operating • With solid-state operating • With solid-state operating
mechanism mechanism mechanism mechanism
(3RT1. ..-.A...) (3RT1. ..-.N...) (3RT1. ..-.P...) (3RT1. ..-.Q...)
With laterally mountable With laterally mountable With laterally mountable With laterally mountable
3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11
(for 2 NO + 2 NC, included in the (for 2 NO + 2 NC, included in the (for 1 NO + 1 NC, included in the (for 1 NO + 1 NC, included in the
contactors) contactors) contactors) contactors)
3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11
3
(can be extended to 4 NO + 4 NC) (can be extended to 4 NO + 4 NC) (can be extended to 2 NO + 2 NC) (can be extended to 2 NO + 2 NC)
auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks
2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO + 2 NC
SPS
DC 24 V
A1 A2 A1 A2
NSB0_01154a
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 A2 A1 A2
61 21 31 71 61 21 31 71 61 21 61 21 H1
H2
53 13 43 83 53 13 43 83 53 13 H1 53 13 H3
H2
54 14 44 84 54 14 44 84 54 14 54 14 SF1
R1 SF2
62 22 32 72 62 22 32 72 62 22 R2 62 22 AS-i +
IN + AS-i +
IN - AS-i -
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 AS-i -
NSB01153
NSB01155
NSB01156
Contactors with 4 main contacts, size S00 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S0 to S3
3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
1 3 5 7 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 A 1 A 2 A1 A2
1 3 5 7 1 R1 R3 3
NSB00575
NSB01152
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 7 7 a
2 4 6 8 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2
NSB00578
2 4 6 8 2 R2 R4 4
A 1 A 2 A1 A2

3RH19 11-. F... auxiliary switch blocks and 3RH19 11-.NF.. solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks,
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11 U
53 63 53 61 51 61 57 65
NSB00579
NSB00580
NSB00581
NSB00582
54 64 54 62 52 62 58 66
with make-before-break
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22 U 11/11 U
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83 57 67 75 85 53 61 75 87
NSB00583
NSB00584
NSB00585
NSB00586
NSB00587
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84 58 68 76 86 54 62 76 88
with make-before-break 1 NO + 1 NC ON-delay
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/219

3RH19 11-1AA.. 3RH19 11-1BA..
auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
5 3 5 4 51 52
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 8 8 a
NSB00589
5 3 5 4 5 1 5 2
3
3RH19 11-1LA20 3RH19 11-1LA11 3RH19 11-1MA20 3RH19 11-1MA11

2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC
53 54 63 64 5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 4 a
NSB00592
NSB00593
NSB00595
53 54 63 64 53 54 61 62

1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
2 7 3 5 2 7 3 5 2 7 3 7
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 8 a
2 8 3 6 2 8 3 6 2 8 3 8

3RH19 21-. F... auxiliary switch blocks, 4-pole,
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 04 22 U
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 41 1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1 11 21 31 41 17 27 35 45
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 1 a
NSB00599
NSB00600
NSB00603
NSB00602
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 42 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2 12 22 32 42 18 28 36 46
3RH19 21-1LA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole, 3RH19 21-1MA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole,
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from the top for snapping onto the front, cable entry from the bottom
1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 1 0 a
NSB00611
NSB00612
NSB00613
13 14 23 24 13 14 21 22 11 12 21 22
Solid-state compatible 3RH19 21- . FE22 auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,

2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22
13 23 31 41
NSB00614
14 24 32 42
Terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012

3RH19 21-. CA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole,
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
.3 .1 .7 .5
NSB00604b
NSB00605a
NSB00606a
NSB00607a
.4 .2 .8 .6
with extended with extended
contacting contacting
3/220 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories

First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . EA.. auxiliary switch blocks (left) First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . EA.. auxiliary switch blocks (right)
74 72 72 54 52 52
53 51 51 73 71 71
84 84 82 64 64 62
63 63 61 83 83 81
3
83 83 81 63 63 61
64 64 62 84 84 82
NSB00615
NSB00616
NSB00617
NSB00618
NSB00619
NSB00620
73 71 71 53 51 51
54 52 52 74 72 72
Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . KA.. auxiliary switch blocks (left) Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . KA.. auxiliary switch blocks (right)
(only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary contacts are (only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary contacts are
snapped onto to the front) snapped onto to the front)
1 7 2 1 7 2
1 5 1 1 5 1
174 154 1 5 2 1 5 2
153 173 1 7 1 1 7 1
1 8 4 1 8 2
1 6 3 1 6 1
184 164 1 6 4 1 6 2
163 183 1 8 3 1 8 1
1 8 3 1 8 1
1 6 4 1 6 2
183 163 1 6 3 1 6 1
164 184 1 8 4 1 8 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 6 a
NSB00624
NSB00621
1 7 1 1 7 1
1 5 2
173
1 5 2
153 1 5 1 1 5 1
154 174 1 7 2 1 7 2

1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
-7 -5 A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -7 A1
NSB00627
NSB00627
NSB00629
-8 -6 A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -8 A2
3RT16 capacitor contactors

Size S00 Size S0 and S3
With 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front With 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front
1 3 5 1 3 A 1 A1 A2
1 3 5
5 1
43
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 3 a
5 2
44
2 4 6 1 4 A 2
NSB00630
2 4 6
A1 A2
The auxiliary switch block contains 3 leading contacts (not shown), and The auxiliary switch block contains 3 leading contacts
one unassigned NO contact and one unassigned NC contact. (not shown) and one unassigned NO contact.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/221

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories

Size S00
3RT10 17-2K.42-0LA0 contactors 3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 contactor relays
.
1 3 5 1 3 2 3 3 1
3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 3 2 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 3 1 b
2 4 6 E 1 + A 2 - 1 4 2 4 3 2 E 1 + A 2 -
Series resistor RV plugged on, NC contact prewired. Series resistor RV plugged on, NC contact prewired.
3RH19 11-2.... auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 3RH19 11-2.... auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005
can be mounted can be snapped on
Contactor relays with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 Us

Size S00
3RH11 22-2K.40 contactor relays
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22 E
13 21 31 43 A1
NSB00126
14 22 32 44 A2
It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.

Size S0 to S3
3RT10 2.-, 3RT10 3.-, 3RT10 4.-3K.44-0LA0 contactors
with front 4-pole 3RH19 21-2HA22 auxiliary switch block
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22 E
A1 A2
1 3 5 (-)
13 21 31 43
(+)
14 22 32 44
NSB00633a
2 4 6 (-)
A1 A2
For circuit diagram of the series resistor wiring, see page 3/217.
Note:
For position of terminals for the 3RT10 17-2K.4. and 3RT10 25-3K.40
contactors see page 3/218.
3/222 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Connection diagrams for 3RH1 contactor relays, size S00
Terminal designations according to EN 500111)

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40E 31 E 22E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 0 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 1 b
NSB00079
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3
3RH11 40 contactor relays
With 3RH19 11-1GA..,
3RH12 44, 3RH12 62 auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 80E 71E 62E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 4 b
NSB00082
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E
A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 6 b
A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2
3RH14 latched contactor relays

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1+ E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 8 b
NSB00087
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 9 b
Surge suppressor (plug-in direction coded)

NSB00092
NSB00090
NSB00091
NSB00093
NSB00094
NSB00095
U U
1) Positively driven operation is assured likewise for auxiliary switch blocks

according to EN 50005 in conjunction with 3RH11 contator relays (basic
units).
Connection diagrams for 3TH42 contactor relays with 8 contacts

8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 0
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC and 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E make-before-break
44E, U
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 7 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 5
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 5
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 8 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/223

Connection diagrams for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts

10 NO 9 NO + 1 NC 8 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 03 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 3 9 3 0 3
A1(+) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 3 9 1 0 3
NSB00114
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 6 b
A 1 (+ )
A2( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 04 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 4 9 4 0 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 4 9 2 0 4
7 NO + 3 NC 6 NO +4 NC 5 NO + 5 NC
3
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 8 b
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 9 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
N S B 0
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 2 A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 2
4 NO + 4 NC, 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break 6 NO + 2 NC, 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break

Ident. No.: 55E; U 73E; U
1 3 2 3 3 7 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 5 9 1 0 1 1 3 2 3 3 7 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 5 9 1 0 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 2 0 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 2 1 b
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 8 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 6 9 2 0 2 1 4 2 4 3 8 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 6 9 2 0 4
Circuit diagrams for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts
3TX4 180-0A NTC thermistor module

Switching examples
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
L1 L1
NSB00123
1
J S
13
2
K1
14 1
13
S1 J K1
2 14
S0
A1 A1
NSB00122
K1 K1
A2 A2
N N
Position of the terminals for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts
10 NO 9 NO + 1 NC 8 NO + 2 NC 7 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 100E 91E 82E 73E
A1 A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53
63 73 83 93 03 63 71 83 93 03 63 71 83 91 03 63 71 81 91 03
64 74 84 94 04 64 72 84 94 04 64 72 84 92 04 64 72 82 92 04
NSB00148
NSB00150
NSB00149
NSB00151
14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54
A2 A2 A2 A2
6 NO + 4 NC 5 NO + 5 NC
Ident. No.: 64E 55E
A1 A1
13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53
63 71 81 91 01 61 71 81 91 01
64 72 82 92 02 62 72 82 92 02
NSB00152
NSB00153
14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54
A2 A2
3/224 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Position of the terminals for 3RH1 contactor relays, size S00

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1
3
NSB00125
NSB00126
NSB00124
14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2
3RH11 40 contactor relays

With 3RH19 11-1GA..,
3RH12 44, 3RH12 62 auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC 5 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 80E 71E 62E 53E
13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83 53 61 71 81
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84 54 62 72 82
NSB00127
NSB00129
NSB00128
NSB00130
14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2
4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 44E
13 23 33 43 A1
51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82
NSB00131
14 24 34 44 A2
3RH14 latched contactor relays

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 40E 31E
13 23 33 43 A1+ E1+ 13 21 33 43 A1+ E1+
NSB00133
NSB00132
14 24 34 44 A2- E2- 14 22 34 44 A2- E2-
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22E
13 21 31 43 A1+ E1+
NSB00134
14 22 32 44 A2- E2-
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/225

Connection diagrams for 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits
DC operation
• L+ is to be connected to coil terminal A1.
3RH11 coupling relays for auxiliary circuits
Size S00
(it is not possible to snap on an auxiliary switch block)
Surge suppressor can be mounted

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
3
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
0 0 1 5 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 5 8 b
NSB00156
N S B 0
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Diode integrated
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 2 b
NSB00161
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Varistor integrated
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 8 b
NSB00166
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Surge suppressors for size S00 coupling relays

see 3RH11 contactor relays, page 3/223.
Position of the terminals for 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits
Size S00
3RH11 coupling relays
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1
NSB00125
NSB00126
NSB00124
14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2
3/226 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Circuit diagrams for 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Size S00
Main circuit Control circuit
(the terminal designations for the contactors comply with EN 50012)
For momentary-contact operation For maintained-contact operation
L1 L1/L+
L2 L1/L+
L3 F3 F3
95 95
F1 F2 F2
96 96
S0
3
K1 10 2
S2 S1
K2 S
53 53
S1 K1 S2 K2
NSB00634 54 54
F2
UV W 22 22 22 22
K2 K1
NSB0_00635a
K1
NSB0_00636a
M K2
21 21
3~ 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
The 3RA19 13-2A installation kit contains, The 3RA19 13-2A installation kit contains,
among other things, wiring connectors for among other things, the electrical interlock.
connecting the main conducting paths.
Sizes S0 to S3
(the terminal designations for the contactors comply with EN 50005)
L1 L1/L+ L1/L+
L2 F3
F3
L3
95 95
F2 F2
F1 96
96
S0
10 2
K1 S2 S1 S
K2
.3 .3
S1 K1 S2 K2
.4 .4
NSB00634
F2
UV W K2 112 K1 121 112 121
K2 K1
M 122 111 122
NSB00639
111
NSB00638
3~ A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
The 3RA19 .3-2A installation kits contain, The 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock contains one NC contact
among other things, the wiring connectors for each contactor for the NC contact interlock.
on the top and bottom for connecting the
main conducting paths.
Position of the terminals for 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Size S0 to S3
3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock
(laterally mountable), integrated in reversing
contactor assemblies (reversing starters),
contains one NC contact for the electrical interlock for each contactor
2 NC
3 5 3 5
S0 Button "OFF"
111 1 1
S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
111
S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
112
K2 S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
112 K1 Clockwise contactor
121
K1 K2 K2 Counterclockwise contactor
121 F1 Fuses for main circuit
122 K1 F3 Fuses for control circuit
NSB00640 122
F2 Overload relays
2 4 6 2 4 6
NSB00641
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/227

Circuit diagrams for 3RA14 wye-delta starting contactor assemblies

Size S00
Main circuit Control circuits
With 3RT19 16-2G... solid state time-delay auxiliary switch block,
snapped onto the front (example circuits)
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
L2 F0 F0 95
95
L3 F1 F1
96 96
F0
S0
3
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 S1 S
2 4 6 2 4 6 13 13
K1 K1
14 14
27 37 27 37
F1 NSB00642
K4 K4
U1 W2 28 38 28 38
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 22 22 22 22
K3 K2 K3 K2
21 21 21 21
U1 W2 K4 K1 K2 K3 K4 K1 K2 K3
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00643 NSB00644
The 27/28 contact element for the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with wye-delta
function is only closed on the delta level; the contact element is open in the delta stage as
well as in the de-energized state.
Sizes S0 to S3 (S6 to S12, depending on power)

With 3RP15 7. timing relay,
laterally mounted (example circuits)
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V
L2 F 0 9 5 F 0
L3 9 5
F 1 F 1
9 6
F0 9 6
S 0
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 S 1 S
2 4 6 2 4 6 4 4 4 4
K 1 K 1
4 3 4 3
1 7
3 3 1 3 1 7
F1 NSB00645 3 3 1 3 1 3
K 4 K 1 K 2 K 4 K 1 K 2 K 3
3 4 1 4
U1 W2 1 8 2 8 3 4 1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 4 2 2 2
2 2
4 2
K 3 K 2 K 2
2 1
K 3
4 1
4 1 2 1
U1 W2 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 K 4 K 1
V1 M U2 K 2 K 3
W1 3~ V2
N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 4 6 a N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 4 7 a
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the star stage;

the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized state.
S1 (S) is connected to terminal K1/33.
Sizes S2 to S3 (S6 to S12, depending on power)

L1 3AC 50Hz ...V S0 Button "OFF"
L2 S1 Button "ON"
L3 S Maintained-contact switch
F0 F0 K1 Line contactor
K2 Wye contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block or timing relay
2 4 6 2 4 6 F0 Fuses
F1 Overload relays
F1 NSB00648
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
3/228 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 10 contactors 3TG10 01 contactors
1 NO 1 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 2 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3
3TF68 44 and 3TF69 44 contators 3TF68 33 and 3TF69 33 contactors
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
AC operation DC operation
Maximum number of auxiliary Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be fitted
contacts that can be fitted
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 7 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 7 1 a
A 1 A 1
A 2 A 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
3TY7 681-1G 3TY7 561-1AA00 3TY7 561-1KA00 3TY7 561-1EA00

auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks
For coil reconnection, 1st auxiliary switch block 2nd auxiliary switch block with overlapping contacting
3TF68 and 3TF69, left or right left or right
DC economy circuit
Mounted on left Mounted on right Mounted on left Mounted on right Mounted on left Mounted on right
B1 25 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83 13 25 43 35
NSB00677
NSB00679
NSB00675
NSB00676
NSB00678
NSB00680
NSB00688
B2 26 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84 14 26 44 36
3TY7 561-1.
auxiliary switch blocks
Solid-state compatible auxiliary
switch block
Mounted on left Mounted on right
51 61
NSB00683
NSB00682
52 54 62 64
3TX7 090-0D
interface for control by PLC
With surge suppression
X2
X1 NO13 1 ➀ Interface
B1+
2 ➁ Contactor
B2-
NO14 NSB00183
Circuit diagrams for DC economy circuit · Maintained-contact operation, 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3TF68 33-.D and 3TF69 33-.D contactors
L+
L-
S1
A1
A2
B1
A1 1 3
Rv 25
2 4
A2
26
B2
NSB00686
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/229

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors, 3-pole

Sizes 6 to 12 3TY6 501-1E, 3TY6 561-1E
3TB50 to 3TB56 auxiliary switch block
DC operation With overlapping
Auxiliary contacts: 2 NO + 2 NC contacting
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 43 35
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 8 7 a
A 1
NSB00688
A 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 44 36
3
Circuit diagrams for 3TD68 reversing contactor assemblies

In the main circuit the connections are made between contactors K1 The control circuit leads indicated by broken lines are not wired in the
and K2. factory.
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
L1
L2 L1/L+
L3
L1/L+
F3 F3
F1 95 95
F2 F2
96 96
S0
K1
10 2
K2 S2 S1
S
53 53
NSB00689 S1 K1 S2 K2
F2
54 54
UV W
M 22 22 22 22
3~ K2 K1 K1
NSB0_00635a
NSB0_00636a
K2
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
Terminal designations of the unassigned auxiliary contacts

Contactor With electrical interlock Without electrical interlock S0 Button "OFF"
assembly S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
K1 K2 K1 K2 S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact K1 Clockwise contactor
K2 Counterclockwise contactor
3TD68 13 – 14 21 – 22 13 – 14 31 – 32 13 – 14 21 – 22 13 – 14 21 – 22 F1 Fuses for main circuit
43 – 44 61 – 62 43 – 44 61 – 62 43 – 44 31 – 32 43 – 44 31 – 32 F3 Fuses for control circuit
53 – 54 71 – 72 53 – 54 71 – 72 53 – 54 61 – 62 53 – 54 61 – 62 F2 Overload relay
83 – 84 83 – 84 83 – 84 71 – 72 83 – 84 71 – 72
3/230 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Circuit diagrams for 3TE68 wye-delta starting contactor assemblies

Main circuit
Single infeed Double infeed
Without main conducting path connection between line and delta con- Without main conducting path connection between line and delta con-
tactors tactors
L1 3 ~50Hz ...V L1 3 ~50Hz ...V
L2 L2
L3 L3
F0 F0 F0
3TE
3
3TE
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
K1 K3 K2 K1 K3 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
NSB00692 F1 NSB00693
F1
W1 W2 W1 W2
V1 M V2 Clockwise V1 M V2 Clockwise
U1 3~ U2 U1 3~ U2
W1 W2 Counter- W1 W2 Counter-
V1 M V2 V1 M V2
U1 3~ U2 clockwise U1 3~ U2 clockwise
Control circuit with 3RP1 574 timing relay

L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V
F 0 9 5 F 0 9 5
F 1 F 1
9 6 9 6
S 0
S 1 S
4 3 4 3
K 1 K 1
4 4 4 4
1 7 1 7
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
K 4 K 1 K 2 K 4 K 1 K 2 K 3
1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8 1 4 1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
K 3 K 2 K 3 K 2
2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1
K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1
N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 3 N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 4
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized state.
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "ON"
S Maintained-contact switch
K1 Line contactor
K2 Wye contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K4 Timing relay
F0 Fuses
F1 Overload relay
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TK1 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO) for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
3TK1 contactors 3TK19 10-3B auxiliary
switch block
Mounted on left Mounted on right
1 3 5 7 13 21 31 43 5 3 6 1 8 3 7 1
A1
NSB00699
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 1 a
A2
2 4 6 8 14 22 32 44 5 4 6 2 8 4 7 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/231

Internal circuit diagram for 3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors for switching DC voltage
1 3 13 21 31 43
A1
NSB00702
A2
2 4 14 22 32 44
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TC74, 3TC78 contactors for switching DC voltage
DC operation
3
Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC

A 1 1 /L 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 A 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 4 a
2 /T 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
A 2 A 2
AC operation
Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC
Must be operated in the DC circuit Must be operated in the DC circuit
Z Z
1 /L 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 6 a
~ A 2 ~ A 2
~ A 1 ~ A 1
2 /T 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
Circuit diagrams for 3TC74, 3TC78 contactors for switching DC voltage
3TC74 contactors
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation Momentary-contact control Maintained-contact control
DC operation AC operation (must be operated in the DC circuit)
L+ L+ L1 L1
~ A1 ~ A1
S0 S0
~ A2 ~ A2
14 14
S1 K S S1 K S
13 13
A1 A1 Z Z
R2 R2 R2 R2
K K K K
NSB00710
NSB00709
NSB00707
NSB00708
R2 R2 R2 R2
L A2 L A2 N N
3TC78 contactors
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation Momentary-contact control Maintained-contact control
DC operation AC operation (must be operated in the DC circuit)
L+ L+ L1 L1
~ A1 ~ A1
S0 S0
~ A2 ~ A2
14 14
S1 K S S1 K S
13 13
A1 A2 A1 A2 Z Z
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
K K K K
NSB00712
NSB00711
NSB00713
NSB00714
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
L L N N
3/232 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Circuit diagrams for 3T contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
Circuit with series resistor Rv (size 2 or larger) Circuit with series resistor Rv and Rv:
without reversing contactor reversing contactor K2 Two resistors are connected in
(for K1 contactors size 8 or larger) series for 3TB54, 3TB56 and
L L+
3TC56 contactors.
L L- K2:
S1 S1 For 3TB52 to 3TB56 and
21
3TC52 to 3TC56:
1 3 3RT13 17-1F . 40
31
K2 K2 K1 22
2 4
Rv K1 Rv
5 7
32
K2 K2
6 8
3
K1 A1 K1 A1 K2 A1
NSB00715 A2 NSB0_01357b A2 A2
Position of the terminals for 3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 10 contactors 3TG10 01 contactors
1 NO 1 NC
A1 A1
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 21
2 4 6 14 2 4 6 22
NSB00717
NSB00718
A2 A2
Position of the terminals for 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
AC operation DC operation Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors 3TY7 561-1 . for lateral mounting
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
Max. number of auxiliary contacts
that can be fitted
Left Right
mounted mounted
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 54 62
A 1 A 1
A 2 A 2 61
5 3 1 3 4 3 8 3 5 3 B 1 4 3 8 3
6 1 2 1 3 1 7 1 6 1 3 1 7 1 51
NSB00727
2 5
6 2 2 2 3 2 7 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 7 2 52 64
5 4 1 4 4 4 8 4 5 4 B 2 4 4 8 4
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 1 a N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 6 a
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/233

Position of the terminals for 3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors, 3-pole

Size 6 to 12
3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors
2 NO + 2 NC
A 1 A 2
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3
1 3 4 3
2 1 3 1
2 2 3 2
3
1 4 4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 8 a
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
Position of the terminals for 3TK1 contactors for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors
2 NO + 2 NC
A 1 A 2
2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 3 1
3 2 2 2
4 4
4 3
1 4
1 3
1 4 4 4
4 3 1 3
3 1 2 1
2 2 3 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 9 a
Position of the terminals for 3TC contactors for switching DC voltage

AC and DC operation
Size 2 Sizes 4, 8 and 12
3TC44 contactors 3TC48 to 3TC56 contactors
A1 A1 A2
1-L1 3-L2 1-L1 3-L2
13 43 13 43
21 31 21 31
22 32 22 32
14 44 14 44
NSB00732
NSB00733
2-T1 4-T2 2-T1 4-T2

A2
DC operation AC operation DC operation AC operation

3TC74 contactors 3TC74 contactors 3TC78 contactors 3TC78 contactors
1 1 1 3 1 3
62 22 32 72 62 22 32 72 22 32 62 72 22 32 62 72
54 14 44 84 54 14 44 84 14 44 54 84 14 44 54 84
53 13 43 83 53 13 43 83 13 43 53 83 13 43 53 83
61 21 31 71 61 21 31 71 21 31 61 71 21 31 61 71
NSB00737a
NSB00736a
NSB00734a
NSB00735a
2 2 2 4 2 4
A1 A2 A1 A2 + Z A1 A2 A1 A2 + Z
3/234 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TF2 and 3TK2 contactors
Size S00
3TF20 ..-0 and 3TF28 ..-0 contactors 3TF20 ..-3, 3TF20 ...-6 and 3TF20 ..-7 contactors
with AC and DC operation with AC and DC operation
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01E Ident. No.: 10E 01E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 2 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
3
3TF20 10 contactors with 3TX4 4 ..-1 auxiliary switch block,
3TF22 and 3TF29 contactors
with AC and DC operation
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 11E 22E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 6 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 5 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 23E 32E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 9 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4

3TX4 4 ..-2 auxiliary switch block
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22U
53 63 73 83 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 57 67 75 85
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 3 a
NSB00511
NSB00514
54 64 74 84 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 58 68 76 86
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11U
53 63 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 57 65
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00510
NSB00507
54 64 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 58 66
3TK20 contactors
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A 1 (+ ) 1 3 5 7 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 5 R 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 R 1 R 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 3
A 2 ( ) 2 4 6 8 A 2 ( ) 2 4 6 R 2 A 2 ( ) 2 4 R 2 R 4
Surge suppressors
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/235

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TH2 contactor relays and 3TH27 latched contactor relays
Size S00
3TH20 ..-0 contactor relays,
AC and DC operation,
with screw terminals
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 0 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 1 b
NSB00079
A2( ) 14 24 34 44
3
A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3TH20 ..-3, 3TH20 ..-6, 3TH20 ..-7 contactor relays,

AC and DC operation,
with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm and solder pin connectors
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 2
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 3
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3TH20 40 contactor relays with 3TX4 4 ..-0 auxiliary switch block and
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 4 b
NSB00082
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E
A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 6 b
A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2
3TH27 latched contactor relays,

AC and DC operation
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1+ E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
NSB00087
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 8 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 9 b
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4

3TX4 4 ..-2 auxiliary switch block
Positively driven operation is assured likewise for auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 in conjunction with 3TH20 contactor relays
(basic units).
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22U
5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 5 7 6 7 7 5 8 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 7
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 1
N S B _ 0 1 5 5 3
5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 5 8 6 8 7 6 8 6
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11U
5 3 6 3 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 5 7 6 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 8
5 4 6 4 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 5 8 6 6
Surge suppressors
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
3/236 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Relay couplers – connection diagrams for 3TX7 002/3
3TX7 002-.A.00 -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 -2BF02
3TX7 002-1AB02
3TX7 002-2AF05
3TX7 003-.A.00 -1B.00 -1CB00
A1 13 A1 11 A1 A1 13 23 A1 11 21 11
A1
3
NSB00188 NSB00189 NSB00191a
NSB00190 NSB00192
A2 14 A2 A2 12 14 A2 A2 14 24 A2 12 14 22 24 12 14
A2
Relay couplers – position of the terminals

Output coupling links Input coupling links
3TX7 002-1AB0. -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 3TX7 002-2A.0. -2BF02
3TX7 003-1AB00 -1B.00 -1CB00 3TX7 003-2A.0.
A1 A2 A1 A2 A2 A1A1 A2 A2 A1 A2 12 11 13 14 12 14 11
NSB00197
NSB00198
NSB00201
NSB00202
NSB00199
NSB00200
13 14 11 12 14 13 14 23 24 21 24 22 14 A1 A2 A1 A2
Relay couplers – connection diagrams for 3TX7 004/5

Output coupling links
3TX7 00.-1M.00 3TX7 00.-1AB10 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1L.0.
3TX7 00.-1BF05
A1 A
0
A1 A1 12
M
14 A1 14
A1 12
A2 14 14 A2
A3 14
13 A2 11
NSB00205 A2 NSB00208
A2 11
A2 13 NSB00207 11
NSB00206 13
Input coupling links

3TX7 00.-1BB10 3TX7 00.-2M.02
A A = Automatic
0 A1
M
14 0 = Neutral position
A1
12 A2 M = Manual
A3 14
13
A2 NSB00213
A2 11
NSB00209 11
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/237


Relay couplers – position of the terminals
3TX7 004 3TX7 004-2M...
-1M.00 -1L.0. -1AB10 -1B.0. -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A3 A11 A21 A11 A21 A31 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00286
NSB00224
NSB00225
14 14 14 12 14 12 14 114 214 114 214 314
NSB00285
NSB00220
NSB00221
NSB00222
NSB00287
NSB00223
13 13 13 11 11 11 11 113 213 113 213 313 111 111 211 211 A2
3
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-2M...

-1M.00 -1L.0. -1AB10 -1BB00 -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A11 A21 A11 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 14 14 112 114 212 214 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00232
NSB00233
NSB00228
14 114 214 114 214
NSB00234
12 14
NSB00226
NSB00230
NSB00231
NSB00227
NSB00229
13 13 13 11 11 113 213 113 213 111 111 211 211 111 111 211 211 A2
Semiconductor couplers – connection diagrams

3TX7 002-3AB00 -3AB01 -4AB00 -4AG00
A1 13 A1 13 A1 13
A1 13
NSB00193
NSB00195 NSB00196
NSB00194
A2 14 A2 14 A2 14
A2 14
Semiconductor couplers – position of the interfaces

3TX7 002-3AB0. 3TX7 002-4A.0.
A1 A2 1 3 1 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 4
NSB00197
13 14 A 1 A 2
3/238 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Semiconductor couplers – connection diagrams
Output coupling links
3TX7 00.-3AB04 3TX7 00.-3PB54 3TX7 00.-3AC04
3TX7 00.-3PB41 3TX7 00.-3PG74
3TX7 00.-3PB74
A1 A1 A1
+13 +13 + A1 +13
A2 A2 +13 +
14 14 A2
NSB00214 NSB00215 Last
Last 0V _ A2 14
NSB00216 Last
_
0V
3
Input coupling links
3TX7 00.-3AC14 3TX07 00.-3AC03 3TX7 00.-4AB04
A
0 A1 A1
M
+13
A1 A1 ~13
+13 ~13
A2
A3 +13 +
A2 14
A2 NSB00219
A2 ~14 Last
A2 14 NSB00218
~14
NSB00217 Last
_
0V
Last A = Automatic
0 = Neutral position
M = Manual
Semiconductor couplers – position of the interfaces

3TX7 004 3TX7 004-4AB04
-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 14
+13
14
14 0V 14 0V 14 14 A1
NSB00235
NSB00238
NSB00240
NSB00239
14 0V
NSB00236
NSB00237
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 A2
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-4AB04

-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 14
+13
14
0V 14 0V 14 0V 14 14
NSB00244
NSB00245
A1
NSB00243
14
NSB00242
NSB00241
NSB00246
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 A2
3RS18 coupling relays with industrial housing – position of the terminals

3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00
-.AP00 -.BP00 -.HP0. -.BW00 -.HW0.
-.AQ00 -.BQ00 -.HQ0.
3 1 C 3 1 C
3 2 N C 3 4 N O 3 2 N C 3 4 N O
A 1 A 3 + A 2 - A 1 A 2 -
A 1 A 3 + A 2 -
A 1 A 3 + A 2 - A 1 A 2 -
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 6
1 1 C 1 1 C 1 1 C 1 1 C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 9
1 2 N C 1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 8
1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 0
1 2 N C 1 2 N C 1 4 N O 1 2 N C 1 4 N O 1 2 N C 1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 7
1 1 C
2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O
2 1 C 2 1 C 2 1 C 2 1 C
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 3/239

LZX plug-in relays – relay couplers
LZX:RT3 LZX:RT4 LZX:MT32

1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
(5) (6) (7)

A1 12 11 14 A1 12 11 14 22 21 24
(4)12 (8)32
A2 22 21 24 A2 22 21 24 (3)14 (9)34
NSB00247 NSB00248
3
NSB00251
(2) (1) (11) (10)

A1 11 31 A2
LZX:PT270 LZX:PT370 LZX:PT570

2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
(1) (4) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4)
12 42 12 22 32 12 22 32 42
14 44 14 24 34 14 24 34 44
(5) (8) (4) (5) (6) (5) (6) (7) (8)
NSB00250
NSB01011
NSB00249
11(9) 41(12) 11(7) 21(8) 31(9) 11(9) 21(10) 31(11) 41(12)
(13)A1 A2(14) (13)A1 A2(14) (13)A1 A2(14)
Values in brackets: socket designations.

Without brackets: contact/coil designations.
3TX7 014/3TX7 015 relay couplers with plug-in design – connection diagrams
3TX7 01.-1AM00 3TX7 01.-1BM0. 3TX7 01.-1BB0. 3TX7 01.-1BE0.
3TX7 01.-1BF0.
-A 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 3 -A 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 A 2
1 4 + A 1 A 2
1 4 + A 1 1 4 1 4 A 1
A 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 5 N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 6 N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 7
3TX7 014/3TX7 015 relay couplers with plug-in design – position of the terminals
3TX7 01.-1AM00 3TX7 01.-1BM0. 3TX7 01.-1BB0.
3TX7 01.-1BE0.
3TX7 01.-1BF0.
-A 2 -A 2 A 2
+ A 1 + A 1 A 1
1 4 1 4 1 4
1 1 1 1
1 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 5 0
1 2 1 2
7
3/240 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Controls –
Solid-State
Switching Devices
4
4/2 Introduction
Solid-State Switching Devices

4/3 General data
Solid-State Relays
4/5 General data
4/6 3RF21 solid-state relays, 22.5 mm
4
4/12 3RF20 solid-state relays, 45 mm
Solid-State Contactors
4/16 General data
4/17 3RF23 solid-state contactors
3RF29 Function Modules

4/25 General data
4/27 Converters
4/28 Load monitoring and
heating current monitoring
4/29 Power controllers
4/30 Project planning aids
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
3RF21 3RF20 3RF23 3RF29

Order No. Page
SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices
Solid-state relays
22.5 mm solid-state relays • Widths of 22.5 mm and 45 mm 3RF21, 4/6
45 mm solid-state relays • Compact and space-saving design 3RF20 4/12
• "Zero-point switching" version
4
• Mounting onto existing heat sinks

Solid-state contactors
Solid-state contactors • Complete units comprising a solid-state relay and an optimized 3RF23 4/16
heat sink, "ready to use"
• Compact and space-saving design
• Versions for resistive loads "zero-point switching" and inductive
loads "instantaneous switching"
• Special designs "Low Noise" and "Short-Circuit Resistant"
Function modules For extending the functionality of the 3RF21 solid-state relays and
the 3RF23 solid-state contactors for many different applications:
Converters • For converting an analog input signal into an on/off ratio 3RF29 00-0EA18 4/27
Load monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 20-0FA08, 4/28
3RF29 .0-0GA..
Heating current monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 ..-0JA.. 4/28
Power controllers • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching 3RF29 .0-0HA.. 4/29
device depending on a setpoint value
Closed-loop control: Full wave control or generalized phase control

General data
■ Overview
SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices The most reliable solution for any application
• Solid-state relays Compared with mechanical switching devices, our SIRIUS SC
• Solid-state contactors solid-state switching devices stand out because of their consid-
• Function modules erably longer service life. Thanks to the high product quality,
their switching is extremely precise, reliable and above all insus-
SIRIUS SC – for almost unending activity ceptible to faults. With its variable connection methods and a
wide spread of control voltages, the SIRIUS SC family is univer-
Conventional electromechanical switching devices are often sally applicable. Depending on the individual requirements of
overtaxed by the rise in the number of switching operations. A the application, our modular switching devices can also be quite
high switching frequency results in frequent failure and short re- easily expanded by the addition of standardized function
placement cycles. However, this does not have to be the case, modules.
because with the latest generation of our SIRIUS SC solid-state
switching devices we provide you with solid-state relays and Always on the sunny side with SIRIUS SC
contactors with a particularly long service life – for almost unend-
ing activity even under the toughest conditions and under high Because SIRIUS SC offers even more:
mechanical load, but also in noise-sensitive areas. • The space-saving and compact side-by-side mounting
ensures reliable operation up to an ambient temperature of
Proved time and again in service +60 °C.
SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices have become firmly • Thanks to fast configuration and the ease of installation and
4
established in industrial use. They are used above all in applica- start-up, you save not only time but also expenses.
tions where loads are switched frequently – mainly with resistive
load controllers, with the control of electrical heat or the control
of valves and motors in conveyor systems. In addition to its use
in areas with high switching frequencies, thanks to its silent
switching SIRIUS SC is also ideally suited to noise-sensitive
areas such as offices or hospitals.
Type Solid-state relays Solid-state Function module

contactor
22.5 mm 45 mm Converters Load monitoring Heating Power
Basic Extended current controllers
monitoring
Usage
Simple use of existing solid-state relays ❑ ✓ ❑ -- -- -- -- --
Complete "Ready to use" ❑ ❑ ✓ -- -- -- -- --
Space-saving ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- --
Can be extended with modular function modules ✓ -- ✓ -- -- -- -- --
Frequent switching and monitoring of loads and -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
solid-state relays/solid-state contactors
Monitoring of up to 6 partial loads -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ --
Monitoring of more than 6 partial loads -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- --
Control of the heating power through an analog -- -- -- ✓ -- -- -- ✓
input
Power control -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓
Startup
Easy setting of setpoints with "Teach" button -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓
"Remote Teach" input for setting setpoints -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ --
Installation
Mounting onto mounting rails or mounting plates -- -- ✓ -- -- -- -- --
Can be snapped directly onto a solid-state relay -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
or contactor
For use with "Coolplate" heat sink ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Cable routing
Connection of load circuit as for controls ✓ -- ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Connection of load circuit from above -- ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
✓ Function is available
❑ Function is possible

General data
■ Design Maximum load integral

One of the purposes of specifying the maximum load integral
There is no typical design of a load feeder with solid-state relays (I²t) is to determine the rating of the short-circuit protection. Only
or solid-state contactors; instead, the great variety of connection a large power semiconductor with a correspondingly high I²t
systems and control voltages offers universal application oppor- value can be given appropriate protection against destruction
tunities. SIRIUS SC solid-state relays and solid-state contactors from a short-circuit by means of a protective device matched to
can be installed in fuseless or fused feeders, as required. There the application. However, SIRIUS SC is also characterized by the
are special versions with which it is even possible to achieve optimum matching of the thyristors (I²t value) with the rated
short-circuit strength in a fuseless design. currents. The rated currents specified on the devices according
to EN 60947-4-3 were confirmed by extensive testing.
■ Function You can find more information on the Internet at:
Connection technique http://www.siemens.com/siriussc
All SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices are characterized
by the great variety of connection methods. You can choose ■ More information
between the following connection techniques:
Notes on integration in the load feeders
Screw connection system
The SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices are very easy to
The screw connection system is the standard among industrial integrate into the load feeders thanks to their industrial connec-
controls. Open terminals and a plus-minus screw are just two tion technology and design.
4
features of this technology. Two conductors of up to 6 mm² can

be connected in just one terminal. As a result, loads of up to 50 A Particular attention must however be paid to the circumstances
can be connected. of the installation and ambient conditions, as the performance of
the solid-state switching devices is largely dependent on these.
Spring-loaded connection system Depending on the version, certain restrictions must be ob-
This innovative technology manages without any screw connec- served. Detailed information, for example in relation to solid-
tion. This means that very high vibration resistance is achieved. state contactors about the minimum spacing and to solid-state
Two conductors of up to 2.5 mm² can be connected to each relays about the choice of heat sink, is given in the product data
terminal. As a result, loads of up to 20 A can be dealt with. sheets and the technical specifications in the A&D Mall.
Ring terminal end connection Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used, solid-
state switching devices respond more sensitively to short-
The ring terminal end connection is equipped with an M5 screw. circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precautions
Ring terminal ends of up to 25 mm² can be connected. In this have to be taken against destruction, depending on the type of
way it is possible to connect even high powers with current design.
intensities of up to 90 A safely. Finger-safety is provided in this
case too with a special cover. Siemens generally recommends using SITOR solid-state protec-
tion fuses. These fuses also provide protection against destruc-
Switching functions tion in the event of a short-circuit even when the solid-state
contactors and solid-state relays are fully utilized.
In order to guarantee an optimized control method for different
loads, the functionality of our solid-state switching devices can Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be
be adapted accordingly. provided by standard fuses or miniature circuit-breakers. This
protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state
The "Zero-point switching" method has proved to be ideal for
switching devices accordingly. The technical specifications in
resistive loads, i.e. where the power semiconductor is activated
the A&D Mall and the product data sheets contain details both
at zero voltage.
about the solid-state fuse protection itself and about use of the
For inductive loads, on the other hand, for example in the case SIRIUS SC devices with conventional protection equipment.
of valves, it is better to go with "Instantaneous switching". By
The SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices are suitable for
distributing the ON point over the entire sine curve of the mains
interference-free operation in industrial power systems without
voltage, disturbances are reduced to a minimum.
further measures. If they are used in public power systems, it
Performance characteristics may be necessary for conducted interference to be reduced by
means of filters. This does not include the special solid-state
The performance of the solid-state switching devices is substan- contactors of type 3RF23..-.CA.. "Low Noise". These comply with
tially determined by the type of power semiconductors used and the class B limit values up to a rated current of 16 A. If other
the internal design. In the case of the SIRIUS SC solid-state con- versions are used, and at currents of over 16 A, standard filters
tactors and solid-state relays, only thyristors are used in place of can be used in order to comply with the limit values. The decisive
less powerful Triacs. factors when it comes to selecting the filters are essentially the
Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking current loading and the other parameters (operational voltage,
voltage and the maximum load integral: design type, etc.) in the load feeder.
Blocking voltage Suitable filters can be ordered from EPCOS AG.
Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated You can find more information on the Internet at:
without difficulty in power systems with high interference volt-
http://www.epcos.com
ages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective circuit
with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases.
With SIRIUS SC, for example, thyristors with 800 V blocking volt-
age are fitted for operation in power systems up to 230 V.
Thyristors with up to 1600 V are used for power systems with
higher voltages.

Solid-State Relays
General data
■ Overview ■ More information

Solid-state relays Selecting solid-state relays
SIRIUS SC solid-state relays are suitable for surface mounting When selecting solid-state relays, in addition to information
on existing cooling surfaces. Installation is quick and easy, about the power system, the load and the ambient conditions it
involving just two screws. The special technology of the power is also necessary to know details of the planned design. The
semiconductor ensures there is excellent thermal contact with solid-state relays can only conform to their specific technical
the heat sink. Depending on the nature of the heat sink, the specifications if they are mounted with appropriate care on an
capacity reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads. The 3RF21 solid- adequately dimensioned heat sink. The following procedure is
state relays can be expanded with various function modules to recommended:
adapt them to individual applications. • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
The solid-state relays are available in 2 different widths: • Select the relay design and choose a solid-state relay with
• 3RF21 solid-state relay with a width of 22.5 mm higher rated current than the load
• 3RF20 solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm • Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink
• Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagrams
Version for resistive loads, "Zero-point switching"
You can find more information on the Internet at:
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off. http://www.siemens.com/siriussc
4
Version for inductive loads, "Instantaneous switching"
In this version the solid-state contactor is specifically matched to
inductive loads. Whether it is a matter of frequent actuation of the
valves in a filling plant or starting and stopping small drives in
packet distribution systems, operation is carried out safely and
noiselessly.

Solid-State Relays
3RF21 solid-state relays, 22.5 mm
■ Overview
22.5 mm solid-state relays
With its compact design, which stays the same even at currents
of up to 88 A, the 3RF21 solid-state relay is the ultimate in space-
saving construction, at a width of 22.5 mm. The logical connec-
tion arrangement, with the power infeed from above and
connection of the load from below, ensures tidy installation in the
control cabinet.
Type 3RF21 ..-1.... 3RF21 ..-2.... 3RF21 ..-3....
General data
Ambient temperature
• During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
4

According to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance g 2
• Emitted interference
- Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
according to IEC 60947-4-3
- Emitted, high-frequency interference Class A for industrial applications
voltage according to IEC 60947-4-3
• Interference immunity
- Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
- Induced RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring cable connection
Main contact connection
- Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
1 x 10
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 - 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• Terminal screw M4 -- M5
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 -- 2.5 ... 2
lb. in 7 ... 10.3 -- 10.3 ... 7
• Cable lug
- DIN -- -- DIN 46234 -5-2.5, -5-6, -5-10,
-5-16, -5-25
- JIS -- -- JIS C 2805 R 2-5, 5.5-5, 8-5, 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section mm 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 2.5 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12 20 ... 12 20 ... 12
• Stripped length mm 7 10 7
• Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 -- 0.5 ... 0.6
lb. in 4.5 ... 5.3 -- 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF21 ..-...2 3RF21 ..-...4 3RF21 ..-...5 3RF21 ..-....6

Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 ... 230 230 ... 460 48 ... 600 400 ... 600
• Tolerance % -15/+10
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 10 %
Blocking voltage V 800 1 200 1 600
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1 000

Solid-State Relays
Order No. Imax1) Ie according to Ie according to UL/CSA Power loss Minimum load Leakage current
IEC 60947-4-3 at Imax current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C
A K/W A K/W A K/W W A mA
Main circuit
3RF21 20-..... 20 2.0 20 2.0 20 1.7 28.6 0.1 10
3RF21 30-1.... 30 1.1 30 1.1 30 0.88 44.2 0.5 10
3RF21 50-1.... 50 0.68 50 0.68 50 0.53 66 0.5 10
3RF21 50-2.... 50 0.68 20 4.2 20 3.3 66 0.5 10
3RF21 50-3.... 50 0.68 50 0.48 50 0.53 66 0.5 10
3RF21 70-1.... 70 0.40 50 0.95 50 0.80 94 0.5 10
3RF21 90-1.... 88 0.33 50 1.25 50 1.02 118 0.5 10
3RF21 90-2.... 88 0.33 20 5.0 20 4.0 118 0.5 10
3RF21 90-3.... 88 0.33 88 0.33 83 0.29 118 0.5 10
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend-
ing on the connection method and cooling conditions.
Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2t value

A 2s
4
A
Main circuit
3RF21 20-..... 200 200
3RF21 30-..A.2 300 450
3RF21 30-..A.4 300 450
3RF21 30-..A.6 400 800
3RF21 50-..... 600 1 800
3RF21 70-..A.2 1 200 7 200
3RF21 70-..A.4 1 200 7 200
3RF21 70-..A.5 1 200 7 200
3RF21 70-..A.6 1 150 6 600
3RF21 90-..... 1 150 6 600
Type 3RF21 ..-...0 3RF21 ..-...2 3RF21 ..-...4

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 according to EN 61131-2 110 ... 230 4 ... 30
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 --
of the control supply voltage
Rated control voltage Uc V 30 253 30
Rated control current at Us mA 15 6 15
Response voltage V 15 90 4
• For tripping current mA 2 2 2
Drop-out voltage V 5 40 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + additional max. one half-wave1) 40 + additional max. one half-wave1) 1 + additional max. one half-wave1)
• OFF delay ms 1+ additional max. one half-wave 40 + additional max. one half-wave 1 + additional max. one half-wave
1) Only for zero-point-switching devices.

Solid-State Relays

Fused version with solid-state protection (similar to type of coordination "2")1)
The solid-state protection for the SIRIUS SC controlgear can be If a fuse is used with a higher rated current than specified, solid-
used with different protective devices. This allows protection by state protection is no longer guaranteed. However, smaller fuses
means of, for example, LV HRC fuse links of gL/gG operational with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
class or miniature circuit-breakers. Siemens recommends the problems.
use of special SITOR semiconductor fuses. The table below lists
the maximum permissible fuses for each SIRIUS SC control gear. For protective devices with gL/gG operational class and for
SITOR full range fuses 3NE1, the minimum cross-sections for the
conductor to be connected must be taken into account.
Order No. All-range fuse Solid-state protection fuse Cable and line protection fuse
LV design LV design Cylindrical design LV design Cylindrical design DIAZED
gR/SITOR aR/SITOR 10 x 38 mm 14 x 51 mm 22 x 58 mm gL/gG 10 × 38 mm 14 × 51 mm 22 × 58 mm quick
3NE1 3NE8 aR/SITOR aR/SITOR aR/SITOR 3NA gL/gG gL/gG gL/gG 5SB
3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2 3NW 3NW 3NW
3RF21 2.-...2 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2803 3NW6001-1 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB171
3RF21 2.-...4 3NE1813-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1016 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2801 -- 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB141
3RF21 3.-...2 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803 -- 3NW6103-1 -- 5SB311
3RF21 3.-...4 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC10252) 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803 -- 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB171
3RF21 3.-....6 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803-6 -- -- -- --
3RF21 5.-...2 3NE1817-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2810 -- 3NW6107-1 3NW6207-1 5SB321
3RF21 5.-...4 3NE1802-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2807 -- -- 3NW6205-1 5SB311
4
3RF21 5.-....6 3NE1803-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2807-6 -- -- -- --

3RF21 7.-....23) 3NE1820-0 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2817 -- -- 3NW6217-1 5SB331
3RF21 7.-...43) 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6212-1 5SB321
3RF21 7.-...53) 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6212-1 5SB321
3RF21 7.-...63) 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF21 9.-....23) 3NE1021-2 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC2200 3NA2817 -- -- 3NW6217-1 5SB331
3RF21 9.-...43) 3NE1021-2 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6212-1 5SB321
3RF21 9.-...63) 3NE1020-22) 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
Suitable fuse holders, fuse bases and controlgear can be found

in Catalog LV 1, Chapter 19.
1) Type of coordination "2" according to EN 60947-4-1:
In the event of a short-circuit, the controlgear in the load feeder must not
endanger persons or the installation. They must be suitable for further
operation. For fused configurations, the protective device must be
replaced.
2) These fuses have a smaller rated current than the solid-state relays.
3) These versions can also be protected against short-circuits with miniature
circuit-breakers as described in the notes on "SIRIUS SC Solid-State
Contactors Special Version Short-Circuit Resistant" .

Solid-State Relays
■ Characteristic curves
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta
4 0
3 5
in A
in W
3 0
e
M
1 ,3 K /W
M o d u le p o w e r lo s s
2 5
1 ,6 K /W
2 K /W
2 0
2 ,5 K /W
1 5 3 ,2 K /W
4 K /W
1 0 5 K /W
6 K /W
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 3 a
5 8 K /W
1 2 K /W
4
0
2 6 1 0 1 4 1 8 2 2 2 4 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
D e v ic e c u r r e n t e in A A m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e a in ° C
Type current 20 A (3RF21 20, 3RF20 20)1)
6 0
5 0
in A
in W
e
M
4 0 0 ,6 5 K /W
0 ,8 5 K /W
1 ,1 K /W
3 0
1 ,5 K /W
2 ,1 K /W
2 0 3 K /W
4 K /W
1 0 5 K /W
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 4 a
7 K /W
1 0 K /W
0
6 1 0 1 4 1 8 2 2 2 6 3 0 3 4 3 6 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
Type current 30 A (3RF21 30, 3RF20 30)
9 0
8 0
in A
in W
7 0
e
M
6 0 0 ,4 K /W
0 ,5 3 K /W
5 0
0 ,6 8 K /W
4 0 0 ,8 5 K /W
1 ,1 K /W
3 0 1 ,5 K /W
2 K /W
2 0
3 K /W
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 5 a
1 0 5 K /W
1 0 K /W
0
5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0

1) For arrangement example see next page.

Solid-State Relays
1 2 0
1 0 0
in A
in W
e
M
8 0 0 ,2 2 K /W
0 ,3 K /W
0 ,4 K /W
6 0
0 ,5 5 K /W
0 ,7 5 K /W
4 0 1 K /W
1 ,5 K /W
2 K /W
2 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 6 a
3 K /W
5 K /W
0
1 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 8 5 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
4
1 2 0
1 0 0
in A
in W
e
M
8 0 0 ,2 4 K /W
0 ,3 K /W
0 ,3 9 K /W
6 0
0 ,5 K /W
0 ,6 5 K /W
4 0 0 ,8 5 K /W
1 ,1 K /W
2 0 1 ,6 K /W
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 7 a
2 ,5 K /W
4 K /W
0
1 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 9 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0

Arrangement example
Given conditions: Ie = 20 A and Ta = 40 C. The task is to find the
thermal resistance Rthha and the heat sink overtemperature
dTha.
From the diagram on the left PM = 28 W,
from the diagram on the right Rthha = 2.0 K/W.
This results in:
dTha = Rthha × PM = 2.0 K/W × 28 W = 56 K.
At dTha = 56 K the heat sink must therefore have an
Rthha = 2.0 K/W.
4/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Solid-State Relays
Solid-state relays
Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection

3RF21 .0-1.A.. 3RF21 .0-2.A.. 3RF21 .0-3.A..
3 1 ,5 2 2 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 3 3 a
4 ,5
4 7 ,5
6 9
6 9
8 5
2 5
2 1
1 4 ,5
1 4 ,5
4
1 2 ,5
1 3 1 2 ,5
3 5 ,5
4 8
Terminal cover
3RF29 00-3PA88
3 7 ,5 1 2
3 6 ,5
2 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 2
2 7 ,5 2 2 ,5
■ Schematics
Version Version Switching example
DC control supply voltage AC control supply voltage
1/N/PE 50 Hz 230 V
1 L 1 L L
A1 + A1
N
A2 - A2
PE
NSB0_01462
NSB0_01463
F1 F2
2 T 2 T
S1
K1 ON/OFF
1 L A1
A2
2 T
NSB0_01458
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/11

Solid-State Relays
3RF20 solid-state relays, 45 mm
■ Overview
45 mm solid-state relays
The steady-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide for con-
nection of the power supply lead and the load from above. This
makes it easy to replace existing solid-state relays in existing
arrangements. The connection of the control cable also saves
space in much the same way as the 22.5 mm design, as it is
simply plugged on.
Type 3RF20
General data
Ambient temperature
4
Shock resistance g/ms 15 /11

- Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
Connection, main contacts,
screw connection
- Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
Connection, auxiliary/control
contacts, screw connection
• Conductor cross-section mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), AWG 20 ... 12
• Stripped length mm 7
• Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6
lb. in 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF20 .0-1.A.2 3RF20 .0-1.A.4 3RF20 .0-1.A.5 3RF20 .0-1.A.6

Main circuit
Rage of voltage rise V/ms 1 000
4/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Solid-State Relays
Order No. Imax1) Ie according to Ie according to UL/CSA Power loss Minimum load Leakage current
IEC 60947-4-3 at Imax current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C
A K/W A K/W A K/W W A mA

Main circuit
3RF20 20-1.A.. 20 2.0 20 2.0 20 1.7 28.6 0.1 10
3RF20 30-1.A.. 30 1.1 30 1.1 30 0.88 44.2 0.5 10
3RF20 50-1.A.. 50 0.68 50 0.68 50 0.53 66 0.5 10
3RF20 70-1.A.. 70 0.40 50 0.95 50 0.80 94 0.5 10
3RF20 90-1.A.. 88 0.33 50 1.25 50 1.02 118 0.5 10
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend-
ing on the connection method and cooling conditions.
Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2t value

A A²s
Main circuit
4
3RF20 20-1.A.. 200 200
3RF20 30-1.A.2 300 450
3RF20 30-1.A.4 300 450
3RF20 30-1.A.6 400 800
3RF20 50-1.A.. 600 1 800
3RF20 70-1.A.2 1 200 7 200
3RF20 70-1.A.4 1 200 7 200
3RF20 70-1.A.5 1 200 7 200
3RF20 70-1.A.6 1 150 6 600
3RF20 90-1.A.. 1 150 6 600
Type 3RF20 .0-1.A0. 3RF20 .0-1.A2. 3RF20 .0-1.A4.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage US V 24 according to EN 61131-2 110 … 230 4 … 30
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 10 % --
Rated control voltage Uc V 30 253 30
Rated control current at Us mA 15 6 15
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + additional max. one half-wave1) 40 + additional max. one half-wave1) 1 + additional max. one half-wave1)
• OFF delay ms 1 + additional max. one half-wave 40 + additional max. one half-wave 1 + additional max. one half-wave
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/13

Solid-State Relays

means of LV HRC fuse links of gL/gG operational class or minia- with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
ture circuit-breakers. Siemens recommends the use of special problems.
SITOR semiconductor fuses. The table below lists the maximum
permissible fuses for each SIRIUS SC controlgear. For protective devices with gL/gG operational class and for
3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2 3NW 3NW 3NW
3RF20 20-1.A.2 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2803 3NW6001-1 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB171
3RF20 20-1.A.4 3NE1813-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1016 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2801 -- 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB141
3RF20 30-1.A.2 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803 -- 3NW6103-1 -- 5SB311
3RF20 30-1.A.4 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC10252) 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803 -- 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB171
3RF20 30-1.A.6 3NE1815-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2803-6 -- -- -- --
3RF20 50-1.A.2 3NE1817-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2810 -- 3NW6107-1 3NW6207-1 5SB321
3RF20 50-1.A.4 3NE1802-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2807 -- -- 3NW6205-1 5SB311
4
3RF20 50-1.A.6 3NE1803-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2807-6 -- -- -- --

3RF20 70-1.A.23) 3NE1820-0 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2817 -- -- 3NW6217-1 5SB331
3RF20 70-1.A.63) 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF20 90-1.A.43) 3NE1021-2 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6212-1 5SB321
3RF20 90-1.A.63) 3NE1020-22) 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --

replaced.
2) These fuses have a smaller rated current than the solid-state relays.
3) These versions can also be protected against short-circuits with miniature
circuit-breakers as described in the notes on "SIRIUS SC Solid-State
Contactors Special Version Short-Circuit Resistant"
See 3RF21 solid-state relays, 22.5 mm
4/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Solid-State Relays
3RF20 .0-1.A..
3 1 ,5 4 5
1 3 4 ,5 2 8
4 7 ,5
5 8
4 3
2 5
1 4 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 3 2 a
3 5 ,5
4 8 8
■ Schematics
4
Version Version Switching example
1/N/PE 50 Hz 230 V
1 L 1 L L
A1 + A1
N
A2 - A2
PE
NSB0_01462
NSB0_01463
F1 F2
2 T 2 T
S1
K1 ON/OFF
1 L A1
A2
2 T
NSB0_01458
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/15

General data
■ Overview
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230 /400 V 3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- L1 L1
ing on the version, current intensities of up to 88 A are achieved. L2 L2
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particu-
lar advantages is their compact and space-saving design. With L3 L3
their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped onto a N N
standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier plates
with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be used in F1 F1 F2
circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety extra-
low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other applica- K1 K1
tions, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can be 1 L 1 L
grounded through a screw connection.
Version for resistive loads, "Zero-point switching" 2 T 2 T
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off. I, A I, A
Ltg
Ltg
Ltg
NSB0_01473b
Version for inductive loads, "Instantaneous switching"
4
In this version the solid-state contactor is specifically matched to

inductive loads. Whether it is a matter of frequent actuation of the
valves in a filling plant or starting and stopping small drives in R1 R1
packet distribution systems, operation is carried out safely and
noiselessly.
The setup and installation above can also be used for the
Special "Low noise" version solid-state relays with a I2t value of at least 6600 A2s.
Thanks to a special control circuit, this special design can be
used in public networks up to 16 A without any additional ■ More information
measures such as interference suppressor filters. As a result it
conforms to limit value curve class B according to Selecting solid-state contactors
EN 60947-4-3 in terms of emitted interference.
The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of
Special "Short-circuit-resistant" version the power system, the load and the ambient conditions. As the
solid-state contactors are already equipped with an optimally
Skilful matching of the power semiconductor with the perfor- matched heat sink, the selection process is considerably
mance of the solid-state contactor means that "short-circuit simpler than that for solid-state relays.
strength" can be achieved with a standard miniature circuit-
breaker. In combination with a B-type MCB or a conventional The following procedure is recommended:
fuse, the result is a short-circuit resistant feeder. • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
In order to achieve problem-free short-circuit protection by • Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
means of miniature circuit-breakers, however, certain boundary current than the load
conditions must be observed. As the magnitude and duration of • Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated
the short-circuit current are determined not only by the short current diagram, taking account of the design conditions
circuit breaking response of the miniature circuit-breaker but
also the properties of the wiring system, such as the internal
resistance of the input to the network and damping by controls
and cables, particular attention must also be paid to these
parameters. The necessary cable lengths are therefore shown
for the main factor, the conductor resistance, in the table below.
The following miniature circuit-breakers with a type B tripping
characteristic and 10 kA or 6 kA breaking capacity protect the
3RF23..-.DA.. solid-state contactors in the event of short-circuits
on the load and the specified conductor cross-sections and
lengths:
Rated current of the Example of Max. conductor Cable length
miniature circuit- type1) cross-section from contactor to
breaker load
6A 5SY4 106-6, 1 mm2 5m
5SX2 106-6
10 A 5SY4 110-6, 1.5 mm2 8m
5SX2 110-6
16 A 5SY4 116-6, 1.5 mm2 12 m
5SX2 116-6
16 A 5SY4 116-6, 2.5 mm2 20 m
5SX2 116-6
20 A 5SY4 120-6, 2.5 mm2 20 m
5SX2 120-6
25 A 5SY4 125-6, 2.5 mm2 26 m
5SX2 125-6
1) The miniature circuit-breakers can be used up to a maximum rated voltage
of 480 V.
4/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RF23 solid-state contactors
Order No. 3RF23 ..-.A... 3RF23 ..-.B... 3RF23 ..-.C... 3RF23 ..-.D...
General data
Ambient temperature
• Emitted interference according to Class A for industrial applications Class A for industrial Class A for industrial
IEC 60947-4-3 applications; applications
- Conducted interference voltage Class B for residential/
- Emitted, high-frequency interference business/commercial
voltage applications up to 16 A,
4
AC51 Low Noise
Order No. 3RF23 ..-1.... 3RF23 ..-2.... 3RF23 ..-3....

General data
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring cable connection
Main contact connection
- Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 - 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 -- 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 -- 7 ... 10.3
• Cable lug
- DIN - DIN 46234
-5-2.5, -5-6, -5-10, -5-16, -5-25
- JIS - JIS C 2805 R 2-5, 5.5-5, 8-5, 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section mm 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 2.5 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG AWG 20 ... 12 AWG 20 ... 12 AWG 20 ... 12
• Stripped length mm 7 10 7
• Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 -- 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 -- 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF23 ..-....2 3RF23 ..-....4 3RF23 ..-....5 3RF23 ..-....6

Main circuit
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1 000
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/17

Order No. Type current AC-511) Power loss at Minimum load Leakage Rated impulse I2t value
for Imax according to according to Imax current current withstand
IEC 60947-4-3 UL/CSA capacity Itsm
at 40 °C for 40°C for 50 °C
A A A W A mA A A²s
Main circuit
3RF23 1.-.A..2 10.5 7.5 9.6 11 0.1 10 200 200
3RF23 1.-.A..4 200 200
3RF23 1.-.A..6 400 800
3RF23 2.-.A..2 20 13.2 17.6 20 0.5 10 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.A..4 10 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.A..5 10 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.A..6 10 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.C..2 25 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.C..4 25 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.D..2 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 2.-.D..4 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 3.-.A..2 30 22 27 33 0.5 10 600 1 800
3RF23 3.-.A..4 10 600 1 800
3RF23 3.-.A..6 10 600 1 800
3RF23 3.-.C..2 25 600 1 800
3RF23 3.-.D..4 10 1 150 6 600
4
3RF23 4.-.A..2 40 33 36 44 0.5 10 1 200 7 200

3RF23 4.-.A..4 1 200 7 200
3RF23 4.-.A..5 1 200 7 200
3RF23 4.-.A..6 1 150 6 600
3RF23 5.-.A..2 50 36 45 54 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 5.-.A..4
3RF23 5.-.A..5
3RF23 5.-.A..6
3RF23 7.-.A..2 70 70 62 83 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 7.-.A..4
3RF23 7.-.A..5
3RF23 7.-.A..6
3RF23 9.-.A..2 88 88 80 117 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 9.-.A..4
3RF23 9.-.A..5
3RF23 9.-.A..6
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-
state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions.
For derating see the characteristic curves on page 4/20.
Order No. Type current AC-511) Type current AC-15 Power loss Minimum Leakage Rated impulse I2t value
for Imax according to according to Parameters at Imax load current current withstand
IEC 60947-4-3 UL/CSA capacity Itsm
at 40 °C for 40 °C for 50 °C
A A A A W A mA A A²s
Main circuit
3RF23 1.-.B..2 10.5 7.5 9.6 6 1200 1/h 11 0.1 10 200 200
3RF23 1.-.B..4 50% 200 200
3RF23 1.-.B..6 ON -time 400 800
3RF23 2.-.B..2 20 13.2 17.6 12 1200 1/h 20 0.5 10 600 1 800
3RF23 2.-.B..4 50%
3RF23 2.-.B..6 ON -time
3RF23 3.-.B..2 30 22 27 15 1200 1/h 33 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF23 3.-.B..4 50%
3RF23 3.-.B..6 ON -time
3RF23 4.-.B..2 40 33 36 20 1200 1/h 44 0.5 10 1 200 7 200
3RF23 4.-.B..4 50% 1 200 7 200
3RF23 4.-.B..6 ON -time 1 150 6 600
3RF23 5.-.B..2 50 36 45 25 1200 1/h 54 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 5.-.B..4 50%
3RF23 5.-.B..6 ON -time
3RF23 7.-.B..2 70 70 62 27.5 1200 1/h 83 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 7.-.B..4 50%
3RF23 7.-.B..6 ON -time
3RF23 9.-.B..2 88 88 80 30 1200 1/h 117 0.5 10 1 150 6 600
3RF23 9.-.B..4 50%
3RF23 9.-.B..6 ON -time
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-
state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions.
4/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Type 3RF23 ..-...0. 3RF23 ..-...1. 3RF23 ..-...2. 3RF23 ..-...4.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC/DC operation AC operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 DC according to 24 AC/DC 110 ... 230 AC 4 ... 30 DC
EN 61131-2
Rated frequency Hz -- AC 50/60 Hz / -- DC 50/60 10% --
Actuating voltage, max. V 30 26.5 AC / 30 DC 253 30
Rated control current at Us A 15 15 6 15
Response voltage V 15 14 AC / 15 DC 90 4
• For tripping current mA >2 >2 >2 >2
Drop-out voltage V 5 5 40 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + additional AC: 40 + additional 40 + additional 1 + additional
max. one half-wave1) max. one half-wave1) max. one half-wave1) max. one half-wave1)
DC: 1 + additional
max. one half-wave1)
• OFF delay ms 1 + additional AC: 1 + additional 40 + additional 1 + additional
max. one half-wave max. one half-wave max. one half-wave max. one half-wave
DC: 1 + additional
4
max. one half-wave

means of LV HRC fuse links of gL/gG operational class or minia- with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
ture circuit-breakers. Siemens recommends the use of special problems.
SITOR semiconductor fuses. The table below lists the maximum
permissible fuses for each SIRIUS SC control gear. For protective devices with gL/gG operational class and for
3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2 3NW 3NW 3NW
3RF23 1.-....2 3NE1813-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1010 3NC1410 3NC2220 3NA2803 3NW6001-1 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB141
3RF23 1.-....4 3NE1813-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1010 3NC1410 3NC2220 3NA2801 3NW6001-1 3NW6101-1 -- 5SB141
3RF23 1.-....6 3NE1813-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1010 3NC1410 3NC2220 3NA2803-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 2.-....2 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2807 3NW6007-1 3NW6107-1 3NW6207-1 5SB171
3RF23 2.-....4 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2807 3NW6005-1 3NW6105-1 3NW6205-1 5SB171
3RF23 2.-....5 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2807-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 2.-....6 3NE1814-0 3NE8015-1 3NC1020 3NC1420 3NC2220 3NA2807-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 3.-....2 3NE1803-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2810 -- 3NW6107-1 3NW6207-1 5SB311
3RF23 3.-....4 3NE1803-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2807 -- 3NW6105-1 3NW6205-1 5SB311
3RF23 3.-....6 3NE1803-0 3NE8003-1 3NC1032 3NC1432 3NC2232 3NA2807-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 4.-....2 3NE1802-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1440 3NC2240 3NA2817 -- 3NW6117-1 3NW6217-1 5SB321
3RF23 4.-....5 3NE1802-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1440 3NC2240 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 4.-....6 3NE1802-0 3NE8017-1 -- 3NC1440 3NC2240 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 5.-....4 3NE1817-0 3NE8018-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6210-1 5SB321
3RF23 5.-....5 3NE1817-0 3NE8018-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2812-6 -- --
3RF23 5.-....6 3NE1817-0 3NE8018-1 -- 3NC1450 3NC2250 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 7.-....2 3NE1820-0 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2817 -- -- 3NW6217-1 5SB331
3RF23 7.-....4 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6210-1 5SB321
3RF23 7.-....5 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 7.-....6 3NE1020-2 3NE8020-1 -- -- 3NC2280 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 9.-....2 3NE1021-2 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC2200 3NA2817 -- -- 3NW6217-1 5SB331
3RF23 9.-....4 3NE1021-2 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812 -- -- 3NW6210-1 5SB321
3RF23 9.-....5 3NE1020-22) 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF23 9.-....6 3NE1020-22) 3NE8021-1 -- -- 3NC22802) 3NA2812-6 -- -- -- --

replaced.
2) These fuses have a smaller rated current than the solid-state contactors.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/19

Derating curves
1 4 1 4
1 2 1 2
in A
in W
e
1 0 1 0
M
8 8
6 6
4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 6 a
2 2
4
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 2 4 6 8 1 0 1 2
A m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e a in ° C D e v ic e c u r r e n t e in A
Type current 10.5 A (3RF23 10)
3 0 3 0
2 8
2 5
in A
in W
2 4
e
M
2 0 2 0
1 6
1 5
1 2
1 0
8
5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 7 a
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 4 8 1 2 1 6 2 0 2 4
Type current 20 A (3RF23 20)
4 0 4 4
4 0
3 5
in A
3 6
in W
3 0
e
3 2
M
2 5 2 8
2 4
2 0
2 0
1 5 1 6
1 0 1 2
8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 8 a
5
4
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 8 1 6 2 4 3 2 3 6
Type current 30 A (3RF23 30-.AA.., -.BA.., -.CA..)
4/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

40
32
35
in A
in W
28
e
30
M
24
Module power loss

25
20
20
16
15
12
10 8
NSB0_01528
5 4
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
Ambient temperature a in °C Device current e in A
4
Type current 30 A (3RF23 30-.DA..)
6 0 5 6
4 8
5 0
in A
in W
e
4 0
M
4 0
3 2
3 0
2 4
2 0
1 6
1 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 9 a
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 8 1 6 2 4 3 2 4 0 4 8
Type current 40 A (3RF23 40)1)
7 0 7 0
6 0 6 0
in A
in W
e
5 0 5 0
4 0 4 0
3 0 3 0
2 0 2 0
1 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 0 a
1 0
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/21

1 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 0
in A
in W
8 0
e
8 0
M
6 0
6 0
4 0
4 0
2 0
2 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 1 a
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 9 0
4
1 0 0 1 2 0
1 0 0
in A
in W
8 0
e
M
8 0
6 0
6 0
4 0
4 0
2 0
2 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 5 2 a
0 0
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 9 0
m a x T h e rm a l lim it c u r r e n t fo r in d iv id u a l m o u n tin g
m a x T h e rm a l lim it c u r r e n t fo r s id e - b y - s id e m o u n tin g
IE C C u rre n t a c c . to IE C 9 4 7 -4 -3 fo r in d iv id u a l m o u n tin g
IE C C u rre n t a c c . to IE C 9 4 7 -4 -3 fo r s id e - b y - s id e m o u n tin g
1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side

installation.
4/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Type current 10.5 A and 20 A
3RF23 10-..... 3RF23 20-..... Screw terminal Spring-loaded Ring terminal

3RF23 30-.DA.. 3RF23 10-1.... connection end connection
3RF23 20-1.... 3RF23 10-2.... 3RF23 10-3....
3RF23 30-1DA.. 3RF23 20-2.... 3RF23 20-3....
22,5 3RF23 30-2DA.. 3RF23 30-3DA..
5 5
5
73 119
4,
NSB0_01437
Standard mounting rail
47,5
85
100
69
69
90
20,8
25
14,5
14,5
12,5
4
54 100,5 12,5
5
4 4
77 123
89 135,5
Type current 30 A
Screw terminal Ring terminal end connection

3RF23 30-1.A..,-1.B.. 3RF23 30-3.A.., -3.B..
5 45
4,5
134,5 30
4,5
NSB0_01438
47,5
100
69
69
85
90
25
14,5
12,5 14,5
5
5
116 12,5
4 30
138,5
151
Type current 40 A and 50 A

3RF23 40-1... 3RF23 40-3....
3RF23 50-1.... 3RF23 50-3....
5 45
4,5
30
4,5
134,5
NSB0_01439
47,5
69
85
100
69
90
25
14,5
12,5 14,5
5
5
116 12,5
4 30
138,5 67
151
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/23


Type current 70 A

3RF23 70-1.... 3RF23 70-3....
1 3 5
1 4 1 1 2 3
4 7 ,5
6 9
6 9
1 0 0
8 0
2 5
1 4 ,5
1 4 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 1
1 2 ,5
1 2 2 ,5 4 ,5 8 1 2 ,5
1 4 5
1 5 7 ,5
4
Type current 88 A

3RF23 90-1.... 3RF23 90-3....
1 8 0
1 5 0 ,5 1 6 8
2 2 ,5
4 7 ,5
2 0 0
1 8 0
6 9
6 9
2 5
1 4 ,5
1 2 ,5
1 4 ,5
1 2 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 2 a
1 2 7 ,5 4 ,5
1 6 2 ,5
Terminal cover
■ Schematics
3RF29 00-3PA88
Version Version
3 7 ,5 1 2
1 L 1 L
PE A1 + PE A1
A2 - A2
3 6 ,5
2 9
NSB0_01464
NSB0_01465
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 2
2 T 2 T
2 7 ,5 2 2 ,5
4/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
■ Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching The plug-in connection to control the solid-state
devices switching devices can simply remain in use.
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of The following function modules are available:
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can • Converters
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by
clicking them into place; straight away the necessary • Load monitoring
connections are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. • Heating current monitoring
• Power controllers
Type 3RF29 ..-.E... 3RF29 ..-.F... 3RF29 ..-.G... 3RF29 ..-.H... 3RF29 ..-.J...
General data
Ambient temperature
4
- Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications1)
- Induced RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBmV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
Connection, auxiliary/control
contacts, screw terminal
• Conductor cross-section mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), 1 x (AWG 20 ... 12)
• Stripped length mm 7
Converter, diameter of hole mm -- 7 17
1) Note limitations for power controller function module on
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/25

General data
Type 3RF29 ..-.E..8 3RF29 ..-.F..8 3RF29 ..-.G..3 3RF29 ..-.G..6

Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V -- 1) 110 ... 230 400 ... 600
• Tolerance % -- -15/+10
• Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V -- 600
Voltage detection
• Measuring range V -- 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660
Mains voltage, fluctuation % -- 20
compensation
1) Versions are independent of the main circuit.
Type 3RF29 ..-.H..3 3RF29 ..-.H..6 3RF29 ..-.J..3 3RF29 ..-.J..6

Main circuit
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60
4
Voltage detection
• Measuring range V 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660
Mains voltage, fluctuation % 20
compensation
Type 3RF29 ..-...0. 3RF29 ..-...1. 3RF29 ..-...3.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC/DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 24 110
Rated control current mA 15 15 15
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 50/60
Actuating voltage, max. V 30 30 121
Rated control current mA 15 15 15
At maximum voltage
Type 3RF29 20-.F 3RF29 20-.G 3RF29 50-.G 3RF29 90-.G

Current measurement
Rated operational current Ie A 20 20 50 90
Current measurement
• Teach range A 0.65 ... 20 0.56 ... 20 1.62 ... 50 2.93 ... 90
• Measuring range A 0 ... 22 0 … 22 0 … 55 0 … 99
• Minimum partial load current A 0.65 0.65 1.6 2.9
• Number of partial loads 1 ... 6 1 ... 12
Type 3RF29 20-.H 3RF29 50-.H 3RF29 90-.H 3RF29 16-.J 3RF29 32-.J
Current measurement
Rated operational current Ie A 20 50 90 16 32
Current measurement
• Teach range A 4 ... 20 10 ... 50 18 ... 90 0.42 ... 16 0.8 ... 32
• Measuring range A 0 ... 22 0 ... 55 4 ... 99 0 ... 16 0 ... 32
• Minimum partial load current A -- 0.42 0.8
• Number of partial loads -- 1 ... 6
4/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Converters
■ Overview
Converters for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices
These modules are used to convert analog drive signals, such
as those output from many temperature controllers for example,
into a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The connected
solid-state contactors and relays can therefore regulate the
output of a load as a percentage.
■ Design
Installation
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid-
state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state
switching devices. The connector on the solid-state switching
devices from the control circuit can be used on the converter
without rewiring.
■ Function
4
The analog value from a temperature controller is present at the
0 ... 10 V terminals. This controls the on-to-off period, as a
function of voltage. The period duration is predefined at one
second. Conversion of the analog voltage is linear in the voltage
range from 0.1 to 9.9 V. At voltages below 0.1 V the connected
switching device is not activated, while at voltages above 9.9 V
the connected switching device is always activated.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/27

Load monitoring and heating current monitoring
■ Overview Partial load faults, "Basic" load monitoring

If a deviation of at least 1/6 of the stored setpoint value is de-
Load monitoring for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching tected, a fault is signaled. The fault is indicated by a "Fault" LED
devices and by activation of the fault signaling output.
Many faults can be quickly detected by monitoring a load circuit LED OK Fault
connected to the solid-state switching device, as made possible
with this module. Examples include the failure of load elements Partial load Thyristor defect Mains failure/
failure/ Fuse rupture
(up to 6 in the basic version or up to 12 in the extended version), Load
alloyed power semiconductors, a lack of voltage or a break in a short-circuit
load circuit. A fault is indicated by one or more LEDs and re- ON/OFF ✓ ✓ -- ✓
ported to the controller by way of a PLC-compatible output.
Current ✓ ✓ ✓ --
The operating principle is based on permanent monitoring of the flowing
current intensity. This figure is continuously compared with the Group fault -- ✓ ✓ ✓
reference value stored once during commissioning by the
simple press of a button. In order to detect the failure of one of ✓ LED is lit
several loads, the current difference must be 1/6 (in the basic -- LED is not lit
version and heating current monitoring) or 1/12 (in the extended
version) of the reference value. In the event of a fault, an output Partial load faults, "Extended" load monitoring
is actuated and one or more LEDs indicate the fault. and heating current monitoring
Depending on the setting of the "response time" potentiometer, a
4
■ Design deviation of at least 1/12 of the stored setpoint value – or 1/6 of

the heating current monitoring – after a response time of
Installation between 100 ms and 3 s is signaled as a fault. The fault is indi-
cated by a "Load" LED and by activation of the fault signaling
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid- output.
state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state
switching devices. Because of the special design, the straight- The potentiometer can also be used to determine the response
through transformer of the load monitoring module covers the behavior of the fault signaling output. When delay values are set
lower main power connection. The cable to the load is simply in the left-hand half, the fault signal is stored. This can only be
pushed through and secured with the terminal screw. reset by switching on and off by means of the control supply
voltage.
■ Function When settings are made on the right-hand side, the fault output
is automatically reset after the deviation has been corrected.
The function module is activated when an "ON" signal is applied
(IN terminal). The module constantly monitors the current level Voltage compensation, "Extended" load monitoring and
and compares this with the setpoint value. heating current monitoring
Startup In addition to the current, the load voltage is also detected. This
makes it possible to compensate for influences on the current
Pressing the "Teach" button or actuating the input IN2 switches strength resulting from voltage fluctuations.
the device on; the current through the solid-state switching
device is detected and is stored as the setpoint. During this Thyristor fault
process the two lower (red1)) LEDs flash alternately;
simultaneous maintained light from the 3 (red1)) LEDs indicates If a current greater than the leakage current of the controls is
the conclusion of the teaching process. measured in the deenergized state, the device triggers a
thyristor fault after the set time delay. This means that the fault
The "Teach" button can also be used to switch on the connected output is activated and the "Fault" ("Thyristor"1)) LED lights up.
solid-state switching device briefly for test purposes. In this case
the "ON" LED is switched on. Supply fault
If no current is measured in the energized state, the device
triggers a supply fault after the set time delay. This means that
the fault output is activated and the "Fault" ("Supply"1)) LED lights
up.
1) "Extended" load monitoring and heating current monitoring
4/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Power controllers
Power controllers for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching Startup
devices
Pressing the "Teach" button switches the device on; the current
The following functions have been integrated: through the solid-state switching device and the mains voltage
• Power control regulator with proportional-action control are detected and stored. The resultant output is taken as the
for adjusting the power of the connected load. Here, the 100% output for the setpoint selection. During this process the
setpoint is set with a rotary knob on the module as a two lower red LEDs flash alternately. Simultaneous maintained
percentage with reference to the 100 % power stored as a set- light from the three red LEDs indicates the completion of the
point. In this way the power is kept constant even in the event "Teach" process.
of voltage fluctuations or a change in load resistance. The "Teach" button can also be used to switch on the connected
• Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable solid-state switching device briefly for test purposes. In this case
voltage ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase the "ON" LED is switched on.
control. This is useful above all with loads such as lamps
which have an inrush transient current. Setpoint selection
• Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, alloyed The setting on the setpoint potentiometer (P) determines how the
power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a break in the load setpoint selection is to be made:
circuit. External setpoint selection
■ Application At 0 % the setpoint selection is set using an external 0 ... 10 V
4
analog signal (terminals IN / 0 ... 10 V). The device is switched
The power controller adjusts the current in the connected load on and off via the power supply (terminals A1 / A2).
by means of a solid-state switching device depending on a set- Internal setpoint selection
point. Changes in the mains voltage or in the load resistance are
thus compensated by the power controller. The setpoint can be Above 0 % the setpoint is set using the potentiometer. To allow
predefined externally as a 0 to 10 V signal or internally by means this, the potential at terminal A1 must additionally be applied at
of a potentiometer. Depending on the setting of the potentiome- the IN terminal. After removal of the "ON" signal, the switching
ter (tR), the adjustment is carried out according to the principle module is switched off.
of full-wave control or generalized phase control.
Inrush current limitation
Full-wave control The ramp time (tR) for a voltage ramp on switching on is set with
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required the potentiometer for the purpose of inrush current limitation. If a
setpoint by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration is time longer than 0 s is set, the device operates according to the
predefined at one second. generalized phase control principle. If 0 s is set, there is no volt-
age ramp and the device operates according to the principle of
Generalized phase control full-wave control.
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required Load fault
setpoint by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe
the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for indus- If upon switching on with voltage applied the current flowing is
trial networks, a choke rated at at least 200 mH must be not greater than the leakage current of the control, the device
included in the load circuit. triggers a load fault. The fault relay is activated and the "Load"
LED lights up.
■ Design Thyristor fault
Installation If a current greater than the leakage current of the control is
measured in the deenergized state, the device triggers a thyris-
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid- tor fault. The fault relay is activated and the "Thyristor" LED lights
state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state up.
switching devices. Because of the special design, the straight-
through transformer of the function module covers the lower Supply fault
main power connection. The cable to the load is simply pushed
If no current is measured in the energized state, the device
through and secured with the terminal screw.
triggers a supply fault. The fault relay is activated and the
"Supply" LED lights up.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/29

Converters Basic load monitoring
3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 00-0FA08
2 1 ,5 2 2 ,5 2 5 ,5
2 1 ,5 2 2 ,5
8 3 ,5
1 0 1 ,5
1 2 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 3 4
4
2 5 ,5
3 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 3 5
1 9 ,5
3 8 ,5 2 8 ,5
"Extended" load monitoring and heating current monitoring Power controllers

3RF29 ..-0GA.. and -0JA.. 3RF29 ..-0HA..
4 4 4 4
4 0 4 5 4 0 4 5
1 1 1 ,5
1 1 1 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 4 4
2 9 ,5
2 9 ,5
3 8 3 1 ,5 3 8 3 1 ,5
■ Schematics
Converters Extended load monitoring Heating current monitoring Power controllers
3) 3) 3)
1) A1+ A1 + IN1/ON A1 +
1) 1) 1)
A2 - A2 A2 A2
NSB0_01466
0V - IN A1 + IN/0
10 V + 14 IN2/Ref 10 V +
11 11 11
NC NC
Basic load monitoring < < <
12 12 12
NSB0_01468a
NSB0_01469a
comp. comp. comp.

NSB0_01529
3) 3) 3)
1) A1 + 2) L/N 2) L/N 2) L/N

A2 -
NSB0_01467
IN
2) OUT
1) Internal connection. 3) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MW per path).

2) Straight-through transformers.
4/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Switching examples
Converters Basic load monitoring
1/N/PE 50 Hz/230 V AC/DC 24 V 1/N/PE 50 Hz 230 V DC 24 V
L L +/~ L L+
N L /~ N L
PE PE
F1 F2 F1
S1
K1 ON/OFF K1 A1
1 L L L+
1 L
A1 + PE A1 +
~
A1 + 3) 1) A1+
1) A1 A2
< SPS/PLC
A2 A2
A2 ~

0V D out
0V IN
D in
10 V + 10 V + 2 T 2) OUT
2 T
4
NSB0_01460b
NSB0_01459c
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
R
Extended load monitoring Power controllers

3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V 3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L1 L1
L2 DC 24 V L2 DC 24 V
L3 L+ L3 L+
N 4) L N 4) L
PE PE 6)
F1 F1
7)
L1
K1 A1 K1 A1
1 L 5)
L L+ 1 L 5) L L+
PE A1 + PE A1 +
3) 1) A1 + 3) 1) A1 +
A2 - A2
A2 A2
D out A out
IN IN/0
D in A out +
2 T 14 2 T 10 V +
< 11 11
comp. NC
comp. D in
12 12
5)
5)
2) L/N 2) L/N
NSB0_01461c
NSB0_01436c
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12

R1
1) Internal connection to the solid-state relay/contactor. 5) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MW per path).
2) Straight-through transformer. 6) Grounding of connection L- is recommended.
3) Make PE/ground connection according to installation regulations. 7) A 200 mH choke must be used when operating with leading-edge phase in
4) Connection of L/N contact with: order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage
- Load monitoring/power controller 3RF29 ..-0.A.3 according to Class A.
on neutral conductor N (e.g. 230 V),
- Load monitoring/pwoer controller 3RF29 ..-0.A.6
on a second phase (e.g. 400 V).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 4/31

Notes
4
4/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Protection Equipment
5
5/2 Introduction
3RV Motor Starter Protectors

up to 100 A
General data
5/4 - Overview
5/4 - Design
5/6 - Function
5/6 - Configuration
5/9 - Technical specifications
5/19 - Characteristic curves
5/20 - Dimensional drawings
5/23 - Schematics
5/23 - More information
Accessories
5/24 Mountable accessories
5
5/29 Rotary operating mechanisms
5/31 Mounting accessories
Overload Relays
5/39 General data
3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays
5/43 3RB20, 3RB21 for standard
applications
5/53 3RB22, 3RB23 for High-Feature
applications
5/67 Accessories
3RU1 Thermal Overload Relays
5/68 3RU11 for standard applications
5/78 Accessories
Introduction
■ Overview
Type 3RV10 3RV11 3RV13 3RV14 3RV16 3RV16 3RV17

3RV motor starter protectors up to 100 A
Applications
Plant protection ✓1) ✓1) -- -- -- -- ✓
Motor protection ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Motor protection with -- ✓ -- -- -- -- --
overload relay function
Starter combinations -- -- ✓ -- -- -- --
Transformer protection -- -- -- ✓ -- -- --
Fuse monitoring -- -- -- -- ✓ -- --
Voltage transformer -- -- -- -- -- ✓ --
circuit-breakers
for distance protection
Size S00, S0, S2, S3 S0, S2, S3 S0, S2, S3 S0, S2 S00 S00 S3
Rated current In
Size S00 A up to 12 -- -- -- up to 0.2 up to 3 --
Size S0 A up to 25 up to 25 up to 25 up to 20 -- -- --
Size S2 A up to 50 up to 50 up to 50 up to 40 -- -- --
5
Size S3 A up to 100 up to 100 up to 100 -- -- -- up to 70

Rated operational V 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 400 AC 690 AC
voltage Ue
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 162/3 ... 60 50/60
Trip class CLASS 10 CLASS 10 -- CLASS 10 -- -- --
CLASS 20
Thermal A 0.11 ... 0.16 0.11 ... 0.16 None3) 0.11 ... 0.16 0.2 1.4 ... 3 10 ... 70
overload release up to up to up to non-adjustable
A 80 ... 100 80 ... 100 28 ... 40
Overcurrent release
Multiple of the 13 times 13 times 13 times 20 times 6 times 4 to 7 times 13 times
rated current
Short-circuit breaking kA 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100 100 50 100
capacity Icu at 400 V AC
Accessories
For sizes S00 S0 S2 S3 S0 S2 S3 S0 S2 S3 S0 S2 S00 S00 S3
Auxiliary switch ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓5)
Alarm switch -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- --
Undervoltage release ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Shunt release ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Isolator module -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- -- --
Insulated three-phase ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
busbar system
Busbar adapter for ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
motor starter protectors
Door-coupling rotary -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- ✓
operating mechanism
Remote motorized operating -- -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ -- -- --
mechanism
Link module ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Enclosure for surface ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
mounting
Enclosure for flush mounting ✓ ✓ -- -- ✓ -- -- ✓ -- -- ✓ -- ✓ ✓ --
Front plate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Cage Clamp infeed system ✓4) ✓ -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- ✓ -- -- -- --
1) For symmetrical loading of the three phases. 5) Only lateral auxiliary switches.
2) With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V AC.
3) For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be ✔ available
used. -- not available
4) Only for motor starter protectors with Cage Clamp terminals.

Introduction
Type 3RU11 3RB20 3RB21 3RB22/3RB23

Overload relays up to 630 A
Applications
Plant protection ✓1) ✓1) ✓1) ✓1)
Motor protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Alternating current, 3-phase ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Alternating current, 1-phase ✓ – – ✓
Direct current ✓ – – –
Size of contactor S00, S0, S2, S3 S00 ... S12 S00 ... S12 S00 ... S12
Size S00 A up to 12 up to 12 up to 12
Size S0 A up to 25 up to 25 up to 25 } up to 25
Size S2 A up to 50 up to 50 up to 50
Size S3 A up to 100 up to 100 up to 100 } up to 100
Size S6 A -- up to 200 up to 200 up to 200
Size S10/S12, size 14 (3TF6) A -- up to 630 up to 630 up to 630
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690/1000 AC2) 690/1000 AC2) 690/1000 AC2) 690/1000 AC3)
5
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Trip class CLASS 10 CLASS 10, CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30 CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30
CLASS 20 adjustable adjustable
Thermal A 0.11 ... 0.16 -- -- --
overload release up to
A 80 ... 100
Solid-state A -- 0.1 ... 0.4 0.1 ... 0.4 0.3 ... 3
overload release up to up to up to
A 160 ... 630 160 ... 630 63 ... 630
Rating for induction motor at kW 0.04 0.04 ... 0.09 0.04 ... 0.09 0.09 ... 1.1
400 V AC to up to up to up to
kW 45 90 ... 450 90 ... 450 37 ... 450
Accessories
For sizes S00 S0 S2 S3 S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/ S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/ S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/
S12 S12 S12
4) 4) 4) 4) ✓ ✓ 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4)
Terminal brackets for stand-alone ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
installation
Mechanical RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Cable release for RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Electrical remote RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- Integrated in the unit Integrated in the unit
Terminal covers -- -- ✓ ✓ -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Sealable covers Integrated in the unit ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for setting knobs
1) The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the
assigned electrical loads (e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching
and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
2) Size S3 and larger up to 1000 V AC.
3) Sizes S6 and S10/12 up to 1000 V AC.
4) Stand-alone installation without accessories is possible.
✔ available
-- not available

3RV Motor Starter Protectors up to 100 A
General data
■ Overview
3RV1 motor starter protectors are compact, current limiting
motor starter protectors, which are optimized for load feeders.
The motor starter protectors are used for switching and protect-
ing induction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and for other
loads with rated currents of up to 100 A.
Type of construction
The motor starter protectors are available in four sizes:
• Size S00 – width 45 mm,
max. rated current 12 A,
at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW.
at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW.
S0 motor starter protectors max. rated current 100 A,
■ Design
Screw terminal Mounting
3RV1 motor starter protectors of sizes S00 and S0 are fitted with The motor starter protectors are snap-mounted on a 35 mm
terminals with captive screws and clamping pieces, allowing the standard mounting rail to EN 50022.
5
connection of 2 conductors with different cross-sections.

The box terminals of the S2 and S3 motor starter protectors also 3RB19 00-0B
enable 2 conductors with different cross-sections to be
connected. With the exception of S3 motor starter protectors
which are equipped with 4 mm Allen screws, all terminal screws
are tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2.
The box terminals of the S3 motor starter protectors can be
removed in order to connect conductors with cable lugs or NSB0_01072a
connecting bars. A terminal cover is available as touch protec-

tion and to ensure that the required clearances and creepage
distances are maintained if the box terminals are removed.
Cage Clamp terminal
As an alternative to screw terminals, S00 motor starter protectors
are also available with Cage Clamp terminal.
A standard mounting rail with a height of 15 mm is required for

size S3 motor starter protectors. A 75 mm standard mounting rail
can be used as an alternative for size S3.
S2 and S3 motor starter protectors can also be screwed directly
onto a base plate.
The 3RB19 00-0B push-in lugs are available for screw mounting
of S00 and S0 motor starter protectors.
Motor starter protectors with Cage Clamp terminal

This screwless connection technique, already familiar from
modular terminals, clamps the conductors using a spring-
loaded terminal and is shock-proof and vibration-proof.
Motor starter protectors with Cage Clamp terminal allow
independent connection of two conductors per terminal.

General data
3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breakers up to 3 A age transformer circuit-breaker. This changeover contact can be
used as 1 NO (11-14) or 1 NC (11-12). Thanks to the high con-
The voltage transformer circuit-breaker widely corresponds with tact stability of these auxiliary contacts at the lowest possible
the SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protector, size S00. Two special rated operational currents, they are also suitable for modern
features are taken into account for safe prevention of false trip- solid-state distance protection devices.
ping of the distance protection device.
The laterally mounted auxiliary switches of the SIRIUS range can
Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection be used for signaling functions. They cannot be used for
The main contacts of the circuit-breaker are opened if the volt- blocking the distance protection device.
age transformer circuit-breaker is tripped or switched off. The Impedance across the main contacts
distance protection would falsely interpret low impedance as a
fault, which results in immediate power cut-out within only a few There is only minor current flow across the main contacts of the
milliseconds. voltage transformer circuit-breaker.
To prevent this fault response, special auxiliary contacts with a To ensure reliable functioning of the distance protection, transfer
time-dependent assignment to the circuit-breaker’s main con- resistance of the main contacts must be minimal and nearly
tacts (see timing diagram) must be provided. The distance pro- constant throughout the endurance of the circuit-breaker.
tection is blocked with the help of these auxiliary contacts and
thus prevents false tripping. This is implemented with suitable contacts and contact materials
for the 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breaker.
An auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection device is
available as 1 changeover contact fitted permanently in the volt-
ON OFF Tripping due to short-circuit
M a in C o n ta c ts 0 1 1 0 1 0
1NO 11-14 +20 -10 5
NSB0_01098b
1NC 11-12
+20 -10 5
(1 changeover contact)
5
0 t (ms) 0 t (ms) 0 t (ms)
Timing diagram of auxiliary switches for blocking distance protection
Rules for mounting motor starter protectors

When mounting motor starter protectors, the following clear-
ances must be maintained to grounded or live parts and to cable
ducts made of molded plastic.
Motor starter protector Distance to grounded or live parts
according to IEC 60947-2
Type Size Ue Y X N Z Z X
V mm mm mm
3RV1. 1 S00 up to 690 20 70 9 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
Y
3RV1. 2 S0 up to 500 30 90 9
3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ...
up to 690 50 90 30
3RV1. 3 S2 up to 690 50 140 30
3RV1. 4 S3 up to 240 50 167 10
Y
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
N S B 0 1 3 0 4 b
up to 440 70 167 10
up to 500 110 167 10
up to 690 150 167 30
Rules for mounting motor starter protectors with limiter function

Motor starter protector Distance to grounded or
live parts according to
IEC 60947-2
Type Size Ue Y X N Z Z X
V mm mm mm
3RV1. 2 S0 up to 500 40 90 10 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
up to 690 50 90 30
Y
3RV1. 3 S2 up to 690 50 140 10 3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ...

3RV1. 4 S3 up to 500 110 167 10
up to 690 150 167 30
Y
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
N S B 0 1 0 7 1 b

General data
Standard mounting for S0, S2 and S3 Structure for S0 for the setting ranges
5.5 A ... 8 A to 20 A ... 25 A for 690 V
Line side
Wiring module
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
Size S0: 3RV19 15-1AB
Size S2: 3RV19 35-1A 3RV1... 3RV1...
Size S3: 3RV19 43-3D 3RV1... 3RV1...
(Caution: The wiring module
demands 10 mm spacing
NSB0_01069
between the motor starter
NSB0_01070
protectors)
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
Line Load side Load side

side
■ Function ■ Configuration
Releases Prevention of unintended tripping
3RV1 motor starter protectors are equipped with inverse-time In order to prevent unintended tripping due to the integrated
delayed overload releases based on the bimetal principle and phase failure sensitivity, motor starter protectors should always
with instantaneous overcurrent releases (electromagnetic short- be connected to ensure current flows through all three main
circuit releases). conducting paths.
The overload releases can be adjusted in accordance with the Short-circuit protection
load current. The overcurrent releases are permanently set to a
value 13 times the rated current and thus enable trouble-free If a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of 3RV1 motor
start-up of motors. starter protectors isolate the faulty load feeder from the mains
supply and thus prevent further damage.
Motor starter protectors for line-side transformer protection are
Motor starter protectors with a short-circuit breaking capacity of
5
set to 20 times the rated current to prevent tripping as a result of

high transformer inrush current. 50 kA or 100 kA are virtually short-circuit proof at a voltage of
400 V AC, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be
The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized expected in practice.
adjustments to the set current.
Motor protection
Trip classes
The tripping characteristics of 3RV10/3RV11 motor starter
The trip classes of thermally delayed releases are based on the protectors are designed mainly to protect induction motors.
tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the operational current in cold state
(excerpt from IEC 60947-4): They are therefore referred to as motor starter protectors.
• CLASS 10A 2 s < tA < 10 s The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the set-
• CLASS 10 4 s < tA < 10 s ting scale. Factory setting of the short-circuit release is 13 times
the rated current of the motor starter protector. This permits trou-
• CLASS 20 6 s < tA < 20 s ble-free start-up and ensures that the motor is properly pro-
• CLASS 30 9 s < tA < 30 s tected.
The motor starter protector must trip within this time! The phase failure sensitivity of the motor starter protector en-
sures that it is tripped in time in the event of a phase failure and
Operating mechanisms overcurrents that occur as a result in the other phases.
S00 motor starter protectors are activated by a rocker operating Motor starter protectors with thermal overload releases are nor-
mechanism and S0, S2 and S3 motor starter protectors by a ro- mally designed in accordance with trip class 10 (CLASS 10).
tary operating mechanism. If the motor starter protector trips, the Motor starter protectors of sizes S2 and S3 are also available in
rotary operating mechanism switches to the tripped position to trip class 20 (CLASS 20) and therefore allow motors to be
indicate this. Before the motor starter protector is reclosed, the started up under arduous conditions.
rotary operating mechanism must be reset manually to the 0 po-
sition to prevent the motor starter protector from closing by mis- Motor protection with overload relay function
take before the fault has been cleared. The motor starter protec- (automatic reset)
tor can then only be set to the I position afterwards. Motor starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay
In the case of motor starter protectors with rotary operating function are designed for the protection of induction motors.
mechanisms, an electrical signal can be output by an alarm They are equipped with the same short-circuit release and over-
switch to indicate that the motor starter protector has tripped. load release as motor starter protectors for motor protection
All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a without overload relay function.
padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm). The motor starter protector always remains closed in the event
The motor starter protector isolating function complies with of an overload. The overload release activates only two auxiliary
IEC 60947-2. contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The overload trip can be signaled to a
higher-level control with the help of these auxiliary contacts.
Generally, it is also possible to open a downstream contactor
directly.
The overload signal is reset automatically. The motor starter pro-
tector itself only trips if a short-circuit occurs downstream.

General data
Plant protection
The 3RV10/3RV11 motor starter protectors for motor protection
are also suitable for plant protection.
In order to prevent premature tripping due to phase failure sen-
sitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly
loaded. The conducting paths must be connected in series in
the case of single-phase loads.
The 3RV17 motor starter protectors are likewise suitable for plant
protection and at the same time they are approved as Circuit
Breaker according to UL489 and CSA 22.2 No. 5-02.
Short-circuit protection for starter combinations
The 3RV13 motor starter protectors for starter combinations in
sizes S0, S2 and S3 provide short-circuit protection with the help
of a contactor and overload relay combination.
Like the motor starter protectors for motor protection, they are
equipped with short-circuit releases which are permanently set
to a value equivalent to 13 times the rated current of the motor Motor starter protector for fuse monitoring
starter protectors. They are not equipped with overload re- Notes on safety
leases.
When monitoring fuses with safety isolating functions, a warning
On overload, the overload relay triggers the contactor, the sign must be affixed near the fuses indicating that voltage may
motor starter protector remains closed. still be present through the parallel circuit of the monitoring
Only when a short-circuit occurs in the feeder does the motor equipment assumed to be isolated after the fuse has been
starter protector trip as well. removed and if the monitoring equipment is not switched off.
The motor starter protector for starter combinations must always We recommend the following text for this warning:
be used in combination with an overload relay because the mo- Important!
5
tor starter protector alone cannot protect the motor and itself For safety isolation, also switch off fuse monitoring equipment
against overload. with the item code ......
Transformer protection The 3RV16 11-0BD10 motor starter protector for fuse monitoring
When control-power transformers are protected on the line side, is suitable for the following voltages: AC 50 Hz/60 Hz from 24 V
the high inrush currents generated at the time the transformers to 690 V and up to 450 V DC. Fuse monitoring with
are switched on often cause spurious tripping in the protection 3RV16 11-0BD10 motor starter protectors is not permissible in
mechanisms. feeders with power controllers that can induce DC feedback of
higher values when an error occurs.
3RV14 motor starter protectors in sizes S0 and S2 for protecting
transformers are therefore fitted with overcurrent releases which With parallel cables and meshed systems, the motor starter pro-
are permanently set in the factory to a value equivalent to tector will only trip, and a signal will be output to indicate this, if
20 times the rated current. the voltage difference across the motor starter protector is at
least 24 V.
Motor starter protectors can thus be used to provide line-side
protection for transformers, the inrush peak currents of which are Use of IT systems (IT networks)
up to 30 times the rated current. 3RV1 motor starter protectors are suitable for operation in
This version of motor starter protector is not necessary in the IT systems according to IEC 60947-2. In the event of a 3-pole
case of control-power transformers with low inrush currents, short-circuit, their response in this system is the same as in
such as control transformers from Siemens. 3RV1 motor starter others: Therefore, the same short-circuit breaking capacity
protectors for motor protection can be used in this case. applies, see Technical Specifications of Icu and Ics.
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches An initial fault (ground fault) does not necessarily force immedi-
ate shutdown of the network when operating IT systems. If a
The 3RV10, 3RV11, 3RV13, 3RV14 and 3RV16 motor starter second independent error occurs (ground fault), the switching
protectors comply with the isolating function to IEC 60947-2, capacity of the motor starter protector might be reduced.
therefore they can be used – taking IEC 60204-1 into account –
as main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches. This is the case if both ground faults occur in different phases
and if one of the ground faults occurs on the line-side and the
3RV19 .6-2. door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for other on the secondary side of the motor starter protector.
heavy duty also comply with the requirements for the isolating
function. In order to maintain the short-circuit function of the motor starter
protector even with two independent ground faults (double
Fuse monitoring ground faults), the reduced short-circuit breaking capacity with
The 3RV16 11-0BD10 motor starter protector size S00 is used for double ground faults must be taken into account in IT systems
fuse monitoring. IcuIT (see Technical Specifications). If a ground fault is instanta-
neously recognized and remedied (ground-fault monitoring), the
A fuse is connected in parallel with each conducting path of the risk of double ground fault and thus reduced short-circuit
starter protector. When a fuse blows, the current flows through breaking capacity IcuIT can be minimized.
the parallel conducting path and trips the motor starter protector.
The 3RV16 11-0BD10 motor starter protector must be equipped
with a transverse or lateral auxiliary switch (accessories) that
signals a tripping operation of the motor starter protector and
thus the tripping of the fuse, or switches off all poles of the dis-
rupted electric circuit with the help of an appropriate switching
device.

General data
Switching of DC currents The response values of the overload release remain unchanged;
the response values of a short-circuit release increase by
3RV1 motor starter protectors for alternating currents are also approximately 30 % for DC. The recommended circuits for
suitable for DC switching. DC switching can be seen in the table below.
The maximum permissible DC voltage per conducting path
must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series
circuit with 2 or 3 conducting paths.
Recommended circuit for size S00 to S3 3RV1 motor starter protectors
Recommended circuit for Maximum permitted Notes
size S00 to S3 3RV1 motor DC voltage Ue
starter protectors
L L 150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded system1)

If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately
(ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled.
M
NSB00001
L L 300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system

The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual current path, so that there are
always 2 current paths in series in the event of a ground fault.
M
NSB00002
L L 450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system

3 current paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected current
path.
M
NSB00003
1) It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe cut-out even in the
event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts.
3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breakers up to 3 A

5
The voltage transformer circuit-breaker protects the secondary

side of voltage transformers used to connect protection equip-
ment with voltage-dependent starting. The circuit-breaker is
used for distance protection with low-impedance starting.
Special auxiliary contacts reliably prevent low-impedance start-
ing from triggering distance protection if only one fault has
occurred in the transformer line.
The voltage transformer circuit-breaker can also be used to
safely disconnect the distance protection device from the
voltage transformer. In this case, the special auxiliary contacts
also prevent erratic triggering of the distance protection.
Additional fuses are not required. A "Fuse Failure Monitor" (FFM)
is also not required.

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icn according to in the table, a back-up fuse is required. Alternatively, a motor
IEC 60947-2 starter protector with a limiter function can be connected up-
stream.
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capac-
ity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in
the 3RV1 motor starter protectors with different inception volt- the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
ages dependent of the rated current In of the motor starter pro- then applies as specified on the fuse.
tectors.
Fuseless construction
Motor starter protector infeed is permissible at the upper or Motor starter protector contactor combinations for short-circuit
lower terminals without restricting the rated data. If the short-cir- currents up to 50 kA can be ordered in the form of fuseless load
cuit current at the installation point exceeds that rated short-cir- feeders according to chapter “Load Feeders, Motor Starters and
cuit breaking capacity of the motor starter protector as specified Soft Starters“.
Motor starter Rated up to 240 V AC1) up to 400 V AC1)/ up to 440 V AC1)/ up to 500 V AC1)/ up to 690 V AC1)
protector current In 415 V AC2) 460 V AC2) 525 V AC2)
Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics max.
(gL/gG) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) fuse
(gL/gG)3)4)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
3RV10, 0.16 ... 0.8 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
3RV16 11-0BD10 1 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
Size S00 1.25 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 2 2 20
1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 2 2 20
2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 35 2 2 35
2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 35 2 2 35
3.2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40
4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40
5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50
5
6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50
8 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 50 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
10 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
12 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80
3RV1. 2 0.16 ... 1.25 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
Size S0 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 25
2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 25
3.2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 32
4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 32
5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 32
6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 50
8 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 63 42 21 63 6 3 50
10 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 63 6 3 50
12.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 80 6 3 63
16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
22 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
25 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
3RV1. 3 16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63
Size S2 20 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
25 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
32 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
40 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
45 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
50 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80
3RV1. 41 40 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63
Size S3 50 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 80
63 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80
75 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100
90 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125
100 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125
3RV1. 42 / 3RV17 42 16 / 10 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 30 15 80 12 7 63
Size S3 20 / 15 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 30 15 80 12 7 63
with increased 25 / 20 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 30 15 80 12 7 63
switching capacity 32 / 25 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 22 11 100 12 7 63
40 / 30 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 18 9 160 12 6 80
50 / 35 ... 40 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 100 50 ° 15 7.5 160 10 5 100
63 / 45 ... 50 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 70 50 200 15 7.5 160 7.5 4 100
75 / 60 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 70 50 200 10 5 160 6 3 125
90 / 70 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 70 50 200 10 5 160 6 3 160
100 / -- 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 70 50 200 10 5 160 6 3 160
Short-circuit proof up to at least 50 kA
° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit proof up to 100 kA
1) 10% overvoltage. 3) Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the installation
2) 5% overvoltage. point > Icu.
4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system In the colored areas, IcuIT is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is 50 kA.
(IT network) according to IEC 60947-2 Therefore the motor starter protectors are short-circuit proof in
these ranges.
3RV1 motor starter protectors are suitable for operation in
IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are Icu und If the short-circuit current at the installation point exceeds that
Ics. In case of double ground fault on different phases at the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor starter protec-
input and output side of a motor starter protector, the special tor as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The max-
short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT applies. The specifications imum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the ta-
in the table below apply to 3RV1 motor starter protectors. bles. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as
specified on the fuse.
Motor starter Rated up to 240 V AC1) up to 400 V AC1)/415 V AC2) up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2) up to 690 V AC1)
protector current In IcuIT max. fuse IcuIT max. fuse IcuIT max. fuse IcuIT max. fuse
(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)
Type A kA A kA A kA A kA A
3RV10 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °
3RV16 11-0BD10 0.8 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 2 16
Size S00 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 2 16
1.25 100 ° 2 20 2 20 2 20
1.6 100 ° 2 20 2 20 2 20
2 100 ° 2 35 2 35 2 35
2.5 100 ° 2 35 2 35 2 35
3.2 100 ° 2 40 2 40 2 40
4 100 ° 2 40 2 40 2 40
5 100 ° 2 50 2 50 2 50
6.3 100 ° 2 50 2 50 2 50
8 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 63
10 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 63
12 50 80 2 80 2 80 2 80
3RV1. 2 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °
5
Size S0 0.8 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 6 16

1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 6 16
1.25 100 ° 100 ° 8 20 6 20
1.6 100 ° 100 ° 8 20 6 20
2 100 ° 8 25 8 25 6 25
2.5 100 ° 8 25 8 25 6 25
3.2 100 ° 8 32 8 32 6 32
4 100 ° 6 32 4 32 3 32
5 100 ° 6 32 4 32 3 32
6.3 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 50
8 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 50
10 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 50
12.5 100 ° 6 63 4 63 3 63
16 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
20 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
22 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
25 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
3RV1. 3 16 50 100 8 100 6 80 5 63
Size S2 20 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
25 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
32 50 125 6 125 4 100 3 80
40 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80
45 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80
50 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80
3RV1. 41 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50
Size S3 50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 63
63 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63
75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 80
90 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100
100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100
3RV1. 42 / 3RV17 42 16 / 10 100 ° 12 63 6 50 6 50
Size S3 20 / 15 100 ° 12 63 6 50 6 50
with increased 25 / 20 100 ° 12 63 6 50 6 50
switching capacity 32 / 25 100 ° 12 63 6 50 6 50
40 / 30 100 ° 12 80 6 63 6 63
50 / 35 ... 40 100 ° 10 100 4 80 4 80
63 / 45 ... 50 100 ° 7.5 100 4 80 4 80
75 / 60 100 ° 6 125 3 100 3 100
90 / 70 100 ° 6 160 3 125 3 125
100 / -- 100 ° 6 160 3 125 3 125
Short-circuit proof up to at least 50 kA
° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit proof up to 100 kA
1) 10% overvoltage.
2) 5% overvoltage.
3) Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the installation point
> IcuIT.
4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
5/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and The motor starter protector which is connected downstream
690 V AC according to IEC 60947-2 must be set to the rated current of the load.
The table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capac- With motor starter protector combination assemblies, note the
ity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics clearance to grounded parts and between the motor starter pro-
with an upstream standard motor starter protector that fulfils the tectors. Short-circuit proof wiring between the circuit-breakers
limiter function at 500 V AC and 690 V AC. The short-circuit must be ensured. The motor starter protectors can be mounted
breaking capacity can be increased significantly with an up- side-by-side in a modular arrangement.
stream standard motor starter protector.
Standard motor Standard motor Rated current In up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2) up to 690 V AC1)
starter protector starter protector with Icu Ics Icu Ics
limiter function
Type
Type Rated current In A kA kA kA kA
3RV10 2 3RV13 21-4DC10 up to 1 ° ° ° °
Size S0 Size S0 1.25 ° ° ° °
In = 25 A 1.6 ° ° ° °
2 ° ° 50 25
2.5 ° ° 50 25
3.2 ° ° 50 25
4 ° ° 50 25
5 ° ° 50 25
6.3 ° ° 50 25
8 100 50 20 10
10 100 50 20 10
12.5 100 50 20 10
16 100 50 20 10
20 100 50 20 10
22 100 50 20 10
25 100 50 20 10
3RV10 3 3RV13 31-4HC10 16 100 50 50 25
5
Size S2 Size S2 20 100 50 50 25
In = 50 A 25 100 50 50 25
32 100 50 50 25
40 100 50 50 25
50 100 50 50 25
3RV10 4 3RV13 41-4HC10 32 100 50 50 25
Size S3 Size S3 40 100 50 50 25
In = 50 A 50 100 50 50 25
3RV10 4 3RV13 41-4MC10 50 100 50 50 25
Size S3 Size S3 63 100 50 50 25
In = 100 A 75 100 50 50 25
90 100 50 50 25
100 100 50 50 25
Short-circuit proof up to 100 kA
° No upstream motor starter protector required since short-circuit proof up to 100 kA
1) 10 % overvoltage.
2) 5% overvoltage.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/11

General data
General technical specifications

Type 3RV1. 11) 3RV1 .2 3RV1 .3 3RV1. 4 3RV1742
Standards
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
• IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes no
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3
Max. rated current Inmax (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50 100 70
• Storage/transport °C -50 ... +80
• Operation °C -20 ... +702)
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of cubicle
• +60 °C % 100
• +70 °C % 87
Motor starter protector inside enclosure
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of enclosure
• +35 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Rated operational voltage Ue V 6903)
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Utilization categories
• IEC 60947-2 (motor starter protector) A
• IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3 --
Trip class CLASS according to IEC 60947-4-1 10 10/20 --
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)
• 1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10
5
• 2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10

• 3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10
Power loss Pv per motor In: ... 1.25 A W 5 -- -- -- --

starter protector In : 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 6 -- -- -- --
Dependent on rated current In In: 8 ... 12 A W 7 -- -- -- --
(upper setting range) In: ... 0.63 A W -- 5 -- -- --
In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W -- 6 -- -- --
Rper conducting path = P/I2 x 3
In: 8 ... 16 A W -- 7 -- -- --
In: 20 ... 25 A W -- 8 -- -- --
In: ... 25 A W -- -- 12 -- --
In: 32 A W -- -- 15 -- --
In: 40 ... 50 A W -- -- 20 -- --
In: ... 63 A W -- -- -- 20 --
In: 75 and 90 A W -- -- -- 30 --
In: ... 100 A W -- -- -- 38 --
In: ... 10 A W -- -- -- -- 5.7
In: ... 35 A W -- -- -- -- 10.5
In: ... 70 A W -- -- -- -- 19.7
Shock resistance according to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25 /11 (square and sinusoidal pulse)
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP204)
Touch protection according to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Temperature compensation according to IEC 60947-4-1 °C -20 ...+60
Phase loss sensitivity according to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes No
Explosion protection ATEX license to EU guideline 94/9/EG Yes, for 3RV10 (CLASS 10), 3RV11 (CLASS 10) No
Isolating function according to IEC 60947-2 Yes
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP according to IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113) Yes
switch characteristics5)
Safe isolation between main and according to EN 60947-1
auxiliary circuits, required for PELV
applications
• Up to 400 V + 10 % Yes
• Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request) Yes
Mechanical endurance Oper- 100 000 50 000
ating
cycles
Electrical endurance Oper- 100 000 25 000
ating
cycles
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15
1) For technical specifications of 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breakers 3) 500 V with molded-plastic enclosure.
see SIRIUS Motor Starter Protectors up to 100 A -> General Data. 4) Terminal compartment IP00.
2) Over +60 °C current reduction. 5) With appropriate accessories.
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn see table of same

name.
5/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit

Type 3RV1. 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4/
3RV17 42
Connection type Screw terminal Screw terminal with box
terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 4 mm
Allen screw
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-sections, 1 or 2 conductors
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5), 2 x (1 ...2.5), 2 x (0.75 ...16) 2 x (2.5 ...16)
2 x (0.75 ...2.5) 2 x (2.5 ...6)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5), 2 x (1 ...2.5), 2 x (0.75 ...16), 2 x (2.5 ...35),
2 x (0.75 ...2.5) 2 x (2.5 ...6) 1 x (0.75 ...25) 1 x (2.5 ...50)
- Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5), 2 x (1 ...2.5), 2 x (0.75 ...25), 2 x (10 ...50),
2 x (0.75 ...2.5) 2 x (2.5 ...6) 1 x (0.75 ...35) 1 x (10 ...70)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ...14) 2 x (14 ...10) 2 x (18 ...3), 2 x (10 ...1/0),
1 x (18 ...2) 2 x (10 ...2/0)
• Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x circumference) mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
• Removable box terminal1)
- With copper bars -- -- -- 18 x 10
- With cable lug -- -- -- up to 2 x 70
• Cage Clamp terminals2) 3)
(1 or 2 conductors connectable)
- Solid mm2 2 (0.25 ...2.5) -- -- --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 (0.25 ...1.5) -- -- --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 (0.25 ...2.5) -- -- --
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 (24 ...14) -- -- --
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation: 3.6 mm.
Permissible mounting position Any, according to IEC 60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top
1) Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after removing the box
terminals.
5
2) Corresponding 8WA2803/8WA2804 opening tool, see accessories.
3) With conductor cross-sections of 1 mm2 an "insulation stop" must be
used (see accessories for "Contactors and Contactor Assemblies").
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/13

General data
Permissible ratings of devices approved for North America 3RV1 motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers"
(UL/CSA)
If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor starter protector
Motor starter protectors of the 3RV1 series are approved for is always operated in combination with an upstream short-circuit
UL/CSA and according to UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 14 they can protection device. As short-circuit-protection device, approved
also be used as a load feeder in combination with a contactor. fuses or a motor starter protector according to UL489/CSA 22.2
These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor No.5 can be used. These devices must be dimensioned in accor-
Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Control- dance with the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian
lers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" Electrical Code (CSA). Approval of the 3RV as a Manual Motor
and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E). Controller can be found under the following file numbers: UL File
No. 47705, CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class 3211 05.
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated 240 V AC 480 Y/277 V AC 600 Y/347 V AC
protector max. current In UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA
Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kA
3RV10 11 0.16 ... 2 65 65 65 65 30 10
3RV16 11-0BD10 2.5 65 65 65 65 30 10
115 1/2 -- 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 10
Size S00 200 1 1/2 3 4 65 65 65 65 30 10
230 2 3 5 65 65 65 65 30 10
2)
FLA max. 12 A, 460 -- 7 1/2 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 10
600 V 575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 65 65 30 10
NEMA size 00 10 65 65 65 65 30 10
12 65 65 65 65 30 10
3RV10 21 / 3RV11 21 0.16 ... 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
3RV13 21 4 65 65 65 65 30 30
5 65 65 65 65 30 30
Size S0 115 2 -- 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
200 3 7 1/2 8 65 65 65 65 30 30
2)
5
FLA max. 25 A, 230 5 7 1/2 10 65 65 65 65 30 30

600 V 460 -- 15 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 -- 20 16 65 65 65 65 30 10
20 65 65 65 65 30 10
22 65 65 65 65 30 10
25 65 65 65 65 30 10
3RV10 31 / 3RV11 31 16 65 65 65 65 25 25
3RV13 31 20 65 65 65 65 25 25
115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 25 25
Size S2 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 25 25
230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 25 25
FLA2) max. 50 A, 460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 25 25
600 V 575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 25 25
NEMA size 2
3RV10 41 / 3RV10 42 16 65 65 65 65 30 30
3RV11 42 20 65 65 65 65 30 30
3RV13 41 / 3RV13 42 115 10 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30
200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30
Size S3 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA2) max. 99 A, 575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 65 65 30 30
600 V 75 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 3 90 65 65 65 65 30 30
100 65 65 65 65 30 30
1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).

2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
5/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
3RV10 motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers be combined with upstream short-circuit protection. As short-
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" circuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor starter pro-
tector according to UL489 can be used.
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap These devices must be dimensioned in accordance with the
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available National Electrical Code. The 3RV10 motor starter protectors are
from UL. CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor approved as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for
circuit breaker is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" under the
Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always following file number: UL File No. 47705.
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current In 240 V AC Up to 480 Y/277 V AC Up to 600 Y/347 V AC
protector max. UL UL UL
Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
3RV10 11 0.16 ... 0.8 65 65 --
1 65 65 --
Size S00 115 1/3 -- 1.25 65 65 --
200 3/4 2 2 65 65 --
230 1 2 2.5 65 65 --
2)
FLA max. 8 A, 480 V 460 -- 5 3.2 65 65 --
575/600 -- -- 4 65 65 --
NEMA size 0 5 65 65 --
6.3 65 65 --
8 65 65 --
3RV10 21 0.16 ... 1.6 50 50 30
2 50 50 30
2.5 50 50 30
Size S0 115 2 -- 3.2 50 50 30
200 3 7 1/2 4 50 50 30
2)
FLA max. 230 3 7 1/2 5 50 50 30
22 A, 480 V 460 -- 15 6.3 50 50 30
12.5 A, 600 V 575/600 -- 10 8 50 50 30
5
10 50 50 30
NEMA size 1 12.5 50 50 30
16 50 50 --
20 50 50 --
22 50 50 --
3RV10 31 16 50 50 25
20 50 50 25
Size S2 115 3 -- 25 50 50 25
200 7 1/2 15 32 50 50 25
2)
FLA max. 230 10 20 40 50 50 25
50 A, 600 V 460 -- 40 45 50 50 25
NEMA size 2 595/600 -- 50 50 50 50 25
3RV10 4. 16 50 50 30
20 50 50 30
115 10 -- 25 50 50 30
Size S3 200 20 30 32 50 50 30
FLA2) max. 230 20 40 40 50 50 30
100 A, 480 V 460 -- 75 50 50 50 30
75 A, 600 V 575/600 -- 75 63 50 50 30
75 50 50 30
NEMA size 3 90 50 50 --
100 50 50 --
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/15

General data
3RV10 motor starter protectors as "Self-Protected Combination CSA does not demand these extended air/creepage distances.
Motor Controllers (Type E)" According to CSA, these terminal blocks can be omitted when
the device is used as a "Self-Protected Combination Motor
As of 16 July 2001, UL 508 demands a line-side 1-inch air Controller".
distance and 2-inch creepage distance for "Self-Protected
Combination Motor Controllers". The 3RV10 motor starter protectors are approved as
"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" under the
Therefore, 3RV10 motor starter protectors of size S0 and S3 are following file numbers:
approved to UL 508 in combination with the terminal blocks
listed below. UL File No. E156943, Product Class NKJH,
CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class 3211 08.
The basic unit of the 3RV10 motor starter protector in size S2
conforms with the required air/creepage distances.
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated Up to 240 V AC Up to 480 Y/277 V AC Up to 600 Y/347 V AC
protector max. current In UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA
Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3) Ibc3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kA
3RV10 21 0.16 ... 1.6 65 65 65 65 30 30
+ 3RV19 28-1H4) 2 65 65 65 65 30 30
115 2 -- 2.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
Size S0 200 3 7 1/2 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
230 3 7 1/2 4 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA2) max. 460 -- 15 5 65 65 65 65 30 30
22 A, 480 V 575/600 -- 10 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
12.5 A, 600 V 8 65 65 65 65 30 30
10 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 1 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
16 65 65 65 65 -- --
20 65 65 65 65 -- --
22 65 65 65 65 -- --
3RV10 31 16 65 65 65 65 25 25
5
20 65 65 65 65 25 25
Size S2 115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 25 25
200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 25 25
FLA2) max. 230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 25 25
50 A, 600 V 460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 25 25
NEMA size 2 575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 25 25
3RV10 41 16 65 65 65 65 30 30
+ 3RT19 46-4GA074) 20 65 65 65 65 30 30
115 10 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30
Size S3 200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA2) max. 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30
100 A, 480 V 460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30
75 A, 600 V 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 65 65 30 30
75 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 3 90 65 65 65 65 -- --
100 65 65 65 65 -- --
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
4) Not required for CSA.
5/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
3RV17 motor starter protectors as "Circuit Breaker" Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations".
The 3RV17 motor starter protectors are approved as "Circuit
The 3RV17 motor starter protectors are approved as "Circuit Breaker" under the following file numbers:
Breakers" according to UL 489 and CSA 22.2 No. 5-02. They can
be used therefore as upstream short-circuit protective devices UL File No. E235044
for "Manual Motor Controllers" and "Manual Motor Controllers CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class 1432 01
Motor starter Rated current In 240 V AC 480 Y/277 V AC 600 Y/347 V AC

protector UL UL UL
Ibc1) Ibc1) Ibc1)
Type A kA kA kA
3RV17 42 10 35 35 20
15 35 35 20
Size S3 20 35 35 20
25 35 35 20
30 35 35 20
35 35 35 20
40 35 35 20
45 35 35 20
50 35 35 20
60 35 35 20
70 35 35 20
1) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
Rated data of the auxiliary switches and alarm switches

Type Lateral Transverse Transverse
auxiliary switch with auxiliary switch with auxiliary switch with
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
2 NC,
2 NO + 2 NC
5
and alarm switch
Max. rated voltage
According to NEMA (UL) V AC 600 250
According to NEMA (CSA) V AC 600 250
Uninterrupted current A 10 5 2.5
Switching capacity A600 B600 C300
Q300 R300 R300
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/17

General data
Voltage transformer circuit-breakers
General technical specifications
Type 3RV16 11-1AG14 3RV16 11-1CG14 3RV16 11-1DG14
Rated current In A 1.4 2.5 3
Ambient temperature
• During storage/transport °C -50 ... +80
• During operation °C -20 ... +60 (up to +70 °C is possible with derating)
Rated operational voltage Ue V 400
Rated frequency Hz 16.66 ... 60
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu at 400 V AC kA 50
Set value of the thermal overload release A 1.4 2.5 3
Operating value of the instantaneous overcurrent release A 6 20 % 10.5 20 % 20 20 %
Tripping time of the instantaneous overcurrent release ms Approx. 6 at 12 A Approx. 6 at 20 A Approx. 6 at 40 A
Internal resistance
• In cold state > 0.25 6.5 %
• In heated state > 0.30 6.5 %
Shock resistance according to IEC 68 Part 2-27 g 15
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20
Touch protection according to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Endurance
• Mechanical Oper- 10 000
ating
cycles
• Electrical Oper- 10 000
ating
cycles
5
Conductor cross-sections, main circuit, 1 or 2 conductors

Type 3RV16 11-1AG14 3RV16 11-1CG14 3RV16 11-1DG14
Connection type Screw terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5), max. 4
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5), max. 4
Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection
• With defined lateral assignment for blocking distance protection 1 changeover contact (for use as 1 NO or 1 NC)
• Rated operational voltage Ue (AC voltage) V 250
• Rated operational current Ie /AC-14 at Ue = 250 V A 0.5
• Rated operational current Ie /AC-14 at Ue = 125 V A 1
• Rated operational voltage Ue (direct voltage L/R 200 ms) V 250
• Rated operational current Ie /DC-13 at Ue = 250 V A 0.27
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary circuit
• Fuse gL/gG A 10
• Miniature circuit-breaker, C characteristic A 6 (prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA)
Auxiliary switches for other signaling functions
For technical specifications see "Mountable Accessories"
5/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteris- Opening time
tics and the I2t characteristic curves were determined according 10 000 NSB0_00004b
to DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60947. 100
min 5000
60
The time/current characteristic of the inverse-time delayed over- 40
2000
load release (thermal overload releases, ’a’ releases) for DC and
1000
AC with a frequency of 0 Hz to 400 Hz. 10
500
The characteristic curves apply to the cold state; at operating 5
temperature, the tripping times of the thermal releases are re- 200 3-pole
2 loading
duced to approximately 25 %. 100 Class 20
1
Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device 50
3-pole
must be loaded. The three main conducting paths must be con- loading
20
nected in series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads. Class 10
10
With 2-pole and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the 5
tripping time of 3 times the setting current and upwards is 20 % 2-pole
and thus in accordance with DIN VDE 0165. 2 loading
Class 10
The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromag- 1
netic overcurrent releases (short-circuit releases, ’n’ releases) 0,5
are based on the rated current In that also represents the maxi-
0,2
mum value of the setting range for motor starter protectors with
adjustable overload releases. If the current is set to a lower 0,1
value, the tripping current of the ’n’ release is increased by a cor- 0,05
responding factor.
0,02
The characteristic curves of the electromagnetic overcurrent 0,01
releases apply to frequencies of 50 Hz/60 Hz. Appropriate cor-
0,005
rection factors must be used for lower frequencies down to
5
16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and for DC. 0,002
The shown characteristic curve for the motor starter protector re- 0,001
0,6 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x n
lates to a specific setting range. It is, however, also valid as a 0,8
Current
schematic representation of motor starter protectors with other
current ranges. Schematic representation of typical time/current characteristic of 3RV10
Time/current characteristic curves, current limiting characteristic 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breakers up to 3 A
curves and I2t curves can be ordered from "Technical
Assistance" (e-mail: nst.technical-assistance@siemens.com). The specified tripping characteristics of the thermal overload re-
lease (a) correspond to the mean value of the scatter band in the
cold state. At operating temperature, these times are reduced to
approximately 25 % of the specified values.
The characteristic curves below are schematic representations.
Precise characteristic curves are available from "Technical
Assistance" (e-mail: nst.technical-assistance@siemens.com).
NSB0_01352b
1000
s a)
100
10
1 2 3
b)
0,1
0,01
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 A100
$ 1.4 A / 6 A
% 2.5 A / 10.5 A
& 3 A / 20 A
a) Thermal overload release
b) Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/19

General data
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S00 3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S0
3RV10 11, 3RV16 3RV10 21, 3RV13 21, 3RV14 21
2) 1) 11) 5) 3) 4) 1) 2) 11) 5) 3) 4)
14 72 25
25
5
5
12
12
45
45
106
97
45
90
105
45
90
7)
7)
3,5
NSB00027b
8)
8)
9 45 18 18 45 18 5 56
NSB 00026c
18 5 62 9 69
70 80
6) 76 91
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S2

3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31
11) 20 121 30
1) 2) 4)
3)
5
5
130
140
125
89
45
85
7)
8)
8
NSB00028a
9 18 55 18 5 109
127
132
144

3RV10 4, 3RV13 4
1 4 6
1 1 ) 1 0 ) 8 4 ) 3 0
1) Lateral auxiliary switch, 2-pole.
2) Alarm switch (S0-S3) or lateral
3 )
1 ) 2 ) 5 auxiliary switch, 4-pole (S00-S3).
3) Auxiliary release
4) Transverse auxiliary switch
5) Plug-in lugs for screw mounting
6) For undervoltage release
with leading auxiliary switch only
7) Drilling diagram
1 6 5
1 1 6
1 5 0
1 5 5
7 )
4 5
8) 35 mm standard mounting rail

9) Mounting onto 35 mm standard
mounting rail,15 mm high,
9 )
or 75 mm standard mounting rail
10) Allen screw 4 mm
11) Lockable in neutral position
7
with 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 2 9 b
1 8 7 0 1 8 1 3 2
9 5 1 5 3 shackle diameter
1 5 7
1 6 9
5/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data

3RV11 21
1) 2) 11) 5) 3)
25
72 4)
5
12
45
90
106
97
45
7)
NSB00030b
8)
18 45 20 5 55
9 69
80
91

3RV11 31
1 ) 2 ) 1 1 ) 2 0 1 2 1 4 ) 3 0
3 )
5
5
1 2 5
1 3 0
1 4 0
9 0
7 )
4 5
8 )
1 8 5 5 2 0 8
9 5 1 0 9
N S B 0 0 0 3 1 c
1 2 7
1 3 2
1 4 4

3RV11 42
146 4)
11) 10) 3)
8 30 1) Lateral auxiliary switch, 2-pole.
2) Alarm switch or lateral auxiliary
1) 2) switch, 4-pole
5 3) Block for overload relay function
4) Transverse auxiliary switch
5) Plug-in lugs for screw mounting
7) Drilling diagram
8) 35 mm standard mounting rail
165
150
116
155
90
45
7) 9) Mounting onto 35 mm standard

mounting rail, 15 mm high,
or 75 mm standard mounting rail
10) Allen screw 4 mm
9) 11) Lockable in neutral position with
3.5 mm to 4.5 mm shackle diameter
18 70 20 7
9 5 132
NSB00032c
153
157
169
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/21

General data

3RV17 42
22,5 22,5
30
26
5
∅
129
155
155
168
45
NSB0_01531
70
5
5/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
■ Schematics
Internal connections
Motor starter protectors Motor starter protectors Motor starter protectors Voltage transformer circuit-breakers
3RV10.. 3RV11.. 3RV13.. 3RV16 up to 3 A
3RV14..
3RV16 11-0BD10
3RV17..
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 D is ta n c e p r o te c tio n
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 a n d s ta r tin g
Test 95 97 s ta r tin g
1 3 5
1 1
I I I I I I
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 0 5 b
I I I
NSB 00009a
1 4 1 2
v
v
v
v
NSB00008
NSB00010
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 96 98 T1 T2 T3 1 1 1
v
2 4 6
o f th e v o lta g e tr a n s fo r m e r u n it
Switching examples
3RV11 motor starter protector with overload relay function 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit-breakers up to 3 A
L1 +
S1 OFF pushbutton
F1 12 14
S1
S2 ON pushbutton
K1 Latching contact
F1; F2 Fuses gL/gG 6A
5
Q1 3RV11 motor starter protectors 11
S2 K1
Distance protection
Q1
BI
NSB00025a
K1 (binary Voltage transformer

input) circuit-breaker released
N(L2) F2
(active without voltage)
Note: NSB0_01106a
When using the NC contact to connect the voltage transformer

circuit-breaker, the binary input of the distance protection device
(Siemens 7 SA xxx) should be set to "active without voltage".
This type of connection is used for additional monitoring of
correct wiring.
Conversion of voltage transformer circuit-breakers 3VU13 to 3RV1
The 3VU13 voltage transformer circuit-breakers previously avail-
able have been discontinued. The 3RV1 voltage transformer cir-
cuit-breakers are offered as replacement types.
Previous type Replacement type
3VU13 11-6HR00 3RV16 11-1CG14
3VU13 21-6HR00 3RV16 11-1CG14 + 3RV19 01-1A
3VU13 11-6JR00 3RV16 11-1DG14
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/23

Accessories
Mountable accessories
■ Overview
Mounting location and function
The 3RV1 motor starter protectors have three main contact These components can be fitted as required on the motor starter
elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, auxiliary protectors without using tools.
switches, alarm switches, auxiliary releases and isolator
modules can be supplied separately.
Front panel Transverse auxiliary switch An auxiliary contact block can be inserted transversely on the front.
Notes: 1 NO + 1 NC The overall width of the motor starter protectors remains unchanged.
• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts with or
auxiliary switches can be attached to each 2 NO
motor starter protector.
or 1 changeover contact
• Transverse auxiliary switches must not be
used for the 3RV17 motor starter protec-
tors.
Left-hand side Lateral auxiliary switch One of the three auxiliary switches can be mounted laterally for each motor
(2 contacts) starter protector. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together
1 NO + 1 NC with the main contacts of the motor starter protector.
or The overall width of the lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts is 9 mm.
2 NO
or
2 NC
Lateral auxiliary switch One auxiliary switch can be mounted laterally for each motor starter
(4 contacts) protector. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with
2 NO + 2 NC the main contacts of the motor starter protector.
The overall width of the lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts is 18 mm.
Notes: Alarm switches for One alarm switch can be mounted at the side of each motor starter protector
• Auxiliary switches (2 contacts) and alarm sizes S0, S2, and S3 with a rotary operating mechanism.
5
switches can be mounted separately or Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC The alarm switch has two contact systems.
together. Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was
• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts with caused by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other con-
auxiliary switches can be attached to each tact system only switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling
motor starter protector. as a result of switching off with the handle.
In order to be able to switch on the motor starter protector again after a short-
circuit, the alarm switch must be reset manually after the error cause has
been eliminated.
The overall width of the alarm switch is 18 mm.
Right-hand side Shunt release For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector. The release coil
should only be energized for short periods (see schematics).
or
Undervoltage release Trips the motor starter protector when the voltage is interrupted and prevents
the motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored.
Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector.
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the
corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP button according to DIN VDE 0113.
or
Notes: Undervoltage release with Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary
• One auxiliary release can be mounted per leading auxiliary contacts contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts will
motor starter protector. (2 NO) open in switch position OFF to deenergize the coil of the undervoltage
release, thus interrupting power consumption. In the "tripped" position, these
• Accessories cannot be mounted at the auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts permit
right-hand side of the 3RV11 motor starter the motor starter protector to reclose.
protectors with overload relay function.
The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm.
Top Isolator modules for Isolator modules can be mounted to the upper terminal end of motor starter
Note: motor starter protectors protectors of sizes S0 and S2.
The isolator module covers the terminal Size S0 and S2 The supply cable is connected to the motor starter protector through the
isolator module.
screws of the transverse auxiliary switch.
If the isolator module is used, we there- The plug can only be unplugged when the motor starter protector is open
fore recommend that either the lateral and isolates all 3 poles of the motor starter protector from the network. The
auxiliary switches be fitted or that the shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a padlock
isolator module not be mounted until the to prevent reinsertion of the plug.
auxiliary switch has been wired.
5/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
S00 circuit-breakers with mountable accessories
4
2
1
6.1
3
5
Circuit-breakers, sizes S0, S2 or S3, with mountable accessories
2
4
7
1
6.2
3
5
NSB0_01426
Mountable accessories for all sizes S00 ... S3 Mountable accessories for sizes Mountable accessories for sizes
1 Transverse auxiliary switch 6.1 Undervoltage release with S00 7 Signalling switch S0 ... S3
2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts leading auxiliary contacts
8 Isolator module S0 and S2
3 Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts 6.2 Undervoltage release with S0 ... S3
4 Shunt release leading auxiliary contacts
5 Undervoltage release
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/25

Accessories
Front transverse auxiliary switches
Switching capacity for different voltages
1 CO contact 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 4 2
- 230 V A 3 0.5
- 400 V A 1.5 --
- 690 V A 0.5 --
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10 2.5
- 230 V A 10 2.5
- 400 V A 10 --
- 690 V A 10 --
• At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 1 1
- 48 V A -- 0.3
- 60 V A -- 0.15
- 110 V A 0.22 --
- 220 V A 0.1 --
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Front transverse solid-state compatible auxiliary switches

1 CO contact
• Rated operational voltage Ue alternating voltage V 250
• Rated operational current Ie /AC-14 at Ue = 250 V A 0.5
A 1
5
• Rated operational current Ie /AC-14 at Ue = 125 V

• Rated operational voltage Ue direct voltage L/R 200 ms V 250
mA 1
Lateral auxiliary switches

Switching capacity for different voltages
1 NO+1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC and alarm switch
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 6
- 230 V A 4
- 400 V A 3
- 690 V A 1
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10
- 230 V A 10
- 400 V A 10
- 690 V A 10
• At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 2
- 110 V A 0.5
- 220 V A 0.25
- 440 V A 0.1
mA 1
Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage release Shunt release
Power consumption
• During pick-up
- AC voltages VA / W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13
- DC voltages W 20 13 ... 80
• During continuous operation
- AC voltages VA / W 7.2 / 2.4 --
- DC voltages W 2.1 --
Response voltage
• Tripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x Us 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us
• Pickup V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
Maximum opening time ms 20 20
5/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits

• Fuses gL/gG A 10
• Miniature circuit-breaker, C characteristic A 61)
1) Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
Conductor cross-sections 1 or 2 conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5) / 2 x (0.75 ...2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5) / 2 x (0.75 ...2.5)
• Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ...1.5) / 2 x (0.75 ...2.5)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 ...14)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals 1) 2)
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ...2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ...1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ...2.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ...14)
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation: 3.6 mm.
1) With conductor cross-sections of 1 mm2 an "insulation stop" must be 2) Corresponding 8WA2803/8WA2804 opening tool, see Accessories.
used, see accessories for "Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
■ Schematics
Internal connections
Shunt release Undervoltage Undervoltage release with Transverse auxiliary switches
release leading auxiliary contacts
5
3RV19 02-1D 3RV19 02-1A 3RV19 12-1C 3RV19 01-1D 3RV19 01-1E 3RV19 01-1F
3RV19 22-1C 3RV19 01-1G 3RV19 01-2E 3RV19 01-2F
C1 D1 D1 07 12 14 13 21 13 23
U
v
U
v
NSB00012
NSB00013
NSB00014
NSB00015
NSB01087
NSB00011
C2 D2 D2 08 11 14 22 14 24
Lateral auxiliary switches with 2 contacts Lateral auxiliary switches Alarm switch
with 4 contacts
3RV19 01-1A 3RV19 01-1B 3RV19 01-1C 3RV19 01-1J 3RV19 21-1M
3RV19 01-2A 3RV19 01-2B 3RV19 01-2C
33 41 33 43 31 41 13 21 31 43 57 65 77 85
I
v
NSB00017
NSB00018
NSB01086
NSB00019
NSB00016
34 42 34 44 32 42 14 22 32 44 58 66 78 86
Circuit diagrams
Undervoltage release Shunt release
L1 L1(L+) S0; S1; S2 OFF button in the system

F1 Q1 Motor starter protector
F1
S1 S Auxiliary switch of the motor starter protector Q1
S0
F1; F2 Fuse (gL/gG) max. 10 A
F3 Shunt release
S2
12 14(14) F4 Undervoltage release
Q1
S 11(13)
D1 C1
NSB00021
NSB00020
F4 U
v
F3
F2 D2 C2
N(L2) N(L2,L-) F2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/27

Accessories
Switching examples
3RV1 motor starter protector with 3RV19 21-1M alarm switch Motor starter protectors tripped by means of pushbutton or
EMERGENCY-STOP button in the system
L1 Separate "tripped" and L1 The leading auxiliary contacts will
L2 "short-circuit" signals L2 open in switch position "OFF" to
L3 L3 deenergize the coil of the under-
N N voltage release, thus avoiding
F1 power consumption in the
F1 switched off state.
F2
H1 In the "tripped" position of the
H2 motor starter protector, these con-
1 3 5 57 65 77 85 1 3 5 D1 07 tacts are not guaranteed to open.
v
I I I I I I
NSB00023a
NSB00022a
v
v
2 4 6 58 66 78 86 2 4 6 D2 08
Q1 S1 Q1 F4
S1
S2
S3
5
5/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
Rotary operating mechanisms
■ Overview
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Remote motorized operating mechanism
Motor starter protectors with a rotary operating mechanism can 3RV1 motor starter protectors are manually operated controls.
be mounted in a control cabinet and operated externally by They automatically trip in case of an overload or short-circuit.
means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When Intentional remote-controlled tripping is possible by means of a
the cabinet door with motor starter protector is closed, the oper- shunt release or an undervoltage release. Reclosing is only
ating mechanism is coupled. When the motor starter protector possible directly at the motor starter protector.
closes, the coupling is locked which prevents the door from
being opened unintentionally. This lock can be defeated by the The remote motorized operating mechanism allows the motor
maintenance personnel. In the Open position, the rotary operat- starter protectors to be opened and closed by electrical com-
ing mechanism can be secured against reclosing with up to mands. This enables a load or an installation to be isolated from
3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in the power system or reconnected to it from an operator panel.
this case either. If the motor starter protector is tripped as a result of overload or
short-circuit, it will be in tripped position. For reclosing, the
remote motorized operating mechanism must first be set manu-
ally or electrically to the 0 position (electrically by means of the
Open command). Then it can be reclosed.
The remote motorized operating mechanism is available for
motor starter protectors of size S2 (Inmax = 50 A) and
S3 (Inmax = 100 A) that are designed for control voltages of
NSB01078
230 V AC and 24 V DC. The motor starter protector is fitted into

the remote motorized operating mechanism as shown in the
drawing.
In the "MANUAL" position, the motor starter protector in the
remote motorized operating mechanism can continue to be
switched manually on site. In the "AUTOMATIC" position, the
motor starter protector is switched by means of electrical com-
5
mands. The switching command must be applied for a
minimum of 100 ms. The remote motorized operating mecha-
nism closes the motor starter protector after a maximum of
1 second. On voltage failure during the switching operation it is
3RV19 26-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism ensured that the motor starter protector remains in the Open or
Closed position.
Reset function
The RESET button on the motorized operating mechanism
serves to reset any 3RV19 21-1M alarm switch that might be
installed.
NSB01079
NSB00007
3RV19 26-2B door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous

conditions
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/29

Accessories
Rotary operating mechanisms
Remote motorized operating mechanism
• Max. power consumption at Us = 24 V DC W 48
• Max. power consumption at Us = 230 V AC VA 170
• Operating range 0.85 ...1.1 x Us
• Minimum command duration at Us s 0.1
• Max. command duration Unlimited (uninterrupted operation)
• Max. total break time, remote-controlled s 2
• Ready to reclose after approx. s 2.5
• Operating frequency 1/h 25
• Internal back-up fuse
- 230 V AC A 0.8
- 24 V DC A 1.6
Connection type of control leads Connector with screw terminal
Shock resistance according to IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 25 /11 (square and sinusoidal pulse)
■ Schematics
Switching examples
3RV1 motor starter protectors with 3RV19 36/3RV19 46

remote-controlled motorized operating mechanisms
US
~ ~
- +
5
1
O 2
M
3
4
5
L I T
v
NSB00024a
5/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
Mounting accessories
■ Overview
Soldering terminals Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controllers (Type E)" according to UL508
Soldering terminals are available for the main contacts and
transverse auxiliary switches of size S00 motor starter The 3RV10 motor starter protectors are approved according to
protectors. UL508 as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers
(Type E)".
The prepared terminal parts are clamped to the upper and lower
screw terminals of the motor starter protectors which allows As of 16 July 2001, for this application, UL 508 demands
them to be soldered into printed circuit boards. increased clearance and creepage distances (1 inch and
2 inches respectively) at the line side of the device.
The 3RV19 28-1H terminal block must be used here for size S0;
it is simply screwed onto the basic unit.
Basic units of size S2 are already compliant with the new
clearance and creepage distance requirements.
The 3RT19 46-4GA07 terminal block must be used for size S3.
NSB0_01077a
The standard box terminal is to be replaced by this terminal

block.
According to CSA, these modular terminals can be omitted
when the device is used as a "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller" (Type E).
3RV19 18-5A
Three-phase line-side terminals are required for constructing
"Type E Starters" with an insulated busbar system (see
Busbar Accessories).
5
NSB0_01380a
NSB0_01379a
3RV19 28-1H (left), 3RT19 46-4GA07 (right)
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers
(Type E)" according to UL508
Type 3RV19 28-1H 3RT19 46-4GA07
• Front clamping point connected
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10 See data for
3RV1.4 motor starter protectors
NSB00479
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 16

- Stranded mm² 2.5 ...25
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded mm² 14 ...3
- Terminal screw M4
• Rear clamping point connected
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
NSB00480

- Terminal screw M4
• Both clamping points connected
- Front clamping point
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
NSB00481

- Terminal screw M4
- Rear clamping point

- Solid mm² 1 ...10
- Stranded mm² 5 ...25
- Terminal screw M4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/31

Accessories
Disconnector modules
3RV19 28-1A 3RV19 38-1A

For motor starter protector size S0 For motor starter protector size S2
45 94 55 149
51
57
NSB00033a
96
144
121
NSB00034a
190
Busbars
3RV19 15-1.. 3-phase busbar
5
For motor starter protector sizes S00 and S0, modular spacing 45 mm
3RV19 15-1AB for two motor starter protectors
3RV19 15-1BB for three motor starter protectors
3RV19 15-1CB for four motor starter protectors
3RV19 15-1DB for five motor starter protectors
1 3
2 1
B
4 5
8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 5 c
1 2 8
1 7 3 S 0 0 S 0
2 1 8
A 1 1 1 1 1 9
B 6 7 7 0

3RV19 15-2AB for two motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 15-2BB for three motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 15-2CB for four motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 15-2DB for five motor starter protectors with accessory
1 3
2 1
B
5 5
9 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 5 6 c
1 4 8
A
2 0 3 S 0 0 S 0
2 5 8
A 1 1 1 1 1 9
B 6 7 7 0
5/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories

3RV19 15-3AB for two motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 15-3CB for four motor starter protectors with accessory
1 3
2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 9 2 c
B
6 3
1 0 1
A
2 2 7
S 0 0 S 0
A 1 1 1 1 1 9
B 6 7 7 0
3RV19 35-1. 3-phase busbar

For motor starter protector size S2, modular spacing 55 mm
3RV19 35-1A for two motor starter protectors
3RV19 35-1B for three motor starter protectors
3RV19 35-1C for four motor starter protectors
1 5
3 3
9 8
5 5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 5 7 c
1 1 0
1 6 5
1 6 8
5
2 2 0
3RV19 35-3. 3-phase busbar

For motor starter protector size S2, modular spacing 75 mm
3RV19 35-3A for two motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 35-3B for three motor starter protectors with accessory
3RV19 35-3C for four motor starter protectors with accessory
1 5
3 3
9 8
7 5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 5 8 c
1 3 0
2 0 5
1 6 8
2 8 0
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/33

Accessories
3RV19 15-5. 3-phase line-side terminals 3RV19 25-5AB 3-phase line-side terminal
3RV19 15-5A 3RV19 15-5B
Connected from top Connected from below Connected from top
Size S00 Size S00 and S0 Size S0
a) 3RV1. 1 19 mm 4 4
44 24 1 4 1 4 5 4
3RV1. 2 23 mm
NSB00059a
N S B 0 _ 1 0 9 3 b
2 5
92
73
NSB00060b
7 3
1 2 2
14 14 a
44 31
3RV19 35-5A 3-phase line-side terminal 3RV19 15-5DB connecting piece

For motor starter protector size S2 For connecting three-phase busbars
for motor starter protector
Size S0 (left) to size S00 (right)
112 1 3
55
NSB00061b
2 1
34
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 6 2 d
7 0
4 2 ,5
91
8 1
1 1 9
5
161
5/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
3RV19 26-0. door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
3RV19 26-0B
3RV19 26-0C
Short shaft4), for motor starter protector sizes S0, S2, S3
66 25
45 19 15
1 ...4
NSB0_01107b
3
1)
4)
24,3
NSB0_01089d
∅22,5
5 2)
max. 127 max. 130

33 17 min. 56
min. 55
3RV19 26-0K
3RV19 26-0L
Long shaft (with bracket)3), for motor starter protector sizes S0, S2, S3
66 25
16 45 19 15
1 ...4
NSB0_01108c
I ON
1) 3
3)
0 OFF
24,3
NSB0_01090d
5 2) ∅22,5
5
5) max. 327 33 17 max. 330
min. 55 min. 56
1) Lockable in neutral position with max. 8 mm shackle diameter.

2) Mounted with screw cap.
3) Supplied with a shaft length of 330 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft.
4) Supplied with a shaft length of 130 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft.
5) 35 mm2 ground terminal and fixing bracket for 330 mm shaft.
3RV19 . 6-2 door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions

3RV19 26-2., 3RV19 36-2., 3R19 46-2.
for sizes S0, S2 and S3
Drilling template, door Drilling template, base

G J
NSB01091a
6
65
75
B
A
40
6
max. 341
D E F 62 14 H C
min. 42
Type Size Dimensions
A B C D E F G H J
3RV19 26-2. S0 125 111 50 77 112 50 27 9 42
3RV19 36-2. S2 170 160 60 87 162 50 27 10 47
3RV19 46-2. S3 194 185 60 100 187 48 25 10 53
max. 330
min. 11 mm without shaft
min. 31
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/35

Accessories
Remote motorized operating mechanisms
3RV19. 6-3AP0
For sizes S2 and S3
5 112
NSB00044
a) 3RV19 36-3AP0: 211 mm
3RV19 46-3AP0: 236 mm
SI EMENS
RESET I>
I
0
182
224
MANUAL
AUTOMATIC REVISION
87 a)
148
3RV19 18-5. solder pin adapter

3RV19 18-5A
3RV19 18-5B
13,4 13,1
12
45 5 59 5
5
2
9
8,4
14,4 14,4
103
97,4
8,4
NSB00041
49
14,4 14,4
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)" according to UL508
3RV19 28-1H 3RT19 46-4GA07
45 74 70
10
27
72
84
121
168
NSB 01228
NSB 01229
5/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Accessories
3RV19 . 3-1. . . . molded-plastic enclosure for surface mounting
For motor starter protector size S00
3RV19 13-1. . . .
4 5 1 9 a) 3RV19 13-1CA00 85 mm
5 5 1 0 5 b) With 3RV19 13-7D: 154 mm
3 ) 1 1 1 3 c ) With 3RV19 13-7E: 174 mm
4 ) 7 ) Dimensions refer to mounting surface.
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 3 5 d
c) With 3RV19 13-7D: 64 mm

With 3RV19 13-7E: 84 mm.
4 ,5
6 )
5 ) d) Dimensions refer to mounting surface.
1 4 5 ...1 4 8
3) Knock-outs for M25.

4) Knock-outs for rear main conductor
8 ) connection M20.
5) With safety lock.
7 7 ,5
9 ) 6) Max. shackle diameter for

padlock 8 mm.
7) 3RV19 03-5 indicator light.
b ) 9 9 b )
b ) 1 0 0 ,5 d ) 1 9 0 8) 3RV19 13-6B locking device.
b ) 1 4 3
a ) 8 9 9) 3RV19 13-7 EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom button.
3RV19 23-1. . . . 3RV19 33-1. . . .
45 19 32 29 25
1) 1) 2)
4)
2)
4)
5
7
4,5
3)
145 - 148
3)
155
235
250
NSB 00036c
18
a) 126
NSB 00037c
18
150 181
a) 3RV19 23-1CA00 85 mm 1) Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right).
3RV19 23-1DA00 105 mm. 2) Knock-outs for rear main conductor connection M32.
1) Knock-outs for M25. 3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 mm ... 8 mm.
2) Knock-outs for rear main conductor connection M20. 4) 3RV19 03-5 indicator light.
3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 mm ... 8 mm.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/37

Accessories
3RV19 23-1. . . . cast aluminum enclosure for surface mounting
for motor starter protector size S0
3RV19 23-1DA01
3RV19 23-1G
2 ) 1) 3RV19 03-5 indicator light.

1 ) 2) Knock-outs for M25 cable glands.
3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter
3 ) of 6 mm to 8 mm.
I
O N
O
1 6 0
1 7 0
O
O F F
1 0 5 1 1 6
1 3 5
2 )
M 2 5
5 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 8 8 b
M 2 5
3RV19 . 3-2 . . . . molded-plastic enclosure for flush mounting

5
3RV19 13-2DA00 3RV19 23-2DA00

3RV19 23-2GA00
1 0 5 9 6 1 2 9 6 1 0 5 9 6 1 2 8 7
2 ) 3 ) 2 )
3 ) 1 ) 1 )
R R
3 3
m m
ax ax
. .
4 )
8 5 x 1 5 5
8 5 x 1 5 5
1 7 5
1 5 7
1 5 7
1 7 5
O F F
O N
2 7
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 3 8 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 4 0 c
8 8
8 8
1 9
m a x . 7 m a x . 6

4) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter of 6 mm to 8 mm.
3RV19 13-4C molded-plastic front plate 3RV19 23-4. molded-plastic front plate
For motor starter protector size S00 For motor starter protector size S0, S2, S3
3RV19 13-4C 3RV19 23-4B
3RV19 23-4E
3RV19 23-4G (for size S0 only)
4 0 4 0
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 3 9 c 4
M 3
1 ) N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 4 2 c 1 9 4
1 )
5 3
7
5 3
7
6 2 x 8 9
6 2 x 8 9
1 0 7
9 2
1 0 7
9 2
3 5
3 6
2 )
3 6
3 8
3 6
4 5
3 8
3 6
4 5
M 3
8 5 6 7 1 2 6 2
8 5 8 5 1 2 6 2
7 0
7 0

2) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter of 6 mm to 8 mm.
5/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
General data
■ Overview
Features Benefits 3RU11 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23
General data
Sizes • Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections S00 ... S3 S00 ... S12 S00 ... S12
and technical characteristics of the other devices
in the SIRIUS modular system (contactors,
soft starters, ...)
• Permit the mounting of slim and compact load
feeders in widths of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0),
55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3), 120 mm (S6) and
145 mm (S10/S12)
• Simplify configuration
Seamless current range • Allows easy and consistent configuration with one 0.11 ... 100 A 0.1 ... 630 A 0.3 ... 630 A
series of overload relays (for small to large loads) ( ... 820 A)1)
Protective functions
Tripping in the event of overload • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection ✔ ✔ ✔
of loads against excessive temperature rises due
5
to overload
Tripping in the event of phase • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection (✔) ✔ ✔
unbalance of loads against excessive temperature rises due
to phase unbalance
Tripping in the event of phase failure • Minimizes heating of induction motors during ✔ ✔ ✔
single-phase operation 2)
Tripping in the event of overheating • Provides optimum temperature-dependent pro- -- 3) -- 3) ✔
tection of loads against excessive temperature
by rises e.g. for stator-critical motors or in the event of
insufficient coolant flow, contamination of the
integrated thermistor motor motor surface or for long starting or braking
protection function operations
• Eliminates the need for additional special
equipment
• Saves space in the controlgear cabinet
• Reduces wiring overhead and costs
Tripping in the event of a ground fault • Provides optimum protection of loads against -- ✔ ✔
high-resistance short-circuits or ground faults due (only 3RB21)
by to moisture, condensed water, damage to the
insulation material, etc.
internal ground fault detection • Eliminates the need for additional special
(activatable) equipment.
Features
RESET function • Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay ✔ ✔ ✔
TEST function for auxiliary contacts • Allows easy checking of the function and wiring ✔ ✔ ✔
TEST function for electronics • Allows complete checking of the electronics -- ✔ ✔
Status display • Displays the current operating status ✔ ✔ ✔
Large current adjustment button • Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to the ✔ ✔ ✔
correct current value
Integrated auxiliary contacts • Allows the load to be switched off if necessary ✔ ✔ ✔
(1 NO + 1 NC) • Can be used to output signals (2 ×)
1) For motor currents up to 820 A, a current measuring module, e.g.

0.3 ... 3 A, can be used in combination with a 3UF18 series transformer.
2) Single-phase operation: Abnormal operating status of a three-phase
asynchronous motor where one phase is interrupted.
3) The SIRIUS 3RN thermistor motor protection devices can be used to
provide additional temperature-dependent protection.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/39

Overload Relays
General data
Design of load feeders

Short-circuit strength up to 100 kA • Provides optimum protection of the loads and ✔ ✔ ✔
at 690 V operating personnel in the event of short-circuits
(in conjunction with the corresponding due to insulation faults or faulty switching
fuses or the corresponding motor starter operations
protector)
Electrical and mechanical matching • Simplifies configuration ✔ ✔ ✔ 1)
to 3RT1 contactors • Reduces wiring overhead and costs
• Enables stand-alone installation as well as
space-saving direct mounting
Straight-through transformers for • Reduces the contact resistance -- ✔ ✔
main circuit2) (only one point of contact) (S2 ... S6) (S00 ... S6)
(in this case the cables are routed • Saves wiring costs
through the feed-through openings of (easy, no need for tools, and fast)
the overload relay and connected
directly to the box terminals of the • Saves material costs
contactor) • Reduces installation costs
5
Spring-loaded terminal connection • Enables fast connections ✔ -- --

system for main circuit2) • Permits vibration-resistant connections (S00)
• Enables maintenance-free connections
Spring-loaded terminal connection • Enables fast connections ✔ ✔ ✔
system for auxiliary circuits2) • Permits vibration-resistant connections
• Enables maintenance-free connections
Other features
Temperature compensation • Allows the use of the relays at high temperatures ✔ ✔ ✔
without derating
• Prevents premature tripping
• Allows compact installation of the controlgear
cabinet without distance between the
devices/load feeders
• Simplifies configuration
• Enables space to be saved in the controlgear
cabinet
Very high long-term stability • Provides safe protection for the loads even after (✔) ✔ ✔
years of use in severe operating conditions
Wide setting ranges • Reduce the number of variants -- ✔ ✔
• Minimize the engineering outlay and costs (1:4) (1:10)
• Minimize storage overhead, storage costs,
tied-up capital
Trip class CLASS 5 • Enables solutions for very fast starting motors -- ✔ ✔
requiring special protection (e.g. Ex motors) (only 3RB21)
Trip classes > CLASS 10 • Enable heavy starting solutions -- ✔ ✔
Low power loss • Reduces power consumption and energy costs -- ✔ ✔
(up 98% less power is used than for thermal
overload relays).
• Minimizes temperature rises of the contactor and
controlgear cabinet – in some cases this may
eliminate the need for controlgear cabinet cooling.
• Direct mounting to contactor saves space, even
for high motor currents (i.e. no heat decoupling is
required).
1) Exception: Up to size S3, only stand-alone installation is possible.
2) Alternatively available for screw terminal.
5/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
General data
Other features
Internal power supply • Eliminates the need for configuration and -- 1) ✔ --
connecting an additional control circuit
Variable adjustment of the trip • Reduces the number of variants -- ✔ ✔
classes • Minimizes the configuring outlay and costs (only 3RB21)
(The required trip class can be adjusted • Minimizes storage overhead, storage costs, and
by means of a rotary knob depending tied-up capital
on the current starting condition.)
Overload warning • Indicates imminent tripping of the relay directly on -- -- ✔
the device due to overload, phase unbalance or
phase failure
• Allows the imminent tripping of the relay to be
signaled
• Allows measures to be taken in time in the event
of continuous inverse-time delayed overloads
• Eliminates the need for an additional device
5
Analog output • Allows the output of an analog output signal for -- -- ✔
actuating moving-coil instruments, feeding pro-
grammable logic controllers or transfer to bus
systems
• Eliminates the need for an additional measuring
transformer and signal converter
1) The SIRIUS 3RU11 thermal overload relays use a bimetal contactor and
therefore do not require an additional control circuit.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/41

Overload Relays
General data
Overload Current Current Contactors (type, size, rating in kW)

Relays measure- range 3RT10 1 3RT10 2 3RT10 3 3RT10 4 3RT10 5 3RT10 6 3RT10 7 3TF68/69
ment
S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10 S12 Size 14
Type Type A 3/4/5.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45 55/75/90 110/132/160 200/250 375/450
3RU11 thermal overload relays
3RU11 1 Integrated 0.11 … 12 ✔
3RU11 2 1.8 … 25 ✔
3RU11 3 5.5 … 50 ✔
3RU11 4 18 … 100 ✔
3RB20/3RB211) solid-state overload relays

3RB2. 1 Integrated 0.1 … 12 ✔
3RB2. 2 3 … 25 ✔
3RB2. 3 6 … 50 ✔
3RB2. 4 12.5 … 100 ✔
3RB2. 5 50 ... 200 ✔
3RB2. 6 55 ... 630 ✔ ✔ ✔
3RB22/3RB231) solid-state overload relays

3RB22/3RB23 + 3RB29 0 0.3 … 25 ✔ ✔
3RB29 0 10 ... 100 ✔ ✔
3RB29 5 20 … 200 ✔
5
3RB29 6 63 ... 630 ✔ ✔ ✔

3RB29 0 + 630 ... 820 ✔
3UF18
1) When using the overload relays with trip class CLASS 20, see Technical
Specifications, Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders, and
the configuring aid "Configuring SIRIUS Fuseless Load Feeders".
5/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 for standard applications
■ Overview The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position

indicator (see Function). Resetting takes place either manually
or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed
(see Function).
The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmen-
tal guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable
materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards
and approvals.
■ Design
Device concept
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are compact
devices, i.e. current measurement (transformer) and the evalua-
tion unit are integrated in a single enclosure.
Mounting options
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
direct and space-saving mounting onto 3RT1 contactors and
3RW30/3RW31 soft starters as well as for stand-alone installa-
(1) Connection for mounting onto contactors: tion. For more information on the mounting options, please
Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the see Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data.
contactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for
direct mounting of the overload relays. Stand-alone installation is Connection technique
possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a
stand-alone installation module). Main circuit
(2) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: All sizes of the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays can be
With the slide switch you can choose between manual and automatic connected with screw-type terminals. As an alternative for sizes
RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing S3 to S10/S12, the main circuits can be connected with the help
5
the RESET button. On the 3RB21 a solid-state remote RESET is of rails. Sizes S2 to S6 of the 3RB20/3RB21 relays are also avail-
integrated. able with a straight-through transformer. In this case, the cables
(3) Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: of the main circuit are routed directly through the feed-through
Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test. openings of the relay to the contactor terminals.
(4) Solid-state test:
Enables a test of all important device components and functions. Auxiliary circuit
(5) Motor current setting: Connection of the auxiliary circuit (removable terminal block) is
Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large possible with either screw terminals or spring-loaded terminals
rotary knob. (special device variants).
(6) Trip class setting/internal ground-fault detection (only 3RB21):
Using the rotary switch you can set the required trip class and activate For more information on the connection options,
the internal ground-fault detection dependent on the starting see Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data.
conditions.
Overload relays in contactor assemblies for
(7) Connecting terminals (removable terminal block for auxiliary circuits): Wye-Delta starting
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors
with different cross-sections for the main and auxiliary circuits. The When overload relays are used in combination with contactor as-
auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw-type terminals and semblies for Wye-Delta starting it must be noted that only
alternatively with spring-loaded terminals. 0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor.
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays up to 630 A An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set to
with internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time 0.58 times the motor current.
delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting An assignment of the 3RB20 solid-state overload relays to the
(see Function) against excessive temperature rises due to over- line contactors of our 3RA Wye-Delta assemblies can be found
load, phase unbalance or phase failure. An overload, phase un- under "Controls: Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
balance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current
beyond the set motor rated current. This current rise is detected When 3RB21 solid-state overload relays are used in combination
by the current transformers integrated into the devices and eval- with contactor assemblies for Wye-Delta starting, the internal
uated by corresponding solid-state circuits which then output a ground-fault detection must not be activated.
pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch
off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on Operation with frequency converter
the ratio between the tripping current and set current Ie and is The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic frequencies of 50/60 Hz and the associated harmonics. This
(see Characteristic Curves). permits the 3RB20/3RB21 overload relays to be used on the
In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against incoming side of the frequency converter.
excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance If motor protection is required on the outgoing side of the fre-
and phase failure, the 3RB21 solid-state overload relays also quency converter, Siemens recommends the 3RN thermistor
allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction motor protection devices or the 3RU11 thermal overload relays
with wye-delta assemblies). This provides protection of loads for this purpose.
against high-resistance short-circuits due to damage to the
insulation material, moisture, condensed water etc.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/43

Overload Relays
■ Function Recovery time

With the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays the recovery
Basic functions time after inverse-time delayed tripping is between 0.5 and 3
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are designed for: minutes depending on the preloading when automatic RESET is
set. These recovery times allow the load to cool down.
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading
If the button is set to manual RESET, the 3RB20/3RB21 devices
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase
can be reset immediately after inverse-time delayed tripping.
unbalance
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure After a ground fault trip the 3RB21 solid-state overload relays
(with ground-fault detection activated) can be reset immediately
• Protection of loads from high-resistance short-circuits without a recovery time regardless of the reset mode set.
(internal ground-fault detection only with 3RB21).
TEST function
Control circuit
With motor current flowing, the TEST button can be used to
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays have an internal check whether the relay is working correctly (device/solid-state
power supply, i.e. no additional supply voltage is required. TEST). Current measurement, motor model and trip unit are
Short-circuit protection tested. If these components are OK, the device is tripped in
accordance with the table below. If there is an error, no tripping
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit takes place.
protection. For assignments of the corresponding short-circuit
protection devices to the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload re- Trip class Required loading with the Tripping within
lays with/without contactor see Technical Specifications and rated current prior to press-
ing the test button
Selection and Ordering Data.
CLASS 5 2 min 8s
Trip classes
CLASS 10 4 min 15 s
The 3RB20 solid-state overload relays are available for normal CLASS 20 8 min 30 s
starting conditions with trip CLASS 10 or for heavy starting con-
CLASS 30 12 min 45 s
ditions with trip CLASS 20 (fixed setting in each case).
The 3RB21 solid-state overload relays are suitable for normal Note: The test button must be kept pressed throughout the test.
5
and heavy starting. The required trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or Testing of the auxiliary contacts and the control current wiring is
30) can be adjusted by means of a rotary knob depending on the possible with the switch position indicator slide. Actuating the
current starting condition. slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC
For details of the trip classes see Characteristic Curves. contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-98) is closed.
This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly wired.
Phase failure protection After a test trip the relay is reset by pressing the RESET button.
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are fitted with
phase failure protection (see Characteristic Curves) in order to Self-monitoring
minimize temperature rises of the load during single-phase The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays have a self-moni-
operation. toring feature, i.e. the devices constantly monitor their own basic
Phase failure protection is not effective for loads with star- functions and trip if an internal fault is detected.
connection and a grounded neutral point or a neutral point which Display of operating status
is connected to a neutral conductor.
The respective operating status of the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state
Setting overload relays is displayed by means of the position of the
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are set to the marking on the switch position indicator slide. After tripping due
motor rated current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the to overload, phase failure, phase unbalance or ground fault
rotary knob is shown in ampere. (ground fault detection possible only with 3RB21) the marking on
the slide is to left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark.
With the 3RB21 solid-state overload relay it is also possible to
select the trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) using a second Auxiliary contacts
rotary knob and to switch the internal ground-fault detection on The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are fitted with an
and off. NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for
Manual and automatic reset switching off the contactor.
In the case of the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays, a

slide switch can be used to choose between automatic and
manual resetting.
If manual reset is set, a reset can be carried out directly on the
device after a trip by pressing the blue RESET button. Resetting
is possible in combination with the mechanical reset options
from the accessories range (see Accessories). As an alternative
to the mechanical RESET options, the 3RB21 solid-state over-
load relays can be equipped with electrical remote RESET by
applying a voltage of 24 V DC to the terminals A3 and A4.
If the slide switch is set to automatic RESET, the relay is reset
automatically.
The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the
recovery time.
5/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Type 3RB20 16, 3RB20 26, 3RB20 36, 3RB20 46, 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,
3RB21 13 3RB21 23 3RB21 33 3RB21 43 3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/S12
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm
General data
Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance
+ ground fault (for 3RB21 only)
Trip class according to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10 / 20 / 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable (depending on the version)
Phase failure sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET (depending on the version)
• Recovery time
- For automatic RESET min. Between 0.5 and 3 min (depending on the preloading)
- For manual RESET min. Immediately
- For remote RESET min. Immediately
Features
• Display of operating status on device Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes, test of electronics by pressing the button Test
Test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control current circuit by actuating
the switch position indicator slide
Self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button No
Safe operation of motors with "increased safety" type
of protection
5
1)
EU type test certificate number according to
guideline 94/9/EU
Ambient temperatures
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
• Temperature compensation °C +60
• Permissible rated current at
- Temperature inside cubicle 60°C % 100
- Temperature inside cubicle 70°C % 1)
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20 IP202)
Touch protection according to IEC 61140 Finger-safe Finger-safe, Finger-safe
for busbar with cover
connection
with cover
Shock resistance with sine according to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
– Interference immunity
• Conductor-related interference
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)
• Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge)
• Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Degree of severity B according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)
Emitted interference
Resistance to extreme climates – air humidity % 100
Dimensions See dimensional drawings
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000
Mounting position Any
Type of mounting Direct mounting / Direct mounting /
Stand-alone installation with Stand-alone installation
terminal bracket
1) On request.
2) Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/45

Overload Relays
Type 3RB20 16, 3RB20 26, 3RB20 36, 3RB20 46,

3RB21 13 3RB21 23 3RB21 33 3RB21 43
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
Main circuit
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1000
Type of current
• Direct current no
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 (other frequencies on request)
Set current A 0.1 ... 0.4 to 3 ... 12 to 6 ... 25 to 12.5 ... 50 to
3 ... 12 6 ... 25 12.5 ... 50 25 ... 100
Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.05
- With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
- With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main V 6901)
and auxiliary conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
Connection for main circuit
Electrical connection version Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw terminal
with box terminal / with box terminal /
straight-through bus connection /
transformer straight-through
transformer
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
5
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors

- Solid mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 × (1 ... 2.5), 2 × (1 ... 16) 2 × (2.5 ... 16)
2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 × (2.5 ... 6)
2
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 × (1 ... 2.5), 2 × (1 ... 16), 2 × (2.5 ... 35),
2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 × (2.5 ... 6) 1 × (1 ... 25) 1 × (2.5 ... 50)
- Stranded mm2 -- 2 × (max. 25), 2 × (10 ... 50),

1 × (1 ... 35) 1 × (10 ... 70)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (18 ... 14) 2 × (14 ... 10) 2 × (max. 3), 2 × (10 ... 1/0),
1 × (18 ... 2) 2 × (10 ... 2/0)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- 2 × (6 × 9 × 0.8) 2 × (6 × 9 × 0.8)

Busbar connections
• Terminal screw -- M 6 × 20
• Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.)
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 × 70
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 3 × 70
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12
Straight-through transformers
• Diameter of opening mm – 15 18
• Conductor cross-section (max.)
- NYY mm2 -- 2) 2)
- H07RN-F mm2 -- 2) 2)
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V.

2) On request.
5/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Type 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,

3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S6 S10/S12
Width 120 mm 145 mm
Main circuit
Type of current
• Direct current No
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 (other frequencies on request)
Set current A 50 ... 200 55 ... 250 to
160 ... 630
- With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
- With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main V 6901)
Electrical connection version Screw terminal with box terminal/ Screw terminal
Bus connection / with box terminal/
Straight-through transformer Bus connection
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw
• Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
- Solid mm2 --
5
2
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
2 × (1 × max. 50, 1 × max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal: rear clamping point only:
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
2
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
2
- Stranded mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (70 ... 240),
2 × (max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (16 ... 70) 1 × (95 ... 300)
2 × (max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 240)
1 × (16 ... 120)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
2 × (max. 1/0), front clamping point only:
1 × (6 ... 2/0) 1 × (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
2 × (max. 3/0), 1 × (250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
1 × (6 ... 250 kcmil)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5),
(number x width x circumference) 2 × (6 × 15.5 × 0.8), 1 × (6 × 9 × 0.8 ... 20 × 24 × 0.5)
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 6 × 15.5 × 0.8)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal:
2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8),
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw M 8 × 25 M 10 × 30
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.)
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 952) 50 ... 2403)
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 1202) 70 ... 2403)
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm 15 25
• Diameter of opening mm 24.5 --
- NYY mm2 120 --
- H07RN-F mm2 70 --
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V. 3) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use the sections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
from 95 mm2 to ensure phase spacing. spacing.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/47

Overload Relays
Type 3RB20 16, 3RB20 26, 3RB20 36, 3RB20 46, 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,
3RB21 13 3RB21 23 3RB21 33 3RB21 43 3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/S12
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm
Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",
1 NC for switching off the contactor
Auxiliary contacts – Contact rating
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15
Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
1)
- 24 V A
- 120 V A 1)
1)
- 125 V A
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 1)
1)
- 600 V A
1)
- 690 V A
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15:
1)
- 24 V A
- 120 V A 1)
1)
- 125 V A
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 1)
1)
- 600 V A
5
1)
- 690 V A
• NC, NO contact with direct current DC-13:
- 24 V A 2
- 60 V A 0.55
- 110 V A 0.3
- 125 V A 0.3
- 250 V A 0.1
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA)
• With fuse
- gL/gG operational class A 6
1)
- quick A
• With miniature circuit-breaker (C-characteristic) A 1)
Safe isolation between main V 300

CSA, UL, and UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity B300, R300
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw terminal or spring-loaded terminals
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm2 --
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) On request.
5/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders
For short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 400 to 690 V
Overload relays Contactor CLASS 690 V
5 and 10 20 30 Fuse links1)
LV HRC Type 3NA
DIAZED Type 3SB
NEOZED Type 3SE
gL/gG operational class
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at Type of coordination2)
Setting range Type 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 2
Size S00
0.1 ... 0.4 A 3RT10 15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 35 6
0.32 ... 1.25 A 3RT10 15 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 35 6
1 ... 4 A 3RT10 15 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
3RT10 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
3RT10 17 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
3 ... 12 A 3RT10 16 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 35 20
3RT10 17 12 9 6.3 10 9 6.3 9 9 6.3 35 20
Size S0
3 ... 12 A 3RT10 23 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 -- -- -- 63 25
3RT10 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT10 25 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25
6 ... 25 A 3RT10 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT10 25 17 17 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 63 25
3RT10 26 25 18 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 100 35
5
Size S2
6 ... 25 A 3RT10 34 25 25 20 22.3 22.3 20 19.1 19.1 19.1 125 63
3RT10 35 25 25 24 25 25 24 25 25 24 125 63
12.5 ... 50 A 3RT10 34 32 32 20 22.3 22.3 20 19.1 19.1 19.1 125 63
3RT10 35 40 40 24 29.4 29.4 24 26.5 26.5 24 125 63
3RT10 36 50 50 24 32.7 32.7 24 26.5 26.5 24 160 80
Size S3
12.5 ... 50 A 3RT10 44 50 50 47 49 49 47 41.7 41.7 41.7 200 125
3RT10 45 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 45 45 200 160
25 ... 100 A 3RT10 44 65 65 47 49 49 47 41.7 41.7 41.7 200 125
3RT10 45 80 80 58 53 53 53 45 45 45 200 160
3RT10 46 95 95 58 59 59 58 50 50 50 200 160
3RT10 54 100 100 100 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 -- -- -- 100 100 100 90 90 90 355 315
Size S6
50 ... 200 A 3RT10 54 115 115 115 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 150 150 150 107 107 107 90 90 90 355 315
3RT10 56 185 185 170 131 131 131 111 111 111 355 315
Size S10/S12
55 ... 250 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 135 135 135 500 400
3RT10 65 250 250 250 188 188 188 159 159 159 500 400
3RT10 66 250 250 250 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
160 ... 630 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 -- -- -- 500 400
3RT10 65 265 265 265 188 188 188 -- -- -- 500 400
3RT10 66 300 300 280 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
3RT10 75 400 400 400 284 284 284 240 240 240 630 400
3RT10 76 500 500 450 355 355 355 300 300 300 630 500
3RT12 64 225 225 225 225 225 225 173 173 173 500 500
3RT12 65 265 265 265 265 265 265 204 204 204 500 500
3RT12 66 300 300 300 300 300 300 231 231 231 500 500
3RT12 75 400 400 400 400 400 400 316 316 316 800 800
3RT12 76 500 500 500 500 500 500 385 385 385 800 800
3TF683) 630 630 630 440 440 440 376 376 376 800 5004)
3TF693) 630 630 630 572 572 572 500 500 500 800 6304)
1) Please observe operational voltage. 4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has sufficient
2) Coordination and short-circuit equipment according to EN 60947-4-1: safety clearance from the rated current of the fuses.
Type of coordination 1: the contactor or starter must not endanger
persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
They do not need to be suitable for further operation without repair and the
renewal of parts.
They must be suitable for further operation.
There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Contactor cannot be mounted.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/49

Overload Relays
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the Tripping characteristics for 3-pole loads
tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set current
Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads 1000
NSB0_01525
from the cold state. 800
600
The smallest current used for tripping is called the minimum trip- 400
Tripping time
ping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be s
within specified limits. The limits of the total tripping current for 200
the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays for symmetrical
three-pole loads are between 105 % and 120 % of the set cur-
rent. 100
80
The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping 60
current and continues with higher tripping currents based on the 40
characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within 20
which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set CLASS 30
current Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. CLASS 20
10
The tripping times according to IEC 60947-4-1, tolerance band 8
E, are as follows for: 6 CLASS 10
4
Trip class Tripping time CLASS 5
CLASS 5 3…5s 2
CLASS 10 5 … 10 s
CLASS 20 10 … 20 s 1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
CLASS 30 20 … 30 s Tripping current
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole overload relay from Illustration 1

5
the cold state (see illustration 1) only apply if all three phases are
simultaneously loaded with the same current. In the event of a Tripping characteristics for 2-pole loads
phase failure the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays 1000
switch off the contactor more quickly in order to minimize heating 800 NSB0_01526
of the load in accordance with the tripping characteristic for two- 600
pole loads from the cold state (see illustration 2). With phase 400
Tripping time
unbalance the devices switch off depending on the reason for s

the unbalance between the two characteristic curves. 200
Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature
obviously has a lower temperature reserve. The tripping time of 100
the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays is reduced there- 80
fore to about 30 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an 60
extended period. 40
20
CLASS 30
10
8 CLASS 20
6
4 CLASS 10
2 CLASS 5
1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
Tripping current
Illustration 2
The above illustrations are schematic representations of
characteristic curves. The characteristic curves of the individual
3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays can be requested from
Technical Assistance at the following e-mail address:
Technical-assistance@siemens.com
5/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
51
64 48 Ø11 25
NSB0_01510
57
147
122
85
45 73
Ø9
125
NSB0_01518
3RB20 16, 3RB21 13, size S00
6
145 61
156
3RB20 66, 3RB21 63, size S10/S12

73
NSB0_01511
74
45 75
NSB0_01513
5
3RB20 26, 3RB21 23, size S0 45 104
54 Ø5
18
9 56
5
Ø15
22 27
57
92
76
3RB20 36, 3RB21 33, size S2 with straight-through transformer

NSB0_01512
5 104
54
21
51
64
67
86
3RB20 36, 3RB21 33, size S2

35
NSB0_01515
11
23 Ø6 63
2
60
Ø5
5
70 119
106
64
18
89
30
NSB0_01514
5 31 16 34
70
119
3RB20 46, 3RB21 43, size S3 with straight-through transformer
3RB20 46, 3RB21 43, size S3
37 17 79
Ø5
62
95
79
60
119
79
95
99
60
NSB0_01517
NSB0_01516
5
95 Ø7 73
3 120 150
95 Ø7
5
120 47
150
3RB20 56, 3RB21 53, size S6 3RB20 56, 3RB21 53, size S6 with straight-through transformer
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/51

Overload Relays
■ Schematics
R E S E T
T E S T
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 0 5
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8 A 2 1 4 /2 2
3RB20 16 overload relays

R E S E T
T E S T
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 0 6
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8
3RB20 26 to 3RB20 66 overload relays

R E S E T
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 0 7
T E S T
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7 A 3 ( )
5
2 4 V
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8 A 2 1 4 /2 2 A 4 (+ )
3RB21 13 overload relays

R E S E T
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 0 8
T E S T
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7 A 3 ( )
2 4 V
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8 A 4 (+ )
3RB21 23 to 3RB21 63 overload relays
5/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for High-Feature applications
■ Overview
The modular, solid-state overload relays with external power
supply type 3RB22 (with monostable auxiliary contacts) and
type 3RB23 (with bistable auxiliary contacts) up to 630 A (up to
820 A possible with a series transformer) have been designed
for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal and
heavy starting (see Function) against excessive temperature
rises due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure. An
overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase
of the motor current beyond the set motor rated current. This
current rise is detected by means of a current measuring module
and electronically evaluated by a special evaluation module
which is connected to it. The evaluation electronics sends a
signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then
switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time de-
pends on the ratio between the tripping current and set current
Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping charac-
teristic (see Characteristic Curves). The "tripped" status is
signaled by means of a continuous red "Overload" LED.
The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload,
3RB22/3RB23 evaluation module phase unbalance or phase failure by flickering when the limit
(1) Green "Ready" LED: current has been violated. This warning can also issued as a
A continuous green light signals that the device is working correctly. signal through auxiliary contacts.
(2) Red "Ground Fault" LED: In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of
A continuous red light signals a ground fault.
loads against excessive temperature rises, the 3RB22/3RB23
(3) Red "Thermistor" LED: solid-state overload relays also allow direct temperature moni-
A continuous red light signals an active thermistor trip. toring of the motor windings (full motor protection) by failsafe
(4) Red "Overload" LED: connection of a PTC sensor circuit. With this temperature-depen-
5
A continuous red light signals an active overload trip; a flickering red dent protection, the loads can be protected against overheating
light signals an imminent trip (overload warning). caused indirectly by reduced coolant flow, for example, which
(5) Motor current and trip class adjustment: cannot be detected by means of the current alone. In the event
Setting the device to the motor current and to the required trip class of overheating, the devices switch off the contactor, and thus the
dependent on the starting conditions is easy with the two rotary knobs. load, by means of the auxiliary contacts. The "tripped" status is
(6) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET: signaled by means of a continuous red "Thermistor" LED.
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic
RESET. To also protect the loads against high-resistance short-circuits
(7) Test/RESET button: due to damage to the insulation, humidity, condensed water,
Enables testing of all important device components and functions, etc., the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays offer the pos-
plus resetting of the device after a trip when manual RESET is sibility of internal ground fault monitoring in conjunction with a
selected. function expansion module (for details see Catalog LV 1,
(8) Connecting terminals (removable terminal block): Selection and Ordering Data); not possible in conjunction with
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors contactor assembly for Wye-Delta starting). In the event of a
with different cross-sections for the auxiliary, control and sensor ground fault the 3RB22/3RB23 relays trip instantaneously. The
circuits. Connection is possible with screw-type terminals and alterna- "tripped" status is signaled by means of a red "Ground Fault"
tively with spring-loaded terminals. LED. Signaling through auxiliary contacts is also possible.
(9) 3RB29 85 function expansion module:
Enables more functions to be added, e.g. internal ground fault After tripping due to overload, phase unbalance, phase failure,
detection and/or an analog output with corresponding signals. thermistor tripping or ground fault, the relay is reset manually or
automatically after the recovery time has elapsed (see Function).
In conjunction with a function expansion module the motor cur-
rent measured by the microprocessor can be output in the form
of an analog signal 4 ... 20 mA DC for operating rotary coil
instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable
logic controllers. With an additional AS-Interface analog module
the current values can also be transferred over the AS-i bus
system.
materials.
They comply with all important worldwide standards and
approvals.
3RB29 06 current measuring module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/53

Overload Relays
Device concept Basic functions
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are based on a The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are designed for:
modular device concept. Each device always comprises an • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading
evaluation module, which is independent of the motor current,
and a current measuring module, which is dependent on the mo- • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase
tor current. The two modules are electrically interconnected by a unbalance
connection cable through the system interface. • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
The basic functionality of the evaluation module can be option- • Temperature-dependent protection of loads by connecting a
ally expanded with corresponding function expansion modules. PTC sensor circuit
The function expansion modules are integrated in the evaluation • Protection of loads from high-resistance short-circuits (internal
module for this purpose through a simple plug connection. ground-fault detection; detection of fault currents > 30 % of
the set current Ie)
Mounting options
• Output of an overload warning
Current measuring modules
• Output of an analog signal 4 to 20 mA DC as image of the
The current measuring modules size S00/S0 and S2/S3 are flowing motor current
designed for stand-alone installation. By contrast, the current
measuring modules size S6 and S10/S12 are suitable for The basic functions of the evaluation modules in conjunction
stand-alone installation and direct mounting. with function expansion modules are listed in the following table:
Evaluation modules Evaluation Function expan- Basic functions

module sion module
The evaluation modules can be mounted either on the current 3RB22 83-4AA1 None Inverse-time delayed protection,
measuring module (only sizes S00/S0 and S2/S3) or separately. temperature-dependent protection,
3RB22 83-4AC1
electrical remote RESET,
For more information on the mounting options, please 3RB23 83-4AA1 overload warning
see Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data. 3RB23 83-4AC1 3RB29 85-2CA1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
Connection technique temperature-dependent protection,
5
internal ground-fault detection,

Main circuit (current measuring module) electrical remote RESET,
overload warning
For sizes S00/S0, S2/S3 and S6, the main circuit can also be 3RB29 85-2CB1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
connected by the straight-through transformer method. In this temperature-dependent protection,
case, the cables of the main circuit are routed directly through internal ground-fault detection,
the feed-through openings of the relay to the contactor electrical remote RESET,
terminals. ground fault signal
3RB29 85-2AA0 Inverse-time delayed protection,
For sizes S6 and S10/S12, the main circuit can be connected temperature-dependent protection,
with the help of rails. In conjunction with the corresponding box electrical remote RESET,
terminals, screw terminal is also possible. overload warning,
analog output
Auxiliary circuit (evaluation module)
3RB29 85-2AA1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
Connection of the auxiliary circuit (removable terminal block) is temperature-dependent protection,
possible with either screw terminals or spring-loaded terminals internal ground-fault detection,
(special variants). overload warning,
analog output
For more information on the connection options, see
Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data. 3RB29 85-2AB1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
temperature-dependent protection,
Overload relays in contactor assemblies for internal ground-fault detection,
Wye-Delta starting electrical remote RESET,
ground fault signal,
When overload relays are used in combination with contactor analog output
assemblies for Wye-Delta starting it must be noted that only
0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An Control circuit
overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set to The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays require an exter-
0.58 times the motor current. nal power supply, i.e. an additional supply voltage is necessary.
When 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are used in Power is supplied through a wide-range power supply unit for
combination with contactor assemblies for Wye-Delta starting, 24 to 240 V AC/DC.
the function expansion modules for internal ground-fault detec- Short-circuit protection
tion must not be used.
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit
Operation with frequency converter protection. For assignments of the corresponding short-circuit
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for protection devices to the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload re-
frequencies of 50/60 Hz and the associated harmonics. This lays with/without contactor see Technical Specifications and
permits the 3RB22/3RB23 overload relays to be used on the Selection and Ordering Data.
incoming side of the frequency converter. Trip classes
If motor protection is required on the outgoing side of the fre- The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
quency converter, Siemens recommends the 3RN thermistor normal and heavy starting. The required trip class (CLASS 5, 10,
motor protection devices or the 3RU11 thermal overload relays 20 or 30) can be adjusted by means of a rotary knob depending
for this purpose. on the current starting condition.
For details of the trip classes see Characteristic Curves.
5/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Phase failure protection TEST function
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are fitted with The combined TEST/RESET button can be used to check
phase failure protection (see Characteristic Curves) in order to whether the relay is working correctly. The test can be aborted at
minimize temperature rises of the load during single-phase any time by letting go of the TEST/RESET button.
operation.
LEDs, the device configuration (this depends on which expan-
Setting sion module is plugged in) and the device hardware are tested
while the button is kept pressed for 6 seconds. Simultaneously
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are set to the and for another 18 seconds a direct current proportional in size
motor rated current by means of two rotary knobs. to the maximum phase of the main current is fed in at the termi-
• The upper rotary knob (CLASS/Iemax) is divided into 4 ranges: nals I(+) and I(-). By comparing the analog signal, which is to be
1 A, 10 A, 100 A and 1000 A. The zone must be selected measured, with the main current, the accuracy of the current
which corresponds to the rated motor current and the current measurement can be determined. In this case 4 mA corre-
measuring module to be used with it. With the range selected sponds to 0 % and 20 mA to 125 % of the set current. After
the required trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) can be deter- 24 seconds the auxiliary contacts are switched and the feeder
mined. switch off as the result, bringing the test to an end.
• The lower rotary knob with percent scale (10 % ... 100 %) is After a test trip a faultless relay is reset by pressing the
then used to set the rated motor current in percent of the range TEST/RESET button. If a hardware fault is detected, the device
selected with the upper rotary button. trips and cannot be reset.
Example Self-monitoring
• Rating of induction motor = 45 kW (50 Hz, 400 V AC)
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays have a self-moni-
• Rated motor current = 80 A toring feature, i.e. the devices constantly monitor their own basic
• Required trip class = CLASS 20 functions and trip if an internal fault is detected.
• Selected transformer: 10 to 100 A Display of the operating status
Solution The particular operating status of the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state
• Step 1: Use the upper rotary knob (CLASS) to select the 100 A overload relays is displayed by means of four LEDs:
range • Green "Ready" LED: A continuous green light signals that the
5
• Step 2: Within the 100 A range set the trip class CLASS 20 overload relay is ready for operation. The 3RB22/3RB23 over-
• Step 3: Set the lower rotary knob to 80 % (= 0.8) of load relays are not ready (LED "OFF") if there is no control
100 A 0.8 = 80 A. supply voltage or if the function test was negative.
• Red "Ground fault" LED: A continuous red light signals a
If the current which is set on the evaluation module does not ground fault.
correspond to the current range of the connected current trans-
former, an error will result. • Red "Thermistor" LED: A continuous red light signals a
temperature-dependent trip.
Manual and automatic reset • Red "Overload" LED: A continuous red light signals an inverse-
In the case of the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays, a time delayed trip; a flickering red light signals an imminent
slide switch can be used to choose between automatic and inverse-time delayed trip (overload warning).
manual resetting. Auxiliary contacts
If manual reset is set, a reset can be carried out directly on the The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays have two outputs,
device after a trip by pressing the blue TEST/RESET button. each with one NO contact and one NC contact. Their basic as-
A remote RESET can be carried out electrically by jumpering the signment/function may be influenced by function expansion
terminals Y1 and Y2. modules.
If the slide switch is set to automatic RESET, the relay is reset The 3RB22 and 3RB23 differ with respect to the tripping charac-
automatically. teristics of their auxiliary contacts – monostable or bistable:
The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the The monostable 3RB22 solid-state overload relays will enter the
recovery time. "tripped" state if the control supply voltage fails (> 200 ms), and
Recovery time return to the original state they were in before the control supply
voltage failed when the voltage returns. These devices are there-
With the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays the recovery fore especially suited for plants in which the control voltage is not
time after inverse-time delayed tripping is approx. 3 minutes strictly monitored.
regardless of the selected reset mode. The recovery time allows
the load to cool down. The bistable 3RB23 overload relays do not change their "tripped"
or "not tripped" status if the control voltage fails. The auxiliary
However, in the event of temperature-dependent tripping by contacts only switch over in the event of an overload and if the
means of a connected PTC thermistor sensor circuit, the device supply voltage is present. These devices are therefore espe-
can only be manually or automatically reset once the winding cially suited for plants in which the control voltage is monitored
temperature at the installation location of the PTC thermistor has separately.
fallen 5 Kelvin below its response temperature.
Response if the control supply voltage fails
After a ground fault trip the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload
relay trips can be reset immediately without a recovery time. If the control supply voltage fails for more than 0.2 s, the output
relays respond differently depending on the version: Monostable
or bistable.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/55

Overload Relays
Response of the Monostable Bistable

output relays 3RB22 3RB23
in the event of
Failure of the control The device trips No change of the switch-
supply voltage ing status of the auxiliary
contacts
Return of the control The device resets No change of the switch-
supply voltage with- ing status of the auxiliary
out previous tripping contacts
Return of the control The device remains The device remains
supply voltage after tripped tripped
previous tripping Reset: Reset:
• For overload tripping, • For overload tripping,
after 3 minutes after 3 minutes
• For thermistor tripping, • For thermistor tripping,
after the temperature after the temperature
has fallen 5 K below the has fallen 5 K below the
response temperature response temperature
• For ground-fault trip- • For ground-fault trip-
ping, immediately ping, immediately
Monostable and bistable responses of the output relays

o r o v e rc u rre n t
u p p ly v o lta g e
C o n tro l 1 t
it h o u t p r io r
s u p p ly 0
v o lta g e
ip p in g
S
m o n o s ta b le
Ö
th e r m is to r
tr
fa ilu r e w
C o n tro l s
b is ta b le S
Ö
5
o v e rc u rre n t
S
p ly v o lta g e
m o n o s ta b le
Ö
it h p r io r
b is ta b le S
in g
Ö
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 2 8
th e r m is to r o r
tr ip p
C o n tro l s u p
fa ilu r e w
M o to r te m p . C o n tro l R e tu rn o f M a n u a l/a u to r e s e t
to o h ig h ; s u p p ly c o n tro l a fte r 3 m in
d e v ic e tr ip s v o lta g e s u p p ly o r a fte r th e r m is to r
fa ilu r e v o lta g e h a s c o o le d d o w n
C o n ta c to r o p e n
C o n ta c to r c lo s e d
5/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Type – Overload relay of complete system 3RB22, 3RB23
Size S00 ... S10/S12
General data
Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure and phase unbalance (> 40 % according to NEMA),
+ ground fault (with corresponding function expansion module) and activation of the
thermistor motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit)
Trip class according to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Overload warning Yes, from 1.125 x Ie for symmetrical loads
and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET
• Recovery time
- For automatic RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- For tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K
below the response temperature
- For tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET
- For manual RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- For tripping due to a ground fault: immediately
- For remote RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- For tripping due to a ground fault: immediately
Features
• Display of operating status on device Yes, with 4 LEDs: Green "Ready" LED, red "Ground Fault" LED,
red "Thermistor" LED and red "Overload" LED
• TEST function Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring
5
of control current circuit by pressing the button TEST/RESET /
Self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes, with the TEST/RESET button
• STOP button No
For safe operation of motors
with type of protection "Increased Safety"
EU type test certificate number according to 1)
guideline 94/9/EU (ATEX)
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transport °C -40 ... +80
Operation °C -25 ... +60
Temperature compensation °C +60
Permissible rated current
- Temperature inside cubicle 60 °C % 100
1)
- Temperature inside cubicle 70 °C %
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Not required
Touch protection according to IEC 61140 Finger-safe2)
– Interference immunity
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)
• Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge)
• Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Electromagnetic compatiblity (EMC) – Degree of severity A according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)
Emitted interference
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000
Type of mounting Evaluation module: Stand-alone installation,
current measuring module size S00 to S3: Stand-alone installation,
current measuring module size S6 and S10/S12: Stand-alone installation and
mounting onto contactors
1) On request. 2) Current measuring modules size S6 and S10/S12 with busbar connection
in conjunction with cover.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/57

Overload Relays
Type – Overload relay of current measuring module 3RB29 3RB29 3RB29 3RB29
Size S00/S0 S2/S3 S6 S10/S12
Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1000
Type of current
• Direct current No
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 % (other frequencies on request)
Set current A 0.3 ... 3; 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
2.4 ... 25
• With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
• With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary V 6901)
conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
Electrical connection version Straight-through Screw terminal Screw terminal
transformers with box terminal / bus connection with box terminal /
/ straight-through transformer bus connection
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw -- 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw
• Tightening torque -- 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),
1 or 2 conductors
- Solid mm2 -- -- --
5
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
- Stranded mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (70 ... 240),
2 × (max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (16 ... 70) 1 × (95 ... 300)
2 × (max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 240)
1 × (16 ... 120)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
2 × (max. 1/0), front clamping point only:
1 × (6 ... 2/0) 1 × (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
2 × (max. 3/0), 1 × (250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
1 × (6 ... 250 kcmil)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5),
(number x width x circumference) 2 × (6 × 15.5 × 0.8), 1 × (6 × 9 × 0.8 ...
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 6 × 15.5 × 0.8) 20 × 24 × 0.5)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal:
2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8),
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ...
10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw -- M8 × 25 M10 × 30
• Tightening torque Nm -- 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.) --
- Solid with cable lug mm2 -- 16 ... 952) 50 ... 2403)
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 25 ... 1202) 70 ... 2403)
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 15 25
• Diameter of opening mm 7.5 14 25 --
- NYY mm2 4) 4)
120 --
- H07RN-F mm2 4) 4)
70 --
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V. 3) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use the sections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2 from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
to ensure phase spacing. spacing.
4) On request.
5/58 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Type – Overload relay of evaluation module 3RB22, 3RB23

Size S00 ... S10/S12
Width 45 mm
Auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped due to overload and/or thermistor",
1 NO for the signal "tripped due to ground fault",
or1)
1 NO for the signal "tripped due to overload and/or thermistor and/or ground fault",
1 NO for overload warning,
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 300
Auxiliary contacts – Contact rating
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 1.5
2)
- 600 V A
2)
- 690 V A
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15:
5
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 1.5
2)
- 600 V A
2)
- 690 V A
• NC, NO contact with direct current DC-13:
- 24 V A 2
- 60 V A 0.55
- 110 V A 0.25
- 125 V A 0.3
- 250 V A 0.2
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 61)
• Contact reliability Yes
• With fuse
2)
- Quick A
• With miniature circuit-breaker (C-characteristic) A 1.6
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting path V 300
according to IEC 60947-1
Screw terminal
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Stranded mm2 --
1) The assignment of auxiliary contacts may be influenced by function
expansion modules.
2) On request.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/59

Overload Relays
Type – Overload relay of evaluation module 3RB22, 3RB23

Size S00 ... S10/S12
Width 45 mm
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
Control and sensor circuit as well as analog output
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3)1) V 300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp1) kV 4
Rated control supply voltage Us1)
• AC 50/60 Hz V 24 ... 240
• DC V 24 ... 240
Operating range1)
• AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 × Us min Us 1.1 × Us max
• DC 0.85 × Us min Us 1.1 × Us max
Rated output power1)
• AC 50/60 Hz W 0.5
• DC W 0.5
Mains buffering time1) ms 200
Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor detector)2)
• Summation cold resistance kW 1.5
5
• Operating value kW 3.4 ... 3.8

• Return value kW 1.5 ... 1.65
Response time following ground fault detection
• Internal3) ms 500 ... 1000
Analog output3)
• Output signal mA 4 ... 20
• Measuring range 0 to 1.25 × Ie
4 mA corresponds to 0 × Ie
16.8 mA corresponds to 1.0 × Ie
20 mA corresponds to 1.25 × Ie
Connection for the control and sensor circuit
as well as the analog output
Screw terminal
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Stranded mm2 --
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) Control circuit.
2) Sensor circuit.
3) In conjunction with corresponding function expansion module.
5/60 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
For short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 400 to 690 V
Overload relays Contactor CLASS 690 V
5 and 10 20 30 Fuse links1)
LV HRC Type 3NA
DIAZED Type 5SB
NEOZED Type 5SE
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at Type of coordination2)
Setting range Type 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 2
Size S00/S0
0.3 ... 3 A 3RT10 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 35 20
3RT10 16 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 35 20
2.4 ... 25 A 3RT10 15 7 5 4 7 5 4 7 5 4 35 20
3RT10 16 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 35 20
3RT10 17 12 9 6.3 10 9 6.3 9 9 6.3 35 20
3RT10 23 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 -- -- -- 63 25
3RT10 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT10 25 17 17 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 63 25
3RT10 26 25 18 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 100 35
3RT10 34 25 25 20 22.3 22.3 20 19.1 19.1 19.1 125 63
3RT10 35 25 25 24 25 25 24 25 25 24 125 63
Size S2/S3
10 ... 100 A 3RT10 34 32 32 20 22.3 22.3 20 19.1 19.1 19.1 125 63
3RT10 35 40 40 24 29.4 29.4 24 26.5 26.5 24 125 63
3RT10 36 50 50 24 32.7 32.7 24 26.5 26.5 24 160 80
3RT10 44 65 65 47 49 49 47 41.7 41.7 41.7 200 125
3RT10 45 80 80 58 53 53 53 45 45 45 200 160
5
3RT10 46 95 95 58 59 59 58 50 50 50 200 160
3RT10 54 100 100 100 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 -- -- -- 100 100 100 90 90 90 355 315
Size S6
20 ... 200 A 3RT10 54 115 115 115 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 150 150 150 107 107 107 90 90 90 355 315
3RT10 56 185 185 170 131 131 131 111 111 111 355 315
Size S10/S12
160 ... 630 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 135 135 135 500 400
3RT10 65 265 265 265 188 188 188 159 159 159 500 400
3RT10 66 300 300 280 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
3RT10 75 400 400 400 284 284 284 240 240 240 630 400
3RT10 76 500 500 450 355 355 355 300 300 300 630 500
3RT12 64 225 225 225 225 225 225 173 173 173 500 500
3RT12 65 265 265 265 265 265 265 204 204 204 500 500
3RT12 66 300 300 300 300 300 300 231 231 231 500 500
3RT12 75 400 400 400 400 400 400 316 316 316 800 800
3RT12 76 500 500 500 500 500 500 385 385 385 800 800
3TF683) 630 630 630 440 440 440 376 376 376 800 5004)
3TF693) 630 630 630 572 572 572 500 500 500 800 6304)
1) Please observe operational voltage.
2) Coordination and short-circuit equipment according to EN 60947-4-1:
They do not need to be suitable for further operation
without repair and the renewal of parts.
They must be suitable for further operation.
4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has sufficient
safety clearance from the rated current of the fuses.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/61

Overload Relays
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the Tripping characteristics for 3-pole loads
tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set current
Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads 1000
NSB0_01525
from the cold state. 800
600
The smallest current used for tripping is called the minimum 400
Tripping time
tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must s
be within specified limits. The limits of the minimum tripping 200
current for the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays for
symmetrical three-pole loads are between 105 % and 120 % of
the set current. 100
80
The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping 60
current and continues with higher tripping currents based on the 40
characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within 20
which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set CLASS 30
current Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. CLASS 20
10
The tripping times according to IEC 60947-4-1, tolerance band 8
E, are as follows for: 6 CLASS 10
4
Trip class Tripping time CLASS 5
CLASS 5 3…5s 2
CLASS 10 5 … 10 s
CLASS 20 10 … 20 s 1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
CLASS 30 20 … 30 s Tripping current
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole overload relay from Illustration 1

5
the cold state (see illustration 1) only apply if all three phases are
simultaneously loaded with the same current. In the event of a Tripping characteristics for 2-pole loads
phase failure or a current unbalance of more than 40 %, the 1000
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays switch off the contac- 800 NSB0_01526
tor more quickly in order to minimize heating of the load in 600

accordance with the tripping characteristic for two-pole loads 400
Tripping time
from the cold state (see illustration 2). s

Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature ob- 200
viously has a lower temperature reserve. The tripping time of the
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are reduced therefore 100
to about 30 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an 80
extended period. 60
40
20
CLASS 30
10
8 CLASS 20
6
4 CLASS 10
2 CLASS 5
1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
Tripping current
Illustration 2
The above illustrations are schematic representations of
characteristic curves. The characteristic curves of the individual
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays can be requested from
Technical Assistance at the following e-mail address:
5/62 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
86 4
5 59
30
12
106
80
NSB0_01519
45 36
5
3RB22 83-4, 3RB23 83-4 evaluation module
9 4
8 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 0
5 5 5 6 7
4 5 5 4 0 1 4
5
7 ,5
T 3 T 1
T 1
T 3
3 8
T 2
6 5
T 2
3RB29 06-2BG1, 3RB29 06-2DG1 current measuring module 3RB29 06-2JG1 current measuring module
1 2 0
9 5
7 9
9 5
7 5 1 4 0
7 8
2 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 2
3RB29 56-2TG2 current measuring module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/63

Overload Relays
1 2 0
9 5
3 7 1 7
9
1 1 9
9 5
7 9
7 5 4 7
1 4 0
8 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 3
5
3RB29 56-2TH2 current measuring module
1 4 5
5 0 2 5
1 1
5 7
1 4 7
1 2 2
8 5
1 2 5
9
6 0 ,5 6
1 4 8
6 0 ,5
6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 4
3RB29 66-2WH2 current measuring module
5/64 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
■ Schematics
Protection of single-phase motors
(not in conjunction with internal ground-fault detection)
L L
N N
L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3
3 R B 3 R B
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 0 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 0 2 b
T 1 T 2 T 3 T 1 T 2 T 3
M M
1 ~ 1 ~
3RB29 06-2.G1, 3RB29 56-2TG2 3RB29 56-2TH2, 3RB29 66-2WH2

Schematic representation of a possible application (3-phase)
L 1
L 2
L 3
5
N
P E
F 3 F 4 F 5
F 6 6 A
g L /g G
1 3 5
-K 1 E O N K 1 E
2 4 6 S 1
3 R B 2 5 8 5 ...
O F F
S 1
A 2 A 1 9 5 0 6 9 7 0 8
F 1 L 1 L 2 L 3 F 2
3 R B 2 2 /2 3 ...
3 R B 2 9 .6 ...
R E A D Y H 1 K 1
C L A S S
G N D
H 2 R E S E T 5 , 1 0 , 2 0 , 3 0
F A U L T
3 R B 2 9 8 7 -2 .. T H E R -
A U T O
H 3 M A N G ro u n d
M IS T O R
F a u lt
O V E R - H 4 K 2
L O A D
T 1 T 2 T 3
T 1 T 2 Y 1 Y 2 I(-) I(+ ) 9 6 /0 5 9 8 /0 7
A 1
K 1
R E M O T E -
U V W R E S E T
4 -2 0 m A A 2
M
3 ~ N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 2 7
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/65

Overload Relays
Connections
Evaluation module Function expan- Basic functions Inputs
sion module
A1/A2 T1/T2 Y1/Y2
3RB22 83-4AA1 None Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
3RB22 83-4AC1 temperature-dependent protection, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC PTC sensor remote RESET
3RB23 83-4AA1 overload warning
3RB23 83-4AC1 3RB29 85-2CA1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
temperature-dependent protection, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC PTC sensor remote RESET
overload warning
3RB29 85-2CB1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
ground fault signal
3RB29 85-2AA0 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
overload warning, analog output
3RB29 85-2AA1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
overload warning, analog output
3RB29 85-2AB1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
ground fault signal, analog output
5
Evaluation module Function expan- Outputs

sion module
I (–) / I (+) 95/96 NC 97/98 NO 05/06 NC 07/08 NO
3RB22 83-4AA1 None No Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
3RB22 83-4AC1 contactor (inverse- "tripped"
time delayed/temper-
3RB23 83-4AA1 ature-dependent pro-
3RB23 83-4AC1 tection)
3RB29 85-2CA1 No Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
contactor (inverse- "tripped"
ature-dependent pro-
tection + ground
fault)
3RB29 85-2CB1 No Switching off the Signal Switching off the Signal
contactor (inverse- "tripped" contactor (ground "ground fault trip"
time delayed/temper- fault)
tection)
3RB29 85-2AA0 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
tection)
3RB29 85-2AA1 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
tection + ground
fault)
3RB29 85-2AB1 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Switching off the Signal
contactor (inverse- "tripped" contactor (ground "ground fault trip"
time delayed/temper- fault)
tection)
5/66 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Accessories
■ Overview
Overload relays for standard applications Overload relays for High-Feature applications
The following accessories are available for the 3RB20/3RB21 The following accessories are available for the 3RB22/3RB23
solid-state overload relays: solid-state overload relays:
• One terminal bracket each for the overload relays size S00 • A sealable cover for the evaluation module
and S0 (sizes S2 to S12 can be installed as stand-alone • Box terminal blocks for the current measuring modules size S6
installation without a terminal bracket) and S10/S12
• One mechanical remote RESET module for all sizes • Terminal covers for the current measuring modules size S6
• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to and S10/S12
access (for all sizes)
• One sealable cover for all sizes
• Box terminal blocks for sizes S6 and S10/S12
• Terminal covers for sizes S2 to S10/S12
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation
Type 3RB29 13-0AA1 3RB29 23-0AA1
For overload relay 3RB20 16, 3RB21 13 3RB20 26, 3RB21 23
Size S00 S0
Type of mounting For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH35 standard mounting rail
Screw terminal
5
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (1 ... 6),
Max. 1 × (... 4) Max. 1 × (... 10)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 × (1 ... 6)
- Stranded mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (1 ... 6),
Max. 1 × (... 4) Max. 1 × (... 10)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 1 × (18 ... 14) 1 × (14 ... 10)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/67

Overload Relays
3RU11 for standard applications
Device concept
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are compact devices,
i.e. current measurement and the evaluation unit are integrated
in a single enclosure.
Mounting options
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays can be mounted directly
onto the 3RT1 contactors (exception: size S00 with Cage Clamp
connection can only be installed as a stand-alone installation).
The devices can also be installed as stand-alone installations
with the corresponding terminal brackets.
For more information on the mounting options, please see
Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data.
Connection technique
All sizes of the 3RU11 thermal overload relays with screw termi-
nal can be connected to the auxiliary and main conducting
paths. Rails can be connected to the main conducting path
(1)Connection for mounting onto contactors: terminals of size S3 overload relays if the box terminals are
Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the removed.
contactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for
direct mounting of the overload relays. Stand-alone installation is As an alternative, the devices are also available with Cage
possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a Clamp terminal. The auxiliary conducting path terminals of these
stand-alone installation module). devices, and for size S00 the main conducting path terminals as
(2)Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: well, are fitted with Cage Clamp terminals.
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic
RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing For more information on the connection options, see
5
the RESET button. A remote RESET is possible using the RESET Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data.
modules (accessories), which are independent of size.
(3)Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: Overload relays in contactor assemblies for
Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test. Wye-Delta starting
(4)Motor current setting: When overload relays are used in combination with contactor
Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large assemblies for Wye-Delta starting it must be noted that only
rotary knob. 0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An
(5)STOP button: overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set to
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches 0.58 times the motor current.
off the contactor downstream. The contactor is switched on again
when the STOP button is released. An assignment of the 3RU11 thermal overload relays to the line
(6)Transparent, sealable cover contactors of our 3RA contactor assemblies for Wye-Delta start-
Secures the motor current setting, TEST function and the selector ing can be found under "Controls: Contactors and Contactor
switch for manual/automatic RESET against adjustment. Assemblies".
(7)Supply terminals: Operation with frequency converter
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors
with different cross-sections for the main and auxiliary circuits. The The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for operation
auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw-type terminals and with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of the
alternatively with spring-loaded terminals. converter, a higher current than the motor current must be used
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been de- in some cases due to eddy-currents and skin effects.
signed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal
starting (see Function) against excessive temperature rises due
to overload or phase failure. An overload or phase failure results
in an increase of the motor current beyond the set motor rated
current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up the bi-
metal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result
trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping mechanism.
The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a
contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the
tripping current and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a
long-term stable tripping characteristic (see Characteristic
Curves).
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position in-
dicator (see Function). Resetting takes place either manually or
automatically after the recovery time has elapsed (see Function).
materials.
5/68 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
■ Function Recovery time

After tripping due to overload, the 3RU11 thermal overload re-
Basic functions lays require some time until the bimetal strips have cooled down.
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are designed for: The device can only be reset after the bimetal strips have cooled
down. This time (recovery time) depends on the tripping charac-
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading teristics and strength of the tripping current.
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
The recovery time allows the load to cool down after tripping due
Control circuit to overload.
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays do not require an additional TEST function
supply voltage for operation.
The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational
Short-circuit protection 3RU11 thermal overload relay is working properly. Actuating the
slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-98) is closed.
protection. For assignments of the corresponding short-circuit This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly con-
protection devices to the 3RU11 thermal overload relays nected to the overload relay. If the 3RU11 thermal overload relay
with/without contactor see Technical Specifications and Selec- has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automat-
tion and ically reset when the TEST slide is released. The relay must be
Ordering Data. reset with the RESET button if it has been set to manual RESET.
Trip classes STOP function
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are available for normal If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This
starting conditions with trip class CLASS 10. For heavy starting switches off the contactor downstream and thus the load. The
conditions see 3RB2 Solid-state Overload Relays. load is switched on again when the STOP button is released.
For details of the trip classes see Characteristic Curves. Display of the operating status
Phase failure protection The respective operating status of the 3RU11 thermal overload
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are fitted with phase failure relay is displayed by means of the position of the marking on the
TEST function/switch position indicator slide. After tripping due
5
sensitivity (see Characteristic Curves) in order to minimize tem-
perature rises of the load in the case of a phase failure during to overload or phase failure, the marking on the slide is to left on
single-phase operation. the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark.
Setting Auxiliary contacts

The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are set to the motor rated The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are fitted with an NO contact
current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the rotary knob for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for switching off the
is shown in ampere. contactor.
Manual and automatic reset

Automatic and manual reset is selected by pressing and turning
the blue button (RESET button). If the button is set to manual re-
set, the overload relay can be reset directly by pressing the
RESET button. Resetting is possible in combination with
mechanical and electrical RESET options from the accessories
range (see Accessories). If the blue button is set to automatic
RESET, the relay is reset automatically.
The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the
recovery time.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/69

Overload Relays
Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45mm 45mm 55mm 70mm
General data
Trips in the event of Overload and phase failure
Trip class according to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10
Overload warning No
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET1)
• Recovery time
- For automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- For manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- For remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
Features
• Display of operating status on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button Yes
Safe operation of motors with "increased safety" type of protection
EU type test certificate number according to guideline 94/9/EU KEMA test certificate No. EX-97.Y.3235
DMT 98 ATEX 6001
Ambient temperature
• Operation °C -20 ... +70
• Temperature compensation °C Up to 60
5
• Permissible rated current at

- Temperature inside cubicle 60 °C % 100 (over 60 °C current reduction is not required)
- Temperature inside cubicle 70 °C % 87
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20 IP202)
Touch protection according to IEC 61140 Finger-safe
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Interference immunity
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
• Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
• Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000; above this, please enquire
Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for direct mounting and
stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction
of 10% must be implemented.
Stand-alone installation:
0 °
4 5 ° 0 ° 4 5 °
1 e x 1 ,1 1 e x 1 ,1
9 0 ° 9 0 °
1 3 5 ° 1 3 5 ° N S B 0 1 3 6 4
1 e x 1 ,1
Contactor + overload relay:
0 ° 0 °
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
1 3 5 ° 1 3 5 ° N S B 0 1 3 6 3
1 e x 1 ,1
Type of mounting Direct mounting3)/ Direct mounting/

Stand-alone instal- Stand-alone installation with terminal bracket4)
lation with terminal
bracket4)
5/70 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 1 000
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1 000
Type of current
• Direct current Yes
• Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Set current A 0.11 ... 0.16 to 1.8 ... 2.5 to 5.5 ... 8 to 18 ... 25 to
9 ... 12 20 ... 25 40 ... 50 80 ... 100
Power loss per unit (max.) W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6 6 ... 9 10 ... 16.5
• With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
• With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications
(short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main and V 500 690
auxiliary conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
Connection type Screw terminal/ Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw terminal
Cage Clamp with box terminal with box terminal/rail
connection connection1)
Screw terminal
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 –
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
2
- Stranded mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Cage Clamp terminal
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
- Stranded mm2 -- --
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) --
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw -- M6 x 20
• Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 3 x 70
- AWG connections, solid or AWG -- 2/0
stranded, with cable lug
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12
• Diameter of opening mm --
2
- NYY mm --
- H07RN-F mm2 --
1) The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are
possible if the box terminal is removed.
Footnotes for page 5/70:
1) Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories.
2) Terminal compartment: Degree of protection IP00.
3) The 3RU11 16 overload relay with Cage Clamp terminal can only be
installed as a stand-alone installation.
4) For screw and snap-on mounting TH 35 standard mounting rail; size S3
also for TH 75 standard mounting rail. For more detailed information about
terminal brackets, please see Accessories, Technical Specifications.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/71

Overload Relays
Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45mm 45mm 55mm 70mm
Auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 230 V A 3
- 400 V A 2
- 600 V A 0.6
- 690 V A 0.5
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
- 24 V A 3
- 120 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 230 V A 2
- 400 V A 1
- 600 V A 0.6
5
- 690 V A 0.5
• NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,
- 24 V A 1
- 60 V A 1)
- 110 V A 0.22
- 125 V A 0.22
- 220 V A 0.11
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 62)
• Contact reliability yes
• With fuse
- Quick A 10
• With miniature circuit-breaker (C-characteristic) A 6
Safe isolation between main and V 415
auxiliary conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
Connection type Screw terminal or Cage Clamp terminal
Screw terminal
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
- Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
Cage Clamp terminal
- Solid 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Stranded --
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded 2 x (24 ... 14)
1) On request.
2) Up to Ik 0.5 kA; 260 V.
5/72 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC
Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination 21)
Size S00
Setting range 3 kW r 3RT10 15 4 kW r 3RT10 16 5.5 kW r 3RT10 17 UL-listed Motor starter protec-
Ie max = 7 A Ie max = 9 A Ie max = 12 A fuses RK5 tors for starter
(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) protection at
Iq = 50 kA/400 V AC
A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 A
0.11 ... 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- -- 1 --
0.14 ... 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3RV13 21-0BC10
0.18 ... 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3RV13 21-0CC10
0.22 ... 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1 3RV13 21-0DC10
0.28 ... 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 1.6 3RV13 21-0EC10
0.35 ... 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 3RV13 21-0FC10
0.45 ... 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2.5 3RV13 21-0GC10
0.55 ... 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 3 3RV13 21-0HC10
0.7 ... 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 3RV13 21-0JC10
0.9 ... 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 5 3RV13 21-0KC10
1.1 ... 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 3RV13 21-1AC10
1.4 ... 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 8 3RV13 21-1BC10
1.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 --
2.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 12 --
2.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 --
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 --
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25 --
5
5.5 ... 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30 --
7 ... 10 -- -- -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 40 --
9 ... 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 16 25 45 --
Size S0
Setting range 5.5 kW r 3RT10 24 7.5 kW r 3RT10 25 11 kW r 3RT10 26 UL-listed Motor starter protec-
Iq = 50 kA/400 V AC
1.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 3RV13 21-1CC10
2.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 12 3RV13 21-1DC10
2.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 3RV13 21-1EC10
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 3RV13 21-1FC10
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25 3RV13 21-1GC10
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25/322) 25 10 25/322) 25 10 32 30 3RV13 21-1HC10
7 ... 10 25 16 25/322) 25 16 25/322) 32 16 35 40 3RV13 21-1JC10
9 ... 12.5 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 45 3RV13 21-1KC10
11 ... 16 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 60 3RV13 21-4AC10
14 ... 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 80 3RV13 21-4BC10
17 ... 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 80 3RV13 21-4CC10
20 ... 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100 --
For type of coordination 11) see short-circuit protection of the

contactors without overload relay under "Controls - Contactors
and Contactor Assemblies".
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to
IEC 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination 1: the contactor or starter must not endanger per-
sons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. They do not need to
be suitable for further operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination 2: The contactor or starter must not endanger per-
sons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. This must be suitable
for further operation. There is a risk of contact welding.
2) At max. 415 V.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/73

Overload Relays
Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC
Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination 21)
Size S2
Setting range 15 kW r 3RT10 34 18.5 kW r 3RT10 35 22 kW r 3RT10 36 UL-listed Motor starter protec-
Iq = 50 kA/400 V AC
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30 --
7 ... 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40 --
9 ... 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50 --
11 ... 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60 --
14 ... 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80 --
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 3RV13 31-4DC10
22 ... 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125 3RV13 31-4EC10
28 ... 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150 3RV13 31-4FC10
36 ... 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 175 3RV13 31-4GC10
40 ... 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200 3RV13 31-4HC10
5
Size S3
Setting range 30 kW r 3RT10 44 37 kW r 3RT10 45 45 kW r 3RT10 46 UL-listed Motor starter protec-
Iq = 50 kA/400 V AC
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 --
22 ... 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125 --
28 ... 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150 --
36 ... 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200 --
45 ... 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250 3RV13 41-4JC10
57 ... 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 300 3RV13 41-4KC10
70 ... 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 3RV13 41-4LC10
80 ... 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 3RV13 41-4MC10
For type of coordination 11)

see short-circuit protection of the
contactors without overload relay under "Controls - Contactors
and Contactor Assemblies".
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to
IEC 60947-4-1:
sons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. They do not need to
sons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. This must be suitable
for further operation. There is a risk of contact welding.
5/74 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the The tripping characteristic for a three-pole 3RU11 thermal over-
tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set current load relay (see characteristic for symmetrical three-pole loads
Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads from the cold state) only applies if all three bimetal strips are
from the cold state. simultaneously loaded with the same current. If only two bimetal
strips are heated due to a phase failure, these two strips alone
The smallest current used for tripping is called the minimum trip- must generate the necessary force to trigger the tripping mech-
ping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be anism which would result in a longer tripping time or require a
within specified limits. The limits of the minimum tripping current higher current. If these higher currents are applied over a longer
for the 3RU11 thermal overload relays for symmetrical three-pole period, they usually cause damage to the load. To avoid dam-
loads are between 105 % and 120 % of the set current. age, the 3RU11 thermal overload relays are fitted with phase
The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping failure sensitivity which ensures faster tripping in accordance
current and continues with higher tripping currents based on the with the characteristic for double-pole loads from the cold state
characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, by means of a suitable mechanical mechanism.
CLASS 20 etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature
which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set obviously has a lower temperature reserve. This is taken into
current Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. account by the 3RU11 thermal overload relays by reducing the
The tripping times are as follows for: tripping time to about 25 % when loaded with the set current Ie
for an extended period.
Trip class Tripping times
CLASS 10A 2 ... 10 s
CLASS 10 4 ... 10 s
CLASS 20 6 ... 20 s
CLASS 30 9 ... 30 s
Tripping time
10 000
5
NSB0_00288
100 5000
min
60 s
40
2000
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
3-pole
1 loading
50
20 2-pole
loading
10
1
0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 A 60 80 x I n
Current
This is the schematic representation of a characteristic curve.

The characteristic curves for the individual 3RU11 thermal over-
load relays can be requested from Technical Assistance at the
following e-mail address:
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/75

Overload Relays
Screw terminal system
7 9
5 7
Lateral distance to grounded components: at least 6 mm. N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 2
min. 28...max. 130
5 7
6 2
max. 185
148
46 32
1 1 0
17,4 12 12
47
118
3)
5
61
41
5)
5
2) 4) 1 )
24
1)
max. 8
NSB0_00338b 5 6 0 5 5 9
15,5 5 33
10
7 0 1 3 0 5
45 49
68
1) Mechanical RESET 1 ) F o r m o u n tin g o n 3 5 m m s ta n d a r d m o u n tin g r a il
2) Cable release (400 mm or 600 mm long, (1 5 m m d e e p ) a c c . to D IN E N 5 0 0 2 2
mounting on the front or laterally on the holder) o r 7 5 m m s ta n d a r d m o u n tin g r a il a c c . to D IN E N 5 0 0 2 3
3) Holder for RESET
4) Pushbutton 3RU11 46-..B.
5) Extension plunger Size S3, with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation
3RU11 16-..B0 overload relay

Size S00, with mechanical RESET Cage Clamp terminal system
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 3 9 a
4 ,5 5 2
1 )
The lateral distance to grounded components
must be at least 6 mm.
5
3 8
4 3
min. 28...max. 130

8 7
7 5
max. 185
148
5
28
46 32
5
17,4 12 12
5 3)
3 3
4,5
5 3 5 3 0
4 5 5 6 8 4 1
92
75
2) 5) 4)
1)
5
1 ) M o d u le fo r r e m o te R E S E T max. 8
15,5 7,5
5 35 5 68 NSB0_00343b
3RU11 16-..B.
45
Size S00, with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation, 1) Mechanical RESET
with remote RESET
2) Cable release (400 mm or 600 mm long,
mounting on the front or laterally on the holder)
4 ,5 6 2 3) Holder for RESET
4) Pushbutton
5) Extension plunger
4 4
5 0
3RU11 16 -..C1
9 7
8 5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 0
Size S00, with mechanical RESET

(same for sizes S00 to S3).
4 ,5
4 ,5
5 3 5 4 4 1 )
4 5 5 8 6 5
4 2
9 2
3RU11 26-..B.
7 5
Size S0, with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation

5
5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 4 a
2 6
5 5 1
1 2
5
5 3 5 7 ,5 3 0
4 5 5 6 8 4 1
5 0
5 4
1 ) M o d u le fo r r e m o te R E S E T
9 5
1 0 5
3RU11 16 -..C1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 1 a
Size S00, with remote RESET

4
5 ,5
5 ,5 4 4 5 4 0
5 5 1 0 8 5
3RU11 36-..B.
5/76 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload Relays
4 ,5 6 2
■ Schematics
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 5
R E S E T
S T O P
T E S T
S IE M E N S
4 4
5 0
T E S T
0 1
H A
8 5
9 7
S T O P R E S E T
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7
6
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 9 1
4 ,5
5 3 5 4 4 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8 A 2 1 4 /2 2
4 5 5 8 6 5
3RU11 26-..D. 3RU11 16 overload relays

R E S E T
S T O P
T E S T
5 5 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 6 a
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 9 5 9 7
5 0
5 4
S IE M E N S
T E S T
0 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 9 2
H A
9 5
1 0 5
S T O P R E S E T
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 9 6 9 8
4
5 ,5
3RU11 26 to 3RU11 46 overload relays

5 ,5 4 4 4 0
5 5 5 1 0 8 5
3RU11 36-..D.
Protection of DC motors
5
NSB0_00289a
5 7 9
N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 4 7
5 7
6 2
S IE M E N S
1 3 5
T E S T
0 1
H A
1 2 0
1 1 0
S T O P R E S E T
5
2 4 6
1 )
5
1-pole
5 6 0 7
7 0 5 9
5 1 3 0 5
NSB0_00290a
1 ) F o r m o u n tin g o n 3 5 m m s ta n d a r d m o u n tin g r a il
(1 5 m m d e e p ) a c c . to D IN E N 5 0 0 2 2
o r 7 5 m m s ta n d a r d m o u n tin g r a il a c c . to D IN E N 5 0 0 2 3
3RU11 46-..D.
Size S3, with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation 1 3 5
For dimensional drawings of overload relays mounted onto 2 4 6

contacts see "Controls - Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
2-pole
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 5/77

Overload Relays
Accessories
■ Overview
The following accessories are available for the 3RU11 thermal • One mechanical RESET module for all sizes
overload relays: • One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to
• For the four overload relay frame sizes S00 to S3 one terminal access (for all sizes)
bracket each for stand-alone installation • Terminal covers
• One electrical remote RESET module in three voltage variants
for all sizes
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation
Type 3RU1916-3AA01 3RU1926-3AA01 3RU1936-3AA01 3RU1946-3AA01

For overload relay 3RU1116 3RU1126 3RU1136 3RU1146
Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rails,
size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails.
Connection type Screw terminal Screw terminal with box terminal
Screw terminal
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
Max. 1 x (... 4) Max. 1 x (... 10)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16), 2 x (2.5 ... 35),
1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
5
- Stranded mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 25), 2 x (10 ... 50),
Max. 1 x (... 4) Max. 1 x (... 10) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3), 2 x (10 ... 1/0),
1 x (18 ... 1) 2 x (10 ... 2/0)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
5/78 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Load Feeders, Motor
Starters and Soft Starters
6
6/2 Introduction ET 200S Motor Starters
6/88 ET 200S motor starters
3RW Soft Starters
6/95 Power modules for
6/4 General data ET 200S motor starters
6/5 3RW30, 3RW31 for standard 6/96 Terminal modules for
applications ET 200S motor starters
6/12 3RW40 for standard applications
6/22 3RW44 for High-Feature applications ET 200S Safety Motor Starters
6/39 Project planning aids Solutions local / PROFIsafe
6/99 General data
3RA Fuseless Load Feeders
6/100 ET 200S Failsafe motor starters
6/48 General data
6/102 Safety modules local
Infeed System
6/109 Safety modules PROFIsafe
6/68 3RV19 infeed system
Direct-On-Line Starters, ET 200pro Motor Starters
Reversing Starters, Accessories 6/114 Standard and High-Feature
and Infeed System
6/71 Project planning aids 6/116 ET 200pro isolator modules
6/117 Safety modules local
3RA71 Load Feeders with Safety
Integrated ET 200X Motor Starters
6/77 General data 6/119 ET 200X motor starters
3RE Encapsulated Starters
AS-Interface Motor Starters and 6/122 General data
6
Soft Starters 6/127 Project planning aids
IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load
Feeders
6/81 AS-Interface compact starters
(400 V AC)
6/83 AS-Interface motor starters
(24 V DC)
IP20 Motor Starters and Load
Feeders
6/85 AS-Interface load feeder modules
6/86 Combination starters for
busbar systems, direct-on-line
Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters
Introduction
■ Overview
3RW30 3RW40 3RW44 3RA11 3RA12 3RA71

Order No. Page
3RW soft starters
For standard applications • Application areas
- Fans - Pumps
- Building/construction machines - Presses
- Escalators - Transport systems
- Air conditioning systems - Ventilators
- Assembly lines - Compressors and coolers
- Operating mechanisms
3RW30, 3RW31 • SIRIUS 3RW30/31 soft starters for soft starting and smooth ramp-down of 3RW30, 3RW31 6/5
three-phase asynchronous motors
• Rating range of up to 55 kW (at 400 V)
3RW40 • SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters with the integral functions 3RW40 6/12
- solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection and
- adjustable current limiting
for the soft starting and stopping of three-phase asynchronous motors
• Rating range from 75 to 250 kW (at 400 V)
For High-Feature applications • Application areas
- Pumps - Ventilators
- Compressors - Cooling systems
- Industrial refrigerating systems - Water transport
- Conveying systems - Hydraulics
- Machine tools - Mills
3RW44 • In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 3RW44 6/22
soft starters provide numerous functions for higher-level requirements
• Rating range
- up to 710 kW (at 400 V) in inline circuit and
6
- up to 1200 kW (at 400 V) in inside-delta circuit

3RA fuseless load feeders
• The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV1 motor starter protector and
the 3RT1 contactor.
The motor starter protector and contactor are prewired and mechanically
connected in pre-assembled installation sets (link modules, wiring sets and
standard mounting rail or busbar adapters). The motor starter protector and
contactor are mechanically and electrically connected by means of the link
module
• 4 sizes (S00, S0, S2, S3)
• Can be supplied for direct start or reversing duty as
- complete unit or
- single units for self-assembly
3RA11 combination starters, direct-on-line
For snapping onto a standard mounting rail • Rated control supply voltage 50 Hz 230 V AC and 24 V DC for 35 mm standard 3RA11 6/48
or for screw mounting mounting rail or screw mounting
For busbar systems • Rated control supply voltage 50 Hz 230 V AC and 24 V DC for 40 mm and 3RA11 6/48
60 mm busbar systems
3RA12 reversing starters
For snapping onto a standard mounting rail • Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz and 24 V DC for 35 mm standard 3RA12 6/48
or for screw mounting mounting rail or screw mounting
For busbar systems • Rated control supply voltage 50 Hz 230 V AC and 24 V DC for 40 mm and 3RA12 6/48
60 mm busbar systems
Infeed system
3RV19 infeed system • Convenient means of power supply and distribution 3RV19 6/68
3RA71 load feeders with safety integrated
Fuseless load feeders • Safe load feeders for direct start 3RA71 6/77
• Actuating voltage 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Actuating voltage 24 V DC
Fused load feeders • Safe load feeders for direct start 3RA71 6/77
• Actuating voltage 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Actuating voltage 24 V DC

Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters
Introduction
3RK1 322 3RA51 3RA52 3RK1 301 3RK1 304 3RE10

Order No. Page
AS-Interface motor starters and soft starters
Motor starters and load feeders IP65/67
AS-Interface ompact starters (400 V AC) • Completely factory-wired load feeders with degree of protection IP65, designed 3RK1 322 6/81
for switching and protecting any type of three-phase loads, in particular
standard induction motors in direct-on-line or reversing duty
AS-Interface motor starters (24 V DC) • For the lowest power range up to 70 W, 24 V DC motors and the associated 3RK1 400-1 6/83
sensor systems can also be directly and locally connected to AS-Interface
quickly and easily. Three different versions are available:
- Single direct-on-line starter
- Double direct-on-line starter
- Reversing starter
IP20 motor starters and load feeders
• Quick and cost-effective connection of motor starters to higher-level automation
systems
• For busbar systems with a busbar center-to-center distance of 40 mm and 60 mm
• Completely factory-wired and adaptable to busbar systems
Combination starters for busbar systems, • For direct start, a load can be switched on and off with the load feeder 3RA51 6/86
direct-on-line
Reversing starters for busbar systems • The feeder for reversing duty is designed for two directions of rotation of 3RA52 6/86
induction motors
ET 200S motor starters
ET 200S motor starters • Completely factory-wired motor starters for switching and protecting any 3RK1 301 6/88
three-phase loads, optionally as direct-on-line, reversing or soft starters
Power modules for ET 200S motor starters • For supplying and monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor starters 3RK1 903-0BA00 6/95
6
Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters • Mechanical modules in which the motor starter and expansion modules are inserted 3RK1 903 6/96
Interface/ solid-state modules • Interface modules, power modules, reserve modules, digital/analog solid-state 6ES7 1 LV 1
modules, F power and F solid-state modules, F terminal modules, 4 IQ-Sense
sensor module, SSI module, 1 STEP step module, positioning modules, counter
modules, terminal modules for power and solid-state modules
ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions local / PROFIsafe
ET 200S Failsafe motor starters • High-Feature direct-on-line and reversing starters 3RK1 301 6/99
Safety modules local • For safety category 4 according to EN 954-1 3RK1 903 6/102
Safety modules PROFIsafe • Sensor and actuator assignment are freely configurable (distributed safety 3RK1 903 6/109
concept)
ET 200pro motor starters
ET 200pro motor starters • Standard and High-Feature 3RK1 304 6/114
ET 200pro isolator modules • With switch disconnector function for safe disconnection 3RK1 304 6/116
Safety modules local • Isolator module and 400 V disconnecting module 3RK1 304 6/117
Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters • Interface, expansion and power modules 6ES7 1 LV 1
ET 200X motor starters
ET 200X motor starters • For switching and protection of any three-phase loads 3RK1 300 6/119
• Direct-on-line or reversing starters, electromechanical or solid-state
Basic/ expansion modules • Intelligent basic modules, ECOFAST basic modules, PM 148 power module, 6ES7 14 LV 1
digital/analog expansion modules, PM 148-P pneumatic module,
PM 148-P pneumatic interface
ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters
3RK1 3 ECOFAST motor starters and • Distributed motor starters for PROFIBUS and AS-Interface 3RK1 3 LV 1
soft starters • Functionality ranges from direct-on-line starters, through reversing starters and
soft starters as far as frequency converters
3RE encapsulated starters
• The 3RE1 encapsulated starters are used for switching and for the inverse-time
delayed protection of load feeders up to 22 kW at 400 V AC
• The starters are available as direct-on-line starters for motors with a single direc-
tion of rotation and as reversing starters for motors with two directions of rotation
3RE10 combination starters, direct-on-line • Molded-plastic enclosure, degree of protection IP65, including contactor 3RE10 6/122
3RE13 reversing starters • Molded-plastic enclosure, degree of protection IP65, including contactor assembly 3RE13 6/122
Accessories • Molded-plastic enclosure, degree of protection IP65, for direct-on-line and re- 3RE19 LV 1
versing starters

3RW Soft Starters
General data
■ Overview
The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance: • Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism
• Soft starting and smooth ramp-down1) • Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared
• Stepless starting with conventional starters
• Reduction of current peaks • Maintenance-free switching
• Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting • Very easy handling
• Reduced load on the power supply network • Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system
SIRIUS 3RW30/31 SIRIUS 3RW40 SIRIUS 3RW44

Standard applications High-Feature applications
Rated current up to 40 °C A 3 ... 100 134 ... 432 29 ... 1214
Rated operational voltage V 200 ... 575 200 ... 600 200 ... 690
Motor rating at 400 V
• Inline circuit kW 1.1 ... 55 75 ... 250 15 ... 710
• Inside-delta circuit kW – – 22 ... 1200
Temperature range °C -25 ... +60 -25 ... +60 0 ... +60
Soft starting/ramp-down ✔1) ✔ ✔
Voltage ramp ✔ ✔ ✔
Starting/stopping voltage % 40 ... 100 40 ... 100 20 ... 100
Starting and ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 0 ... 20 1 ... 360
Torque control – – ✔
Starting/stopping torque % – – 20 ... 100
Torque limit % – – 20 ... 200
Ramp time s – – 1 ... 360
6
Integral bypass contact system ✔2) ✔ ✔

Intrinsic device protection – ✔ ✔
Motor overload protection – ✔ ✔
Thermistor motor protection – – ✔
Adjustable current limiting – ✔ ✔
Inside-delta circuit – – ✔
Breakaway pulse – – ✔
Creep speed in both directions – – ✔
Pump ramp-down – – ✔7)
DC braking – – ✔3)7)
Combined braking – – ✔3)7)
Motor heating – – ✔4)
Communication – – with PROFIBUS DP4) (option)
External display and operator module – – (option4))
Operating measured value display – – ✔
Error logbook – – ✔4)
Event list – – ✔4)
Slave pointer function – – ✔4)
Trace function – – ✔5)
Programmable control inputs and outputs – – ✔
Number of parameter sets 1 (2 with 3RW31) 1 3
Parameterization software (Soft Starter ES) – – ✔4)
Power semiconductors (thyristors) 2 controlled phases 2 controlled phases 3 controlled phases
Spring-loaded terminals ✔ (only 3RW30 03) ✔ ✔
Screw terminals ✔ ✔ ✔
UL/CSA ✔6) ✔ ✔
CE marking ✔ ✔ ✔
Soft starting under heavy starting conditions – – ✔7)
Configuring support Win-Soft Starter, the electronic selection slider ruler, Technical Assistance ++49 911 895 5900
✔ Function is available 5) Trace function with Soft Starter ES software.
– Function not available 6) For 3RW30 03 up to 230 V.
1) Only soft starting available for 3RW31. 7) Calculate soft starter and motor with size allowance where required.
2) Not available for 3RW30 03. More information can be found on the Internet at
3) Not possible in inside-delta circuit. http://www.siemens.com/sanftstarter
4) Start of delivery 2006.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
for standard applications
Various versions of the 3RW30/31 SIRIUS soft starters are • Soft starting with voltage ramp; the starting voltage setting
available: range Us is 40 % to 100 % and the ramp time tR can be set
from 0 s to 20 s.
• Standard version for fixed frequency three-phase motors,
sizes S00, S0, S2 and S3 • Smooth ramp-down with voltage ramp; the running down time
toff can be set between 0 s to 20 s. The switch-off voltage Uoff
• Version for fixed-speed three-phase motors in a 22.5 mm is then dependent on the selected starting voltage Us.
enclosure
• Setting with three potentiometers
• Special-purpose version 3RW31 for Dahlander motors only in
size S0 • Simple mounting and commissioning
• Version for soft starting single-phase motors of sizes S0, S2 • Mains voltages at 50/60 Hz 200 to 575 V
and S3. • Two control voltage versions 24 V UC and 110 to 230 V UC
SIRIUS 3RW30/31 for three-phase motors • Wide temperature range from -25 °C to +60 °C
Soft starters rated up to 55 kW (at 400 V) for standard applica- • Integrated bypass contacts to minimize dissipated power.
tions in three-phase networks. Extremely small sizes, low power • Two built-in auxiliary contacts in sizes S0, S2 and S3 ensure
losses and simple commissioning are just a few of the many user-friendly control and possible further processing within the
advantages of this soft starter. The special feature of the 3RW31 system (see status graphs on page 6/11).
series is that it allows independent definition of two separate
acceleration ramps (Dahlander motors).
SIRIUS 3RW30 for single-phase motors
The additional version for standard applications in single-phase
networks. Its voltage edge function reduces the motor's inrush
current and effectively lowers the torque at the point of starting
up. The load and the supplying network are thus protected.
Type 3RW30 03 3RW3 . ..-1.B0. 3RW3 . ..-1.B1.
Control electronics
• Rated control supply voltage V 24 ... 230 AC/DC 24 AC/DC 110 ... 230 AC/DC
(10 %) (+10 %/-15 %) (+10 %/-15 %)
• Rated control supply current mA 25 ... 4 Approx. 50/ Approx. 25 ... 20 /
Without fan/with fan Approx. 180 Approx. 85 ... 80
• Rated frequency for AC Hz 50/60 10 %
6
• Starting time s 0.1 ... 20 (adjustable)
• Starting voltage % 40 ... 100 (adjustable)
• Ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 (adjustable)
Type 3RW3003 3RW3 . ..-1.B.4 3RW3 . ..-1.B.5 3RW30 ..-1AA12

Power electronics
Rated operational voltage V 200 ... 400, AC 200 ... 460, AC 460 ... 575, AC 115 ... 240, AC
3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 1-phase
(10 %) (10 %) (+10 %/-15 %) (10 %)
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 10 %
Permissible installation altitude Reduction of Ie
• Up to 1000 m above sea level % 100
• Up to 4000 m above sea level1) % 78
Mounting position Without auxiliary fan The soft starters have been designed for operation on a vertical
mounting surface (+10°/-10°).
With auxiliary fan -- Any mounting position (except vertical,
rotated by 180°)
1) At an altitude from 2000 m, the max. permissible operational voltage for
all 3RW30 is reduced to 460 V.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Type 3RW30 03 3RW30 1. 3RW30 2. 3RW30 3. 3RW30 4.

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Continuous operation (% of Ie) % 100
Minimum load1) (% von Ie); at 40 °C % 9 4
• Operation °C -25 ... +60 (derating from 40 °C, see load rating)
• Storage °C -25 ... +80
Switching capacity of the auxiliary 230 V/AC-15 A No auxiliary contacts 3 3 3
contacts available
230 V/DC-13 A 0.1 0.1 0.1
24 V/DC-13 A 1 1 1
1) The rated motor current (specified on the motor’s name plate) should at
least amount to the specified percentage of the SIRIUS soft starter unit’s
rated operational current Ie.
Type 3RW30 03 3RW30 14 3RW30 16 3RW3 . 24 3RW3 . 25 3RW3 . 26

Load capacity
• According to IEC for individual at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A -- 6/5/4 9/8/7 12.5/11/9 16/14/12 25/21/18
mounting
• According to UL/CSA for individual at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A -- 4.8/4.8/4 7.8/7.8/7 11/11/9 17.5/14/12 25/21/18
mounting
• According to IEC/UL/CSA for at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 3 / 2.6 / 2.2 --
individual mounting
• According to IEC/UL/CSA for butt-mounting
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 2.6 / 2.2 / 1.8 --
Power loss
At uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 6.5 5 7 7 9 13
At utilization of max. operating frequency W 3 5 6 7 8 9
Permissible starts per hour when not using a fan
• For intermittent duty S4, 1/h 1500 60 40 30 12
Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical
• ON-period = 30 % % Ie/s -- 250/2 300/2
• ON-period = 70 % % Ie/s 300/0.2 --
Permissible starts per hour when using a fan 1/h Fans cannot be fitted 54 21
For intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C, ON-period = 30 %;
stand-alone installation
6
Pause intervals after continuous duty s 0 200

With Ie before a new start
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20 (IP00 terminal enclosure)
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 1001)
Screw terminals • Main conductors
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) - Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
For standard screwdriver 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
size 2 and Pozidriv 2 - Finely stranded mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
with end sleeve 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm² -- -- --
- AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (20 ... 14) 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screws M3, PZ2 M3, PZ2 M4, PZ2
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.2
lb.in 7.1 ... 8.9 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22
• Auxiliary conductors
- Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) according to IEC 60947;
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with end mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
sleeve 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (20 ... 14) 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screws M3, PZ2
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 0.8 ... 1
lb.in 7 ... 8.9 7.1 ... 8.9
Spring-loaded terminals Main and auxiliary conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
• Finely stranded with end mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1) --
sleeve
• AWG conductors, solid or mm2 2 x (24 ... 16) --
stranded
1) If this value is exceeded, problems with line capacities may arise, which
can result in false firing.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Type 3RW30 34 3RW30 35 3RW30 36 3RW30 44 3RW30 45 3RW30 46

Power electronics
Load rating
With rated operational current Ie
• According to IEC at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 32/27/23 38/32/27 45/38/32 63/54/46 75/64/54 100/85/72
for individual mounting
• According to UL/CSA at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53b A 27/27/23 34/32/27 42/38/32 62/54/46 68/64/54 99/85/72
for individual mounting
Power loss
• At uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 10 13 17 13 16 26
• (40 °C) at utilization of max. operating frequency W 11 11 10 18 29 26
Permissible starts per hour when not using a fan
• For intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical 1/h 20 15 5 20 30 15
• ON-period = 30 % % Ie/s 300 /3 300 /4
Permissible starts per hour when using a fan 1/h 44 27 9 32 48 24
For intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C, ON-period = 30%;
stand-alone installation
Pause intervals after continuous duty s 0 400 0
With Ie before a new start
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20 (IP00 terminal enclosure) IP201)
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motors m 100
Screw terminals • Main conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) - Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
For standard screwdriver
size 2 and Pozidriv 2
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
1 x (0.75 ... 25)
- Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
- AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (18 ... 3) 1 x (18 ... 2) 2 x (10 ... 1/0); 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screws M6, box terminal, PZ2 M6, hexagon socket
- Tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
lb.in 27 ... 40 35 ... 53
• Auxiliary conductors:
- Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) accord. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
- AWG conductors, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
6
solid or stranded
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1
lb.in 7.1 ... 8.9
1) IP20 only with installed box terminal (’as-delivered’).
Without box terminal IP00.
2) If this value is exceeded, problems with line capacities may arise,
which can result in false firing.
Standard Parameters
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 Degree of severity 3: 6/8 kV
Electromagnetic RF fields IEC 60947-4-2 Frequency range: 80 to 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference IEC 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 80 to 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
IEC 60947-4-2 10 V at 0.15 ... 80 MHz
SN-IACS 3 V at 10 kHz ... 80 MHz
Burst IEC 61000-4-4 Degree of severity 3: 1/2 kV
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Degree of severity 3: 1/2 kV
EMC interference emission
EMC interference field strength CISPR 11/09. 1990 Limit value of Class B at 30 to 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage CISPR 11/09. 1990 (0.15 ... 30 MHz): Unit Class A (industry)
IEC 60947-4-2

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Is an RI suppression filter necessary?
24 V AC/DC control voltage 110 ... 240 V AC/DC control voltage

Main circuit Control circuit Main circuit Control circuit
Degree of noise suppression A No No No No
(industrial applications)
Degree of noise suppression B No No Yes2) Yes1)2)
(applications for residential areas) (see table
Recommended Filters)
1) "No" only applies if the control voltage is taken from the main circuit
downstream of the RI suppression filter.
2) It may be preferable to use a device with 24 V AC/DC control voltage
here; in that case the control voltage must be adapted with a transformer.
Soft starter type Rated current Recommended filters

Soft starters Voltage range 200 ... 460 V Voltage range 460 ... 575 V
Filter type Rated current Terminals Filter type Rated current Terminals
filter filter
A A mm 2
A mm2
3RW30 14 6 B84143-G8-R110 8 4 -- -- --
3RW30 16 9 B84143-G20-R110 20 4 -- -- --
3RW30 24 12.5 B84143-G20-R110 20 4 B8413-A25-R21 25 10
3RW30 25 16 B84143-G20-R110 20 4 B8413-A25-R21 25 10
3RW30 26 25 B84143-G36-R110 36 6 B8413-A25-R21 25 10
3RW30 34 32 B84143-G36-R110 36 6 B8413-A36-R21 36 10
3RW30 35 38 B84143-G36-R110 36 6 B8413-A36-R21 36 10
3RW30 36 45 B84143-G50-R110 50 6 B8413-A50-R21 50 10
3RW30 44 63 B84143-G66-R110 66 25 B8413-A80-R21 80 25
3RW30 45 75 B84143-G120-R110 120 50 B8413-A80-R21 80 25
3RW30 46 100 B84143-G120-R110 120 50 B8413-A120-R21 120 50
Fuse assignment
The coordination type to which the motor feeder with soft starter
is mounted depends on the application-specific requirements.
Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of circuit-breaker and
soft starter) is sufficient. If type 2 coordination is to be fulfilled,
6
semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
Fuseless version
Q 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 6
M
3 ~
Soft starters Motor starter protectors1) Link modules2)

Type Type Type
G1 Q1
Coordination type 13) : Iq = 50 kA at 400 V
3RW30 03 3RV10 11 --
3RW30 14 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A
3RW30 16 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A
3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A
3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A
3RW30 26/3RW31 26 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A
3RW30 34 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A
3RW30 35 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A
3RW30 36 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A
3RW30 44 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A
3RW30 45 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A
3RW30 46 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A
1) The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices.
2) Pay attention to quantity units.
3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under
Fuseless Load Feeders on page 6/48.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Fused version (line protection only)
F 1
K 1
F 2
G 1
N S B 0 1 0 1 7
Soft starters Line protections Overload relays Contactors

Thermal Solid-state
Type Type Rated current Size Type Type Type
G1 F1 F2 K1
A
Type of coordination 1:1) Iq = 50 kA at 400 V
3RW30 03 3NA3 8052) 20 000 3RU11 16 3RB10 16 3RT10 15
3RW30 14 3NA3 807 20 000 3RU11 163) 3RB10 163) 3RT10 15
3RW30 16 3NA3 807 20 000 3RU11 163) 3RB10 163) 3RT10 16
3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3NA3 807 20 000 3RU11 264) 3RB10 264) 3RT10 24
3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3NA3 810 25 000 3RU11 264) 3RB10 264) 3RT10 25
3RW30 26/3RW31 26 3NA3 814 35 000 3RU11 264) 3RB10 264) 3RT10 26
3RW30 34 3NA3 822 63 000 3RU11 364) 3RB10 36 3RT10 34
3RW30 35 3NA3 822 63 000 3RU11 364) 3RB10 36 3RT10 35
3RW30 36 3NA3 824 80 000 3RU11 364) 3RB10 36 3RT10 36
3RW30 44 3NA3 830 100 000 3RU11 464) 3RB10 46 3RT10 44
3RW30 45 3NA3 132 125 1 3RU11 464) 3RB10 46 3RT10 45
3RW30 46 3NA3 140 200 1 3RU11 464) 3RB10 46 3RT10 46
1) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under 3) I q =50 kA up to max. 400 V
Fuseless Load Feeders on page 6/48. 4) I q =50 kA up to max. 500 V
2) 3NA38 05-1 (NH00), 5SB26 1 (DIAZED), 5SE22 01-6 (NEOZED).
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)1)
6
F ´1
K 1
F 2
G 1
N S B 0 1 0 1 8 a
Soft starters All-range fuses

Minimum (age-free) Max.
Type Type Rated current Size Type Rated current Size
G1 F’1 F’1
A A
Type of coordination 22) : Iq = 50 kA at 400 V/500 V
3RW30 03 3NE1 813-03) 16 000 3NE1 813-03) 16 000
3RW30 14 3NE1 813-03) 16 000 3NE1 814-04) 20 000
3RW30 16 3NE1 813-03) 16 000 3NE1 815-05) 25 000
3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3NE1 814-04) 20 000 3NE1 815-05) 25 000
3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3NE1 815-05) 25 000 3NE1 815-05) 25 000
3RW30 26/3RW31 26 3NE1 803-05) 35 000 3NE1 802-05) 40 000
3RW30 34 3NE1 817-05) 50 000 3NE1 818-05) 63 000
3RW30 35 3NE1 818-05) 63 000 3NE1 820-05) 80 000
3RW30 36 3NE1 818-05) 63 000 3NE1 820-05) 80 000
3RW30 44 3NE1 820-05) 80 000 3NE1 820-05) 80 000
3RW30 45 3NE1 021-05) 100 00 3NE1 021-05) 100 00
3RW30 46 --6) -- -- --6) -- --
1) Contactor and overload relay as in "Fused version (line protection only)" 6) Fuse coordination with all-range fuses not possible; it may be necessary
table. to use a pure semiconductor protection fuse plus a motor starter
2) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under Fuseless protector.
Load Feeders on page 6/48.
3) No SITOR fuse required!
Alternatively: 3NA38 03 (NH00), 5SB22 1 (DIAZED), 5SE22 06 (NEOZED).
4) Fuse coordination for up to 400 V.
5) Fuse coordination for up to 500 V.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Fused versions with 3NE8 SITOR fuses

(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by motor starter protector; alternatively, installation with contactor and overload relay possible)
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 2 0 a
Q 1 F 1
F 3 F 3
K 1
G 1
F 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 9 a
G 1
M
3 ~
M
Soft starters Solid-state protection fuses Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)

Min. Max. Min. Max.
Type Type Rated Size Type Rated Size Type Rated Size Type Rated Size
current current current current
G1 F3 F3 F3 F3
A A A mm x A mm x
mm mm
Type of coordination 21) : Iq = 50 kA at 400 V
3RW30 03 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NC1 006 6 10 x 38 3NC1 010 10 10 x 38
3RW30 14 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 003-1 35 00 3NC1 006 6 10 x 38 3NC1 430 30 14 x 51
3RW30 16 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 003-1 35 00 3NC1 010 10 10 x 38 3NC1 430 30 14 x 51
3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 003-1 35 00 3NC1 016 16 10 x 38 3NC1 430 30 14 x 51
3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 003-1 35 00 3NC1 025 25 10 x 38 3NC1 430 30 14 x 51
3RW30 26/3RW31 26 --2) -- -- --2) -- -- --2) -- -- --2) -- --
3RW30 34 3NE8 002-1 63 00 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NC1 450 50 14 x 51 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW30 35 3NE8 020-1 80 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 263 63 22 x 58 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW30 36 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW30 44 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW30 45 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 --2) -- -- --2) -- --
3RW30 46 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 --2) -- -- --2) -- --
Soft starters Motor starter protectors3) Link modules4) Overload relays Contactors
Type Type Thermal Solid-state
Type Type Type Type
G1 Q1 F2 K1
6
Type of coordination 21) : Iq = 50 kA at 400 V

3RW30 03 3RV10 115) 3RA19 11-1A 3RU11 16 3RB10 16 3RT10 15
3RW30 14 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A 3RU11 16 3RB10 16 3RT10 15
3RW30 16 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A 3RU11 16 3RB10 16 3RT10 16
3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RU11 26 3RB10 26 3RT10 24
3RW30 34 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RU11 36 3RB10 36 3RT10 34
3RW30 35 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RU11 36 3RB10 36 3RT10 35
3RW30 36 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RU11 36 3RB10 36 3RT10 36
3RW30 44 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RU11 46 3RB10 46 3RT10 44
3RW30 45 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RU11 46 3RB10 46 3RT10 45
3RW30 46 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RU11 46 3RB10 46 3RT10 46
1) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under Fuseless
2) Fuse coordination with semiconductor fuses not possible; it may be
necessary to use pure 3NE1 all-range fuses or the next highest soft
starter.
3) The rated motor current defines the selection of devices.
4) Pay attention to quantity units.
5) No SITOR fuse required!
Alternatively: 3NA38 03 (NH00), 5SB22 1 (DIAZED), 5SE22 06 (NEOZED).
6/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30, 3RW31
Configuration Control with a PLC
The 3RW solid-state motor controllers are designed for easy When a 3RW30 is operated with a Triac output or thyristor output,
starting conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or the leakage current at the PLC output should be < 1 mA
increased switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a because otherwise the 3RW30 will interpret the resultant voltage
larger device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft drop at the input as an "On command". As a corrective measure
Starter selection and simulation program. for PLC outputs with a higher leakage current, an RC element
with > 100 nF and 220 W can be connected in series between
If necessary, an overload relay for heavy-starting must be se- "IN1" and terminal "A2" of the 3RW30 (Order No.: 3TX7 462-3T
lected where long starting times are involved. PTC sensors are see Selection and Ordering Data).
recommended. This also applies for the smooth ramp-down
because during the ramp-down time an additional current Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e.g. no reactive- properties, motor and load data, and special application
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static requirements.
systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC
(Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the starters superfluous.
soft starter. You can order the CD-ROM under the following order number:
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, controls and over- Order No. E20001-D1020-P302-V2-7400.
load relays) should be dimensioned for direct starting, following
the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, switching devices and You can find more information on the Internet at:
overload relays must be ordered separately. Please observe the http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
maximum switching frequencies specified in the technical
specifications.
Power electronics circuit diagram1)
L1 L2 L3
NSB0_00410b
6
T1 T2 T3
Status graphs
3RW30 – 3-ph. mot.

U
UN
US
t R on t R off t
Auxiliary contacts
(sizes S0 to S3 only)
13/14
NSB00420
23/24
t R on t R off t
3RW31
U
UN
NSB00421
US
t R1 t R2 t
1) Circuit diagram applies to sizes S0 and S2;

for size S00, phase L3 is bridged;
for size S3, phase L2 is bridged.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/11

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
■ Overview The SIRIUS 3RW40 is equipped with optimum functionality. An

integral bypass contact system reduces the power loss of the
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the soft starter during operation. This reliably prevents heating of the
3RW30/31 soft starters. At the same time they come with addi- switchgear environment. Using a 4-step rotary potentiometer it is
tional functions, e.g. solid-state motor overload and intrinsic de- possible to set different overload tripping times. Thanks to the in-
vice protection and adjustable current limiting, as well as a two- tegral motor overload protection to IEC 60947-4-2 there is no
phase control method (Polarity Balancing) that is unique in this need of an additional overload relay. This saves space in the
rating range. control cabinet and wiring work in the feeder. Internal intrinsic
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are part of the SIRIUS modular device protection prevents in addition the thermal overloading of
system. This results in advantages such as identical sizes and a the thyristors and the power section defects this can cause.
uniform connection system. Thanks to their particularly compact As an option the thyristors can also be protected by SITOR semi-
design, SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are only half as big as com- conductor fuses from short-circuiting. And even inrush current
parable wye-delta starters. Hence they can be mounted in min- peaks are reliably avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting.
imum space in the control cabinet. Configuring and mounting Three LEDs are used to indicate the operating status as well as
are carried out quickly and easily thanks to the 3-wire connetion. possible errors, e.g. non-permissible tripping time (CLASS
setting), mains or phase failure, missing load, thermal overload-
SIRIUS 3RW40 for three-phase motors
ing or device faults.
Soft starters rated up to 250 kW (at 400 V) for standard applica-
tions in three-phase networks. Extremely small sizes, low power We offer a comprehensive range of accessories for our soft start-
losses and simple commissioning are just three of the many ers. Examples include box terminal blocks, accessories for
advantages of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters. mechanical reset and a module for remote reset, a sealing cover
or easy-to-fit terminal covers for optimum touch protection.
■ Function • Soft starting with voltage ramp; the starting voltage setting
range Us is 40 to 100 % and the ramp time tR can be set from
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the 0 to 20 s.
3RW30/31 soft starters. At the same time they come with addi- • Smooth ramp-down with voltage ramp; the running down time
tional functions and a two-phase control method (Polarity Bal- toff can be set between 0 s to 20 s. The switch-off voltage Uoff
ancing) that is unique in the rating range up to 250 kW. Starting is then dependent on the selected starting voltage Us.
voltage, starting and ramp-down time of the voltage ramp and
current limit are all easy to set using stepless rotary potentiome- • Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection
ters, the same as on the SIRIUS 3RW30/31. The rated motor cur- • Adjustable current limiting
rent, the setting of the tripping time and the resetting of the motor • Integrated bypass contact system to minimize dissipated
overload function are controlled like the SIRIUS overload relays power
by means of potentiometers and keys. Once again there is
nothing new to get used to. • Setting with three potentiometers
• Simple mounting and commissioning
SIRIUS 3RW40 comes with the new, patented control method
called "Polarity Balancing", which is designed to prevent DC • Mains voltages 50/60 Hz, 200 to 600 V
current components in two-phase controlled soft starters. On • Two control voltage versions 115 V AC and 230 V AC. Control
6
two-phase controlled soft starters the current resulting from su- by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by
perimposition of the two controlled phases flows in the uncon- means of PLC are possible.
trolled phase. This results for physical reasons in an asymmetric • Wide temperature range from -25 to +60 °C
distribution of the three phase currents during the starting oper-
ation of the motor. This phenomenon cannot be influenced, but • Built-in auxiliary contacts ensure user-friendly control and
in most applications it is non-critical. Controlling the power semi- possible further processing within the system (for status
conductors in the two controlled phases results not only in this graphs see page 6/21)
asymmetry, however, but also in the previously mentioned direct
current components which can cause severe noise generation
on the motor at starting voltages of less than 50 %. "Polarity
Balancing" reliably eliminates these DC current components
during the ramp-up phase. It creates a motor ramp-up that is
uniform in speed, torque and current rise. At the same time the
acoustic quality of the starting operation comes close to the
quality of a three-phase controlled starting operation. This is
made possible by the on-going dynamic balancing of current
half-waves of different polarity during the motor ramp-up.
6/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Type 3RW40 5. 3RW40 7.
Control electronics
Rated values Terminal
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2 V AC 115 230 115 230
• Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 15 15
Rated control supply current ON1) mA 440 200 660 360
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60
• Tolerance % 10 10
Control inputs
IN ON/OFF
Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 according to DIN 19240
Rated operational voltage V DC 24 from internal supply dc+ or external DC supply
(according to DIN 19240) through terminals and IN
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON/RUN mode2) 13/14 Operating indication
Output 2 BYPASSED 23/24 Bypass indication
Output 3 OVERLOAD/ 95/96/97 Overload/error indication
FAILURE
Rated operational current A 3 AC-15/AC-14 at 230 V
Rated operational voltage 1 DC-13 at 24 V
Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of varistor through contact
Short-circuit protection 4 A gL/gG operational class;
6 A quick (fuse is not included in scope of supply)
1) Values for the coil power consumption at +10 % Un, 50 Hz. 2) Factory presetting: ON mode.
Type 3RW40 ..
Control electronics
Operating indications LED DEVICE STATE/BYPASSED FAILURE OVERLOAD
Off Green Off Off Off
Start Green Green flashing Off Off
Bypass Green Green Off Off
Ramp-down Green Green flashing Off Off
Alarm indications
Ie/class setting not permissible Off Not relevant Not relevant Red flashing
Start inhibited/thyristors too hot Yellow flashing Not relevant Not relevant Off
Error signals
U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.15 x Us Off Off Red Off
Non-permissible Ie/Class setting
6
for edge 0 –> 1 on input IN Green Off Red Red flashing
Motor protection shut-down Green Off Off Red
Thermal overloading of the thyristors Yellow Off Red Off
Missing mains voltage, phase failure, missing load Green Off Red Off
Device error Red Off Red Off
Type 3RW40 ..
Factory presetting
Motor protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor
Trip class to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 10/15/20 10
Phase loss sensitivity % > 40
Overload warning No
Reset option after tripping Manual/automatic (MAN/AUTO)
Recovery time min 5
Device protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors
Reset option after tripping Manual/automatic (MAN/AUTO)
Recovery time s 30
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/13

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Type 3RW40 ..
Factory presetting
Control times and parameters
Control times
Closing delay (with connected control voltage) ms <50
Closing delay (automatic/mains contactor mode) ms <300
Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms 100
Mains failure bridging time
Control supply voltage ms 50
Mains failure response time
Load current circuit ms 500
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection trip min 5
Device protection trip s 30
Starting parameters
Starting time s 0 ... 20 7
Starting voltage % 40 ... 100 50
Starting current limit 1.3 ... 5 x Ie 5 x Ie
Ramp-down parameters
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 0
Reset mode parameters (for motor/device protection shut-down)
Manual reset LED AUTO Off Off
Automatic reset LED AUTO Yellow
Start-up detection Yes
Operating mode output 13/14
Rising edge at Start command
Falling edge at Off command ON ON
Ramp-down end RUN
Type 3RW40 ..-.BB4. 3RW40 ..-.BB5.

Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for inline circuit V AC 200 ... 460 400 ... 600
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Tolerance % 10
Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Ie) % 115
Minimum load (% of Ie) % 20
6
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 200

Permissible installation height m 2000 (derating from 1000); higher on request
NSB00649
90° 90°

Operation °C -25 ... +60; (derating from +40)
Storage °C -40 ... +80
6/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40

Power electronics
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
According to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting at A 134/117/100 162/145/125 230/205/180 280/248/215 356/315/280 432/385/335
40/50/60 °C, AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
For the motor overload protection A 59 87 80 130 131 207
Power loss
At uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 60 75 75 90 125 165
For current limiting at 350% IM (40 °C) W 1043 1355 2448 3257 3277 3600
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM1), starting time 10 s A 134 162 230 280 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 8 20 14 16 17
- Rated motor current IM1)3), starting time 20 s A 134 162 230 280 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 7 1.4 9 3 5 5
• For heavy starting (Class 15)
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 11 8 13 12 11 12
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.2 1.7 5 2 1.5 2
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 12 9 9 10 10 10
- Starts per hour4) 1/h 3 3 1 1 0.1 1
1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM.
2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
automatic mode.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/15

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Soft starters Type 3RW40 5. 3RW40 7.

With box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 95 ... 300
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
NSB00479
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 Max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 240
NSB00480

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 70 Max. 2 x 70; max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
NSB00481
(number x width x thickness)

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG Max. 2 x 1/0 Min. 2 x 2/0; max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4) M12 (hexagon socket, A/F5)
- Tightening torque 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
90 ... 110 180 ... 195
With box terminal 3RT19 56-4G
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
NSB00479
NSB00480
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 120
6

NSB00481


• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 25
• Terminal screws M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17)
- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
lb.in 89 ... 124 124 ... 210
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235 use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal 2) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing. cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
Soft starters Type 3RW40 ..

Auxiliary conductors (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 1.5
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x 20 ... 14
- Finely stranded with end sleeve AWG 2 x 20 ... 16
• Terminal screws
lb.in 7 ... 8
• Solid mm2 2 x 0.25 ... 2.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x 24 ... 14
6/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Standard Parameters
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3: 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
RF voltages and RF currents on conductors
Burst EN 61000-4-4 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge EN 61000-4-5 1 kV line to line
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) No
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/17

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Fuse assignment
Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of circuit-breaker and
soft starter) is sufficient. If type2 coordination is to be fulfilled,
semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
Fuseless version
Q 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 6
M
3 ~
Soft starters Circuit breakers1)

Rated 400 V +10 % 575 V +10 % Rated current
current
G1 Q1 Q1
Type A Type Type A
Type of coordination 12): Iq = 65 kA at 400 V/Iq = 35 kA at 600 V3)
3RW40 55 134 3VL3 720-2DC36 3VL3 720-1DC36 200
3RW40 56 162 3VL3 720-2DC36 3VL3 720-1DC36 200
3RW40 73 230 3VL4 731-2DC36 3VL5 731-3DC36 315
3RW40 74 280 3VL4 731-2DC36 3VL5 731-3DC36 315
3RW40 75 356 3VL4 740-2DC36 3VL5 740-3DC36 400
3RW40 76 432 3VL5 750-2DC36 3VL5 750-3DC36 500
1) The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices. 3) Except 3RW40 55: Iq = 35 kA at 400 V/Iq = 12 kA at 600 V.
Fused version (line protection only)

6
F 1
K 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 7
M
3 ~
Soft starters Line protection Line contactors

Rated Rated current Size (optional)
current
G1 F1 K1
Type A Type A Type 115 V Type 230 V
1)
Type of coordination 1 : Iq = 65 kA at 400/600 V
3RW40 55 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55-6AF36 3RT10 55-6AP36
3RW40 56 162 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 56-6AF36 3RT10 56-6AP36
3RW40 73 230 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65-6AF36 3RT10 65-6AP36
3RW40 74 280 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 66-6AF36 3RT10 66-6AP36
3RW40 75 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75-6AF36 3RT10 75-6AP36
3RW40 76 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76-6AF36 3RT10 76-6AP36
6/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)
F ´1
K 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 8
M
3 ~
Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors

Rated Rated current Size (optional)
current
G1 F’1 K1
Type A Type A Type 115 V Type 230 V
Type of coordination 21): Iq = 65 kA at 400/600 V
3RW40 55 134 3NE1 227-2 250 1 3RT10 55-6AF36 3RT10 55-6AP36
3RW40 56 162 3NE1 227-2 250 1 3RT10 56-6AF36 3RT10 56-6AP36
3RW40 73 230 3NE1 331-2 350 2 3RT10 65-6AF36 3RT10 65-6AP36
3RW40 74 280 3NE1 333-2 450 2 3RT10 66-6AF36 3RT10 66-6AP36
3RW40 75 356 3NE1 334-2 500 2 3RT10 75-6AF36 3RT10 75-6AP36
3RW40 76 432 3NE1 435-2 560 3 3RT10 76-6AF36 3RT10 76-6AP36
Fused version with 3NE3 SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by circuit-breaker; alternatively, installation with
contactor and overload relay possible)
Q 1 F 1
K 1
F 3
F 3
G 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 9 a
6
3 ~ M
3 ~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Line contactors
Rated Rated current Size Rated current Size (optional)
current
G1 F3 F3 K1
Type A Type A Type A Type 115 V Type 230 V
3RW40 55 134 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RT10 55-6AF36 3RT10 55-6AP36
3RW40 56 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RT10 56-6AF36 3RT10 56-6AP36
3RW40 73 230 3NE3 232-0B 400 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RT10 65-6AF36 3RT10 65-6AP36
3RW40 74 280 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2 3RT10 66-6AF36 3RT10 66-6AP36
3RW40 75 356 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 336 630 2 3RT10 75-6AF36 3RT10 75-6AP36
3RW40 76 432 3NE3 337-8 710 2 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3RT10 76-6AF36 3RT10 76-6AP36
Soft starters Circuit-breakers Line protection

Rated 400 V +10 % Rated current 575 V +10 % Rated current Rated current Size
current
G1 Q1 Q1 F1
Type A Type A Type A Type A
3RW40 55 134 3VL3 720-2DC36 200 3VL3 720-1DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW40 56 162 3VL3 720-2DC36 200 3VL3 720-1DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW40 73 230 3VL4 731-2DC36 315 3VL5 731-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW40 74 280 3VL4 731-2DC36 315 3VL5 731-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW40 75 356 3VL4 740-2DC36 400 3VL5 740-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW40 76 432 3VL5 750-2DC36 500 3VL5 750-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3

Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/19

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40
(with symmetry)
10 3
NSB0_01488
6
[s]
Tripping time
10 2
10 1
1 2 4 6 10
x e
Class 10 Class 15 Class 20

6
6/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Configuration Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
The 3RW solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or increased starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a larger properties, motor and load data, and special application
device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft Starter requirements.
selection and simulation program (Version 2.0 upwards).
The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
If necessary, an overload relay for heavy-starting must be lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
selected where long starting times are involved. PTC sensors are starters superfluous.
recommended. This also applies for the smooth ramp-down
because during the ramp-down time an additional current load- You can order the CD-ROM under the following order number:
ing applies in contrast to free ramp-down. Order No. E20001-D1020-P302-V2-7400.
In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e.g. no reactive-
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static More information can be found on the Internet at
systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
(Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during
starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to
prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the
soft starter.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, controls and over-
load relays) should be dimensioned for direct starting, following
the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, switching devices and
overload relays must be ordered separately. Please observe the
maximum switching frequencies specified in the technical
specifications.
Power electronics circuit diagram
L 1 L 2 L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 4 8 5
6
T 1 T 2 T 3
Status graphs
U
UN
US
tR on tR off t
ON 13/14
RUN 13/14
BYPASSED 23/24
tR on tR off t
I
xIe
NSB0_01486
Ie
tR on t
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/21

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
■Overview Wiring work for installing an additional motor overload relay is no

longer needed as the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters perform this
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state function too. In addition they offer adjustable trip classes and a
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for thermistor motor protection function. As an option the thyristors
higher-level requirements. They cover a rating range up to can also be protected by SITOR semi-conductor fuses from
710 kW (at 400 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1200 kW short-circuiting. And even inrush current peaks are reliably
(at 400 V) in the inside-delta circuit. avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact As a further option the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be
design for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet upgraded with a PROFIBUS DP module. Thanks to their commu-
layouts. For optimized motor starting and stopping the innova- nication capability and their programmable control inputs and
tive SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with relay outputs the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be very easily
considerable savings potential compared to applications with a and quickly integrated in higher-level controllers.
frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable In addition a creep speed function is available for positioning
current limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled
in nearly every conceivable task. They guarantee the reliable in both directions of rotation with reduced torque and an adjust-
avoidance of sudden torque applications and current peaks able, low speed.
during motor starting and stopping. This creates savings poten-
tial when calculating the size of the switchgear and when On the other hand the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters offer a new,
servicing the machinery installed. Be it for inline circuits or combined DC braking function for the fast stopping of driving
inside-delta circuits – the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers loads.
savings especially in terms of size and equipment costs.
Highlights
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down • Soft starting with breakaway pulse, torque control or voltage
possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application- ramp, adjustable torque or current limiting as well as any
specific requirements. Operation and commissioning can be combination of these, depending on load type
carried out with the menu-controlled keypad plus menu- • Integrated bypass contact system to minimize dissipated
controlled, multi-line graphic display with background lighting. power
The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected • Various setting options for the starting parameters such as
quickly, easily and reliably by means of just a few settings with a starting torque, starting voltage, ramp-up and ramp-down
previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text time, and much more in three separate parameter sets
displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every • Start-up detection
moment of the parameterization and operation. • Inside-delta circuit for savings in terms of size and equipment
costs
Applicable standards • Various ramp-down modes selectable: free ramp-down,
• IEC 60947-4-2 torque-controlled pump stopping, combined DC braking
• UL/CSA • Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection
• Thermistor motor protection
• Keypad with a menu-controlled, multi-line, graphic display with
■ Function background lighting
6
• Interface for communication with the PC for more accurate

Equipped with modern, ergonomic user prompting the
setting of the parameters as well as for control and monitoring
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be commissioned quickly and
(start of delivery of the software: end of 2005)
easily using a keypad and a menu-prompted, multi-line display
• Simple adaptation to the motor feeder
with background lighting. The optimized motor ramp-up and
• Simple mounting and commissioning
ramp-down can be effected quickly, easily and reliably by
• Display of operating states and fault signals
means of just a few settings with a selectable language. Four-
• Connection to PROFIBUS with optional PROFIBUS DP module
key operation and plain-text displays for each menu point guar-
(start of delivery: 2006).
antee full clarity at every moment of the parameterization and
• External display and operator module (start of delivery: 2006).
operation. During operation and when control voltage is applied,
• System voltages from 200 to 690 V, 50 to 60 Hz
the front panel continuously presents measured values and
• Applicable up to 60 °C (derating from 40 °C)
operating values as well as warnings and alarm indications.
An external display and operator module can be connected by
means of a connecting cable to the soft starter, thus enabling
active indications and the like to be read directly from the control
cabinet door.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with optimum
functionality. An integral bypass contact system reduces the
power loss of the soft starter during operation.
This reliably prevents heating of the switchgear environment.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters have internal intrinsic device
protection. This prevents thermal overloading of the power
section's thyristors, e.g. due to unacceptably high closing
operations.
6/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 ..-.BC3. 3RW44 ..-.BC4.
Terminal
Control electronics
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2/PE V 115 AC 230 AC
• Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 30 20
Rated control supply current ON
• 3RW442. mA 300 170
• 3RW443. mA 500 250
• 3RW444. mA 750 400
Maximum current (pickup bypass)
• 3RW442. mA 1000 500
• 3RW443. mA 2500 1250
• 3RW444. mA 6000 3000
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60
• Tolerance % 10 10
Type 3RW44 ..
Terminal Factory presetting
Control electronics
Control inputs
Input 1 IN1 Start motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 IN2 No action
Input 3 IN3 No action
Input 4 IN4 Trip reset
Supply L+/L-
• Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 per input to DIN 19240
• Rated operational voltage L+ Internal voltage: 24 V DC from
internal supply through terminal L+ to
IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at L+
Approx. 55 mA
L- External voltage: DC external voltage
(according to DIN 19240) through
terminals L- and IN1 ... IN4
(min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC)
Thermistor motor protection input
Input T1/T2 PTC type A or Thermoclick Deactivated
6
Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts)
Output 1 13/14 ON period
Output 2 23/24 No action
Output 3 33/34 No action
Output 4 95/96/98 Group fault
Switching capacity of the relay outputs
230 V/AC-15 A 3 at 240 V
24 V/DC-13 A 1 at 24 V
Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of varistor through relay contact
Short-circuit protection 4 A gL/gG operational class;
6 A quick (fuse is not included in scope of supply)
Motor protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor
Trip class to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 5/10/15/20/30 10
Phase loss sensitivity % > 40
Overload warning Yes
Reset and recovery Manual/Automatic Manual
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 2 ... 30 2
Device protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 0.5
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/23

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 ..
Factory presetting
Control times
Closing delay (with connected control voltage) ms < 50
Closing delay (automatic mode) ms < 4000
Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms < 100
Mains failure bridging time
Control supply voltage ms 100
Mains failure response time
Load current circuit ms 100
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection trip min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection trip s 30
Setting options for starting
Voltage ramp for starting voltage % 20 ... 100 40
Torque control for starting torque % 10 ... 100 50
Torque control for limit torque % 20 ... 200 150
Starting time s 0 ... 360 20
Maximum starting time s 1 ... 1000 Deactivated
Current limit value % 125 ... 550 450
Breakaway voltage % 40 ... 100 80
Breakaway time s 0 ... 2 Deactivated
Motor heat output % 0 ... 100 0
Creep mode Left/Right running
Speed factor as function of rated speed (n = nrated/factor) 3 ... 21 7
Creep torque (reference variable depends on the motor used but is % 20 ... 100 50
always smaller than the rated torque of the motor)
Setting options for ramp-down
Torque control for stopping torque % 10 ... 100 40
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 360 10
Combined braking % 20 ... 100 50
DC braking % 20 ... 100 50
Operating indications
Test voltage
Test mains phases
Ready to start
Start active
Motor running
Ramp-down active
6
Warnings/error signals
Mains voltage missing
Wrong start condition
Phase failure
• L1
• L2
• L3
Missing load phase
• T1
• T2
• T3
Failure
• Contact element 1 (thyristor)
Flash memory faulty
Supply voltage
• Below 75 %
• Below 85 %
• Over 110 %
Current unbalance exceeded
Thermal motor model overload
Prewarning limit exceeded
• Motor heating
• Time-related trip reserve
Bypass elements defective
Mains overvoltage
Current range exceeded
Motor blocking – shutdown
Current limit exceeded
Power section overheated
Power section overtemperature
Temperature sensor
- Overload
- Open-circuit
- Short-circuit
Ground fault detected
Ground fault shutdown
Connection abort in manual mode
6/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 ..
Factory presetting
Control inputs
Input 1 Motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 No action
Input 3 No action
Input 4 Trip reset
Parameterizing options for control inputs 1 ... 4 No action
Local manual mode
Creep speed
Trip reset
Motor right parameter set 1
Motor left parameter set 11)
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON period
Output 2 No action
Output 3 No action
Output 4 Group fault
Parameterizing options for relay outputs 1 ... 3 No action
PAA output 1
PAA output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Starting
Operation/Bypass
Ramp-down
ON period
Command motor on
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group fault
Device error
Power on
Ready to start
6
Motor temperature sensor Deactivated Deactivated
Thermoclick
PTC type A
1) Parameter motor left possible only in conjunction with creep mode.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/25

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 ..-.BC.4 3RW44 ..-.BC.5 3RW44 ..-.BC.6

Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for inline circuit V 200 ... 460 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 690 AC
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit V 200 ... 400 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 600 AC
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60
Tolerance % 10
Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Ie) % 115
Minimum load (% of Ie) % 20
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 200
Permissible installation height m 2000 (derating from 1000); higher on request
NSB00649
90° 90°

Operation °C 0 ... +60; (derating from +40)
Storage °C -25 ... +80

Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 29 36 47 57 77 93
• According to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting,
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 29/26/23 36/32/29 47/42/37 57/51/45 77/68/59 93/82/72
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 5 7 9 11 15 18
For the motor overload protection
Power loss
• In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 8 10 32 36 45 55
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 400 470 600 725 940 1160
• Normal starting (Class 5)
6
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 34 41 41 41 41

- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 6 10 10 8 8
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 9 13 13 13 13
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 6 10 10 10 10
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 4 2 4 5 1.8 0.8
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.8 0.8 3.3 1.5 2 1
automatic mode.
6/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 34 3RW44 35 3RW44 36

Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 113 134 162
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 113/100/88 134/117/100 162/145/125
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 22 26 32
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 64 76 95
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 1350 1700 2460
- Rated motor current IM1), starting time 5 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 39 41
- Rated motor current IM1)3), starting time 10 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.5 2 0.5
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 2 2 0.5
6
automatic mode.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/27

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 43 3RW44 44 3RW44 45 3RW44 46 3RW44 47

Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 203 250 313 356 432
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 203/180/156 250/215/185 313/280/250 356/315/280 432/385/335
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 40 50 62 71 86
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 89 110 145 174 232
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 3350 4000 4470 5350 5860
- Rated motor current IM1), starting time 5 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 40 41 41 39
- Rated motor current IM1)3), starting time 10 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 20 17 16
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 20 17 16
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 8 8 4 5
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 11 13 13 11
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 10 10 10 10
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 4 1.5 3 3 1.8
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 4.3 1.8 3 2 1.6
6

automatic mode.
6/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 2. 3RW44 3., 3RW44 4.

With box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 95 ... 300
NSB00479

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 240
NSB00480

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 70 Max. 2 x 70; max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
NSB00481

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG Max. 2 x 1/0 Min. 2 x 2/0; max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4) M12 (hexagon socket, A/F5)
- Tightening torque 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
90 ... 110 180 ... 195
With box terminal 3RT19 56-4G
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
NSB00479
NSB00480
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 120
6
NSB00481


• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 25
• Terminal screws M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17)
- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
lb.in 89 ... 124 124 ... 210
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235 use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal 2) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing. cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
Soft starters Type 3RW44 ..

Auxiliary conductors (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x 20 ... 14
- Finely stranded with end sleeve AWG 2 x 20 ... 16
• Terminal screws
lb.in 7 ... 8
• Solid mm2 2 x 0.25 ... 2.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x 24 ... 14
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/29

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Standard Parameters
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
RF voltages and RF currents on conductors
Burst EN 61000-4-4 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge EN 61000-4-5 1 kV line to line
2 kV line to ground
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) No
Fuse assignment
Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter
protector and soft starter) is sufficient. If type 2 coordination is
to be fulfilled, semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor
feeder.
Inline circuit fuseless version
Q 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 6
M
6
3 ~
Soft starters Motor starter protectors/

circuit-breakers1)
Rated current 440 V +10 % Rated current
G1 Q1
Type A Type A
Type of coordination 12): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 47: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3RV10 42-4HA10 50
3RW44 23 36 3RV10 42-4JA10 63
3RW44 24 47 3RV10 42-4KA10 75
3RW44 25 57 3RV10 42-4LA10 90
3RW44 26 77 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 27 93 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 34 113 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 35 134 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 36 162 3VL37 25-2DC36 250
3RW44 43 203 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 44 250 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 45 313 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 46 356 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 47 432 3VL57 50-3DC36 500
1) The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices. 2) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under
6/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inline circuit fused version (line protection only)
F 1
K 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 7
M
3 ~
Soft starters Line protection Line contactors Braking contactors1)2)

up to 400 V
Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/46)
G1 F1 K1 K2 K3
Type A Type A Type Type Type
Type of coordination 13): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 –
3RW44 23 36 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 –
3RW44 24 47 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 –
3RW44 25 57 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 –
3RW44 26 77 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NA3 365-6 500 3 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking 2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
contactor is required. LZX:RT4A4T30
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
must be used in addition (see table for type). LZX:RT4A4S15
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
recommend the function "DC braking". 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/31

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE1 SITOR all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
F ´1
K 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 8
M
3 ~
Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors Braking contactors1)2)

up to 400 V
Rated Rated current Voltage Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/46)
current
G1 F’1 K1 K2 K3
Type A Type A V Type Type Type
Type of coordination 23): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 –
3RW44 23 36 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 –
3RW44 24 47 3NE1 021-2 100 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 –
3RW44 25 57 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 –
3RW44 26 77 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NE1 024-2 160 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NE1 225-2 200 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 3NE1 230-2 315 600 +10 % 1 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 3NE1 331-2 350 460 +10 % 2 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 3NE1 333-2 450 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +5 % 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking 2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
contactor is required. LZX:RT4A4T30
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
must be used in addition (see table for type). LZX:RT4A4S15
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
recommend the function "DC braking". 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under
6
6/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by motor starter protector)
Q 1 F 1
K 1
F 3
F 3
G 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 9 a
M
3 ~ M
3 ~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
Rated Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
current
G1 F3 F3 F3
3)
Type of coordination 2 : Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 36 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 47 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 57 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 77 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 93 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 34 113 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 134 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 203 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 250 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 313 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 356 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 432 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
Soft starters Line contactors Braking contactors1)2) Motor starter protectors/ Line protection
up to 400 V circuit-breakers
Rated (optional) (for typical circuit 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
current see page 6/46)
G1 K1 Q1 F1
6
Type A Type Type A Type A
Type of coordination 23): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 47: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 – 3RV10 42-4HA10 50 3NA3 820-6 50 00
3RW44 23 36 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 – 3RV10 42-4JA10 63 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW44 24 47 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 – 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 25 57 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 – 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 26 77 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 27 93 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 34 113 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 35 134 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 36 162 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 365-6 500 3
3RW44 43 203 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under
contactor is required. Fuseless Load Feeders on page 6/48.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must be used in addition (see table for type).
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we
recommend the function "DC braking".
2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/33

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inside-delta circuit fuseless version
Q 1
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 4
M
3 ~
Soft starters Motor starter protectors/

circuit-breakers
Rated current 440 V +10 % Rated current
G1 Q1
Type A Type A
Type of coordination 11)
3RW44 22 50 3RV10 42-4KA10 75
3RW44 23 62 3RV10 42-4LA10 90
3RW44 24 81 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 25 99 3VL27 16-2DC36 160
3RW44 26 133 3VL37 20-2DC36 200
3RW44 27 161 3VL37 20-2DC36 200
3RW44 34 196 3VL37 25-2DC36 250
3RW44 35 232 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 36 281 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 43 352 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 44 433 3VL57 50-3DC36 500
3RW44 45 542 3WL12 08 800
3RW44 46 617 3WL12 08 800
3RW44 47 748 3WL12 10 1000
Inside-delta circuit fused version (line protection only)
F 1
K 1
6
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 5
M
3 ~
Soft starters Rated current Line protection Line contactors up to 400 V

Soft starters 690 V +5 % Rated current Size (optional)
G1 F1 K1
Type A Type A Type
3RW44 22 50 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 36-1AP04
3RW44 23 62 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RT10 44-1AP04
3RW44 24 81 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 46-1AP04
3RW44 25 99 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 54-1AP36
3RW44 26 133 3NA3 240-6 200 2 3RT10 55-6AP36
3RW44 27 161 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 56-6AP36
3RW44 34 196 3NA3 360-6 400 3 3RT10 64-6AP36
3RW44 35 232 3NA3 360-6 400 3 3RT10 65-6AP36
3RW44 36 281 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3 3RT10 66-6AP36
3RW44 43 352 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75-6AP36
3RW44 44 433 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76-6AP36
3RW44 45 542 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 46 617 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 47 748 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3TF69
6/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inside-delta circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR fuses

(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by motor starter protector)
Q 1 F 1
K 1
F 3
G 1 F 3
G 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 6
M N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 7
3 ~ M
3 ~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
Rated Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
current
G1 F3 F3 F3
3RW44 22 50 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 62 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 81 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 99 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 133 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 161 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 34 196 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 232 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 281 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 352 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 433 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 542 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 617 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 748 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
Soft starters Line contactors Motor starter protectors/ Line protection

up to 400 V circuit-breakers
Rated (optional) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
current
G1 K1 Q1 F1
6
Type A Type Type A Type A
3RW44 22 50 3RT10 36-1AP04 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 23 62 3RT10 44-1AP04 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 24 81 3RT10 46-1AP04 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 25 99 3RT10 54-1AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 26 133 3RT10 55-6AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 240-6 200 2
3RW44 27 161 3RT10 56-6AP36 3VL37 20-2DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 34 196 3RT10 64-6AP36 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 35 232 3RT10 65-6AP36 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 36 281 3RT10 66-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3
3RW44 43 352 3RT10 75-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 44 433 3RT10 76-6AP36 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 45 542 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 46 617 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 47 748 3TF69 3WL12 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/35

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW44
(with symmetry)
10 3
NSB0_01500
6
[s]
4
Tripping time
10 2
10 1
10 0
1 2 4 6 10
x e
Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 30
6
6/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Application examples for normal starting (Class 10)
Normal starting Class 10 (up to 20 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Application Conveyor belts Roller conveyors Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage % 70 60 50 30 30 30
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
- End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Smooth Smooth Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down
ramp-down ramp-down
Application examples for heavy starting (Class 20)

Heavy starting Class 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected one rating class higher than the motor used
Application Stirrers Centrifuges Milling machines
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 30 30
- Starting time s 30 30 30
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 30 30 30
- End torque 150 150 150
- Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down or DC braking
6
Application examples for very heavy starting (Class 30)
Very heavy starting Class 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected two rating classes higher than the motor used
Application Large ventilators Mills Breakers Circular saw/bandsaws
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 50 50 30
- Starting time s 60 60 60 60
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 20 50 50 20
- End torque 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80 %, 300 ms 80 %, 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down
Note:
These tables present sample setting values and device sizes.
They are intended only for the purposes of information and are
not binding. The setting values depend on the application in
question and must be optimized during commissioning.
The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary
with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of
Technical Assistance.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/37

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Circuit concept Configuration
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
types of circuit. starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting
• Inline circuit frequency, a larger device must be selected.
The switching devices for isolating and protecting the motor For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC
are simply connected in series with the soft starter. The motor thermistor detector in the motor. This also applies for the ramp-
is connected to the soft starter with three leads. down modes smooth ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC
• Inside-delta circuit braking, because during the ramp-down time in these modes,
The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases of an additional current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-
the soft starter are connected in series with the individual motor down.
windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the phase In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
current, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor current motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e.g. no reactive-
(conductor current). power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static
Comparison of the types of circuit systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC
(Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during
L 1 N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 4 starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to
L 2 prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the
L 3 soft starter.
N
P E All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls)
should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, switching devices and overload
relays must be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load for starting currents must be
taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter
protector (selection of release).
Serial PC interface RS 232 and parameterizing and operating
software Soft Starter ES
The solid-state 3RW44 soft starters have a PC interface for
communicating with the Soft Starter ES smart software and an
Inline circuit: operating and monitoring module.
Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In,
3 leads to the motor Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44
L 1 N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 5
Besides containing all important information on configuring,
L 2 commissioning and servicing, the manual also contains
L 3 suggested circuits and the technical specifications for all
6
N devices.
P E
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
U 2 L 2 starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
U 1
properties, motor and load data, and special application re-
T 1 T 2
quirements.
V 1 The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
L 1 V 2 lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
starters superfluous.
W 2 W 1 T 3 L 3 You can order the CD-ROM under the following order number:
Order No.: E20001-D1020-P302-V2-7400.
Inside-delta circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated
More information can be found on the Internet at
motor current In, 6 leads to the motor (as with wye-delta starters) http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
Which circuit? SIRIUS soft starter training course (SD-SIRIUSO)

Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring complexity. If Siemens offers a 2-day training course on the SIRIUS solid-state
the soft starter to motor connections are long, this contact se- soft starters to keep customers and own personnel up-to-date on
quence is preferable. configuring, commissioning and servicing issues.
With the inside-delta circuit there is double the wiring complexity Please direct enquiries and applications to:
but a smaller size of device can be used at the same rating.
Training Center
Thanks to the possibility of switching between the inline circuit I&S IS E&C TC
and inside-delta circuit, the most favorable solution can always Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65
be chosen. D-91052 Erlangen
The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit. Telephone: ++49 (0) 9131 729262
Telefax: ++49 (0) 9131 728172
sibrain@erl9.siemens.de
http://www.siemens.com/sibrain
6/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30/3RW31 for standard applications
3RW30 03-1.... (screw terminals) 3RW30 03-2.... (spring-loaded terminals)
3,1
NSC00482
73,5
110
120
102
100
ca. 71
ca. 91
82
62
101,6
80
81,6
1) 1)
NSC00439b
7,2 5
15 3) 5 28,5 26,2 22,5 120
22,5 120
3RW30 1. 3RW30 2. and 3RW31 2.

96
7,5 5 14 5 63 5
97,5
88
90
66
95
76
1)
101
125
115
81
63
1)
8,6 5 35
NSB00433a
45 42
67
93
NSB00434
45 7 35
85
119
6
3RW30 3. 3RW30 4.
1 1 5 156
1 7 ,5 5 6 3 5 22,5 5 87 5
NSB00436
170
108
162
160
132
1)
87
1 5 0
1 1 9
1 6 0
1 )
7 7
70 8 60
178
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 3 5 a
5 5 8 3 0
1 0 8
1 4 3 1 ) D r illin g p a tte r n
1) Drilling pattern
3) Connection dimension for screw terminals. Screw connection with 2
3RP19 03 push-in lugs for each 3TK28 device.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/39

3RW Soft Starters

3RW40 for standard applications
b h
f g
c d n
l
k
i
o
e
a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 0
q p m
Type/Dimension (mm) a b c d e f g h I k l m N o p q
3RW40 5. 180 120 37 17 167 100 223 250 180 148 6.5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm
3RW40 7. 210 160 48 25 190 140 240 278 205 166 10 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm
6
3RW44 for High-Feature applications
b h
q f g
c d n
l
i
k
a
e
o
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 9 3
p m
Type/Dimension (mm) a b c d e f g h I k l m N o p q
3RW44 2. 180 170 37 11 167 100 240 270 180 148 7.5 153 7 184 6.6 M6, 10 Nm
3RW44 3. 180 170 37 17 167 100 240 270 180 148 7.5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm
3RW44 4. 210 210 48 25 190 140 269 298 205 166 16 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm
6/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
■ Schematics
3RW30/3RW31 connection examples for actuation with switches or auxiliary contacts
Control using switches Control using contactor contacts
(for control of size S00 with buttons)
N (L -) L 1 (L + ) L 1 (L + ) L 1 (L + )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 1 2 b
O N /O F F
-K 1 O F F
A 2 A 1 IN 1
A 1 IN 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 1 1 a
O N -K 1
A 2
-K 1
N (L -) N (L -)
Control using switches Control using contactor contacts

on versions for pole-changing motors on versions for pole-changing motors
(for 3RW31 soft starters only) (for 3RW31 soft starters only)
N (L -) L 1 (L + ) N(L-) L1(L+) L1(L+)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 1 3 a
O N /O F F -K1 -K2 OFF

R a m p 1
A 2 A 1 IN 1 A2 A1 IN1 F2
O N /O F F
R a m p 2
NSB00414
F3
IN 2 IN2
ON K1 ON K2
Ramp 1 Ramp 2
K2 K1
K1 K2
N(L-)
NSB00415a
6
3RW30/3RW31 connection example for control with pushbuttons
(sizes S0, S2, and S3 only)
N (L -) L 1 (L + )
O F F
A 2 A 1 IN 1
1 3 1 4 /2 3 2 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 1 6 a
O N
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/41

3RW Soft Starters

3RW30/3RW31 connection examples for main circuit1)
3RW30 3RW30 3RW30 3RW31
3-phase motors 3-phase motors 1-phase motors
with motor starter with 3RV motor starter
protector protector
L
N
F1 F1
K1 3RV Q1
3RT 3RW31
I I I
v
v
v
I
v
3RU/3RB10
3RW30 3RW30 3RT K2 K1 3RT

NSB00417a
NSB00418a
G1
M M
3~ 3~
NSB01021a
3RU/3RB10 F2 F3 3RU/RB10
M
1~
M
3~
NSB00419a
3RW30/3RW31 connection example: AS-Interface load feeder with SIRIUS soft starter
L1 3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L2
L3
N
PE G1 1 A1
Q1 A2
1 3 5
Adapter for rail mounting
Q1
I I I
v
v
v
2 4 6 X3.1 X3.2 X3.3 X4.1 X4.2

IN 1 IN 2 IN + M/N OUT 1
G1 L1 L2 L3
A1
UC= AS-i application module
A2
6
110-230 V 3RK1400 - 1KG01 - 0AA1

1
IN 3RK1402 - 3KG02 - 0AA1
T1 T2 T3 M/N L+/L
X1.1 X1.2
NSB00422a
X5
Power supply
NSB00423a
Q1 = Motor starter protector U prim x V/

G1 = 3RW30 1. SIRIUS soft starter U sec.
24 V or 230 V AC
X5 = Power connector
1) As an alternative, the motor feeder can also be installed as a fuseless or

as a fused version. Fuse and switching device coordination, see
Technical Specifications. The wiring diagrams are provided only as
examples.
6/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40 connection examples for control circuit 3RW40 connection examples for main circuit 3)
Control by switch using 3RW40 – 3-phase motor
internal 24 V DC supply External power supply with fuse 3NA/3NE 3VL circuit-breakers
O N /O F F 1 )
O N /O F F 1 ) F 1 3 N A /3 N E
L 1 N L 1 N
3 V L
K 1 3 R T
A 1 A 2 1 2 3 A 1 A 2 1 2 3
v
3 R W 4 0 3 R W 4 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 7
M M
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 2
3 ~ 3 ~
2 ) 2 )
Control
by pushbutton of a main contactor
-K
O N
L 1 N L 1 N O N /O F F 1 )
O F F
A 1 A 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 4 /2 4 2 3 9 5 9 6 9 8 A 1 A 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 4 /2 4 2 3 9 5 9 6 9 8
O N O V E R L O A D R U N O V E R L O A D
F A IL U R E F A IL U R E
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 8 3 a
6
2 ) 2 )
1) Caution: Risk of restarting

When operating with a switch (ON/OFF) a new, automatic restart will take
place automatically if the start command is still active at terminal 3.
2) Grounding necessary for fan connection to 3RW40 5....
3) As an alternative, the motor feeder can also be installed as a fuseless or
as a fused version. Fuse and switching device coordination, see
Technical Specifications. The wiring diagrams are provided only as
examples.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/43

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44 connection examples for main and control circuits

Possibility 1a: Possibility 1:
Inline circuit with motor starter protector and SITOR fuse Control by pushbutton
(semiconductor protection only)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC, 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC 1), 50 Hz

L2
L3
Q1 F2
Stop PTC type A

S1 or
(optional Thermoclick
F3 semiconductor
Motor on right
protection fuse)
Start S2
No action
No action
Reset S3
L1 L2 L3
PS 1
G1
G1 A1 L+ L- IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
T1 T2 T3 PE
96 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
NSB0_01494a
NSB0_01490
No No Group
U1 V1 W1 PE On period action action error
M1 M N
PE 3~
Main circuit
Possibility 1b: Possibility 1c:
Inline circuit with full-range Inline circuit with line and
protection SITOR fuse
(line and semiconductor protection) (semiconductor protection only)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC 1), 50 Hz L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz

L2 L2
L3 L3
6
F1' F1
F3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
G1 G1
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
NSB0_01491
NSB0_01492
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M1 M1
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage,

see Technical Specifications.
6/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 2: Possibility 2:
Inline circuit with main contactor Control of a main contactor and control by means of PLC
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V1) , 50 Hz

L2
L3
+24 V DC
Q1 F2 PLC outputs PLC inputs
2)
M Start Reset
(optional
semiconductor PTC type A /
F3 protection) Thermoclick
(optional line
contactor if floating
Motor right
Trip Reset
K1
No action
No action
switching of the
L1 L2 L3 motor is planned)
PS1
G1
PE Switch-on duration Group error
T1 T2 T3 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
No action No action NSB0_01496a
NSB0_01495a
K1
U1 V1 W1 PE
M1 N (optional line contactor
M if floating switching
PE 3~
of the motor is planned)
2) Caution. Risk of restarting!
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com-
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially
in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/45

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 3a: Possibility 3a:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) Control of the DC braking contactor3)
(for device types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC 1)

, 50 Hz
L2
L3
Q1 +24 V DC
F2 PLC output
M Start 2) Reset PTC type A

(optional
semi- or
F3
conductor Thermoclick
L1 L2 L3 protection)
K2
No action
No action
G1
Reset
T1 T2 T3
K2 K2 K2 PE DC braking contactor 3)
2 96 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
NSB0_01502
On period No action Group error
NSB0_01501a
K2
U1 V1 W1 PE
M1 N
M
PE 3~

Possibility 3b: Possibility 3b:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) Control of the DC braking contactor3)
(for device types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47)
1)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz
L2
L3
+24 V DC
Q1 F2 PLC output
6
M Start 2) Reset PTC type A

(optional
F3 semi- or
conductor Thermoclick
L3 protection)
Motor on right
L1 L2
No action
No action
G1
Reset
T1 T2 T3
K4 K4 G1 A1 L+ L- IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
K2 K3 DC braking contactor 3)
PE
3 3 96 +
K3 K2 A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
4) NSB0_01504
ON period No action Group error
NSB0_01503a
K2 K3 K4
U1 V1 W1 PE
M1 N
M
PE 3~
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, 3) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
see Technical Specifications. contactor is required.
2) Caution. Risk of restarting! If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com- must be used in addition. Type, see Fuse Coordination (inline circuit) on
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a pages 6/31 to 6/33.
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor)
in case of motor protection tripping. we recommend the function "DC braking".
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output The output 2 must be switched over to "DC braking contactor".
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller. 4) Auxiliary relay K4, e.g.:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
6/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 4a: Possibility 4b: Possibility 4:
Inside-delta circuit Change of direction of rotation for Control by means of PLC
inside-delta circuit
1)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC1), 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V , 50 Hz
L2 L2
L3 L3
+24 V DC
Q1 Q1 F2 PLC outputs PLC inputs
M Start 2) Reset
K1 PTC type A or
Thermoclick
Motor right
F3
No action
No action
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Reset
G1
G1
T1 T2 T3 PE Group error
T1 T2 T3 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
U1 V1 W1
M 3~ U1 V1 W1 NSB0_01498a
M1 M 3~ Switch-on No action No action
W2 U2 V2 M1
NSB0_01497
W2 U2 V2 PE duration
NSB0_01499
PE
PE

2) Caution. Risk of restarting!
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com-
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially
in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/47

General data
■ Overview
3RA fuseless load feeders Operating conditions
The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV1 motor 3RA1 load feeders are climate-proof. They are intended for use
starter protector and the 3RT1 contactor. Motor starter protectors in enclosed rooms in which no severe conditions (such as dust,
and contactors are electrically and mechanically connected caustic vapors, hazardous gases) prevail. Suitable covers must
using pre-assembled sets of components (link modules, wiring be provided for installation in dusty and damp locations.
sets and standard mounting rail or busbar adapters).
Overload tripping times
As the 3RA1 fuseless load feeders are constructed from 3RV1
motor starter protectors and 3RT1 contactors, the same acces- All 3RA1 fuseless load feeders described here are designed for
sories can be used for the 3RA fuseless load feeders as for these normal starting, in other words for overload tripping times of less
motor starter protectors and contactors. than 10 s (CLASS 10). At rated-load operating temperature the
tripping times are shorter, depending on the particular device
Pre-assembled link modules are available as accessories for the and the setting range. The exact values can be derived from the
power spectrum up to 45 kW. The desired fuseless load feeder tripping characteristics of the motor starter protectors.
can thus be assembled quickly and economically by the
customer. A time saving is also achieved in connection with Types of coordination
controlgear acceptances, as – unlike with conventional wiring EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) and IEC 60947-4-1 make a
systems – there is no need to rectify possible wiring errors. distinction between two different types of coordination, which
The 3RV1 motor starter protector is responsible for overload and are designated type of coordination "1" and type of
short-circuit protection in the fuseless load feeder. Back-up coordination "2". Any short-circuits that occur are cleared safely
protective devices, such as fuses or limiters, are superfluous by both types of coordination. The only differences concern the
here, as the motor starter protector is capable of withstanding extent of the damage caused to the device by a short-circuit.
short-circuits of up to 50 or 100 kA at 400 V. • Type of coordination 1
The 3RT1 contactor is particularly suitable for extremely The fuseless load feeder may be non-operational after a short-
complex switching tasks requiring the greatest endurance. circuit has been cleared. Damage to the contactor or to the
The permissible ambient temperature is 60 °C with butt-mount- overload relay is permissible. For 3RA1 load feeders, the motor
ing and without derating (70 °C possible subject to certain starter protector itself always achieves type "2" coordination.
restrictions).
• Type of coordination 2
3RA1 fuseless load feeders are available for motors up to 45 kW
at AC-3 and 400 V (grounded network) and setting ranges from There must be no damage to the overload trip or to any other
0.14 A to 100 A. components after a short-circuit has been cleared. The 3RA1
fuseless load feeder can resume operation without needing to
3RA1 fuseless load feeders are supplied in four different sizes: be renewed. At most, it is permissible to weld the contactor
Size Width Max. rated current In For induction motors contacts if they can be disconnected easily without any
max up to significant deformation.
6
mm A kW
S00 45 12 5.5
S0 45 25 11
S2 55 50 22
S3 70 100 45
The SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT contac-

tors can be used for fuseless load feeders > 100 A. The corre-
sponding distances from grounded or live parts, as detailed in
the technical specifications, must be observed.
6/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
■ Design
Complete unit Accessories
The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders can be ordered as complete The accessories for the special equipment, such as auxiliary
equipment for direct start or for reversing duty. Control supply contacts and undervoltage trips, can also be used for the 3RA1
voltages of 50 Hz 230 V AC or 24 V DC and assembly on a fuseless load feeders.
35 mm standard mounting rail or in a 40 or 60 mm busbar
system are possible. In addition, certain accessories have been optimized for the
Special equipment for customer assembly can be ordered if fuseless load feeders. They include the top-connected, trans-
other rated control supply voltages are required. The link mod- verse auxiliary contact on the motor starter protector with
ules simplify customer assembly of the load feeders. one changeover contact or one NO contact + one NC contact.
The corresponding distances from grounded or live parts, as Special auxiliary contact blocks that can be snapped on from
detailed in the technical specifications, must be observed. below are available for the contactor. These two accessories
enable the fuseless load feeders to be wired simply without
Customer assembly having to route cables through the device.
The standard devices can be combined optimally – in terms of The special accessories for 3RA fuseless load feeders take the
both technical specifications and dimensions, thanks to the form of link modules for 3RV1 motor starter protectors and 3RT1
modular system of the SIRIUS series. contactors.
The fuseless load feeders can thus be assembled easily by the Mounting
customer. It is simply necessary to assemble the standard 3RV1
motor starter protector and 3RT1 contactor and the appropriate 3RA1 fuseless load feeders are available for assembly on
link module together. standard mounting rails according to EN 50022-35 15 or on
busbar adapters with a busbar center-line spacing of 40 or
For the order numbers for special equipment and link modules, 60 mm and a busbar thickness of 5 or 10 mm.
see the selection and ordering data "3RA11 Direct-On-Line
Starters and 3RA12 Reversing Starters for Standard Mounting The fuseless load feeders are also suitable for screw fixing.
Rail, Screw Mounting or Busbar Systems". Up to size S0 the 3RA11 fuseless load feeders can also be
For link modules for direct start or reversing duty for mounting on configured with the 3RV19 infeed system (see 3RV19 Infeed
standard mounting rails or busbars, see ordering data System).
"Accessories for Direct-On-Line Starters and Reversing Size S00 and S0 can be screwed on with the aid of plug-in clips
Starters". (see Accessories for Direct-On-Line and Reversing Starters).
If a motor starter protector with a rotary operating mechanism is
required for the lower setting ranges up to 12 A, the S0 motor
starter protector can also be assembled with an S00 contactor.
A special connecting module is available for this purpose.
For the installation of feeders, it is imperative to use standard rail
6
adapters, as from size S2 for direct start and as from size S0 for
reversing duty, to ensure the necessary mechanical strength. A
standard rail adapter is not necessary if a busbar adapter is
used.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/49

General data
Direct start • For standard rail mounting • Size S00 and S0
3RB19 00-0B 3RB19 00-0B 3RB19 00-0B
push-in lugs push-in lugs push-in lugs
(only for screw fixing) (only for screw fixing) (only for screw fixing)
(1 Order No. (1 Order No. (1 Order No.
= 10 units) = 10 units) = 10 units)
Motor starter protector Motor starter protector Motor starter protector

Size S00 Size S0 Size S0
3RA19 11-1AA00 3RA19 21-1DA00 Link module

link module link module for AC: 3RA19 21-1AA00
for DC: 3RA19 21-1BA00
NSB0_00371a
NSB0_00370a
NSB0_00372a
Contactor Contactor Contactor
Size S00 Size S00 Size S0
Direct start • For standard rail mounting • Size S2 and S3

3RA19 42-1AA00
6
3RA19 32-1AA00 standard mounting

standard mounting rail adapters
Motor starter protector rail adapters Motor starter protector
Size S2 Size S3
Link module Link module

for AC: for AC:
3RA19 31-1AA00 3RA19 41-1AA00
for DC: for DC:
3RA19 31-1BA00 3RA19 41-1BA00
Contactor Contactor
Size S2 Size S3
NSB00373
NSB00374
These graphical overviews are shown without small mounting hardware (screws etc.).
6/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Direct start • For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems • Size S00 and S0
Busbar adapters Busbar adapters
40 mm: 8US10 51-5DM07 40 mm: 8US10 51-5DM07
60 mm: 8US12 51-5DM07 60 mm: 8US12 51-5DM07
Motor starter protector Motor starter

Size S00 protector
Size S0
3RA19 11-1AA00 3RA19 21-1DA00

link module link module
NSB0_00375a
NSB0_00376a
Contactor Contactor
Size S00 Size S00
Direct start • For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems • Size S0 and S2

Busbar adapters Busbar adapters
40 mm: 8US10 51-5DM07 40 mm: 8US10 61-5FP08
60 mm: 8US12 51-5DM07 60 mm: 8US12 61-5FP08
6
Motor starter protector Motor starter protector
Size S0 Size S2
Link module
for AC: 3RA19 21-1AA00
for DC: 3RA19 21-1BA00 Link module
NSB0_00377a
Contactor Contactor
Size S0 Size S2
NSB00378
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/51

General data
Reversing duty • For standard rail mounting • Size S00 and S0
3RB19 00-0B 3RB19 00-0B
push-in lugs push-in lugs
(only for screw fixing) (only for screw fixing)
(1 Order No. (1 Order No.
= 10 units) = 10 units) Motor starter
Motor starter protector
Size S00 protector
NSB0_00380a
NSB0_00379a
Size S0
3RA19 11-1AA00 RA19 21-1DA00

a a
2 contactors 2 contactors
Size S00 Size S00
3RA19 13-2A
d c wiring kit d c
a Upper wiring module
b b Lower wiring module b
c 2 connecting clips
d Mechanical interlock
(can be removed)
6
Reversing duty • For standard rail mounting • Size S0
3RA19 23-1B assembly kit (RH) 1

for reversing duty 5 2
for mounting onto 3 1
standard rails
Consisting of:
1 wiring kit
2 adapters for rail mounting 1
2 side modules 2
4 link wedges 3
6
3
1 3RA19 22-1AA00
adapter for rail mounting
2 3RA19 02-1B a
side modules
for adapter for rail mounting
(1 Order No. = 10 units) 3
2
3 8US19 98-1AA00 7 4
link wedges
7
(1 Order No. = 100 units)
NSB0_00381a
4 3RA19 24-2B
5 Motor starter protector
Size S0
6 Link module
for AC: 3RA19 21-1AA00 3RA19 23-2A
for DC: 3RA19 21-1BA00 wiring kit b
7 2 contactors
b Lower wiring module
Size S0
6/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
3RA19 33-1 assembly kit (RH) 5

for reversing duty 6
for mounting onto 1 7 5
standard rails
Consisting of:
1 wiring kit
2 side modules 6
4 link wedges 7
7
1 Motor starter protector size S2

4 7
2 2 contactors size S2
3 3RA19 24-2B
mechanical interlock a
4 Link module 7
for AC: 3RA19 31-1AA00 6
2
5 3RA19 32-1AA00 2
adapter for rail mounting 3
6 3RA19 02-1B side modules
for adapter for rail mounting
NSB00382
7 8US19 98-1AA00
link wedges
b
3RA19 33-2A
wiring kit
5
3RA19 43-1B assembly kit (RH)
6
for reversing duty 6 5
7
for mounting onto 1
standard rails
Consisting of:
1 wiring kit
2 side modules 6
4 link wedges 7
7
1 Motor starter protector size S3
2 2 contactors size S3
3 3RA19 24-2B
4
7
4 Link module
for AC: 3RA19 41-1AA00 a
5 3RA19 42-1AA00
7
adapter for rail mounting 6
6 3RA19 02-1B side modules 2
for adapter for rail mounting 2
7 8US19 98-1AA00
link wedges
NSB00383
b
3RA19 43-2A
wiring kit
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/53

General data
Reversing duty • For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems • Size S00 and S0
Assembly kit (RH)

for reversing duty
for busbar mounting
40 mm: 3RA19 13-1C
60 mm: 3RA19 13-1D
Consisting of: Motor starter Motor starter
1 wiring kit protector protector
2 busbar adapters Size S00 Size S0
1 switching device holder
2 link wedges
3RA19 11-1AA00 3RA19 21-1DA00

a
a
2 contactors
Size S00 2 contactors
Size S00
3RA19 13-2A
wiring kit d c d c
c 2 connecting clips b b
d Mechanical interlock
(can be removed)
6
Assembly kit (RS)

for reversing duty
for busbar mounting Device holder
40 mm: 3RA19 23-1C for size S00
60 mm: 3RA19 23-1D 40 mm: 8US10 50-5AM00
Motor starter 60 mm: 8US12 50-5AM00 Busbar adapters
Consisting of: 40 mm:
1 wiring kit protector
Size S0 Device holder 8US10 51-5DM07
2 busbar adapters 60 mm:
1 switching device holder for size S0
40 mm: 8US10 60-5AM00 8US12 51-5DM07
1 side module
2 link wedges 60 mm: 8US12 60-5AM00
Link module for AC:

3RA19 21-1AA00
for DC:
3RA19 21-1BA00 a
2
1
2 contactors
2
Size S0
NSB0_00295a
1 3RA19 24-2B
3RA19 23-2A
wiring kit b 2 8US19 98-1AA00
a Upper wiring module link wedges
b Lower wiring module (1 Order No. = 100 units)
6/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Reversing duty • For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems • Size S2
4
Assembly kit (RS)
for reversing duty Motor starter protector 5
for busbar mounting Size S2
40 mm: 3RA19 33-1C
60 mm: 3RA19 33-1D 3
Consisting of:
1 wiring kit
2 busbar adapters
1 switching device holder
1 side module
2 link wedges 3
3
1 Link module
1
2 3RA19 24-2B a
3 8US19 98-1AA00
link wedges
4 Switching device holders 2 contactors 2
40 mm: 8US10 60-5AP00 Size S2
60 mm: 8US12 60-5AP00
with 8US19 98-2BM00
side module
NSB00296
for busbar adapter
5 Busbar adapter
40 mm: 8US10 61-5FP08
60 mm: 8US12 61-5FP08
3RA19 33-2A
b wiring kit
6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/55

General data
Installation guidelines for 400/500 V AC
The following distances from grounded components must be
observed when installing combinations:
Motor starter protectors Distance to grounded or live
in combination with contactors parts acc. to IEC 60947-4
Motor starter Contactor Rated operational Y X21) Z
Z Z
protector voltage mm mm mm
Y
3RV1. 1 with 3RT10 1 400/500 V 20 10 9 1L1 3L2 5L3
3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 1 400/500 V 30 10 9

3RT1. 2 400/500 V 30 10 9 3RV1... 3RV1...
3RT1. 3 400/500 V 30 10 9
3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 2 400/500 V 50 10 10
3RT1. 3 400/500 V 50 10 10 2T1 4T2 6T3
3RT10 4 400/500 V 50 10 10
1L1 3L2 5L3
X2
3RV1. 4 with 3RT10 4 400 V 90 10 12
3RT10 4 500 V 220 10 20 3RT1... 3RT1...
2T1 4T2 6T3

NSB01030b
1) Minimum distance to contactor at front. For the motor

starter protector, no minimum distance at the front
must be maintained.
Installation guidelines for 690 V AC

For assembling fuseless load feeders for 690 V, one upstream The contactor can be fitted with a connecting module under the
and one downstream motor starter protector are required. If the downstream motor starter protector. If contactor assemblies are
sum of the set currents does not exceed the rated or set current used for reversing duty, the assembly must be mounted so that
of the upstream motor starter protector, several downstream mo- the space beneath the upstream motor starter protector (infeed
tor starter protectors can also be used in parallel. The motor side) remains free.
starter protectors must be placed adjacent to each other and
6
can be connected with the wiring modules specified below.
Size Mounting methods Standard mounting for size S0 ... 5.5 kW, Mounting for size S0
S2 and S3 from 7.5 ... 11 kW
S0 Mounting on an insulated base
3 -p h a s e b u s b a r In fe e d s id e
plate. If screws are used for fixing, 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
the screws must not be grounded. S iz e S 0 :
Alternatively, the adapter for rail 3 R V 1 9 1 5 -1 A B 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3 1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
mounting can be used without 3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ...

S iz e S 2 :
restriction. 3 R V 1 9 3 5 -1 A 3 R V 1 ... 3 R V 1 ...
S2/S3 Mounting on an insulated base
plate. Alternatively, the adapter for
rail mounting can also be used.
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3 2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
In fe e d s id e
1 L 1 3 L 2 5 L 3
3 R T 1 ...
3 R T 1 ...
C o n n e c tio n m o d u le
S e e a c c e s s o r ie s
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 3 1 d
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
2 T 1 4 T 2 6 T 3
L o a d s id e
L o a d s id e
6/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
The following distances from grounded components must be
observed when installing combinations:
Two motor starter protectors Distance to grounded or live parts acc. to IEC 60947-4
in combination with contactors
Motor starter Contactor Rated operational voltage Y1 Y2 Y3 X1 X2 Z
protector mm mm mm mm mm mm
3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 2 690 V 80 10 95 20 14 20
3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 3 690 V 50 10 120 10 32 10
3RT10 4 690 V 50 10 120 10 40 10
Z Z
Y1
1
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
X1
1 3-phase busbar
3RV1... 3RV1... 3RV1...
Size S0: 3RV19 15-1AB
Size S2: 3RV19 35-1A
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2
1L1 3L2 5L3 X2
2 In combination with size S2

3RT1... 3RT1... motor starter protectors and
Y3
size S3 contactors, a spacing of

100 mm must be maintained.
Y2
2T1 4T2 6T3

NSB0_01033d
Clearances to grounded parts for 3VL circuit-breakers
6
Circuit- Rated operational Distance from grounded parts
breakers voltage Ue
V A B C D
1)
3VL2/3VL3 max. 400 100 25 30 87
3VL2/3VL32) 400 ... 525 100 25 30 87
A
3VL4/3VL51) max. 525 100 35 30 106.5
C D
NSB0_01599
1) The 3VL9 300-8CE00 phase barriers (for 3VL2/3VL3)

or 3VL9 600-8CE00 phase barriers (for 3VL4/3VL5) must be used.
2) The 3VL9 300-8C..0 terminal cover must be used.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/57

General data
Distances from grounded parts for 3RT10 5./3RT10 6./3RT10 7.
and 3RT12 6./3RT12 7. contactors
Contactors Distance from grounded parts,

rated operational voltage up to 690 V
G H I H
3RT10 5. 40 10 20
G
3RT10 6./3RT12 6. 20 10 20
3RT10 7./3RT12 7. 20 10 20
I
G
NSB0_01600
G = Distance from box terminal. In applications with cable lugs or busbar connection the
3RT19 56-4EA1 (3RT10 5) or 3RT19 66-4EA1 (3RT10 6.,
3RT12 6., 3RT10 7. or 3RT12 7.) terminal cover must be used!
6
6/58 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Type 3RA1. 1 3RA1. 2 3RA1. 3 3RA1. 4
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
General data
Standards IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Max. rated current In max A 12 25 50 100
(= max. rated operational current Ie)
Permissible ambient temperature °C -20 ... +70 for operation (up to +60 °C without restriction)
°C -55 ... +80 during storage/transport
Trip class (CLASS) According to IEC 60947-4-1, 10
EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated short-circuit current Iq at AC 50/60 Hz 400 V kA 50
according to IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Types of coordination according to IEC 60947-4-1, 1)
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Power loss Pv max of all main Up to 1.25 A W 6
conducting paths 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 7
Dependent on the 8 ... 12 A W 10.5
rated current In 2 ... 6.3 A W 7
(upper setting range) 8 ... 16 A W 9.5
20 ... 25 A W 13
25 ... 32 A W 19
40 A W 28
45 ... 50 A W 35
63 A W 29
75 ... 90 A W 45
100 A W 60
Power consumption of the coils in the case of contactors
(for cold coil and Us’ 50 Hz)
• AC operation Closing VA 27 61 127 270
P.f. 0.8 0.82 0.82 0.68
6
Closed VA 4.6 7.8 13.5 22
P.f. 0.27 0.24 0.34 0.27
• DC operation Closing = W 3.2 5.4 11.5 15
Closed
Coil operating range for contactors 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
low limit at 55 °C 0.8 x Us --
at 60 °C 0.85 xUs --
Endurance of the motor starter protector
• Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000
• Electrical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000
• Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15 15
Endurance of contactor
• Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 million 10 million
2)
• Electrical endurance Operating cycles
Shock resistance According to IEC 60086 g Up to 9.8 Up to 12.5 Up to 8 Up to 6
(sine-wave pulse) Part 2-27
Degree of protection According to IEC 60947-1 IP20
Touch protection According to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Phase failure sensitivity According to IEC 60947-1, Yes
of the motor starter protector EN 60947-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Insulation characteristics According to IEC 60947-2, Yes
of the motor starter protector EN 60947-2
(VDE 0660 Part 101)
Main control and According to IEC 60204-1, Yes, (with overvoltage releases of category 1 under conditions of proper use)
EMERGENCY-STOP switch EN 60204-1
characteristics of the (VDE 0113 Part 1)
motor starter protector and
accessories
Safe isolation between main According to EN 60947-1, V Up to 400
and auxiliary circuits Appendix N
Positively driven operation at contactors Yes Yes, from main contact to auxiliary NC contact
1) See Selection and Ordering Data.

2) See endurance characteristics of the contactors under Controlgear:
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/59

General data
Type 3RA1. 1 3RA1. 2 3RA1. 3 3RA1. 4

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit
Standards IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Connection type Screw terminal Screw terminal Box terminal Box terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw
Minimum/maximum conductor cross-sections
Finely stranded with end sleeve
• 1-wire mm² 0.5 / 2.5 1/6 0.75 / 25 2.5/501)
• 2-wire mm² 0.5 / 2.5 1 ... 2.5 / 2.5 ... 6 0.75 / 16 2.5/35
Solid or stranded
• 1-wire mm² 0.5 / 4 1/6 0.7 / 35 2.5/70
• 2-wire mm² 0.75 / 2.5 1 ... 2.5 / 2.5 ... 6 0.75 / 25 2.5/50
Connection, main contacts, ribbon cable conductors Yes Yes
Busbar connections Yes
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (30 ... 2) --
• Stranded AWG -- -- -- 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminal
mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) --
Permissible mounting position
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
9 0 ° 9 0 °
N S B 0 0 3 6 9
Caution: according to DIN 43602 Start-up command "I" at the right or top
6
6/60 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Standard induction motor1) Setting range Motor starter protec- Contactor3) Short-circuit Size4)
4-pole at 400 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker2) breaking
overload release capacity
Standard output Motor current (guide value) Type Type Iq
P I
kW A A kA
Selection tables
Type of coordination "1" at 400 V AC

Normal starting Class 10
0.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RV10 11-0BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01 50 S00
0.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV10 11-0CA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV10 11-0DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV10 11-0EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV10 11-0FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV10 11-0GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.6 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV10 11-0HA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.25 0.85 0.7 ... 1 3RV10 11-0JA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV10 11-0KA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV10 11-1AA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RV10 11-1BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RV10 11-1DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RV10 11-1FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RV10 11-1EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
2.2 4.9 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV10 11-1GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
3 6.5 5.5 ... 8 3RV10 11-1HA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
4 8.5 7 ... 10 3RV10 11-1JA10 3RT10 16-1AP01
5.5 11.5 9 ... 12 3RV10 11-1KA10 3RT10 17-1AP01
7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RV10 21-4AA10 3RT10 25-1AP00 50 S0
7.5 15.5 14 ... 20 3RV10 21-4BA10 3RT10 25-1AP00
11 22 17 ... 22 3RV10 21-4CA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
11 22 20 ... 25 3RV10 21-4DA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
15 29 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
18.5 35 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
22 41 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
22 41 40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
30 55 45 ... 63 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S3
37 66 57 ... 75 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT10 45-1AP00
45 80 70 ... 90 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT10 46-1AP00
45 80 80 ... 100 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT10 46-1AP00
6
55 97 40 ... 100 3VL27 10-2AP33 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S6
75 132 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 55-6AP36
90 160 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 56-6AP36
110 195 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT12 64-6AP36 S10V
132 230 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT10 65-6AP36 S10
100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT12 65-6AP36 S10V
160 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT10 66-6AP36 S10
125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT12 66-6AP36 S10V
200 350 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 75-6AP36 S12V
250 430 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V
1) Selection depends on the concrete startup and rated data of the

protected motor.
2) The motor starter protector remains fully operable and always conforms to
type of coordination "2".
3) Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC. Further voltages are possible.
4) The abbreviation "V" stands for vacuum contactor.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/61

General data
4-pole at 400 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker2) breaking
P I
kW A A kA
0.04 0.16 0.11 ... 0.16 3RV10 11-0AA10 3RT10 15-1AP01 130 S00
0.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RV10 11-0BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV10 11-0CA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV10 11-0DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV10 11-0EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV10 11-0FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV10 11-0GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.6 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV10 11-0HA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.25 0.85 0.7 ... 1 3RV10 11-0JA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV10 11-0KA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV10 11-1AA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RV10 11-1BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RV10 21-1DA10 3RT10 24-1AP00 130 S0
1.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RV10 21-1EA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RV10 21-1FA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
2.2 4.9 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV10 21-1GA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
3 6.5 5.5 ... 8 3RV10 21-1HA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
4 8.5 7 ... 10 3RV10 21-1JA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
5.5 11.5 9 ... 12.5 3RV10 21-1KA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RV10 21-4AA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
7.5 15.5 14 ... 20 3RV10 21-4BA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
11 22 18 ... 25 3RV10 31-4DA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 100 S2
15 29 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
18.5 35 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
22 41 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
22 41 40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
30 55 45 ... 63 3RV10 42-4JA10 3RT10 54-1AP36 100 S3/S6
37 66 57 ... 75 3RV10 42-4KA10 3RT10 54-1AP36
45 80 70 ... 90 3RV10 42-4LA10 3RT10 54-1AP36
45 80 80 ... 100 3RV10 42-4MA10 3RT10 54-1AP36
55 97 40 ... 100 3VL27 10-2AP33 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S6
75 132 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 55-6AP36
6
90 160 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 56-6AP36

110 195 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT12 64-6AP36 S10V
132 230 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT10 65-6AP36 S10
100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT12 65-6AP36 S10V
160 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT10 66-6AP36 S10
125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT12 66-6AP36 S10V
200 350 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 75-6AP36 S12V
250 430 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V

protected motor.
2) The motor starter protector remains fully operable and always conforms to
type of coordination "2".
6/62 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
4-pole at 400 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker2) breaking capacity
overload release
Standard output Motor current of the motor starter
(guide value) protctor (max. current) Type Type Iq
P I
kW A A kA
Type of coordination "1" and "2" at 400 V AC
Heavy-duty starting conditions with Class 20
7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RV10 31-4AB10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
14 ... 20 3RV10 31-4BB10 3RT10 34-1AP00
11 22 18 ... 25 3RV10 31-4DB10 3RT10 34-1AP00
15 29 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EB10 3RT10 34-1AP00
18.5 35 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FB10 3RT10 36-1AP00
22 41 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GB10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S2/S3
40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HB10 3RT10 44-1AP00
30 55 45 ... 63 3RV10 42-4JB10 3RT10 45-1AP00 50 S3
37 66 57 ... 75 3RV10 42-4KB10 3RT10 45-1AP00
37 66 70 ... 90 3RV10 42-4LB10 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S3/S6
45 80 80 ... 100 3RV10 42-4MB10 3RT10 54-1AP36
55 97 40 ... 100 3VL27 10-2AS33 3RT10 55-6AP36 50 S6
75 132 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AS33 3RT10 56-6AP36
90 160 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT10 65-6AP36
110 195 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT10 66-6AP36
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT12 64-6AP36 50 S10V
132 230 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AS36 3RT12 65-6AP36
160 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AS36 3RT12 66-6AP36
160 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AS36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
200 350 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT10 76-6AP36
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT12 75-6AP36 50 S12V
250 430 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT12 76-6AP36

protected motor.
2) The motor starter protector must be set to the maximum value to ensure
that only the overload relay trips in the event of an overload. The motor
starter protector remains fully operable and always conforms to type of
coordination "2".
6
Note:
Assemblies for heavy-duty starting conditions with Class 30
can be found in the configuration documentation SIRIUS
Configuration, Order No. E20001–A580–P302-V2.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/63

General data
4-pole at 500 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker breaking
P I
kW A A kA
0.06 0.16 0.14 ... 0.2 3RV10 11-0BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01 50 S00
0.09 0.24 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV10 11-0CA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.32 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV10 11-0DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.32 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV10 11-0EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.48 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV10 11-0FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.48 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV10 11-0GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.25 0.68 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV10 11-0HA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.37 0.88 0.7 ... 1 3RV10 11-0JA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.55 1.2 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV10 11-0KA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV10 11-1AA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.5 1.4 ... 2 3RV10 11-1BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.1 2.2 1.8 ... 2.5 3RV10 11-1CA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.5 2.9 2.2 ... 3.2 3RV10 11-1DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
1.5 2.9 2.8 ... 4 3RV10 11-1EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
2.2 3.9 3.5 ... 5 3RV10 11-1FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
3 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV10 11-1GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
4 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RV10 11-1HA10 3RT10 16-1AP01
5.5 9.2 7 ... 10 3RV10 11-1JA10 3RT10 17-1AP01
7.5 12.4 9 ... 12.5 3RV10 21-1KA10 3RT10 25-1AP00 50 S0
7.5 12.4 11 ... 16 3RV10 21-4AA10 3RT10 25-1AP00
11 17.6 14 ... 20 3RV10 21-4BA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
15 23 18 ... 25 3RV10 31-4DA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
18.5 28 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
22 33 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
30 44 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
30 44 40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
37 53 45 ... 63 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S3
45 64 57 ... 75 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT10 44-1AP00
55 78 70 ... 90 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT10 45-1AP00
75 106 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S6
90 128 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 55-6AP36
6
110 156 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 56-6AP36

132 184 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT12 64-6AP36 S10V
160 224 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT10 65-6AP36 S10
100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT12 65-6AP36 S10V
200 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT10 66-6AP36 S10
125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT12 66-6AP36 S10V
250 344 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 75-6AP36 S12V
315 432 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V
355 488 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V

protected motor.
6/64 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
4-pole at 500 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker breaking
P I
kW A A kA
0.06 0.16 0.14 ... 0.2 3RV10 11-0BA10 3RT10 15-1AP01 50 S00
0.09 0.24 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV10 11-0CA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.32 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV10 11-0DA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.12 0.32 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV10 11-0EA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.48 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV10 11-0FA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.18 0.48 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV10 11-0GA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.25 0.68 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV10 11-0HA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.37 0.88 0.7 ... 1 3RV10 11-0JA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.55 1.2 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV10 11-0KA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV10 11-1AA10 3RT10 15-1AP01
0.75 1.5 1.4 ... 2 3RV10 21-1BA10 3RT10 24-1AP00 50 S0
1.1 2.2 1.8 ... 2.5 3RV10 21-1CA10 3RT10 26-1AP00
1.5 2.9 2.2 ... 3.2 3RV10 21-1DA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S0/S2
1.5 2.9 2.8 ... 4 3RV10 21-1EA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
2.2 4.0 3.5 ... 5 3RV10 21-1FA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
3 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV10 21-1GA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
4 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RV10 21-1HA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
5.5 9.2 7 ... 10 3RV10 21-1JA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
7.5 12.4 9 ... 12.5 3RV10 21-1KA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
7.5 12.4 11 ... 16 3RV10 31-4AA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
11 17.6 14 ... 20 3RV10 31-4BA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
15 23 18 ... 25 3RV10 31-4DA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
18.5 28 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
22 33 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
30 44 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
30 44 40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT10 36-1AP00
37 53 45 ... 63 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S3
45 64 57 ... 75 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT10 44-1AP00
55 78 70 ... 90 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT10 45-1AP00
75 106 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S6
90 128 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 55-6AP36
6
110 156 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AP33 3RT10 56-6AP36
132 184 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AP36 3RT12 64-6AP36 S10V
160 224 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT10 65-6AP36 S10
100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AP36 3RT12 65-6AP36 S10V
200 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT10 66-6AP36 S10
125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AP36 3RT12 66-6AP36 S10V
250 344 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 75-6AP36 S12V
315 432 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V
355 488 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT10 76-6AP36 S12
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AP36 3RT12 76-6AP36 S12V

protected motor.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/65

General data
Standard induction motor1) Setting range Motor starter protec- Contactor2) Short-circuit breaking Size3)
4-pole at 500 V AC for thermal tor/circuit-breaker capacity
Standard Motor current overload release
output (guide value) of the motor starter
protector (max. current) Type Type Iq
P I
kW A A kA
Heavy-duty starting conditions with Class 20
7.5 12.4 11 ... 16 3RV10 31-4AB10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
11 17.6 14 ... 20 3RV10 31-4BB10 3RT10 34-1AP00
11 17.6 18 ... 25 3RV10 31-4DB10 3RT10 34-1AP00
15 23 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EB10 3RT10 35-1AP00
18.5 28 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EB10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S2/S3
18.5 28 28 ... 40 3RV10 42-4FB10 3RT10 44-1AP00 50 S3
22 33 28 ... 40 3RV10 42-4FB10 3RT10 44-1AP00
30 44 36 ... 50 3RV10 42-4HB10 3RT10 44-1AP00
30 44 45 ... 63 3RV10 42-4JB10 3RT10 44-1AP00
37 53 45 ... 63 3RV10 42-4JB10 3RT10 45-1AP00
37 53 57 ... 75 3RV10 42-4KB10 3RT10 45-1AP00
45 64 57 ... 75 3RV10 42-4KB10 3RT10 54-1AP36 50 S3/S6
55 79 70 ... 90 3RV10 42-4LB10 3RT10 54-1AP36
75 106 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AS33 3RT10 55-6AP36 S6
90 128 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AS33 3RT10 56-6AP36
110 156 64 ... 160 3VL27 16-2AS33 3RT10 64-6AP36 50 S10
132 184 80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT10 65-6AP36
80 ... 200 3VL37 20-2AS36 3RT12 64-6AP36 50 S10V
160 224 100 ... 250 3VL37 25-2AS36 3RT12 65-6AP36
200 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AS36 3RT12 66-6AP36
200 280 125 ... 315 3VL47 31-2AS36 3RT10 75-6AP36 50 S12
250 344 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT10 76-6AP36
200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT12 75-6AP36 50 S12V
315 432 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT12 76-6AP36
355 488 200 ... 500 3VL57 50-2AS36 3RT12 76-6AP36

protected motor.
6

Note:
Assemblies for heavy-duty starting conditions with Class 30
can be found in the configuration documentation SIRIUS
Configuration, Order No. E20001–A580–P302-V2.
6/66 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Standard induction motor Setting range Standard Downstream Contactor2) Short-circuit Size
4-pole at 690 V AC1) of motor starter motor starter protec- motor starter breaking capacity
protector tor with limit function protector
Standard Motor current
output (guide value) Type Type Type Iq
P I
kW A A kA
0.09 0.17 0.14 ... 0.2 None 3RV10 21-0BA10 3RT10 24-1AP00 1003) S0
0.12 0.23 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV10 21-0CA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.12 0.23 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV10 21-0DA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.18 0.35 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV10 21-0EA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.18 0.35 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV10 21-0FA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.25 0.49 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV10 21-0GA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.37 0.64 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV10 21-0HA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.55 0.87 0.7 ... 1 3RV10 21-0JA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.75 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV10 21-0KA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
0.75 1.1 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV10 21-1AA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
1.1 1.6 1.4 ... 2 3RV13 21-4DC10 3RV10 21-1BA10 3RT10 24-1AP00 50 S0
1.5 2.1 1.8 ... 2.5 Size S0 3RV10 21-1CA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
2.2 2.8 2.2 ... 3.2 In = 25 A 3RV10 21-1DA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
3.0 3.8 3.5 ... 5 3RV10 21-1FA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
4.0 4.9 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV10 21-1GA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
5.5 6.7 5.5 ... 8 3RV13 31-4HC10 3RV10 21-1HA10 3RT10 24-1AP00 50 S0
11 8.9 7 ... 10 Size S2 3RV10 21-1JA10 3RT10 24-1AP00
12.8 11 ... 16 In = 50 A 3RV10 21-4AA10 3RT10 25-1AP00
11 12.8 11 ... 16 3RV13 31-4HC10 3RV10 31-4AA10 3RT10 34-1AP00 50 S2
15 17 14 ... 20 Size S2 3RV10 31-4BA10 3RT10 34-1AP00
18.5 21 18 ... 25 In = 50 A 3RV10 31-4DA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
22 24 22 ... 32 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT10 35-1AP00
30 32 28 ... 40 3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT10 44-1AP004) 50 S2/S3
37 39 36 ... 45 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT10 44-1AP004)
45 47 40 ... 50 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT10 45-1AP004)

protected motor.
6
3) An upstream motor starter protector is not required.
4) With these combinations, the distance between the downstream
motor starter protector and the contactor must be at least 10 cm.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/67

Infeed System
3RV19 infeed system
■ Overview
The 3RV19 infeed system is a convenient means of power Electrical connection between the 3-phase busbars and the
supply and distribution for a group of several motor starter pro- motor starter protectors is implemented through plug-in
tectors or complete load feeders with a screw or spring-loaded connectors. The complete system can be mounted on a 35 mm
terminal system up to size S0. standard mounting rail according to EN 50022 and can be ex-
panded as required up to a maximum current carrying capacity
The devices with spring-loaded terminals are available in the of 80 A.
SIRIUS modular system up to 5.5 kW at 400 V AC. The motor
starter protectors and load feeders with screw terminals for sizes The system is mounted extremely quickly and easily thanks to
S00 and S0 can also be integrated in the system at the same the simple plug-in technique. Thanks to the lateral infeed, the
time. system also saves space in the control cabinet. The additional
overall height required for the infeed unit is only 30 mm. The al-
The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral ternative infeed possibilities on each side offer a high degree of
incoming unit (3-phase busbar with infeed). This incoming unit flexibility for configuring the control cabinet: Infeed on left-hand
with spring-loaded terminals is mounted on the right or left de- or right-hand side, ring infeed or infeed on one side and loop-
pending on the version and can be supplied with a maximum through from the other side to supply further loads are all possi-
conductor cross-section of 25 mm2 (with end sleeve). A basic ble. A terminal block with spring-loaded terminals in combina-
module has two sockets onto each of which a motor starter tion with a standard mounting rail enables the integration of not
protector can be snapped. only SIRIUS motor starter protectors but also single-phase,
Expansion modules are available for extending the system 2-phase and 3-phase components such as 5SY miniature
(3-phase busbars for system expansion). The individual circuit-breakers or SIRIUS relay components.
modules are connected through an expansion plug.
5 1 3b 3a 7 2 4 7
6
NSB0_01415a
1 3-phase busbar with infeed

2 3-phase busbar for system expansion
3a Expansion plug
3b Extra-wide expansion plug
4 End cover
5 Plug-in connector
6 Contactor base
7 Terminal block
6/68 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Infeed System
3RV19 infeed system
$ 3-phase busbars with infeed * Contactor base
A 3-phase busbar with infeed unit is required for connecting the Load feeders can be assembled in the system using the contac-
incoming supply. This module comprises one infeed module and tor base. The contactor bases are suitable for contactors of
2 sockets which each accept one motor starter protector. A size S00 with spring-loaded terminals and are simply snapped
choice of two versions with infeed on the left or right is available. onto the 3-phase busbars. Direct-on-line starters and reversing
The incoming supply is connected using spring-loaded termi- starters are possible. One contactor base is required for direct-
nals. The Cage Clamp springs permit conductor cross-sections on-line starters and two are required for reversing starters. To
of up to 25 mm2 with end sleeves. An end cover is supplied with assemble load feeders for reversing starters, the contactor
each module. bases can be arranged either below each other (45 mm overall
width) or alongside each other (90 mm overall width). It is impor-
% 3-phase busbars for system expansion tant to note that mechanical interlocking of the contactors is only
The 3-phase busbars for system expansion support expansion possible when they are arranged vertically.
of the system. There is a choice of modules with 2 or 3 sockets. The infeed system is designed for mounting on a 35 mm stan-
The system can be expanded as required up to a maximum cur- dard mounting rail with 7.5 mm overall depth. This standard
rent carrying capacity of 63 A. An expansion plug is supplied mounting rail gives the contactor base a stable mounting sur-
with each module. face to sit on. If standard mounting rails with a depth of 15 mm
are used, the spacer connected to the bottom of the contactor
&a Expansion plug base must be knocked out and plugged into the mating piece
The expansion plug is used for electrical connection of adjacent that is also on the underside. Then the contactor base also has
3-phase busbars. The current carrying capacity of this plug a stable mounting surface. When standard mounting rails with a
equals 63 A. One expansion plug is supplied with each 3-phase depth of 7.5 mm are used, the spacer has no function and can
busbar for system expansion. Additional expansion plugs are be removed.
therefore only required as spare parts. As an alternative to using a contactor base, the 3RA19 11-2E
&b Extra-wide expansion plug electrical link modules can also be used for load feeders for
direct start load feeders of size S00. Motor starter protector and
The extra-wide expansion plug makes the electrical connection contactor assemblies can then be directly snapped into the
between two 3-phase busbars, thus performing the same func- sockets of the 3-phase busbars. For feeders of size S00 and S0,
tion as the 3RV19 17-5BA00 expansion plug; the electrical the corresponding 3RA19 11-1.... or 3RA19 21-1... link modules
characteristics (e.g. a current carrying capacity of 63 A) are should generally be used. For size S0, it is only possible inte-
identical. grate direct start load feeders and they must be integrated in the
system as complete assemblies.
The 3RV19 17-5E expansion plug is 10 mm wider than the
3RV19 17-5BA00 expansion plug, hence in the plugged state + Terminal block
there is a distance of 10 mm between the connected 3-phase
busbars. This distance can be used to lay the auxiliary current The 3RV19 17-5D terminal block enables the integration of not
and control current wiring ("wiring duct"). As the result, the motor only SIRIUS motor starter protectors but also single-phase,
starter protector and contactor can be wired from underneath, 2-phase and 3-phase components in addition. Using the termi-
which means that the complete cable duct above the system nal block the 3 phases can be fed out of the system; single-
6
can be omitted. phase loads can also be integrated in the system as the result.
The terminal block is plugged into the slot of the expansion plug
( End cover and thus enables outfeeding from the middle or end of the infeed
system. The terminal block can be rotated through 180 ° and be
The end cover is used to cover the 3-phase busbar at the open locked to the support modules of the infeed system. The
end of the system. This cover is therefore only required once for 3RV19 17-7B 45 mm standard mounting rail for screwing onto
each system. An end cover is supplied with each 3-phase the support plate is available in addition in order to be able to
busbar system with infeed. Further end covers are therefore only plug the single-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase components onto
required as spare parts. the infeed system.
) Plug-in connector
The plug-in connector is used for the electrical connection be-
tween the 3-phase busbar and the motor starter protector. There
are three different versions:
• One version for 3RV motor starter protectors size S00 with
screw terminals
screw terminals
spring-loaded terminals
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/69

Infeed System
3RV19 infeed system
■ Design
Installation guidelines Installation guidelines for 3RV19 17-5D terminal block
Distance in Y direction from live, earthed or insulated parts The short-circuit device which is connected upstream from the
according to IEC 60947-4: 10 mm. infeed system must be configured in accordance with the
conductor cross-section on the infeed block.
In addition, the installation guidelines for motor starter protectors
or fuseless load feeders including the clearances must be
Conductor cross-section Upstream short-circuit device
complied with. on 3RV19 17-1A/-1E Recommendation Id max I2t
infeed block (for 400 V)
mm2 kA kA2s
4 3RV10 21-4DA10 < 9.5 85
Y
6 3RV10 31-4EA10 < 12.5 140

10 3RV10 31-4HA10 < 15 180
16/25 3RV10 42-4JA10 19 440
I I I I
The short-circuit device which is connected downstream from
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 2 5 a
the terminal block must be configured in accordance with the

conductor cross-section on the terminal block as per the
following table.
Conductor cross-section Downstream short-circuit device, e.g. 5SY

on the 3RV19 17-1D Id max
terminal block
mm2 kA
1.5 < 7.5 To prevent short-circuits, the leads
2.5 < 9.5 on the terminal block must be
installed so that they are short-cir-
4 < 9.5 cuit proof according to EN 60439-1
6 < 12.5 Section 7.5.5.1.2.
Type 3RV19 .7
Rated operational voltage Ue
• IEC
- 10% overvoltage V 500
6
- 5% overvoltage V 525
• UL/CSA V 600
Rated current In A 63
• During storage/transport °C -50 ... +80
Permissible rated current of the 3RV10 11 motor starter protectors
(size S00) at control cabinet internal temperature
• +60 °C % 100
Permissible rated current of the 3RV10 21 motor starter protectors
(size S0) up to 16 A at control cabinet internal temperature
• +60 °C % 100
Permissible rated current for 3RV1. 21 motor starter protectors (size S0)
from 16 A at control cabinet internal temperature
• +40 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Touch protection according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Finger-safe
Conductor cross-sections for main circuit infeed
• Solid mm2 4 ... 25
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 4 ... 25
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 6 ... 25
Conductor cross-sections of terminal block
• Solid mm2 1.5 ... 6
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1.5 ... 4
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1.5 ... 6
1) In infeed terminal compartment without a conductor connected: IP00.
6/70 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Direct-On-Line Starters, Reversing Starters, Accessories and Infeed System
Size S00 · For standard rail mounting
3RA11 10-. . A . . 3RA12 10-. . A . .
Direct start Reversing duty
70 10
68
6 14 10 5 27
8
5
8
45
SIEMENS
163
163
1)
159
SIEMENS SIEMENS
NSB01039
SIEMENS
NSB01038
5 9 40
90
5 9 7,5
45 51
Size S00 · For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems

3RA11 10-. . C . . 3RA12 10-. . C . .
3RA11 10-. . D . . 3RA12 10-. . D . .
13 21
SIEMENS
48
SIEMENS
6
203
159
203
159
SIEMENS SIEMENS
SIEMENS
NSB01041a
NSB01040
1)
5 9
5 9 27 82
90
45 98
101
1) Busbar adapters suitable for a busbar thickness of 5 and 10 mm with

chamfered edges.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/71

3RA11 20-. . A . . 3RA12 20-. . A . .
91 114
Æ5
8 14 10 33 14 57
8 6 14
43
Æ5
45
SIEMENS
106
1)
183
178
210
220
125
SIEMENS
2)
NSB01042a
NSB01043b
8 14 7,5
28 39
45 61
86
DC 96 10 5 63
100 85
110
DC 120
1) Mounting with one 35 mm standard mounting rail according to EN 50022 2) Alternative mounting methods
Depth: 7.5 or 15 mm. a)
Two 35 mm standard mounting rails according to EN 50022
Distance: 125 mm
Depth: 7.5 or 15 mm.
b)
One 35 mm standard mounting rail according to EN 50022
Depth: 15 mm.

3RA11 20-. . C . . 3RA12 20-. . C . .
6
3RA11 20-. . D . . 3RA12 20-. . D . .

13
13
48
48
SIEMENS SIEMENS
205
208
185
183
SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

NSB01044a
NSB01045a
1) 1)
28 27 70 8 10 27 70
8 92 14 92
14 117 100 117
45 121 121
DC 127 DC 127

chamfered edges.
6/72 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

168 10 17 7
10 17 7 5 78
40
Æ5
100
125
295
285
295
285
1)
NSB01047a
NSB01046a
10
55 59 120
87
133
DC 148
1) Alternative mounting methods

a)
Distance: 125 mm
b)
Depth: 15 mm.
6
14
53
SIEMENS
276
276
259
259
SIEMENS SIEMENS
1)
NSB01049a
NSB01048a
10 17 18 68 10 10
18 17,5
28 95
55 142 120
DC 157
176

chamfered edges.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/73

Direct start
192
13 23 7 5 108
Æ5
40
100
125
330
323
1)
NSB01050a
12
23 70
23 110
70 158
DC 171
Reversing duty
192
12 23 7 5 108
Æ5
6
40
100
125
330
323
1)
NSB01051a
10 70
150 110
158
DC 171
1) Alternative mounting methods

a)
Distance: 125 mm
b)
Depth: 15 mm.
6/74 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RV19 infeed system
3-phase busbars with infeed
For 2 motor starter protectors size S00 aund S0, with expansion plug
3RV19 17-1. + 3RV19 17-5BA00
108 108
75 a
80
128
128
NSB0_01618
278
15
7,5
75
1)
S00 S0
a 104 125
3-phase busbars for system expansion

For 2 and 3 motor starter protectors size S00 and S0 with extra-wide expansion plug
3RV19 17-4. + 3RV19 17-5E and 3RV19 17-5D terminal block
90 135
75 120 23 a
10
6
80
128
128
NSB0_01619
278
15
7,5
75
1) S00 S0
a 104 125
1) Alternative mounting methods (see 3RV19 Infeed System, Design)

a)
Depth: 7.5 mm
Spacer not used.
b)
Depth: 15 mm
Spacer plugged into mating piece.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/75

■ Schematics
Direct start
Size S00 Size S0, S2 and S3
3RA11 1 3RA11 2,
3RA11 3
NSB0_00384a
NSB0_00385a
A1 L1 L2 L3 N0 A1 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 1 3 5
F F
K K
2 4 6 14 2 4 6
A2 T1 T2 T3 N0 A2 T1 T2 T3
Reversing duty
Size S00 Size S0
3RA12 3RA12
NSB0_00386a
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
NSB0_00387b
6
1 3 5 1 3 5
F F
2 4 6 2 4 6
A1 NC A1 NC
NC A1 NC A1
K1 1 3 5 21 1 3 5 21 1 3 5 122 1 3 5 112
K2 K1 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6 22 22 2 4 6 121 111
T1 T2 T3 NC A2 NC T1 T2 T3 NC A2 NC
6/76 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RA71 Load Feeders with Safety Integrated
General data
The 3RA71 safety load feeders comprise an adapter for stan- Fault monitoring
dard rail mounting with integrated safety electronics (as used for
the 3TK28 solid-state safety combinations), a motor starter pro- During start-up, the device runs through a self-test in which the
tector and two redundant contactors connected in series. The internal electronics is checked for correct functioning. During
combination of safety electronics, motor starter protectors and operation, all internal circuit components are monitored
contactors result in a pre-assembled and pre-wired fuseless cyclically for faults.
load feeder with type of coordination 1 or 2, that is tested and Cascading, expanding
certified as a complete safety load feeder.
The devices for Category 4 support easy connection (cascad-
The 3RA71 .0 safety load feeder is an exception; it does not ing) and expansion of several safety devices to form hard-wired
have a motor starter protector. To build up a complete load safety logic. The devices for Category 4 have one solid-state
feeder, it must be connected in series with a fuse or motor starter safe output (terminal 2) and one cascading input (terminal 1).
protector.
On terminal 1, the devices expect a safe 24 V signal which is
The load feeder has a safe solid-state output, a safe input for safely evaluated. If this signal is missing, the device switches off
cascading and an input for normal switching duty. Three LEDs safely. The switch-on conditions are the same as the conditions
on the front indicate the operating state. for sensor switch-off (EMERGENCY-STOP actuation).
Expansion units as well as actuators or load feeders can be Normal switching duty
connected to safe output 2. Safe output 2 can also be used for
cascading with 3TK2841, 3TK2842, 3TK2845, 3TK2853 and In the devices for Category 4, terminals 3 and 4 can be used for
3RA711 devices. The load feeder and the actuator or load must normal switching duty (On/Off) of the contactors. There are two
have the same ground potential. possibilities for normal switching duty, either using a floating
contact (terminals 3 and 4) or a contact connected to a potential
Power supply for DC operation (24 V DC), e.g. through a PLC (terminal 4 only). Normal switch-
In the version with a 24 V DC control supply voltage, a power ing duty is subordinate to the safety function.
supply according to DIN VDE 0106 (PELV) of safety class III 24 V DC
must be used to supply the electronics.
Accessories
3TK2841
Since the safety load feeder is made up of the 3RV1 motor starter 24 V DC 24 V DC
protectors and the 3RT1 contactors, accessories, e.g. auxiliary M
switches, from the SIRIUS modular system can be used.
Mounting 3TK2841 3TK2841
The 3RA71 safety load feeders can be snapped onto a standard M M

mounting rail to EN 50022 – 35 15.
6
24 V DC
M
3RA7110 3RA7110 3RA7110 3RA7110
NSB01310a
Typical circuit diagram for cascading with 3TK2841 and 3RA71 safety
electronics (Category 4 with expansion units)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/77

General data
Technical specifications of the safety electronics of the 3RA7 load feeders.
The technical specifications of the power section (motor starter protectors, contactors) can be found in the table for "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feeders".
Type AC basic unit DC basic unit DC basic unit Expansion Expansion unit,
Category 3 Category 3 Category 4 time-delayed
Standards EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Test certificate TÜV, UL, CSA
Category according to EN 954-1 3 3 4 As basic unit As basic unit
Safety Integrated Level (SIL) 2 2 3 As basic unit As basic unit
According to IEC 61508
Rated output power
• AC/DC operation at 1.0 x Us W 21)
Operating range
• AC operation 0.85 – 1.1 x Us
• DC operation 0.9 – 1.1 x Us
Response time
• Monitored start ms 125 typical2) 400 typical2)
• Autostart ms 250 typical2) 400 typical2)
Release time
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 typical3) 25 typical After time has
elapsed
• Power failure ms 100 100 100
Recovery time
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 typical 400 typical
• Power failure ms 20 typical
s 4
Mains buffering time ms 5 (see technical specifications for contactors used)
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms > 20 typical > 25 typical
• ON button ms > 20 typical > 100 typical
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 x 0.25 ... 2.5
• Solid mm² 1 x 0.2 ... 2.5
Tightening torque, Nm 0.5 ... 0.6
M3 connecting screw
Ambient temperature
6

Touch protection Finger-safe
1) Note the power losses of the respective unit
(see Technical Specifications of the motor starter protectors /contactors).
2) Note the pick-up time for the respective contactor
(see Technical Specifications of the contactors).
3) Note the drop-out time for the respective contactor
(see Technical Specifications of the contactors).
6/78 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Schematics
Connection examples
3RA71 01 and 3RA71 02 fuseless load feeders
Basic unit, Category 31)
E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P L /L + L /L +
S in g le - c h a n n e l,
N S B 0 1 1 9 0 c
O N fo r E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P A 1 A 1 Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 2 0 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 L 1 L 2 L 3
1 3 5
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 2 0 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4
E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P F 1 F
L /L +
2 - c h a n n e l,
O N fo r E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P
I> > I> > I> >
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 2 0 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4
L im it s w itc h S a fe ty -
S in g le - c h a n n e l, r e la te d M
a u to s ta rt s ig n a l p r o c e s s in g
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 2 0 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 fo r p r o te c tiv e d o o r
L im it s w itc h
2 - c h a n n e l,
a u to s ta rt
N S B 0 1 3 0 7 a
2 4 6
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 2 0 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 fo r p r o te c tiv e d o o r
A 2 A 2 Y 3 3 T 1 T 2 T 3 Y 3 4
N /M
3RA71 10 fused load feeders
Basic unit, Category 42)
E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P O N Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 3 4 1 Y 3 2 L 1 L 2 L 3
L + L + L +
fo r E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 1 m o n ito r e d s ta r t C o n tr o lle r 2
E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P O N
L + C o n tr o lle r 1
2 - c h a n n e l,
fo r E M E R G E N C Y -S T O P S e r ia l
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 1 m o n ito r e d s ta r t C o m m u n i-
L im it s w itc h F a il R U N c a tio n
L + L + L + L +
a u to s ta rt A 1
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 1 fo r p r o te c tiv e d o o r V o lta g e
m o n ito r in g
L im it s w itc h L + L +
2 - c h a n n e l,
N S B 0 1 1 9 1 c
N S B 0 1 3 0 8 a
a u to s ta rt
6
Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 Y 3 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 1 fo r p r o te c tiv e d o o r
L + A 1 A 2 A 1 A 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 T 1 T 2 T 3
M
3RA71 20, 3RA71 30 and 3RA71 40 fused load feeders
Expansion unit2)
C a s c a d in g 3 4 1 R u n tim e L 1 L 2 L 3
L + L + s e ttin g
1 2
3 T K 2 8 2 3 T K 2 8 4 1
N S B 0 1 3 0 5 a
1 3 3 R A 7
A 1
C o n tr o lle r 2
1 4
1 4 C o n tr o lle r 1
3 R A 7 3 R A 7 3 R A 7
1 1 1
S e r ia l
C o m m u n i-
F a il R U N c a tio n
F -S P S
A 1
V o lta g e
3 R A 7 m o n ito r in g
1
N S B 0 1 3 0 9
O p e r a tio n a l s w itc h in g
O n /O ff L + L +
O n /O ff
N S B 0 1 3 0 6 a
O N O N L + A 1 A 2 A 1 A 2 2 Y 3 3 Y 3 4 T 1 T 2 T 3
O F F O F F M
3 4 3 4 3 4
1) Also available as safety-oriented load feeder without motor starter

protector.
2) Also available as fuseless load feeder with motor starter protector.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/79

3RA71 .1 fuseless load feeders, size S00 3RA71 .2 fuseless load feeders, size S0
67 132
25 73
76 6 26
76 6
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
234
240
211
125
217
125
Æ4
NSB01188
9 5 5 40
76 92 8 14 5 40
90 108 79
28
90 101
126
NSB01189
DC 136
170
DC 180
3RA71 .0 fused load feeders, size S0

38
26
6
6
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
140
117
5 40
8 79
NSB01187a
14 101
28 126
90 DC 136
170
DC 180
6/80 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface Motor Starters and Soft Starters
IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
AS-Interface compact starters (400 V AC)
■ Overview
EDS/ERS compact starters (solid-state)
The solid-state compact starters EDS (direct-on-line starter) and
ERS (reversing starter) consist of a solid-state overload relay
and a solid-state motor starter protector unit.
The advantages of these solid-state compact starters are the
broad limits within which the overload protection can be
adjusted (the power range up to 2.2 kW at 400/500 V AC is
covered with just 2 variants), the fact that the solid-state contact
elements in the power section are non-wearing, current detec-
tion (used for monitoring the energy connector), emergency
operation in the event of an overload as well as remote resetting
through the AS-Interface after overload tripping.
The ERS compact starter is designed for direct start in reversing
duty. The solid-state overload protection and the shutdown
response in the event of overload can be adjusted directly at the
device.
Version with brake contact
The AS-Interface compact starter is a load feeder with degree of All compact starters are available optionally with a separately
protection IP65, which is fully prewired inside, for switching and activated brake contact for electrically operated motor brakes.
protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400/500 V AC For externally fed motor brakes, 24 V DC is supplied jointly with
(electromechanical compact starter) or up to 2.2 kW (solid-state the load voltage through the power connector on -X1. It is looped
compact starter) – mostly standard induction motors in direct through via -X3 for supplying the next compact starter on -X1.
start and reversing duty. It consists either of an electromechani- The 24 V DC supply for the brakes is only linked in those devices
cal controlgear combination or a solid-state overload relay and equipped with a brake contact. At the project planning stage, it
motor starter protector unit. The overload or short-circuit protec- is important to ensure that these starters are located alongside
tion is located below a sealable, transparent cover and is there- each other.
fore available for diagnostics. Two LEDs are provided to the left
of the cover for diagnostic purposes for the AS-Interface and the All compact starters with a brake contact for 500 V DC can be
auxiliary power. equipped with an 400 V AC brake contact.
It is not possible for live parts to be touched even when the cover Hand-held device
is open. The control elements are activated through the The hand-held device enables the compact starter to be oper-
integrated outputs. The status of the device is scanned through ated locally and autonomously, providing that the auxiliary volt-
the inputs, e.g. checkbacks from the auxiliary contacts of the age supply is connected. Thus, assuming that the automation
motor starter protector and contactor(s). A further input is used
6
level is functioning correctly, local switching operations can be
to detect the operating state of the optional hand-held device. carried out in addition to normal manual operations in the event
The three power connectors are used to feed and loop through of a programmable controller / bus system failure (emergency
to the load supply voltage (power bus) and to connect to the mode) or during test runs before commissioning, e.g. for testing
load itself. Prefabricated power supply lines can be used to the direction of rotation of the motor. The hand-held device can
connect compact starters which are directly adjacent to each be connected to the compact starter by means of a connecting
other. Prefabricated power supply lines can be used to connect cable through a socket underneath the transparent cover.
compact starters which are directly adjacent to each other. The
maximum number of starters that can be supplied with one Spare inputs
power supply cable is limited by the maximum permissible total
current (up to max. 4 mm2 corresponds to ~ 35 A). The compact starters are also equipped with two spare inputs.
The M12 socket is a "Y" connector. The signal inputs are applied
DS/RS compact starters (electromechanical) to PIN 2 and 4. In this manner, it is possible, for example, to con-
The electromechanical compact starters consist of a conven- nect an optical proximity switch that supplies a signal and the
tional controlgear combination with a SIRIUS motor starter pro- "fouling" alarm.
tector for protection against short-circuits and overloading and A "T" adapter can be used to split the signal inputs onto two M12
SIRIUS contactor(s) for normal switching. The advantages of the sockets. Compact starters modified in this way offer additional
electromechanical starters are the reliable isolation during dis- advantages. At no extra cost, it is possible to save AS-i ad-
connection and tripping, the integrated fuseless protection dresses, reduce the space requirement and to build up logical
against short-circuits and the favorable price. What is more, groupings.
direct currents can also be switched with the electromechanical
starters.
Configuring note: In the case of temperature-critical applica-
tions, we recommend operation in the lower setting range of the
motor starter protector.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/81

AS-Interface compact starters (400 V AC)
DS/RS EDS/ERS
Degree of protection IP65 (with closed connection elements and cover)
Material Thermoplastic (glass-fiber reinforced)
Color Anthracite RAL 7016
Cover Latching, sealable
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 120 265 134
Temperature range
• Operating temperature °C -25 ... +55; (note derating: see manual)
• Storage temperature °C -40 ... +70
Permissible mounting position Important:
NSA0_00104
22.5° 22.5°
90° 90° in accord. with DIN 43 602
Start-up command "I"
at the right or top
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse g/ms 2/unlimited,
g/ms 10/5 or 5/10
Sine pulse g/ms 2/unlimited,
g/ms 8/10 or 5/15
External power supply
For output supply (contactor control) V DC 24 (PELV – must be grounded)
rated operational voltage Ue
For electronics and inputs (feedback of controlgear states) V DC 26.5 ... 31.6 (according to AS-Interface Specification)
using AS-Interface data line
I/O configuration Hex 7
ID code Hex D E
AS-Interface current input mA Max. 100
Power consumption Uaux mA Approx. 100
Watchdog function Built-in
(disconnects outputs in the event of AS-Interface fault)
Diagnostics
Using AS-Interface Feedback from motor starter protectors and contactor(s)
through positively driven auxiliary contacts and separate inputs
Through LED on the enclosure Auxiliary voltage applied
AS-Interface communication OK
6
AS-Interface communication faulty

Station address = 0 (module not addressed)
Through LED on the hand-held device On or Clockwise or Counterclockwise
Main circuit
Rated operational voltage V AC 500 according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 1014, 600 according to CSA and UL
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary circuits V Up to 400 --
(according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101)
Rated output power kW 5.5 2.2
Permissible operating modes Continuous duty, temporary duty, periodic duty,
periodic intermittent duty (50 % relative ON-time at 80 1/h at 5.5 A)
Permissible switching frequency with a starting time tA = 0.1 s 1/h 80 600
and a relative ON-time tEP = 50 %
Trip class Class 10
Conductor cross-sections of power connector for mm2 4, AWG (15 ... 11)
infeed/feeder/9-pole loop
Max. permissible current through power connector
(dependent on cable cross-section)
• Tu = 60 °C A 30 (4 mm2), AWG (11);
A 20 (2.5 mm2), AWG (15);
A 12 (1.5 mm2), AWG (13)
• Tu = 40 °C A 35 (4 mm2), AWG (11);
A 25 (2.5 mm2), AWG (15);
A 15 (1.5 mm2), AWG (13)
Short-circuit strength of the starter combination kA 65 (according to type of coordination "1") 100
Electrical endurance of the motor starter protector element Operat- See endurance characteristic curves of 10 million
under load Ia (AC-3) ing the 3RT10 contactors
cycles
6/82 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

AS-Interface motor starters (24 V DC)
■ Overview
Quick-stop function
All AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters feature a quick-stop
function which can be switched on and off as required using a
switch integrated into the module. The quick-stop function
allows a connected motor to be shut down immediately using an
applied sensor signal (High). The switch for the quick-stop
function is located alongside the input sockets and is protected
by an M12 sealing cap.
Brake
The double direct-on-line starter and the single reversing starter
versions feature an integrated permanently set brake function,
i.e. as soon as the output signal is set to "0", the motor is braked.
Start-up using integrated buttons
Buttons integrated into the module (below the output sockets)
can be used to set the motor used. The buttons are protected by
an M12 sealing cap.
Connection of a drive roller with integrated DC motor to an AS-Interface Note concerning double and reversing starters: If an input with
24 V DC motor starter the quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the correspond-
ing output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 output 1) is switched off
With the K60 AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters for the low-end within the device (the motor is braked) The manual key function
performance range up to 70 W, it is now possible to connect (Key 1/2) for local operation is only permitted to be used during
24 V DC motors and the associated sensors directly to the "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC.
AS-Interface quickly and easily.
Note concerning single direct-on-line starters: If an input with the
Three different versions are available: quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the corresponding
• Single direct-on-line starters (without brake and reversible output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 output 1) is switched off within
quick-stop function) the device (the motor runs down without being braked) The
• Double direct-on-line starters (with brake and reversible manual key function (Key 1) for local operation is only permitted
quick-stop function) to be used during "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC.
• Reversing starters (with brake and reversible quick-stop
function)
DC motors are connected to the module using M12 plug-in
connectors. The sensors and the module electronics can be
6
supplied from the yellow AS-Interface cable. An auxiliary voltage
(24 V DC) is only required for supplying the outputs, which can
be provided via the black AS-Interface cable.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/83

AS-Interface motor starters (24 V DC)
Applications
S in g le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith o u t b r a k e D o u b le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith b r a k e S in g le r e v e r s in g s ta r te r w ith b r a k e
( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n ) ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n ) ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n )
1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r 1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r 1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r

s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1
S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 2
o ff o ff o ff
4 2 o n Q u ic k - s t o p f o r 4 2 o n Q u ic k - s t o p f o r 4 2 o n
In p u t 1 S e n s o r 3 In p u t 1 S e n s o r 3 Q u ic k - s to p fo r S e n s o r 3
o u tp u t o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff In p u t 1
4 o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
o n /o ff S e n s o r 4 4 o ff 4 o ff
In p u t 2 In p u t 2 o n Q u ic k - s t o p f o r S e n s o r 4 In p u t 2 o n S e n s o r 4
Q u ic k - s to p fo r
2 2 o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff 2 o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
B ra k e S h o r t - c ir c u it b r a k e
O u tp u t ( w ith c o a s tin g ) P lu g b r a k e
O u tp u t 1 O u tp u t 2 O u tp u t M o to r
M o to r M o to r 2 C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n
B u tto n 1 C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e
B u tto n B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 (m a n u a l B u tto n 2 r o ta t io n
(m a n u a l (m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a t io n fo r (m a n u a l o p e r a t io n
M o to r 1 fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )
o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a tio n ) c lo c k w is e
A d d re s s A d d re s s r o ta tio n ) A d d re s s
2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o 2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o 2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o

s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n
P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1
P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l
o ff o ff o ff
4 2 o n 4 2 o n 4 2 o n
In p u t 1 Q u ic k - s t o p f o r Q u ic k - s t o p f o r S e n s o r 2 In p u t 1 Q u ic k - s to p fo r S e n s o r 2
S e n s o r 2 In p u t 1
o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
4 o u tp u t 4 o ff 4 o ff
In p u t 2 o n /o ff o n In p u t 2 o n
In p u t 2 Q u ic k - s t o p f o r Q u ic k - s to p fo r
2 2 2
P lu g b r a k e o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
B ra k e
O u tp u t P lu g b r a k e
( w ith c o a s tin g ) O u tp u t 1 O u tp u t 2 O u tp u t M o to r
M o to r M o to r 2 C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n
B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e
B u tto n
(m a n u a l
B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 (m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a t io n r o ta t io n
(m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n ) M o to r 1 o p e r a t io n fo r fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )
o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a tio n ) c lo c k w is e
A d d re s s A d d re s s A d d re s s
r o ta tio n ) N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 4 8 a
6
6/84 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
AS-Interface load feeder modules
■ Overview Direct-on-line starters as well as reversing starters are available

with SIRIUS switching devices size S00 up to 10 A and size S0 –
on account of the power connector – up to 16 A. The complete
feeders are available with AS-Interface load feeder modules with
solid-state outputs for 24 V DC auxiliary voltage.
Load feeders with this type of configuration are used to control
standard induction motors for example. The load feeders can be
installed in central control cabinets as well as in local control
boxes. They are particularly suitable for highly automated
machines and plants that place high demands on availability.
■ Design
The AS-Interface load feeder module is snapped onto the
matching support. As an option, a 5-pole power plug can be
installed between the load feeder module and the support.
When this power plug is used, all connections of the load feeder
can be plugged in. Should it become necessary to replace the
unit, this can be done in a minimum of time. When this power
plug is used, the current is limited to 16 A.
The AS-Interface load feeder module adds an input/output mod- The support is available in different versions and must be se-
ule to the conventional busbar and standard mounting rail lected to fit the width of the controlgear combination (45 mm or
adapters. With this module the control current circuit of a load 54 mm) and the busbar system used (busbar center-to-center
feeder is available completely factory-wired. The series has distance 40 mm or 60 mm). Depending on the variant, the
been optimized for operation in conjunction with the SIRIUS load N conductor and/or the PE conductor or neither are brought out
feeders size S00 and S0. Connection to the higher level automa- as well. It is thus possible for pre-assembled connecting cables
tion system is made through the AS-Interface interface of the of the loads to be routed right up to the AS-Interface load feeder
load feeder module. A non-shielded flexible lead can be used as module and for them to be fitted there without any additional
data line and for the auxiliary current supply. Connection to the wiring work. Hence it is extremely easy to replace the loads,
AS-Interface load feeder module is made using two connectors e.g. a standard induction motor.
with the insulation displacement method. A unique address must be assigned to each AS-Interface station
Four different AS-Interface load feeder modules are available: at the latest for start-up. For the AS-Interface load feeder module
Differences exist in the number of inputs and outputs and in the this can be done either by using the master and successively
type of outputs. The devices with solid-stated outputs are plugging on the connectors which are connected to the data line
designed for 24 V DC, those with relay outputs are suitable for (only one station in the network is allowed to log on with the de-
voltages of max. 230 AC. Direct-on-line and reversing starters fault address 0) or by the individual addressing method using an
as well as double direct-on-line starters and starter combina- addressing unit and an addressing cable. This type of address-
6
tions can be wired therefore for pole reversal. The inputs can be ing is also possible with the load feeder module fully wired, as
used to separately scan the checkbacks from motor starter the module is separated from the AS-Interface network when the
protectors and contactors. The outputs can be used for direct addressing plug is connected.
control of the contactor coils. The addressing socket is positioned underneath the equipment
As the outputs already have overvoltage protection integrated, label on the front of the load feeder module. The indicator lamps
no additional measures for the contactors are required. (LEDs) for the diagnostics of the AS-Interface load feeder mod-
ule are fitted in the same place. The following states are
The outputs are supplied with separate auxiliary voltage – a indicated:
selectively configured EMERGENCY-STOP concept is possible
• 24 V DC auxiliary voltage applied or output/outputs activated
therefore. The inputs are supplied from the AS-Interface data
(variant 230 V AC)
line. Inputs and outputs have to be wired using integrated,
spring-loaded terminals, each connected to a common • AS-Interface communication OK
potential. • AS-Interface communication faulty
3RA5 fuseless load feeder with connection to AS-Interface Station address equals 0 (module not addressed)
The 3RA5 fuseless load feeder, comprised of the AS-Interface
load module, motor starter protector, contactor and all
necessary connectors (AS-Interface, auxiliary power and 5-pole
power connector), is delivered completely assembled, factory-
wired and tested. The user can thus save valuable time when
mounting, wiring and servicing.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/85

Combination starters for busbar systems,
direct-on-line
The devices are completely prewired and can be adapted to
busbars. The devices are offered for busbar systems with a
busbar centerline spacing of 40 mm and 60 mm.
The 24 V DC auxiliary power and the AS-Interface data line are
fed in through two communication connectors. Standard
stranded conductors from 0.5 mm to 0.75 mm2 can be con-
nected to these connectors using insulation displacement. The
communication connectors (2 per unit) are included as stan-
dard.
The outgoing side is wired to the load through the power supply
connector. Thus, the main conductors L1, L2 and L3 and the N
or PE/ground conductor are connected to the load in plug-in
fashion. The power supply connector is included in the scope of
delivery.
Indicator lamps
Two LEDs are integrated in the load feeder module. They permit
simple diagnostics of the auxiliary power (PWR) and the commu-
The 3RA5 fuseless load feeders with AS-Interface offer the nication unit (AS-Interface).
possibility of linking motor starters swiftly and at low cost to Accessories
higher-level automation systems. The integrated 3RV1 motor
starter protector for motor protection protects the motor against The standard accessories pertaining to the single units consist-
overloads and provides short-circuit protection for the cables. ing of the 3RV1 motor starter protector, the 3RT1 contactors and
The 3RT1 contactor is used for operational switching. The the 3RK14 load feeder modules can be used.
switching state is triggered and signaled using the 3RK14 load
feeder module on the AS-Interface. ■ More information
• For direct start, a load can be switched on and off with the load
feeder. Types of coordination
• The feeder for reversing duty is designed for two directions of The response of the device to short-circuits is described by the
rotation of induction motors. On these devices, there is no type of coordination according to EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660
electrical interlock between the two contactors. Exception: Part 102), IEC 60947-4-1.
Size S00 features a mechanical interlock. The 3RA5 fuseless load feeders with AS-Interface achieve the
type 1 coordination at Iq = 50 kA. This ensures that short-circuits
of 50 kA will be deactivated without posing a hazard to persons
and systems. The contactor may be damaged at such high
6
short-circuit currents.
6/86 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

45 90
57
13
0 I 0 I
253
310
1)
NSB00406a
1) Busbar adapters
suitable for a busbar thickness
32
of 5 and 10 mm
with chamfered edges.
19 71 34
113
6
45 90
35
24
28
332
284
1)
NSB00407
1) Busbar adapters
suitable for a busbar thickness
32
of 5 and 10 mm
with chamfered edges.
19 71 34
113
162
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/87

ET 200S Motor Starters
■ Overview
• Completely factory-wired motor starters for switching and
protecting any three-phase loads
• Can be used as a direct-on-line, reversing or soft starter
• Standard motor starter with motor starter protector and
contactor assembly up to 5.5 kW
• High-Feature motor starter with a combination comprising a
starter circuit-breaker, solid-state overload protection and
contactor or soft starter up to 7.5 kW
• With self-assembling 40/50 A power bus, i.e. the load voltage
is only supplied once for a group of motor starters
• Hot swapping is permissible
• Inputs and outputs for activating and signaling the statistics
have been integrated
• Diagnostics capability for active monitoring of the switching
and protection functions
• Can be combined with expansion modules: Brake control
module for controlling electromechanical brakes in induction
Motor starters, Standard, DS1-x direct-on-line starter motors and with two optional inputs for special functions (for
quick stop with the standard motor starter and for parameter-
izable special functions with the High-Feature motor starter)
• For combining with safety systems (see ET 200S Safety motor
starters Solutions local/PROFIsafe, page 6/99 onwards) for
use in safety-related subsystems (EN 954-1).
6
Motor starters, High-Feature, DS1e-x direct-on-line starter
6/88 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

IM 151 interface module xB3 24 V DC/4 A

brake control module local control
PM-E 24 V DC SIGUARD
power module DM-V15 PM-DF1
spacer module power module
2DO 24 V DC/0.6 A
digital output module SIGUARD
DS1-x PM-X
PM-D direct starter connection module
power module
NSA0_00310
TM-P15-S22-01
terminal module
Color coding labels

for TM-E, -D, -P
TM-E15-S23-01
terminal module
TM P15-S27-01
terminal module
TM-X15 S27-01
Control kit terminal module for
SIGUARD
connection module
TM-DS45-S32
terminal module for
direct starters with
supply connection
Auxiliary switch of the
failsafe equipment for
PE/ N M 45-PEN-F direct starter F-Kit 1
terminal block
PE/N M45-PEN-S
terminal block TM-PF30 S47-B1
PE/ N M 15-PEN Control unit terminal module for
TM-xB215-S24-01 terminal block SIGUARD power module
6
terminal block for expansion TM-DS45-S31
module terminal block for direct starters
L1/ L2/ L3 M 15-L12 3 without supply connection
terminal block
Interplay of ET 200S motor starter components
■ Design
Power is supplied through the terminal modules for motor start-
ers. While the auxiliary voltages must be fed in once through the
PM-D or PM-DFx power module, which is to be plugged in on the
left side of the first motor starter, the load voltage must be fed in
at the first TM-xxxxS32 terminal module (on the left) of a motor
starter. The other TM-xxxxS31 terminal modules are automati-
cally supplied as well through the integrated power bus when
they are mounted side by side. If the power bus is utilized to its
full capacity of 40 A (standard motor starters) or 50 A (High-
Feature motor starters), a new supply is fed in through an
additional TM-xxxxS32 terminal module. This also applies when
transferring from a standard motor starter to a High-Feature
motor starter and vice versa. In this case, however, no PM-D
power module must be placed in between.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/89

1L1 400 V AC
Power 1L+ 24 V DC 1L2
supply 1M 1L3
electronics
F01F03
16 A
1L+
2L+
1L1
3L2
5L3
1M
2M
L+ 1
8
M 2
9
PROFIBUS DP
3
4 Fault Fault
5
6
8 I 108.2 I 108.0 I 108.6 I 108.4
O 110.0 O 110.2 O 110.4 O 110.6
I 108.1 I 108.5
A1+
A2
IM 151 PM-D DS1-x DS1-x

2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
4
5
10
11
Power 2L+ 24 V DC
supply 2M
contactor PE/N PE/N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE NSA0_00133c
N
N
M M
M101 M102
3~ 3~
Sample illustration of an ET 200S – station with PM-D power module and two standard motor starters
Accessories for motor starters, Standard 2DI COM control module
Control unit The 2DI COM control module has in addition a PC interface for
connecting the Switch ES Motor Starter parameterization and
With the control unit the contactor coils of the standard motor diagnostics software (Version 2.0 and higher). The module
starter can be directly controlled using 24 V DC. The motor works solely on High-Feature motor starters with Switch ES inter-
starter can thus be started as normal using a local control point face (3RK1301-.....-.AA3). The Logo!-PC cable is used as
6
without PLC or bus. connecting lead between the 2 DI COM control module and the
Note: The control unit cannot be used in combination with the High-Feature motor starter.
safety system or a brake control module.
Control kit DM-V15
The control kit for the standard motor starter provides the possi- • Significant only in conjunction with a standard motor starter
bility of testing the motor during start-up or service by actuating • Passive module without bus connection and terminals
the motor starter protector. Using the control kit with the motor • Does not need a separate terminal module
starter protector tripped, the contactor is mechanically locked in • Follows a TM-DS45 or TM-RS90 or TM-xB if required
ON position. • Does not need to be taken into account when configuring the
GSD file
Accessories for motor starters, High-Feature
2DI control module ■ Function
The 2DI control module is plugged onto the interface on the front All ET 200S motor starters are set up without fuses. Contactors
of the motor starter. The module provides two inputs which can and soft starters are activated through the integrated outputs. If
receive signals from the process and be assigned directly to the a brake control module is arranged next to a motor starter, its
starter. solid-state brake switch is operated by an output of the motor
starter. This module must always be arranged next to the motor
The functionality can be selected from a list of various control starter on the right-hand side. The inputs of the motor starters
functions as part of the PROFIBUS parameterization. Local evaluate the signal states of the protective devices (short-circuit
control point, emergency start and quick stop, for example, are or overload), the switching states of contactor(s) or soft starters,
available as functions. The signal levels can also be parameter- and system faults.
ized (NO/NC). For more extensive control functions the two in-
puts of a xB3 or x4 brake control module, which is plugged in
alongside on the right, can be integrated in addition. The signal
states of all inputs are transmitted in parallel with the internal use
to the higher level control system.
When a motor starter is replaced, the parameterization is auto-
matically transmitted by download to the new starter. The inputs
on the motor starter ensure autonomous operation, e.g. in the
event of PLC failure, on the one hand and short response times
through direct processing in the starter on the other hand. An-
other advantage results from the direct assignment of functions
to modular machine concepts.
6/90 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Motor starters Motor starters Motor starters
Standard High-Feature High-Feature
DS1-x, RS1-x DS1e-x, RS1e-x DSS1e-x
Motor starters for connection to ET 200S Max. 20 (including power modules)
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D)
• Combination starters, direct-on-line mm 45 x (265 + 45) x (120 +27); 65 x (290 + 45) x (150 +23);
(45: PE/N module; 27: (45: PE/N module; 23: Control module)
Auxiliary switch contactor
from F-Kit)
• Reversing starters mm 90 x (265 + 45) x (120 +27); 130 x (290 + 45) x (150 +23);
(45: PE/N module; 27: (45: PE/N module; 23: Control module)
Auxiliary switch contactor
from F-Kit)
• During operation °C 0 ... +60 0 ... +60
From +40 with derating With horizontal mounting up to +40
• During storage °C -40 ... +70 -40 ... +70
• Permissible mounting position °C Vertical, horizontal Vertical, horizontal
With derating
Vibration resistance according to IEC 60068, g 2
Part 2-6
Shock resistance according to IEC 60068, Part 2-27 g/ ms Square 5/11
Current consumption
• From auxiliary circuit L+/M (U1) mA Approx. 20 Approx. 40 Approx. 40
• From auxiliary circuit A1/A2 (U2) mA Approx. 100 Approx. 1700 (80 ms long) Approx. 30
Approx. 350 (after 80 ms)
Rated operat. current for TM-D terminal modules Ie A 40 50 50
• Approval to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V Yes, up to 500 Yes, up to 500 Yes, up to 480
• CSA approval and UL V Yes, up to 600 Yes, up to 600 Yes, up to 480
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• Solid with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6), according to IEC 60947: max. 1 x 10
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded mm2 2 x (14 ... 19) AWG
Touch protection Finger-safe (this also applies to terminal modules on a dismounted motor starter)
6
Degree of pollution
• At 400 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61 131)
• At 500 V 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61 131)
Rated operational current Ie for motor starters
• AC-1/2/3 at 60 °C
- at 400 V A 12 16 3 / 8 / 16
- at 500 V A 9 11 --
• AC-4 at 60 °C
- at 400 V A 4.1 9 --
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity kA 50 at 400 V
Power of induction motors at 500 V kW 5.5 7.5
Utilization categories AC-1, AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
Safe isolation between main and V 400, according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
auxiliary conducting circuits
Positively driven operation of contactor relay (NC) Yes Yes --
Trip class Class 10 Class 10/20, 0.3 ... 3 A:
can be parameterized Class 10/10A,
can be parameterized
2.4 ... 8 A:
Class 10A
2.4 ... 16 A:
Class 10A
Stall protection No Yes, 8 x Ie / 1 s
Overload warning No, only tripping Yes
Emergency start function No Yes
Type of coordination Up to 1.6 A: 2 Up to 16 A: 2 Up to 16 A: 1
Up to 12 A: 1
Mechanical endurance
• Motor starter protector Operat- 100000
ing cycles
• Contactor Operat- 30 million 10 million --
ing cycles
• Contactor with safety functionality (F-Kit) Operat- 10 million -- --
ing cycles
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/91

Motor starters Motor starters Motor starters

Standard High-Feature High-Feature
DS1-x, RS1-x DS1e-x, RS1e-x DSS1e-x
• Motor starter protector h 100000
• Contactor See manual See manual --
Permissible switching frequency with a starting time < 80 See manual
tA = 0.1 s and a relative ON-time tEP = 50%
• Induction protection 1/h Already installed
Operating times
• Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Ue
- Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 25 ... 100 --
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 20 ... 50 --
• Operating times at 1.0 x Ue
- Closing delay ms 30 ... 50 typ. 25 --
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 9 typ. 20 --
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 --
Number of outputs 4 16 16
Number of inputs 4 16 16
Address space required per module
• With summary Bit 4 -- --
• Without summary byte 1 2 2
Diagnostics functions
• Group fault "SF" Red LED
• Switching state "C-STAT" Red/green/yellow LED
• Device state "DEVICE" -- Red/green/yellow LED
Configurable through PROFIBUS DP Yes
Auxiliary switch for enabling circuit of the No, F-Kit required Yes No
ET 200S – safety system already integrated (max. Category 1 attainable)
(up to max. category 4 EN 954-1)
Setting options for soft starters
(locally on the device)
• Starting time s -- -- 0 ... 20
• Starting voltage % -- -- 30 ... 100 of Ue
• Ramp-down time s -- -- 0 ... 20
Input/output bit
6
• DO 0 Motor on (clockwise)
• DO 1 Motor on (counterclockwise)
• DO 2 Control of brake (1 = tripped, motor without being braked)
• DO 3 Reserved Remote reset (e.g. in case of overload)
• DO 4 Reserved Emergency start
• DO 5-8 Reserved
• DI 0 Ready Ready
• DI 1 Motor on Motor on (checkback current is flowing)
(checkback from contactor)
• DI 2 Motor starter protection Actuator shutdown (short-circuit, overload) / Device fault
tripped
• DI 3 Reserved Overload group warning
• DI 4 Reserved Input 1 (from brake control module)
• DI 5 Reserved Input 2 (from brake control module)
• DI 6 Reserved Input 3 (from brake control module 2DI)
• DI 7 Reserved Input 4 (from brake control module 2DI)
• DI 8 ... DI 13 n/a Motor current Iactual
• DI 14 n/a Reserved
• DI 15 n/a -- Ramp mode
Fault type (PROFIBUS diagnostics)
• 00001: Short-circuit -- Starter motor starter protection has tripped
• 00100: Overload -- Thermal motor model overload
• 00111: Upper limit overshot -- I e limit value overshoot
• 01000: Lower limit value undershot -- I e limit value undershoot
• 01001: Fault Internal fault / Device fault / Fault during self-test
• 10000: Parameterizing fault -- Wrong parameter value
• 11000: Actuator shutdown All designated faults / Unbalance / Motor blocking (possibly with an additional fault entry
describing the fault in more detail)
• 11010: External fault -- Input shutdown / Input shutdown limit / Process image fault
6/92 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Accessories
Brake control Brake control Brake control Brake control
module module module module
XB1 XB3 XB2 XB4
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 15 x 196.5 x 125.5 including terminal module on 7.5 mm standard sectional rail
Number of assigned outputs for the (left-hand) 1
motor starter
Rated operational voltage V DC 24 DC 500 (min. 100)
Power supply Externally through terminal module From brake rectifier through terminal module
Rated operational current A 4 0.7
Reverse polarity protection No, in the event of polarity reversal the brake is released and the overload/short-circuit protection
is not effective
Overload/short-circuit protection Yes, solid-state
Conductor cross-section of the terminal module for mm2 1 x 2.5 without end sleeve
the brake control module 1 x 1.5 with end sleeve
Number of outputs 0 1 (used internally) 0 1 (used internally)
Number of inputs 0 2 0 2
Address space required per module
• With summary 0 2 bits 0 2 bits
• Without summary 0 1 byte 0 1 byte
• Group fault "SF" Red LED
• Switching state for brake "STAT" Yellow LED
• Inputs 1 and 5 -- Green LED -- Green LED
Parameters (default values underlined)
• Brake overload diagnostics -- Disable/Enable -- Disable/Enable
• Input delay ms -- 0 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 -- 0 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15
Module width mm 15
Space for
min.35
heat dissipation
D S , D S -x , D S 1 -x R S , R S -x , R S 1 -x
6
R S ,
D S , D S -x , D S 1 -x R S -x ,
R S 1 -x
66
6 6
100
1 0 0
264
2 6 4
306
3 0 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 3 8 a
T M -D S 4 5 9 0 T M -R S 9 0
NSA0_00137a
min.35
44.8
7 36.5 7 3 6 ,5
Space for
93 9 3
heat dissipation
118 1 1 8
DS1-x direct-on-line starter with TM-DS 45 terminal module RS1-x reversing starter with TM-RS 90 terminal module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/93

D S 1 e -x , D S S 1 e -x , 172,5
min. 35
172,5 Space for heat dissipation
min. 35
Space for heat F -D S 1 e -x 149,5 R S , R S -x , R S 1 -x 149,5

dissipation 65 7 137,5 130 7 137,5
D S 1 e -x , R S ,
R S -x ,
66
D S S 1 e -x ,
66
F -D S 1 e -x R S 1 -x
Mounting channel
100
100
Mounting channel
35 x 7.5/15 mm
35 x 7.5/15 mm
332
290
332
290
T M -D S 6 5 T M -R S 9 0
T M -F D S 6 5
Connection area
Connection area
NSA0_00200a
NSA0_00199a
min. 35
min. 35
43,5 Space for 43,5

Space for heat dissipation 100
heat dissipation 100
DS1e-x direct-on-line starter, DSS1e-x sort starter and RS1e-x reversing starters and TM-RS130 terminal module
TM-DS65 terminal module
Accessories
117,5 15
6
66
13,5
142,2
194,6
195,6
100
NSA00304
95 7
Brake control module xB1 ... 4 with TM-xB215 terminal module
6/94 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Power modules for ET 200S motor starters

PM-D Power module
3RK1 903-0BA00
Rated control supply voltage Us V 20.4 ... 28
Up to 60 °C
• Recommended short-circuit A 10
protection
• Melting fuse A 10
• Miniature circuit-breaker A 10
Tripping characteristic B
Power consumption from the mA 10
backplane bus
Supplying
• Motor starters Yes
• Frequency converters Yes
• Motor starters for No
SIGUARD safety systems
• Solid-state modules No
• Ex(i) modules No
Alarms none
• For supplying and monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor
Diagnostics functions Yes
starters
• Deactivation of a complete group of motor starters is possible • System fault/device fault Red "SF" LED
• Monitoring the power supply for Green "PWR" LED
without any additional outlay (safety category 1 according to solid-state modules U1
EN 954-1) • Monitoring the power supply for Green "CON" LED
• For plugging into TM-P15 terminal module contactors U2
• For supplying and monitoring the voltage supply for the • Diagnostics information can be Yes
ET 200S FC frequency converter read out
■ Design • Flexible with end sleeve
• Rigid
mm2
mm2
1.5
2.5
PM-D power modules are plugged onto the TM-P15 terminal Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 15 x 195.5 x 117.5
modules.
A PM-D power module must be followed by at least one motor
starter or one frequency converter.
6
117,5 8,2 15
PM-D
66
100
7
194,6
195,6
100
TM-P15
NSA00305
101,9 7
PM-D power module and TM-P15 terminal module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/95

Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters
TM-DS, TM-RS
• "–S32" variant with supply terminals: 2 x 3 x 10 mm² screw
terminals for power bus and motor outgoing feeder
• "–S31" variant without supply terminals: 1 x 3 x 10 mm² screw
terminals for motor outgoing feeder
• Optionally expandable with PE/N modules (see Accessories)
• Applies only to standard motor starters: For applications with
high motor currents (> 6.3 A) or high ambient temperatures
(> 40 °C) it is recommended to use the DM-V15 distance
module (See Accessories) between two DS1-x motor starters
TM-ICU
• For ICU24 / ICU24F control modules of the frequency con-
verter
TM-IPM
• "TM-IPM65" variant for IPM25 power section of the frequency
converter with 0.75 kW
• "TM-IPM130" variant for IPM25 power section of the frequency
converter with 2.2 or 4.0 kW
• "–S32" variant with supply terminals: 2 x 3 x 10 mm² screw
terminals for power bus and motor outgoing feeder
• "–S31" variant without supply terminals: 1 x 3 x 10 mm² screw
terminals for motor outgoing feeder
• All TM-IPM units have an integrated shield attachment
• Optionally expandable with PE/N modules (see Accessories)
Terminal modules for motor starters
TM-xB
• Mechanical modules in which the motor starter and expansion
• Can be combined with standard motor starters as well as
modules are inserted
High-Feature motor starters and frequency converters
• For constructing the permanent wiring and self-assembling
• Connection by means of screw terminals
voltage bus
• Always next to the TM-DS/TM-RS on the right-hand side
• For connecting the motor connection cables
• Positive-locking connection to ensure enhanced vibration Terminal module for power module
resistance
For supplying load and sensor voltage to the self-assembling
Terminal modules for frequency converters potential bars of the standard motor starters, High-Feature start-
6
• Mechanical modules in which the components of the ers and frequency converters. Power modules for voltage
frequency converter are inserted monitoring are plugged onto TM-P modules. TM-P modules can
• For constructing the permanent wiring and self-assembling be used any number of times within the ET 200S. A power
voltage bus module must always be plugged upstream from the first motor
• For connecting the motor cables starter/frequency converter.
• Integrated shield attachments for receiving the busbar
3 x 10 mm
Terminal module for power module
• Connection by means of screw terminals
• Light colored enclosure for visual distinction
• Always before the first TM-DS/TM-RS
6/96 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 15 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module mm 117.5
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage V 500
Rated operational voltage V 24 DC
Rated operational current A 10
Solid mm2 1 x (0.14 ... 2.5) according to IEC 60947
1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.14 ... 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 22)
Wiring
Required tool Standard screw driver size 1
Tightening torque Nm 0.4 ... 0.7
TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 terminal module

TM-DS45 TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 264 x 100 65 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N terminal block mm 306 332
Depth with motor starter mm 127 150
Depth with motor starter and F-Kit (SIGUARD safety system) mm 152 --
Depth with motor starter and 2DI control module mm -- 173
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
Rated operational voltage Ue V 500 AC
Rated operational current Ie A 40 50
6
Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x 10 or
2 x (1 ... 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
AWG conductors, AWG solid or stranded 2 x (14 ... 10)
With additional 3-phase feeder terminal if required
• Solid or stranded mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
• AWG conductors, AWG solid or stranded 1 x 12 ... 4
Wiring
Required tool Standard screw driver size 2 and Pozidriv 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/97


TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 terminal module
TM-RS90 TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Dimensions
Height with PE/N mm 306 332
Depth with motor starter mm 127 150
Depth with motor starter and F-Kit (SIGUARD safety system) mm 152 --
Depth with motor starter and 2DI control module mm -- 173
Rated operational current Ie A 40 50
Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
• Solid or stranded mm2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
• AWG conductors, AWG solid or stranded 1 x 2.5 ... 25
1 x 2.5 ... 25
1 x 12 ... 4
Wiring
TM-ICU15 terminal module

Dimensions
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 15 x 195 x 52 (depth with control module 154)
6
Rated voltages and currents

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500 AC
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 DC
Rated operational current Ie A 10
TM-IPM65 and TM-IPM130 terminal module

TM-IPM65 terminal module TM-IPM130 terminal module
Dimensions
Height with PE/N terminal block mm 332
Depth with frequency converter power section mm 150
Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
AWG conductors, AWG solid or stranded mm2 2 x (14 ... 10)
• Solid or stranded mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
• AWG conductors, AWG solid or stranded mm2 1 x 12 ... 4
Wiring
6/98 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions Local / PROFIsafe
General data
■ Overview
The ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions comprise:

• Safety modules
• Standard motor starters
• High-Feature motor starters
• Failsafe motor starters
With the ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions there is no
complicated and hence cost-intensive configuring and wiring
compared to the conventional safety systems. The
ET 200S Safety motor starter Solutions are designed for
Category 4 according to EN 954- or SIL 3 IEC 61508.
They enable the use of safety-oriented direct-on-line starters or
reversing starters in the SIMATIC ET 200S distributed peripher-
als system on PROFINET or PROFIBUS. The fine modular archi-
tecture of the system enables optimum imaging of machine or
plant applications.
6
Within an ET 200S station the Safety motor starters Solutions can
also be combined with standard motor starters or High-Feature
motor starters without safety functions or the SIMATIC
ET 200S FC frequency converter up to max. 4 kW up to
Category 3 according to EN 954-1 or SIL 2 according to
IEC 61508.
Standard and High-Feature ET 200S motor starters can be found
on page 6/88 onwards.
The ET 200S configurator software can be found in catalog
CA 01 on CD or DVD (Motor Starter Selection Aid). You can also
download the ET 200S configurator software from the Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starten
http://www.siemens.com/ET200S
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/99

ET 200S Failsafe motor starters
■ Overview All functions of the High-Feature starter are already integrated

The new Failsafe motor starters are characterized by easy,
space-saving assembly as well as minimal wiring outlay. Like the
High-Feature starters, the Failsafe motor starters have a switch-
ing capacity of up to 7.5 kW (16 A) which is achieved with just
two motor starter versions. Another important feature is the high
availability due to the high short-circuit withstand capability
(type of coordination 2).
■ Design
High degree of flexibility with safety engineering
• Solution PROFIsafe:
In EMERGENCY-STOP applications, the Failsafe motor start-
ers are selectively switched off through the upstream safety
module PM-D F PROFIsafe. For each safety module, six shut-
down groups can be formed. In the first delivery stage, the fail-
safe freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is
used to interface with the relevant failsafe sensors. The
interface between PROFIsafe and installations that use
conventional safety systems is implemented through the
The Failsafe motor starter has been developed on the basis of F-CM failsafe contact multiplier with four floating contacts.
the High-Feature motor starter. It differs in that, in addition to a • Solution local
motor starter protector and contactor assembly, a safe solid- Failsafe motor starter with safety relay (Variant 1) or ASIsafe
state evaluation circuit is installed for error detection purposes (Variant 2): Signals with relevance for safety can be input to
which makes the motor starter failsafe. ET 200S through a PM-D F X1 infeed terminal module through
If the contactor to be switched fails in an EMERGENCY-STOP the enabling circuits of the AS-i Safety Monitor or the safety re-
case, the evaluation electronics detects a fault and opens the lay to control the Failsafe motor starters which then selectively
motor starter protector in the motor starter through a shunt re- switch off the downstream motors.
lease in a failsafe manner. The second redundant shutdown
components is therefore no longer a main contactor, as is gen-
erally the case, but the motor starter protector installed in the
motor.
F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters /
6
F-RS1e-x reversing starters

Combination starters, Reversing starters
direct-on-line
Dimensions
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 65 x 290 x 150 130 x 290 x 150
(incl. terminal module) (incl. terminal module)
Height with PE/N module mm 332
Depth with 2DI control module (not safe) mm 173
Module-specific specifications
Type of coordination Type 2 up to Ie 16 A at 400 V
Internal power supply U1 (from PM-D F / PM-DF X1)
Maximum achievable safety class
• According to IEC 61508 SIL 3
• According to DIN VDE 0801 Shutdown class 6 (AK6)
• According to EN 954-1 Category 4
Safety characteristics
• Low demand PFDAVG (10a)
- Test interval 3 months 3.5 x 10-5
- Test interval 6 months 8.0 x 10-5
• High demand/continuous mode PFH
- Test interval 3 months 1/h 8.1 x 10-10
- Test interval 6 months 1/h 1.8 x 10-9
• Proof-test interval years 10
Voltages, currents, potentials
Switching capacity Up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC in three setting ranges:
A 0.3 ... 3
A 2.4 ... 8
A 2.4 ... 16
Status, alarms, diagnostics
Status display SF, DEVICE and C-STAT, SG1 ... SG6
• Group fault display Red LED (SF)
• Diagnostics information can be read out Available
6/100 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

ET 200S Failsafe motor starters
Combination starters, Reversing starters

direct-on-line
Control circuit
Rated operational voltage for electronics U1 V 24 DC (20.4 ... 28.8 DC) 24 DC (21.6 ... 26.4 DC)
Reverse polarity protection for electronics U1 Yes
Rated operational voltage for contactor U2 V 24 DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V DC)
Reverse polarity protection for contactor U2 Yes
Current consumption
• From electronics supply U1 mA Approx. 40 Approx. 100
• From contactor supply U2
- Pickup A 1.7 (for 80 ms) --
- Hold mA Max. 350 --
• From SG1 up to 6
- Pickup mA 250 (for 200 ms)
- Hold mA Max. 55
• Test function of the shunt release/starter protector (50 ms) from U1 A Approx. 1.5
• From the backplane bus mA Approx. 20
Main circuit
• According to DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014, IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 V AC 500
• Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting circuits V 400
UL, CSA V AC 600
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 500
heat dissipation
Clearance for
min 35
RS=130 149
DS=65 138 7
66
23
6
Sectional rail
135
35 x 7.5 mm
100
290
333
Sectional rail
35 x 7.5 mm
48
NSA0_00335
Connection area
heat dissipation
Clearance for
min 35
43
99
126
F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters / F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/101

Safety modules local
■ Overview
PM-D F1 PM-X DS1e-x
safety module safety module high feature
direct starter
DS1-x PM-D F2 PM-X
standard safety module safety module
direct starter
Terminal module
for PM-X safety module
G_NSA0_00434
IM 151
interface module
Terminal module
for PM-D F1/2
safety module
Terminal module
for direct starter
Auxiliary switch of without TM-DS65-S31
the failsafe equipment supply connection
for F-Kit 1
direct starter
Terminal module
for PM-D F1/2
Terminal module safety module
for direct starter
6
with TM-DS45-S32 Terminal module PE/N terminal block

supply connection for PM-X safety module without M65-PEN-S
Terminal module supply connection
for direct starter
Terminal module with TM-DS65-S32
PE/N terminal block for direct starter
with M65-PEN-F supply connection
without TM-DS45-S31
supply connection supply connection
Interplay of ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions local components
Safety motor starters Solutions local

• For use of standard, High-Feature or Failsafe motor starters in
systems with safety categories 2 to 4 (according to EN 954-1)
• No complex wiring for conventional safety systems
• Can also be used in combination with external safety relays
• Can also be used to activate external safety systems
• Safety module available for function-monitored and automatic
starting
• Safety module available for stop category 0 and 1
• Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor
starters
• Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal
modules.
PM-D F1 safety module
6/102 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4/F5 safety modules Example 1:
• PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4 safety modules monitor auxiliary voltages
and contain the complete functionality of a safety relay: PLC PM-D F1 PM-D F2
- PM-D F1 PM-X PM-X
For evaluation of EMERGENCY-STOP circuits with the
function "monitored start". PROFINET /
- PM-D F2 PROFIBUS
For evaluation of protective doors with the function
"automatic start".
- PM-D F3 ET 200S
Expansion to PM-D F1/F2 for time-delayed shutdown.
- PM-D F4
For expansion of safety circuits with other ET 200S motor
starters, e.g. in a different line.
- PM-D F5
Transmits the status from PM-D F1 ... 4 through four floating
enabling circuits to external safety equipment (contact Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 Motor 5
mulitpliers)
• The PM-D F1 and PM-D F2 modules can be combined with
the PM-D F3 or PM-D F4 modules.
• A PM-D F5 can be positioned at any point between a
PM-D F1 ... 4 and a PM-X.
• Safety modules monitor the U1 and U2 auxiliary voltages. A
voltage failure is relayed as a diagnostics signal over the bus.
• No additional PM-D safety module is required when the safety EMERGENCY-STOP Bowden wire
modules are used.
NSA0_00433
• Each safety circuit, beginning with a PM-D F1 ... 4, must be
terminated with one PM-X each. ET 200S Safety motor starter Solutions local with 2 safety circuits
Failsafe Kit (= shutdown groups), standard motor starters and High-Feature
motor starters.
The Failsafe Kit (F-Kit) must be added to each standard motor
starter in a safety segment in order to monitor the switching Example 2:
function.
PM-D FX1
F-Kit 1 supplements the DS1-x direct-on-line starter, F-Kit 2 the
RS1-x reversing starter. PROFINET /
PROFIBUS
The F-Kits are comprised of:
6
• Contact supports for the terminal modules
ET 200S
• One or two auxiliary switch blocks for the contactor/contactors
of the motor starter Standard PLC
• Connecting leads
High-Feature motor starters and their terminal modules come as
Motor 1 Motor 2
standard with the functionality of the F-Kits integrated. Variant 1 Variant 2
Examples Safety relay, ASIsafe
e. g. 3TK28
The diverse possible uses of the Safety motor starters Solutions
local are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S motor AS-Interface
starters in the context of typical sample applications.
Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost imple-
mentations of applications with Safety motor starters Solutions
local are available on the Internet:
You can find more information on the Internet at: AS-Interface
http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starting
http://www.siemens.com/ET200S NSA0_00431
ET 200S Safety motor starter Solutions local with 2 external safety

assemblies (= safety relays or ASIsafe monitors) and with Failsafe motor
starters (PM-DFX1 application). 2 of the 6 available safe shutdown
groups are used.
Signals with relevance for safety can be input to ET 200S
through a PM-DFX1 infeed terminal module through the enabling
circuits of the ASIsafe monitor or the safety relay to control the
Failsafe motor starters which then selectively switch off the
downstream motors.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/103

■ Design
Components needed for applications with safety requirement
Components needed Safety category according to EN 954-1
1 2 3 4
PM-D X -- -- --
PM-D F1/-F2/-F4 -- X X X
PM-D F3 -- X X --
F-Kit 1/2 -- X 1) X 1) X 1)
PM-X -- X X X
PM-DFX1 -- X X X
External infeed contactor -- -- X X
1) F-Kit needed only for standard motor starter; already integrated in High-Feature motor starter
Possible combinations of safety and terminal modules
Terminal module PM-D F1 PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F5 PM-X PM-DFX1 FCM
TM-PF30 S47-B0 X X -- -- -- -- -- --
TM-PF30 S47-B1 X X -- -- -- -- -- --
TM-PF30 S47-C0 -- -- X X -- -- -- --
TM-PF30 S47-C1 -- -- X X -- -- -- --
TM-PF30 S47-D0 -- -- -- -- X -- -- --
TM-X15 S27-01 -- -- -- -- -- X -- --
TM-PFX30 S47-G0 -- -- -- -- -- -- X --
TM-PFX30 S47-G1 -- -- -- -- -- -- X --
TM-FCM30 S47 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- X
Terminal module for safety module The shutdown command from an upstream ET 200S station is
received through a safe input. Separate terminals are available
For supplying load and sensor voltage to the self-assembling to connect the feedback circuit to the upstream ET 200S station.
potential bars of the standard motor starters, High-Feature start- No safety sensors can be connected to this terminal module.
ers and frequency converters. Safety modules for voltage
monitoring are plugged onto TM-P modules. TM-P modules can • TM-PF30 S47-C0
be used any number of times within the ET 200S. A safety The terminal module is used to cascade lower level safety seg-
module must always be plugged upstream from the first motor ments and accommodates the PM-D F3 safety module for time-
starter/frequency converter. delayed shutdown or the PM-D F4 safety module. Only the U2
6
Different safety circuits can be functionally separated or else power supply for the contactors must be connected to this
cascaded using different terminal modules. Each group in such terminal module. The U1 supply comes from the preceding safe-
a case must be terminated with a PM-X connection module. ty module (sub-potential group) over the potential bars of the
terminal modules. No safety sensors can be connected to this
• TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module.
The terminal module is always positioned at the beginning of a
safety segment and accommodates the PM-DF1 safety module • TM-PF30 S47-D0
for EMERGENCY-STOP applications or the PM-DF2 safety mod- The terminal module is used to accommodate the PM-D F5 safe-
ule for protective door monitorings. The 24 V power supplies for ty module. On this terminal, safe signals can be relayed to
the electronics (U1) and those for supplying the contactors (U2) external systems through four groups, each with two safety relay
of the motor starters must be connected along with the 2-chan- contacts configured with redundancy. The terminal module must
nel connection of the safety sensors (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP always be positioned between one of the above mentioned ter-
pushbuttons) to this terminal module. Connections for the ON minal modules and a terminal module for the TM-X connection
button (enabling) and safe output of the safety module are module. No safety sensors can be connected to this terminal
available in addition. module.
• TM-PF30 S47-B0 Terminal module for connection module (TM-X)
The terminal module is used to cascade lower level safety
segments and accommodates the PM-DF1 safety module for For connection of an external infeed contactor (second shut-
EMERGENCY-STOP applications or the PM-DF2 safety module down option) for category 3 and 4. The connection module is
for protective door monitorings. No other auxiliary voltage has to plugged on the right alongside the last motor starter of a safety
be connected to this terminal module. The supply comes from segment. On the TM-X terminal module there are the terminals
the preceding PM-DF1 or PM-DF2 module over the potential for connecting the positively driven NC contact of the contactors
bars of the terminal modules. Once the potential of the preced- as well as the terminals for connecting the contactor coil. If no
ing safety module is disconnected, this sub-potential also has no contactor with redundant switching is required, e.g. for category
voltage. 2 (EN 954-1), the feedback circuit has to be closed at these ter-
minals with a bridge. In applications with external safety relays it
• TM-PF30 S47-C1 is also used instead of the safety module as interface to the
The terminal module is always positioned at the beginning of a external safety relay.
safety segment expansion in a new station, e.g. at an interlace
point. It accommodates the PM-D F3 safety module for time-
delayed shutdown or the PM-D F4 safety module for direct
shutdown in separately located ET 200S stations. The 24 V pow-
er supplies for the electronics (U1) and those for supplying the
contactors (U2) are fed in new.
6/104 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Function
Safety motor starters Solutions local • Terminal modules for connection modules (TM-xB)
The safety module evaluates the signal state of the connected The TM-xB terminal modules are used to accommodate the xB1,
safety sensors and, using the integrated safety relays, shuts xB2, xB3 and xB4 brake control modules. The TM-terminal
down the group(s) of downstream motor starters. The shutdown module must always follow directly after a terminal module for
function is monitored by the module, and the auxiliary functions standard motor starters, High-Feature motor starters or
likewise. frequency converters as control of the solid-state braking switch
is provided through an output of the motor starter/frequency
Safety-relevant system signals, e.g. due to an actuated converter. The xB215 terminal modules for the brake control
EMERGENCY-STOP switch or a missing auxiliary voltage, are modules have not only the terminals for connecting the line for
automatically generated and notified to the interface module. the motor braking unit but also the terminals of the two local
The latter assigns an unambiguous ID to the fault. Using the acting inputs. These local inputs are not evaluated by a
PROFIBUS DP diagnostics module, faults of this type can be frequency converter; for this reason the xB215 terminal module
identified and localized without a great deal of programming may be plugged in only downstream from a motor starter.
work.
• Terminal modules for (TM-PF30) safety module
The PM-D F X1 safety module is used for feeding in 1 to 6 shut-
down groups. The infeed voltage can be switched using 1 to 6 For supplying load and sensor voltage to the potential bars of
external safety shutdown devices (either AS-Interface safety the motor starters, and for connection of the 2-channel sensor
monitors or 3TK28 safety assemblies). This safety module is circuit (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP button) and a reset button.
used in applications with external safety shutdown devices Different terminal modules are available for the configuring of
where there is a need for the fully selective safety shutdown of separate safety circuits or for the cascading of safety circuits,
Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters. and for applications with time-delayed shutdown.
• Terminal module for (TM-X) connection safety module
For connection of an external infeed contactor (2nd shutdown
possibility). With terminals for contactor coil and feedback
contact. Is always required to terminate a group of safety-
oriented motor starters.
PM-D F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5 safety modules
Mechanical endurance Operating 10 x 106
cycles
Electrical endurance Operating 200 000 with Ie
cycles
6
Utilization categories DC-13
Control times
• Minimum command duration ms 200
• Recovery time s <1
• Off-delay ms 30
Control current circuit U1
• Rated control supply voltage US V 24 DC
• Operating range DC up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
• Power consumption W 2.4
• Recommended short-circuit protection (gG) gL 2 A
Output OUT+/OUT- for control of expansion modules 24 V DC / < 50 mA (PTC fuse)
Switched auxiliary circuit U2
• Operating range DC up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
• Rated operational current Ie (DC-13 up to 24 V) A 4
• Uninterrupted thermal current Ith A 5
Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling and Fuse links:
signaling circuits LV HRC type 3NA
DIAZED type 5SB
NEOZED type 5SE
gL (gG) operational class 6 A
Supplying
• Motor starters Yes
• Ex(i) modules No
• BG certification Yes
• UL-, CSA certification Yes
Cable length for EMERGENCY-STOP and ON pushbuttons m Max. 1000
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 (incl. terminal module)
Enabling circuits with PM-D F5 4 (floating)
PM-X safety module
Control current circuit U1
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 15 x 196.5 x 117.5 (incl. terminal module)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/105

Diagnostic messages with safety modules

Fault type Meaning PM-D power modules
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
01001: Fault A module fault has occurred X X X X X
10001: Sensor or load voltage missing U1 or U2 not available or too low X X X X X
11000: Actuator shutdown Safety relay has dropped X X X X X
11001: Safety-oriented shutdown EMERGENCY-STOP has been X X
actuated; crossover between the
EMERGENCY-STOP leads has
occurred
TM-PFX30 S47/TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 30 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module mm 117.5
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage V 500
Rated operational voltage V 24 DC
Rated operational current A 10
Solid mm2 1 x (0.14 ... 2.5) according to IEC 60947
1 x (2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.14 ... 1.5) according to IEC 60947
Wiring
Required tool Standard screw driver size 1
PM-D FX1 safety module (infeed terminal module)
Dimensions
• Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) mm 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 (incl. terminal module)
Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +60
Maximum achievable safety classes
6
• IEC 62508 SIL 3

• DIN V 19250 Shutdown class 5 and 6
• EN 954-1 Category 4
Safety characteristics
• Proof-test interval 10 years
Rated control supply voltage Us V 21.6 ... 26.4 DC up to 60 °C
Internal protection with 7 A fuse (quick)
Recommended upstream short-circuit protection A Fuse gL/gG 6.3
Supplying
• Failsafe motor starters Yes
• Failsafe frequency converters Yes
• Motor starters for SIGUARD safety systems No
• Ex[i] modules No
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus mA 10
• From U1 mA 35
• From SGx mA 15
Alarms None
• Group fault/device fault Red "SF" LED
• Monitoring the power supply for solid-state modules U1 (PWR) Green PWR LED
• Monitoring of six shutdown groups Green SG1 … SG6 LED
• Diagnostics information can be read out Yes
Standards, approvals
• TÜV Yes
• UL-, CSA certification Yes
6/106 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

F-CM contact multiplier

Dimensions
• Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 (incl. terminal module)
Number of relay outputs 4 (4 x 1-channel or 2 x 2-channel safe coupling/contact multiplication)
Internal power supply for bar U1 (from PM-D F / PM-D FX1)
• According to IEC 61508 SIL3
• According to DIN VDE 0801 AK 6
• According to EN 954 Cat. 4
Switching capacity of the relay outputs Utilization category DC-13 (Ie / Ue):
1.5 A / 24 V
Electrical isolation
• Between outputs and backplane bus Yes
• Between outputs and power supply Yes
• Between outputs Yes
• Between outputs/power supply and shield Yes
Status display PWR and STAT
Alarms: Diagnostics alarm none
• Monitoring the switching status of the enabling circuit Red/green STAT LED
8,2 30
6
66
100
7
196
100
NSA00306
90
7 118
PM-D F1 ... 4 safety module and TM-PF30 terminal module
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/107


8,2 15
66
100
196
7
100
NSA00307
90
7 118
PM-X safety module and TM-X15 terminal module
■ Schematics
Terminal assignment of TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal
modules (for PM-D F X1)
Terminal Short Meaning
designation
1, 8 + IN/OUT U1: fused 24 V DC, limited to SIMATIC range
6
2, 9 M IN/OUT
3, 10 -- Not assigned
6, 13 L+ Uin: for connecting an external power supply
7, 14 M 24 V DC SELP/PELV
-- AUX1 Is passed through without a terminal
15, 22 SG1
16, 23 SG2
18, 25 SG3
19, 26 SG4
20, 27 SG5
21, 28 SG6
6/108 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Safety modules PROFIsafe
■ Overview
PM-D F PROFIsafe
safety module
IM 151
interface module
NSA0_00435
Terminal module
for PM-D F PROFIsafe
TM-PF30 S47-F0
F-RS1e-x
failsafe reversing starter
F-DS1e-x
failsafe direct starter
Terminal module
Terminal module for F-RS1e-x
for F-DS1e-x without TM-FRS130-S31-01
with TM-FDS65-S32 supply connection
supply connection
Terminal module
for F-DS1e-x
6
without TM-FDS65-S31
supply connection
PE/N terminal block PE/N terminal block
with M65-PEN-F without M65-PEN-S
supply connection supply connection
Interplay of ET 200S Safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe components
The logic of the safety functions is implemented by software.

Safety-oriented PROFIsafe communication and the use of a
safety-oriented control system are required. Integration of the
safety system in the standard automation is realized through a
single bus system (see Advantages of PROFIsafe), using
PROFIBUS as well as PROFINET.
• For the use of Failsafe motor starters in plants with safety
category 2 to 4 according to EN 954-1 and SIL 2 and 3
according to IEC 61508. The use of standard or High-Feature
motor starters is also possible with certain assemblies
• High flexibility (any assignment of sensors to motor starters
using the PLC)
• Full selectivity of disconnection of the Failsafe motor starters
• No complex wiring for conventional safety systems, e.g. no
infeed contactors even in the highest safety category
• Can also be used in combination with external safety relays
• Can also be used to activate external safety systems
• Safety module available for any safety function
Safety motor starters Solutions PROFIsafe
• Safety module available for stop category 0 and 1
Sensor and actuator assignment are freely configurable within • Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor
the framework of the distributed safety concept: starters
• Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal
modules.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/109


Safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe
PROFINET / PM-D F
High degree of flexibility with safety engineering F-PLC
PROFIBUS PROFIsafe
Failsafe motor starters for PROFIsafe:
In EMERGENCY-STOP applications, the Failsafe motor starters PROFIsafe
are selectively switched off through the upstream PM-D F telegram
PROFIsafe safety module. For each safety module, six shutdown
groups can be formed. In the first delivery stage, the failsafe
freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is used to ET 200S
interface with the relevant failsafe sensors. The interface
between PROFIsafe and installations that use conventional
safety systems is implemented through the F-CM Failsafe
contact multiplier with four floating contacts.
Example: EMERGENCY-
STOP Motor 1 Motor 2
The diverse possible uses of the Safety motor starter Solutions
PROFIsafe are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S Motor
Starters in the context of typical sample applications.
Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost imple-
mentations of applications with Safety motor starters Solutions
local are available on the Internet:
You can find more information on the Internet at: EMERGENCY Position Cable-operated
http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starting STOP switch switch
http://www.siemens.com/ET200S NSA0_00432
ET 200S Safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe with Failsafe motor

starters and fully selective shutdown (PM-DF PROFIsafe application)
Within an ET 200S station the Failsafe motor starters are as-
signed to one of 6 safety segments. For plants with distributed
configuration the shutdown signals of these safety segments are
preferably issued by a higher level, safety-oriented control sys-
tem through PROFIsafe. This permits the greatest flexibility for
assigning the motor starters to different safety circuits.
Alternatively, an ET 200S F-CPU can also be used for control
purposes.
6
■ Function
Each safety module switches up to 6 shutdown groups for
Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters.
SIEMENS
The PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module receives the shutdown
signal from the interface module of the ET 200S and safely
E 01
switches off 1 to 6 shutdown groups. This safety module is used 1

8 7
61
8 7
6
in PROFIsafe applications where there is a need for the selective 2 52 5
3 4 3 4
safety shutdown of Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters.
The terminal assignment of the terminal modules for safe motor
starters corresponds to the terminal assignment of the 45 and
65 mm terminal modules. The terminal modules for safe motor
starters have a coding module in addition. This enables the safe
motor starter to be assigned to one of the six shutdown groups.
The terminal module contains three coding elements which fully
cover the three coding openings in the terminal module. The Codification
labeled coding element contains (in the chamber marked with SG1
the dash) the busbar tap; the non-labeled coding elements are SG2
used only to cover the coding openings. Shutdown group 1 SG3
(AG1 or SG1) is coded in the as-delivered state. The coding can SG4
be changed to shutdown group 2 by releasing the coding ele- SG5
ment and turning it through 180°. Changing the coding to shut- SG6
8 7 8 7
down group 3 is possible by exchanging the labeled and non- 1 61 6
NSA0_00334
labeled coding elements. In this case the dash on the labeled 2 52 5

3 4 3 4
coding
element must correlate with the dash of the required shutdown
group (symbolized busbar).
6/110 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module
Dimensions
Number of outputs, source input 6 shutdown groups (safety group 1 ... 6)
Internal power supply for bar U1
Assigned address range
• In PAE byte 5
• In PAA byte 5
Supply voltage V 24 DC
• Between outputs and power supply No
• Between outputs No
Status display Green LED per SG
Green LED for electronics supply
Green LED for load voltage
Alarms: Diagnostics alarm "TO"
Settings
Module address Diverse:
1. Using a safety-oriented parameter in the parameterization message frame over
the backplane bus
2. Using the 10-pole DIL switch (binary-coded) on the left side of the module
6
The received address is then compared with the DIL switch setting
Dimensions
Number of relay outputs 4 (4 x 1-channel or 2 x 2-channel safe coupling/contact multiplication)
Internal power supply for bar U1 (from PM-D F / PM-D FX1)
Switching capacity of the relay outputs Utilization category DC-13 (Ie / Ue):
1.5 A / 24 V
• Between outputs and power supply Yes
• Between outputs Yes
Status display PWR and STAT
Alarms: Diagnostics alarm none
• Monitoring the switching status of the enabling circuit Red/green STAT LED
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/111

118 6 30
PM-D F
PROFIsafe
66
Sectional rail
100
35 x 7.5 mm
7
195
196
AUX1 AUX1
F1
100
7
Sectional rail
35 x 7.5 mm
2 2
NSA0_00333
0 7
2 2
1 8
102
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module

5 1 0 1
7 8 7 8
6 1 6 1
5 2 5 2
1 0 0
6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 3 7 a
3 0 4 8 ,3
PM-D F X1 power module (infeed terminal module)
118 6 30
F-CM
66
Sectional rail
100
35 x 7.5 mm
7
195
196
AUX1 AUX1
E0 1 2
1 85 2
100
1 2
2 96 3
7
Sectional rail 1 2
4 1 5
35 x 7.5 mm
1 2
5 2 6
1 2
NSA0_00336
6 3 7
1 2
7 4 8
102
6/112 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Schematics
Terminal assignment of TM-PF30 S47-F0 terminal module
(for PM-DF PROFIsafe)
designation
20, 27 24 V DC 24 V DC infeed
(terminals internally bridged)
21, 28 M Infeed ground
(terminals internally bridged)
Terminal assignment of TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module

(for F-CM)
The table shows the terminal assignment of the
TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module for the F-CM contact
multiplier. The left half of the terminal module is used to assign
the contact multiplier outputs to the desired safety group. It can
be coded for only one safety group. The PM-D F treats multiple
coding as crossover. The F-CM can also be configured in
connection with the PM-D F X1 power module.
designation
1, 8 SG1 Bridge for coding to safety group 1
15 OUT1.1 Floating relay output 1.1
6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/113

ET 200pro Motor Starters
Standard and High-Feature
■ Overview
Isolator module
The isolator module with switch disconnector function is used for
safe disconnection of the 400 V operational voltage during re-
pair work in the plant and provides an integrated group fusing
function (i.e. additional group short-circuit protection for all
subsequently supplied motor starters).
Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be
equipped with an isolator module as an option.
Safety local isolator module
With the Safety local modules
• Safety local isolator module and
• 400 V disconnecting module
it is possible to achieve safety category 4 with an appropriate
circuit.
The Safety local isolator module is a maintenance switch with
integrated safety evaluation functions that can be parameterized
using DIP switches.
Motor starters¼
It is used for:
• Only two variants up to 5.5 kW
• Connection of a 1 or 2-channel EMERGENCY-STOP circuit up
• All settings can be parameterized by bus
to category 3-4/Sil3 (protective door or EMERGENCY-STOP
• Comprehensive diagnostics signals
buttons) and parameterizable start behavior
• Overload can be acknowledged by remote reset
• Control of the 400 V disconnecting module by means of a
• Current unbalance monitoring
safety rail signal
• Stall protection
• Emergency start function in the event of overload
• Current value transmission by bus
• Current limit monitoring
• Direct-on-line or reversing starters
• Power bus can be plugged in using the new HAN Q4/2
plug-in connectors
• Conductor cross-sections up to 6 x 4 mm²
• 25 A per segment
(power looped through using jumper plug)
• Supplied with 400 V AC brake contact as an option
6
Motor starters, Motor starters,
Standard DSe, RSe High-Feature DSe, RSe
General data
Motor starters that can be connected to ET 200pro or Max. 8
modules with width of 110 mm
• Direct starter and reversing starter mm 110 x 230 x 150
• During operation °C -25 ... +55, from +40 with derating
Permissible mounting position Vertical, horizontal
Vibration resistance according to IEC 60068, Part 2-6 2g
Shock resistance to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 Half-sine 15 g/11 ms
Current consumption
• From auxiliary circuit L+/M (U1) mA Approx. 40
• From auxiliary circuit A1/A2 (U2) mA Approx. 200
Rated operational current for power bus Ie A 25
Approval to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101 V Up to 500
CSA and UL approval V Up to 600
• Incoming energy supply mm2 Max. 6 x 4
Degree of pollution 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Rated insulation voltageUi V 400
6/114 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Standard and High-Feature
Motor starters, Motor starters,

Standard DSe, RSe High-Feature DSe, RSe
General data (continued)
Rated operational current for starter Ie
• AC-1/2/3 at 40 °C
- at 400 V A 0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 12.0
- at 500 V A 0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 9.0
• AC-4 at 40 °C
- at 400 V A 0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 4.0
Type of coordination to IEC 60947-4-1 1
Power of induction motors at 400 V kW Max. 5.5
Utilization categories AC-1, AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
Safe isolation between main V 400 according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
and auxiliary conducting circuits
Mechanical endurance of contactor 30 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance of contactor Up to 10 million operating cycles; dependent on the current load (see Manual)
Reliable operating frequency Dependent on the current load, motor starting time and relative ON period (see Manual)
Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Ue
• Closing delay ms 25 ... 100
• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10
Device functions
Parameterizable rated operational current Yes
Parameterizable current limit values No Yes, 2 limit values
Parameterizable response in case of current limit violation No Yes
Zero current monitoring Yes
Parameterizable response in case of zero current violation Yes
Parameterizable current unbalance limit No, fixed limit value (30 % x Ie) Yes, 30 % ... 60 % x Ie
Parameterizable response in case of unbalance limit violation Yes
Motor blocking monitoring No Yes
Parameterizable blocking current limit No Yes, 150 % ... 1000 % x Ie
Parameterizable blocking time limit s No Yes, 1 ... 5
Current value transmission Yes
Group warning diagnostics No Yes, parameterizable
Group diagnostics Yes, parameterizable
6
Emergency start Yes
Digital inputs No Yes, 4 inputs
• Parameterizable input signal No Yes, latching/ non-latching
• Parameterizable input level No Yes, NC contacts/NO contacts
• Parameterizable input signal delay ms No Yes, 10 ... 80
• Parameterizable input signal extension ms No Yes, 0 ... 200
• Parameterizable input control actions No Yes, 12 different actions
400 V brake output Yes, ordering option
Parameterizable brake enabling delay s Yes, -2.5 .. 2.5
Parameterizable holding time of the brake during stopping s Yes, 0 ... 25
Local device interface Yes
Firmware update Yes, by trained personnel
Thermal motor model Yes
Parameterizable trip class No, CLASS 10 fixed Yes, CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
Parameterizable response in case of overload of thermal No Yes, 3 possible states
motor model
Advance warning limit for motor heating % No Yes, parameterizable 0 ... 95
Advance warning limit time-related trip reserve s No Yes, parameterizable 0 ... 500
Parameterizable recovery time min No Yes, 1 ... 30
Parameterizable zero voltage safety No, permanently integrated Yes
Reversing start function Yes, ordering option
Parameterizable interlock time for reversing starters No, 150 ms fixed Yes, 0 ... 60 s
Integrated logbook functions Yes, 3 device logbooks
Integrated statistics data memory Yes
Parameterizable response in case of CPU / master stop Yes
Device indications
• Group fault SF LED (red)
• Switching state STATE LED (red, yellow, green)
• Device status DEVICE LED (red, yellow, green)
• Digital inputs No IN 1 ... IN 4, LED
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/115

ET 200pro isolator modules

The isolator module with integrated group fusing function Isolator module
(i.e. additional group short-circuit protection for all subsequently General data
supplied motor starters) and switch disconnector function is
used for safe disconnection of the 400 V operational voltage in in mm
the plant. • Direct starter and reversing starter mm 110 x 230 x 170
Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be Permissible ambient temperature
equipped with an isolator module as an option. • During operation °C -25 ... +55
The isolator module is available in addition in a safety version. Permissible mounting position Any
See Safety local Isolator Modules. Vibration resistance to IEC 60068, 2g
Part 2-6
Shock resistance to IEC 60068, Half-sine 15 g/11 ms
■ Function Part 2-27
Current consumption
The isolator module is designed for the following individual • From auxiliary circuit L+/M (U1) mA Approx. 20
functions: • From auxiliary circuit A1/A2 (U2) --
• Disconnection of the downstream starters from the mains Rated operational current for power A 25
voltage bus Ie
• Closing lockout using a padlock on the rotating element Rated operational voltage Ue V 400
• Short-circuit protection for the downstream loads with 25 A Approval to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101 V Up to 500
motor starter protection
• Incoming energy supply mm2 Max. 6 x 4
Rated operational current
for starters Ie
• AC-1/2/3 at 40 °C
- at 400 V A 25
- at 500 V A 25
6
Safe isolation between main and V 400 according to

auxiliary conducting circuits DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
Device functions
• Group diagnostics Yes, parameterizable
Device indications
6/116 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

The module with local safety function is designed for the
following individual functions:
• Functions as for the isolator module, plus:
• 2 safe inputs for:
- EMERGENCY-STOP or protective door contacts, 2-channel
- Monitored start
• 2 slide swiches for adjusting the basic functions
- 1-channel/2-channel
- Autostart/monitored start.
400 V disconnecting module
The 400 V disconnecting module is designed for the following
individual functions:
• Double disconnection of the main circuit supply (Category 4)
• Feedback of the module's functional state over bus.

The Safety local isolator module is a maintenance switch with
integrated safety evaluation functions that can be parameterized
using DIP switches.
It is used for:
• Connection of a 1 or 2-channel EMERGENCY-STOP circuit up
to category 3-4/Sil3 (protective door or EMERGENCY-STOP
buttons) and parameterizable start behavior
• Control of the 400 V disconnecting module by means of a
safety rail signal
400 V disconnecting module
The 400 V disconnecting module enables the safe disconnec-
tion of the operational voltage of 400 V up to category 3-4/Sil3.
It only functions in combination with the safety local isolator
module.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/117

Safety local isolator module 400 V disconnecting module
General data
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
• Direct starter and reversing starter mm 110 x 230 x 170 110 x 230 x 150
Vibration resistance to IEC 60068, Part 2-6 2g
Shock resistance to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 Half-sine 15 g/11 ms
Current consumption
• From auxiliary circuit L+/M (U1) mA Approx. 20
• From auxiliary circuit A1/A2 (U2) --
Rated operational current for power bus Ie A 25 16
Approval to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101 V Up to 500
2
Incoming energy supply mm Max. 6 x 4
Rated operational current for starter Ie
• AC-1/2/3 at 40 °C
- at 400 V A 25 16
- at 500 V A 25 16
Safe isolation between main V 400 according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
and auxiliary conducting circuits
Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Ue
• Closing delay ms -- 25 ... 100
6
• Opening delay ms -- 7 ... 10

Device functions
• Group diagnostics Yes, parameterizable
Device indications
6/118 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

ET 200X Motor Starters
Motor starters generally include:
• Digital outputs for controlling the motor starters.
• Digital inputs for checkback of operating states and faults.
• Integrated plug-in power connections for power infeed and
power loop. This permits configuration of a power bus system
in which several motor starters are connected to one power
cable.
• A starter combination consisting of a motor starter protector
and contactor(s) from the SIRIUS controlgear range in the
case of electromechanical motor starters (solid-state motor
starters have a setting option for overload protection and be-
havior in case of overload).
Mounting
The electrical connection of the motor starters to the adjacent
modules is made using the integrated plug connector. Special
mounting rails (6ES7 194-1GB.0-0XA0) for screwing on the
ET 200X station (see the secdtion Accessories / Mounting
Accessories) must be used. The motor starters must be fastened
• For switching and protection of any three-phase loads to the mounting rail using all three screws and in addition must
• Direct-on-line or reversing starters be secured to the preceding module with the three screws
• Electromechanical or solid-state supplied. Note: The permissible electrical and mechanical load
• Power bus can be plugged in using the new HAN Q8 plug-in limits must be observed.
connectors
• Conductor cross-sections up to 4 mm2
• 35 A per segment
• Supplied with different brake contacts as an option
Accessories
The following accessories are required for each ET 200X
configuration:
Basic and expansion EM 300 DS/RS and EM 300 EDS/ERS motor starters Tools
modules with inputs and
outputs
For power infeed to the load connection (-X2) to the power loop-through
6
(-X1) connection (-X3)
Per basic station: Per electromechanical or Per electromechanical or Per electromechanical or As required:
three plug connectors for solid-state motor starter: solid-state motor starter: solid-state motor starter: • Crimp tongs
PROFIBUS DP, control and 9-pole plug set for power • 9-pole plug set for load • 9-pole plug set for power • Disassembly tool for
auxiliary voltage infeed: connection loop-through connection: 9-pole power connector
Per digital input and output 2
• 6 x 4 mm or (1.5 mm2) or - 6 x 4 mm2 or
- 6 x 2.5 mm2 or • Hand-held device1)
used: • 6 x 2.5 mm2 • Preassembled load
connection cable: • Power supply cable:
one 5-pole - 4 x 4 mm2 or
M12 coupler plug - 4 x 1.5 mm2 or
- 6 x 1.5 mm2 with 9-pole - 6 x 4 mm2 with 9-pole
Per digital input and output power connector power connector
used: Per socket not required:
one 4-pole shielded M12 • one sealing cap
coupler plug
Per digital or analog input and
output not used:
one M12 sealing cap
1) The hand-held device enables the motor starter to be operated locally

and autonomously, providing that the auxiliary voltage supply is con-
nected. Thus, assuming that the automation level is functioning correctly,
local switching operations can be carried out in addition to normal manual
operations in the event of a programmable controller / bus system failure
(emergency mode) or during test runs for pre-commissioning, e.g. for
testing the direction of rotation of the motor. The hand-held device can be
connected to the motor starter by means of a connecting cable directly
through a socket underneath the transparent cover.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/119

DS/RS EDS/ERS
Rated operational voltage V
• According to DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 500 AC
• According to CSA and UL 600 AC
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary circuits V Up to 400 --
(according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 101)
Rated output power kW 5.5 2.2
Permissible operating modes Continuous duty, temporary duty, periodic duty, periodic intermittent
duty (50 % relative ON-time at 80 1/h at 5.5 kW)
Permissible switching frequency with a starting time tA = 0.1 s Operat- 80 600
and a relative ON-time tEP = 50 % ing
cycles/h
Trip class Class 10
Conductor cross-sections of power connector mm2 4 AWG (15-11)
for infeed/loop/feeder
9-pole
Max. permissible current through power connector
(dependent on cable cross-section)
• Tu = 60 °C A 30 (4 mm2), AWG (11)
20 (2.5 mm2), AWG (15)
12 (1.5 mm2), AWG (13)
• Tu = 40 °C A 35 (4 mm2), AWG (11)
25 (2.5 mm2), AWG (15)
15 (1.5 mm2), AWG (13)
Short-circuit strength of the starter combination kA 50 (according to type of coordination "1") 100
Electrical endurance of the motor starter protector element Operat- See endurance characteristic curves of 10 million
under load Ia (AC-3) ing the 3RT10 contactors
cycles
6
2 8 ,2 5
9
5 3 ,5
1 9 7
2 7 0
2 6 5
1 6 0 ,5
1 4 0 5 4 2 5
N S A 0 0 1 3 2
1 2 6 9
1 9 0
EM 300
3RK1 300-..S..-.AA expansion modules.
6/120 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Schematics
Connector assignment for power connector on EM 300 expansion module
1 u n u s e d P h a s e L 1 u n u s e d
2 P h a s e L 2 u n u s e d P h a s e L 2
4 G N D fo r b ra k e 1 ) o p tio n a l B ra k e o u tp u t + D C 2 4 V fo r b ra k e 1 )
5 + D C 2 4 V fo r b ra k e 1 ) o p tio n a l B r a k e in p u t G N D fo r b ra k e 1 )
C e n tre P E P E P E
L 2 L 2 L 2
1 3 6 8 3 1
2 7 2
4 5 4 5 5 4
L 3 L 1 L 1 L 3 L 1 L 3
6 8 1 3 8 6
7 2 7
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 4 7
-X 1 -X 2 -X 3
1 ) O n ly w ith E M 3 0 0 w ith D C 2 4 V b ra k e c o n ta c t (3 R K 1 3 0 0 -..S ..-.A A 1 )
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/121

General data
■ Overview Reversing starters

The reversing starters are available in two sizes:
• Size S00 is suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW with
400 V AC and a maximum rated motor current of 12 A.
The starters are available in the following two variants:
- Molded-plastic enclosure for reversing starters including
contactor assembly – in this case the overload relay must be
selected and ordered according to the rated motor current.
- Molded-plastic enclosure for reversing starters (without
contactor assembly) – in this case the contactor assembly,
auxiliary switch and overload relay must be selected and
ordered separately.
• Size S0 is suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW with
400 V AC and a maximum rated motor current of 25 A.
The starters are available in the following variants:
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters (without
contactor assembly) – in this case the contactor assembly,
auxiliary switch and overload relay must be selected and
ordered separately.
■ Design
The 3RE1 encapsulated starters are available as direct-on-line
starters and as reversing starters. Components
Direct-on-line starters The 3RE1 enclosed starters consist of a 3RT10 contactor or

3RA13 contactor assembly (fully mounted) for switching, a
The direct-on-line starters are available in three sizes: 3RU11 thermal overload relay for inverse-time delayed protec-
• Size S00 is suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW with tion, auxiliary switch(es) and molded-plastic enclosure including
400 V AC and a maximum rated motor current of 12 A. the necessary actuators.
The starters are available in the following two variants: Mounting options
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters including
contactor – in this case the overload relay must be selected There are two options for mounting the 3RE1 enclosed starters:
and ordered according to the rated motor current. • The first option is to use a 3RE10 direct-on-line starter or a
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters (without 3RE13 reversing starter consisting of a molded-plastic enclo-
contactor) – in this case the contactor and overload relay sure with actuators, integrated contactor or integrated contac-
must be selected and ordered separately. tor assembly and auxiliary switches. Only the overload relay
• Size S0 is suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW with (to be ordered separately) needs to be mounted on the con-
400 V AC and a maximum rated motor current of 25 A. tactor or contactor assembly. Wiring is carried out quickly and
6
The starters are available in the following two variants: easily according to the schematics thanks to prefabricated
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters including cabling.
contactor – in this case the overload relay must be selected • The second option is to use a 3RE19 molded-plastic enclo-
and ordered according to the rated motor current. sure with integrated actuators. The contactor or contactor
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters (without assembly, which is available fully mounted or in the form of
contactor) – in this case the contactor, auxiliary switch and individual components for self-assembly, the auxiliary
overload relay must be selected and ordered separately. switches (in the case of the size S00 direct-on-line starter
• Size S2 is suitable for induction motors up to 22 kW with these are already integrated in the contactor) and the over-
400 V AC and a maximum rated motor current of 50 A. load relay must be ordered separately. In this case, too, the
The starters are available in the following variants: overload relay is mounted directly on the contactor or contac-
- Molded-plastic enclosure for direct-on-line starters (without tor assembly and wired up. The complete assembly is
contactor) – in this case the contactor, auxiliary switch and snapped onto the standard mounting rail in the molded-plastic
overload relay must be selected and ordered separately. enclosure.
6/122 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
In the case of the second mounting option, the following
components must be ordered:
Components for mounting Size Order No. Num- Alternative components Size Order No. Num-
ber for mounting ber
Direct-on-line Molded-plastic enclosure S00 3RE19 13-1CB1 1
starters
Contactor with integrated S00 3RT10 1.-....1 1
Size S00 auxiliary switch 1 NO
Thermal overload relay S00 3RU11 16 1
starters
Contactor S0 3RT10 2 1
Size S0
Lateral auxiliary switch -- 3RH19 21-1DA11 1
1 NO / 1 NC
starters
Contactor S2 3RT10 3 1
Size S2
Lateral auxiliary switch -- 3RH19 21-1DA11 1
1 NO / 1 NC
Reversing Molded-plastic enclosure S00/S0 3RE19 13-2CB3 1
starters
Contactor S00 3RT10 1 2 Reversing assembly S00 3RA13 17-8XC17-0.. 1
Size S00
Wiring kit for reversing S00 3RH19 13-2A 1
assemblies
Front auxiliary switch 1 NO -- 3RH19 11-1BA10 2
Reversing Molded-plastic enclosure S00/S0 3RE19 13-2CB3 1
starters
Contactor S0 3RT10 2 2 Reversing assembly S0 3RA13 2.-8XB30-0.. 1
Size S0
Wiring kit for reversing S0 3RH19 23-2A 1
assemblies
Mechanical interlock -- 3RH19 24-2B 1
Front auxiliary switch 1 NO -- 3RH19 21-1CA10 2
6
■ Function
The 3RE1 enclosed starters, which are available as direct-on- Short-circuit protection
line starters and reversing starters, are used for the switching
and inverse-time delayed protection of loads. The switching of Fuses (fused construction) or motor starter protectors (fuseless
loads is taken care of by 3RT10 contactors. Inverse-time de- construction) are to be used for short-circuit protection.
layed protection is achieved with 3RU11 thermal overload re- Details of the assignment of appropriate short-circuit devices for
lays. the combinations of 3RT contactor with 3RU11 thermal overload
These starter combinations consisting of a contactor or contac- relay are given in the technical specifications.
tors and overload relay(s) are contained in a molded-plastic When the load feeders are selected from the table, the types of
enclosure that provides effective protection against dust and coordination must also be taken into account.
splashwater with its high degree of protection IP65. This high
degree of protection also applies to the actuators, which are Overload protection
used for manual switching on and off locally. Detailed information about the 3RU11 thermal overload relays
Control circuit (e.g. about recovery time, trip classes, tripping characteristics
and phase loss protection) is given in the corresponding sec-
The enclosed starters including contactor or contactor assembly tions relating to Protection Equipment: Overload relays -> 3RU1
are available with the following rated control supply voltages: thermal overload relays.
• Size S00: 230 V, 50/60 Hz and 400 V, 50/60 Hz
• Size S0: 230 V, 50 Hz and 400 V, 50 Hz
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/123

General data
Manual/automatic resetting Switching on and off
In the case of the size S00 and S0 direct-on-line starters, a With the direct-on-line starters, the load is switched on using the
choice can be made between automatic and manual resetting white button (I). The black button (O) is used for switching the
on the overload relay. If manual resetting is chosen, the black load off.
button (O) is also the reset button. This button must be actuated
after an overload tripping operation before the load can be With the reversing starters, the load can be started in the rele-
restarted. vant direction of rotation by turning the upper switch clockwise
or anticlockwise, as appropriate. The direction of rotation can be
The only type of resetting possible with the other starters is an changed by pressing the black button (O).
automatic reset.
Details about setting the overload relays to automatic/manual
resetting are given in the corresponding section describing the
overload relays.
3RE1. 10 3RE1. 20 3RE1. 30
3RE19 13 3RE19 23 3RE19 33
General data
Standards
Size S00 S0 S0
Max. rated current In max = (Max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50
Ambient temperature
• Operation °C -20 ... +35 (derating is necessary above +35 °C)
• Storage °C -55 ... +80
Degree of protection according to IEC 60947-1 IP65
Touch protection according to EN 50274 (VDE 0660 Part 514) Finger-safe
Site altitude m Up to 2,000 above sea level; above this, please enquire
Permissible rated current In
• Overload relay for ambient temperature: +35 °C % 100
• Overload relay for ambient temperature: +45 °C % 87
Mounting position For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction of 10 % must be
6
implemented.
0 ° 0 °
2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
1 3 5 ° 1 3 5 ° N S B 0 1 3 6 3
1 e x 1 ,1
Contactor + overload relay

2)
Main circuit
Auxiliary circuit 1)
1) See part 5, section "SIRIUS Thermal Overload Relays".

2) When using the 3RU11 thermal overload release, see "Selection of
Overload Relays and Short-Circuit Protection".
6/124 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Selection of overload relays and short-circuit protection
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible short-circuit protection for enclosed motor starters
comprising contactor/contactor assembly and overload relay
Size S00
Fuses Fuses Motor starter protectors
for type of coordination "1"1) for type of coordination "2"1) for type of coordination "2"1)
Setting range 3RU11 thermal 5.5 kW = 5.5 kW =
overload relay 3RE1. 10-8XC17 3RE1. 10-8XC17
(3RT10 17 contactor) (3RT10 17 contactor)
Ie max = 12 A Ie max = 12 A
(at 400 V, 50/60 Hz) (at 400 V, 50/60 Hz) at Iq = 50 kA / 400 V, 50/60 Hz
gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88
A A A A A
0.11 ... 0.16 3RU11 16-0AB0 25 25 0.5 -- --
0.14 ... 0.2 3RU11 16-0BB0 25 25 1 -- 3RV13 21-0BC10
0.18 ... 0.25 3RU11 16-0CB0 25 25 1 -- 3RV13 21-0CC10
0.22 ... 0.32 3RU11 16-0DB0 25 25 1.6 2 3RV13 21-0DC10
0.28 ... 0.4 3RU11 16-0EB0 25 25 2 2 3RV13 21-0EC10
0.35 ... 0.5 3RU11 16-0FB0 25 25 2 2 3RV13 21-0FC10
0.45 ... 0.63 3RU11 16-0GB0 25 25 2 4 3RV13 21-0GC10
0.55 ... 0.8 3RU11 16-0HB0 25 25 4 4 3RV13 21-0HC10
0.7 ... 1 3RU11 16-0JB0 25 25 4 6 3RV13 21-0JC10
0.9 ... 1.25 3RU11 16-0KB0 25 25 4 6 3RV13 21-0KC10
1.1 ... 1.6 3RU11 16-1AB0 35 35 6 10 3RV13 21-1AC10
1.4 ... 2 3RU11 16-1BB0 35 35 6 10 3RV13 21-1BC10
1.8 ... 2.5 3RU11 16-1CB0 35 35 10 10 --
2.2 ... 3.2 3RU11 16-1DB0 35 35 10 16 --
2.8 ... 4 3RU11 16-1EB0 35 35 16 16 --
3.5 ... 5 3RU11 16-1FB0 35 35 20 20 --
4.5 ... 6.3 3RU11 16-1GB0 35 35 20 20 --
5.5 ... 8 3RU11 16-1HB0 35 35 20 20 --
7 ... 10 3RU11 16-1JB0 35 35 20 20 --
9 ... 12 3RU11 16-1KB0 35 35 -- -- --
6
Size S0
Fuses Fuses Motor starter protectors
for type of coordination "1"1) for type of coordination "2"1) for type of coordination "2"1)
Setting range 3RU11 thermal 7.5 kW = 11 kW = 7.5 kW = 11 kW =
overload relay 3RE1. 20-8XC25 3RE1. 20-8XC26 3RE1. 20-8XC25 3RE1. 20-8XC26
(3RT10 25 (3RT10 26 (3RT10 25 (3RT10 26
contactor) contactor) contactor) contactor)
Ie max = 17 A Ie max = 25 A Ie max = 17 A Ie max = 25 A
(at 400 V, 50/60 Hz) (at 400 V, 50/60 Hz) at Iq = 50 kA / 400 V, 50/60 Hz
gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88
A A A A A A A A A
1.8 ... 2.5 3RU11 26-1CB0 63 63 63 63 10 10 10 10 3RV13 21-1CC10
2.2 ... 3.2 3RU11 26-1DB0 63 63 63 63 10 16 10 16 3RV13 21-1DC10
2.8 ... 4 3RU11 26-1EB0 63 63 63 63 16 16 16 16 3RV13 21-1EC10
3.5 ... 5 3RU11 26-1FB0 63 63 63 63 20 20 20 20 3RV13 21-1FC10
4.5 ... 6.3 3RU11 26-1GB0 63 63 63 63 20 25 20 25 3RV13 21-1GC10
5.5 ... 8 3RU11 26-1HB0 63 63 63 63 25 32 25 32 3RV13 21-1HC10
7 ... 10 3RU11 26-1JB0 63 63 63 63 25 32 32 35 3RV13 21-1JC10
9 ... 12.5 3RU11 26-1KB0 63 63 63 63 25 32 35 35 3RV13 21-1KC10
11 ... 16 3RU11 26-4AB0 63 63 63 63 25 32 35 35 3RV13 21-4AC10
14 ... 20 3RU11 26-4BB0 63 63 63 63 25 32 35 35 3RV13 21-4BC10
17 ... 22 3RU11 26-4CB0 -- -- 100 100 -- -- 35 35 3RV13 21-4CC10
20 ... 25 3RU11 26-4DB0 -- -- 100 100 -- -- 35 35 --
Type of coordination 1: In the short-circuit case, the contactor or starter
must not put equipment or personnel at risk. They do not have to be
suitable for further operation (without repair and the replacement of parts).
must not put equipment or personnel at risk. This must be capable of
further operation. There is a risk of contact welding.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/125

General data
Size S2
Fuses Fuses Motor starter pro-
for type of coordination "1"1) for type of coordination "2"1) tectors for type of
coordination "2"1)
Setting 3RU11 thermal 15 kW = 18.5 kW = 22 kW = 15 kW = 18.5 kW = 22 kW =
range overload relay 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
Ie max = 32 A Ie max = 40 A Ie max = 50 A Ie max = 32 A Ie max = 40 A Ie max = 50 A
(at 400 V, (at 400 V, (at 400 V, (at 400 V, (at 400 V, (at 400 V, at Iq = 50 kA /
50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz) 400 V, 50/60 Hz
gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88 gL/gG BS88
A A A A A A A A A A A A A
5.5 ... 8 3RU11 36-1HB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 25 25 25 25 25 25 --
7 ... 10 3RU11 36-1JB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 32 32 32 32 32 32 --
9 ... 12.5 3RU11 36-1KB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 35 35 35 35 35 35 --
11 ... 16 3RU11 36-4AB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 40 40 40 40 40 40 --
14 ... 20 3RU11 36-4BB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 50 50 50 50 50 50 --
18 ... 25 3RU11 36-4DB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 63 63 63 63 63 63 3RV13 31-4DC10
22 ... 32 3RU11 36-4EB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 63 63 63 63 80 80 3RV13 31-4EC10
28 ... 40 3RU11 36-4FB0 125 125 125 125 125 125 63 63 63 63 80 80 3RV13 31-4FC10
36 ... 45 3RU11 36-4GB0 -- -- 125 125 125 125 -- -- 63 80 80 80 3RV13 31-4GC10
40 ... 50 3RU11 36-4HB0 -- -- -- -- 160 160 -- -- -- -- 80 80 3RV13 31-4HC10
must not put equipment or personnel at risk. They do not have to be
suitable for further operation (without repair and the replacement of parts).
must not put equipment or personnel at risk. This must be capable of
further operation. There is a risk of contact welding.
6
6/126 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Direct-on-line starter, size S00 Direct-on-line starter, size S0
3RE10 10 3RE10 20
3RE19 13-1CB1 3RE19 23-1CB2
metric cable gland M25 metric cable gland M25
4,5
4,5
160
150
180
190
RESET
RESET
NSB0_01237
NS0_01238
85 96
105 117
Direct-on-line starter, size S2

3RE19 33-1CB3
Reversing starter, size S00/S0

3RE13 10, 3RE19 23-2CB3
metric cable gland M32
ø7
6
250
240
NS0_01239
160 158
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 6/127

■ Schematics
Direct-on-line starter, size S00/S0 Direct-on-line starter, size S2
3RE10 10 3RE19 33-1CB3 (see Accessories)
3RE10 20
3RE19 13-1CB1 (see Accessories)
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
N
N
PE PE
Uc = L1 - N Uc = L1 - N
F1 F1
Uc = L1 - L2 Uc = L1 - L2
1 3 5 .3 1 3 5 .3 A2
A1(A2)
K1 K1
2 4 6 .4 A2(A1) 2 4 6 .4 A1
S1 .3 .3
I
.4
S1 I
.4
.1
S2 O
.2
(96)
1 3 5 95 97
1 3 5 95 97
F2
2 4 6 F2
96 98 2 4 6
TEST
(95) RESET 96 98
STOP
TEST
RESET/0
NSB0_01402
U V W NSB0_01403
U V W
M
3~ M
3~
Reversing starter, size S00 Reversing starter, size S0

6
3RE13 10 3RE19 13-2CB3

L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
N N
PE PE
Uc = L2 - N Uc = L2 - N
Uc = L1 - L2 F1 Uc = L1 - L2 F1
NSB0_01401 NSB0_01409
1 3 5 1 3 5 .1 95 1 3 5 1 3 5 .1 95
K1 S0 F2 K1 S0 F2
2 4 6 2 4 6 .2 96 2 4 6 2 4 6 .2 96
K2 K2
II 0 I II 0 I
.4 .4 .4 .4
S2 S2
.3 .3 .3 .3
1 3 5 1 3 5
53 53 .4 .4
F2 F2
2 4 6 K1 K2 2 4 6 K1 K2
U V W 54 54 U V W .3 .3
F2 (22)
M 22 22
M 112 121
3~ K2 K1 3~ K2 K1
21 21 111 122
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
A2 (F2 A2) A2 A2 A2
7
6/128 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Monitoring and
Control Devices
7
7/2 Introduction 3TK28 Safety Relays
7/102 With electronic enabling circuits
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor
7/105 With relay enabling circuits
Management and Control Devices
7/108 With contactor relay enabling circuits
7/5 SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor Ch. 6 3RA71 load feeders
management and control devices with integrated safety functions
7/26 SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor protection
and control devices Interface Converters
7/35 3UF18 current transformers 7/112 3RS17 interface converters
for overload protection
7/40 3UL22 summation current
transformers 1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005
"Industrial Communication for
LOGO! Logic Modules Automation and Drives"
7/41 General data
7/42 LOGO! Modular basic variants
7/43 LOGO! Modular pure variants
IK PI1) LOGO! Modular extension modules
IK PI1) LOGO! Modular communications
modules
IK PI1) AS-Interface connection for LOGO!
IK PI1) LOGO!Contact
7/44 LOGO! Software
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays
7/45 General data
7/49 3RP15 timing relays
in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm
7/55 3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
7/58 7PV timing relays for panel mounting
7/60 3RT19 timing relays
for mounting to contactors
7
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays
for Electrical and Additional
Measurements
7/63 Line monitoring
7/69 Voltage monitoring
7/73 Current monitoring
7/76 Power factor monitoring
7/78 Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded AC networks
7/80 Insulation monitoring
for ungrounded DC networks
7/82 Level monitoring
7/85 Speed monitoring
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring
Relays
7/87 General data
7/90 Relays, analog adjustable
7/92 Relays, digitally adjustable to
DIN 3440
7/94 Relays, digitally adjustable
for up to 3 sensors
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
7/96 For PTC sensors
Monitoring and Control Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
The advantages at a glance
3UF7 3UF5 6ED1 052
Order No. Page

SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 • Compact, modular design 3UF7 7/5
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 • Unique flexibility in terms of functionality and hardware 3UF5 7/26
configuration
• Wide functional range from the distributed I/O system to the
autonomous motor management system
• All control functions from the direct starter to the pole-
changing switch with reversing contactor
• All motor sizes
• Integration in all PROFIBUS-capable automation systems
• Application in low-voltage controlgear for motor control
centers on the process industry
• Increases plant availability
• Saves costs during construction, commissioning and
operation of the plant
• Extensive data of the motor feeder available everywhere on
the PROFIBUS
• All protection, monitoring and control functions for the motor
feeder in a single system
3UF18 current transformers for overload • Protection converter for activating overload relays or for use 3UF18 7/35
protection with SIMOCODE pro
• Ensures proportional current transfer up to a multiple of the
primary rated current
3UL22 summation current transformers • Senses fault currents in machines and plants 3UL22 7/40
• Senses ground fault currents
LOGO! logic modules
LOGO! logic modules • Compact, user-friendly and low-cost solution for simple
control tasks
• Universal:
- Building installation and wiring (lighting, shutters,
awnings, doors, access control, barriers, ventilation
systems ...)
- Control cabinet installation
- Machine and device construction (pumps, small presses,
compressors, hydraulic lifts, conveyors ...)
- Special controls for conservatories and greenhouses
- Signal preprocessing for other controllers
• Flexible expansion depending on the application
7
LOGO! Modular basic variants • With display, pushbuttons and an interface for connecting 6ED1 052-1 7/42
extension modules
LOGO! Modular pure variants • Without display and pushbuttons but with an interface for 6ED1 052-2 7/43
connecting extension modules
LOGO! Modular extension modules • For connection to LOGO! Modular basic variants with 6ED1 055-1 IK PI1)
digital inputs and outputs or analog inputs and outputs
LOGO! Modular communications modules • For integrating LOGO! in an instabus KNX EIB system or as 3RK1 400 IK PI1)
an AS-Interface slave
LOGO!Power • Power supply for converting the supply voltage of 6EP1 3 IK PI1)
100 ... 240 V AC into an operational voltage of 24 V DC or
12 V DC
LOGO!Contact • Switching module for switching resistive loads and motors 6ED1 057-4 IK PI1)
directly
LOGO! Software • For switchgear program generation on the PC 6ED1 058 7/44
1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005 "Industrial Communication for Automation and
Drives"

Introduction
3RP 7PV 3UG45 11 3UG46 14
Order No. Page

3RP, 7PV timing relays
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure, • Low-cost solution with monofunctions such as response 3RP15 7/49
22.5 mm delay, off-delay, clock-pulse, wye-delta function and
multifunction
• Wide-range voltage designs
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm • The solution for small mounting depths 3RP20 7/55
• The low mounting height reduces the tier spacing
7PV timing relays for panel mounting • Digital variant 7PV 7/58
3RT19 timing relays for mounting onto contactors • Saves space because the relay is mounted onto the 3RT19 7/60
contactor
• Wiring advantages thanks to direct contacting
with contactor
3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements
Line monitoring
Phase sequence • Low-cost solution for monitoring the phase sequence 3UG45 11 7/63
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V 3UG45 12 7/63
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Analog adjustable 3UG45 13 7/64
and undervoltage • Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of 3UG46 14 7/64
ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of 3UG46 15 7/65
and overvoltage and undervoltage ACTUAL value and device status
Phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure, • Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V 3UG46 16 7/65
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in 3UG46 17 7/65
case of wrong phase sequence, phase failure,
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in 3UG46 18 7/65
case of wrong phase sequence, phase and
N conductor failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage
and undervoltage
Voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring with internal power supply for • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of 3UG46 33 7/69
7
overvoltage and undervoltage ACTUAL value and device status
Voltage monitoring with auxiliary voltage for • Wide measuring ranges 3UG46 31/32 7/70
overvoltage and undervoltage • Variant for wide voltage range
Current monitoring
Current monitoring with auxiliary voltage for • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of 3UG46 21/22 7/73
overvoltage and undervoltage ACTUAL value and device status
• Wide measuring ranges
• Variant for wide voltage range
Power factor monitoring (motor load monitoring)
Monitoring relay for overshoot and undershoot • Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted 3UG30 14 7/76
monitoring with internal power supply separately
(window monitoring)
Insulation resistance
Monitoring of the insulation resistance for • Test button 3UG30 81, 7/78
ungrounded AC or DC networks from 10 ... 110 kW • With or without memory 3UG30 82
• Switchable measuring range
Level monitoring
Fill level and resistance • As single-step or two-step controls for inlet or outlet 3UG35 01 7/82
monitoring of conducting liquids or as
resistance threshold switch
• Variable, wide range from 5 ... 100 kW
• UNDER/OVER adjustable
Speed monitoring
Underspeed monitoring • Together with a sensor for monitoring continuous pulses 3UG30 51 7/85
• With or without memory
• Adjustable ON delay
• 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts
• Hard gold-plated contacts in combination and wide voltage
range versions

Introduction
3RS10 3RN1 3TK28 3RS17

Order No. Page
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays
For monitoring the temperatures of solids, liquids, and gases
Relays, analog adjustable • Separate versions for overshoot and undershoot 3RS10, 7/90
• For simple monitoring tasks 3RS11
• For PT100 or thermoelements J and K
• Variable hysteresis
Relays, digitally adjustable acc. to DIN 3440 • For two-step or three-step controls 3RS10, 7/92
• For monitoring heat generation plants 3RS11,
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC or thermoelements 3RS20
type J, K, T, E, N, R, S, B
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors • For simultaneously monitoring several sensors 3RS10 7/94
• Especially suited for monitoring motor winding temperatures
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC
3RN1 thermistor motor protection
For PTC sensors • Relays for monitoring motor winding temperatures with 3RN1 7/96
type A PTC sensors
• Integrated with ATEX license
• Closed-circuit principle
• Depending on the version: With short-circuit and open-circuit
detection, zero voltage safety, manual/auto/remote RESET,
1 CO, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 CO, 1 NO + 1 CO or 2 CO
hard gold-plated
3TK28 safety relays
With electronic enabling circuits • Permanent function checking 3TK28 4 7/102
• No wear because switched electronically
• High switching frequency
• Long electrical endurance
• Evaluation of solid-state sensors
• Sensor lead up to max. 2000 m
• Cascading possible
• Insensitive to vibrations and dirt
• Compact design, low weight
• Approved for the world market
With relay enabling circuits • Compact design 3TK28 2, 3TK28 3 7/105
• Floating safe outputs
7
• Also suitable for press and punch controls

• Can be used up to an ambient temperature of max. 70 °C
With contactor relay enabling circuits • Floating enabling circuits 3TK28 5 7/108
• AC-15/DC-13 switching capacity
• Safe isolation
• Long mechanical and electrical endurance
• Certified as a complete unit
• Fault minimization and cost reduction through factory wiring
• Low installation costs
3RA71 load feeders • Available in fused or fuseless configuration 3TK28 5 Ch. 6
with integrated safety functions • Floating enabling circuits
• AC-1/AC-3 switching capacity
• Certified as a complete unit
• Long mechanical and electrical endurance
• Rated operational voltage up to 690 V
• Safe isolation
Converters for standard signals and • All terminals protected against polarity reversing and 3RS17 7/112
non-standard variables overvoltage up to 30 V
• For electrical isolation and conversion of analog signals
• Short-circuit resistant outputs
• From 6.2 mm width
• Switchable multi-range converters
• Variants with manual/automatic switch for setpoint input or
for the conversion of analog variables into frequency

SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management sys- General
tem for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage perfor-
mance range. It optimizes the connection between I&C and SIMOCODE pro is a modularly constructed motor management
motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows significant system which is subdivided into two device series with different
savings to be made for startup, operation and maintenance of a functional scopes:
system. • SIMOCODE pro C
When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear • SIMOCODE pro V
cabinet, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level Both series (systems) are made up of different hardware
automation system and the motor feeder and includes the components (modules):
following:
• Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is System SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V
independent of the automation system Modules • Basic unit 1 • Basic unit 2
• Flexible software instead of hardware for the motor control • Current measuring module • Current measuring module or
• Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data current/voltage measuring
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard for voltage
fieldbus systems • Operator panel (optional) • Operator panel (optional)
• Expansion modules
(optional)
Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and
one separate current measuring module. The two modules are
connected together electrically through the system interface
with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically
connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side
by side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for
the choice of current measuring module.
An operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is
optionally connectable through a second system interface on
the basic unit. Both the current measurement module and the
operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through
the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be
added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of optional
expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs
already existing on the basic unit.
All modules are connected together by connection cables.
The connection cables are available in various lengths. The
maximum distance between the modules (e.g. between the
basic unit and the current measurement module) must not
exceed 2 m. The total length of all the connection cables in a
single system must not be more than 3 m.
SIMOCODE pro designed for mixed operation
Depending on functional requirements, the two systems can be
used simultaneously without any problems and without any addi-
7
tional outlay in a low-voltage system. SIMOCODE pro C is fully
upward-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. The same compo-
nents are used. The parameterization of SIMOCODE pro C can
be transferred without any problems. Both systems have the
same removable terminals and the same terminal designations.

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1 SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2
The compact system for The variable system which offers all SIMOCODE pro C functions
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters plus many additional functions. Basic unit 2 supports the
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB) following control functions:
with up to 4 binary inputs, up to 3 monostable relay outputs and • Direct-on-line and reversing starters
one thermistor connection (binary PTC) • Star/delta starters, also with direction reversal
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing
The basic unit 1 is available in two different variants for the switch); also with direction reversal
following supply voltages: • Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings (also
• 24 V DC with direction reversal)
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC • Slide control
• Solenoid valve actuation
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)
• Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal)
Basic unit 2 has 4 binary inputs, 3 monostable relay outputs and
one thermistor connection (binary PTC). The type and number of
inputs and outputs can be increased by means of additional
expansion modules.
Basic unit 2 is available in two different variants for the following
supply voltages:
• 24 V DC
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1

Inputs:
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC
Outputs:
• 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs
Thermistor connection for binary PTC
PROFIBUS interface:
• 9-pole SUB-D or
7
• Terminal connection
Connection of the supply voltage: SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2
• 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC Inputs:
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC
Test/Reset button
Outputs:
3 LEDs • 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs
2 system interfaces for connection of Thermistor connection for binary PTC
• a current measuring module and
• an operator panel PROFIBUS interface:
• 9-pole SUB-D or
Basic unit 1 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with • Terminal connection
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate.
Connection of the supply voltage:
• 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
Test/Reset button
3 LEDs

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
2 system interfaces for connection of Current measuring modules for the following current ranges are
• a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring offered:
module • 0.3 ... 3 A with straight-through current transformer
• expansion modules and • 2.4 ... 25 A with straight-through current transformer
• an operator panel • 10 ... 100 A with straight-through current transformer
• 20 ... 200 A with straight-through current transformer or
Basic unit 2 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with busbar connection
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate. • 63 ... 630 A with busbar connection
Current measuring modules (current ranges) For motor currents up to 820 A, a current measuring module for
The current measurement module is selected for each feeder 0.3 ... 3 A, for example, can be used in combination with a
according to the rated motor current to be monitored. Various 3UF1 8 interposing/current transformer.
current measurement modules for current ranges from 0.3 to Current/voltage measuring modules (voltage range)
630 A are available for this purpose. The current measurement
module is connected to the basic unit by a connection cable and Current/voltage measuring modules have the same functions as
is supplied with electricity by the basic unit through this connec- the current measuring modules. However, they can only be used
tion cable. Current measurement modules up to 100 A are suit- in combination with basic unit 2. They offer the same current
able for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the ranges for the rated motor current. Mounting on standard mount-
mounting plate by means of additional push-in lugs. Similarly, ing rails, on mounting plates or directly on the contactor is also
current measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted the same as with the current measuring modules. They can also
on standard mounting rails or be fixed directly to mounting measure voltages up to 690 V in the main circuit, which is nec-
plates by means of fixtures integrated in the housing. Finally, cur- essary for calculating or monitoring power-related measured
rent measuring modules up to 630 A can only be mounted with variables. Current/voltage measuring modules have additional
the integrated screw fixtures. removable terminals, to which the voltages of all three phases of
the main circuit are connected (3-pole). An additional 3-core
Note: cable can be used, for example, to directly connect the main cir-
Current measuring modules for up to 100 A set current can be cuit from the busbar terminals of the current/voltage measuring
mechanically connected to the corresponding basic unit and modules to the voltage measuring terminals.
mounted with it as a unit (one behind the other). For larger
current measuring modules, only separate mounting is possible. Note:
Current/voltage measuring modules can only be mounted
separately from the associated basic unit 2. A current/voltage
measuring module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product
version E02 and later (from April 2005).
Width
45 mm 55 mm 120 mm 145 mm
Current measuring
modules
Current/voltage
measuring modules
7
Set current To measure and monitor

0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A 10 ... 100 A 20 ... 200 A 63 ... 630 A
motor currents up to
820 A, matching 3UF18
Straight-through transformers interposing current
transformers are avail-
Busbar connection able for the current mea-
suring modules and
current/voltage measur-
ing modules.
Sizes and set current of the current measuring modules and the current/voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Operator panel Expansion with additional binary I/Os through digital
modules
The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can
replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary
space. This means that SIMOCODE pro or the feeder can be inputs and relay outputs to basic unit 2. The input circuits of the
operated directly at the control cabinet and that the system digital modules are supplied from an external power supply. The
interface is connected externally for easier parameterization or following variants are available:
diagnostics using a PC/PG, for example. • 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 monostable
The operator panel is connected to the basic unit over a relay outputs
connection cable from its rear system interface and is supplied • 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2
electrically from the basic unit. monostable relay outputs
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 bistable
The operator panel has 5 freely assignable buttons and a total of relay outputs
10 LEDs, of which 7 LEDs can be used as required and • 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2
assigned to any status signal. bistable relay outputs
A PC/PG can be connected to the front system interface over the Up to two digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2.
PC cable. All variants can be combined with each other.
The operator panel is mounted in the control cabinet door or the
front plate of, for example, a withdrawable unit and satisfies IP54
degree of protection with the system interface covered.
Operator panel for SIMOCODE pro

• 10 LEDs
• Labeling strips
• Test/reset button 3UF7 300-1AB00-0 (left) and 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 (right) digital modules
• 4 control keys 4 binary inputs, externally supplied with
• 2 system interfaces on the front with interface covers • 24 V DC or
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC
Expansion modules for additional I/Os and functions
2 relay outputs,
With basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V), it is possible to expand the
• monostable or
number and type of inputs and outputs in order to implement
• bistable (the switching status of the relay outputs is also
additional functions, for example. Each expansion module has
maintained following failure of the supply voltage on basic
two system interfaces on the front. Through the one system
unit 2)
interface the expansion module is connected to the system
7
interface of basic unit 2 using a connection cable, for example; 1 Ready LED
through the second system interface, further expansion modules
or the operator panel can be connected. The power supply for 2 system interfaces for connection
the expansion modules is provided by the connection cable • to basic unit 2
through basic unit 2. • of expansion modules
• of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
All expansion modules are suitable for rail mounting or can be module
directly fixed to a mounting plate using additional plug-in lugs. • of an operator panel
Basic unit 2 can be extended on the whole with up to 5
expansion modules. Note:
For the implementation of some motor control functions, in
addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2, at least one further
digital module is required.

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Expansion with a ground fault measuring module with an Expansion of analog temperature monitoring with a
external summation current transformer temperature module
Instead of ground fault monitoring using the current measuring Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the basic
modules or current/voltage measuring modules, it may be units, up to 3 analog temperature sensors can be evaluated
necessary, especially in high-impedance grounded networks, to using a temperature module.
implement ground fault monitoring for smaller ground fault The temperatures measured here can be completely integrated
currents using a summation current transformer. A ground fault in the process, monitored and supplied to a higher-level
module can be used to add an additional input to basic unit 2 for automation system. The temperature module can be used, for
connection of a summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A). example, for analog monitoring of the temperature of the motor
windings or bearings or for monitoring the coolant or gear oil
Maximum one ground fault module can be connected to one temperature. Various sensor types are supported (resistance
basic unit 2. sensors) for use in solid, liquid or gaseous media:
• PT100/PT1000
• KTY83/KTY84
• NTC
Maximum one temperature module can be connected to one
basic unit 2. The same sensor type must be used in all sensor
measuring circuits.
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground fault module

1 input for connecting a summation current transformer
(3UL2 20.-.A)
1 Ready LED
2 system interfaces for connection
• To basic unit 2 3UF7 700-1AA00-0 temperature module
• Of expansion modules
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring 3 inputs for connecting up to 3 resistance sensors in 2-wire or
module 3-wire circuits
• Of an operator panel 1 Ready LED
Note: 2 system interfaces for connection
A ground fault module can only be used with a basic unit 2, • To basic unit 2
product version E02 and later (from April 2005). • Of expansion modules
7
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• Of an operator panel
Note:
A temperature module can only be used with a basic unit 2,
product version E02 and later (from April 2005).

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Expansion with additional inputs/outputs by means of an Safe isolation
analog module
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other
Basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded with analog inputs and in according to IEC 60947-1. That is, they are designed with
outputs (0/4 ... 20 mA) by means of the analog module. It is then double creepage and air distances. In the event of a fault,
possible to measure and monitor any process variable that can therefore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring
be mapped on a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal. Typical applications are, circuits. The instructions of test report No. 2668 must be
for example, level monitoring for the implementation of dry run- complied with.
ning protection for pumps or monitoring the degree of pollution
of a filter using a differential pressure transducer. In this case the EEx e and EEx d types of protection
automation system has free access to the measured process The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of
variables. The analog output can be used, for example, to visu- the SIMOCODE pro system comply with the requirements for
alize process variables on a pointer instrument. The automation overload protection of explosion-protected motors to the degree
system also has free access to the output. of protection:
Maximum one analog module can be connected to one basic • EEx d "flameproof enclosure" e.g. according to EN 50018 or
unit 2. Both inputs are set to a measuring range of either EN 60079-1
0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA. • EEx e "increased safety" e.g. according to EN 50019 or
EN 60079-7
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control
voltage, electrical isolation must be ensured using a battery or a
safety transformer according to EN 61558-2-6.
EC type test certificate: BVS 04 ATEX F 003
Test log: BVS PP 05.2029 EG.
3UF7 400-1AA00-0 analog module

Inputs:
• 2 inputs for measuring 0/4 ... 20 mA signals
Outputs:
• 1 output to output a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal
1 Ready LED
2 system interfaces for connection
• To basic unit 2
7
• Of expansion modules
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
• Of an operator panel
Note:
An analog module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product
version E02 and later (from April 2005).
7/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
■ Function
Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current
• Current limit value monitoring is used for process monitoring
Current-dependent electronic overload protection with independent of overload protection. Violation of a current limit
adjustable tripping characteristics (Classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, value below the overload threshold can be an indication for a
35 and 40) dirty filter in a pump or for an increasingly sluggish motor
• SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors according bearing, for example. Violation of the lower current limit value
to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements. The trip class can be adjusted can be a first indication of a worn drive belt. SIMOCODE pro
in eight steps from Class 5 to Class 40. In this way, the break supports two-step monitoring of the motor current for freely
time can be adapted very accurately to the load torque which selectable upper and lower current limit values. The response
allows the motor to be utilized more effectively. In addition, the of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
time until the overload tripping operation is performed is reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
calculated and can be made available to the I&C system. After
an overload tripping operation, the remaining cooling time can Voltage monitoring3)
be displayed (characteristic curves for 2-pole and 3-pole • By measuring the voltage directly at the circuit-breaker or at
loading in SIMOCODE pro System Manual). the fuses in the main circuit, even when the motor is
deactivated, SIMOCODE pro can also obtain information
Phase failure/unbalance protection about the reclosing capability of the feeder and signal it if
• The level of the phase unbalance can be monitored and trans- required.
mitted to the I&C system. If a specified limit value is violated, • SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage undervoltage monitoring
a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the for freely selectable limit values. The response of
phase unbalance is larger than 50 %, the tripping time is also SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
automatically reduced according to the overload characteris- reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
tic since the heat generation of the motors increases in unbal-
anced conditions. Monitoring the active power3)
• The active power characteristic of a motor provides an
Stall protection accurate statement of the actual loading over the complete
• If the motor current rises above an adjustable blocking range. Excessive loading will cause increased wear in the
threshold (current threshold), a defined and delayable motor and can result in early failure. Insufficient active power
response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case, can be an indication of, for example, motor idling.
for example, the motor can be shut down independent of the • SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the active
overload protection. The blocking protection is only enabled power for freely selectable upper and lower current limit
after the configured class time has elapsed and avoids values. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely
unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping
wear of the motor. threshold.
Thermistor motor protection Monitoring the power factor3)
• This protection function is based on direct temperature • Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the
measurements by means of temperature sensors in the stator power factor varies more than the motor current or active
windings or in the enclosure of the motor. These protective power. Monitoring of the power factor is therefore particularly
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high useful for distinguishing between motor idling and fault events
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or such as a tear in a drive belt or a crack in a drive shaft.
braking operation, but also in the case of speeds lower than • SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of power
the rated speed. SIMOCODE pro supports connection and factor undershoot for freely selectable limit values. The
evaluation of several PTC sensors connected in series on the response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and
basic unit. In addition, the sensor measuring circuit can be delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.
monitored for short-circuits and wire breakages. If the
temperature of the motor increases beyond a defined limit or Temperature monitoring1)4)
7
if there is a fault in the sensor measuring circuit, a defined • The temperature can be monitored, for example, in the motor
response can be configured. windings or at the bearings through up to three resistance
sensors connected to the temperature module.
Ground-fault monitoring (internally) with a current measuring • SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of overheating
module or current/voltage measuring module for freely selectable limit values. The response of
• SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it
currents. With vector addition of the phase currents, the motor reaches an alarm or tripping threshold. Temperature
feeder can be monitored for possible fault currents or ground monitoring is always performed with reference to the highest
faults with the help of internal calculations. Internal earth fault temperature of all sensor measuring circuits used.
monitoring is only available for motors with three-phase
connections in directly grounded networks or in networks
grounded with low impedance. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected can be
parameterized and delayed as required.
Ground-fault monitoring (external) with summation current
transformer1)2)
• External ground-fault monitoring is normally implemented for
networks that are grounded with high impedance. Using an
additional summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A), even
extremely low ground-fault currents can be measured. The
response of SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected
can be parameterized and delayed as required. Fault current
measurement is performed for each summation current
transformer for the following fault currents: 0.3/0.5/1 A 1) Using basic unit 2.
2) An additional ground-fault module with a 3UL22 summation current
transformer is required.
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.
4) An additional temperature module is required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/11

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Monitoring additional process variables over analog inputs Regardless of whether a control command is sent to SIMOCODE
(0/4 ... 20 mA)1)2) pro via PROFIBUS DP using the operator module or via the
• The analog module enables SIMOCODE pro to measure buttons connected to the binary SIMOCODE pro inputs,
additional process variables and monitor them. A pump can, SIMOCODE pro can execute these control commands
for example, be protected against dry running in this manner simultaneously or in accordance with the enabled commands
with level monitoring or the degree of pollution of a filter can defined during configuration.
be measured using a differential pressure transducer. When a
specified level is undershot, the pump can be deactivated These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted
and when a specified differential pressure is overshot, the filter to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of
can be cleaned. freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers,
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the corre- edge evaluation etc.).
sponding process variable for freely selectable upper and In addition, special standard functions are stored in
lower current limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro which can also be used to extend the protection
can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or and control functions, e.g.:
tripping threshold. • Power failure monitoring1) for automatic, time-staggered
Phase sequence detection3) restart of motors following a network failure e.g. with the help
• By detecting the phase sequence, SIMOCODE pro is able to of a separate voltage relay (voltage controller).
make a statement about the direction of rotation of a motor. If • Fault signaling modules for external faults with or without
the direction is incorrect, this can be reported or it can result manual or automatic acknowledgement for generating internal
in immediate shutdown of the affected motor. messages or for tripping SIMOCODE pro in response to freely
definable events (e.g. overspeed monitor has been
Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts activated). Designations/names can also be assigned to the
• In order to prevent plant downtime caused by motor failure external faults which are stored in the device and which are
due to excessive motor operating times (wear) or excessive therefore also available to the I&C system.
motor downtimes, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating • Emergency start function and reset of the thermal memory of
hours and downtime of a motor. When an adjustable limit value SIMOCODE pro after tripping, i.e. immediate restart is
is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can possible (important, for example, for pumps used to
indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or extinguish fires).
replaced. After the motor has been replaced, the operating • Test function for the load feeder circuit when the main control
hours and downtimes can be reset, for example. switch is open to test the control circuit while the main circuit
• To avoid excessive thermal loads and early wear of the motor, is de-energized.
it is possible to limit the number of motor startups for a
specifiable period. Alarms can indicate that only a small Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data
number of possible starts remain. SIMOCODE pro provides a variety of operating, service and
Flexible motor control implemented with software diagnostic data, such as:
Many typical motor control functions have been predefined in Operating data
SIMOCODE pro and are available for use: • The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise, counter-
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters clockwise, fast, slow) is derived from the current flow in the
• Wye-delta starters (also with direction reversal)1) main circuit, so checkbacks are not required through auxiliary
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing contacts from circuit-breakers and contactors
switch); also with direction reversal1) • Current in phase 1, 2, 3 and maximum current in % of the set
• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings current
(also with direction reversal)1) • Voltage in phases 1, 2, 3 in V3)
• Slide control1) • Active power in W3)
• Solenoid valve actuation1) • Apparent power in VA3)
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB) • Power factor in %3)
• Actuation of a 3RW soft starter also with direction reversal1) • Phase unbalance in %
7
• Phase sequence3)
These control programs already include all the software • Temperature in sensor circuits 1, 2, 3 and maximum
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the temperature in °C1)4)
required motor functions. • Current values of the analog signals1)2)
• Time until tripping in sec.
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor • Temperature rise for motor model in %
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not, • Remaining cooling time of the motor in sec. etc.
SIMOCODE pro opens the motor contactor and generates an
alarm indication. Service data
• Motor operating hours (can be reset)
Depending on the application, motor control can be switched • Motor stop times (can be reset)
over or carried out simultaneously from several control stations, • Number of motor starts (can be reset)
e.g.: • Number of remaining permissible motor starts
• From the I&C system through PROFIBUS DP • Number of overload trips (can be reset)
• From a PC/PG through PROFIBUS DP • Internal comments, stored in the device for each feeder,
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel e.g. notes for maintenance events etc.
• From a PC/PG on the system interface through
SIMOCODE pro
• From a local control station on the motor. In this case, the
buttons, switches and indicator lights are connected to the
inputs and outputs of SIMOCODE pro.
1) Using basic unit 2.

2) An additional analog module is required.
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.
4) An additional temperature module is required.
7/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Diagnostic data Autonomous operation
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages (can
also be used for further processing in the device or I&C An essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is independent
system) execution of all protection and control functions even if
• Internal device fault logging with time stamp communication with the I&C system breaks down. If the bus or
• Value of the previous tripping current automation system fails, the full functionality of the feeder is
• Checkback error (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit ensured or a pre-defined response can be initiated, e.g. the
following ON control command) etc. feeder can be shut down in a controlled manner or certain
configured control mechanisms can be performed (e.g. the
direction of rotation can be reversed).
■ Integration
General OM SIMOCODE pro object manager
(as part of SIMOCODE ES Professional)
In addition to device function and hardware design, a great deal
of emphasis is placed on the case of communication-capable The OM SIMOCODE pro object manager is a standard
controlgear on the user-friendliness of the configuration software component of SIMOCODE ES Professional. In contrast to a
and the ability of the system to be integrated easily into various conventional GSD file, it enables SIMOCODE ES to be
different system configurations and process automation sys- integrated into STEP 7 for convenient device parameterization.
tems. For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suit- By installing SIMOCODE ES Professional and
able software tools for consistent, time-saving parameterization, OM SIMOCODE pro on a PC/PG, which is used to configure the
configuration and diagnostics: hardware of the SIMATIC S7, SIMOCODE ES Professional can
• SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated startup and service be called directly from the hardware configuration. This allows
• OM SIMOCODE pro object manager for total integration into easy and consistent S7 configuration.
SIMATIC S7 PCS 7 function block library for SIMOCODE pro
• PCS 7 function block library SIMOCODE pro for total
integration into PCS 7 The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library can be used for simple and
easy integration of SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 V6
SIMOCODE ES process control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function
The parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro can be run on block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks
a PC/PG under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in corresponding with the diagnostic and driver concept of
two functionally graded versions: SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements (symbols and faceplate)
required for operator control and process monitoring. The
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for direct connection to application is integrated by graphic interconnection using the
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface on the device CFC Editor.
(point-to-point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connection to one or The technological and signal processing functions of the
several devices over PROFIBUS DP or point-to-point through SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library are based on the
the system interface SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks, technological
blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODE pro. Users who
With SIMOCODE ES, the SIMOCODE motor management sys- previously configured motor feeder circuits using conventional
tem provides a user-friendly and clear-cut user interface with technology by means of signal blocks and motor or valve blocks,
which to configure, operate, monitor and test SIMOCODE pro in can now easily switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function
the field or from a central location. By displaying all operating, block library.
service and diagnostics data, SIMOCODE ES supplies impor-
tant information on whether maintenance work is required or, in The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on
CD-ROM allows the user to run the required engineering
7
the event of a fault, helps to prevent faults or to localize and rec-
tify them once they have occurred. software on the engineering station (single license) including the
runtime software for executing the AS blocks in an automation
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing system (single license). If the AS blocks are to be used in
parameters online (even during operation). The flexible printing additional automation systems, the corresponding number of
function integrated into SIMOCODE ES allows comprehensive runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data
documentation of all parameters or partial documentation of carrier.
selected or changed parameters.
System manual for SIMOCODE pro
• SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor
expands the user interface with a graphical editor and management system and its functions in detail. It contains
supports extremely user-friendly parameterization with Drag & information about configuration and commissioning as well as
Drop. Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be graphically servicing and maintenance. A typical example of a reversing
linked and parameters can be set. The configured functions starter application is used to teach the user quickly and
can be described in greater detail using comments and the practically how to use the system. In addition to help on how to
device parameterization can be documented graphically – identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the
this speeds up start-up and simplifies the plant manual also contains special information for servicing and
documentation. maintenance.
Note: Furthermore, the manual contains schematics, dimensional
Installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic requires at least one drawings and technical specifications of the system
installed version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004+SP1 or components as configuring aids.
SIMOCODE ES Professional+SP1 (from April 2005) on the
PC/PG.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/13

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data applicable to the basic units, current measuring
modules, current/voltage measuring modules, expansion modules
and operator panel
• Storage and transport °C -40 ... +80
Installation altitude above sea level m 2000
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +50 °C m 3000
(no safe isolation)
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +40 °C m 4000
(no safe isolation)
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)
• All components IP20
(except for current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring
modules for busbar connection, operator panel and door adapter)
• Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring module with IP00
busbar connection
• Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover IP54
Shock resistance (sine pulse) g/ms 15/11
Frequency Hz 50/60 5 %
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1) Corresponds to degree of severity 3
• Line-induced interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports)
kV 1 (signal port)
• Conducted interference, high frequency acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 V 10
• Line-induced interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to ground)
kV 1 (line to line)
• Electrostatic discharge, ESD acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (air discharge)
kV 6 (contact discharge)
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1)
• Line-conducted and radiated interference emission EN 55011 / EN 55022 (CISPR 11 / CISPR 22)
(corresponds to degree of severity A)
Safe isolation (acc. to IEC 60947-1) All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other acc. to
IEC 60947-1, they are designed with doubled creepage paths and
clearances
In this context, compliance with the instructions in the test report "Safe
Isolation" No. 2668 is required.
Basic units
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
Displays
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED Green: "Ready"
Red: "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Off: "No control supply voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping
7
Test/Reset buttons • Resets the device after tripping

• Function test
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug
System interfaces
• Front Connection of an operator panel or expansion modules; the memory
module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system
interface for parameterizing
• Bottom Connection of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module
PROFIBUS DP interface Connection of the PROFIBUS DP cable over terminals or
over a 9-pin sub D female connector
7/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic units
Control circuit
Rated control supply voltage Us (acc. to EN 61131-2) 110 ... 240 V AC/DC; 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.2 × Us
Power input
• Basic unit 1 (3UF7 000) 7 VA 5W
• Basic unit 2 (3UF7 010) 10 VA 7W
incl. two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300 (at pollution degree 3)
Relay outputs
• Number 3 monostable relay outputs
• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs are jointly and 1 relay output is
separately connected to a common potential; they can be freely assigned to
the control functions (e.g. for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling
the operating status)
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts • Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
(relay outputs) • Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current A 6
• Rated short-circuit capacity AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs supplied internally by the device electronics with 24 V DC and
connected to a common potential for acquiring process signals
(e.g. local control station, key switch, limit switch, ...),
freely assignable to control functions
Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC)
• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG cable (solid) AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
• AWG cable (finely stranded) AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
Current measuring modules or
current/voltage measuring modules
Mounting
• Set current Ie = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A; 10 ... 100 A Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
(3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1, 3UF7 1.2) screw fixing with additional push-in lugs
• Set current Ie = 20 ... 200 A (3UF7 103, 3UF7 113) Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail,
screwing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor
• Set current Ie = 63 ... 630 A (3UF7 104, 3UF7 114) Screw fixing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor
System interfaces for connection to a basic unit
Main circuit
3UF7 1.0 3UF7 1.1 3UF7 1.2 3UF7 1.3 3UF7 1.4
7
Set current Ie A 0.3 ... 3 2.4 ... 25 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
(with pollution degree 3)
Type of current Three-phase current
Short-circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in main circuit1)
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range 1 x minimum % 3
set current Iu to 8 x max. set current Io)
Typical voltage measuring ranges
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. UL1 L2) V 110 ... 690
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1) V 65 ... 400
Accuracy
• Of voltage measurement % 3 (typical)
(phase voltage UL in the range 230 ... 400 V)
• Of power factor measurement % 5 (typical)
• Of apparent power measurement % 5 (typical)
Notes on voltage measurement
• Grounded network suitable for three-phase supply with grounded neutral point
• Rated control supply voltage Us grounded mass or neutral conductor is required
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/15

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules

Feed-through opening (diameter)
• Set current Ie = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A mm 7.5
• Set current Ie = 10 ... 100 A mm 14.0
• Set current Ie = 20 ... 200 A mm 25.0
Busbar connection1)
• Set current Ie A 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 M10 x 30
• Solid with cable lug mm2 16 ... 952) 50 ... 2403)
• AWG cable AWG 6 ... 3/0 kcmil 1/0 ... 500 kcmil
Conductor cross-sections for voltage measurement
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Digital modules
Displays
• Green LED "READY" Continuous light: "Ready"
Flashing: "No connection to the PC"
System interfaces for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator
panel
Control circuit
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the variant)
• Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay outputs Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning), all relay outputs are jointly connected to a
common potential, they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g.
for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts • Fuse links, operational class gL/gG 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
(relay outputs) • Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik<500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current A 6
• Rated short-circuit capacity AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied floating inputs, 24 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC/DC
depending on the variant; inputs jointly connected to common potential
for sensing process signals (e.g.: local control station, key switch, limit
switch ...), freely assignable to the control functions
• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
7

Ground fault modules
Displays
panel
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer with rated fault A 0.3/0.5/1
currents IN
• IGround fault 50 % IN No tripping
• IGround fault 100 % IN Tripping
Response delay ms 300 ... 500, additionally delayable
• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1) Screw connection is possible using a suitable 3RT19 ... box terminal. 3) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
2) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46235, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1 sections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2 to ensure phase from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
spacing. spacing.
7/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Temperature modules
Displays
panel
Sensor circuits
Typical sensor circuits
• PT100 mA 1 (typical)
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA 0.2 (typical)
Wire-break/short-circuit detection
• For sensor type PT100/PT1000 KTY83-110 KTY84 NTC
• Open-circuit • • • --
• Short-circuit • • • •
• Measuring range °C -50 ... +500 -50 ... +175 -40 ... +300 +80 ... +160
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature (T20) K < 2
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range) % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
Analog modules
Displays
panel
Control circuits
Inputs
• Channels 2
• Parameterizable measuring ranges mA 0/4 ... 20
• Shielding up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
• Max. input current (destruction limit) mA 40
• Accuracy % 1
• Input resistance W 50
• Conversion time ms 130
• Resolution bit 12
• Open-circuit detection with measuring range 4 ... 20 mA
Outputs
• Channels 1
• Parameterizable output range mA 0/4 ... 20
7
• Shielding up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
• Max. voltage at output 30 V DC
• Accuracy % 1
• Max. output load W 500
• Conversion time ms 10
• Resolution bit 12
• Short-circuit resistant yes
Connection type 2-wire connection
Voltage isolation of inputs/outputs to the device electronics no
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/17

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Operator panels
Mounting Mounted in a control cabinet door or in a front panel,
IP54 with system interface cover
Displays
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED Green: "Ready"
Green flashing: "No connection to the basic unit"
Red: "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
Off: "No control supply voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping
• Green or yellow LEDs for assigning to any status signals, as required
Keys
• Test/Reset • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug
• Control keys for controlling the motor feeder, user-assignable
System interfaces
• Front for plugging in a memory module, an addressing plug or
a PC cable for parameterization
• Rear Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module
7
7/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V for 3UF7
Current measuring Contactors CLASS 5 and Class 10 CLASS 15 CLASS 20 CLASS 25
modules or current/ Rated operational current Ie/AC-3 in A at ... V
voltage measuring
modules Types 400 500 690 400 500 690 400 500 690 400 500 690
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0 3RT10 15 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
3RT10 16 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0 3RT10 15 7.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 5.0 4.0
3RT10 16 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2
3RT10 17 12.0 9.0 6.3 11.0 9.0 6.3 10.0 9.0 6.3 9.5 9.0 6.3
3RT10 23 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2 -- -- --
3RT10 24 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0
3RT10 25 17.0 17.0 13.0 17.0 17.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 13.0
3RT10 26 25.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 18.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 13.0
3RT10 34 25.0 25.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 20.0 22.3 22.3 20.0 20.3 20.3 20.3
3RT10 35 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0
Set current 10 ... 100 A
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0 3RT10 34 32.0 32.0 20.0 25.5 25.5 20.0 22.3 22.3 20.0 20.3 20.3 20.0
3RT10 35 40.0 40.0 24.0 33.0 33.0 24.0 29.4 29.4 24.0 28.0 28.0 24.0
3RT10 36 50.0 50.0 24.0 38.5 38.5 24.0 32.7 32.7 24.0 29.4 29.4 24.0
3RT10 44 65.0 65.0 47.0 56.0 56.0 47.0 49.0 49.0 47.0 45.0 45.0 45.0
3RT10 45 80.0 80.0 58.0 61.0 61.0 58.0 53.0 53.0 53.0 47.0 47.0 47.0
3RT10 46 95.0 95.0 58.0 69.0 69.0 58.0 59.0 59.0 58.0 53.0 53.0 53.0
3RT10 54 100.0 100.0 100.0 93.2 93.2 93.2 81.7 81.7 81.7 74.8 74.8 74.8
3RT10 55 -- -- -- 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 97.5 97.5 97.5
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0 3RT10 54 115 115 115 93.2 93.2 93.2 81.7 81.7 81.7 74.8 74.8 74.8
3RT10 55 150 150 150 122 122 122 107 107 107 98 98 98
3RT10 56 185 185 170 150 150 150 131 131 131 120 120 120
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0 3RT10 64 225 225 225 182 182 182 160 160 160 146 146 146
3RT10 65 265 265 265 215 215 215 188 188 188 172 172 172
3RT10 66 300 300 280 243 243 243 213 213 213 195 195 195
3RT10 75 400 400 400 324 324 324 284 284 284 260 260 260
3RT10 76 500 500 450 405 405 405 355 355 355 325 325 325
3RT12 64 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 194 194 194
3RT12 65 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 228 228 228
3RT12 66 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 258 258 258
3RT12 75 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 344 344 344
3RT12 76 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 430 430 430
3TF681) 630 630 630 502 502 502 440 440 440 408 408 408
1)
3TF69 630 630 630 630 630 630 572 572 572 531 531 531
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/19

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Current measuring Contactors CLASS 30 CLASS 35 CLASS 40 Fuse links1)

modules or current/ LV HRC type 3NA
voltage measuring DIAZED type 5SB
modules
NEOZED type 5SE
Operational class gL(gG)
Types of coordination2)
Rated operational current Ie/AC-3 in A at ... V 1 2
Types 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 690 V 690 V
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0 3RT10 15 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 35 20
3RT10 16 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 35 20
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0 3RT10 15 7.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 5.0 4.0 35 20
3RT10 16 9.0 6.5 5.2 9.0 6.5 5.2 8.5 6.5 5.2 35 20
3RT10 17 9.0 9.0 6.3 9.0 9.0 6.3 8.5 8.5 6.3 35 20
3RT10 23 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 63 25
3RT10 24 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 63 25
3RT10 25 14.0 14.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 63 25
3RT10 26 14.0 14.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 100 35
3RT10 34 19.1 19.1 19.1 17.6 17.6 17.6 16.1 16.1 16.1 125 63
3RT10 35 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 23.5 23.5 23.5 125 63
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0 3RT10 34 19.1 19.1 19.1 17.6 17.6 17.6 16.1 16.1 16.1 125 63
3RT10 35 26.5 26.5 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 23.5 23.5 23.5 125 63
3RT10 36 26.5 26.5 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 23.5 23.5 23.5 160 80
3RT10 44 41.7 41.7 41.7 38.2 38.2 38.2 34.5 34.5 34.5 200 125
3RT10 45 45.0 45.0 45.0 43.0 43.0 43.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 200 160
3RT10 46 50.0 50.0 50.0 47.0 47.0 47.0 44.0 44.0 44.0 200 160
3RT10 54 69.0 69.0 69.0 63.0 63.0 63.0 57.0 57.0 57.0 355 315
3RT10 55 90.0 90.0 90.0 82.0 82.0 82.0 74.0 74.0 74.0 355 315
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0 3RT10 54 69.0 69.0 69.0 64.0 64.0 64.0 -- -- -- 355 315
3RT10 55 90 90 90 82 82 82 74 74 74 355 315
3RT10 56 111 111 111 102 102 102 93 93 93 355 315
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0 3RT10 64 135 135 135 126 126 126 -- -- -- 500 400
3RT10 65 159 159 159 146 146 146 133 133 133 500 400
3RT10 66 180 180 180 165 165 165 150 150 150 500 400
3RT10 75 240 240 240 220 220 220 200 200 200 630 400
3RT10 76 300 300 300 275 275 275 250 250 250 630 500
3RT12 64 173 173 173 152 152 152 131 131 131 500 500
3RT12 65 204 204 204 180 180 180 156 156 156 500 500
3RT12 66 231 231 231 204 204 204 177 177 177 500 500
3RT12 75 316 316 316 -- -- -- -- -- -- 800 800
3RT12 76 385 385 385 340 340 340 316 316 316 800 800
3TF683) 376 376 376 344 344 344 317 317 317 800 5004)
7
3TF693) 500 500 500 469 469 469 438 438 438 800 6304)
1) Note the operational voltage.
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1.
Type of coordination "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.
4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has a sufficient
safety clearance from the rated fuse current.
7/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
■ Dimension drawings
Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C, 3UF7 000 Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V, 3UF7 010
1 2
1 2
1 0 6
1 0 6
8 0
8 0
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 7 8
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 7 9
5
5
4 5 5 3 6 4 5 5 6 5
8 6 4 1 1 5 4
3UF7 100, 3UF7 101 current measuring module (straight-through 3UF7 102 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)
transformer)
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 1
9 4
8 4
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 0 a
5 5 5 6 7
4 5 5 4 0
7 ,5 1 4
T 3 T 1
T 1
3 8
T 2 T 3
6 5
T 2
3UF7 103 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)
1 2 0
9 5
7
7 9
9 5
7 5 1 4 0
7 8
2 5
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/21

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 103 current measuring module (busbar connection)
1 2 0
9 5
3 7 1 7
9
1 1 9
9 5
7 9
7 5 4 7
1 4 0
8 4
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 3
3UF7 104 current measuring module (busbar connection)
1 4 5
5 0 2 5
1 1
5 7
1 4 7
1 2 2
8 5
1 2 5
7
6 0 ,5 6
1 4 8
6 0 ,5
6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 4
7/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 110, 3UF7 111 current/voltage measuring module 3UF7 112 current/voltage measuring module
(straight-through transformer) (straight-through transformer)
9 4
8 5
5 5 5 6 0
4 5 5 3 1 9 2
2 1 6 6 2 0
T 3
7
1 2
T 1 T 3
T 2
1 1
T 1
2 3
T 2
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 2
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 3
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (straight-through transformer)
1 2 0
9 5
7 9
9 5
7 5 7 3
1 4 0
7 8
7
2 5 3 6
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/23

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
1 2 0
9 5
3 7 1 7 7 9
9
1 1 9
9 5
7 9
7 5 4 7
1 4 0
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 8
3UF7 114 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
145
48 25
11
88
122
147
9
125
32
7
67
149
6
NSA0_00404
3UF7 200 operator panel

N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 5
2 9
3 6
9 6 8 2 9 7
7/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 920 door adapter 3UF7 3 digital modules
3UF7 4 analog module
3UF7 5 ground fault module
3UF7 7 temperature module
3
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 6
1 0
3 7
4 6
9 2
N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 8 7
6 8
1 7 3 9
2 2 ,5 5 1 1 5 4
■ Schematics
Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
3/N/PE AC 50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3 PROFIBUS
AB AB
N
PE
PE
/.2
3 2 1 18 19 20 1 2 3 4
-X1 -X19
6 4 2 -F11 -F12
1 1
-Q1
> > >
> >
5 3 1 C 1A C 1,6A
SPE
-A10 X9 /PE A B A1 A2 1 6 -A12
Current detection
L1 L2 L3 PROFIBUS DP 230 V AC
ON< ON> OFF TEST
SYS
SYS
-T10 Device
BUS RESET
SIMOCODE pro C/V
Basic unit Gen. fault DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/Reset
BU PTC
24V 0UT1 0UT2 0UT3 Operator panel
T1 T2 T3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
T1 T2 9 10 4 5 8 2 3 7
7
<1> <2>
1 3 5 1 3 5
-K1 -K2 A1 A1
-K1 -K2
/.4 2 4 6 /.4 2 4 6
<1> A2 <2> A2
-X1 6 5 4 -X19 11 12 10 9 8 6 7
NSA0_00420
<1> Main contactor Clockwise
1 2 3
-X2 <2> Main contactor Counterclockwise
<3> Local OFF
13 21 13 <4> Local Clockwise
-S11 -S12 -S13 <5> Local Counterclockwise
14 22 14
<1> PE /.2
U V W
<4> <3> <5>
-M1 M PE
3 AC
Circuit diagrams for additional control functions can be referred to in the SIMOCODE pro system manual.
System manual Internet
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended You can find more information on the Internet at:
that the 3UF7 970-0AA0.-0 system manual is consulted. http://www.siemens.com/simocode
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/25

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
motor protection and control devices
■ Overview Expansion module
1 1
NSA0_00142a
2
$ PC/system interface
% Four relay outputs, floating
& Eight inputs (24 V, 115 V, 230 V)
Front view of expansion module
Operator panel
4
SIEMENS
Ready
1 Gen. Fault
SIMOCODE-DP basic unit, expansion module and operator module 5
SIMOCODE-DP is the predecessor of the SIMOCODE pro motor 3

management system and offers the solution for a wide range of
different tasks in a single unit: NSA0_00143a
• Multifunctional, electronic motor protection and plant 2 1 2

monitoring
• Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics $ Eight LEDs
% Labeling strips
• Integrated control programs (instead of extensive hardware & Test/reset button for device test or manual reset
wiring) ( Three control keys
) PC/system interface, with cover
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard
for fieldbus systems Front view of operator panel
■ Design Safe isolation

The SIMOCODE-DP system hardware comprises:
All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP (from product version 12,
• Basic unit start of delivery 01/2000) are safely isolated from each other. The
• Expansion module (optional) instructions of test report No. 1610a must be complied with.
7
• Operator panel (optional)

Basic unit Connection and mounting
1 6 Devices with current adjustment ranges from 1.25 to 100 A
NSA0_00141b
(overall width 70 mm) are designed for stand-alone installation

2 due to the straight-through current transformer, i.e. they are
SIEMENS
Ready either snapped onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail or screwed
Bus
7 onto a mounting plate using push-in lugs that are available as
3
Gen. Fault accessories.
4 The main conductors are simply passed through the straight-

8 through current transformer integrated into the enclosure, using
multiple loops, loads with rated motor currents of less than
1.25 A can also be protected.
5 With current adjustment ranges greater than 100 A to 820 A
(width: 120 mm, 145 mm and 230 mm), the devices can be
$ Connection of thermistor of summation transformer directly fitted to the contactor using the connecting rails of the
% Connection of control supply voltage current transformer.
& Three LEDs
( Test/reset button for device test or manual reset A screw fastening for these devices is integrated in the
) Four relay outputs, floating enclosure.
* Four inputs (24 V)
+ PC/system interface
, PROFIBUS DP interface
Front view of the basic unit
7/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
■ Function
Protective and monitoring functions Ground-fault monitoring
For the protection of loads against impermissible high Two qualitatively different ground-fault monitoring functions are
temperature rises offered:
Types of overload protection: • "Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of calculation
The internal ground-fault monitoring is only suitable for motors
• Current-sensitive, electronic overload protection with with 3-wire connection and for networks that are grounded
adjustable tripping characteristics (class times) directly or with a low impedance. In this case, the ground-fault
SIMOCODE-DP protects three-phase or AC motors from current is calculated by vector addition of the phase currents
overloading according to the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1. of the SIMOCODE-DP current transformer. An additional
The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time summation current transformer is not necessary. In fault-free
during which SIMOCODE-DP must trip at 7.2 times the systems, the vectorial summation current of the three phases
operational current from cold. The trip class can be set in six is zero; if this is not the case, a ground-fault is signaled.
stages from Class 5 to Class 30. The break time can therefore Ground-fault currents that are more than 30 % of the operating
be extremely finely adjusted to the load torque of the motor – current Ie are detected.
to optimize utilization of the motor (see also the section
Characteristic Curves). • "Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of measurement
The external ground-fault detection is normally used in supply
• Phase failure/unbalance monitoring systems that have a high impedance ground. An additional
A signal is output for a phase unbalance greater than 40 %. summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A) is required for
The tripping times of the overload characteristic are reduced, this method that is also suitable for extremely low ground-fault
because the heat generated in the motor rises under currents. Detected fault current, depending on the summation
unbalanced conditions (additional eddy-current losses). current transformer: 0.3/0.5/1 A.
• Thermistor motor protection
Temperature-dependent motor protection is based on direct
temperature measurements in the motor. These protective Current limit monitoring I>, I<
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high Current limit monitoring is not used for motor protection, but for
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or process monitoring.
braking operation, but also in the case of a blocked air supply
or speeds lower than the rated speed. For this reason, a wide It is used to detect developing irregularities in the plant early,
range of different temperature sensors are available that are e.g. motor bearings becoming tight (consequence: upper limit
installed in the stator winding or in the motor enclosure. responds) or the belt coupling to the drive machine tears
SIMOCODE-DP can evaluate the following sensor types: (consequence: lower limit responds).
- Binary PTC sensors whose resistance rises sharply when the
temperature limit is reached Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics
- Analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY83/84, which
have an almost linear characteristic curve and can therefore SIMOCODE-DP provides a variety of measuring, operating and
be set to any warning or switch-off temperatures diagnostics data concerning the load feeder:
• Up-to-date information during operation, e.g.:
EEx e type of protection - The currently flowing phase current in %
- The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise,
The SIMOCODE-DP system is in compliance with the regulations counterclockwise, fast, slow) derived from the current flow
for overload protection of explosion-protected motors of the - Manual/automatic mode
EEx e "Increased safety" type of protection according to - Test mode
• EN 50019 - Cooling time activated after an overload tripping operation
• EN 60079-7, IEC 60079-7 • Detection of incipient faults, e.g.:
7
• EN 60079-14 (potentially explosive areas) - Overload warning
- Current limit overshoot
• EN 50281 (areas with combustible dust) - Phase unbalance
• ATEX/PTB test regulations - Thermistor warning
In the case of SIMOCODE-DP units with 24 V DC control infeed, • Rapid diagnostics in the event of an alarm, e.g.:
isolation by battery or safety transformer according to - Overload
EN 61558-2-6 must be assured. - Thermistor motor protection
- Rotor locking
EC type test certificate: PTB01 ATEX 3219 - Current limit overshoot
Test report: PTB EX 01-30013 - Checkback error (e.g. no current following On command)
• Preventive maintenance by means of statistical data, e.g.:
- Number of starts
Rotor locking protection - Number of overload trips
When the motor current rises above a rotor locking threshold that - Tripping currents
can be set, SIMOCODE-DP does not trip according to the - Operating hours
overload characteristic, but switches off immediately instead.
The prevention of unnecessary thermal loads prevents Integrated standard programs for motor control
premature aging of the motor. The rotor locking protection is not
active for start-up monitoring until the class time has elapsed, In SIMOCODE-DP, a number of different opportunities for
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds. controlling the motor has been predefined and can be called up
in the form of control functions:
• Overload relay
• Direct-on-line starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye-delta starter
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/27

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
• Two speeds, Dahlander winding Furthermore, special standard function blocks are stored in
• Two speeds, separate winding SIMOCODE-DP:
• Valve • Automatic, time-discrete reactivation of motors following
mains failure
• Actuator The prerequisites are as follows:
• Soft starter (3RW) - Failure of the three-phase supply must take place through a
separate voltage relay
These control programs already include all the software - The supply voltage of SIMOCODE-DP must not be
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the interrupted
required motor functions.
• Different error signaling modules with and without
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor acknowledgement
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not, These allow SIMOCODE-DP to trip as a result of external
SIMOCODE-DP opens the motor contactor and generates an events (e.g. overspeed monitor has tripped)
alarm indication.
• The emergency start function
The motor can be controlled by any equipment depending on This resets the thermal memory of SIMOCODE-DP
the application: immediately after overload tripping, i.e. immediate restarting
• From the process control system or the PC through is possible (important, for example, for a fire-extinguisher
PROFIBUS DP pump)
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel • The test function for the load feeder
This can be activated by switching off the main switch Q1 (see
• From a local control point on the motor, whereby the the section Schematics) and allows the control circuit to be
pushbuttons/switches are wired to the SIMOCODE-DP inputs checked with the motor branch at zero current.
The standard control functions can also be adapted to each
customized variant of a motor feeder by means of freely-
parameterizable elements, such as timers, counters, logic
operations (AND, OR, NOR, etc.).
■ Integration
The SIMOCODE-DP modular system offers a wide range of • Using the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager
software packages for system-wide and time-saving i.e. SIMOCODE-DP becomes an integral component of
configuration and diagnostics: STEP 7; the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager should, in
• PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service this case, always be combined with the start-up and service
software Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional
• Object manager OM-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in
SIMATIC S7
• Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in PCS7 Both software packages must be installed on the PG/PC on
which the hardware configuration of SIMATIC S7 is performed.
This ensures that Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional can be
PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service called up directly from HW-Config.
Standard PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and Parameter sets created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional
service. It offers a user-friendly and convenient user-interface are loaded into the STEP 7 data storage by means of OM and
for: automatically transferred to SIMOCODE-DP during start-up.
• Parameterization Functions specific to SIMATIC S7, such as diagnostic and
• Display and diagnostics hardware interrupts are supported, which means easier S7-wide
configuration as well as optimal performance in the transfer of
7
• Test functions diagnostic data.

• Motor control
Win-SIMOCODE-DP is available in two versions:
Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in
• Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Smart PCS7
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP through the system
interface on the device With PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP it is easy and convenient to
• Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional integrate SIMOCODE-DP into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP over PROFIBUS or control system. PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP contains the
directly through the system interface on the device diagnostic and driver blocks corresponding with the diagnostic
and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements
(symbols and faceplate) required for operator control and
OM-SIMOCODE object manager for "totally integrated" in process monitoring. The application is integrated by graphic
SIMATIC S7 interconnection using the CFC Editor. The technological and
signal processing functions of the PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP are
SIMOCODE-DP can be integrated into SIMATIC S7 in two based on the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks,
different ways: technological blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODE-
• Conventionally using GSD files DP. Users who previously configured motor feeder circuits using
i.e. integration in SIMATIC S7 is identical to integration in any conventional technology by means of signal blocks and motor or
other DP standard master system valve blocks, can now easily switch to PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP.
The PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP supplied on CD-ROM allows the
user to run the required engineering software on one
engineering station (single license) including the runtime
software for executing the AS blocks in an automation system
(single license).
7/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
Shared data of basic units/expansion units/
expansion modules/operator panels
Permissible storage temperature °C -40 ... +80
Installation altitude above sea level m 2000
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529) IP20 max. set current Ie 100 A;
IP00 max. set current Ie > 100 A
Shock resistance (sine pulse) g/ms 10/5
Mounting
• Max. set current Ie 100 A Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or
screw fixing with push-in lugs
• Max. set current Ie > 100 A Screw fixing directly onto contactor or screw fixing
• Conducted interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
• Conducted interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
EMC interference emission Limit class B acc. to EN 55011 (VDE 0875 Part 11)
Safe isolation All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP are safely isolated from each other,
(product version 12 upwards, start of delivery 01/2000) i.e. they are designed with double leakage paths and clearances
Power circuit from the control/electronic circuits:
Safe isolation up to 690 V or 1000 V between control and electronic circuits
One below the other: Safe isolation up to 300 V
Observe notes of test report "Safe Isolation" No. 1610a.
Basic units
Displays
• Green "Ready" LED Continuous light: "Ready"
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
• Green "BUS" LED Continuous light: "Bus operation"
• Red "General Fault" LED Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
Test/Reset buttons By pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its
functions can be tested
System interfaces RS 232 for connecting the expansion module, operator panel or PC
PROFIBUS DP interface RS 485 for connecting the PROFIBUS DP line using terminals (conductor cross-
sections as for auxiliary contacts) or 9-pole SUB D socket
Main circuits
(with pollution degree 3)
7
• For uninsulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021) V 690
• For insulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021) V 1000
• For uninsulated and insulated conductors V 1000
(3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051)
• 3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021 kV 6
• 3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051 kV 8
Type of current Three-phase current
Short-circuit protection See table Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders, page 7/31
Diameters of feed-through openings
(max. Ie = 100 A)
• Devices with max. set current Ie 25 A mm 10
• Devices with max. set current Ie 100 A mm 15
• Devices with max. set current Ie > 100 A Design with connecting bars
Busbar connections
• Current range A 50 ... 205 125 ... 500 200 ... 820
• Tightening torque Nm M 8: 10 ... 14 M 10: 14 ... 24 M 10: 14 ... 24
M 12: 20 ... 35
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 35 ... 95 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 50 ... 120 70 ... 240 70 ... 240
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/29

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
Auxiliary circuits/control circuits

Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 Hz; 115 V and 230 V 24 V DC
Operating range AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us 24 V DC; 0.85 ... 1.2 Us
Power input AC 50/60 Hz; 5 VA 24 V DC; 5 W
Outputs
• Number 4 monostable/bistable outputs depending on the variant
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs NC contact response can be parameterized by means of internal signal
conditioning; 3 outputs jointly and 1 separately connected to common potential; they
can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for activating mains, wye and
delta contactors and signaling the operating status)
• Specified short-circuit protection Fuse links, gL/gA operational class 6 A, quick 10 A; circuit-breaker 1.6 A,
for auxiliary contacts (outputs) C characteristic
Rated uninterrupted current A 5
Rated operational current AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V
(switching capacity) DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V
Inputs 4 inputs, supplied by the device electronics (24 V DC), jointly connected to a
common potential, for injecting process signals such as local control points, key-
operated switches or limit switches
Thermistor motor protection
(binary PTC thermistor)
• Solid and stranded mm2 1 (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Expansion modules
System interfaces RS 232 as connection to the basic unit and for connecting the operator panel or PC
Outputs
• Number 4 bistable outputs
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs Each with 1 floating NO contact, NC contact response can be parameterized with
internal signal conditioning, 3 outputs are jointly and 1 is separately connected to a
common potential; they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for
activating mains, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)
• Specified short-circuit protection Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A;
for auxiliary contacts (outputs) circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic
7
Rated uninterrupted current A 5

Rated operational current AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V
(switching capacity) DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V
Inputs 8 externally supplied with 24 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC depending on the variant,
jointly connected to a common potential, for injecting process signals such as local
control points, key-operated switches or limit switches
• Solid and stranded mm2 1 (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Operator panels
Displays
• Green "Ready" LED Continuous light: "Ready"
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"
• Red "General Fault" LED Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
• 3 green and 3 yellow LEDs Feeder-specific displays, freely-assignable, e.g. manual/automatic mode, tripping of
thermistor protection, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation etc.
Keys
• Test/Reset by pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its
functions can be tested
• Control keys for controlling the motor feeder, freely programmable
System interfaces RS 232 as connection to the basic unit, to the expansion module and for connection
to PC
7/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 1
Basic Contactors Class 5 and 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 25 Class 30
units
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at ... V
400 500 690 400 500 690 400 500 690 400 500 690 400 500 690
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A
3UF5 00 3RT1 015 6.3 5.0 4.0 6.3 5.0 4.0 6.3 5.0 4.0 6.3 5.0 4.0 6.3 5.0 4.0
3RT1 016 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2 6.3 6.3 5.2
3RT1 017 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A
3UF5 01 3RT1 015 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
3RT1 016 9.0 6.5 9.0 6.5 9.0 6.5 9.0 6.5 9.0 6.5
3RT1 017 12.0 9.0 6.3 11.0 9.0 6.3 10.0 9.0 6.3 9.5 9.0 6.3 9.0 9.0 6.3
3RT1 024 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 9.0
3RT1 025 17.0 17.0 13.0 17.0 17.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 13.0 14.0 14.0 13.0
3RT1 026 25.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 18.0 13.0 16.0 16.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 13.0 14.0 14.0 13.0
3RT1 034 25.0 25.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 20.0 22.3 22.3 20.0 20.3 20.3 20.3 19.1 19.1 19.1
3RT1 035 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0 25.0 25.0 24.0
Setting range 25 ... 100 A
3UF5 02 3RT1 034 32.0 32.0 20.0 25.5 25.5 20.0 22.3 22.3 20.0 20.3 20.3 20.0 19.1 19.1 19.1
3RT1 035 40.0 40.0 24.0 33.0 33.0 24.0 29.4 29.4 24.0 28.0 28.0 24.0 26.5 26.5 24.0
3RT1 036 50.0 50.0 24.0 38.5 38.5 24.0 32.7 32.7 24.0 29.4 29.4 24.0 26.5 26.5 24.0
3RT1 044 65.0 65.0 47.0 56.0 56.0 47.0 49.0 49.0 47.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 41.7 41.7 41.7
3RT1 045 80 80 58 61 61 58 53 53 53 47 47 47 45 45 45
3RT1 046 95 95 58 69 69 58 59 59 58 53 53 53 50 50 50
3UF5 03 3RT1 054 115 115 115 93 93 93 82 82 82 75 75 75 69 69 69
3RT1 055 150 150 150 122 122 122 107 107 107 98 98 98 90 90 90
3RT1 056 185 185 170 150 150 150 131 131 131 120 120 120 111 111 111
3UF5 04 3RT1 064 225 225 225 182 182 182 160 160 160 146 146 146 135 135 135
3RT1 065 265 265 265 215 215 215 188 188 188 172 172 172 159 159 159
3RT1 066 300 300 280 243 243 243 213 213 213 195 195 195 180 180 180
3RT1 075 400 400 400 324 324 324 284 284 284 260 260 260 240 240 240
7
3RT1 076 500 500 450 405 405 405 355 355 355 325 325 325 300 300 300
3RT1 264 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 194 194 194 173 173 173
3RT1 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 228 228 228 204 204 204
3RT1 266 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 258 258 258 231 231 231
3RT1 275 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 344 344 344 308 308 308
3RT1 276 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 430 430 430 385 385 385
3UF5 05 3TF6 81) 630 630 630 502 502 502 440 440 440 408 408 408 376 376 376
3TF6 91) 820 820 820 662 662 662 572 572 572 531 531 531 500 500 500
1) Contactors mountable.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/31

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 2
Basic units Contactors Fuse links1)
690 V 415 V 600 V
LV HRC Type 3NA Type 3ND British Standards UL-listed fuses RK5/L
DIAZED Type 5SB aM fuses BS88
NEOZED Type 5SE
Operational class gL
(gG)
Type of coordination2)
1 2 500
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A
3UF5 00 3RT1 015 35 20 20 25
3RT1 016 35 20 20 25
3RT1 017 35 20 20 25
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A
3UF5 01 3RT1 015 35 20 20 60
3RT1 016 35 20 20 60
3RT1 017 35 20 20 60
3RT1 024 63 25 20 25 70
3RT1 025 63 25 20 25 70
3RT1 026 100 35 20 25 100
3RT1 034 125 63 50 63 100
3RT1 035 125 63 50 63 100
3UF5 02 3RT1 034 125 63 50 63 125
3RT1 035 125 63 50 80 150
3RT1 036 160 80 50 80 200
3RT1 044 250 125 63 125 250
3RT1 045 250 160 80 160 250
3RT1 046 250 160 100 160 350
3UF5 03 3RT1 054 355 315 160 250 450
3RT1 055 355 315 200 315 500
3RT1 056 355 315 200 315 500
3UF5 04 3RT1 064 500 400 250 400 700
3RT1 065 500 400 315 400 800
3RT1 066 500 400 315 400 800
3RT1 075 630 400 400 450 1000
7
3RT1 076 630 500 500 500 1200

3RT1 264 500 500 400 450 800
3RT1 265 500 500 400 450 800
3RT1 266 500 500 400 450 800
3RT1 275 800 800 630 800 1200
3RT1 276 800 800 630 800 1200
3UF5 05 3TF6 83) 1000 5004) 630 500 1200
3TF6 93) 1250 6304) 630 630 2000 CLASS L

acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Contactors mountable.
4) Ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current is sufficiently different
from the rated fuse current.
7/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
■ Characteristic curves ■ Dimensional drawings

Tripping characteristics for three-pole loads 3UF5 001, 3UF5 011 and 3UF5 021 basic units
120 NSA00146 4,5 10

100
7,2
50
12,3
100
20
min
100
85
10
CLASS 30
5
14
25
Tripping time
20
2
1
50
50 5 127,5
20 70
15 f a
10 10
s
5 CLASS 5
b
2
e
0,6 1 2 5 10xI e
Tripping current (average) NSA00148
c
The current-time curves for 3-pole symmetrical load show the d
relationship between the release time from cold and multiples of
the operational current. a b c d e f
If the device is pre-loaded with 100 % of the current setting, the 3UF50 01 10 34 29 46 - -
tripping times are reduced. 3UF50 11 10 34 29 46 48 4
3UF50 21 15 29 24 47 48 4
Tripping characteristics for double-pole loads 3UF5 031, 3UF5 041 and 3UF5 051 basic units
120 NSA00147 g
100 h f q p
50
20
min
10
CLASS 30
5 25
Tripping time
20
i
2
o
d
b
1
50
20
15
10 10
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 4 9 a
s
5 CLASS 5 k m j
e l
2 a n c
0,6 1 2 5 10x I e
Tripping current (average)
7
In the case of 2-pole loading (failure of one phase) or current a b c d e f g h
unbalance > 40 % of the current setting, the tripping times are 3 U F 5 0 3 1 1 2 0 8 5 1 5 5 1 1 0 4 0 Ø 7 4 2 3 7
reduced, because the heat generated due to the unbalanced 3 U F 5 0 4 1 1 4 5 8 5 1 7 5 1 0 5 5 0 Ø 9 5 2 4 8
loading of the motor rises. 3 U F 5 0 5 1 2 3 0 8 5 1 9 0 1 2 0 7 0 Ø 1 1 7 0
i j k l m n o p q
3 U F 5 0 3 1 1 2 5 4 1 2 0 1 3 1 7 ,2 1 3 1 4 5 4 M 8
3 U F 5 0 4 1 1 3 0 4 6 3 0 1 5 1 7 ,2 1 6 0 6 M 1 0
3 U F 5 0 5 1 1 3 5 5 5 4 0 1 6 6 7 ,2 1 7 5 8 M 1 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/33

SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
3UF5 1 expansion module 3UF5 2 operator panel
NSA00151
4,5 10
7,2
60
12,3
100
100
85
98 32
14
NSA00150
50 5 127,5
70
■ Schematics
Reversing starter
LOCAL CONTROL
L1 3/N/PE 50/60 Hz 400/230 V AC 1L1 PROFIBUS-DP 2L1
L2 1N 2N 13 21 13
L3 PE -S8 -S6 -S7
N
PE 2N LEFT OFF RIGHT
/1.3 14 22 14
3 2 1 11 12 18 19 20 13 14 8 1 2 3
-X1 -X19
6 4 2
-F11 1
-Q1
2N
/1.8 /1.3
/1.6 >
2
5 3 1
11
-Q1
12
2 4 6 2 4 6 /1.1
-K1 -K2
/1.4 1 3 5 /1.4 1 3 5
A1 A2 SPE/PE A B T1 T2 6 10 1 2 3 4 5 -A3 READY

-A1 GEN. FAULT
OVERLOAD
CURRENT UNBALANCE LEFT
PHASE FAILURE RIGHT
LOCKING PROTECTION OFF
CURRENT DETECTION
3UF50 BASIC UNIT RESET/TEST
7
3UF52 OPERATOR CONTROL MODULE

7 8 9 11
A1 A1
-K1 -K2
/1.7 A2 /1.7 A2
-X1 6 2N
5 4 /1.4 4 -X19
NSA0_00144b
-X2 1 2 3
-H1
FAULT
2N.
UV W /1.5
M PE
-M1 3AC
Further circuit diagrams for the control functions overload, direct starter and a configuration example are included in the 3UF5 7
online starter, wye-delta starter, pole reversing, Dahlander system manual.
circuit, solenoid valve, gate valve (servo drives) and 3RW2 2 soft
System manual Internet
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended You can find more information on the Internet at:
that the 3UF5 7 system manual is consulted.
http://www.siemens.com/simocode-dp
7/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3UF18 current transformers
■ Overview
The 3UF1 8 current transformers are protection transformers and multiple of the primary rated current. The 3UF18 current
are used for actuating overload relays. Protection transformers transformers convert the maximum current of the corresponding
are designed to ensure proportional current transfer up to a operating range into the standard signal 1 A secondary.
Climatic environmental conditions
Temperatures
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
Temperature changes
• Operation °C/h max. 10
• Storage/transport °C/h max. 20
Relative humidity % 15 ... 95 (indoor, acc. to IEC 60721-3, no condensation)
Air pressure
• Operation hPa 860 ... 1060
• Storage/transport hPa 650 ... 1060
Contaminants
• SO2 ppm 0.5 (relative humidity 60 %, no condensation)
• H2S ppm 0.1 (relative humidity 60 %, no condensation)
Mechanical environmental conditions
Vibrations Hz 10 ... 57 (for constant amplitude 0.15 nm)
(acc. to IEC 60068-2-6) Hz 57 ... 150 (for constant acceleration 2 g)
Shock (acc. to IEC 60068-2-27) 12 shocks (half sine 15 g/11 ms)
Requirements acc. to IEC and DIN
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529) IP20
Rated insulation voltage V 690/1000 (type-dependent)
Rating of the insulation V 600
(acc. to UL/CSA)
Trip class (acc. to IEC 60947-4-1) Suitable from CLASS 5 to CLASS 30
Power loss per conducting path of the Operating range for setting ...
transformers
to the lower limit to the upper limit
A mW (mVA) mW (mVA)
• 3UF18 45 12.5 ... 50 33 (38) 570 (650)
• 3UF18 48 25 ... 100 110 (120) 1700 (1900)
• 3UF18 50 32 ... 130 135 (150) 2400 (2700)
• 3UF18 52 50 ... 200 170 (190) 2600 (2900)
• 3UF18 56 100 ... 400 450 (500) 6500 (7000)
7
• 3UF18 57 125 ... 500 850 (940) 13000 (15000)
• 3UF18 68-3F 160 ... 630 900 (1000) 17000 (19000)
• 3UF18 68-3G 205 ... 820 1400 (1600) 22000 (25000)
Conductor cross-sections Current transformers
(one or two conductors connectable)
on second- on primary side
ary side
3UF18 45 3UF18 481) 3UF18 501) 3UF18 52 3UF18 56 3UF18 68- 3UF18 68-
3UF18 572) 3FA002) 3GA002)
• Terminal screw M 3.5 for connec- for connec- for connec- M 8 M 10 M 10 M 12
• Solid mm2 2 1.5 ... 2.5 tion data tion data tion data -- -- -- --
see 3RT see 3RT see 3RT
• Stranded mm2 2 1.5 ... 2.5 Contactors Contactors Contactors -- -- -- --
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- -- -- -- --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 1.5 -- -- -- --
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 35 ... 95 50 ... 2403) 50 ... 240 185 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 50 ... 120 70 ... 2403) 70 ... 240 185 ... 240
• Connecting bars mm -- 20 4 25 6.30 30 5 50 5
6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 10 ... 14 14 ... 24 14 ... 24 14 ... 24
• Tightening torque lb 7 ... 12 89 ... 124 124 ... 210 124 ... 210 124 ... 210
1) With or without box terminal.

2) Conductor cross-sections for box terminals, see 3TF6 8 and 3TF6 9
contactors in the section Contactors and Contactor Assemblies.
3) With max. conductor cross-section, a terminal cover for maintaining the
phase spacing is required.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/35

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for
short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V1), 50/60 Hz
Overload relays Contactors Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A Type of coordination2)
with 400 V and Class ...
5 and 10 15 20 25 30 1 2
3)
Fuse links in A
LV HRC, Type 3NA NH TYPE British
DIAZED, Type 5SB 3ND Standards
fuses
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG aM BS88
Operating range 0.25 ... 2.5 A
3UF18 43-1BA00 3RT1 015 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 25 10 -- --
Operating range 1.25 ... 12.5 A
3UF18 43-1AA00 3RT1 015 7 7 7 7 7 25 10 -- --
3RT1 016 9 9 9 9 9 25 10 -- --
3RT1 017 12 11 10 9.5 9 25 10 -- --
3RT1 024 12 12 12 12 12 35 16 20 35
3RT1 025 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 35 16 20 35
Operating range 2.5 ... 25 A
3UF18 43-2BA00 3RT1 015 7 7 7 7 7 25 10 -- --
3RT1 016 9 9 9 9 9 25 10 -- --
3RT1 017 12 11 10 9.5 9 25 10 -- --
3RT1 024 12 12 12 12 12 63 25 20 35
3RT1 025 17 17 16 15 14 63 25 20 35
3RT1 026 25 18 16 15 14 63 25 35 50
3RT1 034 -- 25 22.3 20.3 19.1 63 25 -- --
3RT1 035 -- -- 25 25 25 63 25 -- --
Operating range 12.5 ... 50 A
3UF18 45-2CA00 3RT1 025 17 17 16 15 14 63 25 20 35
3RT1 026 25 18 16 15 14 100 35 35 50
3RT1 034 32 25.5 22.3 20.3 19.1 100 63 -- --
3RT1 035 40 33 29.4 28 26.5 100 63 -- --
3RT1 036 50 38.5 32.7 29.4 26.5 100 80 -- --
3RT1 044 -- 50 49 45 41.7 100 80 -- --
3RT1 045 -- -- 50 47 45 100 80 -- --
3RT1 046 -- -- -- 50 50 100 80 -- --
Operating range 16 ... 65 A
3UF18 47-2DA00 3RT1 034 32 25.5 22.3 20.3 19.1 125 63 -- --
7
3RT1 035 40 33 29.4 28 26.5 125 63 -- --

3RT1 036 50 38.5 32.7 29.4 26.5 160 80 -- --
3RT1 044 65 56 49 45 41.7 160 125 -- --
3RT1 045 65 61 53 47 45 160 125 -- --
3RT1 046 -- 65 59 53 50 160 125 -- --
3RT1 054 65 65 65 65 65 160 125 -- --
3UF18 48-2EA00 3RT1 044 65 65 49 45 41.7 250 125 -- --
3RT1 045 80 61 53 47 45 250 160 -- --
3RT1 046 95 69 59 53 50 250 160 -- --
3RT1 054 100 93 82 75 69 250 160 125 125
3RT1 055 -- 100 100 98 90 250 160 125 125
3RT1 056 -- -- -- 100 100 250 160 125 125
1) Voltage tolerance 5 %.
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination 1:
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.
7/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Overload relays Contactors Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A Type of coordination1)

with 400 V and Class ...
5 and 10 15 20 25 30 1 2
Fuse links in A2)
LV HRC, Type 3NA NH TYPE British
DIAZED, Type 5SB 3ND Standards
fuses
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG aM BS88
3UF18 50-3AA00 3RT1 044 65 56 49 45 41.7 250 125 -- --
3RT1 045 80 61 53 47 45 250 160 -- --
3RT1 046 95 69 59 53 50 250 160 -- --
3RT1 054 115 93 82 75 69 315 224 160 160
3RT1 055 130 122 107 98 90 315 224 160 160
3RT1 056 -- 130 130 120 111 315 224 160 160
3RT1 064 -- -- -- 130 130 315 224 160 160
3UF18 52-3BA00 3RT1 054 115 93 82 75 69 355 224 160 200
3RT1 055 150 122 107 98 90 355 224 160 200
3RT1 056 185 150 131 120 111 355 224 160 200
3RT1 064 200 182 160 146 135 355 224 160 200
3RT1 065 -- 200 188 172 159 355 224 160 200
3RT1 066 -- -- 200 195 180 355 224 160 200
3RT1 075 -- -- -- 200 200 355 224 160 200
3UF18 54-3CA00 3RT1 056 185 150 131 120 111 355 250 160 200
3RT1 064 225 182 160 146 135 400 250 250 355
3RT1 065 250 215 188 172 159 500 400 315 355
3RT1 066 -- 243 213 195 180 500 400 315 355
3RT1 075 -- 250 250 250 240 500 400 400 355
3RT1 076 -- -- -- -- 250 500 400 400 355
3UF18 56-3DA00 3RT1 065 265 215 188 172 159 500 400 315 400
3RT1 066 300 243 213 195 180 500 400 315 400
3RT1 075 400 324 284 260 240 630 500 400 450
3RT1 076 -- 400 355 325 300 630 500 500 450
3TF6 8 -- -- 400 400 400 800 500 630 450
7
3UF18 57-3EA00 3RT1 066 300 243 213 195 180 500 400 315 400
3RT1 075 400 324 284 260 240 800 500 400 450
3RT1 076 500 405 355 325 300 800 500 500 450
3TF6 8 -- 500 500 479 441 800 500 630 450
3TF6 9 -- -- -- 500 500 800 500 630 450
3UF18 68-3FA00 3RT1 075 400 324 284 260 240 800 500 400 450
3RT1 076 500 405 355 325 300 800 500 500 450
3TF6 8 630 630 536 479 441 1000 500 630 450
3TF6 9 -- -- -- 531 500 1000 500 630 450
3UF18 69-3GA00 3TF6 8 630 630 536 479 441 1000 500 630 450
3TF6 9 820 662 572 531 500 1000 500 630 450

acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/37

3UF18 43 current transformer 3UF18 45 current transformer
for stand-alone installation: for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm
standard mounting rails according to EN 50022
M 4 9
1 ) 1 )
6 5 5 6 1 0 2
4 5 6
2 )
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 5 5
3 5
8 7
5 6
8 9
7 5
M 4
2 )
8
M 3 ,5
5 6
8 8
0
5
5
1 0
8
9
3
3 5 6 9 4
4 5
N S A 0 _ 0 0 1 5 6
4 ,5
1) Clearance to grounded components.
2) Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
EN 50022-35 x 7.5 or EN 50022-35 x 15
3UF18 47 to 3UF18 52 current transformers
j h
q b 6,2 i
e
d
k
g
l
a a
m
1
n
NSA0_00157b
1 Additional cover, can be shortened
Transformers Contactors a b d e f g h i j k l m n q
3UF1 847 3RT1 044 26,5 25 82 111 122 10,5 90 46 90 105 35 62 89 Ø 6,2
7
3UF1 848 3RT1 045 26,5 25 82 111 122 10,5 90 46 90 105 35 62 89 Ø 6,2
3RT1 046
3UF1 850 37 37,5 71,5 99 114 15 110 41 120 95 33 67 98 Ø 6,6
3UF1 852 42 37,5 71,5 102 122 20 110 42 120 95 33 67 98 Ø9
3UF1 854 to 3UF1 857 current transformers
9
1 1 0
1 3 4
6 2
8 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 7 6
j i 0 ,5 6 1 5
5 0 1 1 fo r M 1 0 1 0 6 6
1 4 5 1 2 7
T ra n s fo rm e rs i j
3 U F 1 8 5 4 4 8 2 5
3 U F 1 8 5 6
3 U F 1 8 5 7 5 2 3 0
7/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3UF18 68-3FA00, 3UF18 68-3GA00 current transformers
For 3TF68 contactors
70 230
c 70 100
14 for M 12 28
12
232
220
210
a
g
b
12
105
140
174
74
e
f
NSA0_00159
230 14 for M 12 0,5 d 15
15
40
170
Transformers Contactors a b c d e f g
3UF18 68-3FA00 3TF68 390 398 30 5 145 175 420

3UF18 68-3GA00 3TF68 410 408 40 8 155 195 450
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/39

3UL22 summation current transformers
■ Overview
The 3UL22 summation current transformers sense fault currents or the SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control device
in machines and plants. Together with the 3UL21 evaluation unit they enable residual-current and ground-fault monitoring.
Summation current transformers
Type 3UL22 .1 3UL22 .2 3UL22 .3
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 690 V 1000 V
50/60 Hz
Rated fault current IDn
• Without response delay A 0.3 ... 1 0.3 ... 40 0.3 ... 40
• With response delay A 1 1 ... 40 1 ... 40
Permissible ambient temperatures °C -20 ... +70
Feed-through openings mm 40 65 120
For Protodur cables
can be fed through max. mm² 4 x 95 4 x 240 8 x 300
3UL22 summation current transformers
a1
a2 a3
b5
b1
b2
b3
b4
NSB00364
a4
a5
A2 Z3
c3
c1
c2
Z1 Z2
a6
7
Type a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 c1 c2 c3
3UL22 1-A 100 75 10 15 for M 4 80 85 72,5 42,5 7,5 40 65 50 40

3UL22 2-A 125 95 10 15 for M 4 100 110 97,5 55 7,5 65 70 60 45
3UL22 3-A 200 165 20 20 for M 4 170 200 100 100 10 120 85 70 55
7/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

LOGO! Logic Modules
General data
The LOGO! modular design is available in different variants for
different supply voltages (12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC,
115/230 V DC, 115/230 V AC):
• Basic variants
• Low-cost pure variants without operator control and display
panels
The LOGO! variants have the following distinguishing
characteristics:
• R: Relay output
• C: Clock/time switch
• o: Without display
LOGO! is simple:
• Warning and switching off in one unit; no other tools are
required
• The compact, user-friendly, and low-cost solution for simple • Non-volatile storage of control program and setpoints
control tasks (e.g. times) in integrated EEPROM
• Compact, user-friendly, can be used universally without LOGO! is space-saving:
accessories • e.g. LOGO! 230RC: 72 x 90 x 55 mm (W x H x D)
• "All in one": the display and operator panel are integrated • Fitted mounting in the distribution box (same mounting
• 36 different functions can be linked at a press of a button or dimensions as the ground-fault circuit interrupter)
with PC software; up to 130 times in total LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:
• Functions can be changed simply using buttons; • Expandability:
no complicated rewiring Depending on the application, additional expansion modules
can be connected
Catalog ST 70 LOGO! is communication-capable:
• Optional communication modules support interfacing to
Information on LOGO! can also be found in the catalog ST 70:
AS-Interface and instabus EIB networks
http://www.siemens.com/automation/
simatic/ftp/st70/html_00/st70k1ad.pdf ■ Function
LOGO! is simple:
• 36 functions:
Integrated basic functions (e.g. AND, OR) and special
functions (e.g. timers, counters, latching relays, PI controllers)
of the electronics
• Program generation simply by combining stored functions at
the press of a key or PC software
• Easy-to-use and simple duplication of the control program
7
with an optional program module
LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:
• Easy modification by reconnecting the functions at a press of
a key; no need for time-consuming rewiring
• Optional operation from the PC:
For creating, simulating, online testing and archiving the
control program on the PC, including documentation facility
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/41

LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Modular basic variants
• Integrated basic and special functions:
- Basic functions:
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative
flank evaluation
- Special functions:
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, text and variable
display, shift register, softkey function, PI controller, ramp
function, analog multiplexer
• 130 function blocks can be combined
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)
• Integrated retentivity
• The space-saving basic variants • Password protection
• With interface for connection of expansion modules
Optional function
■ Design • Additional know-how protection with the optional program
module
• Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal
(not LOGO! 24)
• Integrated front panel with background illumination
(4x12 characters)
• Integrated operator control panel
• Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints
• Optional program module
• Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime
changeover (not LOGO! 24)
• 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs
• 2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs
• 2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used
(for DC variants only)
• Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs can be addressed
7
7/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Modular pure variants
• Integrated basic and special functions:
- Basic functions:
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative
flank evaluation
- Special functions:
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, shift register,
softkey function, PI controller, ramp function, analog
multiplexer
• 130 function blocks can be combined
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)
• Integrated retentivity
• The cost-optimized basic variants • Password protection
• With integrated interface for connection of expansion modules
Optional function
■ Design • Additional know-how protection with the optional program
module
• Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal
• Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints
• Optional program module
• Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime
changeover (not LOGO! 24o)
• 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs
• 2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs
• 2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used
(for DC variants only)
• Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs can be addressed
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/43

LOGO! Logic Modules
LOGO! Software
• Control program generation with the programming languages
FBD and LAD (switchable). How to place the functions on the
drawing board by means of "Drag and Drop" is almost self-
explanatory
• Comprehensive documentation functions:
Various print options permit professional documentation
• Program simulation (offline):
For preliminary text of switching programs on the PC
• Program test (online):
The current values of LOGO! are presented on screen
• Comprehensive, context-sensitive online help functions
The following functions are available:
• Basic functions (AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive
edge evaluation, negative edge evaluation)
• ON delay
• The user-friendly software for switchgear program generation • OFF delay
on the PC • Current impulse relay
• Switchgear program generation for function diagrams (FBD) • Latching
or contact diagrams (LAD) • Latching ON delay
• Additional testing, simulation, online testing and archiving of • Operating hours meter
the switchgear programs
• Interval time-delay relay/pulse output mode
• Professional documentation with the help of various comment
and print functions • Up/down counter
• Threshold switch
• Pulse encoder
■ Design • Twelve-month time switch
• Time switch
The connection between LOGO! and the PC is established with
the help of the LOGO! PC cable (serial interface) • ON/OFF delay
• Random generator
Minimum system requirements
• Edge-triggered interval time-delay relay
Windows 98 SE, NT 4.0, ME, 2000 or XP
• Analog threshold switch
• Pentium PC
• Analog comparator
• 90 MB free on hard disk
• Analog delta threshold switch
• 64 MB RAM
• Analog watchdog
• SVGA graphics card with minimum 800x600 resolution
(256 colors) • Analog amplifier
• Staircase lighting switch
Mac OS X
• Easy-to-use switch
• PowerMac G3, G4, G4 Cube, iMac, PowerBook G3, G4 or
7
iBook • Message texts

• Shift register
Linux (tested with Caldera OpenLinux 2.4)
• Softkey
• Runs on all Linux releases on which Java 2 SDK Version 1.3.1
runs • PI controller
• Please consult your Linux release for hardware requirements • Ramp function
• Analog multiplexer
7/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
■ Function
3RP15/3RP20/7PV function table
Function Function chart 3RP20 timing re- 3RP15 timing relay and 7PV timing
lay and 3RP19 01 3RP19 01 label set relay
label set
3RP19 01-0A
Timing relay energized
Identification
3RP20 05-.A
3RP15 05-.A
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
7PV33
Contact open
letter
1 CO contact
ON-delay A1/A2 7 7 7 A 7 7 7
NSB00858
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay A1/A2 7 7 B1) 7 72)
with auxiliary voltage > 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00859
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay > 200 ms 7
without auxiliary voltage A1/A2
NSB00860
15/18
15/16
t
ON-delay and A1/A2 7 7 C1)
OFF-delay with
B1/A2
auxiliary voltage
NSB00861
(t = ton = toff) 15/18

15/16
t t
Flashing, A1/A2 7 7 D 73)
NSB00862
starting with interval

15/18
(pulse/interval 1:1) 15/16
t t
Clock-pulse, A1/A2 7
NSB00863
starting with interval 15/18

(dead interval, pulse time, and 15/16
time setting ranges each
separately adjustable) Interval Pulse period
Passing make contact A1/A2 7 7 E 74)
NSB00864
15/18
15/16
t
Passing break contact A1/A2 7 7 F1)
with auxiliary voltage > 35 ms
7
B1/A2
NSB00865
15/18
15/16
t
Pulse-forming with A1/A2 7 7 G1) 75)
auxiliary voltage >35 ms
(pulse generation B1/A2
NSB00867
at the output does not depend

15/18
on duration of energizing) 15/16
t
Additive ON-delay A1/A2 7 7 H1)
with auxiliary voltage t1
t2
t3
B1/A2
NSB00868
15/18
15/16
t
1 NO contact (semiconductor)
ON-delay 7
NSB00869a
The two-wire timing relay is connec- A1/A2

ted in series with the load. Timing
begins after application of the excit- t
ing voltage. The semiconductor
output then becomes conducting,
and the load is energized.
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B, 3) For the flashing function, the start between interval D and pulse Di is
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This selectable.
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable. 4) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter H.
2) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter C. 5) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter B.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/45

General data
Function Function chart 3RP20 timing relay 3RP15 timing relay and
and 3RP19 01 3RP19 01 label set
label set
3RP19 01-0B
3RP19 01-0A
Identification
3RP20 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.R
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
3RP15 60
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
Contact open
letter
2 CO contacts
ON-delay A1/A2 7 7 7 A 7
15/18
15/16
NSB00871
25/28
25/26
t
ON-delay A1/A2
NSB00872
7 7 A!
and instantaneous contact
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay with A1/A2 7 7 7 B1)

auxiliary voltage > 35 ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00873
25/28
25/26
t
OFF-delay A1/A2 7 7 B!1)
NSB00874
with auxiliary voltage > 35ms

and instantaneous contact B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay without > 200 ms 7

auxiliary voltage A1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00875
25/28
25/26
t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with 7 7 7 C1)
NSB00876
A1/A2
auxiliary voltage (t = ton = toff) B1/A2
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with 7 7 C!1)

NSB00877
A1/A2
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous B1/A2
contact (t = ton = toff)
7
15/18
15/16
t t
21/24
21/22
Flashing, 7 7 7 D
NSB00878
A1/A2
25/28
25/26
t t
Flashing, A1/A2 7 7 D!
NSB00879

and instantaneous contact t t
21/24
21/22
Passing make contact A1/A2 7 7 7 E

NSB00880
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
Passing make contact 7 7 E!
NSB00881
A1/A2
and instantaneous contact 15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,

after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
7/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Function Function chart 3RP20 timing 3RP15 timing relay and

relay and 3RP19 01 label set
3RP19 01 label
set
3RP19 01-0B
3RP19 01-0A
Identification
3RP20 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.R
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
3RP15 60
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
Contact open
letter
2 CO contacts
Passing break contact A1/A2 7 7 7 F1)
NSB00882
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
Passing break contact A1/A2 7 7 F!1)
NSB00883

15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
Pulse-forming A1/A2 7 7 7 G1)

NSB00884
with auxiliary voltage >35ms

(pulse generation B1/A2
at the output does not depend 15/18
on duration of energizing) 15/16
25/28
25/26
t
Pulse-forming 7 7 G!1)
NSB00885
A1/A2
with auxiliary voltage >35ms
(pulse generation
15/18
at the output does not depend 15/16
on duration of energizing) t
21/24
21/22
Additive ON-delay A1/A2 7 H1)

with auxiliary voltage t1 t2
t3
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00886
25/28
25/26
t
H!1)
7
Additive ON-delay A ./A 2 7 7
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 1 a
with auxiliary voltage and t 1 t

t 3
2
instantaneous contact B ./A 2
1 5 /1 8
1 5 /1 6
t
2 1 /2 4
2 1 /2 2
Wye-delta function A1/A2 7 7 *D

NSB00888
17/18
27/28
t 50ms
2 NO contacts
Wye-delta function *D A1/A2 7
NSB00889
17/18
17/28
t 50 ms
3 NO contacts
Wye-delta function A1/A2 7
with overtravel function2)
(idling) B1/A2
17/18
50ms
NSB00890
17/28
17/16
t t
Idling
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B, 2) For function diagrams showing the various possibilities of operation of the
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This 3RP15 60-1S.30 (see Page 7/48).
does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/47

General data
3RP15 function table
Possibilities of operation of the 3RP15 60-1S.30 timing relay
Timing relay energized tY = star time 1 to 20 s

Contact closed tIdling = idling time (overtravel time) 30 to 600 s
Contact open
Operation 1 Operation 1:
A./A2 Start contact B./A2 is opened when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal on
B./A2. This starts the *D timing. The idling time (overtravel time) is
B./A2 started by applying a control signal to B./A2. When the set time IIdling
(30 to 600 s) has elapsed, the output relays (17/16 and 17/28) are reset.
If the control signal on B./A2 is switched off (minimum OFF period
17/18
270 ms), a new timing is started.
Y
Comments:
17/28 Observe response time (dead time) of 400 ms on energizing supply
voltage until contacts 17/18 and 17/16 close.
NSB00891
17/16
Operation 2:
tY 50 ms t Idling tY 50 ms t Idling
300 ms Start contact B./A2 is closed when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
If the control signal B./A2 is already present when the supply voltage
Operation 2 A./A2 is applied, no timing is started. The timing is only started when the
control signal B./A2 is switched off.
A./A2
Operation 3:
B./A2 Start contact B./A2 closes while star time is running.
If the control signal B./A2 is applied again during the star time, the idling
17/18 time starts and the timing is terminated normally.
Y
Operation 4:
17/28
Start contact B./A2 opens while delta time is running and is applied
again.
17/16
If the control signal on B./A2 is applied and switched off again during
NSB00892 the delta time, although the idling time has not yet elapsed, the idling
tY 50 ms t Idling
time (overtravel time) is reset to zero. If the control signal is re-applied to
B./A2, the idling time is restarted.
Operation 3
Application example based on standard operation (operation 1)
A./A2
For example, use of 3RP15 60 for compressor control
Frequent starting of compressors strains the network, the machine, and
B./A2 the increased costs for the operator. The new timing relay prevents
frequent starting at times when there is high demand for compressed
17/18 air. A special control circuit prevents the compressor from being
Y switched off immediately when the required air pressure in the tank has
been reached. Instead, the valve in the intake tube is closed and the
compressor runs in "Idling" mode for a specific time which can be set
17/28 from 30 to 600 s.
7
If the pressure falls within this time, the motor does not have to be
17/16 restarted again, but can return to nominal load operation from no-load
NSB00893 operation.
tY 50 ms
If the pressure does not fall within this idling time, the motor is switched
t Idling
off.
the pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
Operation 4
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and the start contact B./A2 is
A./A2 open, i.e. there is no control signal on B./A2 when the supply voltage is
applied. The pressure switch signals "too little pressure in system" and
starts the timing by way of terminal B./A2. The compressor is started,
B./A2 enters *D operation, and fills the pressure tank.
When the pressure switch signals "sufficient pressure", the control signal
17/18 B./A2 is applied, the idling time (overtravel time) is started, and the
Y compressor enters no-load operation for the set period of time between
30 to 600 s. The compressor is then switched off. The compressor is
only restarted if the pressure switch responds again (low pressure).
17/28
NSB00894
17/16
tY 50 ms < t Idling < t Idling t Idling
The following applies to all operations:

The pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
7/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm
Standards • Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be
carried out in the de-energized state
The timing relays comply with: • Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" voltage is applied
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays, • The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
timing relays" B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic connected
compatibility" • The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear, permissible when using AC (see diagrams)
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear" • Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This
prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional
3RP15 timing relays, width 22.5 mm damping measures are necessary
• 3RP15 05-.R must not be operated next to heat sources
LED for indicating
"Time relay on voltage" Operating time > 60 °C
adjustment
LED for indicating
"Relay switched" Parallel load on start input
Inspection window for
Time setting set time range L1
range selector
switch S1
Function Inspection window for
switch set function A1 B1
K2 K1
Decive labeling A2
NSB0_01423 N
plate
NSB00895
Accessories L1
Push-in lugs for screw mounting K1 S1
A1 B1
K2 K1
A2
N
Sealable cap
NSB00896

Label set for marking the multifunction relay
7
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/49

22.5 mm
Type 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27
3RP15 31 3RP15 12 3RP15 76
3RP15 32 3RP15 13
3RP15 33 3RP15 25
3RP15 55
Rated insulation voltage V AC 300; 500 for 3RP15 05-1BT10
Pollution degree 3
Operating range at excitation1) 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us with DC;
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
Rated power W 2 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 6 22) 6 1
• AC-14, DC-13 A -- 0.01 … 0.6
• AC-15 at 230V, 50 Hz A 33) --
• DC-13 at
- 24 V A 1 --
- 48 V A 0.45 --
- 60 V A 0.35 --
- 110 V A 0.2 --
- 230 V A 0.1 --
DIAZED fuse4) A 4 --
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500 5000
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC 1/h 5000
Recovery time ms 150 300 150 50
Minimum ON period ms 355) -- 2006) --
Residual current mA -- 5
with non-conducting output
Voltage drop VA -- 3.5
with conducting output
Short-time loading capacity -- 10
(to 10 ms)
Setting accuracy Typical 5 %
with reference to scale value
Repeat accuracy 1%
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 x 106 100 x 106
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 … +60
During storage °C -40 … +85
Degree of protection IP40 cover,
acc. to EN 60529 IP20 terminals
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4)
1 or 2 conductors); for standard 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
7
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)

Terminal screw M 3.5
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 … 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

(to connect 1 or 2 conductors; for Finely stranded
22.5 mm timing relay use • With end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1)
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or • Without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
8WA2 807 opening tool) AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)
Permissible Any
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4
1) If nothing else is stated.
2) Maximum inrush current 1A/100 ms.
3) For 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact -> Ie = 1 A.
4) Ik 1 kA weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
5) Minimum ON period with 3RP15 05-.BW30, 150 ms, until instantaneous
contact has switched.
6) For correct operation, observe minimum ON period.
7/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

22.5 mm
5 86
36
110
62
90
74
62
82
C
A
B
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
A B C
Type 3RP15 1 3RP15 05
3RP15 25-.A 3RP15 25-.B
3RP15 27 3RP15 3
3RP15 10-A 3RP15 40-.B
3RP15 55 3RP15 60
3RP15 7
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded terminal 84 94 103
Screw-type terminal 83 92 102
■ Schematics
3RP15 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)
3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 1. 3RP15 3.-.A
3RP15 25-.A
AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
7
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 A3 15
NSB00898
NSB00899
NSB00900
NSB00897
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
ON-delay OFF-delay ON-delay and OFF-delay Flashing

with auxiliary voltage with auxiliary voltage
3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00904
NSB00903
NSB00902
NSB00901
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
Passing make contact Passing break contact Pulse-forming Additive ON-delay

with auxiliary voltage with auxiliary voltage with auxiliary voltage
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/51

22.5 mm
3RP15 27 3RP15 40-.A 3RP15 55 3RP15 05-.AW30

U = 24 ... 66 V AC/DC
90 ... 240 V AC/DC AC/DC24V
AC/DC42V...48V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC 24-66V AC/DC100/127V AC/DC60V
AC/DC200/240V AC100/127V AC/DC24...240V
AC/DC 90-240V AC200/240V
NSB00905
A1+ A1 15 A1 B1 15
A1 A3 15
NSB00908
NSB00906
A2 U
NSB00907
~
Last A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
ON-delay, OFF-delay Clock-pulse relay Multi-function relay

two-wire design without auxiliary voltage (same functions as 3RP15 05-1A)
3RP15 05-.B, 3RP15 25-1B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 A3 15 25
NSB00911
NSB00912
NSB00909
NSB00910
~
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28
ON-delay, 3RP15 25-1B OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay Flashing
also for 42...48/60 V AC/DC with auxiliary voltage
(see page 8/13 3RP15 25-1BR30)
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21
NSB00915
NSB00914
NSB00916
NSB00913
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 22 24
Passing make contact Passing break contact with Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage Additive ON-delay with auxiliary
auxiliary voltage voltage and instantaneous contact
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 A3 15 21
7
NSB00919
NSB00918
NSB00917
NSB00920
~
A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24
ON-delay and instantaneous OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay with Flashing and instantaneous contact
contact and instantaneous contact auxiliary voltage and instantaneous
contact
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 A3 17 27
NSB00924
NSB00922
NSB00923
NSB00921
A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 Y18 d28
Passing make contact Passing break contact with Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage Wye-delta function
and instantaneous contact auxiliary voltage and instantaneous and instantaneous contact
contact
7/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

22.5 mm
3RP15 05-.BW30/-1BT20/-.RW30 3RP15 25-. BR30 3RP15 25-. BW30 3RP15 40-.B
AC/DC42...48V
A C /D C 2 4 V
A C /D C 2 4 ...2 4 0 V A C /D C 1 0 0 /1 2 7 V
A C 4 0 0 /4 4 0 V AC/DC24...240V A C /D C 2 0 0 /2 4 0 V
AC/DC60V
1 5 /1 7 2 1 /2 5 /2 7
A 1
A 1 B 1 A1 15 25 A 1 1 5 2 5
A1 A3 15 25
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 2 7 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 2 6 a
NSB00929a
NSB00928
A 2 A2 16 18 26 28 A 2 1 6 1 8 2 6 2 8
A2 16 18 26 28
1 6 1 8 2 2 /2 6 2 4 /2 8 A 2
Multi-function relay ON-delay ON-delay OFF-delay without

(for functions see function table) auxiliary voltage
3RP15 60-. S 3RP15 7.-.M20 3RP15 74, 3RP15 76

AC/DC24V A C 2 0 0 /2 4 0 V AC/DC24V
AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V A C 3 8 0 /4 4 0 V AC200/240V
A1 B1 A3 B3 17 A 1 A 3 A1 A3
1 7 17
NSB00930a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 2 3
NSB00925
A2 Y18 28 16 A 2 Y 1 8 d 2 8 A2 Y18 d28
Wye-delta timing relay with Wye-delta timing relay Wye-delta timing relay
overtravel function (idling)
Position of the connection terminals

3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.AA40 3RP15 05-.AW 3RP15 05-.BP/-.BQ 3RP15 05-.BW 3RP15 05-1BT
15/
A 1 B 1 1 5 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 17 A1 B1 15/
17 A1 B1 15/
17
21/ 21/ 21/
A 3 B 3 A3 B3 25/
27
25/
27
25/
27
fo r 1 for 2 For 1 CO For 2 CO For 2 CO For 2 CO

c h a n g e o v e r changeover contact contacts contacts contacts
c o n ta c t contact
22/ 24/ 22/ 24/ 22/ 24/

26 28 26 28 26 28
1 6 1 8 A 2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2
NSB01007 NSB01008 NSB00999 NSB00999
N S B 0 0 9 9 6 NSB0_01605
.
3RP15 05-.RW 3RP15 1. 3RP15 25-1A. or -1B.1) 3RP15 27 3RP15 3.

A1 B1 15 A1 15 A 1 B 1 1 5
25 A1 A3 15 A3 25 A1 A 3 B 3
A1 A3 15
7
For 2 CO For 1 CO For 1 CO For 2 CO For 1 NO fo r 1
contacts contact contact contacts contact c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t
26 28 16 18 A2 26 28 A2
16 18 A2
16 18 A2 NSB01001 NSB01002
16 18 A2
NSB01003
1 6 1 8 A 2
NSB01000
N S B 0 0 9 9 6
3RP15 40 3RP15 55 3RP15 60 3RP15 7.

A 1 1 5 A1 B1 17
A 1 1 5 A 1 2 5 A1 A3 15 A3 B3 A1 A3 17
fo r 1 fo r 2 For 1 NO For 1 NO
c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r For 1 CO contact
contact contact
c o n ta c t c o n ta c ts
1 6 1 8 A 2 2 6 2 8 A 2 16 18 A2 16 18 28 A2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 0 4 a
1 6 1 8 A 2 NSB01001
18 28 A2
NSB01006
NSB01005
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.
1) Depending on the version.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/53

22.5 mm
3RP15 circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits) Control circuit (example circuit)
with 3RP15 74 and 3RP15 76 wye-delta timing relays with 3RP15 60 wye-delta timing relays
For pushbutton operation For maintained-contact operation Legend:
Size S00 to S3 Size S00 to S3 S0 button "OFF"
S1 button "ON"
S maintained-contact button
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC ...V) K1 line contactor
F0
K2 star contactor
F0 95 F 0 9 5
F1 F 1 K3 delta contactor
96 9 6 S1 K4 timer or timing relay
F0 fuse
S0
F1 overload relay
P1 pressure switch
S1 S
4 4
44
K1 K 1 11
4 3 17 17 17 P1
43 K4 K4 K4
17 1 7 18 28 16 14 12
33 13 3 3 1 3 1 3
K4 K1 K2 K 4 K 1 K 2 K 3
34 14 3 4 1 4 1 4
18 28 1 8 2 8 22 22
K3 K2
42 22 4 2 2 2 21 21
K3 K2 K 3 K 2
41 21 4 1 2 1
K2 A1 K3 A1 K1 A1 A1 B1
K4 K2 K3 K1 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1
A2 A2 A2 A2
N(L ) NSB00950a N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 1 c
N(L )
NSB01126
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the star stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the
de-energized state.
7
7/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
Standards • Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be
carried out in the de-energized state
The timing relays comply with: • Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" voltage is applied
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays, • The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
timing relays" B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic connected
compatibility" • The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear, permissible when using AC (see diagrams)
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear" • Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This
• EN 61140 "Safe electrical isolation" prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional
damping measures are necessary
3RP20 timing relay, width 45 mm
LED for indicating Timing relay with multifunction

"Time relay excited"
(left) The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches.
Indicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the
LED for indicating 3RP20 05 timing relay clearly and unmistakably.
"Relay switched" Function
(right) switch The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory.
The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B..
Time setting
range selector Time setting
switch range adjuster,
analog 3RP20 05 with one changeover contact
NSB0_01424
Device labeling
plate Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.A.
3RP20 05 with two changeover contacts

Accessories
Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.B.
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
Parallel load on start input

L1
S1
A1 B1
K2 K1
N
A2
NSB00895
7
L1
K1 S1
A1 B1
K2 K1
A2
N
NSB00896
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/55

Type 3RP20 05
3RP20 25
Pollution degree 3
Operating range at excitation1) 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us with DC;
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
Rated power W 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 4
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at
- 24 V A 1
- 48 V A 0.45
- 60 V A 0.35
- 110 V A 0.2
- 230 V A 0.1
DIAZED fuse2) A 4
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC 1/h 5000
Recovery time ms 150
Minimum ON period ms 35
Setting accuracy Typical 5 %
with reference to scale value
Repeat accuracy 1%
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 x 106
Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 … +60
During storage °C -40 … +85
Degree of protection IP40 cover,
acc. to EN 60529 IP20 terminals
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 or 2 conductors); for standard 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
Terminal screw M3
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 … 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

(to connect 1 or 2 conductors; Finely stranded
for 22.5 mm timing relay use • With end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or • Without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
8WA2 807 opening tool) AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
Mounting position (permissible) Any
7
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type g/ms 15/11
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4
1) If nothing else is stated.
2) Ik 1 kA, weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1.
7/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

S IE M E N S
5
5 5
5 7
5 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 5 0
4 5 5 6 8 3 5
■ Schematics
3RP20 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)
3RP20 05 3RP20 05 3RP20 05 3RP20 05
3RP20 25
AC/DC24V AC/DC24V
AC/DC24V AC/DC24V
AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V AC200/240V AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15
A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 A3 15
NSB00898
NSB00897
NSB00899
NSB00900
~
A2 16 18 A2 16 18
A2 16 18 A2 16 18
ON-delay OFF-delay ON-delay and OFF-delay Flashing

3RP20 05 3RP20 05 3RP20 05
AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00902
NSB00903
NSB00901
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
Passing make contact Passing break contact Pulse-forming


3RP20 05-.A 3RP20 25-.A 3RP20 05-.BW30
7
1 5 A 3 A 1 1 5 A 3 A 1 15/17 21/25/ B1 A1
27
16 18 22/26 24/28 A2
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2
N S B 0 0 1 1 9 6 a N S B 0 0 1 1 9 6 a NSB0_01392
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/57

7PV timing relays for panel mounting
Type 7PV33 48
Overvoltage category C to DIN VDE 0110
Operating range of excitation +10 ... -15 %
Rated power W 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 11
Rated operational currents Ie A 8
AC-1 at AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 600
• When loaded with 3RT16 contactor, AC 230 V 1/h --
Recovery time ms 50
Minimum ON period ms 50
Setting accuracy 0.03 %
• With reference to upper limit of scale 10 ms
Repeat accuracy 0.03 %
10 ms
acc. to EN 60529
Permissible mounting positions Any
7PV33 LZX:MT78750 socket accessory, for 7PV33
NSB01127a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 8 2 b
1 ,5
48
1 0 0 °
7 0
48
3 2 ,3
5,5 64
2 4 ,2
70,4 14,5
3 8 4 9 ,3
Control panel thickness 1 to 3,5 mm Panel cutout 2 6
7PX9921 socket accessory with rear connection

+0,6
0
45
47 20,5 7
7
Frame for panel +0,6

mounting 45 0
47
47
Positioning screw
NSB01124a
33
7/58 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

7PV timing relays for panel mounting
■ Schematics
7PV internal schematics (terminal designation according to DIN 46199, Part 5)
7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34
AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11
2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11
AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V
2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1
A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01109a
NSB01110a
NSB01111a
NSB01112a
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
10 4 3 10 4 3 10 4 3 10 4 3
ON-delay (A) OFF-delay with Passing make contact (H) Pulse-forming with
auxiliary voltage (C) auxiliary voltage (B)
7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34

AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11
2 11 2 11
AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V
2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1
A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01113a
NSB01114a
~
A2 16 18 A2 16 18
. Important!
10 4 3 10 4 3
The terminal designations for 7PV are different from the
Flashing, starting with interval (D) Flashing, starting with pulse (Di) designations for the 3RP1 terminals.

LZX: MT78750 socket 7PX9 921 socket
for 7PV33 timing relays for 7PV33 timing relays
9 8 7 5 3 4 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 1 8 1 6 1 6 B 1
A 2 1 5 A 1 1 8 A 1 1 5 A 2
1 0 1 1 6 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 0 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 1 b N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 2 b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/59

3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors
According to IEC 61 812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021
Type 3RT19 16-2C 3RT19 16-2E

3RT19 16-2D 3RT19 16-2F
3RT19 26-2C 3RT19 16-2G
3RT19 26-2D 3RT19 16-2L
3RT19 26-2E
3RT19 26-2F
3RT19 26-2G
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III to DIN VDE 0110
Operating range of excitation 0.8...1.1 x Us, 0.85...1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency 0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
Rated power W 1 2 (1 W for 3RT1916-2L)
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
• AC-14 and DC-13 A 0.3 for 3RT1916 --
0.5 for 3RT1926
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A -- 3
• DC-13 at 24 V A -- 1
• DC-13 at 110 V A -- 0.2
• DC-13 at 230 V A -- 0.1
DIAZED fuse
gL/gG operational class A -- 4
Switching frequency
• When loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500 2500
• When loaded with 3RT1016 contactor, 230 V AC 1/h 2500 5000
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms 35 200 (OFF-delay,
without auxiliary voltage)
3RT1916-2L: 35 (OFF-delay,
with auxiliary voltage)
Residual current mA 5 --
(two-wire)
Voltage drop VA 3.5 --
with conducting output
Short-time loading capacity A 10 (to 10 ms) --
Setting accuracy 15 %
with reference to upper limit of scale
Repeat accuracy 1%
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100 x 106 10 x 106
Degree of protection IP 40 cover
acc. to EN 60529 IP 20 terminals
Connection of conductors Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),
2 x (0.75 ... 4)
7
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Terminal screw M3
Half sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance Hz/mm 10 ... 55 / 0.35
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
EMC tests IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
acc. to basic specification
Overvoltage protection Varistor Integrated into timing relay Integrated into 3RT19 16
7/60 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3RT19 16-2E, -2F, -2G, -2L 3RT19 26-2C
solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3
for size S00 contactors and contactor relays
45 41
6 4 50
38
38
NSB00985
66
40
5 9 75
45
NSB00988
3RT19 26-2E, -2F, -2G
for size S0 to S3 contactors and contactor relays
3RT19 16-2D solid-state time-delay blocks, OFF-delay

for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors
46
46
25
NSB00986
38
16
NSB00989
5 12 73
33
9 5 38
45
3RT19 16-2C solid-state time-delay blocks, ON-delay
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors
3RT19 26-2D
mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3
45 41
38
NSB00987
6 11 4 50
26
45 38
NSB00990
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/61

■ Schematics
3RT19 circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits)
with delayed 3RT19 .6-2G wye-delta auxiliary switch block
For pushbutton operation
Size S00 Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V
F0 95
F1 F0 95
96 F1
96
S0
S0
S1
S1
13
K1 (.3)
14 K1
(.4)
27 37
(.3) (.3)
K4
27 38 K1 K2
28 38 (.4) (.4)
K4
22 22 28 37
K3 K2 (.2) (.2)
21 21 K3 K2
K4 K1 K2 K3 (.1) (.1)
K4 K2 K3 K1
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00946a NSB00947
For maintained-contact operation

Size S00 Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V

F0 95 F0 95
Legend:
F1 F1
96 96
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "ON" button
S S S Maintained-contact switch
13
K1 K1 Line contactor
14
(.3) (.3) 13 K2 Star contactor

27 37
K4 27 38 K1 K2 K3 K3 Delta contactor
(.4) (.4) 14
28 38 K4
28 37 K4 Timer or timing relay
22 22 (.2) (.2)
K3 K2 K3 K2
21 21 (.1) (.1)
K4 K1 K2 K3
F0 Fuse
K4 K2 K3 K1
F1 Overload relay
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00948a NSB0_00949a
7
The 27/28 contact element for the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with wye-delta function is
only closed on the delta level; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized
state.
Solid-state timing relay blocks

for size S00 to S3 3RT10 contactors and 3RH11 contactor relays
3RT19 16-2C... 3RT19 26-2C... 3RT19 16-2D.../3RT19 26-2D... $ Timing relay block
L1/L+ L1/L+ L1/L+ % Contactor
--- Can be connected
NSB00943
NSB00944
NSB00945a
S1 ✖ Do not connect!
A1 A1 A2 A1 B1 A2
1 1
1
A1 A2 A1 A2
2 2 A1 A2
2
A1 A2 A1 A2
A1 A2
N/L N/L N/L
ON-delay ON-delay OFF-delay

(with auxiliary voltage)
7/62 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Line monitoring
■ Overview
Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection
for mobile machines and plants or for unstable networks.
Network and voltage faults can be detected early and rectified
before far greater damage ensues.
Depending on the version, the relays monitor phase sequence,
phase failure with and without N conductor monitoring, phase
unbalance, undervoltage or overvoltage. With the 3UG46 17
or 3UG46 18 relay, a wrong direction of rotation can also be
corrected automatically.
■ Function
3UG45 11 monitoring relays 3UG45 12 monitoring relays
The 3UG45 11 phase sequenced relay monitors the phase The 3UG45 12 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase
sequence in a three-phase network. No adjustments are networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure and
required for operation. The device has an internal power supply phase unbalance of 10 %. Thanks to a special measuring
and works using the closed-circuit principle. If the phase method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the
picks up after the delay time has elapsed and the LED is lit. If the load of up to 90 %. The device has an internal power supply and
phase sequence is wrong, the output relays remain in their rest works using the closed-circuit principle. No adjustments are
position. required. When the mains supply is switched on, the green LED
is lit. If the phase sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct,
Note: the output relay picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the
When one phase fails, connected loads (motor windings, lamps, red LED flashes and the output relay remains in its rest position.
transformers, coils, etc.) create a feedback voltage at the If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output
terminal of the failed phase due to the network coupling. relay drops.
Because the 3UG45 11 relays are not resistant to voltage
feedback, such a phase failure is not detected. Should this be Note:
required, then the 3UG45 12 monitoring relay must be used. The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG45 12 monitoring relay is suitable
Correct phase sequence for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.
Phase failure
L1-L2-L3
11/14
L1-L2-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
ON 11/12
7
NSB0_01565
21/24
11/14
21/22
11/12
Wrong phase sequence

NSB0_01567
21/24
21/22
L3-L2-L1 LED rd
11/14
OFF ON OFF
OFF 11/12 Phase loss

NSB0_01566
21/24
21/22
L3-L2-L1
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01568
21/24
21/22
LED rd
OFF FLASH OFF

Phase sequence Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/63
Monitoring Relays
Line monitoring
3UG45 13 monitoring relays 3UG46 14 monitoring relays
The 3UG45 13 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase The 3UG46 14 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range
networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure, phase and an internal power supply. The device is equipped with a
unbalance of 20 % and undervoltage. The device has an internal display and is parameterized using three buttons. It monitors
power supply and works using the closed-circuit principle. The three-phase networks with regard to phase unbalance from 5 to
hysteresis is 5 %. The integrated response delay time is 20 %, phase failure, undervoltage and phase sequence. The
adjustable from 0 to 20 s and responds to undervoltage. If the hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition, the device
direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately. has a response delay and ON delay from 0 to 20 s in each case.
Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably The integrated response delay time responds to phase
detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC unbalance and undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect, the
and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. When the mains device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring
supply is switched on, the green LED is lit. If the phase method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the
picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the red LED flashes load.
and the output relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails,
the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops. The 3UG46 14 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of
either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with
Note: manual or auto RESET.
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG45 13 monitoring relay is suitable
for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz. With the closed-circuit principle selected
Phase failure and undervoltage
L3-L2-L1
L1-L2-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3 Hysteresis 11/14

-20% 5% 11/12
3~U n
NSB0_01571
21/24
11/14 21/22
11/12
Phase failure
21/24
21/22
L1-L2-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
NSB0_01569
LED rd
OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Phase loss Delay 11/14
11/12
NSB0_01576
21/24
21/22
L3-L2-L1 Undervoltage
11/14
7
11/12
< Hysteresis
x-y
NSB0_01570
21/24
21/22 11/14
LED rd 11/12
NSB0_01577
OFF FLASH OFF

Phase sequence 21/24
21/22
Delay
onDelay
Unbalance
Hysteresis
> Asy 2%
0%
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01578
21/24
21/22
Delay
onDelay
7/64 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Line monitoring
3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relays 3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relays
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 line monitoring relay has a wide The 3UG46 17/ 3UG46 18 line monitoring relay has an internal
voltage range and an internal power supply. The device is power supply and can automatically correct a wrong direction of
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three rotation. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure
buttons. The 3UG46 15 device monitors three-phase networks is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160
with regard to phase failure, undervoltage, overvoltage and to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. The
phase sequence. The 3UG46 16 monitoring relay monitors the device is equipped with a display and is parameterized using
neutral conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to three buttons. The 3UG46 17 line monitoring relay monitors
20 V. In addition the device has two separately adjustable delay three-phase networks with regard to phase sequence, phase
times for overvoltage and undervoltage from 0 to 20 s in each failure, phase unbalance, undervoltage and overvoltage. The
case. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off 3UG46 18 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor as
immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition the
failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from device has delay times from 0 to 20 s in each case. The times
160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. respond to overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure and phase
unbalance. The 3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relay can be
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relay can be operated on operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit
the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and principle and with manual or auto RESET.
with manual or auto RESET.
The one changeover contact is used for warning or switching off
in the event of line faults (voltage, unbalance), the other
With the closed-circuit principle selected responds only to a wrong phase sequence. In conjunction with
a contactor reversing assembly it is thus possible to change the
Wrong phase sequence direction automatically.
L3-L2-L1
11/14 With the closed-circuit principle selected

11/12 Phase failure
NSB0_01571
21/24
L1-L2-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
21/22 L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N
Phase failure
11/14
11/12
L1-L2-L3 L2-L3 L1-L2-L3
50 ms
NSB0_01587
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N

21/24
21/22
11/14 Undervoltage
11/12
Hysteresis
x-y <
NSB0_01572
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
Undervoltage 50 ms
NSB0_01588
Hysteresis 21/24
x-y <
7
21/22
Delay
11/14
Overvoltage
11/12
> Hysteresis
NSB0_01573
21/24 x-y
21/22
11/14
Delay
11/12
Overvoltage 50 ms
NSB0_01589
21/24
> Hysteresis
21/22
x-y
Delay
11/14 Unbalance
11/12 Hysteresis
> Asy 2%
0%
NSB0_01574
21/24
21/22 11/14
11/12
Delay
50 ms
NSB0_01590
21/24
21/22
Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/65

Monitoring Relays
Line monitoring
3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 12 3UG45 13 3UG46 14 3UG46 15
..N20 ..P20 ..Q20 3UG46 16
3UG46 17
3UG46 18
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 160 … 260 320 … 500 420 … 690 160 … 690
Rated output, typical
• At 230 V AC W/VA 2/4 -- -- 2/2.5
• At 400 V AC W/VA -- 2/8 -- 2/3.5
• At 460 V AC W/VA -- -- 2/8 2/4
Width mm 22.5
RESET -- automatic/manual
Function principle Closed-circuit Closed-circuit, open-
circuit (3UG46 17/
3UG46 18: closed-circuit)
Availability time after application of Us ms 200 1000
Response time on occurrence of a fault ms 300
Adjustable tripping delay time s -- 0.1 ... 20
Adjustable ON-delay time s -- 0.1 … 20 --
Mains buffering time, typical ms 10 30
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6
• During operation °C -25 … +60
• During storage °C -40 … +85
EMC tests1) IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
• Enclosures IP40
• Terminals IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500, 20 m/s2
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 g/ms 15/11
• Screw-type connection M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 … 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228 mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
7
Measuring circuits
Measuring range V 160 ... 260 320 ... 500 420 ... 690 160 ... 690
Setting range V 200...690 160...690
Measuring accuracy % -- ±5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % -- ±1
Setting accuracy -- 10 % 1 V
referred to
upper limit
of effective
range
Accuracy of digital display -- ±1 digit
Deviations for temperature deviations %/°C -- ±0.1
Hysteresis for voltage V -- 5 % of 1 ... 20 V
upper limit
of effective
range
Hysteresis for unbalance % -- 2 % of limit 2 % of limit
value value for
3UG46 17/
3UG46 18
Deviation for frequency fluctuation % -- ±1 %
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce
suitable measures.
7/66 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Line monitoring
k
3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 12 3UG45 13 3UG46 14 3UG46 15
..N20 ..P20 ..Q20 3UG46 16
3UG46 17
3UG46 18
Control circuits
Load capacity of the output relay
• Thermal current limit Ith A 5
Rated operational current Ie at
• AC-15/230 V/400 V A 3
• DC-13/24 V A 1
• DC-13/110 V A 0.2
• DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC mA 5
Output relay with DIAZED fuse A 4
gl/Gg operational class
Electrical endurance AC-15 Million 0.1
operat-
ing
cycles
Mechanical endurance Million 10
operat-
ing
cycles
5 86
36
110
62
90
74
62
82
C
A
B
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
7
A B C
Type 3UG45 11-.A 3UG45 11-.B 3UG46 16
3UG45 12-.A 3UG45 12-.B 3UG46 18
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded 84 94 103
terminal
Screw-type 83 92 102
connection
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/67

Monitoring Relays
Line monitoring
■ Schematics
3UG45 11-.A 3UG45 11-.B 3UG46 16
3UG45 12-.A 3UG45 12-.B 3UG46 18
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
L 1
L 1 L 1 L 2
L 2 L 2 L 3
L 3 L 3 N
L 1 L 2 L 3 1 1 L 1 L 2 L 3 1 1 2 1 N L 1 L 2 L 3 1 1 2 1
3 U G 4 3 U G 4 3 U G 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 7 a N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 6 a N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 8 a
1 2 1 4 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4

3UG45 11-.A 3UG45 11-.B 3UG46 16
3UG45 12-.A 3UG45 12-.B 3UG46 18
3UG45 13
3UG46 14
3UG46 15
3UG46 17
L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3 N
L 1 L 2 L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 9
1 2 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 0
2 2 2 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 4
2 2 2 1 2 4
7
7/68 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Voltage monitoring
■ Overview
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC voltages against the
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. The products differ
with regard to their power supply (internal or external).
■ Function
3UG46 33 monitoring relays Undervoltage
The 3UG46 33 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power
supply and performs overshoot, undershoot or window A1-A2 = <
monitoring of the voltage depending on how it is parameterized. Hysteresis
The device is equipped with a display and is parameterized
using three buttons. =0
NSB0_01585
The operating and measuring range extends from 17 V to 275 V 11/14
AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be 11/12
freely configured within this range. If one of these threshold
values is reached, the output relay responds according to the onDelay Delay
set principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time has
elapsed. This delay time UDel can be set from 0.1 to 20 s like the
ON-delay time onDel. Window monitoring
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 150 V. The device can be
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit A1-A2 = > <
principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output
changeover contact is available as signaling contact.
Hysteresis
With the closed-circuit principle selected
Hysteresis
Overvoltage
=0
NSB0_01586
7
11/14
A1-A2 = >
11/12
onDelay
Hysteresis Delay Delay
=0 Delay = Delay
NSB0_01584
11/14
11/12
onDelay Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/69

Monitoring Relays
Voltage monitoring
3UG46 31/3UG46 32 monitoring relays Undervoltage
The 3UG46 31/3UG46 32 voltage monitoring relay is supplied
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC A1-A2
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of
the voltage depending on how it is parameterized. The device is <
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three Hysteresis
buttons. =0
The measuring range extends from 0.1 V to 60 V or from
NSB0_01582
10 to 600 V AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or 11/14
undershoot can be freely configured within this range. If one of 11/12
these threshold values is reached, the output relay responds
according to the set principle of operation as soon as the delay Delay
time has elapsed. This delay time UDel can be set from 0.1 to
20 s.
Window monitoring
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 30 V or 0.1 to 300 V. The
device can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or A1-A2
closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. One
output changeover contact is available as signaling contact.
With the closed-circuit principle selected > <
Overvoltage
Hysteresis
A1-A2 Hysteresis
> =0
NSB0_01583
11/14
Hysteresis
=0 11/12
NSB0_01581
Delay Delay
11/14
Delay = Delay
11/12
Delay
7
7/70 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Voltage monitoring
3UG46 31- 3UG46 31- 3UG46 32- 3UG46 32- 3UG46 33
.AA .AW .AA .AW
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 24 ... 240 24 24 ... 240 17 ... 275
AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
Rated frequency for AC Hz 50/60 40 ... 500
Operating range V 20.4 ... 27.6 20.4 ... 275 20.4 ... 27.6 20.4 ... 275 17 ... 275
Rated output VA 2/4
Width mm 22.5
RESET Automatic/manual
Availability time after application of Us ms 1000
Adjustable tripping delay time s 0.1 … 20
Adjustable ON-delay time s -- 0.1 ... 20
Mains buffering time, typical ms 10
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300 -- 690 300
Pollution degree 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 6 4
EMC tests1) IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
• Enclosures IP40
• Terminals IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 1-6/1S; 6-500, 20 m/s2
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Measuring circuits
Permissible measuring range single-phase AC/DC voltage V 0.1 ... 90 10 ... 650 17 ... 275
Setting range single-phase voltage V 0.1 ... 60 10 ... 600 17 ... 275
Measuring frequency Hz 40 ... 500 40 ... 500
7
Measuring accuracy % 5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 1
Accuracy of digital display 1 digit
Deviations for temperature fluctuations %/°C 1
Hysteresis for single-phase voltage V 0.1 ... 30 0.1 ... 300 0.1 ... 150
Control circuits
• AC-15 230/400 V A 3
• DC-13 24 V A 1
• DC-13 110 V A 0.2
• DC-13 230 V A 0.1
Output relay with DIAZED fuse A 4
operating
cycles
Endurance with contactor relay Million 10
operating
cycles

suitable measures.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/71

Monitoring Relays
Voltage monitoring
5 86
36
110
62
90
74
62
82
C
A
B
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
B
Type 3UG46 31
3UG46 32
3UG46 33
Removable terminals
Spring-loaded terminal 94
Screw-type connection 92
■ Schematics
3UG46 31 3UG46 31-.AW30 3UG46 33
3UG46 32 3UG46 32-.AW30
A C /D C AC/DC A C /D C
A 1 (+ ) IN (+ ) 1 1 A1(+) IN(+) 11 IN (+ ) 1 1
< U > < U >

A 2 (+ ) M (-) 1 2 1 4 <U> 12 14 M (-) 1 2 1 4
A2(–) M(–)
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 2 a N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 3 a
NSB0_01614
7

3UG46 31 3UG46 33
3UG46 32
A 1 IN M A 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 3
A 2 A 2
1 2 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 4
7/72 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Current monitoring
■ Overview
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC currents against the
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. They differ with
regard to their measuring ranges and supply voltage types.
■ Function
3UG46 21/3UG46 22 monitoring relays
The 3UG46 21/3UG46 22 current monitoring relay is supplied Current undershoot
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of
A1-A2
the current depending on how it is parameterized. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three
buttons. <
The measuring range extends from 3 to 500 mA or 0.05 to 10 A.

Hysteresis
The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be freely
configured within this range. If one of these threshold values is =0
reached, the output relay responds according to the set
principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time IDel has
elapsed. This time and the ON-delay time onDel are adjustable
NSB0_01580
11/14
from 0.1 to 20 s.
11/12
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 250 mA or 0.01 to 5 A.
The device can be operated on the basis of either the open- onDelay Delay
circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET.
One output changeover contact is available as signaling
contact. Window monitoring
With the closed-circuit principle selected
A1-A2
Current overshoot
A1-A2
> < 7
>
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
=0
=0
NSB0_01626
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01579
11/14
onDelay Delay
11/12 Delay
Delay = Delay
onDelay Delay
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/73

Monitoring Relays
Current monitoring
3UG46 21-.AA 3UG46 21-.AW 3UG46 22-.AA 3UG46 22-.AW
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 24 … 240 24 24 … 240
Operating range V 20.4 ... 26.4
Rated power VA 2/4
Width mm 22.5
RESET Automatic/manual
Adjustable tripping delay time s 0.1 … 20
Adjustable ON-delay time s 0.1 … 20
Mains buffering time, typical ms 10
1)
EMC tests IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
• Enclosures IP40
• Terminals IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500.20 m/s2
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Measuring circuit
Measuring range for single-phase AC/DC current A 0.003 ... 0.6 0.05 ... 15
Setting range for single-phase current A 0.003 ... 0.5 0.05 ... 10
Measuring accuracy % 5
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 1
7
Accuracy of digital display 1 digit

Deviations for temperature fluctuations %/°C 0.1
Hysteresis for single-phase current 0.1 ... 250 mA 0.01 ... 5 A
Control circuit
• AC-15 230/ 400 V A 3
• DC-13 24 V A 1
• DC-13 110 V A 0.2
• DC-13 230 V A 0.1
Output relay for DIAZED fuse A 4
operat-
ing
cycles
Endurance with contactor relay Million 10
operat-
ing
cycles

suitable measures.
7/74 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Current monitoring
5 86
36
110
62
90
74
62
82
C
A
B
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
B
Type 3UG46 21
3UG46 22
Removable terminals
Spring-loaded terminal 94
Screw-type terminal 92
■ Schematics
3UG46 21-.AA30 3UG46 21-.AW30
3UG46 22-.AA30 3UG46 22-.AW30
AC/DC U Load AC/DC U Load
Load Load
A1(+) IN(+) 11 A1(+) IN(+) 11
< >
12 14 < >
12 14
A2(–) M(–) A2(–) M(–)
NSB0_01534a NSB0_01535a
7
3UG46 21
3UG46 22
A 1 IN M
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 1 1
A 2
1 2 1 1 1 4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/75

Monitoring Relays
Power factor monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG30 14 power factor monitoring device enables the load
monitoring of motors.
■ Function
The 3UG30 14 monitoring relay is used for monitoring the load of Note:
motors by measuring the phase angle between voltage and
current, i.e. the power factor. The output relays respond as long Power factor monitoring relays are connected in series after the
as the power factor lies between the upper and lower thresholds. motor contactor to ensure that the delay time for bridging start-
These are set separately on the front using two potentiometers. up elapses after switch-on. For this reason, the output relay must
not be connected in series with the supply voltage of the motor
When the value of the power factor lies outside this range, the contactor, otherwise it would not be possible to switch on the
corresponding output relay will drop after a delay time T1, that load feeder. The minimum current must be at least 0.2 A.
can be set on the front, has elapsed. A fixed hysteresis prevents
the output relay from continuously switching on and off when the 1 N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 9
measured value is close to the threshold. 2
The ON-delay T2 can be used to suppress the effects of motor 2

start-up. 3
c o s
T 2 T 1
4
T 1
Important 5
It is important to ensure that the phases are connected in the 1 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m a x

correct sequence L1-L2-L3, otherwise the power factor will be 2 H y s te r e s is
evaluated incorrectly. 3 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m in
4 O u tp u t r e la y c o s > c o s m a x
( te r m in a ls 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 4 )
5 O u tp u t r e la y c o s < c o s m in
( te r m in a ls 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 4 )
Type 3UG30/3UG35
Load capacity of the output relay Rated operational current Ie A max. 8
AC-15/230 V A 3
DC-13/24 V A 1
DC-13/48 V A 0.45
DC-13/60 V A 0.35
DC-13/110 V A 0.2
DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Minimum contact load mA 5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay with DIAZED fuse1) gl/Gg operational class A 4
Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1 x 105
Ambient temperature During operation °C -20 ... + 50
7
During storage °C -30 ... + 70

Connection of conductors Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Finely stranded, with end sleeves mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection Terminals IP20
Enclosures IP40
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to DIN VDE 0660,
Part 200.
7/76 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Power factor monitoring
Rated control supply voltage Us V see Catalog LV 1 (L1/L2 also used to supply units)
Voltage tolerance V 0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Maximum power consumption VA 3
Frequency of the monitored line Hz 50 ... 60
Setting range of power factor 0.1 ... 0.99 for lower and upper threshold
Hysteresis fixed % 10 for power factor 0.4
10 ... 30 for power factor 0.4
Setting accuracy % 10 referred to upper limit of effective range
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 0.8
Deviations for temperature fluctuations % 0.05/K
Delay time T2, ON-delay s 0.5 ... 20; 20 %
T1 after reaching the threshold s 0.3 ... 3; 20 %
Input circuit current range A 0.5 ... 10
Input circuit peak current (< 1 s) A 50
Input circuit input resistor L1/L2/L3 kW 2
Input circuit input resistor current IN1 W 0.02
Currents > 10 A only with current transformer.
3UG30 14
100
57
79
90
NSB00982
45 77
100
■ Schematics
3UG30 14
Three-phase operation, I < 10 A~
L1
L2 M
L3
L1 L2 L3 IN1
< p. f. 11 > p. f. 21
> p. f. <
7
NSB01130b 12 14 22 24
3UG30 14
Three-phase operation, I > 10 A~
L1
L2 M
K(P1 ) L(P2 )
L3
k(S 1) l(S 2)
external current
L1 L2 L3 IN1 transformer
< p. f. 11 > p. f. 21
> p. f. <
NSB0_01131c 12 14 22 24
3UG30 14
Single-phase operation, 230 V~
L
N
Load
L1 L2 L3 IN1
< p. f. 11 > p. f. 21
> p. f. <
NSB01132b 12 14 22 24
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/77

Monitoring Relays
Insulation monitoring
■ Overview
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between the • Test function with test button and terminal connections on the
ungrounded single or three-phase AC supply and a protective front
ground conductor: • Switching output: 1 CO contact
• Measuring principle with superimposed DC voltage • Insulation fault indication with a red LED
• Two selectable measuring ranges of 1 ... 110 kW • Supply voltage indication with a green LED
• Stepless setting within the measuring range • Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and
• Selectable: EN 61000-6-2.
- Auto reset function with fixed hysteresis or
- Storage of the tripping operation
■ Function
The monitoring relay measures the insulation resistance Note:
between the ungrounded AC supply and an associated
protective ground conductor. The monitoring relay is designed for AC supply systems.
Series-connected rectifiers must be galvanically isolated from
A superposed DC measuring voltage is used to perform the the measuring relay that is to be monitored.
measurement.
The monitoring relay is divided into two ranges for an insulation NSB0_01393
1 A1/A2 1 = Supply voltage
resistance range from 1 to 100 kW. A range switch on the front A1/B2
A1-B2/A1-A2 for
can be used to switch over between a 1 to 11 kW range and a 2 Y1/Y2
115 V/230 V AC
10 to 110 kW range. Within the selected range, the monitoring 3 Y1/PE A1-A2 for 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
2 = Remote connection-
relay can be steplessly adapted to the respective insulation
save-reset
conditions. 1.6 x R value 3 = Key on the front -
4 R
test/reset
If the insulation resistance undershoots the set threshold, the R value 4 = Insulation resistance R
output relay is excited and the red LED (fault display) is lit. of network
5 11/14 Set operating value R
11/12
If the insulation resistance exceeds 1.6 times (corresponding to Test
5 = NO contact
60 % hysteresis) the set threshold, the output relay will return to Test = > approx. 300 ms
the rest position.
Test functions
The "Test" button on the front can be used to simulate a ground
fault. If the "Test" button is pressed for at least 300 ms, the output
relay is energized and the fault LED lights up. An external test
button can be connected to terminal Y1. The function is
activated by closing (> 300 ms).
Fault storage and RESET

If terminals Y1 and Y2 are jumpered, the monitoring relay is set
to fault storage mode. If the set insulation resistance is under-
7
shot, the output relay is excited and remains tripped even after
the insulation resistance rises above 1.6 times the set value
again. Fault storage can be reset by briefly pressing the RESET
button, briefly jumpering (< 300 ms) the Y1 and PE/ground
terminals or by switching off and on the supply voltage.
7/78 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
3UG3 081
Control circuits
Operating range of the control supply voltage -15 % ... +10 %
Rated power 24 ... 240 V AC/DC VA/W 8/2
110 ... 130 V AC VA 3
220 ... 240 V AC VA 3
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage Hz 50 ... 60
Measurement circuits L/PE/ground
• Operating value k 1 ... 110
• Minimum internal resistance for AC k 100
• Minimum internal resistance for DC k 100
• DC measurement voltage V 30 DC
• Insulation voltage V 415 AC
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m) Y1-Y2
• Delay time in case of response s 1
Output relay 1 CO contact,
open-circuit principle
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui between supply, measurement, V 400 acc. to IEC 60947-1
and output circuit
Overvoltage category acc. to IEC 664 III
Degree of pollution acc. to IEC 664 3
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303 kV 4
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 g/ms 10
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
• During operation °C -25 ... 65
• During storage °C -40 ... 85
Conductor cross-section Solid mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
100
57
79
90
7
NSB00982
45 77
100
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/79

Monitoring Relays
■ Overview
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between • Front selector switch for open-circuit and closed-circuit
ungrounded pure DC networks and a protective-ground principle for the output relay
conductor: • Test function with test buttons on the front for L+ and L-
• Measuring principle for differential current measurement and over terminal connections
• Response threshold can be set continuously from • Switching output: 1 CO contact
10 to 110 kW • Insulation fault indicator for L+ and L- through two red LEDs
• Selectable • Supply voltage indication with a green LED
- Auto reset function with hysteresis or
- Storage of the tripping operation • Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and
EN 61000-6-2
■ Function
The monitoring relay measures the insulation voltage between Open/closed-circuit principle selector switch
the positive and negative supply voltage in an ungrounded DC
network and a corresponding protective conductor. The function principle of the output relay can be adjusted by
means of a selector switch on the front panel.
The measurement is based on the DC residual current
measurement principle. The response value can be adjusted If the relay is to respond in the event of a fault (contact symbol
steplessly in the range from 10 to 110 kW and thus can be open), the open-circuit principle must be selected. If the relay
adapted to the corresponding conditions. If the insulation however is to trigger in the event of a fault (contact symbol
resistance falls below the set response value, the output relay closed), the closed-circuit principle must be selected.
triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed-circuit
principle selector switch) and a fault LED lights up.
Note:
A ground fault is evaluated separately for L+ and L- and
indicated by means of a corresponding LED. The position of the selector switch has no effect upon the fault
LEDs. The LEDs always light up if the insulation resistance on L+
Note: or L– falls below the set value.
Due to the measurement principle, a symmetrical ground fault on N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 9 5
1
1 A 1 /A 2 = S u p p ly v o lta g e
terminals L+ and L- cannot be evaluated. 2 = B u tto n o n fro n t -
2
3 Y 3 /Y 4 R e s e t L + a n d L - /
4 Y 1 /Y 3 T e s t L +
5 Y 2 /Y 3 3 = B u tto n o n fro n t - T e s t L -
Test function L + /P E R R H y s t T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
6 L -/P E T e s t L -
A ground fault can be simulated using the Test L+ and Test L- R v a lu e
O p e n - 4 = T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
c ir c u it /
buttons on the front. If the test button is pressed for at least 1 s, c lo s e d -
T e s t L +
7 c ir c u it 5 = T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
the status of the output relay changes and the corresponding p r in c ip le
S to re , re s e t
fault LED lights up. 8 1 1 /1 4
1 1 /1 2 6 = In s u la tio n r e s is ta n c e R
T e s t > s o f s u p p ly
An external test button can be connected to terminals Y1-Y3 for s e t r e s p o n s e v a lu e R
L+ and terminals Y4-Y3 for L-. The function is triggered by T e s t = a p p ro x . 1 s 7 = S w itc h o n fr o n t
R H y s t = ty p ic a lly 2 x R x O p e n - c ir c u it /
means of a NO contact.
c lo s e d - c ir c u it p r in c ip le
8 = N O c o n ta c t
Fault storage and RESET

7
If terminals Y2 and Y3 are linked, the monitoring relay is set to

fault storage mode.
If the insulation resistance falls below the set value, the output
relay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed
circuit selector switch), and stays in this state even if the
insulation resistance rises again above the hysteresis value
(typical: 2 times the set value). This fault storage can be deleted
by pressing and releasing the L+ RESET button, opening the
Y2-Y3 connection or by switching off the supply voltage.
7/80 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
3UG30 82
Control circuits
Operating range of the control supply voltage -15 % ... +10 %
Rated power 24 ... 240 V AC VA/W 8/2
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage Hz 50 ... 60
Measuring circuits
• Operating value k 10 ... 110
• Minimum internal resistance for DC k 57
• Measurement DC voltage V 24 ... 240
• Max. DC insulation voltage (L+/PE/ground, L-/PE/ground) V DC 300
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m) Y1/Y3, Y4/Y3
• Delay time in case of response s 1
Output relay 1 changeover contact, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui between supply, measurement, V 400
Insulation resistance and output circuit
Overvoltage category acc. to IEC 664 III
Degree of pollution acc. to IEC 664 3
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303 V 4000
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 g/ms 10
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
• During operation °C -25 ... + 65
• During storage °C -40 ... + 85
Permissible mounting position any
Conductor cross-section Solid mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 2.5
100
57
79
90
NSB00982
45 77
7
100
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/81

Monitoring Relays
Level monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG35 01 level monitoring relay is used together with the
2- or 3-pole sensors to monitor the levels of conductive liquids.
■ Function
The principle of operation is based on measuring the electrical Note:
resistance of the liquid between two immersion sensors and a
reference terminal. If the measured value is lower than the It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min
sensitivity set at the front, the output relay changes its switching and Max terminals in the range 5 to 100 kW, e.g. photoresistors,
state. In order to exclude electrolytic phenomena in the liquid, temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance etc.
the sensors are supplied with alternating current. The monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other
applications apart from monitoring the levels of liquids.
Two-level control: the output relay changes its switching state as
soon as the liquid level reaches the maximum sensor, while the
minimum sensor is submerged. The relay returns to its original A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 1
switching state as soon as the minimum sensor no longer has
contact with the liquid. T 3
3
1
For safe resetting, the supply voltage must be interrupted for
at least 0.5 s (T3). 2
The delay times T1 and T2 of the output relay have not been 4
included in the diagram in order to enhance clarity. 5
1 M a x im u m le v e l 1)
2 M in im u m le v e l 1)
3 M o n ito r e d le v e l
4 O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n O V E R
5 O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n U N D E R
1 ) D e te r m in e d b y th e a r r a n g e m e n t
o f th e p r o b e s in th e m o n ito r e d liq u id .
7
7/82 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Level monitoring
Type 3UG30/3UG35
AC-15/230 V A 3
DC-13/24 V A 1
DC-13/48 V A 0.45
DC-13/60 V A 0.35
DC-13/110 V A 0.2
DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Enclosures IP40
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
Rated control supply voltage Us V see Catalog LV 1 (electrical isolation by means of a transformer)
Voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Maximum power consumption W/VA 3/6
Function Inlet or outlet monitoring UNDER/OVER selector switch at the front
Sensitivity Adjustable kW 5 ... 100
Setting accuracy at maximum sensitivity % 30
Sensor length max. m 100
Electrode voltage max. V 24 (50/60 Hz)
Electrode current max. mA 1 (50/60 Hz)
Conductor capacity of the sensor cable1) nF 10
Delay time
• T1 at Max/M terminal ms Typical 500 (ON-delay with OVER, OFF-delay with UNDER)
• T2 at Min/M terminal ms Typical 300 (OFF-delay with OVER, ON-delay with UNDER)
Mains buffering time ms 300
1) The sensor cable does not necessarily have to be shielded, but it is not
recommended to lay this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also
possible to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected
7
to the M terminal.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/83

Monitoring Relays
Level monitoring
3UG35 01
100
57
79
90
NSB00983
22,5 77
100
Level monitoring sensors

3UG32 07-3A 3UG32 07-1B
three-pole wire electrode single-pole bow electrode
SW 22
NSB00991a
NSB00994
0,5
15 15
SW 22 6±1 7±1
15
15
3UG32 07-1C
single-pole electrode, rugged design
500
5
SW 22
3UG32 07-2A
two-pole wire electrode
15
15
NSB00992
40
PTFE-
50
insulation
SW 22
NSB00995
15
15
500
5
3UG32 07-2B
two-pole bow electrode
7
SW 22
NSB00993a
0,5
5
15 15
6±1 7±1
■ Schematics
3UG35 01
AC
A1 M Min Max
11
R ><
A2 12 14
NSB00970
7/84 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Speed monitoring
■ Overview
The 3UG30 51 monitoring relay is used together with a sensor to
monitor drives for underspeeding.
■ Function
The underspeed monitoring relay operates according to the Speed monitoring with memory (MEMORY)
principle of retriggerable OFF-delay. During the time (value) set
on the front panel, another pulse must arrive at input IN1 or IN2 When the output relay drops, this state remains stored even
to ensure that the output relay remains picked up. The when the speed reaches a permissible value again. The stored
monitoring relay evaluates the rising edge of the signal, i.e. state can be ended by a control signal at the reset terminal or by
a continuous signal is also recognized as a missing pulse. If the interrupting the supply voltage for at least 200 ms.
retrigger pulse does not arrive, indicating a reduction in speed, A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 6
the output relay drops. In order to be able to start a drive, the
1 S e t v a lu e
output relay remains picked up during the ON-delay time T, even 5 2 H y s te r e s is
3
if the speed is still below the set value (motor starting override 2 3 A c tu a l v a lu e
time). The first pulse must come within this time. 1 4 O u tp u t r e la y
5 R e s e t
The monitoring relay can be used for all functions where a T T
6 S to ra g e (M E M O R Y )
continuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (belt travel 4
monitoring, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring, 6 6

clock-time monitoring).
Speed monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY)
When the speed of the drive drops below the set value, the
output relay drops. It picks up again when the speed is greater
than the set value plus the fixed hysteresis.
A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 5
3 1 S e t v a lu e
2
1 2 H y s te r e s is
3 A c tu a l v a lu e
T 4 O u tp u t r e la y
4
Type 3UG30/3UG35
AC-15/230 V A 3
DC-13/24 V A 1
DC-13/48 V A 0.45
DC-13/60 V A 0.35
DC-13/110 V A 0.2
DC-13/230 V A 0.1
7
Enclosures IP40
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/85

Monitoring Relays
Speed monitoring
Type 3UG30 51
Rated control supply voltage Us V See Catalog LV 1 (for AC voltages with electrical isolation by means of
transformer, 24 V DC without electrical isolation)
Voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Maximum power consumption W/VA 4/5
Set value % Adjustable to 10 ... 100 of the selected time setting range
Hysteresis % Typical 5 of the set value
Setting accuracy % 10 referred to upper limit of time setting range
Deviations with temperature fluctuations %/°C 0.1
ON-delay T s Adjustable to 0.3 ... 30 10 %
Signal input IN11) (Input resistance 16 k) V Max. voltage 30, 3-wire sensor, pnp operation
Signal input IN21) (Input resistance 1 k) Floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor
Voltage level for reliable operation Level 1 V 4.5 ... 30
Level 0 V 0 up to 1
Sensor supply +24 V/0 V mA max. 50 at 24 V (20 ... 35 V) DC
+8 V2 mA 1 DC 8.2 V
Measuring range,
selectable (rotary switch on front)
Time setting range
• 0.1 ... 1 s
- Frequency Hz 10 ... 1
- Revolutions min-1 600 ... 60
• 1 ... 10 s
- Frequency Hz 1 ... 0.1
• 0.1 ... 1 min
- Frequency Hz 0.17 ... 0.017
• 1 ... 10 min
- Frequency Hz 0.017 ... 0.0017
- Revolutions min-1 1 ... 0.1
- Minimum pulse duration of signal ms 5
- Minimum interval between 2 pulses 5
Function mode setting with or without memory Rotary switch on front panel
Mains buffering time ms 10
1) The sensors are not included in the scope of supply.
7
100
57
79
90
NSB00982
45 77
100
■ Schematics
+ U -
AC/ PNP
DC
+ A1 +24 V RES IN1 0V

11
n < Value
_
A2 IN2 + 8V2 12 14
NSB00976c
+ NAMUR
7/86 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
■ Overview
The 3RS10 and 3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.
The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium,
Temperature
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or setting
undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window LED for display
function). LED "Device on voltage"

"Up and Down" keys
The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two LED "Relay switched" Rotary switch for
parameter selection
threshold values, digital units to DIN 3440, which are also a good Hysteresis switch
alternative to temperature controls for the low-end range, and NSB0_01421
digital units for up to 3 sensors which have been optimized for

monitoring large motors.
■ Design
The temperature monitoring relays comply with: Temperature drift depending on the length and cross-section of
• IEC 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" the leads with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of
20 °C, in K:
• IEC 60947-5-1; VDE 0660 "Low-voltage controlgear,
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"
Cable length Cross-section
• EN 61000-6-4 "Basic technical standard for emitted m mm²
interference (Industry)"
0.5 0.75 1 1.5
• EN 61000-6-2 "Basic technical standard for interference
immunity (Industry)" 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
• EN 50042 "Designations for terminals" 10 1.8 1.2 0.9 0.6
• UL/CSA 25 4.5 3.0 2.3 1.5
• DIN 3440 (3RS10 40, 3RS11 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 42). 50 9.0 6.0 4.5 3.0
75 13.6 9.0 6.8 4.5
Connection of resistance-type thermometers 100 18.1 12.1 9.0 6.0

200 36.3 24.2 18.1 12.1
2-wire measurement
500 91.6 60.8 45.5 30.2
When 2-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of
the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error
must be taken into account when the signal evaluator is
calibrated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2 3-wire measurement
and T3 for this purpose. To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit
is often used. Using the additional wire, two measuring circuits
can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal
I evaluator can then automatically calculate the line resistance
T3 and take it into account.
T2
I
PT 100 T3
7
T2
T1 PT 100
NSB01323a
T1
I
NSB01324a
Wiring errors
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise
approximately 2.5 K/W. If the resistance of the wiring is not known
and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be
estimated using the following table.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/87

Monitoring Relays
General data
Connection of thermocouples
■ Function
Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature
measurement will be performed between the measuring point Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the
and the signal evaluator. output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The time
This principle assumes that the signal evaluator knows the delay can only be adjusted with digital units (on analog units,
temperature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the t = 0).
3RS11 temperature monitoring relay has an integral compen-
sator that determines this comparison temperature and builds it The relays return to their original state as soon as the
into the result of the measurement. Therefore, the thermal temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
sensors and cables must be insulated.
The absolute temperature is calculated from the ambient Temperature overshoot
temperature of the signal evaluator and the temperature
difference measured by the thermocouple. Closed-circuit principle
Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing NSB01327c
to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point J1
at the signal evaluator (T2). J2
The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using
connecting leads that are made from the same material as the Us
thermocouple. If a different type of conductor is used, an error
will result in the measurement. K1
t
K2
N iC r t
t
T 1 T 2
Temperature undershoot
Closed-circuit principle
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 2 5 a
N i
M e a s u r in g p o in t In te rn a l NSB01329b
r e fe r e n c e p o in t c o m p e n s a tio n J1
J2
Us
You can find more information on the Internet at: K1
t
http://www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html K2
http://www.ephy-mess.de t t
or from
EPHY-MESS GmbH (see Appendix, External Partners)
7
7/88 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
General data
Window monitoring (digital units only)
Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold J1, the
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time t For thermocouples
has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as soon as the
80
Voltage in mV
temperature reaches the set hysteresis value. Type "E" Type "J"
70
K2 responds in the same manner to the lower threshold of J2.
60
Type "K"
50
Closed-circuit principle Type "N"
40
NSB01331c
J1 30
Type "T"
J2 20
NSB0_01321a
10
Us 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
K1 Temperature in °C
t
K2 t
t
For resistance sensors
Resistance in Ohm
5000
NTC
Principle of operation with memory function (3RS10 42,
3RS11 42), based on the example of temperature 4000
undershoot using the closed-circuit principle
3000
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the KTY83 KTY84 PT1000
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The 2000
relays only return to the original state when the temperature falls
below the set hysteresis value and when terminals Y3 and Y4 1000
NSB0_01322
PT100
have been briefly jumpered.
0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 2 d
-100 0 100 200 300 400 500
J 1 Temperature in °C
J 2
U s
Y 3 -Y 4
K 1 t
K 2 t
t
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/89

Monitoring Relays
Relays, analog adjustable
■ Overview
The 3RS10/3RS11 analog temperature monitoring relays can be evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. undershoot. When the threshold values are reached, the output
The temperature is sensed by the sensors in the medium, relay switches on or off depending on the setting.
Type 3RS10 00 3RS10 10 3RS11 00 3RS11 01 3RS10 20 3RS10 30 3RS11 20 3RS11 21
General data
Sensor type PT100 TC type J TC type K PT100 TC type J TC type K
Width mm 22.5
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Rated power W/VA < 2/4
Auxiliary circuits
Contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC A 1
- 240 V AC A 0.1
DIAZED fuse
• gl/Gg operational class A 4
Short-circuit current (at 250 V) kA 1
Electrical endurance 100000
AC-15 at 3 A
Mechanical endurance 3 x 106
Mechanical operating cycles
Tripping units
• Measuring accuracy Typical < ±5 % from upper limit of scale
at 20 °C ambient temperature
(T20)
• Reference point accuracy -- < 5 K -- < 5 K
• Deviations due to ambient temperature <2 <3 <2 <3
in % from measuring range
• Hysteresis settings
- For temperature 1 2 ... 20 % from upper limit of scale
- For temperature 2 5 % from upper limit of scale
Sensor circuits
• Typical sensor circuits
- PT100 mA Typical 1 -- Typical 1 --
- PT1000 mA Typical 0.2 -- Typical 0.2 --
• Open-circuit detection No
• Short-circuit detection No
• 3-wire conductor connection1) Yes -- Yes --
7
Enclosures
Environmental influences
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
• Screw-type connection M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1)
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 807
Shock resistance to IEC 68-2-27 g/ms 15/11
1) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.
7/90 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Relays, analog adjustable
5 86
36 A B C
Type 3RS10 00 3RS10 10 3RS11 0
3RS11 1
3RS1 .2
3RS1 .3
Standard terminal
110
terminal
62
90
74
62
82
C
A
B
Removable terminal
terminal
terminal
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
■ Schematics
Connection examples 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
3RS10 00, 3RS10 10 A1
A1 A3 11
11 K1
13
K1 14
T- 1
T1 12
23
T2 14 T+ K2
12 2
T3
24
A2
NSB0_01336b
A2
NSB0_01333b
General equipment designation

3RS11 00, 3RS11 01 A1 = 24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
A1 A3 A3 = 110 V AC
11
13
A2 = M
K1
K1, K2, K3 output relay
7
T-
14
T+ 12 Equipment designation for 3RS10 00, 3RS10 10, 3RS11 00,
3RS11 01, 3RS10 20, 3RS10 30, 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
= LED: "Device connected to supply"
A2 J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
NSB0_01334b
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
3RS10 20, 3RS10 30
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples
A1
11
K1
T1
14 Caution!
1
T2 12
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
23
T3 K2 T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
2
24
A2
NSB0_01335b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/91

Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440
■ Overview
The 3RS10/3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be used The 3RS10 40, 3RS20 40, 3RS11 40 and 3RS21 40 relays
for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The comply with the requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated monitors; the 3RS10 42 and 3RS11 42 relays comply with the
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature limiters. The relays are
staying within an operating range (window function). also an excellent alternative to temperature controls in the low-
end performance range (2 or 3-point closed-loop control).
Type 3RS10 40/3RS10 42/3RS20 40 3RS11 40/3RS21 40 3RS11 42
General data
Width mm 45
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Auxiliary circuits
Contacts 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC A 1
- 240 V AC A 0.1
DIAZED fuse A 4
Electrical endurance A 100000
AC-15 at 3 A
Tripping units
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature < 2 K, 1 digit < 5 K, 1 digit < 7 K, 1 digit
(T20)
• Reference point accuracy -- < 5 K
• Deviations due to ambient temperature % 0.05 °C per K deviation from T20
• Measuring cycle ms 500
• Hysteresis settings 1 ... 99 Kelvin, for both values
- for temperature 1
Adjustable delay time s 0 ... 999
Sensor circuits
- PT100 mA Typical 1 - -
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA Typical 0.2 - -
• Open-circuit detection Yes1) Yes Yes
• Short-circuit detection Yes No No
7
• 3-wire conductor connection Yes2) - -

Enclosures
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27 g/ms 15/11
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).
3) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.
7/92 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440
8 6
4 5 6 5 A C
4 7 5 3 6
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded terminal 84 108
Screw-type terminal 83 106
1 0 2
6 8
9 2
A
C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
■ Schematics
Connection examples General equipment designation
3RS10 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS20 40 A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
Y 1 / Y 2 / A 1 K1, K2, K3 output relay
Y 3 Y 4
M e m o ry / K 1 1 5
R e s e t 1 8
T 1 1 Item code
1 6
T 2 2 5
T 3 K 2 J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
2 2 8
2 6 J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
K 3 3 3
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
R e a d y 3 4
A 2 T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor

N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 7 d
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples
3RS11 40, 3RS11 42, 3RS21 40
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper for 3RS10 40, 3RS11 40,
Y 1 / Y 2 / A 1 3RS20 40, 3RS21 40 or Y3/Y4 Reset input for 3RS10 42,
Y 3 Y 4 1 5
M e m o ry / K 1 3RS11 42
R e s e t 1 8
1 1 6
2 5 Caution!
K 2
T - 2 8
2 When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
T + 2 6
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
3 3
K 3
7
R e a d y 3 4
A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 9 c
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/93

Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
■ Overview
The 3RS10 41 temperature monitoring relays can be used for staying within an operating range (window function). The signal
measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The evaluator can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors at the same
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated time and is specially designed for monitoring motor windings
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for and bearings.
Type 3RS10 41
General data
Width mm 45
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Auxiliary circuits
Contacts 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V AC A 1
- 240 V AC A 0.1
DIAZED fuse
• gl/Gg operational class A 4
Electrical endurance AC-15 at 3 A A 100000
Tripping units
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature < 2 K, 1 digit
(T20)
• Deviations due to ambient temperature % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
• Measuring cycle ms 500
• Hysteresis settings for temperature 1 1 ... 99 K, for both values
• Adjustable delay time s 0 ... 999
Sensor circuits
- PT100 mA Typical 1
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA Typical 0.2
• Open-circuit detection Yes1)
• Short-circuit detection Yes
• 3-wire conductor connection Yes2)
Enclosures
7

- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6 5 ... 26 Hz/0.75 mm
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27 15 g/11 ms
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).
7/94 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
8 6
4 5 6 5 A C
4 7 5 3 6
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital
Removable terminal
Spring-loaded terminal 84 108
1 0 2
6 8
9 2
A
C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
■ Schematics
Connection example Equipment designation for 3RS10 41
Y1 Y2 A1 J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
Memory K1 15 J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
18
1T1
1 16
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
1T2
1T3 K2 25
2T1
2 28 1T1 to 1T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 1
2T2
2T3 26
3T1 K3 33 2T1 to 2T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 2
3T2 Ready 34
3T3 3T1 to 3T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 3
A2 Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper
NSB0_01338c
General equipment designation

Caution!
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,
K1, K2, K3 output relay T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/95

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
■ Overview
Thermistor motor protection devices are used for direct (PTC) that are directly installed in the motor winding and abruptly
monitoring of the motor winding temperature. For this purpose, change their resistance at their limit temperature.
the motors are equipped with temperature-dependent resistors
■ Design
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for use in any climate and Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for gases
finger-safe according to EN 0106 Part 50274. They comply with:
All devices are approved for Equipment Group II, Category (2)
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4, "Electromagnetic in Area "G" (areas that contain explosive gases, vapor, spray and
compatibility of I&C equipment in industrial process air mixtures).
engineering"
With PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G, compliance with
• EN 60947-8 guideline 94/9 EG Appendix II is confirmed. The safety devices
The terminals of the auxiliary contacts are designated in must be selected with suitable settings for the safe operation of
accordance with EN 50005. motors of the "Increased safety" (EEx e) and "Flameproof
enclosure" (EEx d) degrees of protection and are accessed
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for snap-on mounting onto outside the area subject to explosion hazard.
35 mm standard mounting rails according to EN 50022 or for
screw-mounting using an adapter (Accessories). PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G
Any mounting position is possible. The increased danger in areas subject to explosion hazard
demands careful analysis of the operator's guide, the safety and
For devices with the "Manual RESET" function, the test function commissioning instructions and the standard (EN 60079-14/
can be activated and a trip simulated by pressing the blue VDE 0165) for electronic equipment in areas subject to gas
Test/RESET button for longer than 2 seconds. explosion hazards.
If a Type A temperature sensor is connected to a Type A tripping A risk analysis must be performed for the complete plant or
unit, compliance with the operating temperatures is assured (on machine. If this risk analysis results in a minimal potential for
pick-up and reset) according to IEC 60034-11-2 (EN 60947-8). danger (Safety Category 1), all 3RN1 TMS tripping units can be
implemented taking into account the safety notes. In the case of
plants or machines with a high potential risk, variants with
integrated short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit are
4000 necessary.
R
1330
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for dust
550
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G
250 3RN10 11-.B/-.G, 3RN10 12-.B/-.G and 3RN10 13-...0 tripping

units can be used as safety devices for motors in areas subject
to gas explosion hazard for protection against impermissible
overheating due to overload. If the ATEX marking has the
extension "D:=Dust", these units can also be used as protective
20 devices for motors in areas subject to dust explosion hazard
NSB00320 (EN 50281-1-1).
-20°C 0 TNF-20 TNF TNF+15 T
TNF-5 TNF+5 Additional information is provided in the EU type test certificate
7
which can be obtained from the Internet. The units comply with
The characteristic curves of the Type A temperature sensors are the requirements of the following classes:
described in EN 60947-8, DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Device Class
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11-.C, EN 954-1: Category 1
3RN10 12-.C, 3RN10 22, 3RN10 62
3RN10 11-.B, 3RN10 11-.G, EN 954-1: Category 2
3RN10 12-.B, 3RN10 12-.G,
3RN10 13
The measuring circuit leads must be routed as separate control

leads. It is not permitted to use cores from the supply line of the
motor or any other main supply cables. If extreme inductive or
capacitive interference is expected as a result of power lines
routed in parallel, shielded control leads must be used.
7/96 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Cable routing
■ Function
Maximum cable length for sensor circuit cables
The 3RN1 tripping units operate in accordance with the closed-
Conductor cross- Cable length in m for tripping units circuit principle and therefore monitor themselves for open-
section in mm2 circuit (except: warning output in the case of 3RN10 22).
Without short-circuit With short-circuit A momentary power failure of less than 50 ms does not change
detection detection1) the status of the auxiliary contacts. The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10 3RN10 11-.B/-.G and 3RN10 13 units with 2 changeover contacts are also
3RN10 11-.C 3RN10 12-.B/-.G equipped with short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit. The
3RN10 12-.C 3RN10 13
3RN10 22, 3RN10 62
unit will trip in the event of a short-circuit in the sensor circuit
(resistance in sensor circuit < 20 W).
2.5 2 x 2800 2 x 250
All tripping units (except for 24 V AC/DC ) feature electrical
1.5 2 x 1500 2 x 150 isolation between the control circuit and the sensor circuit.
0.5 2 x 500 2 x 50
1) A short-circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum

cable length. 3RN10 00 compact tripping units
The compact tripping unit is equipped with a red LED (TRIPPED)
for the tripped display and a changeover contact.
Notes:
After the unit has tripped, it is automatically reset once the
Tripping of the thermistor protection relay even in combination thermistors have cooled down. The root of the changeover
with a converter must directly result in disconnection. This must contact is connected to the control voltage (95 is connected to
be implemented with circuitry. terminal A1).
Mounting and installation must only be performed by qualified This unit is particularly suitable in circuits in which the control
personnel who observe the applicable regulations! For circuit and signaling circuit have the same potential, e.g. in local
mounting, use installation manual No.: 3ZX1012-0RN10-1AA1. control boxes.
The 3RN10 is not intended for installation in hazardous areas.
For installation in areas subject to explosion hazards, the 3RN10
must be enclosed in a flameproof casing. 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12, 3RN10 13 standard tripping
units
For tripping units with a 24 V AC/DC control voltage, electrical
isolation must be secured with a battery network or a safety The standard units are equipped with two LEDs (READY and
transformer according to DIN VDE 0551. TRIPPED) for an operating and tripped display and are available
with either 1 NO + 1 NC or with 2 CO contacts. They are available
When tripping units with Auto-RESET function are used, a reset depending on the version with automatic RESET (3RN10 10),
is performed automatically after the cooling time has expired. It manual/remote RESET (3RN10 11) or manual/automatic and
must be ensured by means of an external interlock (latching with remote RESET (3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13). Remote RESET can
a separate On and Off button) that the machine to be monitored be achieved by connecting an external pushbutton with a
does not start up again spontaneously. normally-open function to terminals Y1 and Y2. If terminals Y1
Units with the Auto-RESET function must not be used in and Y2 are bridged, tripping will be followed by an automatic
applications in which the unexpected restart can lead to RESET.
personal injury or property damage. The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13 units with 2 COs also
In the case of tripping units without short-circuit detection, have short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.
during commissioning or after modifications or maintenance The 3RN10 12 and the 3RN10 13 are non-volatile. This means
work (assembly, disassembly) on the equipment, the sensor that even if the control voltage fails, a preceding trip will be
resistance must be measured using a suitable measuring
7
latched.
instrument. For resistances < 50 Ohm, the sensor circuit must
be checked for a short-circuit. In the case of the 3RN10 13 tripping unit, tripping due to a short-
circuit in the sensor circuit will be indicated by a flashing red
If 3RN10 00 units are used to protect EEx e motors, separate LED. The monostable version also indicates open-circuit in the
monitoring of the control voltage is recommended because there sensor circuit by flashing of the red LED.
is no Ready LED to indicate connection to the supply voltage.
If 3RN10 13-.BW01 units are used to protect EEx e motors,
separate monitoring of the control voltage is recommended 3RN10 22 "Warning and disconnection" tripping units
because the switching status of the auxiliary contacts does not Two sensor circuits can be connected to one 3RN10 22 tripping
change if the control voltage fails (use of a bistable relay is unit that acts on one output relay with 1 NO contact for warning
recommended). and 1 CO for disconnection. Temperature sensors with different
Before commissioning, the effectiveness of the protection rated response temperatures TNF are used to implement the
function must be checked. "Warning" and "Disconnection" functions. When the "Warning"
sensor circuit responds, a yellow LED is lit and when the
"Disconnection" circuit responds, a red LED is lit.
The sensor circuits have a different reset response and
operating behavior:
• "Warning" (terminals 2T1, T2) only features automatic RESET
and uses the open-circuit principle.
• "Disconnection" (terminals 1T1, T2) can be changed from
manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking terminals Y1
and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an
external pushbutton with a normally-open function.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/97

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
3RN10 62 tripping units for multiple motor protection 3RN10 111)
Up to 6 sensor circuits can be connected to the 3RN10 62 N S B 0 _ 0 0 3 1 5 c
tripping unit, all of which act on one output relay. The A 1 /A 2

simultaneous protection of several motors (up to 6) is an 3 8 0 0
advantage for multi-motor drives (e.g. if one motor is 1 5 0 0
T 1 /T 2
overloaded, all the other motors of the drive will be shut down).
Apart from the red LED TRIPPED, which signals the switching (Y 1 /Y 2 )
status of the tripping unit, an LED is assigned to each sensor
circuit which indicates the sensor circuit that has responded. K
Unused sensor circuits must be short-circuited.
L E D T r ip p e d
The reset response of the 3RN10 62 tripping units can be
changed from manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking
terminals Y1 and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by 3RN10 13-...01
connecting an external pushbutton with a normally-open
function. NSB0_00316a
A1/A2
3800
1500
Response of the tripping units in the event of control voltage T1/T2
failure RESET
(Y1/Y2)
Behavior Monostable Non-volatile Bistable
for Monostable K
3RN10 00 3RN10 12 3RN10 13-...01 LED Tripped

3RN10 10 3RN10 13-...0
3RN10 11 3RN10 22
3RN10 62
3RN10 121)/3RN10 22/3RN10 62
Failure of the Device trips Device trips No change in
control voltage state of the NSB0_00317a
auxiliary contacts
A1/A2
Return of the Device resets Device resets No change in 3800
control voltage state of the 1500
T1/T2
without a auxiliary contacts RESET
preceding (Y1/Y2)
tripping operation
Return of the Device resets The device No change in K, K2
control voltage remains tripped state of the
after a preceding auxiliary contacts LED Tripped
tripping operation
3RN10 13-...0
Safe electrical isolation NSB0_00318a
All circuits (outputs, control circuits, sensor and RESET circuits) A1/A2
of the multifunction tripping units 3RN10 13-1BW10 and 3800
1500
3RN10 13-1GW10 (wide voltage range, monostable output relay T1/T2
and screw-type terminals) are safely isolated from each other RESET
up to a rated voltage of 300 V according to DIN VDE 0100 (Y1/Y2)
7
Part 410/EN 60947-1.

K
LED Tripped
Function diagrams
3RN10 00/3RN10 10
(Auto-RESET) 3RN10 22 only
NSB0_00314b NSB0_00319b
3800
1500
A1/A2 2T1/T2
3800
1500
T1/T2
K1
K LED Alarm
LED Tripped
1) For versions with 2 CO (3RN10 1.G...): See 3RN10 13. function diagram
for short-circuit response of sensor circuit.
7/98 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Type Compact Standard units Multifunction Warning + Multiple
units units tripping motor
protection
3RN10 00 3RN10 10 3RN10 11 3RN10 12 3RN10 13 3RN10 22 3RN10 62
General data
Width mm 22.5 45
Number of connectable sensor 1 2 6
circuits
1)
Response in the event of control
voltage failure
Manual RESET No Yes
Automatic RESET Yes No Yes
Remote RESET No Yes2) Yes
TEST pushbutton No Yes
Short-circuit detection for sensor No Yes (for 2 CO units) Yes No
circuit
Short-circuit and open-circuit No Yes3) No
indication
Warning and switching off in one unit No Yes No
Tripping units
Permissible ambient temperature °C -25 … +60
Permissible storage temperature °C -40 … +80
EMC tests EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
Degree of protection acc. to EN IP20
60529/VDE 0470-1
Screw-type connection M3
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Sensor circuits
Measuring circuit load 5
at RF 1.5 mW
Voltage in sensor circuit V 2
at RF 1.5 mW
Response temperature °C 60 ... 180
7
(depends on sensor)
Coupling time s Approx. 5
(depends on sensor)
Summation PTC resistance RF kW 1.5
(per sensor loop)
• Response tolerance °C 6
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data.
2) Remote RESET possible by disconnecting control voltage.
3) Open-circuits are only indicated by monostable versions
(3RN10 13-....0).
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/99

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Type Compact Standard units Multifunction Warning + Multiple

units units tripping motor
protection
3RN10 00 3RN10 10 3RN10 11 3RN10 12 3RN10 13 3RN10 22 3RN10 62
Control circuits
1)
Rated control supply voltage Us
Operating range
110 V/230 V AC 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• 24 V ... 240 V AC/DC 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• 24 V AC/DC 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us for DC operation, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us for AC operation
Rated power
• AC W <2
• AC/DC W <2
• DC W <2
Max. mains buffering time ms 50
Auxiliary circuits
Continuous thermal current Ithe A 5
• AC-15 240 V A 3
• DC-13 24 V A 1 for units with 1 CO or 2 COs 12) 1 2
2 for units with 1 NC + 1 NO
DIAZED fuse A 63)
CSA and UL rated data, control circuit
Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz
• AC V 300
• DC V 300
Switching capacity R 300/B 300
Safe isolation up to 300 V -- 3RN10 13- --
acc. to DIN 60 947-1 1BW10
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data. 2) 2 A for 3RN10 13-.BW01 (bistable output relays).
3) In > 1 kA weld-free acc. to EN 60947-5-1.
3RN1. with 1 ... 2 sensor circuits 3RN10 62
5 86 8 6
36 4 5 6 5
4 7 5 3 6
7
110
1 0 2
62
90
74
62
82
6 8
9 2
C
A
B
A
C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a
NSB0_01606
15 15
22,5 22,5
A B C A C
3RN10 00 3RN10 00 3RN10 11 3RN10 62
3RN10 12
3RN10 13 Standard terminal
3RN10 22 Spring-loaded terminal 84.3 107.6
Removable terminal
Removable terminal
terminal Spring-loaded terminal 84 108
Screw-type 83 92 102 Screw-type terminal 83 106
terminal
7/100 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
■ Schematics
Connection diagrams
Illustrated with control Illustrated with control Illustrated with control Illustrated with control General equipment designation
voltage applied voltage not applied voltage applied voltage not applied
3RN10 00, 1 CO
A1, A2, A3 Connections of the
A1/95 A1(11) control voltage
N Amplifier
T/R TEST/RESET button
N H2 K Y1, Y2 Connections for remote
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (12) RESET (jumpered =
NSB0_00322b Auto-RESET)
Â The double arrow
indicates an operating
3RN10 10, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 10, 2 COs status which deviates
A1 95 05 (11) (21) from the standard
A1 95 97 (13) (21)
H1 representation of the
H1
contact acc. to
N H2 K N H2 K DIN 40900, Part 7
(in this case: Position of
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22) the contacts when
NSB0_00323b NSB0_01397
T/R control voltage is applied
to terminals A1 and A2)
3RN10 111), 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 11, 2 COs
A1 95 97 (13) (21) A1 95 05 (11) (21) Equipment designation for 3RN10
H1 H1
H1 "READY" LED
N H2 K N H2 K H2 "TRIPPED" LED
K Output relay
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22) T1, T2 Connections of the
NSB0_00323b NSB0_01398
T/R T/R sensor loop
3RN10 121), 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 12, 2 COs Equipment designation for

Y1 Y2 A1(A3) 95 97 (13) (21) Y1 Y2 A1 95 05 (11) (21) 3RN10 22
H1 H1 H1 "READY" LED
H2 K
H2 "TRIPPED" LED
N N H2 K
H3 "ALARM" LED
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22) K1, K2 Output relay
NSB0_00325a NSB0_01399a 1T1 and T2 Connections of the
T/R T/R 2T1 and T2 sensor loop
3RN10 13-...0 (monostable)

. Important!
Y1 Y2 A1 95 05 (11) (21)
H1
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
N H2 K
Equipment designation for 3RN10 62
T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01400
H1 to H6 LED for the tripped
T/R sensor loop
H7 "READY" LED
3RN10 13-...1 (bistable) H8 "TRIPPED" LED
K Output relay
Y1 Y2 A1 95 05 (11) (21) 1T1, 1T2 Connections of the
7
H1 to first sensor loop
N H2 K 6T1, 6T2 Connections of the
sixth sensor loop
T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_00327
T/R . Important!
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
3RN10 22
07(23) Y1 Y2 A1 95 (11)
H3 H2
K1 N N H1 K2
08(24) 2T1 1T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (12)
NSB0_00328c
T/R
3RN10 62
Y1 Y2 A1 N 95 97 (13) (21)
H1 2 3
H4 5 6 K
H7 H8
1T1 1T2 2T1 2T2 3T1 3T2 4T1 4T2 5T1 5T2 6T1 6T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22)
NSB0_00329a
T/R
1) For units with combination voltages 230 V/110 V AC

(3RN10 11-.CK00 and 3RN10 12-.CK00) the following applies:
A1 and A2: 230 V AC,
A3 and A2: 110 V AC.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/101

3TK28 Safety Relays
With electronic enabling circuits
■ Overview
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device
Type Connection Crossover Category acc. to EN 954-1 EMERGENCY- Protective Solid-state Cascading Safety mats
protection STOP door sensors input
1-channel 2-channel B 1 2 3 4 24 V DC
3TK28 40 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ -- -- --
basic unit
3TK28 41 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 1 ✔
standard unit
3TK28 42 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 1 ✔
standard unit
tv
3TK28 45 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 1 ✔
multi-function
unit
Type Enabling circuit, Enabling circuit, Signal- Autostart Moni- Switching capacity Rated operational Rated control supply Control
floating solid-state ing tored voltage voltage inputs
circuit start
Stop Stop Stop Stop AC-15 DC-13 24 V 230 V 600 V 24 V 115 V 230 V 24 V
category category category category at at DC AC AC DC AC AC DC
0 1 0 1 U=230 V U=24 V
3TK28 40 -- -- 21) -- -- ✔ ✔ -- 0.5 A ✔ -- -- ✔ -- -- --
basic unit
3TK28 41 -- -- 2 -- -- ✔ ✔ -- 1.5 A ✔ -- -- ✔ -- -- --
standard unit
3TK28 42 -- -- 1 1 -- ✔ ✔ -- 1.5 A ✔ -- -- ✔ -- -- --
standard unit
tv
3TK28 45 1 1 1 1 1 HL ✔ ✔ 2A 1.5 A ✔ ✔ -- ✔ -- -- --
multi-function 2 -- 2 -- 1 HL
unit
✔ = available 1) The outputs are only safe when an external contactor is used.
-- = not available
■ Design
The solid-state safety relays can be used in EMERGENCY-STOP Installation
devices to EN 418 and in safety circuits to EN 60204-1 (11.98),
for example, for moving covers and protective doors. For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail
Depending on the device type and the external circuit, the according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the
maximum category that can be achieved is Category 4 of devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508.
■ Function
7
The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41) Y11 Y12 Y35 Y21 Y22 Y32 Y34 1 A1
7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and
NSC0_00606a
diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.

7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are
monitored by a cyclic self-test.
FET
7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults
to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc. µC1 µC2
7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both

processors. The output driver must be activated
simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then is the
voltage connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to
output terminals 14 + 24. Output driver
Ausgangstreiber
7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically

monitored by the processors.
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored
start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and
cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection
terminals. A2 14 24
7/102 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK28 Safety Relays
Type 3TK28 40 3TK28 41 3TK28 42 3TK28 45
Standards EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508, DIN VDE 01161)
Category acc. to EN 954-1 3 4 4 4
Test certificates TÜV, UL, CSA
• For control circuit V 50 50 50 50
• For outputs V 50 50 50 50/300
• For control circuit V 500 500 500 500
• For outputs V 500 500 500 500/2000
Operating range
• DC operation 0.9 ... 1.15 × Us
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• Ie /AC-15 at 115 V A -- -- -- 2
at 230 V A -- -- -- --
• Ie / DC-13 at 24 V A 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Short-circuit protection Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof2)
Electrical endurance Unlimited, because switched electronically
in operating cycles/h during normal duty 1/h 3000
Response time
• Monitored start ms 125 60 60 60
• Autostart ms 250 60 60 60
release time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 30 45 453)/0.05 ... 300 s 453)/0.05 ... 300 s
(adjustable) (adjustable)
• For supply failure ms 25 1004) 1004) 100
Recovery time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 400 400 400
• For supply failure s 0.02 max. 7 max. 7 max. 7
Bridging of supply failures ms 255) 254)5) 254)5) 255)
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 25 30 30
• ON button s 0.02 0.2 ... 5 0.2 ... 5 0.2 ... 5
Simultaneity ms
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)
Spring-loaded terminals (1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
7
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded 2 × AWG 24 ... 16
• During operation °C –25 ... +60
• During storage °C –40 ... +80
• Enclosures IP40
• Terminals IP20
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Sinewave g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
1) Electrical equipment for furnaces.
VDE certificate for 3TK28 41 and 3TK28 42 is available.
2) For relay outputs, use a fuse link:
LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE:
6 A (weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA).
3) For instantaneous output.
4) When the cascading input is supplied from A1, the maximum response
time is applicable to an external EMERGENCY-STOP.
5) The drivers are not supplied, internal supply bridging only.
SELV/PELV power supply unit buffered.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/103

3TK28 Safety Relays
3TK28 with screw-type terminals 3TK28 with spring-loaded terminals
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42 3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42
4 7 2,5 7
NSC0_00678 NSC0_00677
92
102
120
110
120
110
74
83
68
87
105
74
75
94
86
96
15 5 36 15 5 86
23 65 22,5
86
3TK28 45
3TK28 45
3
7
4 NSC0_00673
7 NSC0_00672
139
102
118
110
75
98
86
139
102
106
118
68
91
83
37 5 115
37 5 65 45
45 94
115
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50002.

7
7/104 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK28 Safety Relays
With relay enabling circuits
■ Overview
Type 1-channel 2-channel Crossover Category EMER- Protective Enabling Signaling Autostart Monitored
connection connection protection acc. to EN 954-1 GENCY- door contacts contacts start
STOP
B 1 2 3 4
Basic units
3TK28 21 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ 3 NO 1 NC ✔ --
3TK28 22 -- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔2) ✔ 2 NO -- ✔ --
3TK28 23 -- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- 2 NO -- -- ✔
3TK28 24 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ 2 NO -- ✔ –
3TK28 25 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 3 NO 2 NC ✔ ✔
3TK28 27 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 1) ✔ -- 2 NO + 1 NC -- ✔
2 NO,
delayed
1)
3TK28 28 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 2 NO + 1 NC ✔ --
2 NO,
delayed
Expansion devices (category as for basic unit)

3TK28 30 -- -- ● ● ● ● ● ● -- -- 4 NO -- -- --
Press control devices (acc. to EN 574)

3TK28 34 -- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- -- 2 NO + 2 NC -- -- --
3TK28 35 -- -- -- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- -- 3 NO + 1 NC -- -- --
✔ = available
-- = not available
● = corresponds to basic unit
1) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts. 2) The ON button is not monitored.
■ Design
The 3TK28 21 to 28, 3TK28 30 and 3TK28 34 safety relays Delayed enabling contacts
operate with internal contactor relays with positively-driven
contacts. The contacts of the controls comply with the Machine drives that overrun for a long time must be externally
requirement for positively driven operation laid down in braked in the event of danger. For this purpose, the power
ZH 1/457, Edition 2, 1978. NO and NC contacts are not allowed supply for electrical braking can be maintained (Stop
to be closed at the same time. Category 1 according to EN 60204-1).
In a redundant circuit, operation of the internal controls is The basic units have off-delay enabling contacts in addition to
monitored. If a safety relay fails, it will always switch to the de- instantaneous enabling contacts. Time delays of between 0.5
energized and consequently safe state. The fault is detected and 30 s are available with the different versions. A 3RP19 02
and the safety relay can no longer be switched on. The use of sealable covering cap (see Catalog LV 1, Selection and ordering
data, Accessories) can be fitted to protect against unauthorized
7
NO and NC contacts for the same function satisfies the demand
for diversity. adjustment of the set delay time.
This product series is characterized by its space-saving width Expansion units

(22.5 mm or 45 mm). The usual BIA, BG and SUVA approvals If the enabling contacts of the basic unit are inadequate,
and test certificates have been awarded. expansion units can be used. An expansion unit has 4 enabling
Enabling contacts (FK) contacts.
Safety related operation must be performed by safe output Expansion units are not allowed to be operated separately in
contacts, known as enabling contacts. Enabling contacts are safety-related switching circuits; they must be combined with a
always NO contacts and switch without delay. basic unit. One enabling contact of the basic unit is required for
connecting an expansion unit. The category of a control system
Signaling contacts (MK) with expansion unit corresponds to that of the basic unit.
NC contacts are used as signaling contacts but they are not Installation
permitted to perform functions with relevance for safety. An
enabling contact can also be used as a signaling contact. A The equipment is designed for snap-on mounting on a 35 mm
signaling contact cannot, however, be used as an enabling standard mounting rail to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible
contact. for the devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/105

3TK28 Safety Relays
Type 3TK28 21 3TK28 22 3TK28 23 3TK28 24 3TK28 30 3TK28 25 3TK28 27, 3TK28 34 3TK28 35
3TK28 28
Standards EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1 Also EN 574
Test certificates BG, SUVA, UL, CSA
Category
• Acc. to EN 954-1 3 4 4 3 As basic 4 4 1) 4 As basic
• Acc. to EN 574 -- -- -- -- unit -- -- Type III C unit
Overvoltage category acc. to EN 60664 III
Rated power of coils
DC/AC operation at 1.0 × Us W 1.5 3 4 3
Operating range of the coils
• AC operation 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• DC operation 0.85 ... 1.2 × Us 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
Continuous thermal current Ith A 5 6 5 6 5
Continuous thermal current Ith
for 2 to 4 enabling contacts (FK) 2 FK 3 FK 4 FK
• At AT 70 °C A 4 3.5 3 5 4 5 4
• At AT 60 °C A 4.5 4 3.5 6 5 6 5
• At AT 50 °C A 5 4.5 4 6 5 6 5
acc. to IEC 60947-1
• Ie / AC-15 at 115 V A 5 6 5/24) 6 5/25)
at 230 V A 5 6 5/24) 6 5/25)
• Ie / DC-13 at 24 V A 5 6 5/24) 6 5/25)
Short-circuit protection Fuse inserts LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE: 6 A
(weld-free protection at Ik = 1 kA) 3) gL/gG operational class 6 A (slow), quick 10 A2)
Mechanical endurance 10 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie 100000 operating cycles
Switching frequency 1000/h on loading with Ie
Response time ms 308) 100 50
• Monitored start ms -- -- 30 -- -- 25 80 -- --
• Autostart ms 2006) 100 -- 2006)7) -- 150 80 -- --
Release time ms 20 50
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 80 20 200 – 25 25 -- --
• For supply failure ms 200 100 150 200 259) 350 100 -- --
Recovery time 250 250
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 200 400 200 -- 200 After time -- --
has elapsed
• For supply failure ms 200 200 600 200 100 500 1s -- --
Bridging of supply failures ms 60 30 80 60 35 100 30 40 40
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 25 25 2007) -- 25 25 -- --
7
• ON button ms 150 40 25 1507) -- 25 25 -- --

Simultaneity ms 500
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)
• Tightening torque, M 3.5 screw Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)
• During operation °C –25 ... +60 (suitable for butt-mounting; 70 °C possible with restrictions)
• Enclosures IP40 IP20
• Terminals IP20 IP20
Touch protection acc. to VDE 0106 Finger-safe
Shock resistance, half-sine acc. to IEC 60068 8 g/10 ms
1) Only applicable for instantaneous enabling contacts; Category 3 applies 6) At 24 V AC: 300 ms.
for time-delayed contacts. 7) At 115, 230 V AC: 300 ms.
2) Signaling circuit for 3TK28 21 = 6 A. 8) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 200 ms.
3) Other fuses on request. 9) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 80 ms.
4) Instantaneous/time-delayed enabling contacts.
5) 2 A applies to enabling contacts 13/14.
7/106 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK28 Safety Relays
3TK28 (relay type) with screw terminals 3TK28 (relay type) with spring-loaded terminals
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30 3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30
4 7 2,4 7
NSC0_00671 NSC0_00674
120
120
102
110
110
103
84
74
93
74
68
87
74
83
15 5 65 15 5 115
23 94 22,5
115
3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35 3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
3
4 7
7 NSC0_00672
NSC0_00673
139
102
118
110
75
98
86
139
102
106
118
68
91
83
37 5 65 37 5 115
45 94 45
115
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50022
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/107

3TK28 Safety Relays
With contactor relay enabling circuits
■ Overview
Type Connection Crossover Category acc. to EN 954-1 EMERGENCY- Protective Solid-state Cascading Safety mats
protection STOP door sensors input
1-channel 2-channel B 1 2 3 4 24 V DC
3TK28 50 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ -- -- --
basic unit
3TK28 51 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ -- -- --
basic unit
3TK28 52 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- ✔ ✔ -- -- --
basic unit
3TK28 53 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 1 ✔
basic unit
3TK28 56 -- -- ● ● ● ● ● ● -- -- -- 1 --
expansion
unit
3TK28 57 -- -- ● ● ● ● ● ● -- -- -- 1 --
expansion
unit tv
Type Enabling circuit, Enabling circuit, Signal- Autostart Moni- Switching capacity Rated operational Rated control supply Control
floating solid-state ing tored voltage voltage inputs
circuit start
Stop Stop Stop Stop AC-15 DC-13 24 V 230 V 600 V 24 V 115 V 230 V 24 V
category category category category at at DC AC AC DC AC AC DC
0 1 0 1 U=230 V U=24 V
3TK28 50 3 -- -- -- -- ✔ ✔ 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ --
basic unit
3TK28 51 2 -- -- -- 1 NC ✔ ✔ 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ --
basic unit
3TK28 52 6 -- -- -- 1 NC ✔ ✔ 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ --
basic unit
3TK28 53 3 -- 1 -- -- ✔ ✔ 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- -- 1
basic unit
3TK28 56 6 -- 1 -- 1 NC -- -- 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- -- 1
expansion
unit
3TK28 57 -- 3 1 -- -- -- -- 6A 10 A ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ -- -- 1
expansion
unit tv
✔ = available
-- = not available
● = corresponds to basic unit
7
7/108 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK28 Safety Relays
The solid-state safety combinations can be used in The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41)
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to EN 418 and in safety 7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and
circuits according to EN 60204-1 (11.98), for example, for diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.
moving covers and protective doors. Depending on the device
type and the external circuit, the maximum category that can be 7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are
achieved is Category 4 of EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to monitored by a cyclic self-test.
IEC 61508. 7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults
With these devices, solid-state safety relays are connected with to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc.
contactor relays. The combination is supplied as a complete 7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both
self-contained unit, fully wired up and tested, for snapping onto processors. The output driver must be activated
a standard mounting rail. This unit combines the advantages of simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then, the
a solid-state safety relay and those of contactor relays with voltage is connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to
positively-driven contacts in a single device. It has been certified output terminals 14 + 24.
by the appropriate authorities as a complete unit. 7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically
Basic units, Category 3 monitored by the processors.
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored
The solid-state safety relays 3TK28 50, 51 and 52 have two start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and
contactor relays snapped onto the safety solid-state unit as cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection
floating switch blocks. Three LEDs indicate the operating status terminals.
and the function. During operation, all internal circuit elements
are monitored cyclically for faults. Up to Category 3 according to Y11 Y12 Y35 Y21 Y22 Y32 Y34 1 A1
EN 954-1 is achieved, depending on the external circuit.
NSC0_00606a
Basic units, Category 4
The 3TK28 53 solid-state safety relay has two contactor relays
snapped onto the safety solid-state units as floating switch FET
blocks, as well as a safe solid-state output, a safe input for µC1 µC2
cascading and one input for normal switching duty. Three LEDs
indicate the operating status and the function.
During start-up, the equipment runs through a self-test in which
the internal electronics are checked for correct functioning.
Output driver
During operation, all internal circuit elements are monitored
cyclically for faults.
Expansion units and the 3TK28 30, 3TK28 56/57, 3RA7 11, 12,
13, 14 devices as well as external actuators or loads can be
connected using the safe solid-state output (terminal 2).
Cascading with the 3TK28 41/42/45/53 safety combinations as
well as with the 3RA7 11 load feeder is also possible using the A2 14 24
safe solid-state output (terminal 2).
Installation
For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail
according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the
7
devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/109

3TK28 Safety Relays
Type 3TK28 50 3TK28 51 3TK28 52 3TK28 53 3TK28 56 3TK28 57
Standards EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Category acc. to EN 954-1 3 3 3 4 As basic unit As basic unit
Test certificates TÜV, UL, CSA
• For control circuit V 50
• For output contacts V 690
• For pollution severity 3
• For control circuit V 500
• For output contacts kV 6
• AC operation 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• DC operation 0.9 ... 1.15 × Us
Coil ratings
• DC/AC actuation at Us W 8.5
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• Ie / AC-15 at 230 V A 6
• Ie / DC-13 at 24 V A 10 (auxiliary switch blocks: 6)
Short-circuit protection See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Technical specifications
(Weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA)
Mechanical endurance 30 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Characteristic curves
In operating cycles/h during normal duty 1/h 1000
Response time
• Monitored start ms 200 200 200 60 -- --
• Autostart ms 300 300 300 60 -- --
Release time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 30 30 30 50 50 501)/
increments
0.05 ... 300 s
• For supply failure ms 100 100 100 120 120 120
Recovery time
• For EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 20 20 500 500 500
• For supply failure s 0.02 0.02 0.02 7 7 7
Bridging of supply failures ms 5 5 5 5 5 5
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 20 20 30
• ON button ms 20 20 20 0.2 ... 5 s
Simultaneity
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1), 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.2 ... 1), 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)
7

• Solid mm2 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2
mm 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
• During operation °C –25 ... +60
• Enclosures IP40
• Terminals IP20
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Finger-safe
Shock resistance
• Sine wave g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
1) For instantaneous output.
7/110 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3TK28 Safety Relays
3TK28 with floating enabling contacts, with auxiliary-contactor enabling contacts
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57 3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57
with screw-type terminals with spring-loaded terminals
38 38
26 26
6 6
44
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
122 x 68
102 x 68
132
132
93
93
1) 1)
NSC 00506 NSC 00507
90 5 40 90 5 40
91 108
108
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with screw-type terminals
38
26
6
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
132
93
1)
NSC 00505
90 5 40
91
108
146
7
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with spring-loaded terminals
38
26
6
44
122 x 68
102 x 68
132
93
1)
NSC 00508
90 5 40
108
149
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/111

Interface Converters
■ Overview
Interface converters perform the coupling function for analog Electromagnetic disturbance and overvoltages can affect the
signals on both the input side and the output side. They are signals on the input side in particular or even destroy the analog
indispensable when processing analog values with electronic modules. All terminals of the 3RS17 interface converters are safe
controls. Under harsh industrial conditions in particular, it is often up to a voltage of 30 V DC and protected against switching
necessary to transmit analog signals over long distances. This poles. Short-circuit protection is an especially important function
means that electrical isolation is essential due to the different for the outputs.
supply systems. The resistance of the wiring causes potential
differences and losses which must be prevented. The devices are EMC-tested according to
• EN 50081 (basic technical standard for emitted interference)
• EN 61000-6-2 (basic technical standard for immunity to
interference)
The analog signals comply with
• IEC 60381-1/2
■ Function
Active interface converters Input voltage depending on the load at Ia = 20 mA
Active interface converters provide maximum flexibility for the The following diagram shows the input voltage UE as a function
application by the use of an external supply voltage. of the load RB taking into account the voltage loss UV. If the load
Configuration with active interface converters is extremely easy is known, the y-axis shows the minimum voltage that has to be
because input and output resistances and voltage drops are supplied by the current source in order to drive the maximum
compensated by the auxiliary supply. They support complete current of 20 mA over the passive isolator and load.
voltage isolation as well as conversion from one signal type to
another or reinforcement. The load of the measured value 7 E / V
N S B 0 1 3 1 3 a
transmitter is negligible. 2 2 ,7
2 0
Passive interface converters 1 5
Passive interface converters do not require an external supply 1 0

voltage. This advantage can only be used by current signals that 5
2 ,7
are converted 1:1. Reinforcement or conversion is not possible. 0
0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 4 B / O 1 0 0 0
The converters are used for complete electrical isolation of 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 7 A / V 2 0
current signals and to protect the inputs and outputs. Passive
isolators do not operate reaction-free, any load on the output Current carrying capacity of the outputs
produces an equal load on the input. When the passive A maximum output resistance is specified for current signals.
converter is to be used, the output performance of the sensor This resistance value specifies how large the input resistance of
and the input resistance of the analog input must be analyzed. the next device connected in series can be as a result of the
This technique is being increasingly implemented in the case of power of the converter.
pure current signals.
For voltage signals, the maximum current that can be drawn
Calculation guide for passive converters from the output is the decisive factor.
Note: Please note the following when using passive isolators: 2-way isolation
The current-driving voltage of the measuring transducer UE must In the case of 2-way isolation, the input is galvanically isolated
be sufficient to drive the maximum current of 20 mA over the from the output. The "null potential" of the supply voltage is the
7
passive isolator with a voltage loss of UV = 2.7 V and the load RB. same as the reference potential for the analog output signal.
This means that: N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 1 4 a
UB UE = 2.7 V + 20 mA × RB
IN O U T
Distribution of the voltages in the case of passive isolators

V c c
7 B
2 - w a y is o la tio n
7 V = 2 ,7 V
1 3-way isolation
1 For the 3-path isolation, each circuit is electrically isolated from
7 E
4 B the other circuits, i.e. input, output, and supply voltage do not
1 have a potential connection.
1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 4 3
N S B 0 1 3 1 2 a IN O U T
V c c
3 - w a y is o la tio n
7/112 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Type 3RS17 24 V AC/DC 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
General data
Supply voltage operating range DC 0.7 ... 1.25 x Un 0.7 ... 1.1 x Un
AC 0.8 ... 1.2 x Un 0.8 ... 1.1 x Un
Rated power W Typical 0.3 Typical 0.75
Electrical isolation of input/output Active disconnector: 1500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min; 4000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Passive disconnector: 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Rated insulation voltage Ui pollution degree 2 V 50 300
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0100
Screw terminals
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Spring-loaded terminal
• Solid or finely stranded mm2 1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)
Degree of protection Enclosures IEC 529 IP30
Terminals IEC 529 IP20
Mounting onto standard rail EN 50022 mm 35
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55/0.35
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Input
Impedance Voltage inputs kW 330
Current inputs, active W 100
Input voltage max. Voltage inputs V 30 AC/DC
Current inputs, active V 30 AC/DC
Response current Current inputs, passive µA 100/250 (6.2 mm width)
Voltage drop Current inputs, passive V 2.7 at 20 mA
Output
Impedance Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V W 55
Output load Current 0/4 ... 20 mA active, max. W 400
Current 0 ... 20 mA passive, max. W 1000 at 20 mA, 400 at 20 mA (6.2 mm width)
Frequency, min. W 2.400
Output voltage Frequency V 20.9
Output current Voltage output 0 ... 10 V, max. mA 21
for supply voltage Frequency, max. mA 10
Short-circuit current Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V mA 40
Current output, 0 ... 20 mA, passive mA Corresponds to the input current
7
Frequency mA 15
Protection of the outputs Short-circuit resistant
Max. overvoltage at output V 30
Accuracy
Total error at 23 °C Active disconnector (frequency) % 0.1
Active disconnector (U, I) % 0.11)
Linearity error Active disconnector (U, I) % 0.02
Active disconnector (frequency) % 0.02
Deviation due to ambient Active disconnector (frequency) 0 ... 50 Hz: 7.5 mHz/K; 0 ... 100 Hz: 15 mHz/K; 0 ... 1 kHz: 0.15 Hz/K;
temperature 0 ... 10 kHz: 1.5 Hz/K
Active disconnector (U, I) 0 ... 10 V: 1.5 mV/K; 0/4 ... 20 mA: 3 µA/K
Passive disconnector Width 6.2 mm: 100 ppm/K of measured value
Width 12.5 mm: with load < 600 W: < 50 ppm/K of measured value;
with load 600 W: < 175 ppm/K of measured value
Transmission error Passive disconnector % 0.1
Measured value load error %/W 0.06/100
Limit frequency at 3 dB Active disconnector (frequency) Hz 30
Active disconnector (U, I) Hz 30
Passive disconnector Hz 50
Rise time (10 to 90 %) Active disconnector (frequency) 10 + 1 period
Active disconnector (U, I) ms 10
Settling time Active disconnector (frequency) 30 + 1 period
at 1 % accuracy Active disconnector (U, I) ms 30
Residual ripple Active disconnector (U, I) mVeff <5
Passive disconnector mVeff <8
The accuracy refers to the measurement range end value if not otherwise stated.
1) For 3RS17 06: 0.1 % for selected output 4 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected voltage > 50 mV. For an input voltage < 50 mV, an offset of max. 20 ms is
output 0 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected output 0 ... 10 V and from an input effective at the output.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 7/113

6.2 mm design 12.5 mm design 17.5 mm design
79 2)
80 3)
NSB00271
NSB00272
NSB01359
6,2 12,5 17,5 84 1)
1) Width for 3RS17 25 is approx. 90 mm.

2) Dimensions for screw-type connection.
3) Dimensions for spring-loaded terminal.
■ Schematics
3RS17 00-..D..
3RS17 02-..D..
3RS17 03-..D..
3RS17 05-..D.. 3RS17 06- .FD00
NSB01346
IN+ 2 U, I 3 OUT IN+ 1 6

OUT
4
0V
U, I
IN- 1 U, I, F 5 +/~ 2 U, I 5
24 V AC/DC IN- 0V
NSB01315a
7 8
+/~ 0V
24 V AC/DC
3RS17 06-.FE00 3RS17 0.-..W00

NSB01318a NSB01319a
IN+ 1 6
OUT+ IN+ 1 U, I, 6
OUT+
U, I U, I U, I F
IN- 2 5 OUT- IN- 2 5 OUT-
7 8 7 8
+/~
24 V AC/DC 24-240 V AC/DC
3RS17 25-.FD00 3RS17 25-.FW00

NSB01347 NSB01345
IN+ 1 6 IN+ 1 6
7
OUT OUT+
U, I U, I U, I
IN- 2 U, I 5 0V IN- 2 5 OUT-
7 8 7 8
+/~ 0V +/~
24 V AC/DC 24-240 V AC/DC
3RS17 20-.ET00 3RS17 21-.ET00

2 3
IN+ OUT+
I IN+ 1 3
OUT+
1 4
I
IN- I OUT-
NSB01344
IN- 2 I 4 OUT-
NSB01317a
3RS17 22-.ET00
1 3
IN+ OUT+
(1)
2
I 4
(1)
IN- I 7
OUT-
IN+ 5 OUT+
(2)
6 I 8
(2)
IN- I OUT-
NSB01316a
7
7/114 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006
Detecting Devices
8
8/2 Introduction
3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3 Position Switches

3SE2, 3SE3 Position Switches
8/4 General data
8/7 Molded-plastic enclosures,
31 mm and 50 mm
40 mm
8/14 Metal enclosures,
40 mm and 56 mm
8/27 Metal enclosures, compact
design with molded cable
8/29 Open-type position switches
with Separate Actuator
8/30 General data
8/32 Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm
8/34 Molded-plastic enclosures, 52 mm
8/35 Metal enclosures, 40 mm
with Tumbler
8/36 General data
1200 N locking force
3SE2 Hinge Switches
8/41 Molded-plastic enclosures
3SE6 Magnetically Operated

Switches
8/43 Magnetic monitoring systems
FS101) 3RG Proximity Switches
8
1) See Catalog FS 10
"Sensor Technology"
Detecting Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3 3SE3 3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3 3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3
Position switches, Position switches, Position switches Position switches
standard open-type with separate actuator with tumbler
Enclosures
Molded plastic ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Metal ✔ -- ✔ ✔
Design
EN 50041 ✔ -- ✔ --
EN 50047 ✔ -- ✔ --
Special design ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Separate actuator -- -- ✔ ✔
Tumbler for actuator -- -- -- ✔
Switch blocks
Single-pole -- -- ✔ --
Two-pole ✔ ✔ ✔ --
Three-pole ✔ ✔ ✔ --
Four-pole ✔ -- ✔ ✔
Terminals
Screw terminals ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Molded cable ✔ -- -- --
Plug-in connector ✔ -- ✔ ❏
AS-Interface ✔ -- ✔ ✔
✔ Standard
-- Not available
❏ Optional (accessory)
8

Detecting Devices
Introduction
3SE2 3SE2 3SE6

Explosion-proof Magnetically operated
Hinge switches
position switches switches
Enclosures
Molded plastic -- ✔ ✔
Metal ✔ -- --
Design
EN 50041 ✔ -- --
EN 50047 -- ✔ --
Special design -- ✔ ✔
Separate actuator -- -- --
Tumbler for actuator -- -- --
Switch blocks
Single-pole -- -- --
Two-pole ✔ ✔ ✔
Three-pole -- ✔ --
Four-pole -- -- --
Terminals
Screw terminals ✔ ✔ --
Molded cable -- -- ✔
Plug-in connector -- ❏ ✔
AS-Interface -- -- ❏

General data
■ Overview
Expansion range
With the SIRIUS standard position switches, mechanical posi-

tions of moved machine parts are converted into electrical
signals. Through their modular and uniform design and large Expansion range for position switches with molded-plastic
number of variants, the devices can meet practically all enclosure:
requirements in industry. • With M12 plug
The standard series of SIRIUS position switches comprise: • With high-grade steel roller or chlorinated rubber membrane
• IP20 open-type position switches
• Position switches with IP66/IP67 molded-plastic enclosure with
31, 40 and 50 mm width
• Position switches with IP67 metal enclosure with 40 and 56 mm
width
• Compact position switches with metal enclosure and molded
cable
Safety circuits
The standards IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 require positive
opening. Hence for the purposes of personal safety, the assured
opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked accord-
ing to IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol .
Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be attained with the
standard position switches if the corresponding failsafe evalua-
tion units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3TK28
safety relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or
SINUMERIK product ranges. Expansion range for position switches with metal enclosure:
• With different plug variants
• With high-grade steel roller
• With increased corrosion protection
• With LED 24 V
8

General data
■ Design Fork levers

• Switchable in two directions
Enclosures • For reciprocating movements
The 3SE2 position switches are in either a narrow or wide enclo- • Latched actuator
sure made of fiber-glass strengthened, flame-retardant molded
plastic or cast aluminum. Rounded plungers with short-stroke switch block
• Exact switching response
The position switches in a narrow enclosure comply with the
standards in terms of their enclosure and actuator as well as • Operating travel and hysteresis greatly reduced
their fixing dimensions and switching points: • Optimized wear characteristics
• EN 50047 for rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller lever and • Suitable for the monitoring of doors and access flaps up to
twist lever actuators Category 4 according to EN 954-1
- 3SE2 200 series with molded-plastic enclosure.
Rounded and roller plungers with central fixing
• EN 50041 for rounded plunger, roller plunger, twist lever and
rod actuators • Fast mounting with M18 × 1 thread
- 3SE2 230 series with molded-plastic enclosure • Easy adjustment
- 3SE2 120 series with metal enclosure • Same mounting type as the proximity switch BERO
The narrow enclosures have one and the wide enclosures have Contacts
two or three cable entries, suitable for looping through cables.
The cable entry has a metric thread M20 × 1.5 for cable glands The position switches with molded-plastic enclosures are avail-
with 6 mm long threads (see Accessories). able with 2 contacts; the position switches with metal enclosures
are available with 2, 3 or 4 contacts. The contacts can be snap-
To secure position switches with a safety function against action contacts, slow-action contacts or slow-action make-be-
changes in their position, keyed techniques must be employed fore-break contacts. The contacts are designed for a thermal
on installation, such as: current of 10 A.
• Fixing by means of round holes
Contact reliability
• For longitudinal holes, guide pins and stops must also be used.
The movable contacts are double-break contacts. This ensures
Actuators an extremely high contact stability, even when the devices are
All actuators can be retro-fitted or exchanged for another switching low voltages and currents, e.g. 5 V DC/1 mA.
version. They can also be repositioned every 90° so that the As the moving double-break contacts are electrically isolated
switches can be operated from any of the four sides. from each other, the position switches can also switch, without
Note: The position switches must not be used as an end stop. any reservations, circuits up to 380 V with different potentials.
Standard, rounded and roller plungers The switching point of the snap-action contacts is independent
of the switching corrosion.
• Operation in direction of the plunger axis or with bar at right
angles to the plunger axis. The contact chamber is covered to prevent ingress of foreign
• Rounded and roller plungers have an additional overtravel and bodies.
hence a large operating distance. Connection
• The roller plunger is recommended for lateral actuation and • Metric thread M20 × 1.5 for mounting glands, connector
relatively long overtravel. sockets or adapters
Roller and angular roller levers • Expansion range with mounted connector socket
• For a high starting speed of vmax = 2.5 m/s • With AS-Interface F-Adapter for direct connection to ASIsafe;
• Depending on the direction of starting (left or right), various usable up to Category 2 according to EN 954-1
approach angles (a = 30°) and trailing angles (g = 45°) are • With AS-Interface F-Adapter for direct connection to ASIsafe;
possible. with additional M12 socket for connection of the second posi-
• For actuators made of finely ground steel in the form of cams, tion switch, usable up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1.
straight-edges or cam disks
• Very long mechanical endurance ■ Function
Twist levers and rod actuators Positive opening
• For a high starting speed of vmax = 3 m/s The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically,
8
• Variety of starting options positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to
• Insensitive to oil, dirt, grinding dust, ice and coarse-grained as "positive opening".
material In order to ensure this positive opening, the position switches
• With the twist lever the maximum approach angle is always must be actuated in such a way that the nominal values for the
equal to the maximum trailing angle. positive opening are substantially exceeded.
• The rod actuator must be used when no actuation with
approach and trailing angle is possible.
Spring rods
• Can be used for undefined actuations and changing starting
conditions
• Starting from any direction

General data
Type 3SE2 1, 3SE2 2, 3SE2 3, 3SE2 4, 3SE3 0 Exception: 3SE2 1.0-8..00, 3SE2 2.0-8..00,
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Pollution severity acc. to EN 60664-1 Class 3
Rated operational voltage Ue V 500 AC; over 380 V AC only for equal potential 500 AC; over 300 V AC only for equal potential
• For alternating current 40 to 60 Hz Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15
- at 24 V A 10 10
- at 125 V A 10 10
- at 230 V A 10 6
- at 400 V A 10 4
- at 500 V A 10 3
• For direct current Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13 Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13
- at 24 V A 10 10 10 10
- at 48 V A 6 4 6 4
- at 110 V A 4 1 4 1
- at 220 V A 1 0.4 1 0.27
- at 440 V A 0.5 0.2 0.5 0.1
Short-circuit protection1),
DIAZED fuse links
• gL/gG operational class A 6 6
• Characteristic quick A 10 --
Mechanical endurance Operat- 30 × 106 15 × 106
ing
cycles
• With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors 10 × 106 operating cycles
• For AC-15 utilization category 0.5 × 106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
• For DC-13 utilization category With direct current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the
voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
No generally valid information can be given.
Switching frequency Operat- 6 × 103 1.8 × 103
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors ing
cycles/h
Switching accuracy mm 0.05
For repeated switching, measured at the
plunger of the switch block
Switching point with snap-action contacts Independent of contact wear, constant throughout the endurance of the switch
s, u and U rated data
• Rated voltage V 600 600
• Uninterrupted current A 10 10
• Switching capacity Heavy duty, A 600/Q 600 Heavy duty, A 300/Q 600
Type 3SE2 200 3SE2 230 3SE2 210 3SE2 120 3SE2 100, 3SE3 0
3SE2 303,
3SE2 404
Enclosures
• Type acc. to EN EN 50047 EN 50041 -- EN 50041 -- --
• Width mm 31 40 50 40 56 --
• Material Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplastic Aluminum (GD – AlSi 12) --
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP67 IP66 IP67 IP67 IP20
8
Ambient temperature
• During operation –30 ... +85 °C
Cable entry 1 × (M20 × 1.5) 2 × (M20 × 1.5) 1 × (M20 × 1.5) 3 × (M20 × 1.5) --
• Solid mm² 2 × 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 × 1.5
PE/ground terminal inside enclosure -- M3.5 --
1) Without any welds according to EN 60947-5-1.

Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm and 50 mm
■ Configuration
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators Actuating speed in the direction of the plunger axis
Bars, cams, stops, etc. are used as actuators. The shape of the The actuating speed in the case of position switches with slow-
actuator must provide the given angles for the leading and action contacts is not permitted to go lower than 15 mm/s for DC
trailing edges. and 1 mm/s for AC. Position switches with snap-action contacts
should be used when the speeds are lower.
Operation by bar Switch blocks Nominal travel Switch blocks Nominal travel
Operating point acc. to Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50047
EN 50047 acc. to EN 50013 S Operating travel acc. to EN 50047
vmax Max. operating speed Contact closed
S Operating travel acc. to Contact open
EN 50047 * Operating point on return
H Travel difference ** Positive opening acc. to
Direction of operation IEC 60947-5-1
Rounded plungers, type B Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
3SE2 200–.C, Slow-action contacts
21-22
13-14
11-12
21-22
3SE2 210–.C 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
NSC00019
NSC00017
21 13 S=10±2 11 21
NSC00001
NSC00002
0 9,6 **
16,5 **
15 21-22
17,5
S=16,5±2
13-14
S=17,5±2
12 22
20,28
22 14 mm NSC00018 12,6
> 15
Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02

=
0 0 mm 0 mm
NSC 00016a
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
13-14
23-24
25-26
17-18
vmax = 1 m/s with 13 23
NSC00023
make-before-break 0 11**
NSC00003
0
17 25 25-26
S=10 ± 1,5 17 17-18
NSC00014
mm 9,3 NSC00021
14 24
H 16 ** 16
NSC00020
Ident. No. 20
S=16,±2
18 26
30°
20
Ident. No. 11
>
=
0 mm 0 mm
25
Snap-action contacts
21-22
13-14
> 15
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
=
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 18 *
S=10±2 11 21
1 8 *
NSC00013
NSC00002
NSC 00024 0 9,6 11,8 **

vmax = 0.5 m/s 16,5 21-22 1 6 ,5
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 2 7 a
16 ** 13-14 1 6 * *
S=16,5±2
NSC00025
Minimum force required 14 22 12 22

S = 1 6 ,5 ± 2
mm 7,7 * NSC00026
in direction of operation 9 N Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
0 mm 0 m m
Roller plungers, type C Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
3SE2 200–.D, Slow-action contacts
21-22
13-14
11-12
21-22
3SE2 210–.D 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
11 21
NSC00028
21 13 S=10±2
NSC00001
NSC00002
0 9,6 ** 28
27 **
21-22
25,5
S=27±2
S=28±2
13-14
NSC00030
22 14 mm NSC00018 12,6 12 22
30,5

= 25
0 mm 0 mm
>
0 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
25-26
17-18
13-14
23-24
with 13 23
NSC 00038a
8
make-before-break 0 11**
NSC00003
vmax = 1 m/s 25-26

17 25
27,5 17-18
NSC00014
0 mm 9,3 NSC00021 26,5

S=10 ± 1,5 26,5 ** 14 24
S=26,5±2
NSC00034
NSC0031
Ident. No. 20
H 18 26
Ident. No. 11
0 mm 0 mm
30°
20
>
=
2 1 -2 2
1 3 -1 4
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
35,00
13 21 2 9 * S=10±2 11 21 2 9 *
25 + 01
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 9,6 11,8 **
2 8 21-22 2 8
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 3 5 a
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 3 7 a
2 5 ,5 * * 13-14 2 5 ,5 * *
14 22 12 22
S = 2 8 ± 2
7,7 *
S = 2 8 ± 2
mm NSC00026
NSC 00039
vmax = 1 m/s
0 m m 0 m m
Minimum force required
in direction of operation 9 N

Operating point acc. to Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to
EN 50047 acc. to EN 50013 EN 50047
vmax Max. operating speed S Operating travel acc. to
S Operating travel acc. to EN 50047
EN 50047 Contact closed
H Travel difference Contact open
Direction of operation * Operating point on return
** Positive opening acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1
Roller levers, type E Lateral actuation
3SE2 200–.E, Slow-action contacts
3SE2 210–.E 1 NO + 1 NC
0 21 13 S=13±2
NSC00001
S=10 ± 2 13 ** 0
H 21-22
13-14
22 14 18 NSC00041 mm
30° Ident. No. 11
20
>
=
1 NO + 1 NC
with
make-before-break 14,5 ** NSC00042 0
40
17 25 25-26
31 +10
17-18
NSC00014
11,5 mm
18 26
NSC 00040 Ident. No. 11
vmax = 1 m/s Snap-action contacts
Minimum force required 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
in direction of operation 9 N 13 21 S = 1 0 ± 2 11 21 S = 1 0 ± 2
NSC00013
NSC00002
1 4 * * 1 0 0 1 4 * * 1 0 0
2 1 -2 2 2 1 -2 2
1 3 -1 4 1 1 -1 2
14 22 N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 4 3 a
12 22 7 *
7 * m m N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 6 m m
Angular roller levers Along plunger axis Along plunger axis

3SE2 200–.F, Slow-action contacts
11-12
21-22
21-22
13-14
3SE2 210–.F 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
21 13 11 21
NSC00001
50,5
NSC00002
45,5 **
45
H
22 14 12 22
S=45,5±2
S=45±2

S=41 ± 2
30°
NSC00045
NSC00046
0 mm 0 mm
0
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
13-14
23-24
25-26
17-18
NSC 00044
with 13 23
22 +10 >
= 20 make-before-break
NSC00003
31 17 25
NSC00014
vmax = 1 m/s 49
46,8 ** 14 24
Ident. No. 20
in direction of operation 9 N
S=49±2
18 26 44
The example for approach is only Ident. No. 11
applicable to 3SE2 200.
NSC00047
NSC00048
It is not possible in this way for 3SE2 210.

8
0 mm 0 mm
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 11 21
NSC00049
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 5 0
NSC00013
NSC00002
44,5 ** 4 4 ,5 * *
14 22 41 12 22 4 1
S=41±2
S = 4 1 ± 2
37,8 * 3 7 ,8 *
0 mm 0 m m

EN 50047 acc. to EN 50013 EN 50047
vmax Max. operating speed S Operating travel acc. to
S Operating travel acc. to EN 50047
EN 50047 Contact closed
** Positive opening acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1
Twist levers, type A Lateral actuation Lateral actuation
Finely adjustable from 10° to 10° Slow-action contacts
3SE2 200–.G1) 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
21 13 S=21±2 11 21 S=19±2
0
NSC00001
NSC00002
0 21 0
S=15 ± 3 21-22 11-12
H 65° 13-14 21-22
22 14 mm NSC00052 34 12 22 mm 19 NSC00053
30°
20
0 20° ** 65 °
>
=
21-22
13-14
NSC00054 46°
55,00
40 + 10
38
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
with 13 23 S=32±2
make-before-break 0 25 **
NSC00003
0
17 25 25-26 13-14
17-18
NSC00014
23-24
NSC 00051 mm 17 NSC00055
14 24 NSC00056
mm 32
vmax = 1 m/s Ident. No. 20
18 26 0 31°** 65°
Ident. No. 11 25-26
in direction of operation 18 N 17-18
1) Not for hinge switches. 18 ° NSC00057
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 S = 2 1 ± 2 11 21 S = 2 1 ± 2
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 2 1 2 7 * * 0 2 1 2 7 * *
2 1 -2 2 1 1 -1 2
1 3 -1 4 2 1 -2 2
14 22 m m 1 1 * N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 5 8 a 12 22 m m 1 1 * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 7

0 2 5 ° 3 6 ° * * 6 5 ° 0 2 5 ° 3 6 ° * * 6 5 °
2 1 -2 2 1 1 -1 2
1 3 -1 4 2 1 -2 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 5 9 a 1 2 ° * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 8
1 2 ° *
Twist levers Lateral actuation Lateral actuation

Adjustable length, Slow-action contacts
finely adjustable from 10° to 10° 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 200–.U, 21 13 0 20° ** 65 ° 11 21 0
3SE2 210–.U 21-22 11-12
NSC00001
NSC00002
13-14 21-22
0 NSC00054 46° 25° NSC00061
22 14 12 22
65° Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
30°
20
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
>
=
19
with 13 23 0
8
make-before-break 0 43 °** 65° 13-14

NSC00003
17 25 25-26 23-24
51 bis 120
17-18 50° NSC00063

NSC00014
26 ° NSC00062
14 24
> 41
> 39
Ident. No. 20
=
=
18 26
Ident. No. 11
NSC 00060
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 0 2 5 ° 3 6 ° * * 6 5 ° 11 21 0 2 5 ° 3 6 ° 6 5 °
vmax = 1 m/s
NSC00013
2 1 -2 2
NSC00002
1 1 -1 2
Minimum force required 1 3 -1 4 2 1 -2 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 5 9 a 1 2 ° * N S C 0 _ 0 0 0 6 4 a
in direction of operation: 18 N 1 2 ° *
14 22 12 22

EN 50047 acc. to EN 50013 EN 50047
Direction of operation Contact open
* Operating point on return
Rod actuators in direction of rotation in direction of rotation
3SE2 200–.W, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 210–.W 21 13 0 20° 65° 11 21 0
21-22 11-12
NSC00001
NSC00002
3SE2 200–.V, 13-14 21-22
3SE2 210–.V NSC00065 46 ° 25° NSC00061
3SE2 200–.S, 22 14 12 22
3SE2 210–.S Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
0 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
with 13 23 0
65° 10,5 65° make-before-break 0 43° 65° 13-14
NSC00003
17 25 25-26 23-24
17-18 50° NSC00063
NSC00014
6 26 ° NSC00066
14 24
Ident. No. 20
18 26
Ident. No. 11
max. 214
200
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 0 25° 65° 11 21 0 2 5 ° 6 5 °
21-22
NSC00013
1 1 -1 2
NSC00002
13-14 2 1 -2 2
NSC 00068 12 °* NSC00067 1 2 ° * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 9
vmax = 1.5 m/s 14 22 12 22

Minimum force required Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
in direction of operation: 18 N
Spring rods Lateral actuation
3SE2 200–1R, Snap-action contacts
3SE2 210–1R 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
0 13 21 0 15° 11 21 0 1 5 °
NSC00013
Approach 21-22 1 1 -1 2
NSC00002
20° Minimum deflection

area of when operated 13-14 2 1 -2 2
7 °* NSC00070 7 ° * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 0
plunger (operating function
ensured) 14 22 12 22
Minimum deflection
30
when operated
15°
(destruction limit for

drive)
7
106
NSC0 00069
8
vmax = 1.5 m/s

8/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

S Operating travel acc. to Contact open
Rounded plungers Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
Central fixing with M18 thread Slow-action contacts
21-22
13-14
11-12
21-22
3SE2 200–.L, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 210–.L 21 13 0 8,9 ** 11 21
21-22
NSC00001
NSC00002
45 ** 13-14 45
43 mm NSC00073 11,8
22 14 12 22
S=45±2
NSC00072
NSC00074
48,42
43,5 + 1
0 mm 0 mm
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
13-14
23-24
25-26
17-18
with 13 23
0 make-before-break 0 10,2 **
NSC00003
17 25 25-26
NSC 00071a
45,5 17-18
NSC00014
vmax = 1 m/s 44,5 ** mm 8,5 NSC00076

14 24 43,5
0 Ident. No. 20
S=10 ± 1,5 18 26
S=43,5±2
Ident. No. 11
H
NSC00077
NSC00075
> 20
30°
0 mm 0 mm
=
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 47,8 * S=8,9±2 11 21
52,5
4 7 ,8 *
43,5 +1
NSC00013
46,5
NSC00002
0 8,9 11** 4 6 ,5
45 ** 21-22 4 5 * *
13-14
14 22 mm 7* NSC00080 12 22
0
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 1
NSC00079
NSC 00078
vmax = 0.5 m/s

Minimum force required 0 mm 0 m m
S = 8 ,9 ± 2
0 8 ,9 1 1 * *
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
m m 7 * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 2
Roller plungers
Central fixing with M18 thread 0
3SE2 200–.M, S=10 ± 1,5
3SE2 210–.M
H
> 20
30°
=
52,5
48,5
43,5 + 1
43,5 + 1
0 0
NSC 00261a NSC 00081
vmax = 1 m/s vmax = 1 m/s

Minimum force required Minimum force required
in direction of operation: 9 N in direction of operation: 9 N
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/11

3SE2 200, narrow enclosure according to 3SE2 210, wide enclosure,
EN 50047, with rounded plunger, type B with rounded plunger
22
20 20 4 2
6 10 4 0 2 0
4,3 6 1 0
20,5
NSC00303a
5
9
2 0 ,5
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 0 4 b
5
9
4,3
59
6 0
4 ,3
4 9
2 0
2 2
1 8 ,5
31 15 5 0 1 5
30 3 0
Roller plungers, type C Roller levers, type E Angular roller levers

10 3 13 5 29,5
21,5 *) 5
22
29,5
18
13
21,5 *)
15
18
11
11
NSC 00305a
11 NSC 00306a
11 NSC00307a
* Lever in final position
Twist levers, type A Rounded plunger, Roller plunger,

40 central fixing with M18 × 1 thread central fixing with M18 × 1 thread
13 24 5 M18x1 M18x1
6 10 3
27
44,5
40
40
33
33
20
SW24 SW24
11
45
NSC 00312a NSC 00313a
NSC 00308a
Twist levers, adjustable length Rod actuator Spring rods

19 41,5 6 7
10
50
11 21,5...90,5
10,5
7
142,5
20
200
11
20
108
NSC 00310b
35
36 5
NSC 00309a
46
NSC 00311a
8
8/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Molded-plastic enclosures, 40 mm
■ Configuration
See Metal Enclosures, pages 8/15 to 8/19.
3SE2 230, enclosure according to EN 50041, Roller plungers, type C Roller levers
with rounded plunger, type B
13 4,6 22 9
Æ 10 16
27
44
46,5
30
31
40*)
6,5
22
18
NSC 00329a
Æ 5,3 19
NSC 00330a

60
75
NSC00328
Pg 13,5
30 7,3x5,3 15
40 39
Angular roller levers Twist levers, type A Twist levers, adjustable length
44 9 54 19 59,5
19 47 7 10
22
21,5
49 *)
21,5...91,5
30
7
55,5
18
26
19
108
16
26
16
NSC 00331a
* Lever in final position 60

NSC 00333a
NSC 00332a 53
63
Rod actuator, type D Spring rods

6 7
5 0
10,5
200
26
1 3 9 ,5
16
52 5
NSC 00334a
8
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 3 5 b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/13

Metal enclosures, 40 mm and 56 mm
■ Configuration
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators Actuating speed in the direction of the plunger axis
Bars, cams, stops, etc. are used as actuators. The shape of the The actuating speed in the case of position switches with slow-
actuator must provide the given angles for the leading and action contacts is not permitted to go lower than 15 mm/s for DC
trailing edges. and 1 mm/s for AC. Position switches with snap-action contacts
should be used when the speeds are lower.
Position switches with 2 or 4 contacts
0-line Reference line acc. to Contact open
Plungers Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.B, Slow-action contacts
3SE2 120–.B, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 404–.B
13 21 11 21
11-12
21-22
S=10±2
21-22
13-14
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 9,5 ** NSC00129
NSC00128
21-22
13-14
14 22 mm 13 12 22
3SE3 000–0A, 22 ** 3SE3 000–6A,
23,90
=18
3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 02

>
0 Ident. No.11
20,5
S=22±2
19
S=20,5±2
NSC00127
NSC0 00126a
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure
vmax = 1.5 m/s 0 mm 0 mm
0 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
with 13 23
13-14
23-24
10 ±2,5 10 ±2,5 make-before-break 0 12 **
NSC00003
25-26
17-18
°
25-26
30
NSC00133
H H 17 25
17-18
NSC00014
mm 10,5 NSC00132
14 24
= 20
3SE3 000–7A,
>
28
18 26 Ident. No. 20
=18
3SE3 000–3A,
>
21
3SE3 010–3A, 19
Ident. No. 11 S=19±2
NSC0 00130 19,5 **
NSC00131
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure
0 mm
vmax = 0.5 m/s 0 mm

1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 S=10±2 11 21
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 10 12 **
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0
21-22 2 3 *
22 *
13-14
14 22 mm 8* NSC00135
12 22 2 2
3SE3 000–1A, 20 3SE3 000–1AV00,
3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
Ident. No. 11 19,5 ** Ident. No. 02 1 9 ,5 * *
S = 2 2 ± 2
S=20±2
8
NSC00134
0 mm 0 m m
8/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Rounded plungers, type B Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.C, Slow-action contacts
3SE2 120–.C, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 230–.C,
13 21 11 21
21-22
13-14
S=10±2
11-12
21-22
3SE2 404–.C
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 10 19,5**
21-22
35 13-14
14 22 mm 13,2 NSC00138
12 22 34,5
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,
3SE3 010–0A, 33 Ident. No. 02
37,11
S=34,5±2
S=35±2
Ident. No.11
= 31
32 **
>
NSC00137
NSC00139
0
NSC0 00136a
Narrow Wide 0 mm 0 mm
enclosure enclosure
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
vmax = 1.5 m/s with 13 23
13-14
23-24
0 make-before-break 0 12,3 22 **
NSC00003
25-26
17-18
17 25 25-26
10 ±2,5 10 ±2,5 17-18
NSC00014
mm
°
10,6 NSC00142
30
H H 14 24
34,5 3SE3 000–7A,
Ident. No. 20
= 20
18 26 33,5
>
3SE3 000–3A,
32,5
3SE3 010–3A,
42
= 27,5
NSC00143
S=32,5±2
Ident. No. 11
>
NSC00141
30,5 **
0 mm
NSC0 00140 0 mm
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure Snap-action contacts
vmax = 0.5 m/s 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
Minimum force required 13 21 S=10±2 11 21
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 10 19,5 **
35,5 * 21-22
34,5 13-14 3 5 ,5 *
14 22 mm 8* NSC00145 12 22 3 4 ,5
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
S=34,5±2

S = 3 4 ,5 ± 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 1 4 6 a
NSC00144
>31 **
0 mm 0 m m 8
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/15

Roller plungers, type C Along plunger axis Lateral actuation Along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.D, Slow-action contacts
3SE2 120–.D, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 230–.D,
13 21 S=11,5±2 11 21
11-12
21-22
21-22
13-14
3SE2 404–.D
NSC00013
NSC00002
0 11,5 22,5 **
21-22
13-14
14 22 47,5 mm 13,5 NSC00148 12 22 47
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,
3SE3 010–0A, 45,5 Ident. No. 02
51,00
Ident. No.11
= 44
S=47±2
S=47,5±2
44,5 **
>
NSC00149
NSC00147
0
NSC0 00150a 0 mm 0 mm
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
vmax = 1.5 m/s with 13 23
13-14
23-24
0 make-before-break 0 13 24,5 **
NSC00003
25-26
17-18
17 25 25-26
17-18
NSC00014
15 ± 2,5 15 ± 2,5 mm 12 NSC00152

14 24
°
30
H H
47 3SE3 000–7A,
18 26
46
Ident. No. 20 45
> 20
3SE3 000–3A,
=
3SE3 010–3A,
S=45±2
NSC00153
Ident. No. 11
58
NSC00151
44
43 **
>
=
0 mm
0 mm
NSC0 00464 Snap-action contacts

Narrow Wide 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
enclosure enclosure
13 21 S=12±2 11 21
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
vmax = 1 m/s (3SE3 230–1D),
NSC00013
NSC00002
vmax = 0.5 m/s (3SE3 1.0–1D), 0 12 25,5 **

48 * 21-22
Minimum force required 13-14
in direction of operation: 32 N 14 22 47 mm 11* NSC00155 12 22 4 7
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
S=47±2
S = 4 7 ± 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 1 5 6 a
NSC00154
42,5 ** 4 2 ,5 * *
0 mm 0 m m
Fork levers Deflection in direction of rotation

3SE2 100–1T, Snap-action contacts
3SE2 120–1T, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 404–1T
13 21 0 55 ° 60 ° 11 21
NSC00013
Lateral actuation 21-22

8
NSC00002
0 13-14
_ +
NSC00196
14 22 12 22
3SE3 000–1A, - + 3SE3 000–1AV00,
3SE3 010–1A, -9,5 0 15 *
21-22
3SE3 010–1AV00,
Ident. No. 11
10 13-14 Ident. No. 02
64
mm 17
45
40
>
=
NSC00197
>
=
<
=
NSC 00195
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure
vmax. = 2 m/s
8/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

a, g Approach angle Contact closed
vmax Max. operating speed Contact open
0-line Reference line acc. to * Operating point on return
EN 50041 ** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
H Travel difference
Direction of operation
Roller levers Lateral actuation
3SE2 100–.E, 3SE2 120–.E, Slow-action contacts
3SE2 230–.E, 3SE2 404–.E 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
0 13 21 S=22±2 11 21 S=23±2
20 ±1
NSC00013
NSC00002
22 ** 0 0
H
30° 21-22 11-12
0 13-14 21-22
14 22 12 22
= 20
28,5 NSC00158 mm mm 23 NSC00159

>
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,

3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 02
62
Ident. No.11
= 46
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
>
with 13 23 S=29,5±2
make-before-break 26,5 ** 0
NSC00003
25-26 0
17 25
17-18 13-14
NSC00014
NSC 00157
23,5 NSC00160 mm 23-24
vmax = 2.5 m/s 14 24 mm 29,5 NSC00161
3SE3 000–7A,
18 26 Ident. No. 20
3SE3 000–3A,
3SE3 010–3A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
13 21 S=20±2 11 21 S = 2 0 ± 2
NSC00013
NSC00002
24 ** 20 0 2 4 * * 2 0 1 7 * 0
21-22 1 1 -1 2
NSC0_00162 13-14 2 1 -2 2
vmax = 1 m/s, amax = 30°, gmax = 45° 14 22 NSC00163 17 * mm 12 22 N S C 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 a m m
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
Minimum force required 3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
in direction of operation: 12 N Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
Angular roller levers Along plunger axis Along plunger axis
21-22
13-14
11-12
21-22
3SE2 100–.F, 3SE2 120–.F, Slow-action contacts

3SE2 230–.F, 3SE2 404–.F 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
30° 13 21 65 11 21
NSC00013
52,5
NSC00002
NSC0 00165
H
14 22 60 ** 12 22 60
60 ±1
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,

S=60±2
S=60±2
3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 02

NSC00167
NSC00166
Ident. No.11
0
> 0 mm 0 mm
15 >
= 22 >
= 20 =17 >
=20
13-14
23-24
25-26
17-18
Narrow Wide 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
enclosure enclosure with 13 23
make-before-break
NSC00169
NSC00003
vmax. = 2.5 m/s

17 25 65
62 **
NSC00014
14 24
3SE3 000–7A,
S=65±2
18 26 60 Ident. No. 20
3SE3 000–3A,
NSC00170
3SE3 010–3A,
Ident. No. 11
0 mm 0 mm
21-22
13-14
1 1 -1 2
2 1 -2 2
NSC0_00168
Narrow Wide 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
enclosure enclosure 13 21 11 21
NSC00013
NSC00002
vmax = 1 m/s, amax = 30°, gmax = 45° 62 ** 6 2 * *

in direction of operation: 12 N 14 22 60 12 22 6 0
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
N S C 0 _ 0 0 1 7 2 a
S=60+2
NSC00171
3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,

S = 6 0 + 2
Ident. No. 11 58 * Ident. No. 02 5 8 *
0 mm 0 m m
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/17

EN 50041 acc. to EN 50013 EN 50041
a Approach angle S Operating travel acc. to
b Trailing angle EN 50041
S Operating travel acc. to ** Positive opening acc. to
EN 50041 IEC 60947-5-1
H Travel difference
Twist levers, type A Lateral actuation Lateral actuation
Repositionable and Slow-action contacts
finely adjustable from 10° to 10° 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 100–.GW, 3SE2 120–.GW, 13 21 S=24±2 11 21 0
3SE2 230–.GW, 3SE2 404–.GW
NSC00013
11-12
NSC00002
0 24 **
21-22
0 21-22 mm 28 NSC00174
<
13-14
= 70° 1) 14 22 mm NSC00173 48 12 22
>
= 50° 3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,
±3
S=20 3SE3 010–0A, 0 13 °** Ident. No. 02
H 21-22
30° Ident. No.11
13-14
NSC00175 40 °
20
>
=
19 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
with 0 41 ** 13 23 0
> 52 +1
make-before-break 25-26 13-14
NSC00003
67
17-18 23-24
17 25
28
=
mm NSC00177 mm NSC00178 51
NSC00014
14 24
0 33°**
25-26 3SE3 000–7A,
18 26 17-18 Ident. No. 20
NSC0 00176
3SE3 000–3A, 20° NSC00179
Narrow Wide 3SE3 010–3A,
enclosure enclosure
Ident. No. 11
vmax = 3 m/s
Minimum torque
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
in direction of operation: 25 Ncm
13 21 S=28±2 11 21 S = 2 8 ± 2
Contact operation either from right or left
NSC00013
NSC00002
or from right and left. 0 17 * 28 36 ** 0 1 7 * 2 8 3 6 * *

21-22 1 1 -1 2
13-14 2 1 -2 2
14 22 mm NSC00180 12 22 m m N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 1
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,

3SE3 010–1A, 0 17 ° 38 ° ** 3SE3 010–1AV00, 0 7 ° * 1 7 ° 3 8 ° * *
Ident. No. 11 21-22 Ident. No. 02 1 1 -1 2
13-14 2 1 -2 2
7 °* NSC00181 N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 2
Twist levers, adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation
3SE2 100–.UW, 3SE2 120–.UW, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 230–.U, 3SE2 404–.UW 13 21 0 13 °** 11 21 0
NSC00013
21-22 11-12
NSC00002
0
13-14 21-22
NSC00183
40 ° 18° NSC00184
19
= 20
14 22 12 22
>
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,

3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 02
Ident. No.11
< 1) 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
8
=70°
>
= 50°**
with 13 23 0
<= 80
= 50
make-before-break 0 33°** 13-14

NSC00003
>
25-26 23-24
17 25
17-18 NSC00186 40°
NSC00014
20 ° NSC00185
14 24
3SE3 000–7A,
18 26 Ident. No. 20
NSC0_00182 3SE3 000–3A,
Narrow Wide 3SE3 010–3A,
enclosure enclosure Ident. No. 11
vmax = 1 m/s, amax = 30°, bmax = 30° Snap-action contacts
Minimum torque 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
in direction of operation: 25 Ncm 13 21 0 7 °* 17° 38 °** 11 21 0 7 ° * 1 7 ° 3 8 ° * *
NSC00013
21-22 1 1 -1 2
NSC00002
Contact operation either from right or left 13-14 2 1 -2 2

or from right and left. NSC00187 N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 3
14 22 12 22
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
1) Max. operating angle 70°.
8/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

EN 50041 acc. to EN 50013 EN 50041
Direction of operation ** Positive opening acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1
Rod actuator In direction of rotation In direction of rotation
3SE2 100–.WW, 3SE2 120–.WW, 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3SE2 230–.W, 3SE2 404–.WW 13 21 0 20 ° 11 21 0
NSC00013
21-22 11-12
NSC00002
3SE2 100–.VW, 3SE2 120–.VW, 21-22
13-14
3SE2 230–.V, 3SE2 404–.VW NSC00188 24° NSC00110
46 °
0 14 22 12 22
9 3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 000–6A,
3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 02
40° 40° Ident. No.11
A
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
<
=70°
1)
with
B 13 23 0
>
= 50° make-before-break 13-14
0 43 °**
NSC00003
6 25-26 23-24
200
17 25
max. 212
NSC00190 48°
= 100
17-18
NSC00014
26 ° NSC00189
14 24
>
3SE3 000–7A,
18 26 Ident. No. 20
3SE3 000–3A,
3SE3 010–3A,
Ident. No. 11
NSC0 00191
Narrow Wide Snap-action contacts
enclosure enclosure 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
A = Operating range 13 21 0 7 °* 24° 38 °** 11 21 0 7 ° * 2 4 ° 3 8 ° * *
B = Lower edge of actuator
NSC00013
21-22 1 1 -1 2
vmax = 3 m/s 13-14 NSC00002 2 1 -2 2
NSC00192 N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 4
Minimum torque
14 22 12 22
in direction of operation: 25 Ncm
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
Contact operation is possible from either 3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,
right or left. By twisting the plunger from Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
the right and left.
Spring rods Deflection of spring rod

3SE2 100–1R, 3SE2 120–1R, Snap-action contacts
3SE2 230–.R 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
0 Minimum deflection 13 21 0 10° 11 21 0 1 0 °
Approach 15° 1) when operated 21-22
NSC00013
1 1 -1 2
NSC00002
area of (operating function 13-14 2 1 -2 2

plunger ensured) 4°* NSC00194
4 ° * N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 5 5
14 22 12 22
Minimum deflection
when operated
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 000–1AV00,
30
15°
(destruction limit for 3SE3 010–1A, 3SE3 010–1AV00,

drive) Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
7
100
NSC0 00193
Narrow Wide
enclosure enclosure
vmax = 1 m/s, approachable from all
sides
with lateral deflection at the tip: 2.5 N
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/19

Position switches with 3 contacts
Operation by bar Switch blocks Nominal travel Minimum force
Operating point acc. to EN 50041 Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 required in
vmax Max. operating speed acc. to EN 50013 S Operating travel acc. to EN 50041 direction of
0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 Contact closed operation
** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Plungers Slow-action contacts Along plunger axis Lateral actuation
3SE2 303–.B 1 NO + 2 NC 16 N
13-14
21-22
31-32
13 21 31 S=10±1
NSC00105
0 13,5
13-14
22 ** 21-22
14 22 32 31-32
23,76
Ident. No. 12 mm 10 ** NSC00205

=18
20
>
S=22±0,7
0
NSC00204
NSC 00203a
vmax = 1.5 m/s

0 mm
0
2 NO + 1 NC 18 N
10 ±1 10 ±1
13 21 33
13-14
21-22
33-34
S=10±1
H H
NSC00106
30° 0 13,5
13-14
= 20
22** 21-22
14 22 34
=18 >
33-34
28
Ident. No. 21 mm 10 ** NSC00208

20
>
S=22±0,7
NSC00207
NSC 00206
vmax = 0.5 m/s

0 mm
1 NO + 2 NC 16 N
17 25 31 0 12
17-18
25-26
31-32
17-18
NSC00107
25-26
31-32
22 ** mm 10** 12,5** NSC00210
18 26 32
21
Ident. No. 12 20,5**
NSC00209
0 mm
2 NO + 1 NC 18 N
17 25 33 0 11
17-18
25-26
33-34
NSC00212
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
33-34
mm 11,5** 13,5
18 26 34 21,5
Ident. No. 21 21**
20
8
NSC00211
0 mm
8/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Rounded plungers Slow-action contacts Along plunger axis Lateral actuation
3SE2 303–.C 1 NO + 2 NC 35 N
13 21 31 S=10±1,5
13-14
21-22
31-32
NSC00105
0 13,5 NSC00214
13-14
21-22
14 22 32 35,3 31-32
Ident. No. 12 mm 10 16 **
36,55
= 31
33,3
S=35±1,5
>
0
31,5**
NSC00262
NSC 00213a
0 mm
vmax = 1.5 m/s
0 2 NO + 1 NC 37 N
13 21 33 13-14
S=10±1,5
21-22
33-34
NSC00106
10 ±1,5 10 ±1,5 0 13,5 16 **

10
13-14
30° H H
21-22
14 22 34 35,3 33-34
= 20
Ident. No. 21 mm NSC00217

>
33,3
S=35±1,5
42
= 27,5
31,5 **
>
NSC00216
0 mm
NSC 00215
vmax = 0.5 m/s 1 NO + 2 NC 35 N

17 25 31 0 11,5 18,5 **
17-18
25-26
31-32
17-18
NSC00107
25-26
NSC00218
31-32
mm 10 12 16** NSC00219
18 26 32 35,3
Ident. No. 12 34,3
33,8
31,5 **
30**
0 mm
2 NO + 1 NC 37 N
17 25 33 0 11
17-18
25-26
33-34
NSC00221
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
33-34
mm 11,5 13,5 17,5 **
18 26 34 35
34,5
Ident. No. 21
33,3
8
NSC00220
30,5**
0 mm
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/21

Roller plungers Slow-action contacts Along plunger axis Lateral actuation
3SE2 303–.D 1 NO + 2 NC 35 N
13 21 31 S=15±2,5
13-14
21-22
31-32
NSC00105
0 19,5 NSC00224
NSC00223
13-14
21-22
14 22 32 31-32
47,5 mm 16,5 22**
Ident. No. 12
49,60
= 40
S=48±1,5
45,5
>
0 44**
NSC 00222a 0 mm
vmax = 1.5 m/s 2 NO + 1 NC 37 N

13 21 33 S=15±2,5
13-14
21-22
33-34
0
NSC00106
0 16,5 19,5 22 **
15 ± 2,5 15 ± 2,5
NSC00226
13-14
21-22
H H 14 22 34
30° 33-34
47,5
Ident. No. 21 mm NSC00227
>
= 20
S=48±1,5
45,5
58
44 **
>
= 44 +1
0 mm
1 NO + 2 NC 35 N
NSC 00225 with make-before-break
17 25 31
17-18
25-26
31-32
0 18 NSC00229
vmax = 1 m/s
17-18
NSC00107
25-26
NSC00228
31-32
mm 16,5 18,5 22** 24,5 **
18 26 32
47,5
Ident. No. 12
46,5
46
44 **
42,5**
0 mm
2 NO + 1 NC 37 N
17 25 33 0 17
17-18
25-26
33-34
NSC00231
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
NSC00230
33-34
mm 17,5 19,5 24**
18 26 34
Ident. No. 21
47
46,5
45,5
8
43 **
0 mm
8/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

a Approach angle acc. to EN 50013 S Operating travel acc. to EN 50041 direction of
b Trailing angle Contact closed operation
g Approach angle Contact open
vmax Max. operating speed ** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041
H Travel difference
Roller levers Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
3SE2 303–.E 1 NO + 2 NC 15 N
0 13 21 31 S=20±1
NSC00105
20 ±1 26 NSC00233 0
H 13-14
30°
21-22
14 22 32 31-32
= 20
Ident. No. 12 20** mm

>
2 NO + 1 NC 17 N
62
13 21 33 S=20±1
= 46
NSC00106
>
26 NSC00234 0
13-14
21-22
14 22 34 33-34
Ident. No. 21 20 ** mm
NSC 00232
1 NO + 2 NC 15 N
with make-before-break 23 NSC00236 0
17 25 31 17-18
25-26
NSC00107
31-32
24,5** 20 ** mm
18 26 32
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC 17 N
with make-before-break 21,8 0
17 25 33 17-18
NSC0_00235 25-26
NSC00108
For lateral actuation: 33-34

26 23** NSC00237 mm
vmax = 1 m/s at amax = 30°
vmax = 2.5 m/s at gmax = 45° 18 26 34
bmax = 45° Ident. No. 21
For operation along plunger axis: vmax. = 1.5 m/s
Angular roller levers Slow-action contacts Along plunger axis
3SE2 303–.F 1 NO + 2 NC 15 N
13 21 31
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
33-34
30°
NSC00105
52,5
NSC00239
NSC00240
H
14 22 32
63
Ident. No. 12
60 ±1
2 NO + 1 NC 17 N
13 21 33
NSC00106
0
S=60±1
S=60±1
60 ** 60 **
14 22 34 mm mm
0 0
NSC 00238 >
= 17
>
= 20 Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC 15 N
8
17 25 31
17-18
25-26
31-32
17-18
25-26
33-34
NSC00107
NSC00242
NSC00243
64
18 26 32
Ident. No. 12 63 **
2 NO + 1 NC 62 17 N
17 25 33 61**
60,5
NSC00108
60 **
NSC0_00241
For operation along plunger axis: 18 26 34 0 mm 0 mm

vmax = 1 m/s at amax = 30° Ident. No. 21
vmax = 2.5 m/s at gmax = 45°
vmax = 2.5 m/s at bmax = 45°
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/23

Operation by bar Switch blocks Nominal travel Minimum torque
Operating point acc. to EN 50041 Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 in direction of
vmax Max. operating speed acc. to EN 50013 S Operating travel acc. to EN 50041 rotation
0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 Contact closed
Direction of operation ** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Twist levers Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
Finely adjustable from 10° to 10° 1 NO + 2 NC 25 Ncm
3SE2 303–.GW–Z 13 21 31 S=20±3
NSC00105
A31 0 45
13-14
0 21-22
< 14 22 32 31-32
= 70° 1) NSC00245
> Ident. No. 12 mm 20 **
= 50°
20 ± 3
H 0 47°
30° 13-14
21-22
20
31-32
19
>
=
20°** NSC00246
52 +1
67
2 NO + 1 NC
13 21 33 S=20±3
>
=
NSC00106
0 45
13-14
21-22
14 22 34 33-34
NSC 00244 Ident. No. 21 mm 20 ** NSC00247
vmax = 3 m/s
0 47 °
Contact operation is possible from either right or 13-14
left. By twisting the plunger from the right and 21-22
left. 33-34
20°** NSC00248
1 NO + 2 NC
17 25 31 S=20±3
NSC00107
0 32 NSC00249
17-18
25-26
18 26 32 31-32
Ident. No. 12 mm 20 ** 37 **
0 34 ° NSC00250
17-18
25-26
31-32
20 °** 40 ° **
2 NO + 1 NC
17 25 33 0 26 31** NSC00251
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
33-34
mm 45
18 26 34
Ident. No. 21
0 28° NSC00252
17-18
25-26
33-34
8
33°** 47 °

Max. deflection for adjustment purposes 90°.
8/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Operation by bar Switch blocks Nominal travel Minimum torque
Operating point acc. to EN 50041 Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 in direction of
a Approach angle acc. to EN 50013 S Operating travel acc. to EN 50041 rotation
b Trailing angle Contact closed
vmax Max. operating speed Contact open
0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50041 ** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Twist levers, adjustable length Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
3SE2 303–.UW 13 21 31 0 47°
13-14
NSC00105
0 21-22
31-32
20°** NSC00254
19 14 22 32
= 20
>
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
<
=70°
1) 13 21 33 0 47°
> 13-14
NSC00106
= 50°**
<= 80
= 50
21-22
>
33-34
20 °** NSC00255
14 22 34
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00253 17 25 31 0 34 °
17-18
NSC00107
vmax = 3 m/s, 25-26

amax = 30°, 31-32
bmax = 30° 18 26 32
20°** 40 ° NSC00256
Contact operation is possible from either right or Ident. No. 12

left. By twisting the plunger from the right and
left.
2 NO + 1 NC
17 25 33 0 28° NSC00257
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
33-34
33°** 47°
18 26 34
Ident. No. 21
Rod actuator Slow-action contacts Deflection in direction of rotation
3SE2 303–.WW, 13 21 31 0 47°
13-14
NSC00105
3SE2 303–.VW 21-22

0 31-32
20°** NSC00254
14 22 32
9
Ident. No. 12
40° 40°
A
2 NO + 1 NC
<
=70°
1)
13 21 33 0 47°
B
>
= 50° 13-14
NSC00106
21-22
200
33-34
max. 212
= 100
20 °** NSC00255
14 22 34
>
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
8
NSC0 00258
17 25 31 0 34 °
17-18
NSC00107
A = Operating range 25-26

B = Lower edge of actuator 31-32
20°** 40 ° NSC00256
18 26 32
vmax = 3 m/s
Ident. No. 12
Contact operation is possible from either right or
left. By twisting the plunger from the right and
left. 2 NO + 1 NC
17 25 33 0 28° NSC00257
17-18
NSC00108
25-26
33-34
33°** 47°
18 26 34
Ident. No. 21

Max. deflection for adjustment purposes 90°.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/25

3SE2 120 3SE2 100 3SE2 303
narrow enclosure, 2 contacts, wide enclosure, 2 contacts, wide enclosure, 3 contacts
with plunger with plunger 40 16
40
11,5
6 16
Æ6
11,5
16
17,5
6,5
4
7,5
17,5
9,3 x 5,3
6,5
4
6,5
97
5,3
9,3x5,3 7,5
60
67,5
75
NSC00341a
NSC00337a
NSC00336a
20
20
7,3x5,3 23 18 23 18
30 15 56 39 56 39
40 39
3SE2 404 Rounded plungers, type B Roller plungers, type C

wide enclosure, 4 contacts Æ 10 13 5
42
12,5
6,5
40 16
30,5
20
43
33
4
6 7,5 NSC 00347
NSC 00348a
127,5
110
Roller levers Angular roller levers

18
22 9 44 9
NSC00342a
22
24 4,3 27
30
21,5
49 *)
46,5
40*)
18
18
40 5,3 5
56 39
19 19
NSC 00330a NSC 00331a
* Lever in final position * Lever in final position
Twist levers, type A Fork levers

54 55,5
19 47 7 30 15,5
19 7
30
55
30
56
26
16
60
63
NSC 00493a
NSC 00352a
8
Twist levers, adjustable length Rod actuator, adjustable length, type D Spring rods
19 59,5 6 7
10
5 0
21,5...91,5
10,5
7
200
26
108
1 3 9 ,5
26
16
16
NSC 00333a
53
52 5
63
NSC 00334a
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 3 5 b
8/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Metal enclosures
compact design with molded cable

In harsh industrial environments and in installations with limited Switching frequency 30 operating cycles/min
space, the small 3SE3 160 and 3SE3 180 compact switches are Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V
ideal. The switches are already equipped with a molded cable
Pollution degree Class 3
of 2 m in length and can therefore be installed in the smallest
spaces. Continuous thermal current Ith 10 A
Mechanical endurance 10 × 106 operating cycles
Both the enclosure and the actuator head are made of metal and
Electrical endurance 500 000 operating cycles
comply with the high IP67 degree of protection. The roller
plunger, rounded plunger and roller lever are available as Contact opening 2 × 1.25 mm
actuator heads. Connecting cable (2 m) PVC-5 x 0.75 mm² (18 AWG);
BN-BU: NO, BK-BK: NC,
The switch block is designed with snap-action contacts GN/YE: 0 V
1 NO + 1 NC. The NC contact complies with the requirements Degree of protection IP67
for positive opening according to EN 60947-5-1. Ambient temperature –30 ... +85°C
The 3SE3 1 position switch with molded cable is available in Stroke 5 mm
different sizes: Operating speed
• The 3SE3 180 series complies with the EU standard and fea- up to 80 % operating distance
tures a 30 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a spacing of • 3SE3 1.0-.C. 1 m/s
20 mm. • 3SE3 1.0-.D. Vertical 1 m/s
• The 3SE3 160 series meets the requirements of the US market Lateral 0.5 m/s
and features a 40 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a • 3SE3 1.0-.G. 1.5 m/s
spacing of 25 mm.
■ Configuration
Switch blocks and operating travel or angle of actuators
Switch block Nominal travel

Terminal designation 0-line Reference line acc. to EN 50 041 Contact closed
acc. to EN 50013 Positive opening acc. to Contact open
** IEC 60947-5-1
Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE3 1.0–1C., –1D. 3SE3 1.0–1G
2 ,5 4 * * 5 m m 1 0 0 % 0 ° 2 0 ° 5 0 ° * * 7 5 ° 1 0 0 % Color codes:
B N B K
B K - B K B K - B K BK = black
B N - B U B N - B U
B K - B K B K - B K
BN = brown
B N - B U B N - B U BU = blue
B U B K G N /Y E 0 N S C 0 _ 0 0 2 6 5 c N S C 0 _ 0 0 2 6 6 c GN/YE = green/yellow
N S C 0 _ 0 0 2 6 4 a
1 ,5 1 2 °
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/27

Metal enclosures
compact design with molded cable
3SE3 180-1C 3SE3 160-1C 3SE3 180-1CJ 3SE3 160-1CJ
Æ8 Æ8 M 12x1 M 12x1
Æ5,3 ø8 SW 14 ø8 SW 14
Æ4,3
17,5
19,8
26,2
23,5
57,5
59,8
25
47,5
20
8,5
48,5
£8
40
£8
NSC00361
74,7
40
71
NSC00358
ø4,3
ø5,3
47,5
48,5
20
NSC00364
25
NSC00366
16 30
16 40
16 30
16 40
3SE3 180-1D 3SE3 160-1D 3SE3 180-1DJ 3SE3 160-1DJ

4 Æ12 4 Æ12 M 12x1 M 12x1
4 ø12 SW 14 4 ø12 SW 14
Æ4,3 30,3
30
Æ5,3
37,9
36,4
70,3
70
20
48,5
25
47,5
£8
83,9
86,4
£8
40
40
NSC00359
NSC00362
47,5
48,5
ø4,3
ø5,3
20 25
NSC00367
NSC00365
16 30
16 40
16 30
16 40
3SE3 180-1G 3SE3 160-1G

28,3 28,3
24 24
5 Æ14 5 Æ14
33
33
51
52
Æ4,3 Æ5,3
91
92
65,5
66,5
20 25
40
40
NSC00363
NSC00360
16 30 16 40
All devices complete with cable, 2 m long

8
8/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Open-type position switches
■ Configuration
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation Switch blocks Nominal travel Minimum
A Actuating bar spacing = distance from Terminal designation acc. to 0-line Commencement of plunger travel force
center of the fixing hole up to lower edge of EN 50013 Contact closed required in
contact bar Contact open direction of
* Operating point on return plunger axis
A** Actuating bar spacing for positive opening
acc. to IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1) ** Positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1-3
for snap-action contacts
Rounded plungers Along plunger axis Lateral actuation a = 30°
3SE3 02 Slow-action contacts 2,9 ** 8N
21-22
13-14
0 NSC00115
21-22
1 NO + 1 NC 0 13-14
NSC00114
21 13 mm 6,1
= 20
NSC00001
**1,7
>
20,57
3,5
A
22 14
Ident. No. 11 6 mm
Snap-action contacts 0 2,9 6,1** 6N
21-22
13-14
21-22
NSC0_00263a 1 NO + 1 NC mm 13-14
0
A 15 mm; A** 17.5 mm 13 21 0,6 * mm 1,1* NSC00113
NSC00013
Actuators can be in the form of a bar, cam, stop etc. 1,7
For lateral actuation: NSC00112

14 22 **3,5
amax = 30°, bmax = 30°, vmax = 0.5 m/s
For operation along plunger axis: Ident. No. 11 6
vmax = 1.5 m/s
Slow-action contacts 0 5,2** 8N
25-26
17-18
25-26
1 NO + 1 NC 0 17-18
3SE3 020-.A mm
with make-before-break mm 3,5 NSC00117
30,2 17 25
22 10 2
NSC00014
20 5 ** 3
NSC00116
7 5
21
18 26
10
6
4
Ident. No. 11
59,5
48,5
Slow-action contacts 0 6,1 11 N

NSC0 00356
8
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
5,3x4,3 1 NO + 2 NC 0 mm 21-22
67,6
13 21 31 31-32
** 1,5 mm 2,6 ** NSC00119
NSC00105
26
NSC00118
3,5
Adapter 14 22 32
3SY3 121
Ident. No. 12 6
2 NO + 1 NC 0 6,1 13 N
13-14
21-22
33-34
SE3 023-.A 13 21 33 13-14

0 mm 21-22
22 10
NSC00106
33-34
20 5
**1,5 mm 2,6 ** NSC00121
7 5 14 22 34
21
NSC00120
3,5
10
Ident. No. 21
4
6
8
1 NO + 2 NC 0 4,4 11 N
17-18
25-26
31-32
95,2
with make-before-break 17-18

81
0 mm 25-26
17 25 31 31-32
NSC00357a
NSC00107
1,5 ** mm 2,6** 5,2** NSC00123

2,5 3,0 **
8
NSC00122
18 26 32
Ident. No. 12
6
6
30,2 26 0 3,5
2 NO + 1 NC 13 N
17-18
25-26
33-34
Repeat plunger with make-before-break 17-18

0 mm 25-26
17 25 33 33-34
NSC00108
mm 4,4** 6,1 NSC00125

2,0
2,5**
3,5
NSC00124
18 26 34
Ident. No. 21 6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/29

3SE2, 3SE3 Position Switches with Separate Actuator
General data
These compact position switches with separate actuator are
available in three versions:
• With molded-plastic enclosure and fixing dimensions
according to EN 50047, width 31 mm
• With metal enclosure and fixing dimensions according to
EN 50041, width 40 mm
• With molded-plastic enclosure outside of the standards that
has arisen in this form in accordance with general market
requirements
When used as a safety position switch, mounting at a spacing of
20 mm (molded-plastic enclosure) or 30 mm (metal enclosure)
is necessary. Or the switch must be fitted with a pin or with a
stop.
Operation
The position switches can only be operated with the matching
coded actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices
is impossible.
SIRIUS position switches with separate actuator are used where
the position of doors, covers or safety screens must be moni- The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the
tored for safety reasons. For example, they are used together switch and must be ordered separately.
with 3TK28 safety combinations and the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or The actuator with lateral actuation can be adjusted through
SINUMERIK systems in safety circuits up to Category 4. 4 x 90°. It cannot be replaced with actuators of the standard
type.
The actuator heads of the 3SE2 243 and 3SE2 257 switches with
special enclosures cannot be changed.
Radius actuator
The position switches with radius actuators are particularly suit-
able for rotatable protection devices. The movable actuation key
allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch
and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented.
Positive opening
The switch can be used in safety circuits due to the positive
opening of the NC and positive closing of the NO contacts by
pulling the actuator. A position switch must not be used as an
end stop.
Contact reliability
The movable contacts of the 3SE2 120 and 3SE2 200 switches
are designed as double-break contacts. This ensures an
extremely high contact stability, even when the devices are
switching low voltages and currents, e.g. 5 V DC/1 mA.
8
8/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Type 3SE2 1, 3SE2 2, 3SE3 2 Exception: 3SE2 243
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Pollution degree acc. to EN 60664-1 Class 3
Rated operational voltage Ue V 500 AC; over 380 V AC only for equal potential
• For alternating current 40 to 60 Hz Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15 Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15
- at 24 V A 10 10 10 10
- at 125 V A 10 10 10 10
- at 230 V A 10 6 10 4
- at 400 V A 10 4 10 4
- at 500 V A 10 3 10 3
• For direct current Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13
- at 24 V A 10 10
- at 48 V A 6 4
- at 110 V A 4 1
- at 220 V A 1 0.4
- at 440 V A 0.5 0.2
DIAZED fuse links
• gL/gG operational class A 6
• Characteristic quick A 10
Mechanical endurance > 1 x 106 operating cycles
• With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 > 1 × 106 operating cycles
contactors
• For DC-13 utilization category With direct current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage,
the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
Switching frequency 6 × 103 operating cycles/h
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26
contactors
Type 3SE2 200, 3SE2 243, 3SE2 120

3SE3 200 3SE2 257
Enclosures Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplastic Aluminum (GD – AlSi 12)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP65 IP67 IP67
Ambient temperature
• During operation –30 ... +85 °C –35 ... +85 °C
• During storage, transport
Cable entry 3SE2 200: 1 × (M20 × 1.5), 1 × (M20 × 1.5) or 1 × (M20 × 1.5)
3SE3 200: Pg13.5 1 × (M16 × 1.5)
• Solid 2 × 2.5 mm² 1 × (0.5 ... 1.5 mm²), 2 × 2.5 mm²
2 × (0.5 ... 1 mm²)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.5 mm² 1 × (0.5 ... 1.5 mm²), 2 × 1.5 mm²
2 × (0.5 ... 1 mm²)
PE/ground terminal inside enclosure -- M 3.5
8
1) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/31

■ Configuration
Actuator Operation by a separate actuator Switch blocks Nominal travel Minimum
vmax Max. operating speed Terminal designation Contact closed force required
Direction of operation according to EN 50013 Contact open in operating
direction on
Radius actuation: Actuator in actuator head; retraction
for all directions of approach NC is closed
Separate actuator Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation For front-end
operation
3SE2 200–.XX03 3SE2 200–.XX04
Lateral actua- a 1 NO + 1 NC 10 N
13-14
21-22
tion 21 13
NSC00001
vmax = 1.5 m/s
22 14
0
in.40
3
Ident. No. 11
b
Rm
NSC 00271
375
NSC 00268
Axial and front- 2 NC
end actuation 11 21
NSC 00269
NSC00002
vmax = 1 m/s
12 22
Actuator a b Ident. No. 02
Short 42 ... 45 66.5 ... 69
Long 62 ... 65 86.5 ... 89
Axial and lat- 3SE3 200–.XX13 1 NO + 1 NC 10 N

eral actuation Vertical actuation 21 13
(4 × 90°)
NSC00001
10.... 14....
12,5 16,5
22 14
Ident. No. 11
NSC 00272a
0
20
00
2 NC
.2
n.
11 21
in
mi
NSC00002
R
12 22
Ident. No. 02
Horizontal actuation
NSC 00617
R
mi
n.2
13.... 00 14....
15,5 16,5
R
mi
n.5
0
8
8/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3SE2 200-.XX03, lateral actuation 3SE2 200-.XX04, front-end actuation
10 a Permissible center offset
R min.400
of actuator to position switch:
vertical and horizontal 1 mm
41
Actuator a b
26,3
Short 42 ... 45 66.5 ... 69
00
Long 62 ... 65 86.5 ... 89
b
in.4
91
4,3 18,75 Radius actuation:

Rm
20 For all radii 50 mm,

59
22
50
lateral and front-end actuation

375
104,7
=
<
4 4,3
NSC00372a 20
31 15 22
50
30
NSC00373a
31 15
30
3SX3 196 short actuator 3SX3 195 long actuator

NSC00374 NSC00375
13
13
20 5
30
30
20
20
4,3
10 10
50 70
3SE3 200-.XX13, 5 directions of approach

30,25 30
41,5
33,9
3
99
25 20/
22
ø4,3
NSC00376a
33 30,5
Radius actuation:
For all radii 50 mm, lateral and
front-end actuation
3SX3 220 standard actuator 3SX3 221 actuator for transverse fixing 3SX3 254 radius actuator
4,4
20°
8
ø8,2
13
7
7
4,3
30
22
13
11,5
9,5
4,4
40
56
22
ø4,3
NSC00387
4,3
N SC00377
30,4
30
13
17,2
16 44,4
44,4
NSC00379
3,6
36,2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/33

■ Configuration
Operation and operating travel of actuators
direction on
Separate actuator Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
Lateral and 3SE2 243–.XX.., 3SE2 257–.XX.. 1 NO + 2 NC 0 2,3 5,2 5,5 8 30 N
front-end 13 21 31 13-14 or
1)
actuation R min.150 21-22 5N
NSC00105
22 31-32
mm NSC00274
36
14 22 32
Ident. No. 12
1 NC 0 2,3 5,5 8
3SE3 243:90
3SE3 257:75
11 11-12
NSC00275
NSC00267
mm
12
17,5
Pg 11
Ident. No. 01
NSC 00273
13
1) Radius actuator: Rmin > 38 mm.
3SE2 243, lateral and front-end actuation, 3SE2 257, lateral and front-end actuation 3SX3 228 universal radius actuator
with 3SX3 218 standard actuator 40 56
56 for M 5 countersunk 28 40 16
5,5 screw
7
11
NSC0_00383a
8
5,5
NSC00381
25,5
16 Æ
18
20,5
4
29
27
2,5 27
75
7
2,8
6,5
27 2 5,5 3SX3 217 ball locating
40
4,8
15,5
28
20,5
15,7
8
M20/M16
28,5
52
10
18
4
29
56
7
40
90
5,5
25,5
20,5
15
5,5 for M 5
countersunk screw
NSC0_00382
2,5
15,5
2,8
6,5
27
52 9
13
30
NSC0_00380 a
8
14 8
4
8/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Metal enclosures, 40 mm
■ Configuration
direction on
Separate actuator Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
Lateral 3SE2 120–.XX 1 NO + 1 NC NSC00277 10 N
13-14
actuation 80 21 13 21-22
v
NSC00001
vmax = 1 m/s
NSC 00276
1,5
22 14
in.40 2)
Ident. No. 11
0
2 NC
Rm
11 21
NSC00002
12 22
364
v Ident. No. 02
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 22
3SE2 120-.XX, lateral actuation 3SX3 206 actuator for transverse fixing 3SX3 203 universal radius actuator
32 7,5 8 0
80
<
16,4
NSC00368a
10,5 41
14
48
3 0 °
5,3
4 0
5 0
34
40
0 4 0
R min.400
116,3
6 0 °
5,3
5 ,5
50
2 9
60
364
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 7 1 a
NSC00370
<
52
30 7,3x5,3 15
40
3SX3 197 actuator for lengthwise fixing
79,1 7,8
40,4 20
15
NSC00369
8
9
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/35

3SE2, 3SE3 Position Switches with Tumbler
General data
■ Overview Tumbler
The separate actuator operates in a similar way to the coding of
a key and protects against manipulation. It transmits the locking
force to the protection system and helps to monitor its position.
There are two versions of locking:
• In the standard version, the position switch locks by means of
spring force and releases by means of electromagnetic force
(closed-circuit principle). In the case of voltage failure, it
reliably prevents the protective device from opening when
machine parts are still moving.
For emergency situations or in setup mode, the switch is
equipped with an auxiliary release which is secured against
unauthorized use either with a seal or lock. This means that
release is still possible for authorized personnel when a power
failure has occurred.
• The second version offers locking by means of electromag-
netic force and release by means of spring force (open-circuit
principle). This version has an advantage when it is necessary
to quickly access the machine after a power failure occurs, or
in the case of very short after-running times.
The SIRIUS position switches with tumbler are exceptional, tech-
nically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or Contacts
intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other Switch with 4 contacts: monitoring the actuator or position of the
covers as long as a dangerous situation is present protective door as well as monitoring the position of the magnet.
(e.g. follow-on motion of the shutdown machine).
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the require-
■ Design ments of the failsafe principle to EN 1088.
The position switches with tumbler are offered in molded-plastic ■ Function

or metal enclosures.
Optical signaling device
Operation
The 3SE2 83 and 3SE2 84 position switches are also available
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the with an optical signaling device.
switch and must be ordered separately.
The signaling device indicates the switching position of the lock
The actuator with lateral actuation can be adjusted through and the protective device optically by means of 2 LEDs on the
4 x 90°. The 3SE3 .5. and 3SE3 .6. switches can also be enclosure surface (only possible with contact arrangement of
approached from above. 1 NO/1 NC + 1 NO/1 NC). On the version with optical signaling
A radius actuator is available for small actuating radii. equipment the contacts are not electrically isolated.
Protective device Tumbler Display Meaning
Closed Open Yellow and green Actuator
to be pulled
Closed Closed Green Actuator
locked
Open Open Yellow Actuator
pulled
8
8/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Type 3SE3 7, 3SE3 8 3SE2 8
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Pollution degree acc. to EN 60664-1 Class 3
• DC V 24
• AC 50 ... 60 Hz V 110 ... 130 230
• For alternating current 40 to 60 Hz Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15
- at 24 V A 10 4
- at 60 V A 10 4
- at 110 V A 10 4
- at 230 V A 10 4
• For direct current Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13
- at 24 V A 10 3
- at 60 V A 5 1.5
- at 110 V A 2.5 0.7
- at 220 V A 1 0.3
Power consumption of the magnet at Uc W 5.5 5.2
DIAZED fuse links
• gL/gG operational class A 6
• Characteristic quick A 10
• With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 1 × 106 operating cycles
contactors
• For DC-13 utilization category With direct current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage,
the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
Switching frequency 6 × 103 operating cycles/h
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26
contactors
Type 3SE3 75, 3SE3 76 3SE3 85, 3SE3 86 3SE2 83, 3SE3 84
Enclosure Fiber-glass strengthened Aluminum (GD – AlSi 12) Aluminum (GD – AlSi 12)
thermoplastic
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP66 IP67
Ambient temperature
• During operation –30 ... +70 °C
• During storage, transport
Cable entry Pg 13.5 M 20 × 1.5
• Solid 2 × 1.5 mm² 2 × 2.5 mm²
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.0 mm² 2 × 1.5 mm²
PE/ground terminal inside enclosure -- M 3.5 M 3.5
1) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
8
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/37

Molded-plastic enclosures, 1200 N locking force
■ Configuration
direction on
Separate actuator, with tumbler Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation
Axial and lat- 3SE3 75.-.XX, 3SE3 76.-.XX 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NC 20 N
eral actuation
(4 × 90°) 3....
4,5

2 NC 2 NC
11 21 31 41
150
NSC00281
NSC00002
in.
Rm
12 22 32 42
NSC 00283
3SE3 75.-.XX, 3SE3 76.-.XX 3SX3 252 standard actuator 3SX3 253 actuator for transverse
40 fixing
9,5 30
9
NSC00385
ø5,3
ø5,3
45,5
6,5
20
,1
34
ø5
13
15
8
NSC00386
9 15
8 20 27,2
81,5 13
42
144,5
27,2
ø37
44,5
110
Lock 3SX3 254 radius actuator

20°
ø8,2
19,5
13
40
56
16 56
39,5
ø4,3
NSC00387
30,4
16 44,4
8
NSC0_00384b
48
8/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Metal enclosures, 1200 N locking force
■ Configuration
direction on
Axial and lat- 3SE3 85.-.XX, 3SE3 86.-.XX 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NC 20 N
eral actuation
(4 × 90°) 3....
4,5

2 NC 2 NC
11 21 31 41
150
NSC00281
NSC00002
in.
Rm
12 22 32 42
NSC 00283
3SE3 85.-.XX, 3SE3 86.-.XX 3SX3 252 standard actuator 3SX3 253 actuator for transverse
40 fixing
9,5 30
9
NSC00385
ø5,3
ø5,3
45,5
6,5
20
,1
34
ø5
13
15
8
NSC00386
9 15
8 20 27,2
81,5
13
42
144,5
27,2
ø37
44,5
110
Lock 3SX3 254 radius actuator

20°
ø8,2
19,5
13
40
56
16 56
39,5
ø4,3
NSC00387
30,4
16 44,4
8
NSC0_00384b
48
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/39

Metal enclosures, 2000 N locking force
■ Configuration
direction on
Lateral actua- 3SE2 83.-.XX, 3SE2 84.-.XX 1 NO + 1 NC 13-14 10 N
tion (4 × 90°) 80 13 21 21-22
v
Locking force:
NSC00013
NSC00285
vmax = 1.5 m/s 1 max. 2000 N,
duration 5 s2)
14 22
NSC00284
00 1)
Ident. No. 11
in. 4
Rm
364
1) Universal radius actuator: Rmin > 70 mm.

2) Destruction of internal parts will result if this value is exceeded.
3SE2 83.-.XX, 3SE2 84.-.XX, lateral actuation 3SX3 197 actuator 3SX3 206 actuator
2 0 for lengthwise fixing for transverse fixing
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 8 8 b
79,1 7,8 7,5

40,4 20
14
15
3 5 ,3
5 ,6
3 0 8
5,3
40
2
NSC00369
m in . 4 0 0
5 ,2
5 ,2
1 4 1 ,3
R
6 0
50
1 0 0
> 3 6 4
M 2 0 x 1 ,5
NSC00370
52
2 2
2 7 3 0 3SX3 207 actuator for direction of approach from the left side
3 9 9 0 132 7,8
4 5 40,4 20
15
8
NSC00392
9
3SX3 203 universal radius actuator

8 0
3 0 °
4 0
5 0
4 0
6 0 °
5 ,5
2 9
N S C 0 _ 0 0 3 7 1 a
8/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3SE2 Hinge Switches
Molded-plastic enclosures
■ Overview 3SE2 283

The 3SE2 283 hinge switch has an integrated electromechanical
switch block that is actuated when the hinged protective cover
is opened. If the cover is only opened by 4°, the normally closed
contact is positively opened by a direct (not spring-action)
mechanism. These positively driven contacts guarantee inter-
ruption of the electric circuit and stopping of the machine. The
normally open contact is closed when the cover is moved by
13.5°.
Type 3SE2 200
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V
Pollution degree Class 3
Continuous thermal current Ith 10 A
Operating frequency 30 operating cycles/hour
Actuating force 15 Ncm
Actuating speed Minimum of 0.5 m/s
The hinge switches are used for monitoring and protecting Enclosure material Molded plastic
hinged protection equipment such as doors and flaps. Degree of protection IP66
Characteristics Ambient temperature –25 ... +85 °C
Cable entry M20 × 1.5
• Type 3SE2 200
- Enclosures according to EN 50047, width 31 mm, Conductor cross-sections
with 1 × M20 × 1.5 connecting thread • Solid 2 × 2.5 mm2
- 2 contacts with moving double-break contacts • Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.5 mm2
- Degree of protection IP66
For further technical specifications, see Standard position
• Type 3SE2 283 switches.
- Special design, with two M20 × 1.5 connecting thread
- 3 contacts
- Degree of protection IP65 Type 3SE2 283
■ Design Continuous thermal current Ith 2.5 A

3SE2 200 • At AC-15, 120 V 4.2 A
The hinge switches are offered in a molded-plastic enclosure • At AC-15, 250 V 2A
according to EN 50047. The enclosures correspond to the • At DC-13, 24 V 1A
enclosures of the standard position switches. The switches are Min. make-break capacity > 5 V/1 mA
fitted with 1 NO + 1 NC snap-action contacts. With an angle of Short-circuit protection 2 A (gG operational class)
operation of 5° or 15° they make "Switch-off" and "Signaling"
Mechanical endurance > 1 × 106 operating cycles
possible for the first time without a time delay and with a small
opening angle. Operating frequency 1200 operating cycles/hour
Positive opening 2 mm after opening point
The switches designed for mounting on hinges must be at-
Enclosure material Molded plastic
tached directly to the hinge and guarantee ensured cut-off, with
a high level of security against manipulation, even with very Degree of protection IP65
small opening angles. The actuator head can be rotated through Ambient temperature –25 ... +65 °C
4 x 90° after the four screws are unscrewed. Shock resistance 30 g/18 ms
Resistance to vibrations 20 g/10 ... 200 Hz
Cable entry 2 × (M20 × 1.5)
Screw terminals 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 / AWG 15
8
Mounting on hinges
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/41

3SE2 Hinge Switches
Molded-plastic enclosures
3SE2 200-1GA.1 hinge switches for mounting on hinges, solid shaft 3SE2 200-1GA.0 hinge switches for mounting on hinges, hollow shaft
4 ,3
1 2
4 ,3
8
2 0
1 1
1 1
5 5 ,7
1 0
9
2 7 ,7
9
4 ,2
2 0
4 ,3
2 0
5 9
2 2
5 9
2 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 3 5 a
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 3
1 5 1 5
M 2 0 x 1 ,5 M 2 0 x 1 ,5
3 0 ,8 3 0 3 1 3 0
3SE2 283-.GA.3 hinge switches with hinge 3SX3 225 additional hinge
15
5
NSC0_00611a
13
5°
36
19
6,8
5
12
M 20 × 1,5 71
42
76
NSC0_ 00618a
44
71
62
92
44
■ Schematics
Switch blocks and operating travel of actuators
3SE2 200
1 NO + 1 NC 0 °
21 13 1 8 0 ° 1 5 ° 5 ° 5 ° 1 5 ° 1 8 0 °
NSC00001
2 1 -2 2
1 3 -1 4
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 3 6
22 14 r e le a s e p o s itio n
Ident. No. 11
3SE2 283
1 NO + 2 NC 3 NC
8
8/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3SE6 Magnetically Operated Switches
Magnetic monitoring system
3SE6 806 safety relay
The 3SE6 806 safety relay has two floating enabling circuits
(safe circuits) as NO contact circuits and one floating signaling
circuit as a NC circuit. The number of enabling circuits can be
increased by adding one or more 3TK28 30 expansion modules.
Up to six protective devices (sensors) can be connected to the
safety relay. The device has six current-sourcing semiconductor
outputs (Y1 ... Y6), which report the state of the connected pro-
tective devices.
Crossovers between the sensor circuits as well as ground faults
and wire breaks are detected by an internal monitor. The device
is protected by an internal self-restoring PTC fuse (multifuse).
The green LED indicates the operating state:
• LED POWER on: Supply voltage available
• LED CHA 1 on: All NO contacts of the connected sensors are
open
A magnetically operated switch is comprised of a coded switch- • LED CHA 2 on: All NC contacts of the connected sensors are
ing magnet and a switch block (sensor unit). Evaluation requires closed
a safety controlgear or connection to a bus system. Combination of monitoring unit and magnetically operated
switch
■ Design Monitoring unit Magnetically operated switch (switch block)
A magnetically operated switch is comprised of a coded switch- 1 NC +1 NO 2 NC
ing magnet, a switch block (sensor unit) and a monitoring device 3SE6 605 3SE6 605 3SE6 605 3SE6 604
(see Function). -1BA -2BA -3BA -1BA
The switch block and switching magnet must not be installed on Relay output1)
ferromagnetic materials because the switching response will be SIRIUS 3SE6 806 ✔ ✔ ✔ --
influenced. Spacers can be used to prevent this. safety relay
2)
Solid-state output
The switch blocks are available with either a connecting cable or
connector. SIRIUS 3TK28 4. -- -- -- ✔
safety relay
SIRIUS 3TK28 5. safety -- -- -- ✔
relay with contactor relay
SIRIUS 3RA7 -- -- -- ✔
safe load feeder
6
ASIsafe 3RK1 -- -- -- ✔
5 ,5
SIMATIC ET200 S, ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
PROFIsafe
5
0 4/8 F-DI DC 24 V
6
4
1 SIMATIC ET 200M: ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2
5 ,5 2 SM 326, 24 DI, 24 V DC,

5 SM 326, 8 DI, NAMUR;
3 SIMATIC S7-31xF-2 DP:
4
4 SM 326, 24 DI, 24 V DC
3
5 1) Up to Category 3 according to EN 954-1.
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 3 7 2) Up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1.
Enabling range (example)

8
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/43

Switch blocks (sensors) Safety relay
Type 3SE6 60.-1BA, 3SE6 60.-3BA Type 3SE6 806-2CD00
3SE6 60.-2BA Standards EN 954-1, EN 1088,
Design M30, 25 mm × 33 mm Rated control supply voltage Us 24 V DC
25 mm × 88 mm
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.2 × US
Standards EN 50947-5-3
(in combination with monitoring unit or Rated output 3W
AS-Interface) (without signaling circuits Y1 ... Y6)
Mode of operation Magnetic Max. load current
Operational voltage 100 V AC/DC 24 V DC • Signaling circuit Y1 ... Y6 20 mA
Operational current 400 mA 100 mA • Signaling circuit 31, 32 2A
Rating 10 VA/W 1W Inputs 6 sensors (1 NO or 1 NC)
Max. switching frequency 5 Hz Outputs 6 signal outputs,
1 relay output,
Max. switching interval 5 ... 15 mm 4 ... 14 mm 2 enabling circuits
Son ... Soff
Response time
Enclosures Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplastic
• Automatic start typ. 150 ms
acc. to EN 60529 • Manual start typ. 25 ms
Ambient temperature Release time max. 20 ms
• During operation –25 °C ... +70 °C Recovery time 350 ms
• During storage, transport –25 °C ... +70 °C Degree of protection IP20
Acc. to EN 60529
Shock resistance 10 g/11 ms
Switching capacity
Vibration resistance 10 ... 55 Hz, amplitude 1 mm Enabling circuits 13, 14, and 23, 24
Connection Cable LiYY 4 × 0.25 mm2; Continuous thermal current Ith 6A
length 3 m
Connector socket M12 or M8 -- rated operational voltage Ue
Max. cable length 1000 m 100 m • AC-15 at 230 V 6A
(for connection to safety relay)
• DC-13
- at 24 V 6A
- at 115 V 0.2 A
- at 230 V 0.1 A
for enabling circuits
DIAZED fuse links
• gL (gG) operational class 6A
• Quick 10 A
Ambient temperature
• During operation –25 °C ... +45 °C
• During storage, transport –25 °C ... +70 °C
Connection Screw terminals
8
8/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Round magnetically operated switch
3SE6 605-1BA switch block 3SE6 605-1BA02 switch block 3SE6 704-1BA switching magnet
5 SW 36 3 6 ,2
ø2
3 1 ,6 ø2
5 S W 3 6
M30x15
14
90°
NSC0_00411
M 3 0 x 1 ,5
NSC0 00410
M 1 2 x 1
ø4,5
15 30
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 4
44 3000
1 ,5
4 8 ,2
Square magnetically operated switch

3SE6 60.-2BA switch block 3SE6 60.-2BA0. switch block 3SE6 704-2BA switching magnet 3SX3 260 spacer
2 5 1 3 2 5 1 3 25
Ø 5 7 3 Ø 5 1 8 ,5 3 18,5 8,5
3 ,5
5
4 ,5
1 8 ,5
0 ,5 0 ,5
78
88
7 8
8 8
7 8
8 8
7 8
8 8
NSC0_00608a
6 ,5 7 ,5 3 ,5 3 ,5 N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 9
4 ,5
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 5
5
4 ,5
Ø
4 ,5
3,5 10
7 M 8 1 1 ,5 7 3 7 13
2 5 1 3
N S C 0 _ 0 0 4 1 2 b
6 ,5 8
1 0 0 0
3SE6 60.-3BA switch block 3SE6 704-3BA switching magnet 3SX3 261 spacer
33 13 33 13 33 13
22 8,7
22 8,7 22 8,7
ø4,5
ø4,5
19
25
NSC0_00414
NSC0_00414
19
19
25
25
ø4,5
3000
NSC0_00413
Evaluation unit
3SE6 806-2CD00 safety relay
1 2 0
4 5 1 0 5
5 7 ,5 8 6
8
1 0 0
9 0
6 0
8 8
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 6 6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 8/45

■ Schematics
3SE6 604-.BA magnetically operated switch with 3SE6 806-2CD00 safety relay, Category 3 according to EN 954-1
L/+
K2
ON
K1 K1
+DC 24 V
A1 S11 S12 S22 S73 S74 S31 S32 S42 S83 S84 S51 S52 S62 S93 S94 X1 X2 X3 13 23 31
K2
NSC0_00667
L A2 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 14 24 32
K1 K2 H1
N/
Six 3SE6 604-.BA magnetically operated switches with 3SE6 806-2CD00 safety relay, Category 3 according to EN 954-1
L/+
K2
K1 K1
+DC 24 V
A1 S11 S12 S22 S73 S74 S31 S32 S42 S83 S84 S51 S52 S62 S93 S94 X1 X3 X2 13 23 31
K2
NSC0_00668
L A2 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 14 24 32
K1 K2 H1
N/
3SE6 604-.BA magnetically operated switch with 3TK28 40 solid-state 3SE6 604-.BA magnetically operated switch on ASIsafe,
safety combination, Category 4 according to EN 954-1 K45F or K60F safe compact module, Category 4 according to EN 954-1
L +
C a r "t
fo
te w o
W H /S 2 1 o n P IN 3 a t IN 1
g o -c
ry h a
B U /S 1 2 B N /S 2 2 o n P IN 4 a t IN 1
4
a c n e l
c. d e
n
B K /S 1 1
to
E N e n d
IN 1
p
9 5 e n t
4
4 - "
A 1 Y 1 1 Y 1 2 Y 3 2 1 Y 3 4 3
1
8
1
3 S E 6
3 T K 2 8 4 1 2
B K /S 1 1 o n P IN 1 a t IN 1
Y 3 5 Y 2 1 Y 2 2 A 2 1 4 2 4
B L /S 1 2 o n P IN 2 a t IN 1
W H /S 2 1 IN 2
K 1 K 2
B N /S 2 2 S e a lin g c a p W ir in g e x te r n a l
M
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 3 8 a
Switch block connection Color code abbreviations

for the connecting leads according to IEC 60757:
B K 1 1 1 2 B U
BK = black
W H 2 1 2 2 B N
BU = blue
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 4 0 a BN = brown
The specified switching position refers to the basic position when the cover, WH = white
flap etc. is closed.
8/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Commanding and
Signaling Devices
9
9/2 Introduction 3SB3 Two-Hand Operation
Consoles
3SB2 Pushbuttons and 9/24 Molded-plastic and metal
Indicator Lights, 16 mm enclosures
9/4 General data
9/7 Project planning aids 3SE7 Cable-Operated Switches
9/25 Metal enclosures
3SB3 Pushbuttons and
Indicator Lights, 22 mm 3SE2, 3SE3 Foot Switches
9/8 General data 9/29 Molded-plastic and metal
Enclosures enclosures
9/12 General data
8WD4 Signaling Columns
9/13 Components for AS-Interface
enclosures 9/31 General data
9/14 Project planning aids 9/33 8WD42 signaling columns,
50 mm diameter
3SB4 Complete Operating and 9/34 8WD44 signaling columns,
Display Systems 70 mm diameter
9/22 Control panels
8WD5 Integrated Signal Lamps
3SB4, 3SF4 LED Indicators 9/35 8WD53 integrated signal lamps,
9/23 Conventional 3SB4 LEDs 70 mm diameter
9/23 3SF4 AS-Interface LEDs
Commanding and Signaling Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
3SB2 3SB30, 3SB32 3SB31, 3SB33 3SB35, 3SB36

Pushbuttons and indicator lights
Designs
Nominal diameter 16 mm 22 mm 22 mm 22 mm
Version Plastic, round Plastic, round Plastic, square Metal, round
Actuators
Pushbuttons and switches ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Illuminated pushbuttons and ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
switches
Mushroom pushbuttons -- ✔ -- ✔
Push-pull buttons -- ✔ -- ✔
EMERGENCY-STOP ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
mushroom pushbuttons
Selector switches ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Key-operated switchs ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Special actuators
Joystick switches -- ✔ -- --
Twin pushbuttons -- ✔ -- --
Potentiometer operating mechanisms -- ✔ -- --
Indicators
Indicator lights ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Acoustic signaling devices -- ✔ -- --
Contact blocks
Single-pole ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Two-pole ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Lampholders
Wedge bases ✔ ✔ (with solder pins) ✔ (with solder pins) ✔ (with solder pins)
BA 9s bases -- ✔ ✔ ✔
With integrated LEDs -- ✔ ✔ ✔
Connections
Plug-in connections ✔ -- -- --
Screw terminals -- ✔ ✔ ✔
Spring-loaded terminals -- ✔ ✔ ✔
Solder pins ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
AS-Interface -- ✔ ✔ ✔
AS-Interface solutions AS-Interface enclosures

Commanding and signaling devices of the SIRIUS 3SB3 series For enclosures with connection to AS-Interface,
can be connected to the AS-Interface communication system see Catalog IK PI.
quickly and easily by means of various solutions.
AS-Interface front panel modules
For AS-Interface solutions, see Catalog IK PI
"Industrial Communication for Automation & Drives". For front panel modules with one 4I/4O slave for connection of
four 3SB3 control devices, see Catalog IK PI.
AS-Interface EMERGENCY-STOP according to EN 418
(ISO 13850)
9
✔ standard
Using a special F adapter, EMERGENCY-STOP devices -- not available
according to EN 418 (ISO 13850) can be directly connected
❏ optional
through the standard AS-Interface with safety-oriented
communication.

Commanding and Signaling Devices
Introduction
3SB38 3SB38 6 3SE7, 3SF2 3SE29

Enclosures Two-hand operation Cable-operated Foot switches
consoles switches
Enclosures
Molded plastic ✔ ✔ -- ✔
Metal ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Actuators
Pushbuttons and switches ✔ ✔ -- ✔
Illuminated pushbuttons and switches ✔ ✔ -- --
Mushroom pushbuttons ✔ ✔ -- --
Push-pull buttons ✔ -- -- --
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons ✔ ✔ ✔ --
Selector switches ✔ -- -- --
Key-operated switchs ✔ -- -- --
Bowden wires -- -- ✔ --
Indicators
Indicator lights ✔ -- ✔ --
Acoustic signaling devices ✔ -- -- --
Contact blocks
Single-pole ✔ ✔ -- --
Two-pole -- ✔ ✔ ✔
Three-pole -- -- -- ✔
Four-pole -- -- ✔ ✔
Connections
Screw terminals ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Spring-loaded terminals ✔ ❏ -- --
Molded cables -- -- -- ✔
Plug-in connections -- ❏ ❏ ❏
AS-Interface ✔ ❏ -- --
8WD42, 8WD44 8WD53

Signaling columns Integrated signal lamps
Enclosures
Molded plastic ✔ ✔
9
Metal -- --
Lightings
Filament lamps ✔ ✔
LEDs ✔ ✔
Flashlights ✔ ✔
Connections
Screw terminals ✔ ✔
Spring-loaded terminals ✔ --
AS-Interface ✔ --

3SB2 Pushbuttons and Indicator Lights, 16 mm
General data
■ Overview Safety circuits

The standards IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 require positive
The 3SB2 pushbuttons and indicator lights are provided for front opening. Hence for the purposes of personal safety, the assured
plate mounting and rear connection with flat connectors. For use opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical
on printed-circuit boards, contact blocks and lampholders with equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked accord-
solder pins are also available. ing to IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol .
Standards Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be attained with the
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-5 EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons if the corres-
ponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5 installed, e.g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from
for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons. the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges.
■ Design
Version
G Design variants
Two design variants can be mounted:
G
• Round design: The 3SB2 pushbuttons and indicator lights are
F 2
assembled with the elements – actuator, holder, contact block
and lampholder. Depending on the specific application,
various versions can be assembled. Complete units are
D offered for the most commonly used applications.
• Square design: With square, black frames the round units can
C 1 be given a square look. The frames are inserted underneath
G
the round actuators. Further mounting is the same as for the
A 2 round version.
Mounting and fixing
F 1
Mounting dimensions according to EN 50007.
E
D
+0,2
16,2
C 1
B 1
NSD00002
A 1 F 1
b
E
D
a a
C 1
B 2 Minimum distance a b
N S D 0 _ 0 0 0 0 1 a
A 3 Round version 19 19
Square version 21 21
without labeling plate
Round and square version 21 32
with labeling plate
For 2 selector switches with 3 switch 21 21
positions, latching, side by side
A1 Illuminated pushbutton, flat
For fixing, the actuator or the lens assembly is inserted from the
A2 Button, flat front into the hole in the front plate. Four small nubs ensure a
A3 Screw lens for indicator light secure fitting in the hole. The holder is plugged on the actuator
B1 Insert label for inscription or the lens assembly from behind and automatically snaps into
B2 Insert cap for inscription place. The element is screwed down tightly with 2 screws on the
holder and thus levels panel thickness from 1 to 6 mm.
C1 Collar with extruded front ring
C2 Collar for indicator light One or two contact blocks can be mounted on the holder. They
D Frame for rectangular design are inserted into the holder with slide slots and held down with
two snap brackets.
E Wedge base lamp W2 4.6 d
F1 Lampholder with holder If a command point is fitted with an indicator light or illuminated
pushbutton, a lamp socket with holder must be used instead of
F2 Holder
a holder. It is suitable for incandescent lamps or LEDs with
G Contact blocks (1 NO or 1 NC) for snapping onto holder or sockets of type W2 x 4.6d.
9
lamp holder

General data
Connections Mounting and fixing
The contact blocks and the lampholder are equipped with flat Mounting dimensions according to EN 50007.
connectors according to IEC 60760 which can also be used as
solder-pin terminals. The actuators are mounted in the same way as 3SB2 front plate
mounting devices.
To permit through-connection all terminals are provided with
two tabs. The contact blocks and lampholders plugged into the printed-
circuit board by means of their soldering pins and can be
For PCB mounting flow-soldered. After soldering, the devices must be flush with the
board and perpendicular to it. The printed-circuit board must be
The command point comprises the actuator – e.g. 3SB2 supported on spacers so that it cannot sag or bend more than
pushbutton, illuminated pushbutton or indicator light –, which is 0.1 mm.
mounted in the front plate, and a contact block and a lampholder
which are soldered to the PCB. For this purpose, the contact
blocks and lampholders are fitted with 0.8 mm 0.8 mm solder
pins of length 3.5 mm.
1...6
44-0,2
1,5...2,5
F
a
E
20,2
D
C
NSD00011
19
B
A Illuminated pushbutton with solder pin connection
Length a of spacing bolts:
a = 44–0.2 minus front panel thickness
When using name plates, the length a is reduced by 0.8 mm.
To avoid bending the PCB when the pushbuttons are operated,
NSD0_00010a
sufficient spacers must be provided as shown in the table below:

PCB thickness Max. distance between
spacing bolts
1.5 mm 80 mm
A Actuator 2.5 mm 150 mm
B Front panel When using EMERGENCY-STOP always 50 mm
C Spacer pushbuttons
D Holder These details are based on epoxy resin glass fiber mat.
E Lampholder/
actuator
F PCB Solder terminal 1.3 +0.1
12,7 4,2
NO, NC
10,16
La
NO, NC
7,6 NSD0_00012
Solder pin spacing

General data
Contact blocks and lampholders
Type 3SB23, 3SB24
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1,
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5
Continuous thermal current Ith 10 A
Rated operational current Ie at rated operational voltage Ue
• Alternating current AC-12
- at Ue = 230 V 10 A
• Alternating current AC-15
- at Ue = 24 V 4A
- at Ue = 60 V 4A
- at Ue = 110 V 4A
- at Ue = 230 V 4A
• Direct current DC-12
- at Ue = 24 V 6A
- at Ue = 60 V 5A
- at Ue = 110 V 2.5 A
- at Ue = 230 V 1A
- at Ue = 24 V 3A
- at Ue = 60 V 1.5 A
- at Ue = 110 V 0.7 A
- at Ue = 230 V 0.3 A
Contact stability
Test voltage/test current 5 V/1 mA
Short-circuit protection weld-free according to IEC 60947-5-1
• DIAZED fuse links, utilization category gL/gG 10 A TDz, 16 A Dz
• Miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic according to IEC 60898 10 A
(VDE 0641)
• Pushbuttons and contact blocks 10 106 operating cycles
• Actuators, rotary or latching 3 105 operating cycles
• Illuminated pushbuttons 3 106 operating cycles
• For operational class AC-15 with 3RT10 15 to 3RT10 26 contactors 10 106 operating cycles
Climatic withstand capability Climate-proof; suitable for marine applications
Ambient temperature
• During operation, non-illuminated devices and complete with LED –25 ... +70 °C
• During operation, devices with incandescent lamp –25 ... +60 °C
• During storage, transport –40 ... +80 °C
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 (VDE 0470 Part 1)
• Connection of contact blocks and lampholders behind the front panel IP00
• Contact chambers of the contact blocks behind the front panel IP40
• Actuators and indicators IP65
• Actuator and indicators with protective cap IP67
Lamps
• Bases Wedge base W2 4.6 d
• Rated voltage 6, 12, 24, 30, 48, 60 V; max. 1 W
Connection
Plug connection with flat connectors for quick-connect terminals Flat connector 2 2.8/0.8 mm
according to IEC 60760
Protective measures
• For mounting in metal front plates and enclosures The actuators and lens assemblies must not be included in the
protective measures.
• For fitting into enclosures with total insulation The protective measure "Total insulation" is retained.
Touch protection according to EN 50274 and VBG 4 With voltages > 50 V AC or 120 V DC insulating sleeves must be
fitted to the unassigned tab connections.
Shock resistance according to IEC 60068-2-27
Shock amplitude 50 g
Shock duration 11 ms
Shock form Half-sine
9
Data according to UL and CSA

Rated voltage
• Contact blocks 250 V AC max.
• Indicator lights Lamp with wedge base W2 4.6 d: max. 60 V; 1 W
Uninterrupted current 5A
Switching capacity B 300, R 300

Actuators
Illuminated pushbutton Pushbutton or illuminated Selector switch CES key-operated switch
with flat button pushbutton
with raised button Ø19
Æ 19 Ø19 9,5 12,5
(401))
8
12
20
17
NSD01103
NSD00141
NSD00142 NSD00143
1) with key
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom Indicator light
pushbutton
according to ISO 13850 or EN 418 Ø19
Ø28,5
9
NSD00145
21
NSD00144
Contact blocks with tab connection

Pushbutton and contact block
with holder for front panel mounting
Ø19
1...6
8
50
NSD00140
19
Contact blocks with solder pins Mounting dimensions

for use on printed circuit boards +0,2
16,2
Illuminated pushbutton
with contact block and
lampholder with solder pins
Length a of spacing bolts a = 44–0.2
NSD00002
minus front panel thickness.

b
When using name plates, the length a is

1...6
reduced by 0.8 mm.

44-0,2
1,5...2,5
To avoid bending of the PCB when the actu-

a
ator is operated, sufficient spacers must be a a

20,2
provided spaced as shown in the table Minimum distance a b

below:
Round version 19 19
NSD00011 PCB thickness Max. distance
19 between spacing Square version 21 21
bolts without labeling plate
Solder pin spacing
1.5 mm 80 mm For round and square versions 21 32
Solder terminal 1.3 +0.1 with labeling plates
2.5 mm 150 mm
12,7 4,2 For 2 selector switches and 3 switch positions,
when using generally 50 mm 21 21
NO, NC maintained contact, side by side
10,16
EMERGENCY-STOP
La pushbuttons
NO, NC
7,6
These details are based on epoxy resin
NSD0_00012
glass fiber mat.
Accessories
9
Complete plug
20 19
1,8
19
NSD00149

General data
■ Overview Holder
The holder is set to a switchboard thickness of 1 to 4 mm when
The 3SB3 series is a range of plastic and metal commanding delivered and is placed in the direction of the arrow 1–4 mm
devices for front panel mounting and rear wire connection. on the actuator/indicator from the back. The fixing screw is
3SB3 is of modern industrial design with a very flat construction located underneath, on the right.
and can be installed rapidly by a single person. A metallic type For a switchboard thickness of 3 to 6 mm, the holder is reversed
with a high degree of protection according to IP67 and NEMA 4 and mounted in the direction of the arrow at 3–6 mm and the
is available in addition for the world market. fixing screw is located on the upper right. In this case, the fixing
Standards screw must be rotated anticlockwise to its limit before mounting
the holder.
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1.
When label holders, protective caps or similar accessories are
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, used, the greatest permissible panel thickness must be reduced
by wall thickness of the accessory component.
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5
for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons. Contact blocks and lampholders
Design The contact blocks are fitted with a slow-action contact (1 NO
contact or 1 NC contact) with double operating contacts. These
The 3SB3 series is available:
ensure a high switching reliability even with small voltages and
7 Made of molded plastic in flat, round and square version currents, such as 5 V/1 mA. They are suitable for use in
7 Made of metal in round version. solid-state systems as well as conventional controls.
The operating surfaces of the pushbuttons and indicator lights The switch contacts of the NC contact are positively driven.
are concave. The lenses of the indicator lights are convex. The For illuminated elements, lampholders with an integrated LED or
flat design makes cleaning easy. with a base for replaceable bulbs can be supplied.
Safety circuits Contact blocks and lampholders feature terminal designations
The standards IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 require positive in accordance with EN 50013.
opening. Hence for the purposes of personal safety, the assured Mounting
opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked accord- The 3SB3 devices can be easily and quickly mounted:
ing to IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol . 7 Actuators or indicator lights are positioned in the opening of
Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be attained with the the front panel from the front
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons if the correspond- 7 Position the holder from the rear
ing failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, 7 Tighten the screw on the holder
e.g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from the
ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. 7 Snap on the contact block or the lampholder directly onto the
operating mechanism from the back
■ Design Connection technique
One command point comprises an actuating element or lens The following devices are available:
assembly in front of the control panel as well as a holder for fixing 7 Screw terminal (box terminals)
and contact blocks and/or lampholder behind the control panel.
7 Spring-loaded terminals or
7 The holder for the round version can be turned and can
7 Solder terminals (0.8 mm 0.8 mm solder pins)
therefore be used for control panel depths of 1 to 4 mm or
3 to 6 mm. The devices with screw terminals have open terminals, screws
7 The control panel depth of 1 to 4 mm can be compensated that cannot be lost, funnel-shaped wiring openings and screw-
with the holder for the square version. driver fed openings, all of which saves time when connecting
and enables the use of motorized screwdrivers.
The normal version can be fitted with two contact blocks.
The devices with spring-loaded terminals can be connected
When three contact blocks or one lampholder and two contact quickly and tightly, and when single-pole blocks are used the
blocks are required, an additional 3SB39 01-0AB holder must be command points can be butt-mounted.
plugged into the operating element. For actuating a central con-
tact block when using a selector switch, key-operated switch Inscriptions
and on-off pushbutton, a 3SB39 01-0AC holder with pressure Direct inscription using a laser or by means of insert labels or
plates is required. name plates.
Complete units are offered for the most commonly used applica- For applications requiring less robustness there is the Label
tions. Designer software and coresponding labels. The user can use
these to create his own inscriptions with text or symbols.
Enclosures
Plastic and metal enclosures with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6 actuators are
9
available for the round model. Enclosures with more than

6 actuators can be supplied upon request. They are suitable for
the round and square models.

General data
Front plate mounting
N S D 0 _ 0 0 0 2 9 a
B
D
A
A Actuating element
B Front plate
C Holder
D Contact block
E Lampholder
F Mounting element
Mounting on printed-circuit boards
E
D
A
N S D 0 _ 0 0 0 3 0 a
D
A D
A
A Actuating element
B Front plate
C Holder
D Holder for PCB
E Lampholder
F Contact block
G PCB
Contact assignment
For one contact block For two contact blocks For 2 contact blocks with For one contact block
with 2 contacts, with 1 contact each, 2 contacts each, e.g. with 2 contacts,
e.g. 1 NO + 1 NC e.g. 1 NO, 1 NC 1 NO +1 NC, 1 NO +1 NC e.g. 1 NO + 1 NC
and one lampholder
Fixing depth 1 - 4 mm 1 - 4 mm 1 - 4 mm 1 - 4 mm
Depth for contact blocks
9
1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
Holder
with 1 contact
NSD00031
1 5 4 1 5 4 1 5 4 1 5 4
Depth for contact blocks
with 2 contacts 2 6 3 2 6 3 2 6 3 2 6 3
Holder for 3 elements
13 13 21 13 43 13 X1
Contact blocks,
lampholders 14 14 22 14 44 14 X2
21 21 31 21
22 22 32 22

General data
Type 3SB34 00-0, 3SB34 00-1, 3SB34 03-0, 3SB34 03-1, 3SB34 11-0 3SB34 11-1 3SB14 00-0J
3SB34 20-0 3SB34 20-1 3SB34 23-0 3SB34 23-1
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-5,
EN 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-5
Connection type Screw terminals Spring-loaded terminals Solder pins Screw
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 400 400 250 60 400
For pollution severity acc. to IEC 60947-1 Class 3 Class 3 Class 3 Class 3 Class 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 4 4 4 4 1.5 4
Continuous thermal current Ith A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
• Alternating current 50/60 Hz, AC-12
- at Ue = 24 V A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
- at Ue = 48 V A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
- at Ue = 110 V A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
- at Ue = 230 V A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
- at Ue = 400 V A 10 – 10 – – – 10
• Alternating current 50/60 Hz, AC-15
- at Ue = 24 V A 6 – 6 – 4 – 6
- at Ue = 48 V A 6 – 6 – 4 – 6
- at Ue = 110 V A 6 – 6 – 4 – 6
- at Ue = 230 V A 6 – 6 – 4 – 6
- at Ue = 400 V A 3 – 3 – – – 3
- at Ue = 24 V A 10 – 10 – 10 – 10
- at Ue = 48 V A 5 – 5 – 5 – –
- at Ue = 110 V A 2.5 – 2.5 – 2.5 – 2
- at Ue = 230 V A 1 – 1 – 1 – 0.5
- at Ue = 24 V A 3 – 3 – 3 – 5
- at Ue = 48 V A 1.5 – 1.5 – 1.5 – –
- at Ue = 110 V A 0.7 – 0.7 – 0.7 – 0.5
- at Ue = 230 V A 0.3 – 0.3 – 0.3 – 0.2
Contact stability
• Test voltage V 5 – 5 – 5 –
• No-damage current mA 1 – 1 – 1 –
Lampholders – BA 9s – BA 9s – Wedge base –
Lamps – Incandes- – Incandes- – Glow lamps –
cent lamps, cent lamps, and LED
glow lamps glow lamps lamps
and LED and LED
lamps lamps
Short-circuit protection, weld-free,
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• DIAZED fuse links, 10 A TDz or 16 A Dz
utilization category gL/gG
acc. to IEC 60898 (VDE 0641)
Mechanical endurance 10 106 operating cycles
• For operational class AC-15 with 3RT10 15 to 1/h 10 106 operating cycles
3RT10 26 contactors
• With operational class DC-12, DC-13 With direct current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the
operating voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
Operating frequency 1000 operating cycles per hour
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
• Connections IP20
• Contact chambers IP40 – IP40 – IP40 – IP40
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 and BGV A2 Finger-safe Finger-safe – Finger-safe
9
• Finely stranded, without end sleeves mm2 – 2 (0.25 ... 1.5) –

• Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to mm2 2 (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 (0.25 ... 0.75) –
DIN 46228
• Solid mm2 2 (1 ... 1.5) 2 (0.25 ... 1.5) –
• Solid, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228 mm2 2 (0.5 ... 0.75) – –
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded 2 AWG 18 ... 14 2 AWG 24 ... 16 –
Tightening torque, terminal screw Nm 0.8 – – 0.8
Solder pins mm2 – – 0.8 0.8 –
9/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

General data
Data according to UL and CSA
Type 3SB34 00-0, 3SB34 00-1, 3SB34 03-0, 3SB34 03-1, 3SB34 11-0 3SB34 11-1
3SB34 20-0 3SB34 20-1 3SB34 23-0 3SB34 23-1
Standards UL and CSA
Rated operational voltage V AC 300 – 300 – 300 –
Conventional free air thermal current A 10 – 10 – 10 –
(continuous current)
Switching capacity A 300, R 300,
A 600 same polarity
Rated voltage (lamps)
• Lamp with BA 9s base V AC – 125 – 125 – –
• Lamp with wedge base V AC – 60 – 60 – 60
• Lampholders with integrated LED V – 24 AC/DC, – 24 AC/DC, – –
110 AC, 110 AC,
230 AC 230 AC
Rated output (lamps) W – 2.5 – 2.5 – 1
Actuators and Indicators

Type 3SB30, 3SB32 3SB31, 3SB33 3SB35, 3SB36
Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Metal
Design Round Square Round
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50013 Digit on the holder,
function digit on the contact block
Device identification Snap-on label
Tightening torques
• Screw on holder Nm max. 1
• Terminal screws Nm 0.8
• Pushbuttons 10 106 operating cycles
• Illuminated pushbuttons 3 106 operating cycles
• Actuators, rotary or maintained contact 3 105 operating cycles
Operating frequency 1/h 1000 operating cycles
Climatic withstand capability acc. to DIN 50017 Climate-proof KTW24; suitable for marine applications
Ambient temperature
• During operation, non-illuminated and with LED °C -25 ... +70
• During operation, devices with incandescent lamp °C -25 ... +60
• During storage, transport °C -40 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
• Actuators and indicators, standard IP66 IP65 IP67 and NEMA Type 4
- with protective caps IP67 IP67 –
• Key-operated switch with key monitoring IP54 – –
• Twin pushbuttons – IP65 –
Protective measures Safety requirements are met automatically when the actuators Earthing is necessary for
and lens assemblies are mounted on metal front plates and operation with protective
enclosures. extra-low voltage (PELV).
When mounted in insulated enclosures, the "protective
insulation" safety requirements are met.
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
For half-sine shock type, 11 ms shock duration
• Devices without incandescent lamp 50 g
• Devices with incandescent lamp 30 g
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
• Acceleration at frequency 20 ... 200 Hz 5g
Enclosures
Type 3SB38 0.-0, 3SB38 0.-1 – 3SB38 0.-2, 3SB38 0.-3
Enclosure material Molded plastic Metal
9
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP65 IP67 and NEMA Type 4
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/11

Enclosures
General data
■ Overview Standards
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1.
Enclosures
Molded-plastic and metal enclosures with 1, 2, 3, 4 or
6 command points are available. The mounting holes are
located external to the terminal compartment.
Cable routing: on the top and bottom narrow ends of the
enclosure for an M20 or M25 metric cable gland.
Enclosure color:
• Cover: RAL 7035 (light gray),
• With EMERGENCY-STOP: RAL 1004 (yellow),
• Base: RAL 9005 (black).
The molded-plastic enclosures comply with the "total insulation"
specification.
Customer-specific enclosures
On request enclosures with more than 6 command points can
also be supplied with AS-Interface connection.
Enclosed pushbuttons and indicator lights are used as hand For fully equipped AS-Interface enclosures, see Catalog IK PI.
operated control devices for separately allocated control units
and cabinets. The devices are suitable for use in any climate. Actuators
Enclosures with handle are available for suspension Round actuators and lens assemblies for a mounting diameter of
(e.g. for crane control units). 22 mm can be used.
The enclosed pushbuttons and indicator lights are available The actuators are fitted through the hole in the cover of the
with conventional controls as well as for connection to the enclosure and are connected to the holder supplied with the
AS-Interface bus system. actuator and secured in position.
The following versions are available: Molded-plastic enclosures are equipped as standard with
7 Enclosure with standard fittings
actuators and indicators made of plastic, metal enclosures are
with 1 to 3 command points equipped with actuators and indicators made of metal.
7 Enclosure with customized equipment Contact blocks and lampholders
with 1 to 6 command points
Contact blocks and lampholders for floor mounting are snapped
7 Empty enclosures (individual parts must be ordered into the bottom part of the enclosure. For each command point,
separately). the following components can be fitted:
7 3 contact blocks or
■ Design 7 2 contact blocks + 1 lampholder or lampholder with integrated
voltage reducer.
H
F The contact blocks have moving double-break contacts and
G therefore a high contact stability, i.e. they are also suitable for
D operation in solid-state controls. Function numbering is shown
on the contact block.
C
Single-pole contact blocks and lampholders for front plate
A mounting can also be used.
B
C
N S D 0 _ 0 0 0 4 9 a
C
9
A Top part of enclosure

B Labeling plates
C Actuating element with holder
D Function digit
E Contact blocks, lampholders for floor mounting
F Bottom part of enclosure
G Identification letters for the command points
H Identification number
9/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

Enclosures
Components for AS-Interface enclosures
■ Overview AS-Interface slaves

The following slave types are available:
• Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs
• Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs
• F slave with 2 safe inputs.
The following table shows the maximum number of equippable
slaves:
Enclosures for Number of slaves Number of slaves
for enclosures without for enclosures with
EMERGENCY-STOP EMERGENCY-STOP
1 command point Not available 1x F slave
2 command points 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O Not available
3 command points 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 x F slave
4 command points 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O1) 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 x F slave1)
6 command points 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 x F slave
1) For metal enclosures only 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible.
Distributed command devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly
connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures.
Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures ■ Design
with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing
enclosures. Connection
One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to
contact blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element.
The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable
glands and are used for connection of the AS-Interface or for
bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the enclosure.
For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice of the
following options:
• Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable. The cable is
contacted by the insulation displacement method and routed
past the enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic
enclosure).
• Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round
cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for
metal enclosure).
• Connection using M12 plug.
If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an
enclosure are used for connecting the command devices, free
inputs and outputs can be routed on request to the outside
through an M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the
enclosure.
To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the must be
assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT– connection must
be assigned.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is
not required.
The enclosures with integrated AS-Interface are equipped with

contact blocks and LED lampholders with spring-loaded termi-
nals from the 3SB3 series along with the slave(s) required to
connect the contact blocks and lampholders to AS-Interface.
AS-Interface modules, cable sets and a connection element are
9
required in addition to connect the contact blocks and LED

lampholders.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/13

Mounting dimensions Minimum distance a b
Round version Square version Contact blocks (1 contact) and lampholder
Ø 2 2 ,3
+ 0 ,4 + 0 ,2 • For front plate mounting, with screw terminals 301) 45
2 6 ,0
-0 -0 • For front plate mounting, with spring-loaded terminals 301) 301)
• For use on PCB, with solder pins 301) 301)
Contact blocks with 2 contacts
• for front plate mounting 301) 50
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 0
When using holders for labeling plates

b
• 12.5 mm × 27 mm
b
• 27.0 mm × 27 mm 301) 452)
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 1
301) 60
1) For mushroom pushbutton, EMERGENCY-STOP and
a a push-pull button:
a a Note mushroom diameter d = 40 mm or 60 mm.
2) 60 mm with contact blocks having two contacts.
Molded-plastic version, round

Pushbutton, pressure switch, Pushbutton or Pushbutton Pushbutton
illuminated pushbutton or illuminated pushbutton with raised front ring with raised front ring, castellated
illuminated pressure switch with raised button
with flat button
and single-pole contact block 2 4 ,5
(and lampholder)
1 3
1 3
1 2
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 7 N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 8
8
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 3 a
m a x . 2 4
Mushroom pushbutton, Mushroom pushbutton, Mushroom pushbutton,

2 9
illuminated mushroom pushbutton, illuminated mushroom pushbutton, illuminated mushroom pushbutton,

push-pull-button or push-pull-button or push-pull-button or
4 9
illuminated push-pull-button, illuminated push-pull-button, illuminated push-pull-button,

« 30 mm « 40 mm « 60 mm
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 2 a
3 0 4 0 6 0
2 3 ,5
2 4 ,5
2 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 7 N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 9 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 9 1
Selector switch or RONIS key-operated switch BKS, CES, IKON, O.M.R. Joystick switch
illuminated selector switch key-operated switch
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 7 1
B K S /IK O N : 6 1
2 4
4 4
1 )
8 2
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 5 a
2 1
1 . .6
C E S /O M R : 6 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 8 a
2 4
3 6
3 6
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 4
Pushbutton Actuator for potentiometer Pushbutton with extended stroke

with raised button, latchable with shaft Ø 6 mm, 3 0 4 5
30 ... 32 mm long 2 4
2 8 ,5 1) 82 with mechanical interlock,
2 3 ,1 Ø 2 9 ,5
Ø 1 5
77 without mechanical interlock.
3 2
2 5
3 0 ,4
9
8
1 9
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 6
1 6 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 6 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 6 3
M 4 P g 1 6
9/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom

pushbutton, Ø 32 mm, pushbutton, Ø 40 mm, pushbutton, Ø 40 mm, pushbutton, Ø 60 mm,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism with pull-to-unlatch mechanism with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
3 2 4 0 ,5 4 0 ,5 6 0
4 9
4 9
4 9
4 9
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 0 N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 0 1 a N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 3 a N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 2
EMERGENCY-STOP EMERGENCY-STOP Indicator light Acoustic signal device

mushroom pushbutton mushroom pushbutton 2 8
with RONIS key-operated switch with BKS, CES, IKON, O.M.R.
1 0
4 0 ,8 key-operated switch
1 1 ,5
4 0 ,5 N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 8
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a
B K S /IK O N : 8 0
7 1
4 8
C E S /O M R : 8 3
5 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 a
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 6
Twin pushbutton, Twin pushbutton, Twin pushbutton

with flat buttons with raised buttons with or without indicator light
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 4 a
1 2
1 0
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 2 a
2 2 ,6
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 1 a
3 0
1 7 ,4
5 5
Top view
Holder Blanking plug

3 0 2 8 ,5
6 ,5
1 7
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 0
1 8
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 3
9
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/15


Plastic version, square
Pushbutton, pressure switch, Selector switch or RONIS key-operated switch BKS, CES, IKON, O.M.R.
illuminated pushbutton or illuminated selector switch key-operated switch
illuminated pressure switch with 3 0
flat button
3 0
B K S /IK O N : 6 1
4 4
5
2 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 5
2 1
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 6 a
C E S /O M R : 6 4
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 2 0
3 6
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 9
EMERGENCY-STOP EMERGENCY-STOP EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom Indicator light

mushroom pushbutton mushroom pushbutton pushbutton with BKS, CES, IKON,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism with RONIS key-operated switch O.M.R. key-operated switch
7
4 0 ,5 4 0 ,8 4 0 ,5 N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 6 a
B K S /IK O N : 8 0
4 9
7 1
C E S /O M R : 8 3
4 8
5 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 1 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 2 a
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 8
Holder Blanking plug

3 0 3 0
5
1 9
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 8
1 8
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 7 a
9
9/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


Metal version, round
Pushbutton or Pushbutton or Pushbutton or Pushbutton
illuminated pushbutton illuminated pushbutton illuminated pressure switch, with raised front ring
with flat button and single-pole contact with raised button latching,
block (and lampholder) with flat button 2 8 ,5
2 4 ,5
2 8 ,5
1 2
1 6
1 6
1 4 ,5
m a x . 2 4
N S D 0 0 _ 0 0 1 9 0 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 8 9 a
2 9
N S D 0 0 _ 0 1 3 0 9
4 9
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 9 5 a
Mushroom pushbutton, Mushroom pushbutton, Mushroom pushbutton,

illuminated mushroom pushbutton, illuminated mushroom pushbutton, illuminated mushroom pushbutton,
Selector switch or push-pull-button or illuminated push-pull-button or illuminated push-pull-button or illuminated
illuminated selector switch, push-pull-button, « 30 mm push-pull-button, « 40 mm push-pull-button, « 60 mm
standard 3 0 4 0 6 0
2 4 ,5
2 4 ,5
2 4
2 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 1 N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 9 3 N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 9 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 9 1
Selector switch or Selector switch or RONIS key-operated switch BKS, CES, IKON, O.M.R.
illuminated selector switch, illuminated selector switch, key-operated switch
heavy duty with long handle
B K S /IK O N : 6 1
4 4
2 8
2 8
2 1
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 0 7 a N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 0 5 a
C E S /O M R : 6 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 5 8 a
3 6
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 4
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom

pushbutton, Ø 32 mm, pushbutton, Ø 40 mm, pushbutton, Ø 40 mm, pushbutton, Ø 60 mm,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism with pull-to-unlatch mechanism with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
3 2 4 0 ,5 4 0 ,5 6 0
4 9
4 9
4 9
4 9
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 0 N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 0 1 a N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 3 a N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 2
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom Indicator light Holder

pushbutton pushbutton with BKS, CES, IKON, 2 8 3 0
with RONIS key-operated switch O.M.R. key-operated switch
4 0 ,8 4 0 ,5
1 1 ,5
1 7
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 7 0
9
B K S /IK O N : 8 0
7 1
C E S /O M R : 8 3
4 8
5 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 a
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 1 6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/17

Screw terminal, for front plate mounting
Contact block Contact block BA 9s lampholder BA 9s lampholder
with 1 contact with 2 contacts, without or with with separate lamp test function
3 6 ,5 diode element integrated voltage reducer N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 5 a
4 5 3 6 ,5
2 5 ,5
4 1 ,2
3 6 ,8
3 4 ,2
2 0
2 7 ,1
2 0
4 0
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 2 a
3 4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 4 a
3 6
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 3 a
4 5 ,9
Lampholder Pushbutton or illuminated Pushbutton with contact blocks Illuminated pushbutton with
with integrated LED pushbutton with contact blocks with 1 contact contact blocks with 1 contact and
with 1 contact lampholder
3 0
m a x . 2 4
3 9 ,1
N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 0 6 a
2 9
2 0
4 9
3 6
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 7
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 6 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 8
2 0
1 0
3 0
Pushbutton or illuminated Illuminated pushbutton Illuminated pushbutton

pushbutton with contact blocks with 2 contacts with contact blocks with 1 contact and
with contact blocks and lampholder lampholder with snapped-on transformer
with 2 contacts
3 0 3 0
m a x . 2 4
3 0
m a x . 2 4
2 9
2 9
4 8 ,2
6 3
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 0 a
9 6 ,9
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 9 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 3 a
1 0
3 0
3 9
Spring-loaded terminals, for front plate mounting

Contact block Contact block BA 9s lampholder Lampholder
with 1 contact with 2 contacts 3 0 with integrated LED
3 0 4 5 3 0
2 8 ,2
2 1 ,2
2 6 ,6
2 1 ,2
3 9 ,7
3 9
3 3 ,4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 1 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 1 0 a
2 0 ,7
9
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 3 N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 4
9/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006


With solder pins, for use on PCB
Contact block 1 NO and 1 NC Lampholders Solder pin spacing Pushbutton with
1 8 ,5 7 ,3 NO 1 2 3 NC contact block with 1 contact
and PCB holder
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 4
5.08
2 1
1 6
2 8
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 5
15.24
20.32
7 ,5
4
1 5 ,2 4
NSD0_00226a
4 4
4
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 7 a
4
2.54
min. 7.62,
max. 10.16
1 Solder pin 1.3 +0.1
m in . 7 ,6 2 ,
2 PCB holder m a x . 1 0 ,1 6
3 Centring hole 4.2 +0.1
4 Lampholder
Accessories
3SB39 21–0AK protective collar 3SB39 21–0AX protective collar 3SB39 21–0CG protective collar
for front panel mounting1), for front panel mounting1), for front panel mounting1),
for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom for mushroom pushbuttons,
pushbuttons without key-operated pushbuttons with key-operated switch for 5 padlocks
switch
6 1 ,5
51
NSD0_01403
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 8
5 0 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 9
7 8 7 3 ,5 7 8 7 3 ,5 77 74
1) Can be used with a front plate thickness up to 4 mm.
Holder for mounting 3 elements

Holder for pushbuttons Holder for selector switch, key-oper-
ated switch and On-Off pushbutton,
3 0 with pressure plate
3 0
2 0
1 7 ,5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 1
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 2 2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/19


Enclosures
Enclosure without protective collar, molded plastic Enclosure without protective collar, metal Enclosure with handle, metal
85 65
71 Ø6 25
65
64
26,5
c
c
Rear view Rear view

for M 4 screw for M 4 screw
NSD0_01297a
NSD0_00231a
a
40
a
b
40
a
b
95
35 71 Ø 28
NSD0_01404
30 71
85 85
Top and bottom with knockouts Top and bottom with opening 1
R1
for one gland each for one gland each
Number of com- Length Distance Distance Number of com- Length Distance Distance Number of com- Length
mand points a b c mand points a b c mand points a
1 85 54 17.5 1 85 54 21 1 84
2 114 83 17.5 2 114 83 21 2 113
3 154 123 17.5 3 154 123 21 3 154
4 194 163 17.5 4 194 163 21 4 193
6 280 249 20.5 6 280 249 21 6 280
Enclosure with protective collar, Enclosure with protective collar,

molded plastic metal
1 0 6
1 1 4
1 7 ,5
6 0
6 5
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 3 2 a
2 1
N S D 0 _ 0 1 2 9 8
Top and bottom with knockouts
for one gland each Top and bottom with opening
for one gland each
Screw terminal, for floor mounting

Contact block BA9s lampholder with or without Lampholder with
with 1 contact integrated voltage reducer integrated LED
3 6 3 6 1 0
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 3 3 a
N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 3 4 a
3 4
3 4
2 6 ,5
2 8
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 2
4 7
2 8
4 9 ,5 4 9 ,5
3 6 1 0
4 9
Spring-loaded terminals, for floor mounting

Contact block Lampholder with Fixpoint terminal
with 1 contact integrated LED 3 6
3 6 1 0
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 0
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 1
2 8
9
3 3 ,5
2 8
N S D 0 _ 0 1 3 0 2
4 7
4 9 1 0
2 8
4 9 1 0
3 6 1 0
4 9
9/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

■ Schematics
Application examples of test circuits
L1 AC 230/240 V L1/L+
Lamp test 3 3 3 Lamp test 3 3 3

button button
4 4 4 4 4 4
(L+) (L+)
X1 X5 X1 X5 X1 X5 X1 X5
Load Load Load Load

X2 X2 X2 X2
N N/L- (L-) (L-)
NSD0_00128b NSD0_00129a
3SB34 00–1F lampholder 3SB34 00–1G lampholder

incl. 130 V incandescent lamp for incandescent lamps, maximum 2.6 W or LED lamps, AC/DC
L1/L+ L1/L+
X1 X1
Lamp test 3 3 3
button
4 4 4
Load Load
(L+) (L+)
X5 X1 X5 X1
X2 X2
X5 X5
Lamp test 3 3 3
button
4 4 4
X2 X2
N/L- N/L- (L-) (L-)
NSD0_00131c NSD0_00130b
3SB34 00–1L lampholder 3SB34 00–1H lampholder

for incandescent lamps, maximum 2.6 W or LED lamps, AC or DC for incandescent lamps, maximum 2.6 W or glow lamps, AC
Application examples for 3SB34 00–2A diode elements
L1 AC 230 V
7 Lamp test circuit
3 3 3 3
Lamp test 3
button 7 Interference suppression
(L-) (L+)
4 4 4 4
X6 X5
4 7 Limiting voltage peaks
7 Limiting DC coils
X8 X7
7 Diode gates
(L-) (L+) 2 elements 7 Rectifier circuits.
X6 X5 3SB34 00-2A
The diode element contains two 1N 4007 diodes. The element
X8 X7 can be snapped onto the holder as required.
X1 X1 X1 X1 Notes on using the lampholders with separate lamp test
function
3SB34 00-1C
For connecting inductive loads in parallel (e.g. contactors),
overvoltage damping is necessary.
The 3SB34 00–1H element is not suitable for operation with a
9
parallel load.
X2 X2 X2 X2
N
NSD0_00132d
Example for lamp test circuit with 3SB34 00–2A element
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 9/21

3SB4 Complete Operating and Display Systems
Control panels
■ Overview
Delivery options Fieldbus systems
The control panels can be obtained directly from our partner: For the AS-Interface and PROFIBUS DP fieldbus systems and
further bus systems, standardized solid-state units are available
Dyna Systems GmbH that can be used to link each individually designed control panel
88161 Linderberg into the required bus environment without the need for costly
http://www.dynasystems.de programming work.
All the necessary equipment and services are available here This function is available for both membrane keyboards,
from a single source: short-stroke keys and LEDs of the 3SB4 series, and for
7 Advice during conception and configuration
conventional 3SB3 commanding and signaling devices.
7 Design suggestions Examples for implementation
7 Development and supply of hardware by selection of suitable The following are available:
equipment 7 Control panels with membrane keyboard
7 Development and supply of layouts for the printed-circuit
7 Control panels with 3SB3 commanding and signaling devices
boards
7 Control panels with membrane keyboard and 3SB3
7 Development and supply of the necessary software
commanding and signaling devices.
(function blocks, GSD files) for interfacing to the PLC
7 Preparation of necessary manufacturing and testing
equipment
7 Manufacturing
7 Delivery with documentation
(software included in delivery)
7 Customer service.
Design options
Front plates
7 Any size and shape
7 Different materials, e.g. bare or anodized aluminum,
sheet-steel, plastic; also film-coated
7 Various colors.
Equipment
7 Conventional 3SB2 and 3SB3 commanding and signaling
devices, round or square version
7 Indication and visualization components, e.g. multi-digit Control panel with 3SB3 commanding and signaling devices
7-segment displays and LED text displays
7 Membrane keyboards with and without embossing, with metal
spring washers or short-stroke keys, with point illumination or
fully-illuminated keypads
7 Integration of other flush-mounted devices, e.g. measuring
instruments, potentiometer operating mechanisms.
Inscriptions
7 Printed on the front plate, anodized
7 Direct on the operating surface of the pushbuttons or using
insert labels or name plates
7 Using foils: printed, with push-in strips.
Connections
On request, all versions can be supplied ready to connect:
7 With interfaces for connection to an AS-interface,
PROFIBUS DP and other fieldbus systems
7 Conventional with screw terminals or with solder
connections for assembly on printed-circuit boards.
Enclosures
9
On request, all versions are available in enclosures
9/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006

3SB4, 3SF4 LED Indicators
Conventional 3SB4 LEDs,
3SF4 AS-Interface LEDs
■ Overview
Delivery options
The numeric and alphanumeric LED indicators can be obtained
directly from our partner:
microSYST Systemelectronic GmbH
92637 Weiden
Design

LV 1t 2006 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LV 1t 2006 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Information LV 1 T • 2006

Low-Voltage Controls and ·

Industrial Communication IK PI Industrial Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 PROFINET · ·

Automation & Drives CA 01 All Automation and Drives products,

A&D Mall All Automation and Drives products,

Registered trademarks Technical Assistance

All product designations may be registered trademarks Tel.: +49 (0)9 11 8 95 - 59 00

The products contained in this

The products and sys-

manufactured using a Monitoring and

Siemens LV 1 · 2006 1/1

Connecting with ALPHA

SIRIUS Safety Integrated

Distributing with SIVACON

3RB2 solid-state overload relays

3WL air circuit-breakers

6 Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters

3RA71 load feeders with safety integrated

7 Monitoring and Control Devices

3SE2, 3SE3, 3SF3 position switches Switch ES Power

3SE6 magnetically operated switches

9 Commanding and Signaling Devices

3SB2, 3SB3 pushbuttons and indicator lights

Siemens contacts · Online services · Customer support

1/4 Totally Integrated Automation –

1/6 Totally Integrated Power –

1/8 Low-Voltage Controls and

1/10 SIRIUS Industrial Controls

1/14 Low-Voltage Power Distribu-

We would like to welcome you to Automation and Drives

and our comprehensive range of products, systems,

solutions and services for production and

process automation and building technology

With Totally Integrated Automation and Totally

Integrated Power, we deliver solution platforms based

on standards that offer you a considerable savings

Discover the world of our technology now. If you need

more detailed information, please contact one of your

regional Siemens partners.

They will be glad to assist you.

1/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/3

We would like to welcome you to Automation and Drives

and our comprehensive range of products, systems,

solutions and services for production and

process automation and building technology

With Totally Integrated Automation and Totally

Integrated Power, we deliver solution platforms based

on standards that offer you a considerable savings

Discover the world of our technology now. If you need

more detailed information, please contact one of your

regional Siemens partners.

They will be glad to assist you.

1/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/3

Production Material Plant Product Specification

SIMATIC NET SINAUT Telecontrol SIMATIC

SIMATIC SIMATIC SINUMERIK SIMOTION

Industrial SIMATIC SIMATIC PCS 7

1/4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/5

Production Material Plant Product Specification

SIMATIC NET SINAUT Telecontrol SIMATIC

SIMATIC SIMATIC SINUMERIK SIMOTION

Industrial SIMATIC SIMATIC PCS 7

1/4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 Siemens LV 1 T · 2006 1/5